Chandogya Upanishad

The Chandogya Upanishad comprises the last eight chapters of a ten chapter Chandogya Brahmana text of Sama Veda. It is the longest of the Upanishads, describing ritual sacrifices. It contains (6.8.7) the maha vakya considered the essence of Sama Veda:- tat tvam asi, "you are That (Brahman)". It narrates the famous story of Satyakama Jabala, a boy son of a maidservant, who was recognized as brahmana due to the sense of truthfulness he had demonstrated. Within the text we also find many explanations on Vedic symbolism, especially in regard to the fire sacrifice and the mantras in relation to the life energy in the human body and in the senses, and in relation to the Sun. The text illustrates meditation on sound and prana and their identity with the Sun, that is svara and pratyasvara ("coming and going", i.e. cyclic) and states that the realization of the Pranava Omkara, its subtle manifestation, awards immortality. The text offers the conversation between Svetaketu and his father Uddalaka Aruni, rich with teachings and practical examples to understand the nature of Brahman- Atman. It teaches than only brahmacharya ("behaving as Brahman") enables one to realize Brahman, and that the difference between Devas and Asuras is that Asuras identify with the material body and consider it the true self. The text has eight Prapathakas (प्रपाठक, lectures, chapters), each with varying number of Khandas (खण्ड, volume). Each Khanda has varying number of verses. The first chapter includes 13 volumes each with varying number of verses, the second chapter has 24 volumes, the third chapter contains 19 volumes, the fourth is composed of 17 volumes, the fifth has 24, the sixth chapter has 16 volumes, the seventh includes 26 volumes, and the eight chapter is last with 15 volumes. The volumes are a motley collection of stories and themes. This edition uses the translation of the Upanishad and Shankaracharya's Commentary translated by Swami Lokeswarananda [Swami Lokeswarananda’s weekly discourses on Chandogya-upanishad - Shankara Bhashya].

Learn more »

If you are new to Hindu Philosophy, then you should read the classification of Sacred Texts of Hinduism FIRST! Read HERE!

Shanti Mantra

छान्दोग्योपनिषत्

॥ अथ छान्दोग्योपनिषत् ॥

ॐ आप्यायन्तु ममाङ्गानि वाक्प्राणश्च्क्षुः

श्रोत्रमथो बलमिन्द्रियाणि च सर्वाणि ।

सर्वं ब्रह्मौपनिषदं माहं ब्रह्म निराकुर्यां मा मा ब्रह्म

निराकरोदनिकारणमस्त्वनिकारणं मेऽस्तु ।

तदात्मनि निरते य उपनिषत्सु धर्मास्ते

मयि सन्तु ते मयि सन्तु ॥

॥ ॐ शान्तिः शान्तिः शान्तिः ॥

chāndogyopaniṣat

.. atha chāndogyopaniṣat ..

oṃ āpyāyantu mamāṅgāni vākprāṇaśckṣuḥ

śrotramatho balamindriyāṇi ca sarvāṇi .

sarvaṃ brahmaupaniṣadaṃ māhaṃ brahma nirākuryāṃ mā mā brahma

nirākarodanikāraṇamastvanikāraṇaṃ me'stu .

tadātmani nirate ya upaniṣatsu dharmāste

mayi santu te mayi santu ..

.. oṃ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ ..


Sloka : 1.1.1

॥ प्रथमोऽध्यायः ॥

ओमित्येतदक्षरमुद्गीथमुपासीत ।

ओमिति ह्युद्गायति तस्योपव्याख्यानम् ॥ १.१.१॥

.. prathamo'dhyāyaḥ ..

omityetadakṣaramudgīthamupāsīta .

omiti hyudgāyati tasyopavyākhyānam .. 1.1.1..



1. Om is the closest word to Brahman. Recite this Om as if you are worshipping Brahman. [That is, treat this Om as the symbol of Brahman and concentrate on the idea of their oneness.] How you recite this Om is being explained.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Om iti, this Om [is closest to Brahman]; etat akṣaram udgītham upāsīta, recite this syllable as part of your upāsanā [ritual]; hi om iti udgāyati, how you recite this Om; tasya upavyākhyānam, is being explained. Commentary:-Om is as good as Brahman. To begin with, it is a symbol of Brahman. But it is not just a symbol; it is Brahman itself. The Upaniṣad says to recite Om as if you are worshipping Brahman. This recitation is called udgītha, and it is loud recitation. You recite Om aloud, but you do it with the feeling that you are worshipping Brahman. This worship then eventually purifies the mind. The importance of Om is being explained in the following verses.

Translation By Max Müller

1. LET a man meditate on the syllable [1] Om, called the udgîtha; for the udgîtha (a portion of the Sâma-veda) is sung, beginning with Om. The full account, however, of Om is this:--

Footnote:

1. Akshara means both syllable and the imperishable, i.e. Brahman.


Sloka : 1.1.2

एषां भूतानां पृथिवी रसः पृथिव्या अपो रसः ।

अपामोषधयो रस ओषधीनां पुरुषो रसः

पुरुषस्य वाग्रसो वाच ऋग्रस ऋचः साम रसः

साम्न उद्गीथो रसः ॥ १.१.२॥

eṣāṃ bhūtānāṃ pṛthivī rasaḥ pṛthivyā apo rasaḥ .

apāmoṣadhayo rasa oṣadhīnāṃ puruṣo rasaḥ

puruṣasya vāgraso vāca ṛgrasa ṛcaḥ sāma rasaḥ

sāmna udgītho rasaḥ .. 1.1.2..



2. The earth is the essence of all things, living or non-living; water is the essence of the earth; plants are the essence of water; human beings are the essence of plants; speech is the essence of human beings; the Ṛg Veda is the essence of speech; the Sāma Veda is the essence of the Ṛg Veda; and the udhītha is the essence of the Sāma Veda.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Eṣām bhūtānām, of these beings; pṛthivī rasaḥ, the earth is the essence; pṛthivyāḥ, of the earth; āpaḥ, water; rasaḥ, is the essence; apām oṣadhayaḥ rasaḥ, plants are the essence of water; oṣadhīnām puruṣaḥ rasaḥ, human beings are the essence of plants; puruṣasya vāk rasaḥ, speech is the essence of human beings; vācaḥ ṛg rasaḥ, the Ṛg Veda is the essence of speech; ṛcaḥ sāma rasaḥ, the Sāma Veda is the essence of the Ṛg Veda; sāmnaḥ udgīthaḥ rasaḥ, the part known as udgītha is the essence of the Sāma Veda. Commentary:-There are both living and non-living things on the earth. What sustains them? Obviously the earth. They all come out of the earth, are sustained by the earth, and finally dissolve into the earth. But what sustains the earth? Water. The earth is a mixture of water and earth, and there can be no earth without water. Plants are said to be the essence of water, for they grow from water. Similarly, human beings are the essence of plants, because the human body is the outcome of the food eaten by human beings. Speech is the essence of human beings, for it is the best part of them. The best speech is the Ṛg Veda, and the essence of the Ṛg Veda is the Sāma Veda. Finally, udgītha—that is, Om—is the essence of the Sāma Veda.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The essence [1] of all beings is the earth, the essence of the earth is water, the essence of water the plants, the essence of plants man, the essence of man speech, the essence of speech the Rig-veda, the essence of the Rig-veda the Sâma-veda [2], the essence of the Sâma-veda the udgîtha (which is Om).

Footnote:

1. Essence, rasa, is explained in different ways, as origin, support, end, cause, and effect. Rasa means originally the sap of trees. That sap may be conceived either as the essence extracted from the tree, or as what gives vigour and life to a tree. In the former case it might be transferred to the conception of effect, in the latter to that of cause. In our sentence it has sometimes the one, sometimes the other meaning. Earth is the support of all beings, water pervades the earth, plants arise from water, man lives by plants, speech is the best part of man, the Rig-veda the best part of speech, the Sâma-veda the best extract from the Rik, udgîtha, or the syllable Om, the crown of the Sâma-veda. 2. Because most of the hymns of the Sâma-veda are taken from the Rig-veda.


Sloka : 1.1.3

स एष रसानाꣳरसतमः परमः परार्ध्योऽष्टमो

यदुद्गीथः ॥ १.१.३॥

sa eṣa rasānāgͫrasatamaḥ paramaḥ parārdhyo'ṣṭamo

yadudgīthaḥ .. 1.1.3..



3. This udgītha [Om] is the best of all essences. It is the best of all that exists. It is the eighth, and it has the highest status.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, that; eṣaḥ, this; rasānām, of all the essences; rasatamaḥ, the best essence; paramaḥ, the best; parārdhyaḥ, ranking the highest; aṣṭamaḥ, the eighth [in the order of earth, water, plants, human beings; speech, the Ṛg Veda, the Sāma Veda, and udgītha]; yāt, that; udgīthaḥ, udgītha [Om]. Commentary:-The best of all essences is the udgītha, which is Om. It is the highest and best because it is the same as Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

3. That udgîtha (Om) is the best of all essences, the highest, deserving the highest place [1], the eighth.

Footnote:

1. Parârdhya is here derived from para, highest, and ardha, place. The eighth means the eighth or East in the series of essences.


Sloka : 1.1.4

कतमा कतमर्क्कतमत्कतमत्साम कतमः कतम उद्गीथ

इति विमृष्टं भवति ॥ १.१.४॥

katamā katamarkkatamatkatamatsāma katamaḥ katama udgītha

iti vimṛṣṭaṃ bhavati .. 1.1.4..



4. Which are the Ṛks? Which are the Sāmas? Which are the udgīthas? This is the question.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Katamā, which; katamā ṛk, which are the Ṛks; katamat katamat sāma, which are the Sāmas; katamaḥ katamaḥ udgīthaḥ, which are the udgīthas; iti vimṛṣṭam bhavati, this is the question. Commentary:-It has been stated that speech is the essence of the Ṛg Veda. The question now arises:- Which ones are the Ṛk, which ones are the Sāma, and which ones are the udgītha? The word katama, ‘which,’ is repeated to emphasize the importance of the question. But why is the word ‘which’ being used here? ‘Which’ is used when you have to pinpoint one thing out of many. The Ṛg Veda is taken as a single whole, so how is the use of ‘which’ justified here? The answer is that here ‘which’ refers to individual Ṛk mantras, and not to the whole body of the Ṛg Veda.

Translation By Max Müller

4. What then is the Rik? What is the Sâman? What is the udgîtha? 'This is the question.


Sloka : 1.1.5

वागेवर्क्प्राणः सामोमित्येतदक्षरमुद्गीथः ।

तद्वा एतन्मिथुनं यद्वाक्च प्राणश्चर्क्च साम च ॥ १.१.५॥

vāgevarkprāṇaḥ sāmomityetadakṣaramudgīthaḥ .

tadvā etanmithunaṃ yadvākca prāṇaścarkca sāma ca .. 1.1.5..



5. [In answer to the foregoing question:-] Speech is the same as Ṛk; prāṇa [life] is the same as Sāma; and Om is nothing but udgītha [Brahman] itself. They are pairs:- speech and life, Ṛk and Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vāk eva ṛk, speech is Ṛk [being the cause of the Ṛk]; prāṇaḥ sāma, prāṇa [breath, or the life force] is Sāma [for you can sing the Sāma if your prāṇa is strong]; om iti etat akṣaram udgīthaḥ, the syllable ‘Om’ is the udgītha [for you recite it out of love for the Sāma]; tat etat vai mithunam, it is like a couple; yat vāk ca prāṇaḥ ca ṛk ca sāma ca, which are speech and prāṇa, Ṛk and Sāma. Commentary:-The word ‘couple,’ or ‘pair,’ is being used to suggest a relationship of cause and effect. Cause and effect are, in fact, one and the same. Speech is the cause, According to this Upaniṣad, the evolution of the gross world is in this order:- earth, water, plants, human beings, speech, Ṛk, Sāma, and udgītha (Om). Udgītha is rasatamā, the essence of all essences, the cause of all causes. It occupies the eighth position—that is, it is the ultimate in the evolution of things. It is the Paramātman, the Self of all selves.

Translation By Max Müller

5. The Rik indeed is speech, Sâman is breath, the udgîtha is the syllable Om. Now speech and breath, or Rik and Sâman, form one couple.


Sloka : 1.1.6

तदेतन्मिथुनमोमित्येतस्मिन्नक्षरे सꣳसृज्यते

यदा वै मिथुनौ समागच्छत आपयतो वै

तावन्योन्यस्य कामम् ॥ १.१.६॥

tadetanmithunamomityetasminnakṣare sagͫsṛjyate

yadā vai mithunau samāgacchata āpayato vai

tāvanyonyasya kāmam .. 1.1.6..



6. This dual combination of speech and life merge into each other and become one in this syllable Om. It is like a male and a female meeting and satisfying each other’s desires.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, that; etat, this; mithunam, dual combination [i.e., speech and life]; om iti etasmin akṣare saṃsṛjyate, meet in this syllable Om; yadā vai, whenever; mithunau samāgacchataḥ, a couple [a male and a female] come together; tau, they; anyonyasya kāmam āpayataḥ vai, naturally satisfy each other’s desires. Commentary:-Those two, speech and life, merge into each other in Om. They attain their fulfilment in this way. Om thus stands for the fulfilment of all things.

Translation By Max Müller

6. And that couple is joined together in the syllable Om. When two people come together, they fulfil each other's desire.


Sloka : 1.1.7

आपयिता ह वै कामानां भवति य एतदेवं

विद्वानक्षरमुद्गीथमुपास्ते ॥ १.१.७॥

āpayitā ha vai kāmānāṃ bhavati ya etadevaṃ

vidvānakṣaramudgīthamupāste .. 1.1.7..



7. He who worships Om as the udgītha [Brahman], knowing it as the one who receives everything, himself [finally] receives everything he desires.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Āpayitā, he receives; ha vai kāmānām, all he desires; bhavati, this happens; yaḥ, he who; etat, this; evam, this way [as the one who receives everything]; vidvān, knows; akṣaram, Om; udgītham, as udgītha [Brahman]; upāste, worships. Commentary:-If you worship Om, you acquire the qualities of Om. If you worship Om as the one who receives everything, you also, like Om, receive everything you desire. The śruti says:- ‘You become whatever or whomever your object of worship is.’ (Maṇḍala Brāhmaṇa 20)

Translation By Max Müller

7. Thus he who knowing this, meditates on the syllable (Om), the udgîtha, becomes indeed a fulfiller of desires.


Sloka : 1.1.8

तद्वा एतदनुज्ञाक्षरं यद्धि किंचानुजानात्योमित्येव

तदाहैषो एव समृद्धिर्यदनुज्ञा समर्धयिता ह वै

कामानां भवति य एतदेवं विद्वानक्षरमुद्गीथमुपास्ते ॥ १.१.८॥

tadvā etadanujñākṣaraṃ yaddhi kiṃcānujānātyomityeva

tadāhaiṣo eva samṛddhiryadanujñā samardhayitā ha vai

kāmānāṃ bhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānakṣaramudgīthamupāste .. 1.1.8..



8. That akṣaram [Om] stands for assent. A person says Om whenever he wants to say yes. This Om is the key to progress. He who worships Om as the udgītha [Brahman], knowing it thus [as the fulfiller of all desires], has all his desires fulfilled.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, that; vai etat, this; anujñā akṣaram, syllable [Om] indicates assent; yat, when; hi kim ca anujānāti, assent is to be indicated; om iti, this Om; eva tadā āha, is then uttered; eṣā u eva, this; samṛddhiḥ, progress; yat, that; anujñā, assent; samardhayitā, makes it possible; ha vai kāmānām bhavati, one attains those desires; yaḥ, he who; etat, this; evam, this way; vidvān, having known; akṣaram udgītham upāste, worships the syllable Om as the udgītha [Brahman], Commentary:-The word Om means ‘yes.’ Once someone named Śākalya asked the sage Yājñavalkya, ‘How many gods and goddesses are there?’ Yājñavalkya replied, ‘Thirty-three.’ Then Śākalya indicated his agreement by saying ‘Om.’ When you say Om it is also an indication of your faith in yourself. It is proof of your strength and vigour, and proof also of your prosperity. Om is therefore a symbol of certain basic qualities. When you worship Om you acquire those qualities, and you begin to progress and also prosper.

Translation By Max Müller

8. That syllable is a syllable of permission, for whenever we permit anything, we say Om, yes. Now permission is gratification. He who knowing this meditates on the syllable (Om), the udgîtha, becomes indeed a gratifier of desires.


Sloka : 1.1.9

तेनेयं त्रयीविद्या वर्तते ओमित्याश्रावयत्योमिति

शꣳसत्योमित्युद्गायत्येतस्यैवाक्षरस्यापचित्यै महिम्ना

रसेन ॥ १.१.९॥

teneyaṃ trayīvidyā vartate omityāśrāvayatyomiti

śagͫsatyomityudgāyatyetasyaivākṣarasyāpacityai mahimnā

rasena .. 1.1.9..



9. With Om one begins the threefold Vedic ritual, and with Om one starts reciting the Vedas. With Om one starts singing the Vedic hymns, and again with Om one sings the udgān [from the Vedas, in praise of Om, or Brahman]. All this is a tribute to Om. Again, all this is possible by virtue of the essence derived from Om [in the form of wheat and other food].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tena, by this [Om]; iyam, this; trayī vidyā vartate, threefold Vedic ritual begins; om iti, with Om; āśrāvayati, the recitation begins; om iti śaṃsati, with Om begins the singing of the hymn; om iti udgāyati, with Om the udgān [the praise to Om] begins; etasya akṣarasya, to this akṣara [Brahman]; eva apacityai, to pay homage; mahimnā, for its greatness; rasena, with the essence [of Om], Commentary:-To create some interest in Om, it is being praised here. Om is indispensable even if you are performing a Vedic ritual. You begin reciting a Vedic verse with Om, singing a Vedic hymn with Om, and closing your final udgān with Om. In short, the whole procedure is dedicated to Om. Not only that, those who participate in this ritualistic worship derive their strength and vigour from Om, for the butter or barley syrup they drink as a stimulant is from Om. How? Om is the medium through which sacrifices are performed, and the effects of the sacrifices are carried to the sun. These then return to the earth as rain. From rain come life and food. Again, because of life and food, a person is able to perform sacrifices. Thus, it is the essence of Om that makes ritualistic worship, such as sacrifices, possible. Ritualistic worship is therefore a testimony to the greatness of Om. Om is both the cause and the effect.

Translation By Max Müller

9. By that syllable does the threefold knowledge (the sacrifice, more particularly the Soma-sacrifice, as founded on the three Vedas) proceed. When the Adhvaryu priest gives an order, he says Om. When the Hotri priest recites, he says Om. When the Udgâtri priest sings, he says Om, --all for the glory of that syllable. The threefold knowledge (the sacrifice) proceeds by the greatness of that syllable (the vital breaths), and by its essence (the oblations) [1].

Footnote:

1. These are allusions to sacrificial technicalities, all intended to show the importance of the syllable Om, partly as a mere word, used at the sacrifices, partly as the mysterious name of the Highest Self. As every priest at the Soma-sacrifices, in which three classes of priests are always engaged, has to begin his part of the ceremonial with Om, therefore the whole sacrifice is said to be dependent on the syllable Om, and to be for the glory of that syllable, as an emblem of the Highest Self, a knowledge of whom is the indirect result of all sacrifices. The greatness of the syllable Om is explained by the vital breaths of the priest, the sacrificer, and his wife; its essence by rice, corn, &c., which constitute the oblations. Why breath and food are due to the syllable Om is explained by the sacrifice, which is dependent on that syllable, ascending to the sun, the sun sending rain, rain producing food, and food producing breath and life.


Sloka : 1.1.10

तेनोभौ कुरुतो यश्चैतदेवं वेद यश्च न वेद ।

नाना तु विद्या चाविद्या च यदेव विद्यया करोति

श्रद्धयोपनिषदा तदेव वीर्यवत्तरं भवतीति

खल्वेतस्यैवाक्षरस्योपव्याख्यानं भवति ॥ १.१.१०॥

tenobhau kuruto yaścaitadevaṃ veda yaśca na veda .

nānā tu vidyā cāvidyā ca yadeva vidyayā karoti

śraddhayopaniṣadā tadeva vīryavattaraṃ bhavatīti

khalvetasyaivākṣarasyopavyākhyānaṃ bhavati .. 1.1.10..



10. He who knows about Om and he who does not know about it both work with strength they derive from Om. But knowledge and ignorance produce different results. Anything done with knowledge [about Om], with faith in the teachers and in the scriptures, and according to the principles of the Upaniṣads [or of yoga] is more fruitful. This certainly is the right tribute to Om.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ubhau, both [kinds of persons]; tena, by the power of that [Om]; kurutaḥ, work; yaḥ ca, whoever; evam, as such; veda, knows; etat, this [i.e., about Om]; yaḥ ca na veda, he who does not know; vidyā ca avidyā ca nānā tu, knowledge and ignorance are entirely different things; yat eva, anything; vidyayā karoti, one does with knowledge [about Om]; śraddhayā, with respect for one’s teachers and the scriptures; upaniṣadā, as taught by the Upaniṣads [i.e., according to yoga]; tat eva, that [work]; vīryavattaram bhavati,. is more powerful [i.e., more fruitful]; iti, this; khalu, certainly; etasya eva akṣarasya upavyākhyānam bhavati, is the right tribute to this Om. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section. Commentary:-Two kinds of people work:- one kind knowing what Om means and another kind knowing nothing about it. Both kinds of people, however, are able to work because of Om. What is the difference between the two? What special advantage does a person who knows about Om have? Someone may argue:- Suppose a person takes a medicine knowing what medicine he is taking and why he is taking it, and another person takes it without any knowledge of what he is taking and why he is taking it. Will the medicine produce different results in them? The answer is:- The analogy does not apply here. Knowledge is always an advantage, especially knowledge about Om. If you work because you are told to work, and if you work because you want to use the work as a stepping-stone to the attainment of Om—there is a vast difference between the two approaches. In the first instance, you are content with whatever the work produces; in the second, you are content only if it paves the way to your attainment of Om.

Translation By Max Müller

10. Now therefore it would seem to follow, that both he who knows this (the true meaning of the syllable Om), and he who does not, perform the same sacrifice [1]. But this is not so, for knowledge and ignorance are different. The sacrifice which a man performs with knowledge, faith, and the Upanishad [2] is more powerful. This is the full account of the syllable Om.

Footnote:

1. He who simply pronounces the syllable Om as part of his recitation at a sacrifice, and he who knows the hidden meaning of that syllable, both may perform the same sacrifice. But that performed by the latter is more powerful, because knowledge is better than ignorance. This is, as usual, explained by some comparisons. It is true that both he who knows the quality of the harîtakî and he who does not, are purged alike if they take it. But on the other hand, if a jeweller and a mere clod sell a precious stone, the knowledge of the former bears better fruit than the ignorance of the latter. 2. Upanishad is here explained by yoga, and yoga by devatâdivishayam upâsanam, meditation directed to certain deities, More likely, however, it refers to this very upanishad, i.e. to the udgîthavidyâ, the doctrine of the secret meaning of Om, as here explained.


Sloka : 1.2.1

॥ इति प्रथमः खण्डः ॥

देवासुरा ह वै यत्र संयेतिरे उभये प्राजापत्यास्तद्ध

देवा उद्गीथमाजह्रुरनेनैनानभिभविष्याम इति ॥ १.२.१॥

.. iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

devāsurā ha vai yatra saṃyetire ubhaye prājāpatyāstaddha

devā udgīthamājahruranenainānabhibhaviṣyāma iti .. 1.2.1..



1. The gods and goddesses and the demons are both children of Prajāpati, yet they fought among themselves. The gods and goddesses then adopted the path of the udgītha, thinking they would thereby be able to overcome the demons.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Devāsurāḥ. the gods and goddesses and the demons; ha vai yatra saṃyetire, fought among themselves; ubhaye, [though] both; prājāpatyāḥ, were Prajāpati’s children; tat, at that time; ha devāḥ, the gods and goddesses then; udgītham ājahruḥ, adopted the path of the udgītha; anena, by this; enān, them [the demons]; abhibhaviṣyāmah, will overcome; iti, thinking thus. Commentary:-The gods and goddesses are ‘bright’ by virtue of their self-control, while the demons are ‘dark’ because they have no control over themselves. Though they were offspring of the same Prajāpati, they often clashed with each other. The gods and goddesses represent virtue; the demons represent vice. This conflict between virtue and vice is eternal, but it is virtue that always prevails. Virtue is here said to be the udgītha—that is, reciting Om while performing sacrifices. The gods and goddesses choose the path prescribed by the scriptures, whereas the demons do just the opposite and defy the scriptures. No wonder then the demons lose. The udgītha is supreme because it is Om. It is the Paramātman, the Cosmic Self.

Translation By Max Müller

1. When the Devas and Asuras [1] struggled together, both of the race of Pragâpati, the Devas took the udgîtha [2] (Om), thinking they would vanquish the Asuras with it.

Footnote:

1. Devas and Asuras, gods and demons, are here explained by the commentator as the good and evil inclinations of man; Pragâpati as man in general. 2. Udgîtha stands, according to the commentator, for the sacrificial act to be performed by the Udgâtri, the Sâma-veda priest, with the udgîtha hymns; and as these sacrificial acts always form part of the Gyotishtoma &c., these great Soma-sacrifices are really intended. In the second place, however, the commentator takes udgîtha in the sense of Udgâtri, the performer of the udgîtha, which is or was by the Devas thought to be the breath in the nose. I have preferred to take udgîtha in the sense of Om, and all that is implied by it.


Sloka : 1.2.2

ते ह नासिक्यं प्राणमुद्गीथमुपासांचक्रिरे

तꣳ हासुराः पाप्मना विविधुस्तस्मात्तेनोभयं जिघ्रति

सुरभि च दुर्गन्धि च पाप्मना ह्येष विद्धः ॥ १.२.२॥

te ha nāsikyaṃ prāṇamudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire

tagͫ hāsurāḥ pāpmanā vividhustasmāttenobhayaṃ jighrati

surabhi ca durgandhi ca pāpmanā hyeṣa viddhaḥ .. 1.2.2..



2. The gods and goddesses worshipped the prāṇa presiding over the nostrils as udgītha. The demons, however, misused it. [To them it was only an organ of smelling.] That is why [because of this misuse] people smell both good and bad odours through the nostrils.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te, they [the gods and goddesses]; ha nāsikyam prāṇam udgītham upāsāñcakrire, worshipped as udgītha the prāṇa [life principle] presiding over the nostrils; asurāḥ ha, the asuras, however; tam pāpmanā vividhuḥ, pierced it with evil [i.e., misused it, as if it were meant only for sense pleasure such as enjoying fragrance]; hi, this is why; eṣaḥ, this [prāṇa presiding over the nostrils]; pāpmanā viddhaḥ, is tainted with evil; tasmāt, therefore; tena, by it [i.e., the nostrils]; jighrati, smells; surabhi ca, good odour; durgandhi ca, and also bad odour. Commentary:-Mark the contrast between the attitude of the gods and goddesses and of the demons. To the demons, the nostrils were only an organ for smelling. Being what they are, it is natural that they would think so. But to the gods and goddesses, the nostrils are the seat of prāṇa, the vital breath, and they worship prāṇa there. The nostrils are also holy to them for another reason:- they use the nostrils in reciting the udgītha to prāṇa. The demons know nothing about prāṇa or udgītha. To them, prāṇa is merely that which carries good and bad odours.

Translation By Max Müller

2. They meditated on the udgîtha [1] (Om) as the breath (scent) in the nose [2], but the Asuras pierced it (the breath) with evil. Therefore we smell by the breath in the nose both what is good-smelling and what is bad-smelling. For the breath was pierced by evil.

Footnote:

1. Udgîtha stands, according to the commentator, for the sacrificial act to be performed by the Udgâtri, the Sâma-veda priest, with the udgîtha hymns; and as these sacrificial acts always form part of the Gyotishtoma &c., these great Soma-sacrifices are really intended. In the second place, however, the commentator takes udgîtha in the sense of Udgâtri, the performer of the udgîtha, which is or was by the Devas thought to be the breath in the nose. I have preferred to take udgîtha in the sense of Om, and all that is implied by it. 2. They asked that breath should recite the udgîtha. Comm.


Sloka : 1.2.3

अथ ह वाचमुद्गीथमुपासांचक्रिरे ताꣳ हासुराः पाप्मना

विविधुस्तस्मात्तयोभयं वदति सत्यं चानृतं च

पाप्मना ह्येषा विद्धा ॥ १.२.३॥

atha ha vācamudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire tāgͫ hāsurāḥ pāpmanā

vividhustasmāttayobhayaṃ vadati satyaṃ cānṛtaṃ ca

pāpmanā hyeṣā viddhā .. 1.2.3..



3. Next the gods and goddesses worshipped speech as udgītha [i.e., they used speech in praise of Om]. The demons, however, pierced it with evil [i.e., misused it out of ignorance]. This is why people use the organ of speech to speak both truth and untruth. This happens beacuse speech was pierced with evil.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha, next; vācam, speech; udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped as udgītha; tām ha asurāḥ pāpmanā vividhuḥ, the asuras pierced it with evil [i.e., misused it]; tasmāt, that is why; tayā, by it [the organ of speech]; vadati, one speaks; ubhayam satyam ca anṛtam ca, both truth and untruth; pāpmanā hi eṣā viddhā, because this [speech] was pierced with evil [by the ignorant demons]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Then they meditated on the udgîtha (Om) as speech, but the Asuras pierced it with evil. Therefore we speak both truth and falsehood. For speech is pierced by evil.


Sloka : 1.2.4

अथ ह चक्षुरुद्गीथमुपासांचक्रिरे तद्धासुराः

पाप्मना विविधुस्तस्मात्तेनोभयं पश्यति दर्शनीयं

चादर्शनीयं च पाप्मना ह्येतद्विद्धम् ॥ १.२.४॥

atha ha cakṣurudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire taddhāsurāḥ

pāpmanā vividhustasmāttenobhayaṃ paśyati darśanīyaṃ

cādarśanīyaṃ ca pāpmanā hyetadviddham .. 1.2.4..



4. Next the gods and goddesses worshipped the eye as udgītha [as a praise to Om]. The demons, however, pierced it with evil [i.e., misused it out of ignorance]. This is why people see both good and bad things with the eyes. They see both because of ignorance.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha, next; cakṣuḥ udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped the eye as udgītha [in praise of Om]; asurāḥ ha, the demons, however; tat, that [eye]; pāpmanā vividhuḥ, pierced with evil [misused it from ignorance]; tasmāt, this is why; tena, by this [eye]; paśyati, one sees; ubhayam darśanīyam ca adarśanīyam ca, both good and bad sights; hi, because; etat, this [eye]; pāpmanā viddham, was pierced by evil. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Then they meditated on the udgîtha (Om) as the eye, but the Asuras pierced it with evil. Therefore we see both what is sightly and unsightly. For the eye is pierced by evil.


Sloka : 1.2.5

अथ ह श्रोत्रमुद्गीथमुपासांचक्रिरे तद्धासुराः

पाप्मना विविधुस्तस्मात्तेनोभयꣳ श‍ृणोति श्रवणीयं

चाश्रवणीयं च पाप्मना ह्येतद्विद्धम् ॥ १.२.५॥

atha ha śrotramudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire taddhāsurāḥ

pāpmanā vividhustasmāttenobhayagͫ śṛṇoti śravaṇīyaṃ

cāśravaṇīyaṃ ca pāpmanā hyetadviddham .. 1.2.5..



5. Next the gods and goddesses worshipped the faculty of hearing as udgītha [in order to praise Om]. The demons, however, pierced it with evil [i.e., misused it out of ignorance]. As a result, people hear both pleasant and unpleasant things with the ears. This happens because of ignorance.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha, next; śrotram udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped the faculty of hearing as their udgītha [praise to Om]; asurāḥ ha, the asuras, however; tat, that faculty; pāpmanā vividhaḥ, pierced with evil [misused from ignorance]; tasmāt, that is why; tena, by it [the organ of hearing]; ubhayam śṛṇoti śravaṇīyam ca aśravaṇīyam ca, one hears both pleasant and unpleasant things; hi, because; etat, this [faculty]; pāpmanā viddham, was pierced by evil [i.e., was misused by the ignorant], Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. Then they meditated on the udgîtha (Om) as the ear, but the Asuras pierced it with evil. Therefore we hear both what should be heard and what should not be heard. For the car is pierced by evil.


Sloka : 1.2.6

अथ ह मन उद्गीथमुपासांचक्रिरे तद्धासुराः

पाप्मना विविधुस्तस्मात्तेनोभयꣳसंकल्पते संकल्पनीयंच

चासंकल्पनीयं च पाप्मना ह्येतद्विद्धम् ॥ १.२.६॥

atha ha mana udgīthamupāsāṃcakrire taddhāsurāḥ

pāpmanā vividhustasmāttenobhayagͫsaṃkalpate saṃkalpanīyaṃca

cāsaṃkalpanīyaṃ ca pāpmanā hyetadviddham .. 1.2.6..



6. Next, the gods and goddesses worshipped the mind, because the mind makes it possible for them to chant the udgītha [the praise to Om]. But the demons even vitiated the mind. As a result, the mind has both good and bad thoughts. This happens because of ignorance.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha, next; manaḥ udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped the mind for its role in chanting the udgītha; asurāḥ ha, the asuras, however; tat, that [mind]; pāpmanā vividhuḥ, poisoned it with bad thoughts; tasmāt, for that reason; tena, in the mind; ubhayam saṅkalpanīyam ca asaṅkalpanīyam ca saṅkalpayate, one thinks both good and bad thoughts; pāpmanā hi etat viddham, because the mind is vitiated by evil [ignorance], Commentary:-Prāṇa is another name for Brahman. Prāṇa is pure, but when it is associated with the sense organs it is not pure. Similarly, Brahman as Brahman is pure, but with adjuncts it is not pure. It is not pure in the sense that it is subject to change. Here, these adjuncts are referred to as pāpma, impure or evil, because they are limitations imposed on Brahman. These limitations are not real, however, but only apparent. When the Upaniṣad speaks of the organs, it means the organs with their presiding deities. Both are described as pāpma. In these verses, some of the organs are mentioned, but it is to be understood that what is stated here about some organs applies to all the organs and their presiding deities.

Translation By Max Müller

6. Then they meditated on the udgîtha (Om) as the mind, but the Asuras pierced it with evil. Therefore we conceive both what should be conceived and what should not be conceived. For the mind is pierced by evil.


Sloka : 1.2.7

अथ ह य एवायं मुख्यः प्राणस्तमुद्गीथमुपासांचक्रिरे

तꣳहासुरा ऋत्वा विदध्वंसुर्यथाश्मानमाखणमृत्वा

विध्वꣳसेतैवम् ॥ १.२.७॥

atha ha ya evāyaṃ mukhyaḥ prāṇastamudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire

tagͫhāsurā ṛtvā vidadhvaṃsuryathāśmānamākhaṇamṛtvā

vidhvagͫsetaivam .. 1.2.7..



7. Next, the gods and goddesses worshipped the chief prāṇa as udgītha. As regards the demons, they all met their end in prāṇa, just as [chunks of earth] break into pieces when they hit an unbreakable stone.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha, next; yaḥ eva mukhyaḥ prāṇaḥ, the chief prāṇa [the vital force, inclusive of its five aspects—prāṇa, apāna, vyāna, udāna, and samāna]; tam udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped him as udgītha; yathā, just as; ākhaṇam, unbreakable; aśmānam, stone; ṛtvā, hit against; vidhvaṃseta, broken into pieces [and are destroyed]; [in the same way] asurāḥ ca, the demons also; tam ha ṛtvā vidadh vaṃsuḥ, hit against it [prāṇa] and were destroyed. Commentary:-The gods and goddesses worshipped pure prāṇa—that is, prāṇa without the organs—as udgītha. As before, the demons tried to hurt prāṇa, but they failed. In fact, they got lost in prāṇa. They met the same fate as chunks of earth thrown against granite. When the chunks hit the granite, they break into pieces and are destroyed. Similarly, it is beyond the power of the demons to do any harm to prāṇa.

Translation By Max Müller

7. Then comes this breath (of life) in the mouth [1]. They meditated on the udgîtha (Om) as that breath. When the Asuras came to it, they were scattered, as (a ball of earth) would be scattered when hitting a solid stone.

Footnote:

1. Mukhya prâna is used in two senses, the principal or vital breath, also called sreshtha, and the breath in the mouth, also called âsanya.


Sloka : 1.2.8

यथाश्मानमाखणमृत्वा विध्वꣳसत एवꣳ हैव

स विध्वꣳसते य एवंविदि पापं कामयते

यश्चैनमभिदासति स एषोऽश्माखणः ॥ १.२.८॥

yathāśmānamākhaṇamṛtvā vidhvagͫsata evagͫ haiva

sa vidhvagͫsate ya evaṃvidi pāpaṃ kāmayate

yaścainamabhidāsati sa eṣo'śmākhaṇaḥ .. 1.2.8..



8. Just as when chunks of earth are thrown against an unbreakable stone they are themselves reduced to dust, similarly, if anyone wishes ill or causes an injury to a person who knows prāṇa, he invites his own destruction thereby. The person who knows prāṇa is immune to injury like a piece of unbreakable stone.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Evam yathā, just as [chunks of earth]; ākhaṇam, unbreakable; aśmānam, stone; ṛtvā, having hit; vidhvaṃsate, are smashed; evam ha eva, in the same way; saḥ vidhvaṃsate, a person gets totally destroyed; yaḥ pāpam kāmayate, who wishes ill; evamvidi, of a person who knows thus [the true nature of prāṇa]; yaḥ ca enam abhidāsati, or who causes an injury to such a person; saḥ eṣaḥ, he [who knows] this [prāṇa]; aśmā ākhaṇaḥ, [is like] a stone that can never be broken. Commentary:-What is the difference between mukhya prāṇa (the chief prāṇa) and the prāṇa that is associated with our breathing, or smelling? Mukhya prāṇa is supreme prāṇa—that is, it is Brahman. It is pure, all-pervasive, and self-sufficient. But our breathing is associated with the organ of smelling and is not independent. It is also not pure. It has limitations and is susceptible to pāpma, impurities—that is, it is sometimes good and sometimes bad. Mukhya prāṇa, however, is always pure, always the same. One who knows the true nature of prāṇa is immune to injury. And anyone trying to hurt him will end up hurting himself.

Translation By Max Müller

8. Thus, as a ball of earth is scattered when hitting on a solid stone, will he be scattered who wishes evil to one who knows this, or who persecutes him; for he is a solid stone.


Sloka : 1.2.9

नैवैतेन सुरभि न दुर्गन्धि विजानात्यपहतपाप्मा ह्येष

तेन यदश्नाति यत्पिबति तेनेतरान्प्राणानवति एतमु

एवान्ततोऽवित्त्वोत्क्रमति व्याददात्येवान्तत इति ॥ १.२.९॥

naivaitena surabhi na durgandhi vijānātyapahatapāpmā hyeṣa

tena yadaśnāti yatpibati tenetarānprāṇānavati etamu

evāntato'vittvotkramati vyādadātyevāntata iti .. 1.2.9..



9. So far as the chief prāṇa is concerned, there is no good or bad odour for it. This is because it is pure [i.e., it is never touched by anything evil born of egotism]. If this prāṇa eats and drinks anything, it does so only to sustain the sense organs [such as the eyes, the ears, and so on]. When death occurs, the chief prāṇa does not eat or drink anything [and as a result, the sense organs collapse]. They seem to have left the body. [They still want to eat and drink, however, so that they may live, and] this is indicated by the fact that a person dies with the mouth open.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Etena eva, by this [chief prāṇa]; nā surabhi, no sweet odour; na durgandhi, no bad odour; vijānāti, is known; hi, because; eṣaḥ, this [prāṇa]; apahata-pāpmā, is pure [untouched by evil]; tena, by that [prāṇa]; yat aśnāti, whatever a person eats; yat pibati, whatever a person drinks; tena, by this [eating and drinking]; itarān prāṇān, the sense organs; avati, sustains; u antataḥ, at the time of death; etam, this [chief prāṇa]; avittvā eva, without receiving any food and drink; utkrāmati, goes out of the body; [this is why] antataḥ, at the time of death; vyādadāti eva, a person has the mouth open. Commentary:-For the chief prāṇa, there is no good or bad odour because it is pure. Egotism is the source of impurity, and the chief prāṇa is free from egotism. And being free from egotism, the chief prāṇa is selfless. People eat and drink because of the chief prāṇa. But the chief prāṇa does not eat or drink for itself. It enables But how do we know that the food and drink the chief prāṇa consumes goes to sustain the organs? When death occurs the chief prāṇa stops eating and drinking. As a result, the sense organs stop functioning, as if they have left the body. It is seen, however, that when a person dies his mouth is open. This is indicative of the desire of the chief prāṇa to eat and drink.

Translation By Max Müller

9. By it (the breath in the mouth) he distinguishes neither what is good nor what is bad-smelling, for that breath is free from evil. What we eat and drink with it supports the other vital breaths (i. e. the senses, such as smell, &c.) When at the time of death he [1] does not find that breath (in the mouth, through which he eats and drinks and lives), then he departs. He opens the mouth at the time of death (as if wishing to eat).

Footnote:

1. According to the commentator, the assemblage of the other vital breaths or senses is here meant. They depart when the breath of the mouth, sometimes called sarvambhari, all-supporting, does no longer, by eating and drinking, support them.


Sloka : 1.2.10

तꣳ हाङ्गिरा उद्गीथमुपासांचक्र एतमु एवाङ्गिरसं

मन्यन्तेऽङ्गानां यद्रसः ॥ १.२.१०॥

tagͫ hāṅgirā udgīthamupāsāṃcakra etamu evāṅgirasaṃ

manyante'ṅgānāṃ yadrasaḥ .. 1.2.10..



10. The sage Aṅgirā worshipped the chief prāṇa as udgītha [i.e., Brahman, to whom the udgītha is addressed]. The chief prāṇa is referred to as āṅgirasa, for it is the rasa [i.e., the essence, or support] of all the aṅgas [organs].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam, that [the chief prāṇa]; ha aṅgirāḥ, the sage Aṅgirā; udgītham, as udgītha [the Supreme]; upāsāñcakre, worshipped; etam, this [Supreme Being, the chief prāṇa]; u eva āṅgirasam, as Āṅgirasa; manyante, [people] regard; aṅgānām yat rasaḥ, for it is the essence [support] of all the aṅgas [the organs]. Commentary:-The word āṅgirasa is derived from aṅga + rasa. That is, āṅgirasa is the rasa (essence) of the aṅgas (organs). It is the support of the organs. It is the same as prāṇa. When the sage Aṅgirā worships prāṇa, he is worshipping himself.

Translation By Max Müller

10. Aṅgiras [1] meditated on the udgîtha (Om) as that breath, and people hold it to be Aṅgiras, i. e. the essence of the members (angânâm rasah);

Footnote:

1. The paragraphs from 10 to 14 are differently explained by Indian commentators. By treating the nominatives aṅgirâs, brihaspatis, and ayâsyas (here the printed text reads ayâsyam) as accusatives, or by admitting the omission of an iti after them, they connect paragraphs 9, 10, and 11 with paragra , and thus gain the meaning that Vaka Dâlbhya meditated on the breath in the mouth as Aṅgiras, Brihaspati, and Ayâsya, instead of those saints having themselves thus meditated; and that he, knowing the secret names and qualities of the breath, obtained, when acting as Udgâtri priest, the wishes of those for whom he sacrificed. Tena is difficult to explain, unless we take it in the sense of tenânusishtah, taught by him.


Sloka : 1.2.11

तेन तꣳ ह बृहस्पतिरुद्गीथमुपासांचक्र एतमु एव बृहस्पतिं

मन्यन्ते वाग्घि बृहती तस्या एष पतिः ॥ १.२.११ ॥

tena tagͫ ha bṛhaspatirudgīthamupāsāṃcakra etamu eva bṛhaspatiṃ

manyante vāgghi bṛhatī tasyā eṣa patiḥ .. 1.2.11 ..



11. This is why Bṛhaspati worshipped prāṇa as udgītha. Prāṇa is regarded as Bṛhaspati, for vāk [speech] is great [bṛhatī] and prāṇa is its lord [pati].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tena, for that reason; bṛhaspatiḥ, Bṛhaspati; ha tam, that [prāṇa]; udgītham upāsāñcakre, worshipped prāṇa as udgītha [as Brahman, to whom Om is sung]; etam u eva bṛhaspatim manyante, they regard this [prāṇa] as Bṛhaspati; hi, for; vāk, speech; bṛhatī, is powerful; tasyāḥ eṣaḥ patiḥ, prāṇa is its lord. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

11. Therefore Brihaspati meditated on udgîtha (Om) as that breath, and people hold it to be Brihaspati, for speech is brihatî, and he (that breath) is the lord (pati) of speech;


Sloka : 1.2.12

तेन तꣳ हायास्य उद्गीथमुपासांचक्र एतमु एवायास्यं

मन्यन्त आस्याद्यदयते ॥ १.२.१२॥

tena tagͫ hāyāsya udgīthamupāsāṃcakra etamu evāyāsyaṃ

manyanta āsyādyadayate .. 1.2.12..



12. This is why Āyāsya worshipped prāṇa as udgītha. They regarded this as Āyāsya for it is that which comes [ayate] out of the mouth [āsyāt].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tena, for that reason; tam, that [i.e., the chief prāṇa]; ha āyāsya, the sage Āyāsya [or, that which comes out of the mouth]; udgītham, as udgītha; upāsāñcakre, worshipped; etam u eva āyāsyam manyante, they regarded this as Āyāsya; yat āsyāt ayate, that which comes out of the mouth. Commentary:-Prāṇa is also Bṛhaspati because it is the lord of all speech. Āyāsya means ‘that which comes out of the mouth.’ It is prāṇa, but it is also the name of a sage. Aṅgirā, Bṛhaspati, and Āyāsya—these sages worshipped prāṇa as udgītha. They, in fact, worshipped themselves.

Translation By Max Müller

12. Therefore Ayâsya meditated on the udgîtha (Om) as that breath, and people hold it to be Ayâsya, because it comes (ayati) from the mouth (âsya);


Sloka : 1.2.13

तेन तꣳह बको दाल्भ्यो विदांचकार ।

स ह नैमिशीयानामुद्गाता बभूव स ह स्मैभ्यः

कामानागायति ॥ १.२.१३॥

tena tagͫha bako dālbhyo vidāṃcakāra .

sa ha naimiśīyānāmudgātā babhūva sa ha smaibhyaḥ

kāmānāgāyati .. 1.2.13..



13. The sage Baka, son of Dalbha, came to know prāṇa as it was. That is why the sages of Naimiṣa forest selected him as the singer of their udgītha. He, in his turn, fulfilled their wishes.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Dālbhyaḥ, the son of Dalbha; bakaḥ, the sage Baka; ha tam, that [prāṇa]; tena, with the qualities as stated; vidāñcakāra, came to know; saḥ, he [Baka]; ha naimiṣīyānām, of the sages of Naimiṣa forest; udgātā, the singer of the udgītha; babhūva, became; ha ebhyaḥ kāmān, according to the wishes [of the forest dwellers]; saḥ āgāyati sma, he sang [the udgītha]. Commentary:-Not only did Aṅgirā and other sages worship prāṇa, but Baka, son of Dalbha, also did the same. That is, he recognized the power of prāṇa. The sages of Naimiṣa forest were pleased with him, and appointed him to sing the udgītha for them. He thus sang the udgītha in praise of prāṇa and pleased the sages by his performance.

Translation By Max Müller

13. Therefore Vaka Dâlbhya knew it. He was the Udgâtri (singer) of the Naimishîya-sacrificers, and by singing he obtained for them their wishes.


Sloka : 1.2.14

आगाता ह वै कामानां भवति य एतदेवं

विद्वानक्षरमुद्गीथमुपास्त इत्यध्यात्मम् ॥ १.२.१४॥

āgātā ha vai kāmānāṃ bhavati ya etadevaṃ

vidvānakṣaramudgīthamupāsta ityadhyātmam .. 1.2.14..



14. If a person knows the real meaning of prāṇa and worships it as udgītha akṣara [i.e., as Akṣara Brahman] he himself becomes Akṣara Brahman. He then worships everyone he wants to worship [i.e., in singing for prāṇa he sings for all], and he attains all he desires. This is the attainment on the level of the body [adhyātma]. [The inner attainment is that he becomes one with prāṇa—that is, Akṣara Brahman.]





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ, he who; evam, as such; vidvān, knows;; etat, this [prāṇa]; udgītham akṣaram, as udgītha akṣara [akṣara means both ‘syllable’ and ‘the undecaying,’ which is a name of Brahman]; upāste, worships [or meditates on]; vai kāmānām āgātā ha bhavati, he thereby becomes the udgātā [singer] of all that he desires; iti adhyātmam, this is so far as the udgītha relating to the body is concerned. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ here ends the second section. Commentary:-Singing for prāṇa is the same as singing for all, for prāṇa is all. You may even achieve all you desire through it. This is so far as the individual is concerned. Praising Om has a threefold reward:- relating to the body (adhyātma), relating to animals (adhibhūta), and relating to the elements (adhidaiva).

Translation By Max Müller

14. He who knows this, and meditates on the syllable Om (the imperishable udgîtha) as the breath of life in the mouth, he obtains all wishes by singing. So much for the udgîtha (Om) as meditated on with reference to the body [1].

Footnote:

1. Adhyâtma means with reference to the body, not with reference to the self or the soul. Having explained the symbolical meaning of Om as applied to the body and its organs of sense, he now explains its symbolical meaning adhidaivatam, i.e. as applied to divine beings.


Sloka : 1.3.1

॥ इति द्वितीयः खण्डः ॥

अथाधिदैवतं य एवासौ तपति

तमुद्गीथमुपासीतोद्यन्वा एष प्रजाभ्य उद्गायति ।

उद्यꣳस्तमो भयमपहन्त्यपहन्ता ह वै भयस्य

तमसो भवति य एवं वेद ॥ १.३.१॥

.. iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

athādhidaivataṃ ya evāsau tapati

tamudgīthamupāsītodyanvā eṣa prajābhya udgāyati .

udyagͫstamo bhayamapahantyapahantā ha vai bhayasya

tamaso bhavati ya evaṃ veda .. 1.3.1..



1. Next, how you worship from the standpoint of the forces of nature:- There is the sun rising to give us heat. Worship it as udgītha. The sun rises to pray, as it were, for the welfare of all living beings. As it rises, it dispels the fear of darkness. One who knows this overcomes the fear of ignorance about birth and death.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; adhidaivatam, relating to the elements [such as rain, lightning, and other forces of nature]; yaḥ eva asau, that [i.e., the sun] over there which; tapati, gives us heat; tam, to that; udgītham upāsīta, worship as udgītha; udyan, as it rises; vai eṣaḥ, this [sun]; prajābhyaḥ, for all living beings; udgāyati, [as if] it prays for their well-being; udyan, as [the sun] rises; tamaḥ bhayam apahanti, it removes the fear of darkness; yaḥ, one who; evam veda, knows this; vai bhayasya, the fear [of birth and death]; tamasaḥ, ignorance; apahantā bhavati, overcomes. Commentary:-There are many ways of using udgītha as worship. This verse gives an example of how you use it in worshipping the forces of nature (adhidaivata). There is the sun above giving us heat. The Upaniṣad says to worship udgītha as the sun. But if udgītha is Om, how can it stand for the sun? The sun helps the plants, such as paddy, to grow. Without the sun, life on this planet would be impossible. It is as if the sun sings the udgītha for us to sustain us. This is why the sun is referred to as the udgītha. As udgītha, the sun also dispels our fear of darkness. One who knows this is no longer afraid of birth and death. That is, he knows he is immortal.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Now follows the meditation on the udgîtha with reference to the gods. Let a man meditate on the udgîtha (Om) as he who sends warmth (the sun in the sky). When the sun rises it sings as Udgâtri for the sake of all creatures. When it rises it destroys the fear of darkness. He who knows this, is able to destroy the fear of darkness (ignorance).


Sloka : 1.3.2

समान उ एवायं चासौ चोष्णोऽयमुष्णोऽसौ

स्वर इतीममाचक्षते स्वर इति प्रत्यास्वर इत्यमुं

तस्माद्वा एतमिमममुं चोद्गीथमुपासीत ॥ १.३.२॥

samāna u evāyaṃ cāsau coṣṇo'yamuṣṇo'sau

svara itīmamācakṣate svara iti pratyāsvara ityamuṃ

tasmādvā etamimamamuṃ codgīthamupāsīta .. 1.3.2..



2. This prāṇa and that sun are alike. Prāṇa is warm, and the sun is also warm. Prāṇa is called svara [when it is ‘going out’ at the time of death]. The sun is also described as svara [when it ‘sets’] and pratyāsvara [when it ‘comes back’]. Therefore, worship both prāṇa and the sun as udgītha.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ayam, this [prāṇa]; ca asau, and that [sun]; samānaḥ eva, are equivalent; u ayam, this [prāṇa]; uṣṇaḥ, is warm; ca asau, and that [sun]; uṣṇaḥ, is warm; imam, this [prāṇa]; svaraḥ iti ācakṣate, [sages] call it svara [‘outgoing,’ at the time of death]; amum, that [sun]; svaraḥ iti, has set; pratyāsvaraḥ iti, [and] has returned [this is what people say]; tasmāt vai, for that reason; etam, this [going out]; imam, this [prāṇa]; ca amum, and that [sun]; udgītham upāsīta, worship as udgītha. Commentary:-Prāṇa and āditya (the sun) are similar. Both are warm. Sages call both svara, which means ‘going out.’ The difference is that while prāṇa goes out (at the time of death), the sun goes out (when it sets) and also returns (pratyāsvara, when it rises). Thus, prāṇa and āditya are similar in name and quality. It is therefore appropriate to worship both as udgītha. Both are Om.

Translation By Max Müller

2. This (the breath in the mouth) and that (the sun) are the same. This is hot and that is hot. This they call svara (sound), and that they call pratyâsvara [1] (reflected sound). Therefore let a man meditate on the udgîtha (Om) as this and that (as breath and as sun).

Footnote:

1. As applied to breath, svara is explained by the commentator in the sense of moving, going out; pratyâsvara, as applied to the sun, is explained as returning every day. More likely, however, svara as applied to breath means sound, Om itself being called svara (Kh. Up. I, 4, 3), and prasvâra in the Rig-veda-prâtisâkhya, 882. As applied to the sun, svara and pratyâsvara were probably taken in the sense of light and reflected light.


Sloka : 1.3.3

अथ खलु व्यानमेवोद्गीथमुपासीत यद्वै प्राणिति

स प्राणो यदपानिति सोऽपानः ।

अथ यः प्राणापानयोः संधिः स व्यानो यो व्यानः

सा वाक् ।

तस्मादप्राणन्ननपानन्वाचमभिव्याहरति ॥ १.३.३॥

atha khalu vyānamevodgīthamupāsīta yadvai prāṇiti

sa prāṇo yadapāniti so'pānaḥ .

atha yaḥ prāṇāpānayoḥ saṃdhiḥ sa vyāno yo vyānaḥ

sā vāk .

tasmādaprāṇannanapānanvācamabhivyāharati .. 1.3.3..



3. Worship vyāna [the breath held between prāṇa and apāna that enables you to speak] as udgītha. Prāṇa is the breath drawn in and apāna is the breath drawn out. Vyāna is the breath held between prāṇa and apāna. This vyāna is also called vāk [speech], for in speaking a person has to hold the breath.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, indirectly; khalu vyānam eva udgītham upāsīta, one should worship vyāna [the bridge between prāṇa (breathing in) and apāna (breathing out)] as udgītha; yat vai prāṇiti, that which is breathed in; saḥ prāṇaḥ, that is prāṇa; yat apāniti, that which is breathed out; saḥ apānaḥ, that is apāna; atha yat prāṇa-apānayoḥ sandhiḥ, then the bridge between prāṇa and apāna; saḥ vyānaḥ, that is vyāna; yaḥ vyānaḥ sā vāk, that which is vyāna is speech; tasmāt, therefore; aprāṇan, without inhaling; anapānan, without exhaling; vācam abhivyāharati, a person speaks. Commentary:-Here vyāna is being presented for worship as udgītha, for vyāna is only a form of prāṇa. What is vyāna? Vyāna is the bridge between prāṇa and apāna, between breathing in and breathing out. Vyāna is the state in which you hold your breath. Vyāna is also called vāk, speech, for when you speak you have to hold your breath. Śaṅkara says prāṇa is breathing out and apāna is breathing in. According to Monier-Williams, it is the other way around—prāṇa is breathing in and apāna is breathing out. Macdowell is of the same opinion. Both meanings are correct, depending on the context in which the word is used.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Then let a man meditate on the udgîtha (Om) as vyâna indeed. If we breathe up, that is prâna, the up-breathing. If we breathe down, that is apâna, the down-breathing. The combination of prâna and apâna is vyâna, back-breathing or holding in of the breath. This vyâna is speech. Therefore when we utter speech, we neither breathe up nor down.


Sloka : 1.3.4

या वाक्सर्क्तस्मादप्राणन्ननपानन्नृचमभिव्याहरति

यर्क्तत्साम तस्मादप्राणन्ननपानन्साम गायति

यत्साम स उद्गीथस्तस्मादप्राणन्ननपानन्नुद्गायति ॥ १.३.४॥

yā vāksarktasmādaprāṇannanapānannṛcamabhivyāharati

yarktatsāma tasmādaprāṇannanapānansāma gāyati

yatsāma sa udgīthastasmādaprāṇannanapānannudgāyati .. 1.3.4..



4. Whatever is vāk [speech] is also the Ṛk [part of the Ṛg Veda]. This is why a person stops breathing in and breathing out when reciting the Ṛk mantras. Whatever is the Ṛk is also the Sāma. This is why one recites the Sāma without breathing in or breathing out. That which is the Sāma is also the udgītha. This is why when one sings the udgītha one stops both breathing in and breathing out.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yā vāk sā ṛk, that which is speech is Ṛk; tasmāt, because [they are one]; aprāṇan anapānan, breathing in and out are suspended; ṛcam, the Ṛg Veda; abhivyāharati, one recites; yā ṛk tat sāma, that which is the Ṛk is also the Sāma; tasmāt, because [they are one and the same]; aprāṇan anapānan sāma gāyati, one suspends breathing in and out when singing the Sāma; yat sāma saḥ udgīthaḥ, that which is the Sāma is the udgītha; tasmāt aprāṇan anapānan udgāyati, because one sings the udgītha by suspending both breathing in and breathing out. Commentary:-The Ṛk is a collection of words, and the Sāma is based on the Ṛk. Again, the Sāma and the udgītha are the same. To recite any of these, or even to speak, you have to resort to vyāna—that is, you must hold your breath.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Speech is Rik, and therefore when a man utters a Rik verse he neither breathes up nor down. Rik is Sâman, and therefore when a man utters a Sâman verse he neither breathes up nor down. Sâman is udgîtha, and therefore when a man sings (the udgîtha, Om) he neither breathes up nor down.


Sloka : 1.3.5

अतो यान्यन्यानि वीर्यवन्ति कर्माणि यथाग्नेर्मन्थनमाजेः

सरणं दृढस्य धनुष आयमनमप्राणन्ननपानꣳस्तानि

करोत्येतस्य हेतोर्व्यानमेवोद्गीथमुपासीत ॥ १.३.५॥

ato yānyanyāni vīryavanti karmāṇi yathāgnermanthanamājeḥ

saraṇaṃ dṛḍhasya dhanuṣa āyamanamaprāṇannanapānagͫstāni

karotyetasya hetorvyānamevodgīthamupāsīta .. 1.3.5..



5. This is why, while doing feats demanding great strength—such as producing a fire by rubbing one stick of wood against another, running up to a target, or bending a stiff bow—a person does not breathe in or breathe out. For this reason, one should worship this holding of breath, called vyāna, as udgītha [Om].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ataḥ, this is why; yāni, those; anyāni, other; vīryavanti, demanding great strength; karmāṇi, feats; yathā, such as; agneḥ manthanam, igniting a fire by rubbing one piece of wood against another; ājeh, a target; saraṇam, running up to; dṛḍhasya dhanuṣaḥ āyamanam, bending a stiff bow; aprāṇan anapānan, without breathing in or breathing out; tāni, all those [feats]; karoti, one accomplishes; etasya hetoḥ, for this reason; vyānam eva, vyāna; udgītham, as udgītha [Om]; upāsīta, one should worship. Commentary:-Whenever you do something that demands much application of strength, you must resort to vyāna. Take, for instance, deeds such as producing fire by grinding one piece of wood against another, or running up to a target, or bending a stiff bow. In doing each of these feats, you have to hold your breath. Even when you speak, you hold your breath. This distinguishes vyāna from other forms of breathing. Vyāna, therefore, deserves special worship, for vyāna is in a class by itself. It gives you strength.

Translation By Max Müller

5. And other works also which require strength, such as the production of fire by rubbing, running a race, stringing a strong bow, are performed without breathing up or down. Therefore let a man meditate on the udgîtha (Om) as vyâna.


Sloka : 1.3.6

अथ खलूद्गीथाक्षराण्युपासीतोद्गीथ इति

प्राण एवोत्प्राणेन ह्युत्तिष्ठति वाग्गीर्वाचो ह

गिर इत्याचक्षतेऽन्नं थमन्ने हीदꣳसर्वꣳस्थितम् ॥ १.३.६॥

atha khalūdgīthākṣarāṇyupāsītodgītha iti

prāṇa evotprāṇena hyuttiṣṭhati vāggīrvāco ha

gira ityācakṣate'nnaṃ thamanne hīdagͫsarvagͫsthitam .. 1.3.6..



6. Now, one should worship the syllables ut, gī and tha separately in the word udgītha. Prāṇa is represented by ut, for prāṇa is responsible for the





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, now; khalu udgīthākṣarāṇi ‘ut-gī-tha’ iti upāsīta, worship the syllables ut, gī, and tha separately in the word udgītha; prāṇaḥ eva ut, prāṇa is this ut; prāṇena hi, because by prāṇa; uttiṣṭhati, arises [everything]; vāk gīḥ, vāk [speech] is gī; vācaḥ ha giraḥ iti ācakṣate, because words are called ‘gira’; annam tham, food is tha; hi idam sarvam, for all this [i.e., this world]; anne sthitam, is supported by food. Commentary:-The word udgītha is comprised of the syllables ut, gī, and tha. It is worthwhile meditating on these syllables, for each one is significant. For instance, ut, in brief, is uttham, rising. It stands for prāṇa, because out of prāṇa everything comes into being. From prāṇa everything ‘rises’; otherwise it goes down. The syllable gī stands for speech, because scholars prefer to use the word gira to mean speech. Similarly, the syllable tha stands for food, for tha means ‘that which supports.’ It is well known that food supports everything. Thus the syllables ut, gī, and tha stand for the whole word udgītha. It is like thinking of the name ‘Ram Misra.’ As you think of the name, you also think of the person who bears that name. Try to think of each syllable in the word udgītha as above.

Translation By Max Müller

6. Let a man meditate on the syllables of the udgîtha, i. e. of the word udgîtha. Ut is breath (prâna), for by means of breath a man rises (uttishthati). Gî is speech, for speeches are called girah. Tha is food, for by means of food all subsists (sthita).


Sloka : 1.3.7

द्यौरेवोदन्तरिक्षं गीः पृथिवी थमादित्य

एवोद्वायुर्गीरग्निस्थꣳ सामवेद एवोद्यजुर्वेदो

गीरृग्वेदस्थं दुग्धेऽस्मै वाग्दोहं यो वाचो

दोहोऽन्नवानन्नादो भवति य एतान्येवं

विद्वानुद्गीथाक्षराण्युपास्त उद्गीथ इति ॥ १.३.७॥

dyaurevodantarikṣaṃ gīḥ pṛthivī thamāditya

evodvāyurgīragnisthagͫ sāmaveda evodyajurvedo

gīrṛgvedasthaṃ dugdhe'smai vāgdohaṃ yo vāco

doho'nnavānannādo bhavati ya etānyevaṃ

vidvānudgīthākṣarāṇyupāsta udgītha iti .. 1.3.7..



7. Heaven is ut, the space between heaven and the earth is gī, and the earth is tha. The sun is ut, air is gī, and fire is tha. The Sāma Veda is ut, the Yajur Veda is gī, and the Ṛg Veda is tha. The scriptures reveal their meaning to the seeker if he knows all this. One who worships ut-gī-tha as above gets plenty of food and also eats plenty of food. [Such a person also gets enlightenment.]





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Dyauḥ, heaven; eva ut, is ut; antarikṣam gīḥ, the space between heaven and earth is gī; pṛthivī tham, the earth is tha; ādityaḥ eva ut, the sun is ut; vāyuḥ gīḥ, air is gī; agniḥ tham, fire is tha; sāma vedaḥ eva ut, the Sāma Veda is ut; yajur vedaḥ gīḥ, the Yajur Veda is gī; ṛg vedaḥ tham, the Ṛg Veda is tha; vāk, the Ṛg Veda and other scriptures; asmai, to him [the spiritual seeker]; doham, the goal [he is seeking]; dugdhe, gives him of itself; yaḥ vācaḥ dohaḥ, the goal is the knowledge of the scriptures; yaḥ evam vidvān, the seeker who knows this; etāni udgīthākṣarāṇi ut + gī + tha iti upāste, [and] worships these syllables of udgītha; annavān, he has plenty of food; annādaḥ bhavati, [and] he enjoys eating that food [i.e., he becomes illumined]. Commentary:-Heaven is said to be ut because it is high above. Space is gī because it envelops the whole world. And the earth is tha because it is the support of all beings. Āditya, the sun, is ut because it is far above everything. Vāyu, air, is gī because it envelops everything. Agni, fire, is tha because it is the common element in every sacrificial rite. The Sāma Veda is said to be ut because it is known even in heaven. The Yajur Veda is gī because the butter used in performing the Yajur Vedic rites is eaten by the gods and goddesses. The Ṛg Veda is tha because it supports the Sāma Veda. What do you gain by worshipping ut-gī-tha? You gradually understand the meaning of the Ṛg Veda and other Vedas. You also have plenty to eat, and you become like ‘a blazing fire’—that is, you become an illumined person.

Translation By Max Müller

7. Ut is heaven, gî the sky, tha the earth. Ut is the sun, gî the air, tha the fire. Ut is the Sâma-veda,, gî the Yagur-veda, tha the Rig-veda [1]. Speech yields the milk, which is the milk of speech itself [2], to him who thus knowing meditates on those syllables of the name of udgîtha, he becomes rich in food and able to eat food.

Footnote:

1. The commentator supplies explanations to all these fanciful etymologies. The heaven is ut, because it is high; the sky is gî, because it gives out all the worlds (giranât); earth is tha, because it is the place (sthâna) of living beings. The sun is ut, because it is high. The wind is gî, because it gives out fire, &c. (giranât); fire is tha, because it is the place (sthâna) of the sacrifice. The Sâma-veda is ut, because it is praised as svarga; the Yagur-veda is gî, because the gods take the oblation offered with a Yagus; the Rig-veda is tha, because the Sâma verses stand in it. All this is very childish, and worse than childish, but it is interesting as a phase of human folly which is not restricted to the Brahmans of India. I take the following passage from an interesting article, 'On the Ogam Beithluisnin and on Scythian Letters,' by Dr. Charles Graves, Bishop of Limerick. 'An Irish antiquary,' he says, 'writing several hundred years ago, proposes to give an account of the origin of the names of the notes in the musical scale. '"It is asked here, according to Saint Augustine, What is chanting, or why is it so called? Answer. From this word cantalena; and cantalena is the same thing as lenis cantus, i. e. a soft, sweet chant to God, and to the Virgin Mary, and to all the Saints. And the reason why the word puinec (puncta) is so called is because the points (or musical notes) ut, re, mi, fa, sol, la, hurt the devil and puncture him. And it is thus that these points are to be understood:- viz. When Moses the son of Amram, with his people in their Exodus was crossing the Red Sea, and Pharaoh and his host were following him, this was the chant which Moses had to protect him from Pharaoh and his host--these six points in praise of the Lord:-- '"The first point of these, i. e. ut:- and ut in the Greek is the same as liberat in the Latin; and that is the same as saer in the Gaelic; i.e. O God, said Moses, deliver us from the harm of the devil. "'The second point of them, i.e. re:- and re is the same as saer; i. e. O God, deliver us from everything hurtful and malignant. '"The third point, i.e. mi:- and mi in the Greek is the same as militum in the Latin; and that is the same as ridere (a knight) in the Gaelic; i. e. O God, said Moses, deliver us from those knights who are pursuing us. '"The fourth point, i.e. fa:- and fa in the Greek is the same as famulus in the Latin; and that is the same as mug (slave) in the Gaelic; i. e. O God, said Moses, deliver us from those slaves who are pursuing us. '"The fifth point, i.e. sol:- and sol is the same as grian (sun); and that is the same as righteousness; because righteousness and Christ are not different; i. e. O Christ, said Moses, deliver us. '"The sixth point, i. e. la, is the same as lav; and that is the same as indail (wash); i.e. O God, said Moses, wash away our sins from us. '"And on the singing of that laud Pharaoh and his host were drowned. '"Understand, O man, that in whatever place this laud, i. e. this chant, is sung, the devil is bound by it, and his power is extirpated thence, and the power of God is called in." 'We have been taught that the names of the first six notes in the gamut were suggested by the initial syllables of the first six hemistichs in one of the stanzas of a hymn to St. John:- Ut queant laxis
Resonare fibris
Mira gestorum
Famuli tuorum,
Solve polluti
Labii reatum,
       Sancte Ioannes.' 2. The milk of speech consists in rewards to be obtained by the Rig-veda, &c. Or we may translate, Speech yields its milk to him who is able to milk speech.


Sloka : 1.3.8

अथ खल्वाशीःसमृद्धिरुपसरणानीत्युपासीत

येन साम्ना स्तोष्यन्स्यात्तत्सामोपधावेत् ॥ १.३.८॥

atha khalvāśīḥsamṛddhirupasaraṇānītyupāsīta

yena sāmnā stoṣyansyāttatsāmopadhāvet .. 1.3.8..



8. Now here are instructions about how one attains one’s desired objectives:- Keep meditating on the objectives. Also, pray for the objectives by singing the appropriate Sāma, and remember that the Sāma is the source of the things you are asking for.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha khalu, now; āśīḥ samṛddhiḥ, instructions about how desired objectives can be obtained; upasaraṇāni, the things desired; iti, in this way; upāsīta, one should meditate upon; yena sāmnā, by that Sāma; stoṣyan syāt, one sings; tat sāma upadhāvet, one should meditate upon that Sāma. Commentary:-You sing a particular Sāma for a particular thing you wish to get. Sing it always, and remember that it is the source of what you are wishing for.

Translation By Max Müller

8. Next follows the fulfilment of prayers. Let a man thus meditate on the Upasaranas, i. e. the objects which have to be approached by meditation:- Let him (the Udgâtri) quickly reflect on the Sâman with which he is going to praise;


Sloka : 1.3.9

यस्यामृचि तामृचं यदार्षेयं तमृषिं यां

देवतामभिष्टोष्यन्स्यात्तां देवतामुपधावेत् ॥ १.३.९॥

yasyāmṛci tāmṛcaṃ yadārṣeyaṃ tamṛṣiṃ yāṃ

devatāmabhiṣṭoṣyansyāttāṃ devatāmupadhāvet .. 1.3.9..



9. The Ṛk from which this Sāma is derived, the sage who conceived of this Sāma prayer, and the deity to whom the prayer is addressed—meditate on all of them.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tām ṛcam, that Ṛk; yasyām ṛci, on which Ṛk [the Sāma is based]; tam ṛṣim yat ārṣeyam, that sage who conceived of it; yām devatām abhiṣṭoṣyan syāt, the deity to whom the prayer is addressed; tām devatām, that deity; upadhāvet, one should meditate on. Commentary:-When you recite a Sāma mantra, you should remember the Ṛk mantra from which it is derived, the sage

Translation By Max Müller

9. Let him quickly reflect on the Rik in which that Sâman occurs; on the Rishi (poet) by whom it was seen or composed; on the Devatâ (object) which he is going to praise;


Sloka : 1.3.10

येन च्छन्दसा स्तोष्यन्स्यात्तच्छन्द उपधावेद्येन

स्तोमेन स्तोष्यमाणः स्यात्तꣳस्तोममुपधावेत् ॥ १.३.१०॥

yena cchandasā stoṣyansyāttacchanda upadhāvedyena

stomena stoṣyamāṇaḥ syāttagͫstomamupadhāvet .. 1.3.10..



10. One may use the Gāyatrī or some other hymn when praying, but one should meditate on it. Again, one may use a number of Sāma mantras while praying, but one must meditate on them [along with the deities to whom they are addressed].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yena chandasā, by the Gāyatrī or whatever other hymn; stoṣyan syāt, one is going to pray; tat chandaḥ upadhāvet, one should meditate on that hymn; yena stomena stoṣyamāṇaḥ syāt, the group of Sāmas by which a person is going to pray; tam stomam upadhāvet, one should meditate on those Sāmas [along with the deities to whom they are addressed]. Commentary:-Whether you use the Gāyatrī or some other hymn while praying, you should not forget to meditate on that hymn. In fact, whatever mantras you use, you should meditate on them as well as on the deities to whom they are directed.

Translation By Max Müller

10. On the metre in which he is going to praise; on the tune with which he is going to sing for himself;


Sloka : 1.3.11

यां दिशमभिष्टोष्यन्स्यात्तां दिशमुपधावेत् ॥ १.३.११॥

yāṃ diśamabhiṣṭoṣyansyāttāṃ diśamupadhāvet .. 1.3.11..



11. No matter what direction one may face while praying, one should meditate on that direction [along with the presiding deities of that direction].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yām diśam abhiṣṭoṣyan syāt, whatever direction a person may face while praying; tām diśam upadhāvet, one should worship that direction [and also the deities presiding over that direction]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

11. On the quarter of the world which he is going to praise. Lastly, having approached himself (his name, family, &c.) by meditation, let him sing the hymn of praise, reflecting on his desire, and avoiding all mistakes in pronunciation, &c.


Sloka : 1.3.12

आत्मानमन्तत उपसृत्य स्तुवीत कामं

ध्यायन्नप्रमत्तोऽभ्याशो ह यदस्मै स कामः समृध्येत

यत्कामः स्तुवीतेति यत्कामः स्तुवीतेति ॥ १.३.१२॥

ātmānamantata upasṛtya stuvīta kāmaṃ

dhyāyannapramatto'bhyāśo ha yadasmai sa kāmaḥ samṛdhyeta

yatkāmaḥ stuvīteti yatkāmaḥ stuvīteti .. 1.3.12..



12. Finally, as a person ends his prayer, he should ask for whatever he desires, making sure, however, that his pronunciation is correct. He should also think of himself [including his name, lineage, and caste]. Then whatever desire he has while praying is promptly and surely fulfilled.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Antataḥ, as one ends one’s prayer; kāmam dhyāyan apramattaḥ, one should think of whatever one desires, making sure that the pronunciation of words is correct; ātmānam, oneself; upasṛtya, thinking of [one’s name, lineage, and caste]; stuvīta, praise; yat kāmaḥ, whatever desire one has; stuvīta, while praying; kāmaḥ, that desire; abhyāsaḥ, promptly; ha, surely; asmai, to the person concerned; samṛdhyeta, prosperity goes. [The repetition is for emphasis.] Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section. Commentary:-Here the udgātā (the singer) is told how he should pray. He should first repeat the Sāma songs, and then he should pray for whatever he desires. His prayer should be correct in every detail. And while praying, he should mention his own name, his lineage, and his caste. If these conditions are fulfilled, his prayer will be promptly granted. That this will happen is indicated by the repetition of the statement.

Translation By Max Müller

12. Quickly [1] will the desire be then fulfilled to him, for the sake of which he may have offered his hymn of praise, yea, for which he may have offered his hymn of praise [2].

Footnote:

1. Abhyâso ha yat, lit. depend on it that it will be fulfilled, but always explained by quickly. See Kh. Up. II, 1, 4; III, 19, 4; V, 10, 7. Frequently, but wrongly, written with a dental s. 2. The repetition of the last sentence is always an indication that a chapter is finished. This old division into chapters is of great importance for a proper study of the Upanishads.


Sloka : 1.4.1

॥ इति तृतीयः खण्डः ॥

ओमित्येतदक्षरमुद्गीथमुपासीतोमिति ह्युद्गायति

तस्योपव्याख्यानम् ॥ १.४.१॥

.. iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

omityetadakṣaramudgīthamupāsītomiti hyudgāyati

tasyopavyākhyānam .. 1.4.1..



1. Om is the closest word to Brahman. Recite this Om as if you are worshipping Brahman. [That is, treat this Om as the symbol of Brahman and concentrate on the idea of their oneness.] How you recite this Om is being explained.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Om iti, this Om [is closest to Brahman]; etat akṣaram udgītham upāsīta, recite this syllable as part of your upāsanā [ritual]; hi om iti udgāyati, how you recite this Om; tasya upavyākhyānam, is being explained. Commentary:-This akśara is Brahman, and Om is that Brahman. Akṣara, Brahman, and Om are interchangeable words. As Brahman is abhaya, without fear, and amṛta, immortal, so Om and akṣara are also without fear and immortal.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Let a man meditate on the syllable Om, for the udgîtha is sung beginning with Om. And this is the full account of the syllable Om--


Sloka : 1.4.2

देवा वै मृत्योर्बिभ्यतस्त्रयीं विद्यां प्राविशꣳस्ते

छन्दोभिरच्छादयन्यदेभिरच्छादयꣳस्तच्छन्दसां

छन्दस्त्वम् ॥ १.४.२॥

devā vai mṛtyorbibhyatastrayīṃ vidyāṃ prāviśagͫste

chandobhiracchādayanyadebhiracchādayagͫstacchandasāṃ

chandastvam .. 1.4.2..



2. The gods and goddesses were afraid of death, so they took refuge in the rites and rituals of the three Vedas. They covered themselves, as it were, with mantras. Because they covered themselves with mantras, the mantras came to be known as chandas.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Devāḥ, the gods and goddesses; vai mṛtyoḥ bibhyataḥ, are afraid of death; trayīm vidyām prāviśan, they took refuge in the three Vedas [i.e., they decided to perform Vedic rites and rituals in order to escape death]; te, they; chandobhiḥ acchādayan, covered themselves with the mantras; yat, because; ebhiḥ, Commentary:-In ancient times the gods and goddesses decided to perform the sacrifices mentioned in the three Vedas to save themselves from death. It was as if they took ‘cover’ behind the Vedic mantras. It is from this word ‘cover’ (acchādan) that the mantras have come to be known as chandas.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The Devas, being afraid of death, entered upon (the performance of the sacrifice prescribed in) the threefold knowledge (the three Vedas). They covered themselves with the metrical hymns. Because they covered (khad) themselves with the hymns, therefore the hymns are called khandas.


Sloka : 1.4.3

तानु तत्र मृत्युर्यथा मत्स्यमुदके परिपश्येदेवं

पर्यपश्यदृचि साम्नि यजुषि ।

ते नु विदित्वोर्ध्वा ऋचः साम्नो यजुषः स्वरमेव

प्राविशन् ॥ १.४.३॥

tānu tatra mṛtyuryathā matsyamudake paripaśyedevaṃ

paryapaśyadṛci sāmni yajuṣi .

te nu viditvordhvā ṛcaḥ sāmno yajuṣaḥ svarameva

prāviśan .. 1.4.3..



3. Just as a person can see a fish swimming in shallow water [i.e., the fish is exposed to the risk of being caught], in the same way, Death could see the gods and goddesses when they depended on Vedic rituals [i.e., they were in easy reach of Death]. Realizing this, the gods and goddesses switched over to the recitation of Om.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yathā, just as; udake, in shallow water; matsyam, a fish [swimming]; paripaśyet, a person can see; evam, in the same way; tatra, in those [Vedic rites and rituals]; ṛci sāmni yajuṣi, in the Ṛg, Sāma, and Yajur Vedas; tān, those gods and goddesses; mṛtyuḥ, Death; paryapaśyat, saw [i.e., they could not escape death through Vedic rituals]; te, they [the gods and goddesses]; nu viditvā, having realized [that they were still susceptible to death]; ṛcaḥ sāmnaḥ yajuṣaḥ ūrdhvāḥ, turned away from Ṛk, Sāma, and Yajur rituals; svaram eva prāviśan, took to [reciting] Om. Commentary:-Fish in shallow water are never safe, for people can easily catch them. Similarly, those who depend on karma (i.e., Vedic rituals) are always liable to being caught by death. When people realize this, they stop performing the rites and rituals and concentrate on reciting Om. They know that Om is a symbol of immortality and fearlessness.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Then, as a fisherman might observe a fish in the water, Death observed the Devas in the Rik, Yagus, and Sâman-(sacrifices). And the Devas seeing this, rose from the Rik, Yagus, and Sâman-sacrifices, and entered the Svara [1], i.e. the Om (they meditated on the Om).

Footnote:

1. Cf. I, 3, 2.


Sloka : 1.4.4

यदा वा ऋचमाप्नोत्योमित्येवातिस्वरत्येवꣳसामैवं

यजुरेष उ स्वरो यदेतदक्षरमेतदमृतमभयं तत्प्रविश्य

देवा अमृता अभया अभवन् ॥ १.४.४॥

yadā vā ṛcamāpnotyomityevātisvaratyevagͫsāmaivaṃ

yajureṣa u svaro yadetadakṣarametadamṛtamabhayaṃ tatpraviśya

devā amṛtā abhayā abhavan .. 1.4.4..



4. When people recite the Ṛk, they start with Om, reciting it with great enthusiasm. They do the same when they recite the Sāma and Yajus. This Om is akṣara and also svara. It is a symbol of immortality and fearlessness. When the gods and goddesses took refuge in it, they attained immortality and fearlessness.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yadā vai, whenever; ṛcam āpnoti, a person recites Ṛk mantras; om iti eva atisvarati, that person recites Om with great enthusiasm; evam sāma evam yajuḥ, so also the Yajus and Sāma mantras; eṣaḥ u svaraḥ yat etat akṣaram, this akṣara [Om] is svara; etat amṛtam abhayam, this is immortal and fearless; tat praviśya, having taken shelter in it; devāḥ amṛtāḥ abhayāḥ abhavan, the gods and goddesses became immortal and fearless. Commentary:-Akṣara, Om, and svara are the same. When people recite Vedic mantras, they always start with the akṣara Om. By taking refuge in Om, one attains immortality and fearlessness.

Translation By Max Müller

4. When a man has mastered the Rig-veda, he says quite loud Om; the same, when he has mastered the Sâman and the Yagus. This Svara is the imperishable (syllable), the immortal, free from fear. Because the Devas entered it, therefore they became immortal, and free from fear.


Sloka : 1.4.5

स य एतदेवं विद्वानक्षरं प्रणौत्येतदेवाक्षरꣳ

स्वरममृतमभयं प्रविशति तत्प्रविश्य यदमृता

देवास्तदमृतो भवति ॥ १.४.५॥

sa ya etadevaṃ vidvānakṣaraṃ praṇautyetadevākṣaragͫ

svaramamṛtamabhayaṃ praviśati tatpraviśya yadamṛtā

devāstadamṛto bhavati .. 1.4.5..



5. Even now anyone who knows this Om and worships it thus can attain the fearlessness and immortality of Om, which is akṣara, or svara. By becoming one with Om, a person can attain immortality, just as the gods and goddesses did.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, one who; evam etat akṣaram vidvān praṇauti, knows this akṣara and respects it as such; etat eva svaram, that known as svara; amṛtam abhayam akṣaram praviśati, becomes one with the immortal and fearless akṣara [Om]; tat, that [akṣara]; praviśya, having become one with [akṣara]; devāḥ yat amṛtāḥ, by which the gods and goddesses became immortal; tat amṛtaḥ bhavati, that person also becomes immortal. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section. Commentary:-By worshipping svara (Om), the gods and goddesses entered into svara, which means they became one with it. And by becoming one with it, they became fearless and immortal. The same thing may happen to anyone who follows in their footsteps—that is, anyone who worships svara. The transformation is the same as in the case of the gods and goddesses—no more, no less.

Translation By Max Müller

5. He who knowing this loudly pronounces (pranauti) [1]- that syllable, enters the same (imperishable) syllable, the Svara, the immortal, free from fear, and having entered it, becomes immortal, as the Devas are immortal.

Footnote:

1. Pranauti, he lauds, i. e. he meditates on. Comm.


Sloka : 1.5.1

॥ इति चतुर्थः खण्डः ॥

अथ खलु य उद्गीथः स प्रणवो यः प्रणवः स उद्गीथ

इत्यसौ वा आदित्य उद्गीथ एष प्रणव ओमिति

ह्येष स्वरन्नेति ॥ १.५.१॥

.. iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha khalu ya udgīthaḥ sa praṇavo yaḥ praṇavaḥ sa udgītha

ityasau vā āditya udgītha eṣa praṇava omiti

hyeṣa svaranneti .. 1.5.1..



1. That which is udgītha is also praṇava [Om]. So also, that which is praṇava is udgītha. That sun is udgītha, and it is also praṇava, because it seems to say Om [or, has the word Om in its mind] when it appears.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yaḥ khalu udgīthaḥ, that which is udgītha; saḥ praṇavaḥ, is praṇava [Om]; yaḥ praṇavaḥ saḥ udgīthaḥ, that which is praṇava is also udgītha; asau vai ādityaḥ udgīthaḥ, that sun is udgītha; eṣaḥ praṇavaḥ, it is also praṇava; hi, for; eṣaḥ, the sun; om iti svaran eti, appears with the word Om in its mind. Commentary:-This is how udgītha is to be worshipped:- According to many scholars of the Ṛg Veda, udgītha is the same as praṇava (Om). What is praṇava to them is udgītha according to the Chāndogya. Similarly, according to many scholars, the sun is udgītha and also praṇava. How can the sun be referred to as udgītha? When the sun appears, it looks as if it is saying Om, or it has Om in its thoughts. According to Śaṅkara, the word svaran may also mean ‘uttering.’

Translation By Max Müller

1. The udgîtha is the pranava [1], the pranava is the udgîtha. And as the udgîtha is the sun [2], So is the pranava, for he (the sun) goes sounding Om.

Footnote:

1. Pranava is the name used chiefly by the followers of the Rig-veda, udgîtha the name used by the followers of the Sâma-veda. Both words are intended for the syllable Om. 2. Cf. Kh. Up. I, 3, 1.


Sloka : 1.5.2

एतमु एवाहमभ्यगासिषं तस्मान्मम त्वमेकोऽसीति

ह कौषीतकिः पुत्रमुवाच रश्मीꣳस्त्वं पर्यावर्तयाद्बहवो

वै ते भविष्यन्तीत्यधिदैवतम् ॥ १.५.२॥

etamu evāhamabhyagāsiṣaṃ tasmānmama tvameko'sīti

ha kauṣītakiḥ putramuvāca raśmīgͫstvaṃ paryāvartayādbahavo

vai te bhaviṣyantītyadhidaivatam .. 1.5.2..



2. The sage Kauṣītaki said to his son:- ‘I worshipped the sun and its rays as one. That is why I had only one son, which is you. If you worship the sun and its rays separately, you will then have many children.’ This is the worship of the forces of nature.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Kauṣītakiḥ putram uvāca, the sage Kauṣītaki said to his son; etam, this [sun with its rays]; eva, as one; aham abhyagāsiṣam, I greeted [welcomed]; tasmāt, because [of my worshipping it as one]; tvam mama ekaḥ asi, you are my only son; tvam raśmīn paryāvartayāt, if you worship the sun and its rays separately; te bahavaḥ vai bhaviṣyanti, you will have many children; iti adhidaivatam, this is the worship of the forces of nature. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'Him I sang praises to, therefore art thou my only one,' thus said Kaushîtaki to his son. 'Do thou revolve his rays, then thou wilt have many sons.' So much in reference to the Devas.


Sloka : 1.5.3

अथाध्यात्मं य एवायं मुख्यः

प्राणस्तमुद्गीथमुपासीतोमिति ह्येष स्वरन्नेति ॥ १.५.३॥

athādhyātmaṃ ya evāyaṃ mukhyaḥ

prāṇastamudgīthamupāsītomiti hyeṣa svaranneti .. 1.5.3..



3. Next, this is how worship concerning the physical body is performed:- One should worship the chief prāṇa as udgītha, for it seems to say Om as it makes the organs [of perception and action] function.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, now; adhyātmam, concerning one’s own body; yaḥ eva ayam mukhyaḥ prāṇaḥ, that which is the chief prāṇa [which divides itself into five functions:- prāṇa, apāna, vyāna, udāna, and samāna]; tam udgītham upāsīta, one should worship as udgītha; hi, for; eṣaḥ, this [prāṇa]; om iti svaran, uttering Om; eti, activates [all the organs—of speech, vision, etc.]. Commentary:-As far as the physical body is concerned, the Upaniṣad says to treat the chief prāna as Om. The chief prāṇa is responsible for what the organs of perception (the eyes, ears, nose, etc.) and the organs of action (the hands, feet, speech, etc.) do. It makes them active. Just as some people say Om before they do or say anything, so prāṇa seems to say Om as it makes the organs function. Not that it really says Om, but because the organs cannot act without its support, it is suggested that the chief prāṇa has to give the signal (that is, by saying Om) and then only do the organs start operating.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Now with reference to the body. Let a man meditate on the udgîtha as the breath (in the mouth), for he goes sounding Om [1].

Footnote:

1. The breath in the mouth, or the chief breath, says Om, i. e. gives permission to the five senses to act, just as the sun, by saying Om, gives permission to all living beings to move about.


Sloka : 1.5.4

एतमु एवाहमभ्यगासिषं तस्मान्मम त्वमेकोऽसीति ह

कौषीतकिः पुत्रमुवाच प्राणाꣳस्त्वं

भूमानमभिगायताद्बहवो वै मे भविष्यन्तीति ॥ १.५.४॥

etamu evāhamabhyagāsiṣaṃ tasmānmama tvameko'sīti ha

kauṣītakiḥ putramuvāca prāṇāgͫstvaṃ

bhūmānamabhigāyatādbahavo vai me bhaviṣyantīti .. 1.5.4..



4. The sage Kauṣītaki said to his son:- ‘I worshipped prāṇa as just one entity, and therefore I had only one son. I suggest that you worship prāṇa as one with manifold qualities and with many forms while thinking, “May my children be many”’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Kauṣītakiḥ ha putram uvāca, Kauṣītaki said to his son; aham u etam eva abhyagāsiṣam, I worshipped this [prāṇa] as one; tasmāt, that is why; tvam mama ekaḥ, you are my only son; tvam prāṇān bhūmānam abhigāyatāt, you should worship prāṇa as many [i.e., with manifold qualities and forms]; me bahavaḥ vai bhaviṣyanti iti, thinking, ‘May my children be many.’ Commentary:-The sun and its rays are not separate, but if a person wants more than one child, he or she will have to worship the sun and its rays as separate entities. The same applies to the worship of the chief prāṇa and its subsidiaries (vyāna, udāna, etc.).

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Him I sang praises to, therefore art thou my only son,' thus said Kaushîtaki to his son. 'Do thou therefore sing praises to the breath as manifold, if thou wishest to have many sons.'


Sloka : 1.5.5

अथ खलु य उद्गीथः स प्रणवो यः प्रणवः

स उद्गीथ इति होतृषदनाद्धैवापि

दुरुद्गीथमनुसमाहरतीत्यनुसमाहरतीति ॥। १.५.५॥

atha khalu ya udgīthaḥ sa praṇavo yaḥ praṇavaḥ

sa udgītha iti hotṛṣadanāddhaivāpi

durudgīthamanusamāharatītyanusamāharatīti ... 1.5.5..



5. For certain, that which is udgītha is praṇava, and that which is praṇava is also udgītha. Should the person performing a sacrifice make mistakes in pronunciation, that can be rectified [when he has the knowledge that udgītha and praṇava are the same].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha khalu, for certain; yaḥ udgīthaḥ saḥ praṇavaḥ, that which is udgītha is praṇava; yaḥ praṇava saḥ udgīthaḥ, that which is praṇava is also udgītha; hotṛṣadanāt api eva ha durudgītam, it is not unlikely that the person performing a sacrifice will err in pronunciation; anusamāharati iti, that can be rectified [the statement is repeated to emphasize its importance]. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section. Commentary:-It has already been stressed that praṇava and udgītha should be regarded as one. Where the consciousness of this sameness prevails, any mistakes made while reciting the mantras may easily be rectified. The statement is intended to illustrate how it helps to have the knowledge of the sameness of udgītha and praṇava.

Translation By Max Müller

5. He who knows that the udgîtha is the pranava, and the pranava the udgîtha, rectifies from the seat of the Hotri priest any mistake committed by the Udgâtri priest in performing the udgîtha, yea, in performing the udgîtha.


Sloka : 1.6.1

॥ इति पञ्चमः खण्डः ॥

इयमेवर्गग्निः साम तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढ़ꣳ साम

तस्मादृच्यध्यूढꣳसाम गीयत इयमेव

साग्निरमस्तत्साम ॥ १.६.१॥

.. iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

iyamevargagniḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūr̤hagͫ sāma

tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhagͫsāma gīyata iyameva

sāgniramastatsāma .. 1.6.1..



1. This earth is like the Ṛg Veda, and fire is like the Sāma Veda. The Sāma is based on the Ṛg Veda, and this is why the Sāṃa is sung based on the Ṛg Veda. The earth is sā and fire is ama. This sā and ama together make Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Iyam, this [earth]; eva ṛk, is like the Ṛg Veda; agniḥ sāma, fire is like the Sāma Veda; tat etat sāma etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, the Sāma Veda is based on the Ṛg Veda; tasmāt, therefore; ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma Veda is sung based on the Ṛg Veda; iyam eva sā, this [earth] is the sā [of Sāma]; agniḥ amaḥ, fire is ama [of Sāma]; tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma [i.e., sā + ama]. Commentary:-The Upaniṣad says to treat the earth as the Ṛg Veda and fire as the Sāma Veda. But how are they so related? The Sāma is based on the Ṛg Veda, and fire is based on the earth. Because of this relationship between them, they are thought of as identical.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The Rik (veda) is this earth, the Sâman (veda) is fire. This Sâman (fire) rests on that Rik (earth) [1]. Therefore the Sâman is sung as resting on the Rik. Sâ is this earth, ama is fire, and that makes Sâma.

Footnote:

1. The Sâma verses are mostly taken from the Rig-veda.


Sloka : 1.6.2

अन्तरिक्षमेवर्ग्वायुः साम तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढꣳ साम

तस्मादृच्यध्यूढꣳ साम गीयतेऽन्तरिक्षमेव सा

वायुरमस्तत्साम ॥ १.६.२॥

antarikṣamevargvāyuḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhagͫ sāma

tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhagͫ sāma gīyate'ntarikṣameva sā

vāyuramastatsāma .. 1.6.2..



2. The space between heaven and earth is the Ṛk, and air is the Sāma. This Sāma [called air] is based on the Ṛk [called the space between heaven and earth]. This is why the Sāma is sung based on the Ṛk. The space between heaven and earth is sā, and earth is ama. Together they are Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Antarikṣam, the space between heaven and earth; eva ṛk, is nothing but the Ṛk; vāyuḥ sāma, air is the Sāma; tat etat sāma, this Sāma [called air]; etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk [called the antarikṣa]; tasmāt, this is why; ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk; antarikṣam eva sā, the space between heaven and earth is sā; vāyuḥ amaḥ, air is ama; tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The Rik is the sky, the Sâman air. This Sâman (air) rests on that Rik (sky). Therefore the Sâman is sung as resting on the Rik. Sâ is the sky, ama the air, and that makes Sâma.


Sloka : 1.6.3

द्यौरेवर्गादित्यः साम तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढꣳ साम

तस्मादृच्यध्यूढꣳ साम गीयते द्यौरेव

सादित्योऽमस्तत्साम ॥ १.६.३॥

dyaurevargādityaḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhagͫ sāma

tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhagͫ sāma gīyate dyaureva

sādityo'mastatsāma .. 1.6.3..



3. Heaven is the Ṛk, and the sun is the Sāma. This Sāma [called the sun] is based on the Ṛk [called heaven]. This is why Sāma scholars sing songs based on the Ṛk. Heaven is sā, and the sun is ama. Together they are Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Dyauḥ, the heaven; eva ṛk, is Ṛk; ādityaḥ sāma, the sun is Sāma; tat etat sāma, that Sāma [which is known as the sun]; etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk [heaven]; tasmāt, that is why; ṛci adhyūḍham sāma [sāmagaiḥ] gīyate, the Sāma scholars sing the Sāma based on the Ṛk; dyauḥ eva sā, heaven is nothing but sā; ādityaḥ amaḥ, the sun is ama; tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Rik is heaven, Sâman the sun. This Sâman (sun) rests on that Rik (heaven). Therefore the Sâman is sung as resting on the Rik. Sâ is heaven, ama the sun, and that makes Sâma.


Sloka : 1.6.4

नक्षत्रान्येवर्क्चन्द्रमाः साम तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढꣳ साम

तस्मादृच्यध्यूढꣳ साम गीयते नक्षत्राण्येव सा चन्द्रमा

अमस्तत्साम ॥ १.६.४॥

nakṣatrānyevarkcandramāḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhagͫ sāma

tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhagͫ sāma gīyate nakṣatrāṇyeva sā candramā

amastatsāma .. 1.6.4..



4. The stars are the Ṛk, and the moon is the Sāma. This Sāma [called the moon] is based on the Ṛk [called the stars]. This is why Sāma scholars sing songs based on the Ṛk. The stars are the sā, and the moon is ama. Together they are Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Nakṣatrāṇi era ṛk, the stars together constitute the Ṛk; candramāḥ sāma, the moon is the Sāma; tat etat sāma, that Sāma; etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk; tasmāt, that is why; ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma scholars sing the Sāma based on the Ṛk; nakṣatrāṇi eva sā, the stars are the sā; candramaḥ amaḥ, the moon is the ama; tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma. Commentary:-The moon is the lord of the stars. This is why it is given the status of the Sāma Veda.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Rik is the stars, Sâman the moon. This Sâman (moon) rests on that Rik (stars). Therefore the Sâman is sung as resting on the Rik. Sâ is the stars, ama the moon, and that makes Sâma.


Sloka : 1.6.5

अथ यदेतदादित्यस्य शुक्लं भाः सैवर्गथ यन्नीलं परः

कृष्णं तत्साम तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढꣳ साम

तस्मादृच्यध्यूढꣳ साम गीयते ॥ १.६.५॥

atha yadetadādityasya śuklaṃ bhāḥ saivargatha yannīlaṃ paraḥ

kṛṣṇaṃ tatsāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhagͫ sāma

tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhagͫ sāma gīyate .. 1.6.5..



5. The white glow of the sun is the Ṛk, and its deep blue glow is the Sāma. The black glow called the Sāma is based on the white glow called the Ṛk. That is why the Sāma is sung based on the Ṛk.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat etat, that which is this; ādityasya śuklam, whiteness of the sun; bhāḥ, the glow; sā eva ṛk, that is the Ṛk; atha, next; yat nīlam, that which is blue; paraḥ, deep; kṛṣṇam, black; tat sāma, that is the Sāma; tat etat sāma, this Sāma; etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk; tasmāt, that is why; ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung based on the Ṛk. Commentary:-The Upaniṣad gives another way of worshipping the udgītha:- The white glow of the sun is compared to the Ṛk. But the sun also has a deep blue or black glow, which the Upaniṣad compares to the Sāma. This deep blue glow is not seen by many, people. Only a few persons who have studied the scriptures and have acquired an enlightened mind can see it.

Translation By Max Müller

5. Rik is the white light of the sun, Sâman the blue exceeding darkness [1] (in the sun). This Sâman (darkness) rests on that Rik (brightness). Therefore the Sâman is sung as resting on the Rik.

Footnote:

1. The darkness which is seen by those who can concentrate their sight on the sun.


Sloka : 1.6.6

अथ यदेवैतदादित्यस्य शुक्लं भाः सैव

साथ यन्नीलं परः कृष्णं तदमस्तत्सामाथ

य एषोऽन्तरादित्ये हिरण्मयः पुरुषो दृश्यते

हिरण्यश्मश्रुर्हिरण्यकेश आप्रणस्वात्सर्व एव

सुवर्णः ॥ १.६.६॥

atha yadevaitadādityasya śuklaṃ bhāḥ saiva

sātha yannīlaṃ paraḥ kṛṣṇaṃ tadamastatsāmātha

ya eṣo'ntarāditye hiraṇmayaḥ puruṣo dṛśyate

hiraṇyaśmaśrurhiraṇyakeśa āpraṇasvātsarva eva

suvarṇaḥ .. 1.6.6..



6. Then, [worship of the effulgent being in the sun]:- The white glow of the sun is sā, and the dark bluish-black glow is ama. These two together make up the word Sāma. There is a deity within the orb of the sun, who is seen by yogīs. His whole body glitters like gold, even to his toe-nails. He has a bright golden beard and bright golden hair.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; yat eva etat ādityasya śuklam bhāḥ, that which is this white glow of the sun; sā eva sā, that is the ‘sā’ [of Sāma]; atha yat nīlam paraḥ kṛṣṇam, and that which is the deep black glow; tat amaḥ, that is ‘ama’; tat sāma, [when they are put together] that is Sāma; atha antarāditye, again inside the orb of the sun; yāḥ eṣaḥ hiraṇmayaḥ, there is a bright figure; hiraṇyaśmaśruḥ, bright gold beard; hiraṇyakeśaḥ puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, the person with bright gold hair seen [by the yogīs]; āpraṇakhāt sarva eva suvarṇaḥ, bright gold all over the body, including even his nails. Commentary:-The sun is partly white and partly dark. These colours together make up ‘Sāma.’ The Upaniṣad does not mean to say that the sun is made of gold, and neither is the person in the orb of the sun. This is not to be taken literally. What is meant here is that the person in the sun is brilliant—brilliant in terms of moral and spiritual qualities. The word gold refers to his character and not to the colour of his skin. The word puruṣa means ‘one who covers the whole

Translation By Max Müller

6. Sâ is the white light of the sun, ama the blue exceeding darkness, and that makes Sâma. Now that golden [1] person, who is seen within the sun, with golden beard and golden hair, golden altogether to the very tips of his nails,

Footnote:

1. Bright as gold.


Sloka : 1.6.7

तस्य यथा कप्यासं पुण्डरीकमेवमक्षिणी

तस्योदिति नाम स एष सर्वेभ्यः पाप्मभ्य उदित

उदेति ह वै सर्वेभ्यः पाप्मभ्यो य एवं वेद ॥ १.६.७॥

tasya yathā kapyāsaṃ puṇḍarīkamevamakṣiṇī

tasyoditi nāma sa eṣa sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhya udita

udeti ha vai sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhyo ya evaṃ veda .. 1.6.7..



7. His eyes are like lotuses blossomed by the sun. He is called ut because he is above all weakness. He who knows this truth is also above all weakness.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasya, his; yathā, like; kapyāsam [kapi, which means ‘he who drinks water’ (i.e, the sun) + āsa, which means blossomed], blossomed by the sun; puṇḍarīkam evam, like the lotus; akṣinī the eyes; tasya ut iti nāma, his name is ‘ut’; saḥ eṣaḥ sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhyaḥ uditaḥ, he is above all weakness; udeti, he rises; ha vai sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhyaḥ, above all weakness; yaḥ, who; evam veda, knows thus. Commentary:-It has been said that fire rests on the earth, space rests on air, the moon on the stars, and the dark glow of the sun on its white glow. But the Being in the orbit of the sun does not rest on anything He is above all that is evil, above everything. To signify this he is given the name ut (that which is above everything). This ‘ut’ suggests supremacy. It is the kind of supremacy which Vedānta attributes to Brahman. This ‘ut’ and Brahman are the same. Here, Rāmānuja’s interpretation has been followed for the word kāpyāsam. Śaṅkara gives another interpretation.

Translation By Max Müller

7. Whose eyes are like blue lotus's [1], his name is ut, for he has risen (udita) above all evil. He also who knows this, rises above all evil.

Footnote:

1. The colour of the lotus is described by a comparison with the Kapyâsa, the seat of the monkey (kapiprishthânto yena upavisati), It was probably a botanical name.


Sloka : 1.6.8

तस्यर्क्च साम च गेष्णौ

तस्मादुद्गीथस्तस्मात्त्वेवोद्गातैतस्य हि गाता

स एष ये चामुष्मात्पराञ्चो लोकास्तेषां चेष्टे

देवकामानां चेत्यधिदैवतम् ॥ १.६.८॥

tasyarkca sāma ca geṣṇau

tasmādudgīthastasmāttvevodgātaitasya hi gātā

sa eṣa ye cāmuṣmātparāñco lokāsteṣāṃ ceṣṭe

devakāmānāṃ cetyadhidaivatam .. 1.6.8..



8. The Ṛk and the Sāma are his two singers who sing in praise of this god. This is why he is called udgītha, and this is why a singer of the udgītha is called an udgātā. There are worlds above the solar region, but the god in the solar region rules over them [and also supports them]. He also decides the wishes of the gods and goddesses. This is from the standpoint of the gods and goddesses.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasya, his; ṛk ca sāma ca geṣṇau, the Ṛk and the Sāma are two singers [who sing his praise]; tasmāt, this is why; udgīthaḥ, he is [called] udgītha [the great God in whose praise songs are sung]; tasmāt, this is why; etasya hi gātā, the singers of it; tu eva udgātā, are called udgātā, the musicians; sāḥ eṣaḥ, he; ye ca, who; amuṣmāt parāñcaḥ, high above that [solar region]; teṣām lokāḥ, those worlds; ca iṣṭe, governs [decides]; devakāmānām ca, the desires Commentary:-The word ut suggests supremacy. It is applied to that being who is the overlord of everything and also the source of everything—the earth, the- air, and fire; the Ṛk and Sāma; the gods and goddesses; and even the worlds above the sun. This ‘ut’ rules everything and is therefore identical with Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

8. Rik and Sâman are his joints, and therefore he is udgîtha. And therefore he who praises him (the ut) is called the Ud-gâtri [1] (the out-singer). He (the golden person, called ut) is lord of the worlds beyond that (sun), and of all the wishes of the Devas (inhabiting those worlds). So much with reference to the Devas.

Footnote:

1. Name of the principal priest of the Sâma-veda.


Sloka : 1.7.1

॥ इति षष्ठः खण्डः ॥

अथाध्यात्मं वागेवर्क्प्राणः साम तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढꣳ

साम तस्मादृच्यध्यूढꣳसाम गीयते।

वागेव सा प्राणोऽमस्तत्साम ॥ १.७.१॥

.. iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

athādhyātmaṃ vāgevarkprāṇaḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhagͫ

sāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhagͫsāma gīyate.

vāgeva sā prāṇo'mastatsāma .. 1.7.1..



1. Now an explanation with reference to the body:- Speech is Ṛk, and prāṇa is Sāma. This Sāma [called prāṇa] is based on the Ṛk [called speech]. This is why Sāma scholars sing songs based on the Ṛk. Speech is sā, and prāṇa is ama. Together they are Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha adhyātmam, now what relates to the body; vāk eva ṛk, speech is Ṛk; prāṇaḥ sāma, prāṇa is Sāma; tat etat sāma, this Sāma [called prāṇa]; etasyām ṛci adhyūdham, is based on Ṛk [speech]; tasmāt, this is why; ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk; vāk eva sā, speech is sā; prāṇaḥ amaḥ, prāṇa is ama; tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma. Commentary:-The word prāṇa means both the vital breath and the organ by which we smell. Physically, the organ of speech is below the organ of smell. Similarly, Sāma is known to be based on the Ṛk. In view of their respective positions, Ṛk is equated with speech, and Sāma is equated with prāṇa.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Now with reference to the body. Rik is speech, Sâman breath [1]. This Sâman (breath) rests on that Rik (speech). Therefore the Sâman is sung as resting on the Rik. Sâ is speech, ama is breath, and that makes Sâma.

Footnote:

1. Breath in the nose, sense of smelling. Comm.


Sloka : 1.7.2

चक्षुरेवर्गात्मा साम तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढꣳसाम

तस्मादृच्यध्यूढꣳसाम गीयते ।

चक्षुरेव सात्मामस्तत्साम ॥ १.७.२॥

cakṣurevargātmā sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhagͫsāma

tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhagͫsāma gīyate .

cakṣureva sātmāmastatsāma .. 1.7.2..



2. The eyes are like the Ṛg Veda, and the self [i.e., the form seen in the eyes] is like the Sāma, which is based on the Ṛk. This is why the Sāma is sung based on the Ṛk. The eyes are the sā, and the self [the form in the eyes] is the ama. The two together are Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Cakṣuḥ eva ṛk, the eyes are like the Ṛg Veda; ātmā sāma, the self [as seen in the eyes] is the Sāma; tat etat sāma, this Sāma [called the ātmā]; etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on Ṛk [i.e., on the eyes]; tasmāt, this is why; ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk; cakṣuḥ eva sā, the eyes are sā; ātmā amaḥ, the self [the form reflected in the eyes] is ama; tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma. Commentary:-The ātmā, or self, here means the form which is reflected in the eyes. This is why the Upaniṣad says the eyes are the Ṛg Veda„ and the self is the Sāma Veda.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Rik is the eye, Sâman the self [1]. This Sâman (shadow) rests on that Rik (eye). Therefore the Sâman is sung as resting on the Rik. Sâ is the eye, ama the self, and that makes Sâma.

Footnote:

1. The shadow-self, the likeness or image thrown upon the eye; see Kh. Up. VIII, 9, x.


Sloka : 1.7.3

श्रोत्रमेवर्ङ्मनः साम तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढꣳसाम

तस्मादृच्यध्यूढꣳसाम गीयते ।

श्रोत्रमेव सा मनोऽमस्तत्साम ॥ १.७.३॥

śrotramevarṅmanaḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhagͫsāma

tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhagͫsāma gīyate .

śrotrameva sā mano'mastatsāma .. 1.7.3..



3. The organ of hearing is the Ṛk, and the mind is Sāma. This Sāma [called the mind] is based on the Ṛk [called the organ of hearing]. This is why Sāma scholars sing songs based on the Ṛk. The organ of hearing is sā, and the mind is ama. Together they are Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Śrotram eva ṛk, the organ of hearing is the Ṛg Veda; manaḥ sāma, the mind is the Sāma; tat etat sāma, this Sāma [called the mind]; etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk [the organ of hearing]; tasmāt, this is why; ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk; śrotram eva sā, the organ of hearing is sā; manaḥ amaḥ, the mind is ama; tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma. Commentary:-The mind is said to be the Sāma because it controls the organ of hearing.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Rik is the ear, Sâman the mind. This Sâman (mind) rests on that Rik (ear). Therefore the Sâman is sung as resting on the Rik. Sâ is the ear, ama the mind, and that makes Sâma.


Sloka : 1.7.4

अथ यदेतदक्ष्णः शुक्लं भाः सैवर्गथ यन्नीलं परः

कृष्णं तत्साम तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढꣳसाम

तस्मादृच्यध्यूढꣳसाम गीयते ।

अथ यदेवैतदक्ष्णः शुक्लं भाः सैव साथ यन्नीलं परः

कृष्णं तदमस्तत्साम ॥ १.७.४॥

atha yadetadakṣṇaḥ śuklaṃ bhāḥ saivargatha yannīlaṃ paraḥ

kṛṣṇaṃ tatsāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhagͫsāma

tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhagͫsāma gīyate .

atha yadevaitadakṣṇaḥ śuklaṃ bhāḥ saiva sātha yannīlaṃ paraḥ

kṛṣṇaṃ tadamastatsāma .. 1.7.4..



4. Further, there is a white glow in the eyes, and this is compared with the Ṛg Veda. Then there is a similar glow which is a deep, dark blue. This is compared to the Sāma Veda. This dark glow is based on the white glow. This is why the Sāma is said to be based on the Ṛk. Sā of Sāma stands for the white glow in the eye, and ama stands for the deep blue glow. These two together are Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; akṣṇaḥ yat etat śuklam bhaḥ, that which is the white glow in the eyes; saḥ eva ṛk, that is the Ṛg Veda; atha yat nīlam paraḥ kṛṣṇam, then that which is blue and very dark; tat sāma, that is the Sāma; tat etat sāma, this Sāma; etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk; tasmāt, this is why; ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk; atha yat eva etat akṣṇaḥ śuklam bhāḥ, then this white glow in the eye; sā eva sā, that is sā; atha yat nīlam paraḥ kṛṣṇam, and that which is blue and very dark; tat amaḥ, that is ama; tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma. Commentary:-The sun is the support of the power of vision, because without the sun we cannot see. Similarly, the deep blue glow, which is identified with the Sāma, is supported by the white glow, which is the Ṛk.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Rik is the white light of the eye, Sâman the blue exceeding darkness. This Sâman (darkness) rests on the Rik (brightness). Therefore the Sâman is sung as resting on the Rik. Sâ is the white light of the eye, ama the blue exceeding darkness, and that makes Sâma.


Sloka : 1.7.5

अथ य एषोऽन्तरक्षिणि पुरुषो दृश्यते सैवर्क्तत्साम

तदुक्थं तद्यजुस्तद्ब्रह्म तस्यैतस्य तदेव रूपं यदमुष्य रूपं

यावमुष्य गेष्णौ तौ गेष्णौ यन्नाम तन्नाम ॥ १.७.५॥

atha ya eṣo'ntarakṣiṇi puruṣo dṛśyate saivarktatsāma

tadukthaṃ tadyajustadbrahma tasyaitasya tadeva rūpaṃ yadamuṣya rūpaṃ

yāvamuṣya geṣṇau tau geṣṇau yannāma tannāma .. 1.7.5..



5. The person seen in the eye is the Ṛk, the Sāma, the uktha [a part of the Sāma], and the Yajus. He is also the three Vedas. The person who is in the sun and the person who is in the eye are the same. The same two singers [i.e., the Ṛk and the Sāma] sing in praise of each of them, and they have the same names.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, now; yaḥ eṣaḥ puruṣaḥ, that person who; antarakṣiṇi, inside the eye; dṛśyate, is seen; saḥ, that person; eva ṛk, is the Ṛk; tat sāma, he is the Sāma; tat uktham, he is the uktha [a part of the Sāma]; tat yajuḥ, he is the Yajus [i.e., mantras ending with svāhā, svadhā, and vaṣaṭ]; tat brahma, he is Brahman [i.e., the three Vedas]; tasya etasya, of this person [seen in the eye]; tat eva rūpam, that same form; yat amuṣya rūpam, of the form of that person [in the sun, having golden hair, etc.]; amuṣya, of that one [in the sun]; yau geṣṇau, two singers [i.e., the Ṛk and the Sāma sing in his praise]; tau geṣṇau, the same two singers [sing in praise of that one]; yat nāma tat nāma, the name of this is the same as the name of that. Commentary:-The Lord who rules the solar region is seen also in the eye. That Lord stands for the Ṛk. He controls the organ of speech and other organs of the body, as well as the earth and other planets. They are all parts of him. The three Vedas—Ṛk, Sāma, and Yajus—are often referred to as Brahman, so Brahman and the Vedas are the same. Brahman includes everything. It is in the sun, in the human body, and in the planets. It is here referred to as the Lord called Hiraṇmaya, the Lord with a golden body, because he is luminous. The words uk and uktha, and also svāhā, svadhā, and vaṣat, are all used in different Vedas in praise of the same Lord who is in the sun (ādhidaivika) as well as in the eye (ādhyātmika).

Translation By Max Müller

5. Now the person who is seen in the eye, he is Rik, he is Sâman, Uktha [1], Yagus, Brahman. The form of that person (in the eye) is the same [2] as the form of the other person (in the sun), the joints of the one (Rik and Sâman) are the joints of the other, the name of the one (ut) is the name of the other.

Footnote:

1. A set of hymns to be recited, whereas the Sâman is sung, and the Yagus muttered. 2. Cf. Kh. Up. I, 6, 6.


Sloka : 1.7.6

स एष ये चैतस्मादर्वाञ्चो लोकास्तेषां चेष्टे मनुष्यकामानां

चेति तद्य इमे वीणायां गायन्त्येतं ते गायन्ति

तस्मात्ते धनसनयः ॥ १.७.६॥

sa eṣa ye caitasmādarvāñco lokāsteṣāṃ ceṣṭe manuṣyakāmānāṃ

ceti tadya ime vīṇāyāṃ gāyantyetaṃ te gāyanti

tasmātte dhanasanayaḥ .. 1.7.6..



6. The person in the eye rules the world below him and also rules the desires of the human mind. Those who sing accompanied by the vīṇā, are, in fact, singing in his honour. This is why such musicians become wealthy.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ eṣaḥ, the person [in the eye]; etasmāt arvāñcaḥ ye ca lokāḥ, those worlds below him; teṣām ca iṣṭe, rules over them; manuṣya-kāmānām ca, as well as all human desires; iti, this marks the limit; tat, therefore; ye ime, those people who; vīṇāyām gāyanti, sing with the vīṇā; te etam gāyanti, they in fact sing in his honour; tasmāt, therefore; te, they [the musicians]; dhanasanayaḥ, become wealthy. Commentary:-That person in the eye is the Lord of the world below and also of the minds of human beings. When people sing accompanied by the vīṇā, that music is dedicated to him. And because they sing in honour of him, they acquire much wealth.

Translation By Max Müller

6. He is lord of the worlds beneath that (the self in the eye), and of all the wishes of men. Therefore all who sing to the vînâ (lyre), sing him, and from him also they obtain wealth.


Sloka : 1.7.7

अथ य एतदेवं विद्वान्साम गायत्युभौ स गायति

सोऽमुनैव स एष चामुष्मात्पराञ्चो

लोकास्ताꣳश्चाप्नोति देवकामाꣳश्च ॥ १.७.७॥

atha ya etadevaṃ vidvānsāma gāyatyubhau sa gāyati

so'munaiva sa eṣa cāmuṣmātparāñco

lokāstāgͫścāpnoti devakāmāgͫśca .. 1.7.7..



7. [This is what a worshipper achieves:-] He who knows the Truth mentioned above [i.e., the Truth about Āditya, the sun], sings the Sāma in honour of both Āditya and the person in the eye. He then becomes one with Āditya. Not only that, he also attains mastery of the planes above Āditya and attains everything the gods and goddesses wish for. [In other words, such a person becomes divine].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha yaḥ, now he who; etat evam vidvān, knows this in this way; sāma gāyati, sings the Sāma; saḥ, he [the musician]; ubhau, to both [to Āditya, the sun, and to the person in the eye]; gāyati, sings; saḥ, he [the musician]; amunā eva, as that [Āditya]; ye ca amuṣmāt, from that [Āditya]; parāñcaḥ, above; lokāḥ, the planes; tām devakāmān, the things the gods and goddesses wish for; ca, also; saḥ eṣaḥ, that musician; āpnoti, attains [i.e., he finds a place in the solar orb, and he becomes divine]. Commentary:-When a person knows the real identity of the deity to whom he is singing the Sāma—that is, when he knows he is singing the Sāma in praise of both Āditya, the sun, and the deity in the eye—what does he gain? He becomes one with Āditya and becomes the master of the worlds above Āditya. He is also entitled to the things that the gods and goddesses desire. He, in fact, becomes divine.

Translation By Max Müller

7. He who knowing this sings a Sâman, sings to both (the adhidaivata and adhyâtma self, the person in the sun and the person in the eye, as one and the same person). He obtains through the one, yea, he obtains the worlds beyond that, and the wishes of the Devas;


Sloka : 1.7.8

अथानेनैव ये चैतस्मादर्वाञ्चो लोकास्ताꣳश्चाप्नोति

मनुष्यकामाꣳश्च तस्मादु हैवंविदुद्गाता ब्रूयात् ॥ १.७.८॥

athānenaiva ye caitasmādarvāñco lokāstāgͫścāpnoti

manuṣyakāmāgͫśca tasmādu haivaṃvidudgātā brūyāt .. 1.7.8..



8. Now, [the same worshipper] also attains, by the grace of the Lord in the eye, all the worlds below that Lord. Again, he attains all that human beings may desire. This is why the singer will ask:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, now; anena eva, by this [i.e., by the grace of the Lord in the eye]; ye ca etasmāt arvāñcaḥ lokāḥ, those planes which are below [him—i.e., the person in the eye]; tām ca, those [planes] also; āpnoti manuṣyakāmān ca, he also attains things desired by human beings; tasmāt, this is why; u ha udgātā evamvit, the singer who knows this; brūyāt, will say. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

8. And he obtains through the other the worlds beneath that, and the wishes of men. Therefore an Udgâtri priest who knows this, may say (to the sacrificer for whom he officiates);


Sloka : 1.7.9

कं ते काममागायानीत्येष ह्येव कामागानस्येष्टे य

एवं विद्वान्साम गायति साम गायति ॥ १.७.९॥

kaṃ te kāmamāgāyānītyeṣa hyeva kāmāgānasyeṣṭe ya

evaṃ vidvānsāma gāyati sāma gāyati .. 1.7.9..



9. [A learned udgātā, who sings the Sāma, will ask the person for whose benefit he is singing:-] ‘What shall I ask for on your behalf through my songs?’ He says this [because he knows the Lord in the eye presides over the Sāma and is capable of granting whatever the person wants] and he sings the Sāma, he sings the Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Kam, what; te, for yon; kāmam, desire; āgāyāni iti, shall I sing for; eṣaḥ hi eva, he is the person who; kāmāgānasya iṣṭe, influences the fulfilment of the desires as expressed through songs; yaḥ, the musician [udgātā]; evam, this; vidvān, having known; sāma gāyati sāma gāyati, he sings the Sāma, he sings the Sāma. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section. Commentary:-The Lord in the eye controls everything—the earth and other worlds, those who live in them, and also the desires of those people. This is the purport of the verse.

Translation By Max Müller

9. 'What wish shall I obtain for you by my songs?' For he who knowing this sings a Sâman is able to obtain wishes through his song, yea, through his song.


Sloka : 1.8.1

॥ इति सप्तमः खण्डः ॥

त्रयो होद्गीथे कुशला बभूवुः शिलकः शालावत्यश्चैकितायनो

दाल्भ्यः प्रवाहणो जैवलिरिति ते होचुरुद्गीथे

वै कुशलाः स्मो हन्तोद्गीथे कथां वदाम इति ॥ १.८.१॥

.. iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

trayo hodgīthe kuśalā babhūvuḥ śilakaḥ śālāvatyaścaikitāyano

dālbhyaḥ pravāhaṇo jaivaliriti te hocurudgīthe

vai kuśalāḥ smo hantodgīthe kathāṃ vadāma iti .. 1.8.1..



1. In ancient times, these three—Śilaka, the son of Salāvat, Caikitāyana, the son of Cikitāyana of the Dalbha clan, and Pravāhaṇa, the son of Jīvala—were skilled in the art of the udgītha. They said:- ‘We have mastered the art of the udgītha. If you so wish, we can discuss the udgītha’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Trayaḥ ha udgīthe kuśalāḥ bābhūvuḥ, in early days there were three sages skilled in the udgītha; śilakaḥ śālāvatyaḥ, Śilaka, the son of Śalāvat; caikitāyanaḥ dālbhyaḥ, Caikitāyana, the son of Cikitāyana, of the Dalbha clan; pravāhaṇaḥ jaivaliḥ, Pravāhaṇa, the son of Jīvala; iti te ha ūcuḥ, they declared; udgīthe vai kuśalāḥ smaḥ, we have mastered the art of the udgītha; hanta udgīthe kathām vadāmaḥ iti, if you so wish we can discuss the udgītha. Commentary:-Śilaka, Caikitāyana Dālbhyah, and Pravāhaṇa—these three scholars had studied the udgītha very well, and in an assembly of scholars, they offered to discuss the subject, if the others so desired. It was not that they were trying to show off their knowledge. They just wanted the others to know that they were prepared to speak on this subject if the other scholars present so wished.

Translation By Max Müller

1. There were once three men, well-versed in udgîtha [1], Silaka Sâlâvatya, Kaikitâyana, Dâlbhya, and Pravâhana Gaivali. They said:- 'We are well-versed in udgîtha. Let us have a discussion on udgîtha.'

Footnote:

1. Cognisant of the deeper meanings of udgîtha, i. e. Om.


Sloka : 1.8.2

तथेति ह समुपविविशुः स ह प्रावहणो जैवलिरुवाच

भगवन्तावग्रे वदतां ब्राह्मणयोर्वदतोर्वाचꣳ श्रोष्यामीति

॥ १.८.२॥

tatheti ha samupaviviśuḥ sa ha prāvahaṇo jaivaliruvāca

bhagavantāvagre vadatāṃ brāhmaṇayorvadatorvācagͫ śroṣyāmīti

.. 1.8.2..



2. They said, ‘Let it be so,’ and then sat down. Pravāhaṇa, the son of Jīvala, said:- ‘You two may please begin the debate. I would like to listen to the debate between you two brāhmins’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tathā iti, saying, ‘Let it be so’; samupaviviśuḥ, they sat down; saḥ pravāhaṇaḥ jaivaliḥ ha uvāca, Pravāhaṇa, the son of Jīvala, said; bhagavantau agre vadatām, you two respected ones may kindly start the discussion; vadatoḥ brāhmaṇayoḥ vācam śroṣyāmi iti, I will listen to the debate of you two brāhmins. Commentary:-The scholars agreed to the debate, and sat down. Lest this be construed as impertinence, Prince Pravāhaṇa said to the other two that he wanted to hear the two brāhmins debating. The fact that Pravāhaṇa addressed them as brāhmins, shows that he regarded himself as inferior, being a kṣatriya.

Translation By Max Müller

2. They all agreed and sat down. Then Pravâhana Gaivali [1] said:- 'Sirs, do you both speak first, for I wish to hear what two Brâhmanas [2] have to say.

Footnote:

1. He, though not being a Brâhmana, turns out to be the only one who knows the true meaning of udgîtha, i. e. the Highest Brahman. 2. In V, 3, 5, Pravâhana Gaivali is distinctly called a râganyabandhu.


Sloka : 1.8.3

स ह शिलकः शालावत्यश्चैकितायनं दाल्भ्यमुवाच

हन्त त्वा पृच्छानीति पृच्छेति होवाच ॥ १.८.३॥

sa ha śilakaḥ śālāvatyaścaikitāyanaṃ dālbhyamuvāca

hanta tvā pṛcchānīti pṛccheti hovāca .. 1.8.3..



3. Śalāvat’s son Śilaka said to the sage Caikitāyana Dālbhya, ‘If you permit, I would like to ask you a question.’ Dālbhya replied, ‘Yes, ask’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ śilakaḥ śālāvatyaḥ ha caikitāyanam dālbhyam uvāca, Śilaka, the son of Śalāvat, said to Caikitāyana Dālbhya; hanta tvā pṛcchāni iti, if you permit, I would like to ask you this question; pṛccha iti ha uvāca, yes, ask, [replied Dālbhya]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Then Silaka Sâlâvatya said to Kaikitâyana Dâlbhya:- 'Let me ask you.' 'Ask,' he replied.


Sloka : 1.8.4

का साम्नो गतिरिति स्वर इति होवाच स्वरस्य का

गतिरिति प्राण इति होवाच प्राणस्य का

गतिरित्यन्नमिति होवाचान्नस्य का गतिरित्याप

इति होवाच ॥ १.८.४॥

kā sāmno gatiriti svara iti hovāca svarasya kā

gatiriti prāṇa iti hovāca prāṇasya kā

gatirityannamiti hovācānnasya kā gatirityāpa

iti hovāca .. 1.8.4..



4. Śilaka asked, ‘What is the support of Sāma?’ ‘It is the voice,’ replied Dālbhya. ‘What is the support of the voice?’ ‘The vital breath,’ answered Dālbhya. ‘What is the support of the vital breath?’ asked Śilaka. Dālbhya replied, ‘Food.’ Then Śilaka asked, ‘What is the support of food?’ Dālbhya said, ‘Water’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sāmnaḥ kā gatiḥ iti, [Śilaka asked,] what is it that supports Sāma [i.e., the udgītha of the Sāma]; svaraḥ iti ha uvāca, [Dālbhya] replied, it is the voice; svarasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of the voice; prāṇaḥ iti ha uvāca, [Dālbhya] said, prāṇa [the vital breath]; prāṇasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of prāṇa [asked Śilaka]; annam iti ha uvāca, [Dālbhya] replied, it is food; annasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of food; āpaḥ iti ha uvāca, [Dālbhya] replied, water. Commentary:-Sāma here means the udgītha, the chanting. Dālbhya was asked what supported the chanting, and he replied, ‘The voice.’ Just as a pot is supported by the material of which it is made, which is earth, similarly, the chanting is supported by the voice. But what supports the voice? The vital breath. And the vital breath is supported by food. Similarly, food is supported by water, because it is from water that food grows.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'What is the origin of the Sâman?' 'Tone (svara),' he replied. 'What is the origin of tone?' 'Breath,' he replied. 'What is the origin of breath?' 'Food,' he replied. 'What is the origin of food?' 'Water,' he replied.


Sloka : 1.8.5

अपां का गतिरित्यसौ लोक इति होवाचामुष्य लोकस्य

का गतिरिति न स्वर्गं लोकमिति नयेदिति होवाच स्वर्गं

वयं लोकꣳ सामाभिसंस्थापयामः स्वर्गसꣳस्तावꣳहि

सामेति ॥ १.८.५॥

apāṃ kā gatirityasau loka iti hovācāmuṣya lokasya

kā gatiriti na svargaṃ lokamiti nayediti hovāca svargaṃ

vayaṃ lokagͫ sāmābhisaṃsthāpayāmaḥ svargasagͫstāvagͫhi

sāmeti .. 1.8.5..



5. [Śilaka:-] ‘What is the support of water?’ [Dālbhya:-] ‘That world, heaven.’ [Śilaka:-] ‘What is the support of that world?’ [Dālbhya:-] ‘Don’t go beyond that heaven. We know Sāma is in heaven, and this is why Sāma is respected as heaven’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Apām kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of water; asau lokaḥ, that world [i.e., heaven]; iti ha uvāca, said [Dālbhya]; amuṣya lokasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of that heaven; svargam lokam na atinayet iti ha uvāca, one should not go beyond that heaven, replied [Dālbhya]; svargam lokam, in that heavenly world; vayam sāma abhisaṃsthāpayāmaḥ, we install Sāma; svargasaṃstāvam hi sāma iti, this Sāma is worshipped as heaven. Commentary:-The next question Śilaka asked was about the support of water. To this Dālbhya replied, ‘That world—that is, heaven.’ Rain is said to come from heaven, so that is why heaven is called the support. But what supports heaven? When Śilaka put this question, Dālbhya replied that the question was irrelevant. There is nothing beyond heaven. Heaven is the ultimate. It is the real resort of Sāma. And this is why we say that Sāma is in heaven and why the scriptures show the same respect to heaven as to Sāma.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'What is the origin of water?' 'That world (heaven),' he replied. 'And what is the origin of that world?'-- He replied:- 'Let no man carry the Sâman beyond the world of svarga (heaven). We place (recognise) the Sâman in the world of svarga, for the Sâman is extolled as svarga (heaven).'


Sloka : 1.8.6

तꣳ ह शिलकः शालावत्यश्चैकितायनं

दाल्भ्यमुवाचाप्रतिष्ठितं वै किल ते दाल्भ्य साम

यस्त्वेतर्हि ब्रूयान्मूर्धा ते विपतिष्यतीति मूर्धा ते

विपतेदिति ॥ १.८.६॥

tagͫ ha śilakaḥ śālāvatyaścaikitāyanaṃ

dālbhyamuvācāpratiṣṭhitaṃ vai kila te dālbhya sāma

yastvetarhi brūyānmūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti mūrdhā te

vipatediti .. 1.8.6..



6. Śilaka Śālāvatya said to Caikitāyana Dālbhya:- ‘O Dālbhya, your Sāma is then without a base. If someone knowledgeable about Sāma would now say [that your statement is wrong, and if he curses you saying,] “Your head will fall [if what you say turns out to be wrong],” your head will really fall’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam ha śilakaḥ śālāvatyaḥ caikitāyanam dālbhyam uvāca, Śilaka Śālāvatya said to Caikitāyana Dālbhya; vai kila te dālbhya sāma, your Sāma is, O Dālbhya; apratiṣṭhitam, without a base; yaḥ tu etarhi brūyāt, if anyone says now; te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall [if your statement about Sāma is found to be wrong]; te mūrdhā vipatet iti, your head will surely fall. Commentary:-Śilaka said to Dālbhya that Sāma cannot have heaven as its support. He then quotes scriptures that what he says is true. He also adds that Dālbhya might be careful not to give the impression that he has any doubt about this. If he does, he will then risk being cursed by people who know the Sāma very well. They may curse him saying that his head will fall. Whether Dālbhya’s head will fall or not is a different matter. If you commit a mistake, you surely have to pay for it. The measure of your punishment, however, is decided by many factors.

Translation By Max Müller

6. Then said Silaka Sâlâvatya to Kaikitâyana Dâlbhya:- 'O Dâlbhya, thy Sâman is not firmly established. And if any one were to say, Your head shall fall off (if you be wrong), surely your head would now fall.'


Sloka : 1.8.7

हन्ताहमेतद्भगवतो वेदानीति विद्धीति होवाचामुष्य

लोकस्य का गतिरित्ययं लोक इति होवाचास्य लोकस्य

का गतिरिति न प्रतिष्ठां लोकमिति नयेदिति होवाच

प्रतिष्ठां वयं लोकꣳ सामाभिसꣳस्थापयामः

प्रतिष्ठासꣳस्तावꣳ हि सामेति ॥ १.८.७॥

hantāhametadbhagavato vedānīti viddhīti hovācāmuṣya

lokasya kā gatirityayaṃ loka iti hovācāsya lokasya

kā gatiriti na pratiṣṭhāṃ lokamiti nayediti hovāca

pratiṣṭhāṃ vayaṃ lokagͫ sāmābhisagͫsthāpayāmaḥ

pratiṣṭhāsagͫstāvagͫ hi sāmeti .. 1.8.7..



7. Dālbhya said, ‘Sir, if you permit, I would like to ask you about this.’ Śilaka replied, ‘Yes, ask.’ Dālbhya then asked, ‘What is the support of that heaven?’ Śilaka said, ‘This earth.’ ‘What supports this earth?’ asked Dālbhya. Śilaka replied:- ‘Don’t think Sāma’s base is beyond this earth. We think Sāma is based on this earth, and we respect it as so’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Hanta, if you permit; aham etat bhagavataḥ vedāni iti, I would like to learn this from you, revered sir [said Dālbhya]; viddhi iti ha uvāca, yes, learn from me, said [Śilaka]; amuṣya lokasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of that world [Dālbhya asked]; ayam lokaḥ iti ha uvāca, this earth, said [Śilaka]; asya lokasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of this earth [Dālbhya asked]; pratiṣṭhām lokam na atinayet iti ha uvāca, [in order to find the support of Sāma] don’t go beyond the earth, replied [Śilaka]; pratiṣṭhām lokam vayam sāma abhisaṃsthāpayāmaḥ, we see Sāma based on this earth; pratiṣṭhāsaṃstāvam hi sāma iti, Sāma is respected because it is based on this earth. Commentary:-Heaven is supported by the various Vedic rites performed on the earth, and this is why the earth is said here to be the support of heaven. To be more precise, however, the gods and goddesses in heaven depend upon what men and women on earth offer them through their Vedic rites. In this sense, the earth is the support of heaven. The earth is the support of everything, and it is also the base of the Sāma. This is why the earth is described as a kind of chariot (rathantara) in the Sāma Veda.

Translation By Max Müller

7. 'Well then, let me know this from you, Sir,' said Dâlbhya. 'Know it,' replied Silaka Sâlâvatya. 'What is the origin of that world (heaven)?' 'This world,' he replied. 'And what is the origin of this world?'-- He replied:- 'Let no man carry the Sâman beyond this world as its rest. We place the Sâman in this world as its rest, for the Sâman is extolled as rest.'


Sloka : 1.8.8

तꣳ ह प्रवाहणो जैवलिरुवाचान्तवद्वै किल ते

शालावत्य साम यस्त्वेतर्हि ब्रूयान्मूर्धा ते विपतिष्यतीति

मूर्धा ते विपतेदिति हन्ताहमेतद्भगवतो वेदानीति

विद्धीति होवाच ॥ १.८.८॥

tagͫ ha pravāhaṇo jaivaliruvācāntavadvai kila te

śālāvatya sāma yastvetarhi brūyānmūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti

mūrdhā te vipatediti hantāhametadbhagavato vedānīti

viddhīti hovāca .. 1.8.8..



8. Pravāhaṇa Jaivali said:- ‘O Śālāvatya, your Sāma is not endless. If someone should now say that your head will fall off, it will fall off.’ Śilaka Śālāvatya then said, ‘O Lord, I want to learn from you [the truth about the Sāma].’ Jaivali replied, ‘Yes, learn from me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam ha pravāhaṇaḥ jaivaliḥ uvāca, Pravāhaṇa Jaivali said to him; antavat vai kila te sāma śālāvatya, O Śālāvatya [Śilaka], your Sāma is not without an end; yaḥ tu, if anyone; etarhi, now; brūyāt, says; mūrdhā te vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall; mūrdhā te vipatet, your head will fall off; hanta aham bhagavataḥ vadāni iti, [Śilaka said,] if you please, O Lord, I would like to learn from you; viddhi iti ha uvāca, yes, learn [from me, Pravāhaṇa replied]. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

8. Then said Pravâhana Gaivali to Silaka Sâlâvatya:- 'Your Sâman (the earth), O Sâlâvatya, has an end. And if any one were to say, Your head shall fall off (if you be wrong), surely your head would now fall.' 'Well then, let me know this from you, Sir,' said Sâlâvatya. 'Know it,' replied Gaivali.


Sloka : 1.9.1

॥ इति अष्टमः खण्डः ॥

अस्य लोकस्य का गतिरित्याकाश इति होवाच

सर्वाणि ह वा इमानि भूतान्याकाशादेव समुत्पद्यन्त

आकाशं प्रत्यस्तं यन्त्याकाशो ह्येवैभ्यो ज्यायानकाशः

परायणम् ॥ १.९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

asya lokasya kā gatirityākāśa iti hovāca

sarvāṇi ha vā imāni bhūtānyākāśādeva samutpadyanta

ākāśaṃ pratyastaṃ yantyākāśo hyevaibhyo jyāyānakāśaḥ

parāyaṇam .. 1.9.1..



1. Śilaka Śālāvatya asked Pravāhaṇa, ‘What is the end of this earth?’ Pravāhaṇa said:- ‘Space, for everything that exists arises from space and also goes back into space. Space is superior to everything. Space is the highest goal’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Asya lokasya kā gatiḥ iti, [Śilaka Śālāvatya asked,] what is the end of this earth; ākāśaḥ iti ha uvāca, [Pravāhaṇa] replied, space; sarvāṇi ha vai imāni bhūtānī, all these beings; ākāśāt eva samutpadyante, issue from space; ākāśani prati astam yanti, they disappear into space; ākāśaḥ hi eva ebhyaḥ jyāyān, Space is superior to these; ākāśaḥ parāyaṇam, space is the highest goal. Commentary:-Space is described here as the source of everything. It is the source as well as the end of everything. In short, it is Paramātman, the Cosmic Self. Because space is the biggest thing visible, it can rightly claim to be the symbol of the Paramātman. All the other elements (air, fire, water, and earth) come from space and go back to space. But the scriptures also say that the Cosmic Self is the source and the end of the elements—indeed, of everything.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'What is the origin of this world?' 'Ether [1], 'he replied. For all these beings take their rise from the ether, and return into the ether. Ether is older than these, ether is their rest.

Footnote:

1. Ether, or we might translate it by space, both being intended, however, as names or symbols of the Highest Brahman. See Vedânta-sûtra I, 1, 22.


Sloka : 1.9.2

स एष परोवरीयानुद्गीथः स एषोऽनन्तः परोवरीयो

हास्य भवति परोवरीयसो ह लोकाञ्जयति

य एतदेवं विद्वान्परोवरीयाꣳसमुद्गीथमुपास्ते ॥ १.९.२॥

sa eṣa parovarīyānudgīthaḥ sa eṣo'nantaḥ parovarīyo

hāsya bhavati parovarīyaso ha lokāñjayati

ya etadevaṃ vidvānparovarīyāgͫsamudgīthamupāste .. 1.9.2..



2. Earlier, mention was made of the udgītha being the best as also endless. He who is aware of this and worships the udgītha as such keeps attaining higher and higher worlds, and he becomes increasingly a better individual.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ udgīthaḥ, that udgītha; parovarīyān [paraḥ + varīyān], the best; eṣaḥ, the Paramātman [i.e., the Supreme Self, earlier referred to as endless]; saḥ eṣaḥ, the udgītha [which is also the Cosmic Self]; anantaḥ, [is] endless; yaḥ, the worshipper; evam, as mentioned earlier; vidvān, having known; etat, this; parovarīyāṃsam udgītham upāste, worships this udgītha knowing it as the best; parovarīyasaḥ lokān jayati, he attains increasingly higher and higher worlds; asya, the life of that worshipper; parovarīyaḥ ha bhavati, also becomes higher and higher. Commentary:-It is important to realize that the udgītha is the Paramātman itself. When we know this we attain the highest—both materially and spiritually.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He is indeed the udgîtha (Om = Brahman), greater than great (parovarîyas), he is without end. He who knowing this meditates on the udgîtha, the greater than great, obtains what is greater than great, he conquers the worlds which are greater than great.


Sloka : 1.9.3

तꣳ हैतमतिधन्वा शौनक उदरशाण्डिल्यायोक्त्वोवाच

यावत्त एनं प्रजायामुद्गीथं वेदिष्यन्ते परोवरीयो

हैभ्यस्तावदस्मिꣳल्लोके जीवनं भविष्यति ॥ १.९.३॥

tagͫ haitamatidhanvā śaunaka udaraśāṇḍilyāyoktvovāca

yāvatta enaṃ prajāyāmudgīthaṃ vediṣyante parovarīyo

haibhyastāvadasmigͫlloke jīvanaṃ bhaviṣyati .. 1.9.3..



3. [In ancient times there was a sage named Atidhanvā, who was the son of Śunaka and who knew the science of udgītha very well.] Once when he was teaching this to his disciple Udaraśāṇḍilya, he declared:- ‘So long as you and your family preserve this knowledge, the quality of life in the world of your family will be higher than that of average people’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Śaunakaḥ, the son of Śunaka; atidhanvā, Atidhanvā [the sage having that name]; tam, of that kind; etam, this [udgītha]; udaraśāṇḍilyāya, to Udaraśāṇḍilya [the disciple having that name]; uktvā, having taught; uvāca, he said; ha yāvat, as long as; te prajāyām, your progeny; enam udgītham vediṣyante, will know this udgītha; tāvat, so long; [tāsām prajān, the life of those progeny]; asmin loke, in this world; jīvanam ebhyaḥ parovarīyaḥ ha bhaviṣyati, will grow better and better in quality judged by the standard of ordinary people. Commentary:-This udgītha is an invaluable asset which can uplift people both materially and spiritually for generations.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Atidhanvan Saunaka, having taught this udgîtha to Udara-sândilya, said:- 'As long as they will know in your family this udgîtha, their life in this world will be greater than great.


Sloka : 1.9.4

तथामुष्मिꣳल्लोके लोक इति स य एतमेवं विद्वानुपास्ते

परोवरीय एव हास्यास्मिꣳल्लोके जीवनं भवति

तथामुष्मिꣳल्लोके लोक इति लोके लोक इति ॥ १.९.४॥

tathāmuṣmigͫlloke loka iti sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste

parovarīya eva hāsyāsmigͫlloke jīvanaṃ bhavati

tathāmuṣmigͫlloke loka iti loke loka iti .. 1.9.4..



4. As in this world, so also in the other world. He who knows the place of the udgītha and worships it accordingly enjoys the best in life in this world, and he enjoys the best in life in the other world also [after death].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tathā, in the same way; amuṣmin loke, in that other world; lokaḥ iti, the place; saḥ yaḥ, he who; etat evam vidvān upāste, knows this and worships [the udgītha] accordingly; parovarīyaḥ eva ha asya asmin loke jīvanam bhavati, his life in this world is the best possible; tathā amuṣmin loke lokaḥ iti loke lokaḥ iti, his life in the other world [i.e., his life after death] is likewise the best, his life in the other world is likewise. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section. Commentary:-The sage Atidhanvā told his disciple Udaraśāṇḍilya about the benefits of worshipping udgītha. He said that the benefits were not only material, but also spiritual. The worshipper is benefitted in this life as well as in his life after death. But the question may be raised, is this still valid today? What was true in earlier times may not be true now. Śaṅkara dispels this doubt. He says that even now people are enjoying the same benefits of worshipping the udgītha (that is, of chanting the Sāma Veda)—especially that part which is addressed to the Supreme Being.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'And thus also will be their state in the other world.' He who thus knows the udgîtha, and meditates on it thus, his life in this world will be greater than great, and also his state in the other world, yea, in the other world.


Sloka : 1.10.1

॥ इति नवमः खण्डः ॥

मटचीहतेषु कुरुष्वाटिक्या सह जाययोषस्तिर्ह

चाक्रायण इभ्यग्रामे प्रद्राणक उवास ॥ १.१०.१॥

.. iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

maṭacīhateṣu kuruṣvāṭikyā saha jāyayoṣastirha

cākrāyaṇa ibhyagrāme pradrāṇaka uvāsa .. 1.10.1..



1. Once the land of the Kurus was hit by a bad thunderstorm, and a young man living there named Uṣasti, the son of Cakra, was in great distress. He left home accompanied by his child-wife and moved to a prosperous village.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Maṭacīhateṣu, destroyed [hateṣu] by a thunderstorm [maṭacin]; kuruṣu, in the land of the Kurus; ātikyā jāyayā saha, with his child-wife; uṣastiḥ, Uṣasti [a young man by that name]; cākrāyaṇaḥ, the son of Cakra; pradrāṇakaiḥ in great misery; ibhyagrāme [ibhyaḥ, prosperous (i.e., where people owned elephants) + grāme, in a village], in a prosperous village; uvāsa, lived. Commentary:- So far, much praise has been given to the udgītha, the purpose being to show the importance of the Sāma Veda. Now, prastāva and pratihāra are being introduced with the same object in view—that is, worship of the Sāma Veda. In order to introduce the subject, however, and to make it easy to understand, a story is given:- At one time the land of the Kurus was hit by a very bad storm, which destroyed all the crops, and the country was in the grip of a famine. The son of Cakra, named Uṣasti, was starving and on the verge of death. He then moved with his child-wife to a prosperous village (that is, it was prosperous because people there owned elephants—ibha). According to Śaṅkara, the word maṭacī means ‘fire from thunder.’ According to the Śabdakalpadruma, it refers to a species of small red birds, and according to Ānandagiri it means ‘locusts.’ Another meaning is ‘hail.’

Translation By Max Müller

1. When the Kurus had been destroyed by (hail) stones [1], Ushasti Kâkrâyana lived as a beggar with his virgin [2] wife at Ibhyagrâma.

Footnote:

1. When they had been killed either by stone weapons, or by a shower of stones, which produced a famine in the land. Comm. 2. Âtikî is not the name of the wife of Ushasti, nor does it mean strong enough to travel. Saṅkara explains it as anupagâtapayodhâridistrîvyañganâ, and Ânandagiri adds, Svairasamkâre 'pi na vyabhikârasaṅketi darsayitum âtikyeti viseshanam. She was so young that she was allowed to run about freely, without exciting any suspicion. Another commentator says, Grihâd bahirgantumarhâ anupagâtapayodharâ.


Sloka : 1.10.2

स हेभ्यं कुल्माषान्खादन्तं बिभिक्षे तꣳ होवाच ।

नेतोऽन्ये विद्यन्ते यच्च ये म इम उपनिहिता इति

॥ १.१०.२॥

sa hebhyaṃ kulmāṣānkhādantaṃ bibhikṣe tagͫ hovāca .

neto'nye vidyante yacca ye ma ima upanihitā iti

.. 1.10.2..



2. Uṣasti saw an elephant-driver eating some pulses of poor quality, and he begged for a share of his food. The elephant-driver replied:- ‘This food in my bowl is all I have to eat. Besides this, I have nothing. [What should I do?]’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [Uṣasti]; kulmāṣān, bad food grains; khādantam, eating; ibhyam, an elephant[-driver]; bibhikṣe, begged; ha tam uvāca, that [elephant-driver] said to him; itaḥ, besides these [pulses]; na anye vidyante, nothing further exists; yat ye ca ime, that which [the pulses]; me, my; upanihitāḥ, thrown [into my eating bowl]; [kim karomi, what should I do]. Commentary:-The food itself was bad, and besides that, it was hardly enough for the elephant-driver, but there was nothing else he could give Uṣasti. By implication, he regretted his inability to help.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Seeing a chief eating beans, he begged of him. The chief said:- 'I have no more, except those which are put away for me here.'


Sloka : 1.10.3

एतेषां मे देहीति होवाच तानस्मै प्रददौ

हन्तानुपानमित्युच्छिष्टं वै मे पीतꣳस्यादिति होवाच

॥ १.१०.३॥

eteṣāṃ me dehīti hovāca tānasmai pradadau

hantānupānamityucchiṣṭaṃ vai me pītagͫsyāditi hovāca

.. 1.10.3..



3. Uṣasti said to the elephant-driver, ‘Please give me some [of the pulses].’ The driver then gave away the pulses and said, ‘Here is some water.’ [But Uṣasti declined it, saying,] ‘That will amount to my drinking unclean water’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said; eteṣām, out of this; me dehi iti, give me [some]; tān, those [pulses]; asmai, to him [i.e., to Uṣasti]; pradadau, gave away; hanta, [the elephant-driver said] here is; anupānam iti, drinking water; iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said; me ucchiṣṭam vai pītam syāt, [if I drink the water you are offering] I would be drinking unclean water [because someone else has drunk from it]. Commentary:-Uṣasti must have been very hungry. Although the elephant-driver said he had no other food than what was in his bowl, Uṣasti begged for that anyway. The driver kindly obliged and then also offered him some water to drink. This, however, Uṣasti declined. He said he would then be drinking unclean (ucchiṣṭa) water—that is, water that someone else had already drunk from. But the driver raised the question:- If Uṣasti could take the unclean (according to him) food, why could he not take the unclean water also?

Translation By Max Müller

3. Ushasti said:- 'Give me to eat of them.' He gave him the beans, and said:- 'There is something to drink also! Then said Ushasti:- 'If I drank of it, I should have drunk what was left by another, and is therefore unclean.'


Sloka : 1.10.4

न स्विदेतेऽप्युच्छिष्टा इति न वा

अजीविष्यमिमानखादन्निति होवाच कामो म

उदपानमिति ॥ १.१०.४॥

na svidete'pyucchiṣṭā iti na vā

ajīviṣyamimānakhādanniti hovāca kāmo ma

udapānamiti .. 1.10.4..



4. The elephant-driver asked, ‘Aren’t the pulses also unclean?’ Uṣasti replied:- ‘I would die if I did not have these grains to eat. As regards drinking water, [it is not that important]. I can get it when I like’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Svit ete api na ucchiṣṭāḥ iti, [the driver said, by the same token] aren’t these [pulses] also unclean; ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] replied; imān, these [pulses]; akhādan, [if I] do not eat; na vai ajīviṣyam iti, I will not survive; udapānam, drinking water [on the other hand]; me kāmaḥ iti, is left to me. Commentary:-Normally a person should not eat or drink, anything unclean (ucchiṣṭa)—that is, something which someone else has already eaten or drunk a part of. But when it is a question of survival, the scriptures condone such eating or drinking. Uṣasti was aware of the injunctions of the scriptures in this respect, and he knew they would permit his eating the unclean pulses, but not his drinking the unclean water. Clean water was easily available, so he would not have died if he refrained from drinking it. The scriptures take much pains to point out when eating or drinking unclean things is permissible. In this connection, the reader’s attention is drawn to sūtra 3.4.28 of the Brahma Sūtras.

Translation By Max Müller

4. The chief said:- 'Were not those beans also left over and therefore unclean?' 'No,' he replied; 'for I should not have lived, if I had not eaten them, but the drinking of water would be mere pleasure [1].'

Footnote:

1. Or, according to the commentator, 'water I can get whenever I like.'


Sloka : 1.10.5

स ह खादित्वातिशेषाञ्जायाया आजहार साग्र एव

सुभिक्षा बभूव तान्प्रतिगृह्य निदधौ ॥ १.१०.५॥

sa ha khāditvātiśeṣāñjāyāyā ājahāra sāgra eva

subhikṣā babhūva tānpratigṛhya nidadhau .. 1.10.5..



5. After eating some of the food, he [Uṣasti] brought back what was left for his wife. The wife, however, had meanwhile obtained good alms. She accepted the food [from her husband] and put it aside [for future use].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ha khāditvā, having eaten; atiśeṣān, whatever was left over; saḥ jāyāyai ājahāra, he [Uṣasti] brought for his wife; sā, she; agre eva subhikṣā babhūva, had already obtained good alms; tān, them [the pulses]; pratigṛhya, she accepted; nidadhau, [and] put them aside. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. Having eaten himself, Ushasti gave the remaining beans to his wife. But she, having eaten before, took them and put them away.


Sloka : 1.10.6

स ह प्रातः संजिहान उवाच यद्बतान्नस्य लभेमहि

लभेमहि धनमात्राꣳराजासौ यक्ष्यते स मा

सर्वैरार्त्विज्यैर्वृणीतेति ॥ १.१०.६॥

sa ha prātaḥ saṃjihāna uvāca yadbatānnasya labhemahi

labhemahi dhanamātrāgͫrājāsau yakṣyate sa mā

sarvairārtvijyairvṛṇīteti .. 1.10.6..



6. While leaving bed the next morning, Uṣasti said to his wife:- ‘Oh, if only I could get something to eat, I could then earn some money. The king over there is going to perform a sacrifice, and very likely he would have entrusted to me all the work of a ṛtvik [a priest at a sacrifice]’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [Uṣasti]; prātaḥ, in the morning; sañjihānaḥ, while getting up from bed; ha uvāca, said [to his wife]; yat bata, oh, if only; annasya labhemahi, I could get some food; labhemahi dhanamātrām, I could earn a little money; asau, over there; rājā, the king; yakṣyate, is performing a sacrifice; saḥ, he [the king]; mā, me; sarvaiḥ ārtvijyaiḥ, all the work of a ṛtvik [a priest who sings hymns or otherwise helps with the performance of a sacrifice]; vṛṇīta iti, would have appointed. Commentary:-Uṣasti was a highly qualified ṛtvik, and he hoped the king would appoint him to assist at the sacrifice he was going to perform. If that hope of his materialized, he would then be able to earn some money. The snag was, however, that he was too weak from hunger to do anything. If he could only get something to eat!

Translation By Max Müller

6. Rising the next morning, Ushasti said to her:- 'Alas, if we could only get some food, we might gain a little wealth. The king here is going to offer a sacrifice, he should choose me for all the priestly offices.'


Sloka : 1.10.7

तं जायोवाच हन्त पत इम एव कुल्माषा इति

तान्खादित्वामुं यज्ञं विततमेयाय ॥ १.१०.७॥

taṃ jāyovāca hanta pata ima eva kulmāṣā iti

tānkhāditvāmuṃ yajñaṃ vitatameyāya .. 1.10.7..



7. The wife said to him, ‘O dear husband, here are those pulses you gave me.’ Having eaten the pulses, Uṣasti left for the place where the sacrifice was being held [other priests having already started it].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Jāyā tam uvāca, the wife said to him; hanta pate, O dear husband; ime eva kulmāṣāḥ iti, here are those pulses [you gave me]; tān, them [the pulses]; khāditvā, having eaten; amum vitatam yajñam, that ensuing sacrifice; eyāya, he went. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

7. His wife said to him:- 'Look, here are those beans of yours.' Having eaten them, he went to the sacrifice which was being performed.


Sloka : 1.10.8

तत्रोद्गातॄनास्तावे स्तोष्यमाणानुपोपविवेश

स ह प्रस्तोतारमुवाच ॥ १.१०.८॥

tatrodgātṝnāstāve stoṣyamāṇānupopaviveśa

sa ha prastotāramuvāca .. 1.10.8..



8. There at the sacrifice, he found those [the udgātṛs] who were singing the [Sāma] hymns and took a seat among them. Turning to the one who was singing the prastāva, he asked:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tatra, there [at the site of the sacrifice]; āstāve, at the place where hymns were being sung; udgātṛn stosyamāṇān, those who were singing the hymns; upa, near; upaviveśa, he sat; prastotāram, to him who was reciting the prastāva; saḥ ha uvāca, he said. Commentary:-Prastāva, pratihāra, and udgītha—these are some of the Sāma mantras recited during a sacrifice. One who recites the prastāva is called the prastotā, one who recites the pratihāra is called the pratihartā, and one who recites the udgītha is called the udgātā.

Translation By Max Müller

8. He went and sat down on the orchestra near the Udgâtris, who were going to sing their hymns of praise. And he said to the Prastotri (the leader):-


Sloka : 1.10.9

प्रस्तोतर्या देवता प्रस्तावमन्वायत्ता तां चेदविद्वान्प्रस्तोष्यसि

मूर्धा ते विपतिष्यतीति ॥ १.१०.९॥

prastotaryā devatā prastāvamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānprastoṣyasi

mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti .. 1.10.9..



9. ‘O Prastotā, if you recite the prastāva without knowing anything about the god to whom this hymn relates, your head will fall’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prastotaḥ, O Prastotā; yā devatā, that god who; prastāvam anvāyattā, underlies this prastāva hymn; tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him; cet, if; prastoṣyasi, you recite the prastāva; te, your; mūrdhā, head; vipatiṣyati iti, will fall. Commentary:-Here the question arises whether or not an ignorant person is permitted to recite the scriptures. According to Śaṅkara, he is permitted, but if he commits errors, he will be liable to punishment. It may not cost him his head, but he may go after death to the world of his ancestors, rather than to the world of the gods. But perhaps he would have gone there anyway because of his other errors. As to the falling of the head, the curse need not be taken literally.

Translation By Max Müller

9. 'Prastotri, if you, without knowing [1] the deity which belongs to the prastâva (the hymns &c. of the Prastotri), are going to sing it, your head will fall off.'

Footnote:

1. The commentator is at great pains to show that a priest may officiate without knowing the secret meanings here assigned to certain parts of the sacrifice, and without running any risk of punishment. Only, if another priest is present, who is initiated, then the uninitiated, taking his place, is in danger of losing his head.


Sloka : 1.10.10

एवमेवोद्गातारमुवाचोद्गातर्या देवतोद्गीथमन्वायत्ता

तां चेदविद्वानुद्गास्यसि मूर्धा ते विपतिष्यतीति ॥ १.१०.१०॥

evamevodgātāramuvācodgātaryā devatodgīthamanvāyattā

tāṃ cedavidvānudgāsyasi mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti .. 1.10.10..



10. Next Uṣasti said the same thing to the person singing the udgītha:- ‘O Udgātā, if you do not know anything about the god related to the udgītha and yet you sing the udgītha, your head will fall’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Evam eva udgātāram uvāca, he then said the same thing to the udgātā [who sings the udgītha]; udgātaḥ, O Udgātā; yā devatā udgītham anvāyattā, the god who is related to the udgītha; tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him; cet udgāsyasi, if you sing about him; te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

10. In the same manner he addressed the Udgâtri:- 'Udgâtri, if you, without knowing the deity which belongs to the udgîtha (the hymns of the Udgâtri), are going to sing it, your head will fall off.'


Sloka : 1.10.11

एवमेव प्रतिहर्तारमुवाच प्रतिहर्तर्या देवता

प्रतिहारमन्वायत्ता तां चेदविद्वान्प्रतिहरिष्यसि मूर्धा ते

विपतिष्यतीति ते ह समारतास्तूष्णीमासांचक्रिरे

॥ १.१०.११॥

evameva pratihartāramuvāca pratihartaryā devatā

pratihāramanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānpratihariṣyasi mūrdhā te

vipatiṣyatīti te ha samāratāstūṣṇīmāsāṃcakrire

.. 1.10.11..



11. He again said the same thing to the person singing the pratihāra:- ‘O Pratihartā, if you sing the pratihāra without knowing anything about the deity relating to it, your head will fall.’ At this, they stopped their respective hymns and remained silent.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Evam eva pratihartāram uvāca, he said the same thing to the person who was singing the pratihāra; pratihartaḥ, O Pratihartā; yā devatā pratihāram anvāyattā, that god to whom your pratihāra relates; tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him; cet pratihariṣyasi, if you sing the pratihāra; te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall; te, they [the singers]; ha samāratāḥ, stopped; āsāñcakrire tūṣṇīm, [and] remained silent. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section. Commentary:-When Uṣasti spoke thus to the singers, they all stopped their hymns. They were afraid they would lose their heads because they did not know about the deities

Translation By Max Müller

11. In the same manner he addressed the Pratihartri:- 'Pratihartri, if you, without knowing the deity which belongs to the pratihâra (the hymns of the Pratihartri), are going to sing it, your head will fall off.' They stopped, and sat down in silence.


Sloka : 1.11.1

॥ इति दशमः खण्डः ॥

अथ हैनं यजमान उवाच भगवन्तं वा अहं

विविदिषाणीत्युषस्तिरस्मि चाक्रायण इति होवाच ॥ १.११.१॥

.. iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hainaṃ yajamāna uvāca bhagavantaṃ vā ahaṃ

vividiṣāṇītyuṣastirasmi cākrāyaṇa iti hovāca .. 1.11.1..



1. Then the prince performing the sacrifice said, ‘Sir, I would like to know who you are.’ He [Uṣasti] replied, ‘I am Uṣasti, the son of Cakra’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; yajamānaḥ, the person performing the sacrifice [the prince]; ha enam uvāca, said to him [to Uṣasti]; bhagavantam vai aham vividiṣāṇi iti, Sir, I want to know who you are; iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] replied; uṣastiḥ cākrāyaṇaḥ asmi, I am Uṣasti, the son of Cakra. Commentary:-Uṣasti’s reply suggests that he assumes the prince already knows him by name.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then the sacrificer said to him:- 'I should like to know who you are, Sir.' He replied:- 'I am Ushasti Kâkrâyana.'


Sloka : 1.11.2

स होवाच भगवन्तं वा अहमेभिः सर्वैरार्त्विज्यैः

पर्यैषिषं भगवतो वा अहमवित्त्यान्यानवृषि ॥ १.११.२॥

sa hovāca bhagavantaṃ vā ahamebhiḥ sarvairārtvijyaiḥ

paryaiṣiṣaṃ bhagavato vā ahamavittyānyānavṛṣi .. 1.11.2..



2. He [the prince] said:- ‘I looked for you, revered sir, to give you all the work of the priests. As I could not find you, I entrusted the work to other [brāhmins]’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ ha uvāca, he [the prince] said; aham, I; bhagavantam, you, revered sir; vai ebhiḥ sarvaiḥ ārtvijyaiḥ, for all the work of the priests; paryaiṣiṣam, looked for; bhagavataḥ, you, sir; avittyā, not being able to locate; aham vai anyān avṛṣi, I chose others. Commentary:-The prince had obviously heard of Uṣasti’s reputation as a versatile scholar, and had wanted to give the responsibility of the sacrifice to him. As he could not find him, however, he had no option but to entrust the work to other brāhmins.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He said:- 'I looked for you, Sir, for all these sacrificial offices, but not finding you [1], I chose others.'

Footnote:

1. Should it be avittvâ, as in I, 2, 9?


Sloka : 1.11.3

भगवाꣳस्त्वेव मे सर्वैरार्त्विज्यैरिति तथेत्यथ

तर्ह्येत एव समतिसृष्टाः स्तुवतां यावत्त्वेभ्यो धनं

दद्यास्तावन्मम दद्या इति तथेति ह यजमान उवाच

॥ १.११.३॥

bhagavāgͫstveva me sarvairārtvijyairiti tathetyatha

tarhyeta eva samatisṛṣṭāḥ stuvatāṃ yāvattvebhyo dhanaṃ

dadyāstāvanmama dadyā iti tatheti ha yajamāna uvāca

.. 1.11.3..



3. [The prince said,] ‘O Lord, please do for me all the work of the priest.’ [Uṣasti replied:-] ‘Let it be so. Now let the priests already engaged by you recite as I instruct. But you will have to pay me as much as you promised to pay these priests.’ ‘It will be so,’ said [the prince].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Bhagavān, O Lord; eva tu, for certain; sarvaiḥ ārtvijyaiḥ me iti, [take on] all the work of the ṛtvik for me; tathā iti, [Uṣasti said] let it be so; atha tarhi, now therefore; ete eva, these [priests already engaged by you]; samatisṛṣṭāḥ, as instructed [by me]; stuvatām, may recite; tu ebhyaḥ yāvat dhanam dadyāḥ, but as much money as you are giving these [priests]; tāvat, that much [money]; mama dadyāḥ iti, you have to give me [also]; yajamānaḥ, the performer of the sacrifice [the prince]; iti ha uvāca, said; tathā, it will be so. Commentary:-Uṣasti did not want the priests who had already been engaged to be dismissed. He only wanted them to follow his instructions about their recitations.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'But now, Sir, take all the sacrificial offices.' Ushasti said:- 'Very well; but let those, with my permission, perform the hymns of praise. Only as much wealth as you give to them, so much give to me also.' The sacrificer assented.


Sloka : 1.11.4

अथ हैनं प्रस्तोतोपससाद प्रस्तोतर्या देवता

प्रस्तावमन्वायत्ता तां चेदविद्वान्प्रस्तोष्यसि मूर्धा ते

विपतिष्यतीति मा भगवानवोचत्कतमा सा देवतेति

॥ १.११.४॥

atha hainaṃ prastotopasasāda prastotaryā devatā

prastāvamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānprastoṣyasi mūrdhā te

vipatiṣyatīti mā bhagavānavocatkatamā sā devateti

.. 1.11.4..



4. Then the Prastotā came to [Uṣasti and said:-] ‘Revered sir, you told me, “O Prastotā, if you sing the prastāva without knowing anything about the deity to whom the hymn is addressed, your head will fall.” Please tell me who that deity is’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; prastotā, the person reciting the prastāva; ha enani upasasāda, came to him [i.e., to Uṣasti, and said]; prastotaḥ yā devatā prastāvam anvāyattā, O Prastotā, that deity to whom the prastāva is related; tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him; cet prastoṣyasi, if you sing [about him]; te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall; bhagavān mā avocat, revered sir, you said to me; katamā sā devatā iti, what is that deity? Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Then the Prastotri approached him, saying:- 'Sir, you said to me, "Prastotri, if you, without knowing the deity which belongs to the prastâva, are going to sing it, your head will fall off,"--which then is that deity?'


Sloka : 1.11.5

प्राण इति होवाच सर्वाणि ह वा इमानि भूतानि

प्राणमेवाभिसंविशन्ति प्राणमभ्युज्जिहते सैषा देवता

प्रस्तावमन्वायत्ता तां चेदविद्वान्प्रास्तोष्यो

मूर्धा ते व्यपतिष्यत्तथोक्तस्य मयेति ॥ १.११.५॥

prāṇa iti hovāca sarvāṇi ha vā imāni bhūtāni

prāṇamevābhisaṃviśanti prāṇamabhyujjihate saiṣā devatā

prastāvamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānprāstoṣyo

mūrdhā te vyapatiṣyattathoktasya mayeti .. 1.11.5..



5. Uṣasti said:- ‘It is prāṇa [the vital force]. In prāṇa all things that we see around us [moving or unmoving], disappear [at the time of their destruction. And at the time of their appearance,] they appear from prāṇa. Prāṇa is that deity to whom the prastāva is addressed. If you had sung the hymn not knowing the deity to whom it is addressed, in spite of being warned by me, your head would surely have fallen’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prāṇa iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said, it is prāṇa [the vital force]; ha vai, for; imāni sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all these beings [moving or unmoving]; prāṇam eva, in prāṇa; abhi, totally; saṃviśanti, disappear [at the time of destruction]; prāṇam abhi ujjihate, [and] out of prāṇa they appear [when they come into existence]; sā eṣā devatā, that [prāṇa] is the deity; prastāvam anvāyattā, the prastāva is addressed to; cet, if; tām, that [deity]; avidvān, from ignorance; prastoṣyaḥ, you had praised; [then] tathā, like that; mayā uktasya, in spite of being warned by me; te mūrdhā vyapatiṣyat iti, your head would surely have fallen. Commentary:-The prastotā had immediately stopped singing and then had approached Uṣasti in a humble manner. This pleased Uṣasti, and he gladly proceeded to teach the brāhmin.

Translation By Max Müller

5. He said:- 'Breath (prâna). For all these beings merge into breath alone, and from breath they arise. This is the deity belonging to the prastâva. If, without knowing that deity, you had sung forth your hymns, your head would have fallen off, after you had been warned by me.'


Sloka : 1.11.6

अथ हैनमुद्गातोपससादोद्गातर्या देवतोद्गीथमन्वायत्ता

तां चेदविद्वानुद्गास्यसि मूर्धा ते विपतिष्यतीति

मा भगवानवोचत्कतमा सा देवतेति ॥ १.११.६॥

atha hainamudgātopasasādodgātaryā devatodgīthamanvāyattā

tāṃ cedavidvānudgāsyasi mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti

mā bhagavānavocatkatamā sā devateti .. 1.11.6..



6. Then the udgātā came to [Uṣasti and said:-] ‘Revered sir, you told me, “O Udgātā, if you sing the udgītha without knowing anything about the deity to whom the hymn is addressed, your head will fall.” Please tell me who that deity is’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; udgātā, the person reciting the udgītha; ha enam upasasāda, came to him [i.e., to Uṣasti, and said]; bhagavān mā avocat, revered sir, you said to me; udgātaḥ yā devatā udgītham anvāyattā, O Udgātā, that deity to whom the udgītha is related; tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him; cet udgāsyasi, if you sing [about him]; te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall; katamā sā devatā iti, what is that deity? Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. Then the Udgâtri approached him, saying:- 'Sir, you said to me, "Udgâtri, if you, without knowing the deity which belongs to the udgîtha, are going to sing it, your head will fall off,"--which then is that deity?'


Sloka : 1.11.7

आदित्य इति होवाच सर्वाणि ह वा इमानि

भूतान्यादित्यमुच्चैः सन्तं गायन्ति सैषा

देवतोद्गीथमन्वायत्ता तां चेदविद्वानुदगास्यो

मूर्धा ते व्यपतिष्यत्तथोक्तस्य मयेति ॥ १.११.७॥

āditya iti hovāca sarvāṇi ha vā imāni

bhūtānyādityamuccaiḥ santaṃ gāyanti saiṣā

devatodgīthamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānudagāsyo

mūrdhā te vyapatiṣyattathoktasya mayeti .. 1.11.7..



7. Uṣasti said:- ‘It is āditya [the sun], for all these beings pay homage to the sun, which is high above. Āditya is that deity to whom the udgītha is addressed. If you had sung the udgītha not knowing the deity to whom it is addressed, your head would surely have fallen, as I had told you’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ādityaḥ iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said, it is āditya [the sun]; ha vai for; imāni sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all these beings [moving and unmoving]; uccaiḥ santam ādityam gāyanti, sing in praise of āditya, who is high above; sā eṣā devatā, that [āditya] is the deity; udgītham anvāyattā, the udgītha is addressed to; cet, if; tām, that [deity]; avidvān, from ignorance;’ udgāsyaḥ you had sung the udgītha; [then] tathā, like that; mayā uktasya, in spite of being warned by me; te mūrdhā vyapatiṣyat iti, your head would surely have fallen. Commentary:-Earlier, prāṇa was described as the deity of the prastāva. The word prāṇa begins with pra, and prastāva also begins with pra. It is surmised that this is why prāṇa is the deity of the prastāva. By the same token, the udgītha is addressed to āditya, the sun, for āditya is urdhatva, which is ut (high), and udgītha is also ut. Therefore it is reasonable that the deity of the udgītha should be āditya.

Translation By Max Müller

7. He said:- 'The sun (âditya). For all these beings praise the sun when it stands on high. This is the deity belonging to the udgîtha. If, without knowing that deity, you had sung out your hymns, your head would have fallen off, after you had been warned by me.'


Sloka : 1.11.8

अथ हैनं प्रतिहर्तोपससाद प्रतिहर्तर्या देवता

प्रतिहारमन्वायत्ता तां चेदविद्वान्प्रतिहरिष्यसि

मूर्धा ते विपतिष्यतीति मा भगवानवोचत्कतमा

सा देवतेति ॥ १.११.८॥

atha hainaṃ pratihartopasasāda pratihartaryā devatā

pratihāramanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānpratihariṣyasi

mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti mā bhagavānavocatkatamā

sā devateti .. 1.11.8..



8. Next, the pratihartā came to [Uṣasti and said:-] ‘Revered sir, you told me, “O Pratihartā, if you sing the pratihāra without knowing anything about the deity to whom the hymn is addressed, your head will fall.” Please tell me who that deity is’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; pratihartā, the person reciting the pratihāra; ha enam upasasāda, came to him [i.e., to Uṣasti, and said]; bhagavān mā avocat, revered sir, you said to me; pratihartaḥ yā devatā pratihāram anvāyattā, O Pratihartā, that deity to whom the pratihāra is related; tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him; cet pratihariṣyasi, if you sing the pratihāra; te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall; katamā sā devatā iti, what is that deity? Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

8. Then the Pratihartri approached him, saying:- 'Sir, you said to me, "Pratihartri, if you, without knowing the deity belonging to the pratihâra, are going to sing it, your head will fall off,"--Which then is that deity?'


Sloka : 1.11.9

अन्नमिति होवाच सर्वाणि ह वा इमानि भूतन्यन्नमेव

प्रतिहरमाणानि जीवन्ति सैषा देवता प्रतिहारमन्वायत्ता

तां चेदविद्वान्प्रत्यहरिष्यो मूर्धा ते व्यपतिष्यत्तथोक्तस्य

मयेति तथोक्तस्य मयेति ॥ १.११.९॥

annamiti hovāca sarvāṇi ha vā imāni bhūtanyannameva

pratiharamāṇāni jīvanti saiṣā devatā pratihāramanvāyattā

tāṃ cedavidvānpratyahariṣyo mūrdhā te vyapatiṣyattathoktasya

mayeti tathoktasya mayeti .. 1.11.9..



9. Uṣasti said:- ‘It is anna [food], for all these beings support themselves by eating food. Anna is that deity to whom the pratihāra is addressed. If you had sung the pratihāra not knowing the deity to whom it is addressed, your head would surely have fallen, as I had told you’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Annam iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said, it is anna [food]; ha vai, for; imāni sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all these beings; annam eva pratiharamāṇāni jīvanti, support themselves by collecting food; sā eṣā devatā, that [food] is the deity; pratihāram anvāyattā, the pratihāra is addressed to; cet, if; tām, that [deity]; avidvān, from ignorance; pratyahariṣyaḥ, you had sung the pratihāra; [then] tathā, like that; mayā uktasya, in spite of being warned by me; te mūrdhā vyapatiṣyat iti, your head would surely have fallen [the repetition is for the sake of emphasis]. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section. Commentary:-Every living being has to support itself by collecting food. It involves much effort, but each one has to make that effort. Prati means ‘each and every.’ The deity is pratihāra because each and every being has to ‘collect’ (āharam) food for himself. In short, you worship prāṇa (the vital force) through the prastāva, āditya (the sun) through the udgītha, and anna (food) through the pratihāra. What is the result of this? The result is progress in every way.

Translation By Max Müller

9. He said:- 'Food (anna). For all these beings live when they partake of food. This is the deity belonging to the pratihâra. If, without knowing that deity, you had sung your hymns, your head would have fallen off, after you had been warned by me [1].'

Footnote:

1.


Sloka : 1.12.1

॥ इति एकादशः खण्डः ॥

अथातः शौव उद्गीथस्तद्ध बको दाल्भ्यो ग्लावो वा

मैत्रेयः स्वाध्यायमुद्वव्राज ॥ १.१२.१॥

.. iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

athātaḥ śauva udgīthastaddha bako dālbhyo glāvo vā

maitreyaḥ svādhyāyamudvavrāja .. 1.12.1..



1. Now, an udgītha [to food] sung by dogs. The story is:- Baka Dālbhya, who was also known as Glāva Maitreya, went one day to a quiet place to study the scriptures [the udgītha].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ataḥ, since then; tat ha, in this connection; śauvaḥ udgīthaḥ, an udgītha [to food] sung by dogs [i.e., sages in the form of dogs]; bakaḥ dālbhyaḥ, Baka, the son of Dalbha; glāvaḥ maitreyaḥ vā, or Glāva, the son of Mitrā; svādhyāyam udvavrāja, went to a quiet place to study the scriptures [i.e., the udgītha]. Commentary:-Sometimes people are driven by hunger to eat ‘unclean’ food. The story of Uṣasti is an example. Here, in this section, a story is told of how some dogs avoid such a situation:- There was a sage who was known as Baka on his father’s side and Glāva on his mother’s side. Wanting to learn an udgītha that would bring him food, he went to a quiet place to study the scriptures.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Now follows the udgîtha of the dogs. Vaka Dâlbhya, or, as he was also called, Glâva Maitreya, went out to repeat the Veda (in a quiet place).


Sloka : 1.12.2

तस्मै श्वा श्वेतः प्रादुर्बभूव तमन्ये श्वान

उपसमेत्योचुरन्नं नो भगवानागायत्वशनायामवा

इति ॥ १.१२.२॥

tasmai śvā śvetaḥ prādurbabhūva tamanye śvāna

upasametyocurannaṃ no bhagavānāgāyatvaśanāyāmavā

iti .. 1.12.2..



2. A white dog appeared before him, as if he wanted to do the sage a favour. Then several other smaller dogs came to the white dog and said:- ‘O Lord, please sing for us. We are hungry and we want some food’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmai, [as a favour] to him; śvā, a dog; śvetāḥ, white; prādurbabhūva, appeared; tam, to him [i.e., to the white dog]; anye śvānaḥ, other dogs; upasametya, came; ūcuḥ, [and] said; annam, food; naḥ, for us; bhagavān, O Lord; āgāyatu, please sing; aśanāyāma vai iti, we are hungry [and want to eat]. Commentary:-It would seem that some god or sage was pleased with Baka’s Vedic studies and as a favour, appeared before him as a white dog. Then, as if by coincidence, some other smaller dogs approached the white dog and told him they were very hungry and needed food. They asked the white dog to sing the appropriate Sāma so that they could get some food immediately. Very likely, these small dogs were also sages in disguise. Another explanation is also possible:- The white dog represents prāṇa, and the smaller dogs are the sense organs controlled by prāṇa. Prāṇa is pleased when someone studies the scriptures. And if prāṇa is pleased, the sense organs are able to perceive their respective sense objects well. Like dogs, the sense organs are ‘hungry’ and enjoy perceiving. In order to express their appreciation of the scholar’s efforts, they appear before him as dogs.

Translation By Max Müller

2. A white (dog) appeared before him, and other dogs gathering round him, said to him:- 'Sir, sing and get us food, we are hungry.'


Sloka : 1.12.3

तान्होवाचेहैव मा प्रातरुपसमीयातेति तद्ध बको दाल्भ्यो

ग्लावो वा मैत्रेयः प्रतिपालयांचकार ॥ १.१२.३॥

tānhovācehaiva mā prātarupasamīyāteti taddha bako dālbhyo

glāvo vā maitreyaḥ pratipālayāṃcakāra .. 1.12.3..



3. [The white dog] replied, ‘All of you meet me here tomorrow morning.’ Baka Dālbhya, who was also known as Glāva Maitreya, waited there too [for the white dog].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tān, to them [the other dogs]; ha uvāca, [the white dog] said; iha eva, here; prātaḥ, tomorrow morning; mā upasamīyāta iti, all of you come to me; bakaḥ dālbhyaḥ glāvaḥ maitreyaḥ vā, Baka, the son of Dalbha, who was also known as Glāva, the son of Mitrā; pratipālayāñcakāra, waited [for the white dog]; tat ha, there. Commentary:-The smaller dogs were obviously very hungry, so why didn’t the white dog sing immediately? He asked them to come back in the morning because the morning is the best time to sing the udgītha. In the afternoon the sun turns away from us. He is the one who gives us food, and if he has already begun to turn away, it is too late to ask him to give us anything. Morning is the time when we are face to face with him, and that is why morning is the best time to make a request of him. The sage Baka came early the next morning also and waited for the white dog.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The white dog said to them:- 'Come to me to-morrow morning.' Vaka Dâlbhya, or, as he was also called, Glâva Maitreya, watched.


Sloka : 1.12.4

ते ह यथैवेदं बहिष्पवमानेन स्तोष्यमाणाः सꣳरब्धाः

सर्पन्तीत्येवमाससृपुस्ते ह समुपविश्य

हिं चक्रुः ॥ १.१२.४॥

te ha yathaivedaṃ bahiṣpavamānena stoṣyamāṇāḥ sagͫrabdhāḥ

sarpantītyevamāsasṛpuste ha samupaviśya

hiṃ cakruḥ .. 1.12.4..



4. Just as those who recite the hymn called bahiṣpavamāna move forward while touching each other, so the dogs also did the same. Then, sitting down, they said him.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te ha, they; yathā era, just as; idam, this; bahiṣpavamānena, by the hymn called bahiṣpavamāna; stoṣyamāṇaḥ, while reciting; saṃrabdhāḥ, touching each other; sarpanti, proceed; iti evam āsasṛpuḥ, went about this way; te ha, they; samupaviśya, sitting down; him, the word ‘him’; cakruḥ, uttered. Commentary:-When sages sing the hymn baḥiṣpavamāna, they join their hands together, or otherwise touch each other, and then they move forward. The dogs did likewise. Each took the tail of the one in front in its mouth and started moving. Finally they sat down and uttered the sound him.

Translation By Max Müller

4. The dogs came on, holding together, each dog keeping the tail of the preceding dog in his mouth, as the priests do when they are going to sing praises with the Vahishpavamâna hymn [1]. After they had settled down, they began to say Hiṅ.

Footnote:

1. This alludes to a ceremony where the priests have to walk in procession, each priest holding the gown of the preceding priest.


Sloka : 1.12.5

ओ३मदा३मों३पिबा३मों३ देवो वरुणः

प्रजपतिः सविता२न्नमिहा२हरदन्नपते३ऽन्नमिहा

२हरा२हरो३मिति ॥ १.१२.५॥

o3madā3moṃ3pibā3moṃ3 devo varuṇaḥ

prajapatiḥ savitā2nnamihā2haradannapate3'nnamihā

2harā2haro3miti .. 1.12.5..



5. ‘Om, we will eat. Om, we will drink. Om, Deva [the sun], Varuṇa, Prajāpati, Savitā, bring us food here. O Lord of food [the sun], bring us food here. Bring us food here. Om’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Om adāma, Om, we will eat; om pibāma, Om, we will drink; om devaḥ varuṇaḥ prajāpatiḥ savitā, Om Deva [the shining one], Varuṇa, Prajāpati, Savitā; annam iha āharat, bring food here; annapate annam iha āhara āhara om, O Lord of food, bring food here, bring [food here], Om. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section. Commentary:-This verse is also known as the hiṃkāra. The sun is the only thing that shines, so he is called here deva (that which shines). Varuṇa is the deity who gives rain, and Prajāpati protects all beings. Because Āditya, the sun, gives birth to all, he is known as Savitā. It is, in fact, Āditya who at one point gives us light, and at another gives us rain. It is because of him that there is food. This is why we ask him to bring us food (anna). As a mark of special respect, and also urgency, the request is repeated.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'Om, let us eat! Om, let us drink! Om, may the divine Varuna, Pragâpati, Savitri [1] bring us food! Lord of food, bring hither food, bring it, Om!'

Footnote:

1. The commentator explains Varuna and Pragâpati as epithets of Savitri, or the sun, meaning rain-giver and man-protector.


Sloka : 1.13.1

॥ इति द्वादशः खण्डः ॥

अयं वाव लोको हाउकारः वायुर्हाइकारश्चन्द्रमा

अथकारः । आत्मेहकारोऽग्निरीकारः ॥ १.१३.१॥

.. iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ayaṃ vāva loko hāukāraḥ vāyurhāikāraścandramā

athakāraḥ . ātmehakāro'gnirīkāraḥ .. 1.13.1..



1. This planet, the earth, is represented by the syllable hāu, air is represented by the syllable hāi, the moon





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ayam vāva lokaḥ hāukāraḥ, this earth [is known by] the syllable ‘hāu’; vāyuḥ hāikāraḥ, air by the syllable ‘hāi’; candramā athakāraḥ, the moon by the syllable ‘atha’; ātmā ihakāraḥ, the individual self by the syllable ‘iha’; agniḥ īkāraḥ, fire by the syllable ‘ī’. Commentary:-So long the Upaniṣad has shown how Sāma can be worshipped through the udgītha. Now another way of worshipping Sāma is being shown—through stobhas. Stobhas are syllables such as hiṃ, hāu, hāi, and so forth, and they are all from the Sāma Veda. By themselves these syllables have no meaning. They are symbols representing objects, or they are used to fill in gaps in sentences. The idea here is that stobhas like hāu should be applied to the earth, fire, etc. A symbol has to have something in common with the object it represents. The Sāma Veda says, ‘This earth is also called rathantara.’ And in the Sāma, the stobha hāu stands for rathantara. Thus, it is reasonable to say that hāu stands for the earth. The stobha hāi occurs in the Sāma called Vāmadevya. The Vāmadevya Sāma is about the relationship of air with water. This is why vāyu (air) is represented by the symbol hāi. Why is the moon represented by atha? This world is sustained by food (anna), and the moon and food are identical. A stands for anna, and tha stands for stha in sthita, which means ‘sustained.’ A plus tha is atha. Thus, atha can rightly be said to represent the moon. Then the self is said to be iha, which means ‘here’ or ‘this,’ for the self is obvious to everyone. And the stobha ī represents fire, because wherever fire is referred to in the Sāma, the words end with ī. The syllable ī then is rightly used as a symbol of fire, and to meditate on this symbol is to meditate on fire.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The syllable Hâu [1] is this world (the earth), the syllable Hâi [2] the air, the syllable Atha the moon, the syllable Iha the self, the syllable Π[3] is Agni, fire.

Footnote:

1. A stobha syllable used in the Rathantara Sâman. 2. Used in the Vâmadevya Sâman. 3. The Sâman addressed to Agni takes the syllable î as nidhana.


Sloka : 1.13.2

आदित्य ऊकारो निहव एकारो विश्वे देवा

औहोयिकारः प्रजपतिर्हिंकारः प्राणः स्वरोऽन्नं या

वाग्विराट् ॥ १.१३.२॥

āditya ūkāro nihava ekāro viśve devā

auhoyikāraḥ prajapatirhiṃkāraḥ prāṇaḥ svaro'nnaṃ yā

vāgvirāṭ .. 1.13.2..



2. Āditya, the sun, is represented by the stobha ū; nihava, the welcoming hymn, by the stobha e; the Viśvadeva gods by the stobha auhoyi; Prajāpati by the stobha hiṃ; prāṇa by the stobha svara; food by the stobha yā; and Virāṭ by the stobha vāk.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ādityaiḥ Āditya, the sun; ūkāraḥ, [is represented by] the stobha ‘ū’; nihavaiḥ the welcoming address; ekāraḥ, [is represented by] the stobha ‘e’; viśvedevāḥ, the Viśvadevas [i.e., a class of gods]; auhoyi-kāraḥ, [are represented by] the stobha ‘auhoyi’; prajāpatiḥ, Prajāpati [the Lord of all beings]; hiṃkāraḥ, [is represented by] the stobha ‘hiṃ’; prāṇaḥ, prāṇa [the presiding deity of life]; svaraḥ, [is represented by] the stobha ‘svara’; annam, food; yā, [is represented by] the stobha ‘yā’; virāṭ Virāṭ; vāk, [is represented by] the stobha ‘vāk’. Commentary:-Āditya, the sun, is far above in the sky. The letter ū suggests urdhvam, which means ‘above.’ So. in The word nihava means ‘welcome,’ which in Sanskrit is ehi. For this reason e stands for the nihava, the welcoming hymn. The stobha auhoyi stands for the Viśvadevas, the gods, for it occurs in the Sāma in honour of the Viśvadevas. The stobha hiṃ represents Prajāpati. No one knows the meaning of the word hiṃ; similarly, no one knows what Prajāpati, the Lord of all beings, is like. Prāṇa is represented by svara, because svara, the musical scale, is derived from prāṇa (the Lord of life, or the vital breath). Yā represents anna, food, for yāti (going) is possible because of food. The stobha vāk occurs in the Sāma called Vairāja or Virāṭa. Thus vāk stands for Virāṭ.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The syllable Û is the sun, the syllable E is the Nihava or invocation, the syllable Auhoi [1] is the Visve Devas, the syllable Hiṅ is Pragâpati, Svara [2] (tone) is breath (prâna), the syllable Yâ is food, the syllable Vâg [3] is Virâg.

Footnote:

1. The stobha syllables used in the Sâman addressed to the Visve Devas. 2. See Kh. Up. I, 4, 4. 3. The commentator takes vâg as a stobha, as a syllable occurring in hymns addressed to Virâg, and as implying either the deity Virâg or food.


Sloka : 1.13.3

अनिरुक्तस्त्रयोदशः स्तोभः संचरो हुंकारः ॥ १.१३.३॥

aniruktastrayodaśaḥ stobhaḥ saṃcaro huṃkāraḥ .. 1.13.3..



3. The thirteenth stobha huṃ is not clearly defined. Various scholars have defined it in various ways. [Thus, it is up to people to meditate on it as they like.]





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sañcaraḥ, variously interpreted; aniruktaḥ, not clearly defined; trayodaśaḥ stobhaḥ, the thirteenth stobha; huṅkāraḥ, the syllable ‘huṃ’. Commentary:-Earlier, twelve stobhas were explained along with how they could be used for meditation. Those stobhas are:- hāu, hāi, atha, iha, ī, ū, e, auhoyi, hiṃ, svara, yā, and vāk. Now the thirteenth stobha, huṃ, is being discussed. The Upaniṣad says here, however, that no one knows for certain what huṃ means, so people are free to meditate on it as they please.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The thirteenth stobha syllable, viz. the indistinct syllable Huṅ, is the Undefinable (the Highest Brahman).


Sloka : 1.13.4

दुग्धेऽस्मै वाग्दोहं यो वाचो दोहोऽन्नवानन्नादो भवति

य एतामेवꣳसाम्नामुपनिषदं वेदोपनिषदं वेदेति ॥ १.१३.४॥

dugdhe'smai vāgdohaṃ yo vāco doho'nnavānannādo bhavati

ya etāmevagͫsāmnāmupaniṣadaṃ vedopaniṣadaṃ vedeti .. 1.13.4..



4. To a person who knows the Sāma with its stobhas, as mentioned earlier, the organ of speech gives of its best. Such a person gets plenty of food to eat and can also eat much food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ, that person who; etām evam, this as stated earlier; sāmnām, the Sāma with its stobhas; upaniṣadam, the science of it; veda, knows; vācaḥ, of the organ of speech; yaḥ dohaḥ, the essence; doham, [that] essence; vāk, the organ of speech; asmai, to him [who knows]; dugdhe, gives; [saḥ, he]; annavān, rich with food; annādaḥ, a great eater of food; bhavati, becomes. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section. Iti chāndogya upaniṣadi prathamaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the first chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad. Commentary:-In the previous verses, mention was made of the stobhas. Now the benefit of meditating on them is being described. A person who knows the real import of those stobhas receives the best that the organ of speech has to offer.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Speech yields the milk, which is the milk of speech itself to him who knows this Upanishad (secret doctrine) of the Sâmans in this wise. He becomes rich in food, and able to eat food [1],--yea, able to eat food.

Footnote:

1. wealthy and healthy.


Sloka : 2.1.1

॥ इति त्रयोदशः खण्डः ॥

॥ इति प्रथमोऽध्यायः ॥

॥ द्वितीयोऽध्यायः ॥

समस्तस्य खलु साम्न उपासनꣳ साधु यत्खलु साधु

तत्सामेत्याचक्षते यदसाधु तदसामेति ॥ २.१.१॥

.. iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

.. iti prathamo'dhyāyaḥ ..

.. dvitīyo'dhyāyaḥ ..

samastasya khalu sāmna upāsanagͫ sādhu yatkhalu sādhu

tatsāmetyācakṣate yadasādhu tadasāmeti .. 2.1.1..



1. It is good to worship the Sāma with all its parts. All that is good, according to scholars, is called sāma. Similarly, all that is bad is asāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Samastasya khalu sāmnaḥ upāsanam, the worship of the Sāma as a whole [inclusive of all its parts]; sādhu, [is] good; yat khalu sādhu, whatever is good; tat sāma iti ācakṣate, that is called sāma; yat asādhu, whatever is bad; tat asāma iti, that is asāma. Commentary:-Much has been said already about the Sāma and the udgītha. And it has also been said that much good follows from their worship. Similarly, the Upaniṣad has discussed the stobhas and shown their importance. So long, the Sāma has been discussed in parts. Now it will be discussed as a whole. The point of this verse is to emphasize how beautiful it is to worship the Sāma. The Sāma is beautiful and to worship the Sāma is beautiful. The qualifying word used is sādhu. Sādhu means ‘good,’ ‘beautiful,’ ‘chaste,’ ‘elegant,’ and so on. It also means ‘honest,’ ‘morally sound,’ ‘beneficial,’ ‘perfect,’ and ‘above reproach.’ Anything opposed to sādhu is asāma.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Meditation on the whole [1] of the Sâman is good, and people, when anything is good, say it is Sâman; when it is not good, it is not Sâman.

Footnote:

1. Hitherto meditation on certain portions only of the Sâma-veda and the Sâma-sacrifice had been enjoined, and their deeper meaning explained. Now the same is done for the whole of the Sâman.


Sloka : 2.1.2

तदुताप्याहुः साम्नैनमुपागादिति साधुनैनमुपागादित्येव

तदाहुरसाम्नैनमुपागादित्यसाधुनैनमुपगादित्येव

तदाहुः ॥ २.१.२॥

tadutāpyāhuḥ sāmnainamupāgāditi sādhunainamupāgādityeva

tadāhurasāmnainamupāgādityasādhunainamupagādityeva

tadāhuḥ .. 2.1.2..



2. This is why people say, ‘He has succeeded in getting access to that distinguished person by virtue of sāma,’ when they mean he has gone to that distinguished person by honest and legitimate means. Similarly, they say, ‘By virtue of asāma he went to that distinguished person,’ when they mean he got to that person by unethical means.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat uta āhuḥ api, this is why people say; sāmnā, by virtue of sāma; enam, a [high-placed] person; upāgāt iti, someone got access to; sādhunā, [they mean] by good conduct; enam upāgāt iti eva, he got access to him; tat āhuḥ, [similarly] this is what people say; asāmnā, by virtue of asāma; enam upāgāt iti, he got access to him; asādhunā, [when they mean] by bad conduct; enam upāgāt iti eva, he got access to him; tat āhuḥ, this is what people say. Commentary:-The question is:- What is good and what is bad? Suppose you have to meet a very distinguished person who is far above you in status. It is very difficult to meet that person, but without doing anything wrong you are, somehow or other, able to meet him. This is called sādhu—fair, honest, good, beautiful, decent, elegant. The opposite of this is asādhu—bad, ugly, dishonest, condemnable.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Thus they also say, he approached him with Sâman, i. e. becomingly; and he approached him without Sâman, i. e. unbecomingly.


Sloka : 2.1.3

अथोताप्याहुः साम नो बतेति यत्साधु भवति साधु बतेत्येव

तदाहुरसाम नो बतेति यदसाधु भवत्यसाधु बतेत्येव

तदाहुः ॥ २.१.३॥

athotāpyāhuḥ sāma no bateti yatsādhu bhavati sādhu batetyeva

tadāhurasāma no bateti yadasādhu bhavatyasādhu batetyeva

tadāhuḥ .. 2.1.3..



3. Then when something good happens, people say, ‘It is sāma for us,’ when they mean that it is good for them. But when something bad happens, people say, ‘It is asāma for us,’ when they mean that it is bad for them.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha uta api, then also; āhuḥ, [people] say; naḥ bata sāma iti, it is sāma for us; yat sādhu bhavati, that which is good; sādhu bata id eva tat āhuḥ, the words mean that what is good has happened; naḥ bata asāma iti, [similarly, people say] it is asāma for us; yat asādhu bhavati, that which is bad; asādhu bata id eva tat āhuḥ, they mean to say that what is bad has happened. Commentary:-The words sādhu and sāma are synonymous. When people say, ‘We have had something sāma happen,’ they mean that they have had something sādhu happen. Both the words mean the same thing:- good, beautiful, fair, and so on.

Translation By Max Müller

3. And they also say, truly this is Sâman for us, i.e. it is good for us, when it is good; and truly that is not Sâman for us, i. e. it is not good for us, when it is not good.


Sloka : 2.1.4

स य एतदेवं विद्वानसाधु सामेत्युपास्तेऽभ्याशो ह यदेनꣳ

साधवो धर्मा आ च गच्छेयुरुप च नमेयुः ॥ २.१.४॥

sa ya etadevaṃ vidvānasādhu sāmetyupāste'bhyāśo ha yadenagͫ

sādhavo dharmā ā ca gaccheyurupa ca nameyuḥ .. 2.1.4..



4. If a person knows the Sāma as such and worships it with the awareness of the great qualities it possesses, those qualities very soon manifest themselves in him and become a source of happiness.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, whoever; etat, this [Sāma]; evam vidvān, knows in this way; sādhu sāma iti upāste, [and] worships Sāma as ‘sādhu’; enam, to this worshipper; sādhavaḥ dharmāḥ, the good qualities that are associated with a perfect [sādhu] person; abhyāśaḥ ha, quickly; yat āgaccheyuḥ ca, come; upa ca nameyuḥ, and are a source of satisfaction. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section. Commentary:-First and foremost, a person should know the good qualities of the Sāma. But that is not enough. He should also worship the Sāma along with those good qualities. Then those qualities will soon manifest themselves in him, and they will eventually become a great source of satisfaction too.

Translation By Max Müller

4. If any one knowing this meditates on the Sâman as good, depend upon it all good qualities will approach quickly, aye, they will become his own [1].

Footnote:

1. Cf. Kh. Up. III, 19, 4.


Sloka : 2.2.1

॥ इति प्रथमः खण्डः ॥

लोकेषु पञ्चविधꣳ सामोपासीत पृथिवी हिंकारः ।

अग्निः प्रस्तावोऽन्तरिक्षमुद्गीथ आदित्यः प्रतिहारो

द्यौर्निधनमित्यूर्ध्वेषु ॥ २.२.१॥

.. iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

lokeṣu pañcavidhagͫ sāmopāsīta pṛthivī hiṃkāraḥ .

agniḥ prastāvo'ntarikṣamudgītha ādityaḥ pratihāro

dyaurnidhanamityūrdhveṣu .. 2.2.1..



1. One should worship the Sāma in a fivefold manner, treating the different parts as symbols of the worlds.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one should worship the Sāma in a fivefold manner; lokeṣu, as the worlds [such as the earth]; hiṃkāraḥ, [for instance, thinking of] the syllable hiṃ; pṛthivī, [as] the earth; prastāvaḥ agniḥ, the prastāva as fire; udgīthaḥ antarikṣam, the udgītha as the sky; pratihāraḥ ādityaḥ, the pratihāra as the sun; nidhanam dyauḥ, the nidhana as heaven; ūrdhveṣu iti, which is up above. Commentary:-What is the meaning of sādhu? It may mean either dharma or Brahman. Both, however, mean the same thing, more or less. Those who worship Sāma should know that they are worshipping either of these two, and that they are worshipping something uplifting, something propitious (sādhu). When a person worships thus, he becomes what he is worshipping. He becomes a new person altogether. He is totally transformed. But where is a person to find the Sāma? This Sāma is everywhere, in everything—in the earth, in fire, in the sky, in the sun, and in heaven. But since you cannot approach all of these, you can worship them through their symbols. In this verse, five symbols have been mentioned, which can be used for worship:- hiṃkāra, prastāva, udgītha, pratihāra, and nidhana. This fivefold worship of Sāma is being recommended here for everyone.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Let a man meditate on the fivefold Sâman [1] as the five worlds. The hiṅkâra is, the earth, the prastâva the fire, the udgîtha the sky, the pratihâra the sun, the nidhana heaven; so in an ascending line.

Footnote:

1. The five forms in which the Sâman is used for sacrificial purposes. The Sâman is always to be under-stood as the Good, as Dharma, and as Brahman.


Sloka : 2.2.2

अथावृत्तेषु द्यौर्हिंकार आदित्यः

प्रस्तावोऽन्तरिक्षमुद्गीथोऽग्निः प्रतिहारः पृथिवी

निधनम् ॥ २.२.२॥

athāvṛtteṣu dyaurhiṃkāra ādityaḥ

prastāvo'ntarikṣamudgītho'gniḥ pratihāraḥ pṛthivī

nidhanam .. 2.2.2..



2. Now, the fivefold worship from the highest world to the lowest:- heaven is hiṃkāra, the sun is prastāva, the sky is udgītha, fire is pratihāra, and the earth is nidhana.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; āvṛtteṣu, from the highest [world] to the lowest; dyauḥ hiṃkāraḥ, the heaven is the syllable hiṃ; ādityaḥ prastāvaḥ, the sun is the prastāva; antarikṣam udgīthaḥ, the sky is the udgītha; agniḥ pratihāraḥ, fire is the pratihāra; pṛthivī nidhanam, the earth is nidhana. Commentary:-As Sāma is everywhere, it is also in the five worlds most familiar to us. Starting from the top, these five worlds are dyauḥ (heaven), āditya (the sun), antarikṣa (the sky), agni (fire), and pṛthivī (the earth). To meditate on Sāma in these worlds, then, we can use the five symbols, which are respectively:- hiṃkāra, prastāva, udgītha, pratihāra, and nidhana. When we use the term symbol, we understand that there is always a connection between the symbol and the thing symbolized. In this case, hiṃkāra is the first among the symbols, and heaven is the highest among the worlds. This is why hiṃkāra stands for heaven. Prastāva stands for the sun, for when the sun rises everyone gets ready to work. The word prastāva means ‘getting ready.’ The sky is gagana. It begins with ga, and the word udgītha also contains ga. So udgītha stands for gagana, the sky. Pratihāra stands for fire, because fire makes people ‘scatter’ (pratiharim). The earth is nidhana (extinction), for all things fall from above and finally disappear on the earth.

Translation By Max Müller

2. In a descending line, the hiṅkâra is heaven, the prastâva the sun, the udgîtha the sky, the pratihâra the fire, the nidhana the earth.


Sloka : 2.2.3

कल्पन्ते हास्मै लोका ऊर्ध्वाश्चावृत्ताश्च य एतदेवं

विद्वाꣳल्लोकेषु पञ्चविधं सामोपास्ते ॥ २.२.३॥

kalpante hāsmai lokā ūrdhvāścāvṛttāśca ya etadevaṃ

vidvāgͫllokeṣu pañcavidhaṃ sāmopāste .. 2.2.3..



3. He who worships Sāma with the above knowledge, and worships it in the fivefold manner as described, has all these worlds, from the lowest to the highest and from the highest to the lowest, for his enjoyment.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ, he who; etaṭ, this [Sāma]; evam, as such [i.e., as good]; vidvān, having known; lokeṣu, the worlds [the earth, etc.]; pañcavidham, fivefold [i.e., using hiṃ and the other four symbols]; sāma upāste, worships the Sāma; ūrdhvāḥ ca, going upwards; āvṛttāḥ ca, and coming downwards; lokāḥ ha asmai kalpante, the worlds are there for him to enjoy. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section. Commentary:-What benefit do you derive from worshipping Sāma in the worlds? The benefit is that you have all the five worlds—from the lowest to the highest and from the highest to the lowest—for your enjoyment. This is because you know Sāma is the essence of everything in these worlds.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The worlds in an ascending and in a descending line belong to him who knowing this meditates on the fivefold Sâman as the worlds [1].

Footnote:

1. The commentator supplies some fanciful reasons why each of the five Sâmans is identified with certain objects. Earth is said to be the hiṅkâra, because both always come first. Agni is prastâva, because sacrifices are praised in the fire (prastûyante). The sky is udgîtha, because it is also called gagana, and both words have the letter g in common. The sun is pratihâra, because everybody wishes the sun to come towards him (prati). Heaven is nidhana, because those who depart from here are placed there (nidhîyante), &c.


Sloka : 2.3.1

॥ इति द्वितीयः खण्डः ॥

वृष्टौ पञ्चविधꣳ सामोपासीत पुरोवातो हिंकारो

मेघो जायते स प्रस्तावो वर्षति स उद्गीथो विद्योतते

स्तनयति स प्रतिहार उद्गृह्णाति तन्निधनम् ॥ २.३.१॥

.. iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

vṛṣṭau pañcavidhagͫ sāmopāsīta purovāto hiṃkāro

megho jāyate sa prastāvo varṣati sa udgītho vidyotate

stanayati sa pratihāra udgṛhṇāti tannidhanam .. 2.3.1..



1. One can perform the fivefold Sāma worship during the rain. Think of the wind that comes before the rain as hiṃkāra. The clouds that gather are the prastāva, and the rain that follows is the udgītha. Then, when the lightning flashes and the thunder roars, that is pratihāra.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vṛṣṭau, in the rain; pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one can perform the fivefold Sāma worship; purovātaḥ, the wind that starts before the rainfall; hiṃkāraḥ, is hiṃkāra; meghaḥ jāyate, the clouds that gather; saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva; varṣati saḥ udgīthaḥ, [when] the rain falls that is the udgītha; vidyotate, [when] the lightning flashes; stanayati, [and] roars; saḥ pratihāra, that is the pratihāra. Commentary:-The syllable hiṃ indicates the beginning of something. When the wind starts blowing hard, we know that it will soon rain, so that is hiṃkāra. Then, when the clouds start gathering, that is the prastāva, for it means that rain is just about to start. Soon the rain follows. That is the udgītha, for the udgītha is always welcome. It is a blessing. The clouds produce lightning, and lightning is accompanied by thunder. That is the pratihāra, for the pratihāra is that which ‘scatters,’ or ‘spreads out,’ or is ‘extensive.’

Translation By Max Müller

1. Let a man meditate on the fivefold Sâman as rain. The hiṅkâra is wind (that brings the rain); the prastâva is, 'the cloud is come;' the udgîtha is, 'it rains;' the pratihâra, 'it flashes, it thunders;'


Sloka : 2.3.2

वर्षति हास्मै वर्षयति ह य एतदेवं विद्वान्वृष्टौ

पञ्चविधꣳसामोपास्ते ॥ २.३.२॥

varṣati hāsmai varṣayati ha ya etadevaṃ vidvānvṛṣṭau

pañcavidhagͫsāmopāste .. 2.3.2..



2. When the rain stops, that is the nidhana. If a person performs the fivefold Sāma worship, keeping all this in mind, clouds favour him with rain as he likes when the rain is due, and they may do him this favour even when rain is not due.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Udgṛhṇāti tat nidhanam, the end of the rainfall is the nidhana [literally, ‘the end’]; varṣati, it pours; ha asmai, for him [i.e., for the worshipper]; varṣayati, he causes rain to fall; ha yaḥ etat evam vidvān, he who, knowing all this as such; vṛṣṭau, in the rain; pañcavidham sāma upāste, performs the fivefold Sāma worship. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. The nidhana is, 'it stops.' There is rain for him, and he brings rain for others who thus knowing meditates on the fivefold Sâman as rain.


Sloka : 2.4.1

॥ इति तृतीयः खण्डः ॥

सर्वास्वप्सु पञ्चविधꣳसामोपासीत मेघो यत्सम्प्लवते

स हिंकारो यद्वर्षति स प्रस्तावो याः प्राच्यः स्यन्दन्ते

स उद्गीथो याः प्रतीच्यः स प्रतिहारः

समुद्रो निधनम् ॥ २.४.१॥

.. iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

sarvāsvapsu pañcavidhagͫsāmopāsīta megho yatsamplavate

sa hiṃkāro yadvarṣati sa prastāvo yāḥ prācyaḥ syandante

sa udgītho yāḥ pratīcyaḥ sa pratihāraḥ

samudro nidhanam .. 2.4.1..



1. One can perform the fivefold Sāma worship in all kinds of water. The coming together of scattered clouds is hiṃkāra. That which pours forth rain is the prastāva. The udgītha is that [river] running eastward, and that which runs westward is the pratihāra. The sea is the nidhana.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sarvāsu apsu, in all kinds of water; pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, a person should perform the fivefold Sāma worship; meghaḥ yat saṃplavate, the clouds which join together and consolidate; saḥ hiṃkāraḥ, that is hiṃkāra; yat varṣati, that which pours rain; saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva; yāḥ prācyaḥ syandante, that [water, or river] which goes eastward; saḥ udgīthaḥ, that is the udgītha; yāḥ pratīcyaḥ, that which goes westward; saḥ pratihāraḥ, that is the pratihāra; samudraḥ nidhanam, the sea is the nidhana. Commentary:-The fivefold Sāma worship can be performed in all forms of water. For instance, when clouds come together to produce rain, that can be thought of as hiṃkāra, because the syllable hiṃ marks the beginning. And when rain starts falling, that is thought of as the prastāva, because the rain is ‘ready’ to scatter in all directions. (This ‘readiness’ is prastāva.) The water, or river, that flows eastward (the Ganges, for instance) is called the udgītha, because both represent excellence. The water flowing westward (pratīcya) is the pratihāra, because of the prefix prāti being common to both. The sea is the nidhana, because when the water flows into the sea it loses its separate identity, which is ‘death’ (nidhana).

Translation By Max Müller

1. Let a man meditate on the fivefold Sâman in all waters. When the clouds gather, that is the hiṅkâra; when it rains, that is the prastâva that which flows in the east [1], that is the udgîtha that which flows in the west [2], that is the pratihâra the sea is the nidhana.

Footnote:

1. The Ganges, &c. Comm. 2. The Narmadâ, &c. Comm.


Sloka : 2.4.2

न हाप्सु प्रैत्यप्सुमान्भवति य एतदेवं विद्वान्सर्वास्वप्सु

पञ्चविधꣳसामोपास्ते ॥ २.४.२॥

na hāpsu praityapsumānbhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānsarvāsvapsu

pañcavidhagͫsāmopāste .. 2.4.2..



2. He who performs the fivefold Sāma worship in all forms of water, knowing it thus, will never be drowned in water unless he wishes to be, and he will have as much water as he wants.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ, he who; evam, as mentioned; etat, this [Sāma]; vidvān, having known; sarvāsu apsu, in all forms of water; pañcavidham sāma upāste, performs the fivefold worship of Sāma; [saḥ, that worshipper]; apsu, in water; na ha praiti, does not die [unless he wants to]; apsumān bhavati, he has much water at his disposal. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḥaḥ, here ends the fourth section. Commentary:-A person who performs this Sāma worship, taking water as the object of worship, will never be drowned unless he himself seeks his death that way. Also, he may be so lucky about water that he will even get it in a desert.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He does not die in water [1], nay, he is rich in water who knowing this meditates on the fivefold Sâman as all waters.

Footnote:

1. The commentator adds, 'unless he wishes to die in the Ganges.'


Sloka : 2.5.1

॥ इति चतुर्थः खण्डः ॥

ऋतुषु पञ्चविधꣳ सामोपासीत वसन्तो हिंकारः

ग्रीष्मः प्रस्तावो वर्षा उद्गीथः शरत्प्रतिहारो

हेमन्तो निधनम् ॥ २.५.१॥

.. iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ṛtuṣu pañcavidhagͫ sāmopāsīta vasanto hiṃkāraḥ

grīṣmaḥ prastāvo varṣā udgīthaḥ śaratpratihāro

hemanto nidhanam .. 2.5.1..



1. One can apply the same fivefold Sāma worship formula to the seasons. Treat spring as hiṃkāra, summer as the prastāva, the rainy season as the udgītha, autumn as the pratihāra, and winter as the nidhana.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ṛtuṣu, in the seasons [spring, etc.]; pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one should perform the fivefold Sāma worship; vasantaḥ hiṃkāraḥ, spring is hiṃkāra; grīṣmaḥ prastāvaḥ, summer is the prastāva; varṣāḥ udgīthaḥ, the rainy season is the udgītha; śarat pratihāraḥ, autumn Commentary:-Spring is the first among the seasons, just as hiṃkāra is the first among the Sāma stobhas. Summer is the prastāva, because in summer people ‘get ready’ to harvest. Then, the rainy season is very important for crops, just as the udgītha is important. Autumn is thought of as pratihāra, for that is the time when the old and the sick start being ‘taken away.’ Finally, winter is the nidhana, for that is the time when many people die.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Let a man meditate on the fivefold Sâman as the seasons. The hiṅkâra is spring, the prastâva summer (harvest of yava, &c.), the udgîtha the rainy season, the pratihâra autumn, the nidhana winter.


Sloka : 2.5.2

कल्पन्ते हास्मा ऋतव ऋतुमान्भवति य एतदेवं

विद्वानृतुषु पञ्चविधꣳ सामोपास्ते ॥ २.५.२॥

kalpante hāsmā ṛtava ṛtumānbhavati ya etadevaṃ

vidvānṛtuṣu pañcavidhagͫ sāmopāste .. 2.5.2..



2. To the person who knows this principle of the fivefold Sāma worship and applies it to the seasons thus, the seasons become a source of enjoyment, and the best things that each of them has to offer present themselves to him.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ, he who; etat evam vidvān, having known this [Sāma] as above; ṛtuṣu, in the seasons; pañcavi- dham sāma upāste, performs this fivefold Sāma worship; asmai, to him; ṛtavaḥ kalpante, the seasons come for his enjoyment; ha ṛtumān bhavati, and he also gets the pleasant things of those seasons for his enjoyment. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section. Commentary:-The change of seasons does not bother such a worshipper. Each of them is pleasant to hiṃ, and the best things that each of them has are easily available to him.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The seasons belong to him, nay, he is always in season (successful) who knowing this meditates on the fivefold Sâman as the seasons.


Sloka : 2.6.1

॥ इति पञ्चमः खण्डः ॥

पशुषु पञ्चविधꣳ सामोपासीताजा हिंकारोऽवयः

प्रस्तावो गाव उद्गीथोऽश्वाः प्रतिहारः

पुरुषो निधनम् ॥ २.६.१॥

.. iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

paśuṣu pañcavidhagͫ sāmopāsītājā hiṃkāro'vayaḥ

prastāvo gāva udgītho'śvāḥ pratihāraḥ

puruṣo nidhanam .. 2.6.1..



1. This is how a person can perform the fivefold Sāma worship in animals. Think of goats as hiṃkāra, sheep as the prastāva, cows as the udgītha, horses as the pratihāra, and human beings as the nidhana.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Paśuṣu, in animals; pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one can perform the fivefold Sāma worship; ajāḥ, goats; hiṃkāraḥ, are the syllable hiṃ; avayaḥ prastāvaḥ, sheep are the prastāva; gāvaḥ udgīthaḥ, cows are the udgītha; aśvāḥ pratihāraḥ, horses are the pratihāra; puruṣaḥ nidhanam, a human being is the nidhana. Commentary:-Goats are the most common of these animals, and they are also the most widely used in sacrifices. This is why they are given the first place as hiṃkāra. Ajā, goats, and avi, sheep, are often seen together, and they are very similar. So also, hiṃkāra and the prastāva are often together. This is why avi, sheep, are said to be the prastāva. Cows are the udgītha because they are superior to other animals, as the udgītha is superior. Then horses ‘carry’ (pratiharaṇa) people, so they are the pratihāra. And as animals ‘depend’ entirely upon human beings, so human beings are their nidhana (here, nidhana means ‘support’).

Translation By Max Müller

1. Let a man meditate on the fivefold Sâman in animals. The hiṅkâra is goats, the prastâva sheep, the udgîtha cows, the pratihâra horses, the nidhana man.


Sloka : 2.6.2

भवन्ति हास्य पशवः पशुमान्भवति य एतदेवं

विद्वान्पशुषु पञ्चविधꣳ सामोपास्ते ॥ २.६.२॥

bhavanti hāsya paśavaḥ paśumānbhavati ya etadevaṃ

vidvānpaśuṣu pañcavidhagͫ sāmopāste .. 2.6.2..



2. He who performs the fivefold Sāma worship in animals, knowing it in this way, gets many animals for his enjoyment, and he also has a large number of animals as his personal wealth.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ, he who; etat evam vidvān, having known this [Sāma] in this way; paśuṣu pañcavidham sāma upāste, performs the fivefold Sāma worship in animals; asya paśavaḥ bhavanti ha, he has many animals [for his enjoyment]; paśumān bhavati, he acquires a large number of animals [for his personal wealth]. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaiḥ here ends the sixth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. Animals belong to him, nay, he is rich in animals who knowing this meditates on the fivefold Sâman as animals.


Sloka : 2.7.1

॥ इति षष्ठः खण्डः ॥

प्राणेषु पञ्चविधं परोवरीयः सामोपासीत प्राणो

हिंकारो वाक्प्रस्तावश्चक्षुरुद्गीथः श्रोत्रं प्रतिहारो

मनो निधनं परोवरीयाꣳसि वा एतानि ॥ २.७.१॥

.. iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

prāṇeṣu pañcavidhaṃ parovarīyaḥ sāmopāsīta prāṇo

hiṃkāro vākprastāvaścakṣurudgīthaḥ śrotraṃ pratihāro

mano nidhanaṃ parovarīyāgͫsi vā etāni .. 2.7.1..



1. One should perform the fivefold worship of Sāma in the organs in an increasingly higher way. The organ of smell is hiṃkāra, the organ of speech is the prastāva, the eyes are the udgītha, the ears are the pratihāra, and the mind is the nidhana. These organs should be worshipped, each with greater respect than the previous one.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prāṇeṣu pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one should perform the fivefold worship of Sāma in all forms of prāṇa, the vital breath [or, the organs]; parovarīyaḥ, in an increasingly better way; prāṇaḥ hiṃkāraḥ, prāṇa [or, the organ of smell] is hiṃkāra; vāk prastāvaḥ, the organ of speech is the prastāva; cakṣuḥ udgīthaḥ, the eyes are the udgītha; śrotram pratihāraḥ, the ears are the pratihāra; manaḥ nidhanam, the mind is the nidhana; etāni parovarīyāṃsi vai, all these should be worshipped, each more than the one before. Commentary:-The first prāṇa is the organ of smelling. This may be regarded as hiṃkāra. Then the organ of speech may be regarded as the prastāva, for through speech we propose (prastāva) to do something. The organ of speech is superior to the organ of smelling because we express our thoughts through speech. The eyes are better than the organ of speech, because through the eyes we can express even more than what we can through speech, so the eyes are the udgītha. The ears are the pratihāra, and they are superior to the eyes because the ears can hear more than the eyes can see. The mind is the nidhana, and it is superior to all other organs. Whatever the other organs collect is all stored in the mind. Also the mind can grasp things that no other organ can perceive.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Let a man meditate on the fivefold Sâman, which is greater than great, as the prânas (senses). The hiṅkâra is smell [1] (nose), the prastâva speech (tongue), the udgîtha sight (eye), the pratihâra hearing (ear), the nidhana mind. These are one greater than the other.

Footnote:

1. Prâna is explained by ghrâna, smell; possibly ghrâna may have been the original reading. Anyhow, it cannot be the mukhya prâna here, because it is distinctly represented as the lowest sense.


Sloka : 2.7.2

परोवरीयो हास्य भवति परोवरीयसो ह लोकाञ्जयति

य एतदेवं विद्वान्प्राणेषु पञ्चविधं परोवरीयः

सामोपास्त इति तु पञ्चविधस्य ॥ २.७.२॥

parovarīyo hāsya bhavati parovarīyaso ha lokāñjayati

ya etadevaṃ vidvānprāṇeṣu pañcavidhaṃ parovarīyaḥ

sāmopāsta iti tu pañcavidhasya .. 2.7.2..



2. When a person knows the fivefold Sāma worship and performs it in the organs, paying to each of the organs more respect than to the last, his life becomes more and more excellent, and he also attains better and better worlds.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ, he who; etat evam vidvān, having known this thus; prāṇeṣu, in the organs; pañcavidham sāma upāste, performs the fivefold Sāma worship; parovarīyaḥ, in an increasingly higher order; asya, his [life]; parovarīyaḥ ha bhavati, becomes increasingly more excellent; parovarīyasaḥ ha lokān jāyati, he also attains increasingly higher worlds; iti tu pañcavidhasya, this is the benefit of the fivefold [Sāma worship]. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section. Commentary:-Here much attention has been given to the fivefold Sāma worship. This is only to prepare the worshipper for the next step, in which he will be asked to perform the sevenfold Sāma worship. It would be quite all right, however, if he bypasses the fivefold worship and goes straight to the sevenfold worship.

Translation By Max Müller

2. What is greater than great belongs to him, nay, he conquers the worlds which are greater than great, who knowing this meditates on the fivefold Sâman, which is greater than great, as the prânas (senses).


Sloka : 2.8.1

॥ इति सप्तमः खण्डः ॥

अथ सप्तविधस्य वाचि सप्तविध्ꣳ सामोपासीत

यत्किंच वाचो हुमिति स हिंकारो यत्प्रेति स प्रस्तावो

यदेति स आदिः ॥ २.८.१॥

.. iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha saptavidhasya vāci saptavidhgͫ sāmopāsīta

yatkiṃca vāco humiti sa hiṃkāro yatpreti sa prastāvo

yadeti sa ādiḥ .. 2.8.1..



1. Now begins a discussion on the sevenfold Sāma worship. One can perform this sevenfold Sāma worship in speech. Wherever the syllable huṃ occurs in speech, that is hiṃkāra. Similarly, wherever the syllable pra occurs, that is to be taken for the prastāva. And wherever ā occurs, that is ādi [the beginning].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; saptavidhasya, [a discussion] on the sevenfold [Sāma worship]; saptavidham sāma upāsīta, one should perform the sevenfold worship of Sāma; vāci, in speech; yāt kiṃca vācaḥ huṃ iti, in whatever speech occurs the syllable ‘huṃ’; saḥ hiṃkāraḥ, that is the syllable ‘hiṃ’; yat pra iti, where the syllable ‘pra’ occurs; saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva; yat ā iti, where ‘ā’ occurs; saḥ ādiḥ, that is to be taken for ādi [the beginning]. Commentary:-The fivefold Sāma worship has been discussed. Now The first meditation is on speech. Sometimes you may come across the sound huṃ in speech. This sound is to be thought of as hiṃkāra, because the letter h is common in both. Then, when you come across the sound pra, that is to be thought of as the prastāva. The sound ā in speech is to be thought of as ādi. But what is ādi? Ādi is that with which you begin something. It is Om, for everything in the Vedas starts with Om.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Next for the sevenfold Sâman. Let a man meditate on the sevenfold Sâman in speech. Whenever there is in speech the syllable huṅ [1], that is hiṅkâra, pra is the prastâva, â is the âdi, the first, i.e. Om,

Footnote:

1. These are again the stobhâksharas, or musical syllables used in the performance of the Sâman hymns; see .


Sloka : 2.8.2

यदुदिति स उद्गीथो यत्प्रतीति स प्रतिहारो

यदुपेति स उपद्रवो यन्नीति तन्निधनम् ॥ २.८.२॥

yaduditi sa udgītho yatpratīti sa pratihāro

yadupeti sa upadravo yannīti tannidhanam .. 2.8.2..



2. Wherever the syllable ut occurs, that is the udgītha. Where there is prati, that is the pratihāra. Where you find upa, that is the upadrava. And where you find ni, that is the nidhana.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yat ut iti, where there is the sound ‘ut’; saḥ udgīthaḥ, that is the udgītha; yat prati iti, where there is the sound ‘prati’; saḥ pratihāraḥ, that is the pratihāra; yat upa iti, where there is the sound ‘upa’; saḥ upadravaḥ, that is the upadrava [upadrava is anything in praise of the Sāma]; yat ni iti, where there is the syllable ‘ni’; tat nidhanam, that is the nidhana. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Ud is the udgîtha, pra the pratihâra, upa the upadrava, ni the nidhana.


Sloka : 2.8.3

दुग्धेऽस्मै वाग्दोहं यो वाचो दोहोऽन्नवानन्नादो भवति

य एतदेवं विद्वान्वाचि सप्तविधꣳ सामोपास्ते ॥ २.८.३॥

dugdhe'smai vāgdohaṃ yo vāco doho'nnavānannādo bhavati

ya etadevaṃ vidvānvāci saptavidhagͫ sāmopāste .. 2.8.3..



3. He who knows Sāma in this way, and performs the sevenfold Sāma worship in speech, gets from speech whatever good things it has to offer. He also gets plenty of food to eat, and he eats that food [and thereby looks radiant in health].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ, the person who; etat evam vidvān, having known this [about the Sāma]; vāci, in speech; saptavidham sāma upāste, performs the sevenfold Sāma worship; asmai, to him [i.e., to the worshipper]; vāk, speech; doham, milk [i.e., a good, precious gift]; yaḥ vācaḥ dohaḥ, which is the essence of the words; dugdhe, presents; annavān annādaḥ bhavati, he has plenty of food and he eats it [thereby becoming radiant]. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

3. Speech yields the milk, which is the milk of speech itself, to him who knowing this meditates on the sevenfold Sâman in speech. He becomes rich in food, and able to eat food.


Sloka : 2.9.1

॥ इति अष्टमः खण्डः ॥

अथ खल्वमुमादित्यꣳसप्तविधꣳ सामोपासीत सर्वदा

समस्तेन साम मां प्रति मां प्रतीति सर्वेण

समस्तेन साम ॥ २.९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha khalvamumādityagͫsaptavidhagͫ sāmopāsīta sarvadā

samastena sāma māṃ prati māṃ pratīti sarveṇa

samastena sāma .. 2.9.1..



1. Next, without fail, worship the sevenfold Sāma in the sun. The sun is the Sāma because it is always the same. Again, the sun makes each of us think, ‘It is looking at me. It is looking at me.’ Because it is the same to all, it is called Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; khalu, for certain; amum ādityam, the sun over there; saptavidham sāma upāsīta, worship as the sevenfold Sāma; sarvadā samaḥ, [the sun is] always the same; tena, therefore; sāma, [the sun is] Sāma; mām prati mām prati, [for instance, ‘It is looking] at me, [it is looking] at me’; iti, in this way [it makes everyone think]; sarveṇa samaḥ, it is the same to all; tena, for this reason; sāma, [the sun is called] Sāma. Commentary:-The question is, how can the sun be identified with the Sāma? The sun is always the same [i.e., sama], for it never changes. This is where the sun and the Sāma are the same. Again, when we look at the sun, we all think it is turned towards us. Similarly, the Sāma is also the same for everyone.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Let a man meditate on the sevenfold Sâman as the sun. The sun is Sâman, because he is always the same (sama); he is Sâman because he is the same, everybody thinking he looks towards me, he looks towards me [1].

Footnote:

1. Cf. Kh. Up. II, 2, 2. Comm.


Sloka : 2.9.2

तस्मिन्निमानि सर्वाणि भूतान्यन्वायत्तानीति

विद्यात्तस्य यत्पुरोदयात्स हिंकारस्तदस्य

पशवोऽन्वायत्तास्तस्मात्ते हिं कुर्वन्ति

हिंकारभाजिनो ह्येतस्य साम्नः ॥ २.९.२॥

tasminnimāni sarvāṇi bhūtānyanvāyattānīti

vidyāttasya yatpurodayātsa hiṃkārastadasya

paśavo'nvāyattāstasmātte hiṃ kurvanti

hiṃkārabhājino hyetasya sāmnaḥ .. 2.9.2..



2. One should know that all beings that exist are dependent on the sun. The sun has a distinctive look before it rises, and that look is its hiṃkāra. The animals, who are dependent on the sun, also have their share in this hiṃkāra. That is why they make the sound hiṃ.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmin, on that [i.e., the sun]; imāni sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all these beings; anvāyattāni, are dependent; iti vidyāt, one should know this; tasya, of that [sun]; yat, the way [it looks then]; purodayāt, before it rises; saḥ, that [form]; hiṃkāraḥ, is hiṃkāra; paśavaḥ, the animals; tat asya anvāyattāḥ, are dependent on that [form] of it [i.e., of the sun as Sāma]; tasmāt, this is why; te, they; hiṃ kurvanti, make the sound hiṃ; hiṃkārabhājinaḥ hi etasya sāmnaḥ, they share in the hiṃkāra of the Sāma. Commentary:-As the sun rises, it has a very pleasant and favourable look. This is called hiṃkāra. It is an expression of love and adoration for the Sāma. The animals are devoted to this hiṃkāra, for they also make the sound hiṃ as the sun rises. This is how they pay their tribute to the hiṃkāra of the Sāma.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Let him know that all beings are dependent on him (the sun). What he is before his rising, that is the hiṅkâra. On it animals are dependent. Therefore animals say hiṅ (before sunrise), for they share the hiṅkâra of that Sâman (the sun).


Sloka : 2.9.3

अथ यत्प्रथमोदिते स प्रस्तावस्तदस्य मनुष्या

अन्वायत्तास्तस्मात्ते प्रस्तुतिकामाः प्रशꣳसाकामाः

प्रस्तावभाजिनो ह्येतस्य साम्नः ॥ २.९.३॥

atha yatprathamodite sa prastāvastadasya manuṣyā

anvāyattāstasmātte prastutikāmāḥ praśagͫsākāmāḥ

prastāvabhājino hyetasya sāmnaḥ .. 2.9.3..



3. Next, the form that the sun has shortly after it rises is the prastāva. Human beings are charmed by that form. Because they join in the praise and adoration of the prastāva, they seek adoration and praise for themselves.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Athā, next; yatprathamodite [i.e., prathama + udite], that [form] which [the sun has] when it first rises; saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva; manuṣyāḥ, all human beings; tat asya anvāyattāḥ, are charmed by that [form] of it [i.e., of the sun, which is the Sāma]; tasmāt, this is why; te, they; prastutikāmāḥ, wanting praise; praśaṃsākāmāḥ, wanting adoration; prastāvabhājinaḥ hi etasya sāmnaḥ, they join in the prastāva of the Sāma. Commentary:-The beauty that the sun has as it rises in the morning is the Sāma prastāva addressed to the sun god (Āditya). Human beings are under the spell of this beauty. And as they have the habit of praising and adoring the prastāva of the Sāma, they also desire praise and adoration for themselves. Praise means the good words you say about a person in his presence, and adoration means the good thoughts you cherish in your mind about that person.

Translation By Max Müller

3. What he is when first risen, that is the prastâva. On it men are dependent. Therefore men love praise (prastuti) and celebrity, for they share the prastâva of that Sâman.


Sloka : 2.9.4

अथ यत्संगववेलायाꣳ स आदिस्तदस्य वयाꣳस्यन्वायत्तानि

तस्मात्तान्यन्तरिक्षेऽनारम्बणान्यादायात्मानं

परिपतन्त्यादिभाजीनि ह्येतस्य साम्नः ॥ २.९.४॥

atha yatsaṃgavavelāyāgͫ sa ādistadasya vayāgͫsyanvāyattāni

tasmāttānyantarikṣe'nārambaṇānyādāyātmānaṃ

paripatantyādibhājīni hyetasya sāmnaḥ .. 2.9.4..



4. Next, when the sun-rays spread all over a short while after sunrise, that form of the sun is the ādi of the Sāma. This form is connected with the birds. They somehow or other feel they have a safe shelter then, and that is why they are able to fly freely about in the sky without any support. They also behave as if they are joining in the ādi offered to the Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat, that; saṅgavavelāyām, in the morning [i.e., after sunrise, when the sunlight has spread far and wide]; saḥ ādiḥ, that is the ādi [of the Sāma worship]; vayāṃsi, birds; tat asya, that form of the sun [at that time]; anvāyattāni, makes them feel secure; tasmāt, this is why; tāni, they [the birds]; anārambaṇāni, without any support; ātmānam, their own bodies; ādāya, Commentary:-The sight of the sun after sunrise fascinates the birds. The form of the sun at this time is the ādi (or Om) of the Sāma, and the birds feel they are a part of this ādi. They feel secure. Though they have no support, they are able to fly about in the sky freely. It is as if they are joining in the ādi hymn offered to the Sāma. As the birds fly, they depend on their own ‘self’ (ātman). Because the words ātman and ādi have the common ā, the birds feel drawn towards the ādi.

Translation By Max Müller

4. What he is at the time of the saṅgava [1], that is the âdi, the first, the Om. On it birds are dependent. Therefore birds fly about in the sky without support, holding themselves, for they share the âdi [2] (the Om) of that Sâman.

Footnote:

1. When the sun puts forth his rays, and when the cows are together with their calves, i.e. as Rajendralal Mitra says, after the cows have been milked and are allowed by the cowherds to suckle their young. 2. The tertium comparationis is here the â of âdi and the â of âdâya, i. e. holding. The d might have been added.


Sloka : 2.9.5

अथ यत्सम्प्रतिमध्यंदिने स उद्गीथस्तदस्य

देवा अन्वायत्तास्तस्मात्ते सत्तमाः

प्राजापत्यानामुद्गीथभाजिनो ह्येतस्य साम्नः ॥ २.९.५॥

atha yatsampratimadhyaṃdine sa udgīthastadasya

devā anvāyattāstasmātte sattamāḥ

prājāpatyānāmudgīthabhājino hyetasya sāmnaḥ .. 2.9.5..



5. Next, that form of the sun which it has exactly at noon is the udgītha. That form is connected with the gods and goddesses. Therefore, among all of Prajāpati’s children, the gods and goddesses are considered to be the best, because they take part in singing the udgītha of the Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat, that; samprati madhyandine, precisely at noon; saḥ udgīthaḥ, that [form of the sun] is the udgītha; devāḥ, the gods and goddesses; tat asya, that form of the sun [at that time]; anvāyattāni, are part of; tasmāt, therefore; prājāpatyānām, among all of Prajāpati’s children; te, they [the gods and goddesses]; sattamāḥ, are deemed the best; hi, because; etasya sāmnaḥ udgīthabhājinaḥ, they join in the udgītha of the Sāma. Commentary:-At midday the sun is at its brightest, and its form suggests that it is offering an udgītha. The gods and goddesses are devoted to the sun at this time, so they join in the offering of the udgītha. This is why they are the dearest to Prajāpati of all his children.

Translation By Max Müller

5. What he is just at noon, that is the udgîtha. On it the Devas are dependent (because they are brilliant). Therefore they are the best of all the descendants of Pragâpati, for they share the udgîtha of that Sâman.


Sloka : 2.9.6

अथ यदूर्ध्वं मध्यंदिनात्प्रागपराह्णात्स

प्रतिहारस्तदस्य गर्भा अन्वायत्तास्तस्मात्ते

प्रतिहृतानावपद्यन्ते प्रतिहारभाजिनो

ह्येतस्य साम्नः ॥ २.९.६॥

atha yadūrdhvaṃ madhyaṃdinātprāgaparāhṇātsa

pratihārastadasya garbhā anvāyattāstasmātte

pratihṛtānāvapadyante pratihārabhājino

hyetasya sāmnaḥ .. 2.9.6..



6. Next, between the noon and the afternoon, the sight the sun presents is that of the pratihāra. The foetuses in the wombs are attached to this pratihāra. This is why they are held up and do not drop down, and why they are entitled to take part in the pratihāra addressed to the Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat, that; ūrdhvam madhyandināt, after midday; prāk aparāhṇāt, before afternoon; saḥ pratihāra, that is the pratihāra; garbhāḥ, the foetuses in the womb; tat asya, that [form] of [the sun]; anvāyattāḥ are attached to; tasmāt, that is why; te, those [foetuses]; pratihṛtāḥ, are held up; na avapadyante, [and] do not drop down; hi, for that reason; etasya sāmnaḥ pratihārabhājinaḥ, they are entitled to share in the pratihāra of the Sāma. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. What he is after midday and before afternoon, that is the pratihâra. On it all germs are dependent. Therefore these, having been conceived (pratihrita), do not fall, for they share the pratihâra of that Sâman.


Sloka : 2.9.7

अथ यदूर्ध्वमपराह्णात्प्रागस्तमयात्स

उपद्रवस्तदस्यारण्या अन्वायत्तास्तस्मात्ते पुरुषं

दृष्ट्वा कक्षꣳश्वभ्रमित्युपद्रवन्त्युपद्रवभाजिनो

ह्येतस्य साम्नः ॥ २.९.७॥

atha yadūrdhvamaparāhṇātprāgastamayātsa

upadravastadasyāraṇyā anvāyattāstasmātte puruṣaṃ

dṛṣṭvā kakṣagͫśvabhramityupadravantyupadravabhājino

hyetasya sāmnaḥ .. 2.9.7..



7. Next, the form that the sun has between the afternoon and sunset is called the upadrava. Wild animals are fond of this form, for when the sun is in that position, the wild animals are able to scurry away into the forest or into their holes if they see a human being. These animals are also able to take part in the upadrava to the Sāma.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat, that; ūrdhvam aparāhṇāt, as the afternoon begins; prāk astamayāt, before sunset; saḥ upadravaḥ, that is the upadrava; āraṇyāḥ, wild animals; tat asya, that [form] of [the sun]; anvāyattāḥ, are attached to; tasmāt, that is why; te, those [wild animals]; puruṣam, a human being; dṛṣṭvā, seeing; kakṣam, into their lair [or, the forest]; śvabhram, a hole; upadravanti, quickly run to; hi, for this reason; etasya sāmnaḥ upadravabhājinaḥ, they join in the upadrava offered to the Sāma. Commentary:-In the later part of the afternoon, the animals are able to find food to sustain themselves, and they can also watch out for human beings. If they see one, they hurry back to the forest or to any place where they feel safe. Their going away in haste (upadruta) suggests that they worship the upadrava (i.e., ‘going back’) of the Sāma.

Translation By Max Müller

7. What he is after the afternoon and before sunset, that is the upadrava. On it the animals of the forest are dependent. Therefore, when they see a man, they run (upadravanti) to the forest as a safe hiding-place, for they share the upadrava of that Sâman.


Sloka : 2.9.8

अथ यत्प्रथमास्तमिते तन्निधनं तदस्य

पितरोऽन्वायत्तास्तस्मात्तान्निदधति निधनभाजिनो

ह्येतस्य साम्न एवं खल्वमुमादित्यꣳ सप्तविधꣳ

सामोपास्ते ॥ २.९.८॥

atha yatprathamāstamite tannidhanaṃ tadasya

pitaro'nvāyattāstasmāttānnidadhati nidhanabhājino

hyetasya sāmna evaṃ khalvamumādityagͫ saptavidhagͫ

sāmopāste .. 2.9.8..



8. Next, the nidhana is the form of the sun as it sets. The ancestors love this form of the sun, and this is why, as the sun sets, offerings are made to them [or, are placed on straws in honour of them at the time the śrāddha rites are performed]. For this reason, the ancestors participate in the nidhana in honour of the Sāma. This is how the sun is offered the sevenfold Sāma worship.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat, that; prathamāstamite [he., prathama + astamite], just as the sun sets; tat nidhanam, that is the nidhana; pitaraḥ, the ancestors; tat asya, that [form] of [the sun]; anvāyattāḥ, are attached to; tasmāt, therefore; tān, them; nidadhati, one places on straws [or, one places offerings to the ancestors on straws while performing special rites in their honour]; hi, for this reason; etasya sāmnaḥ nidhanabhājinaḥ, they participate in the nidhana in honour of the Sāma; khalu amum ādityam saptavidham sāma upāste, this is how the sun is offered the sevenfold Sāma worship. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section. Commentary:-Because the ancestors love the form of the sun as it sets, people honour them at that time of the day by placing offerings to them on straw. And while doing so, they sing the nidhana hymn of the Sāma. If a person performs the sevenfold Sāma worship with the feeling that he is worshipping the sun this way, he becomes one with the sun.

Translation By Max Müller

8. What he is when he first sets, that is the nidhana. On it the fathers are dependent. Therefore they put them [1] down (nidadhati), for they share the nidhana of that Sâman. Thus a man meditates on the sevenfold Sâman as the sun.

Footnote:

1. The cakes for the ancestral spirits, or the spirits themselves.


Sloka : 2.10.1

॥ इति नवमः खण्डः ॥

अथ खल्वात्मसंमितमतिमृत्यु सप्तविधꣳ

सामोपासीत हिंकार इति त्र्यक्षरं प्रस्ताव

इति त्र्यक्षरं तत्समम् ॥ २.१०.१॥

.. iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha khalvātmasaṃmitamatimṛtyu saptavidhagͫ

sāmopāsīta hiṃkāra iti tryakṣaraṃ prastāva

iti tryakṣaraṃ tatsamam .. 2.10.1..



1. After worshipping the Sāma as the sun, one should perform the sevenfold Sāma worship by using words of the same number of syllables. By this one overcomes death. The word hiṃkāra has three syllables; so also,





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next [i.e., after worshipping the sun as the Sāma]; khalu, for certain; ātma-sammitam, with an equal number of parts [i.e., syllables]; atimṛtyu, that which overcomes death; saptavidham sāma upāsīta, one should perform the sevenfold Sāma worship; hiṃkāraḥ, the word hiṃkāra; iti tryakṣaram, is three-syllabled; prastāvaḥ, the word prastāva; iti tryakṣaram, is [also] three-syllabled; tat samam, therefore they [hiṃkāra and prastāva] are equal. Commentary:-Śaṅkara says that the sun divides time into units. It therefore distinguishes between life and death, and it is death itself. Is there any way of overcoming death? Yes, it can be overcome by worshipping the Sāma, and that is why these instructions are being given here.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Next let a man meditate on the sevenfold Sâman which is uniform in itself [1] and leads beyond death. The word hiṅkâra has three syllables, the word prastâva has three syllables:- that is equal (sama).

Footnote:

1. Âtmasammita is explained by the commentator either as having the same number of syllables in the names of the different Sâmans, or as equal to the Highest Self.


Sloka : 2.10.2

आदिरिति द्व्यक्षरं प्रतिहार इति चतुरक्षरं

तत इहैकं तत्समम् ॥ २.१०.२॥

ādiriti dvyakṣaraṃ pratihāra iti caturakṣaraṃ

tata ihaikaṃ tatsamam .. 2.10.2..



2. The word ādi is two-syllabled, and the word pratihāra is four-syllabled. If you take away one syllable from pratihāra and add it to ādi, then they will have the same number of syllables.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ādiḥ iti dvi-akṣaram, the word ādi is two-syllabled; pratihāraḥ iti catuḥ-akṣaram, the word pratihāra is four-syllabled; tataḥ, from that [i.e., from the word pratihāra]; ekam, [take away] one [syllable]; iha, [and add] here [to the word ādi]; tat samam, that makes them equal [both three-syllabled]. Commentary:-Om is the ādi of the sevenfold Sāma. It is ādi (the beginning) because a person begins singing the Sāma with Om.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The word âdi (first, Om) has two syllables, the word pratihâra has four syllables. Taking one syllable from that over, that is equal (sama).


Sloka : 2.10.3

उद्गीथ इति त्र्यक्षरमुपद्रव इति चतुरक्षरं

त्रिभिस्त्रिभिः समं भवत्यक्षरमतिशिष्यते

त्र्यक्षरं तत्समम् ॥ २.१०.३॥

udgītha iti tryakṣaramupadrava iti caturakṣaraṃ

tribhistribhiḥ samaṃ bhavatyakṣaramatiśiṣyate

tryakṣaraṃ tatsamam .. 2.10.3..



3. The word udgītha has three syllables. The word upadrava has four syllables. If they are taken as three-syllabled they are equal. In that case, the syllable va in upadrava becomes superfluous. They are equal so far as their three syllables are concerned.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Udgīthaḥ iti tri-akṣaram, the word udgītha is three-syllabled; upadravaḥ iti cataḥ-akṣaram, the word upadrava is four-syllabled; tribhiḥ tribhiḥ samam bhavati, if they are taken as three-syllabled they become the same; akṣaram atiśiṣyate, one syllable becomes superfluous; tri-akṣaram tat samam, taken as three-syllabled they become identical. Commentary:-The syllable va, if taken away, makes no difference when a person recites the hymn.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The word udgîtha has three syllables, the word upadrava has four syllables. With three and three syllables it should be equal. One syllable being left over, it becomes trisyllabic. Hence it is equal.


Sloka : 2.10.4

निधनमिति त्र्यक्षरं तत्सममेव भवति

तानि ह वा एतानि द्वाविꣳशतिरक्षराणि ॥ २.१०.४॥

nidhanamiti tryakṣaraṃ tatsamameva bhavati

tāni ha vā etāni dvāvigͫśatirakṣarāṇi .. 2.10.4..



4. The word nidhana has three syllables. All words, having three syllables each, are the same [when used in praise of the Sāma]. All these together have twenty-two syllables.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Nidhanam iti tri-akṣaram, the word nidhana is three-syllabled; tat samam eva bhavati, that makes it the same [as the other three-syllabled words forming parts of the Sāma]; tāni ha vai etāni, all these together constitute; dvāviṃśatiḥ akṣarāṇi, twenty-two syllables. Commentary:-There are seven ways of worshipping the Sāma:- through hiṃkāra, prastāva, ādi, pratihāra, udgītha, upadrava, and nidhana. Taken together these words have twenty-two syllables. Taken separately each of them may be treated as three-syllabled and recited accordingly. They are therefore all equal for purposes of the Sāma worship.

Translation By Max Müller

4. The word nidhana has three syllables, therefore it is equal. These make twenty-two syllables.


Sloka : 2.10.5

एकविꣳशत्यादित्यमाप्नोत्येकविꣳशो वा

इतोऽसावादित्यो द्वाविꣳशेन परमादित्याज्जयति

तन्नाकं तद्विशोकम् ॥ २.१०.५॥

ekavigͫśatyādityamāpnotyekavigͫśo vā

ito'sāvādityo dvāvigͫśena paramādityājjayati

tannākaṃ tadviśokam .. 2.10.5..



5. With the help of those twenty-one syllables, one can attain the status of the sun [which is also Death]. The sun occupies the twenty-first place after the things that come between the earth and the sun [those things being the twelve months, the five seasons, and the three worlds]. One can then go beyond the sun if one knows the twenty-second syllable. That world is full of joy and free from all sorrows.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ekaviṃśatyā, by twenty-one [syllables]; ādityam āpnoti, one attains union with the sun [because the sun marks the end of everything, and it is therefore death]; ekaviṃśaḥ vai, [the sun is] the twenty-first [after the twelve months, the five seasons, and the three worlds]; itaḥ, from this [world]; asau ādityaḥ, the sun over there; dvāviṃśena, by [knowing] the twenty-second [syllable]; ādityāt param jayati, one attains the next higher world from the sun; tat nākam, that [place is] joyful; tat viśokaṃ, that [place is] free from all suffering. Commentary:-The Upaniṣad says that if you worship Sāma with these twenty-one syllables, you attain the sun, which is the same as death. But how is the number significant? It is significant because the sun occupies the twenty-first position after the things that intervene between the earth and the sun. According to the Vedas those things are the twelve months, the five seasons, and the three worlds. But if you worship the Sāma with twenty-two syllables, you then go beyond the sun. Where? To a place called Nāka, where there is only happiness and no suffering.

Translation By Max Müller

5. With twenty-one syllables a man reaches the sun (and death), for the sun is the twenty-first [1] from here; with the twenty-second he conquers what is beyond the sun:- that is blessedness, that is freedom from grief

Footnote:

1. There are twelve months, five seasons, three worlds, then follows the sun as the twenty-first. Comm.


Sloka : 2.10.6

आप्नोती हादित्यस्य जयं परो हास्यादित्यजयाज्जयो

भवति य एतदेवं विद्वानात्मसंमितमतिमृत्यु

सप्तविधꣳ सामोपास्ते सामोपास्ते ॥ २.१०.६॥

āpnotī hādityasya jayaṃ paro hāsyādityajayājjayo

bhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānātmasaṃmitamatimṛtyu

saptavidhagͫ sāmopāste sāmopāste .. 2.10.6..



6. If a person knows all about the Sāma, and performs the sevenfold Sāma worship, treating the Sāma as himself and as something beyond death, he wins the state of the sun and then wins a place even higher than the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Āpnoti ha ādityasya jayam, one wins the state of the sun; paraḥ ha ādityajayāt asya jayaḥ bhavati, one wins a world even higher than the sun; yaḥ, one who; etat evam vidvān, knows this [Sāma] thus; ātmasammitam, as oneself; atimṛtyu saptavidham sāma upāste sāma upāste, performs the deathless sevenfold Sāma worship [the repetition marks the end of the section]. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

6. He obtains here the victory over the sun (death), and there is a higher victory than the victory over the sun for him, who knowing this meditates on the sevenfold Sâman as uniform in itself, which leads beyond death, yea, which leads beyond death.


Sloka : 2.11.1

॥ इति दशमः खण्डः ॥

मनो हिंकारो वाक्प्रस्तावश्चक्षुरुद्गीथः श्रोत्रं प्रतिहारः

प्राणो निधनमेतद्गायत्रं प्राणेषु प्रोतम् ॥ २.११.१॥

.. iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

mano hiṃkāro vākprastāvaścakṣurudgīthaḥ śrotraṃ pratihāraḥ

prāṇo nidhanametadgāyatraṃ prāṇeṣu protam .. 2.11.1..



1. The mind is hiṃkāra, the organ of speech is the prastāva, the eyes are the udgītha, the ears are the pratihāra, and the vital breath [in its fine (five?) forms] is the nidhana. The Gāyatrī prayer is controlled by the vital breath.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Manaḥ hiṃkāraḥ, the mind is the hiṃkāra; vāk prastāvaḥ, the organ of speech is the prastāva; cakṣuḥ udgīthāḥ, the eyes are the udgītha; śrotram pratihāraḥ, the ears are the pratihāra; prāṇaḥ nidhanam, the vital breath is the nidhana; etāt gāyatram, this Gāyatrī prayer; prāṇeṣu protam, is rooted in the vital breath. Commentary:-So long the fivefold and the sevenfold Sāma worships have been discussed, but the names of those worships have not been mentioned. Gāyatra is the first among them. Corresponding to the Gāyatra is the hiṃkāra, with which the worship begins. Similarly, in any act of worship, the mind may be regarded as the hiṃkāra, for it is the mind that must act first before all the other organs. Next to the mind is the organ of speech. A person first thinks and then speaks out his intentions. The organ of speech is therefore the prastāva. The eyes are the udgītha because of their importance. The ears are the pratihāra, for you can ‘turn away from’ things you don’t want to hear. Prāṇa, the vital breath, is the nidhana, for when you have suṣupti, dreamless sleep, all the organs merge into the vital breath. The Gāyatrī is worshipped as the vital breath. This is why the Sāma called Gāyatra is. said to be rooted in the vital breath.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The hiṅkâra is mind, the prastâva speech, the udgîtha sight, the pratihâra hearing, the nidhana breath. That is the Gâyatra Sâman, as interwoven in the (five) prânas [1].

Footnote:

1. Cf. Kh. Up. II, 7, 1, where prâna is explained differently. The Gâyatrî itself is sometimes called prâna.


Sloka : 2.11.2

स एवमेतद्गायत्रं प्राणेषु प्रोतं वेद प्राणी भवति

सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति महान्प्रजया पशुभिर्भवति

महान्कीर्त्या महामनाः स्यात्तद्व्रतम् ॥ २.११.२॥

sa evametadgāyatraṃ prāṇeṣu protaṃ veda prāṇī bhavati

sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati

mahānkīrtyā mahāmanāḥ syāttadvratam .. 2.11.2..



2. This Gāyatra Sāma is rooted in the prāṇas. He who knows this becomes full of vitality, has a long life, and his life is brilliant. Also, he is fortunate in his children, and he has many domestic animals. He is one of the most famous people. To be noble-minded is the aim of his life.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; evam, this way; etat gāyatram, this Gāyatra Sāma; prāṇeṣu protam, rooted in the prāṇas; veda, knows; prāṇī, with life; bhavati, is endowed; sarvam āyuḥ, the full span of life; eti, attains; jyok jīvati, a bright [life]; mahān prajayā, great in progeny; paśubhiḥ, [and] animals; bhavati, becomes [rich with]; mahān kīrtyā, with a good reputation; mahāmanāḥ syāt, is noble in character; tat vratam, that is the aim of his life. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section. Commentary:-Whoever knows that the Sāma named Gāyatra is based on the prāṇas is truly alive—that is, all his organs are strong and healthy and he is never physically handicapped. The full span of a person’s life is said to be a hundred years. A person who worships the Sāma lives that long. And he lives a wonderful life, able to influence many people. He is respected as one of the greatest people in the world. He has many children and many domestic animals, but his sole aim in life is to have a large heart, without a trace of meanness in his mind.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows this Gâyatra interwoven in the prânas, keeps his senses, reaches the full life, he lives long [1], becomes great with children and cattle, great by fame. The rule of him who thus meditates on the Gâyatra is, 'Be not high-minded.'

Footnote:

1. The commentator generally takes gyok in the sense of bright.


Sloka : 2.12.1

॥ इति एकदशः खण्डः ॥

अभिमन्थति स हिंकारो धूमो जायते स प्रस्तावो

ज्वलति स उद्गीथोऽङ्गारा भवन्ति स प्रतिहार

उपशाम्यति तन्निधनꣳ सꣳशाम्यति

तन्निधनमेतद्रथंतरमग्नौ प्रोतम् ॥ २.१२.१॥

.. iti ekadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

abhimanthati sa hiṃkāro dhūmo jāyate sa prastāvo

jvalati sa udgītho'ṅgārā bhavanti sa pratihāra

upaśāmyati tannidhanagͫ sagͫśāmyati

tannidhanametadrathaṃtaramagnau protam .. 2.12.1..



1. When one rubs two pieces of wood against each other to light a fire, that is the hiṃkāra. When it produces smoke, that is the prastāva. Then when the flame appears, that is the udgītha. The charcoals that result are the pratihāra, and when the fire begins to go out, that is the nidhana. When the flame is completely extinguished, that also is the nidhana. This Sāma called Rathantara is rooted in fire.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Abhimanthati, rubbing [one piece of wood against another to produce fire]; saḥ hiṃkāraḥ, that is the hiṃkāra; dhūmaḥ jāyate, the smoke it produces; saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva; jvalati, the flames that appear; saḥ udgīthaḥ, that is the udgītha; aṅgārāḥ bhavanti, the charcoals that result; saḥ pratihāraḥ, that is the pratihāra; upaśāmyati, when the fire begins to go out; tat nidhanam, that is the nidhana; saṃśāmyati, when the fire is completely extinguished; tat nidhanam, that [also] is the nidhana; etat rathantaram, this [Sāma] called Rathantara; agnau protam, is rooted in fire. Commentary:-The rubbing of two pieces of wood together to produce fire is the hiṃkāra, for that is the beginning of the fire. And the smoke that results is the prastāva, for both are likely to continue. When the fire bursts into flame, that is the udgītha, because when there are flames the oblations are offered into them for the gods and goddesses. This is why this part is superior and why the flames are called the udgītha. The charcoals that are formed are called the pratihāra, for the charcoals are collected for future use. Upaśām means the process of subsiding—that is, the fire begins to subside but does not quite go out. Then the word saṃśām means ‘completely extinguished.’ The fire is then dead, so it is like the nidhana (death). The Rathantara Sāma is said to be based on fire, for when fire is being produced by rubbing the two sticks, the Rathantara Sāma is recited.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The hiṅkâra is, he rubs (the fire-stick); the prastâva, smoke rises; the udgîtha, it burns; the pratihâra, there are glowing coals; the nidhana, it goes down; the nidhana, it is gone out. This is the Rathantara Sâman as interwoven in fire [1].

Footnote:

1. The Rathantara is used for the ceremony of producing fire.


Sloka : 2.12.2

स य एवमेतद्रथंतरमग्नौ प्रोतं वेद ब्रह्मवर्चस्यन्नादो

भवति सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति महान्प्रजया

पशुभिर्भवति महान्कीर्त्या न प्रत्यङ्ङग्निमाचामेन्न

निष्ठीवेत्तद्व्रतम् ॥ २.१२.२॥

sa ya evametadrathaṃtaramagnau protaṃ veda brahmavarcasyannādo

bhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā

paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā na pratyaṅṅagnimācāmenna

niṣṭhīvettadvratam .. 2.12.2..



2. He who knows that this Rathantara Sāma is rooted in fire, acquires the kind of glow that Vedic scholarship produces. He also enjoys eating. He lives the full span of his life, and his life is brilliant. He is well known for his children and for his animal wealth, and he commands great respect in society. His vow is that he will never eat with fire in front of him and he will never spit.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ evam etat rathantaram agnau protam veda, he who knows that this Rathantara Sāma is rooted in fire; brahmavarcasī, acquires the glow that Vedic knowledge gives; annādaḥ bhavati, he enjoys eating food; sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life; jyok jīvati, he lives a bright life; mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he distinguishes himself by his children and by the animal wealth he acquires; mahān kīrtyā, his reputation spreads far and wide; tat vratam, his principle is; na pratyak agnim ācāmet, never to Commentary:-By his moral character and his scholarship in the Vedas, he acquires a radiance about him. [The underlying thought in these two mantras is that everything a person does is spiritual. This includes even physical experiences.]

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows this Rathantara interwoven in fire, becomes radiant [1] and strong. He reaches the full life, he lives long, becomes great with children and cattle, great by fame. The rule is, 'Do not rinse the mouth or spit before the fire.'

Footnote:

1. Brahmavarkasa is the 'glory of countenance' produced by higher knowledge, an inspired look. Annâda, lit. able to eat, healthy, strong.


Sloka : 2.13.1

॥ इति द्वादशः खण्डः ॥

उपमन्त्रयते स हिंकारो ज्ञपयते स प्रस्तावः

स्त्रिया सह शेते स उद्गीथः प्रति स्त्रीं सह शेते

स प्रतिहारः कालं गच्छति तन्निधनं पारं गच्छति

तन्निधनमेतद्वामदेव्यं मिथुने प्रोतम् ॥ २.१३.१॥

.. iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

upamantrayate sa hiṃkāro jñapayate sa prastāvaḥ

striyā saha śete sa udgīthaḥ prati strīṃ saha śete

sa pratihāraḥ kālaṃ gacchati tannidhanaṃ pāraṃ gacchati

tannidhanametadvāmadevyaṃ mithune protam .. 2.13.1..



1. A man's beckoning to a woman is the syllable Him; his gratifying her is the Prastava; his lying with her is the Pratihara; his spending time with her is the Nidhana; and the finishing of the sexual act is also the Nidhana. This is the Vamadevya Saman as interwoven in sexual intercourse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Next follows the Vâmadevya as interwoven in generation [1].

Footnote:

1. Upamantrayate sa hiṅkâro, gñapayate sa prastâvah, striyâ saha sete sa udgîthah, pratistrî saha sete sa pratihârah, kâlam gakkhati tan nidhanam, pâram gakkhati tan nidhanam. Etad vâmadevyam mithune protam. 2. Sa ya evam etad vâmadevyam mithune protam veda, mithunî bhavati, mithunân mithunât pragâyate, sarvam âyur eti, gyog gîvati, mahân pragayâ pasubhir bhavati, mahân kîrttyâ. Na kâmkana pariharet tad vratam.


Sloka : 2.13.2

स य एवमेतद्वामदेव्यं मिथुने प्रोतं वेद

मिथुनी भवति मिथुनान्मिथुनात्प्रजायते

सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति महान्प्रजया पशुभिर्भवति

महान्कीर्त्या न कांचन परिहरेत्तद्व्रतम् ॥ २.१३.२॥

sa ya evametadvāmadevyaṃ mithune protaṃ veda

mithunī bhavati mithunānmithunātprajāyate

sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati

mahānkīrtyā na kāṃcana pariharettadvratam .. 2.13.2..



2. He who thus knows the Vamadevya Saman as interwoven in sexual intercourse does not suffer from the pang of separation and procreates from every intercourse; he reaches the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him the injunction is:- "Do not reject a woman who comes to you seeking intercourse".

Translation By Max Müller

2. Next follows the Vâmadevya as interwoven in generation [1].

Footnote:

1. Upamantrayate sa hiṅkâro, gñapayate sa prastâvah, striyâ saha sete sa udgîthah, pratistrî saha sete sa pratihârah, kâlam gakkhati tan nidhanam, pâram gakkhati tan nidhanam. Etad vâmadevyam mithune protam. 2. Sa ya evam etad vâmadevyam mithune protam veda, mithunî bhavati, mithunân mithunât pragâyate, sarvam âyur eti, gyog gîvati, mahân pragayâ pasubhir bhavati, mahân kîrttyâ. Na kâmkana pariharet tad vratam.


Sloka : 2.14.1

॥ इति त्रयोदशः खण्डः ॥

उद्यन्हिंकार उदितः प्रस्तावो मध्यंदिन उद्गीथोऽपराह्णः

प्रतिहारोऽस्तं यन्निधनमेतद्बृहदादित्ये प्रोतम् ॥ २.१४.१॥

.. iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

udyanhiṃkāra uditaḥ prastāvo madhyaṃdina udgītho'parāhṇaḥ

pratihāro'staṃ yannidhanametadbṛhadāditye protam .. 2.14.1..



1. The rising sun is the hiṃkāra, the sun that has already risen is the prastāva, the midday sun is the udgītha, the afternoon sun is the pratihāra, and the setting sun is the nidhana. This Sāma called Bṛhat is based on the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Udyan, the rising sun; hiṃkāraḥ, [is] the hiṃkāra; uditaḥ, the sun that has already risen; prastāvaḥ, [is] the prastāva; madhyandina, the midday sun; udgīthaḥ, [is] the udgītha; aparāhṇaḥ, the afternoon sun; pratihāraḥ, [is] the pratihāra; yat astam, that which is setting; nidhanam, [is] the nidhana; etat bṛhat, Commentary:-The rising sun is the hiṃkāra, for that is the time when we first see the sun. When the sun has risen it is the prastāva, for that is when people start performing their daily religious riteṣ and rituals. The midday sun is the udgītha, because that is the best time of the day. Then the afternoon sun is the pratihāra, because that is the time when cattle are driven back home. And the setting sun is the nidhana, for at night domestic animals are kept confined in their pens. This Bṛhat Sāma is based on the sun, because the sun is its presiding deity.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Rising, the sun is the hiṅkâra, risen, he is the prastâva, at noon he is the udgîtha, in the afternoon he is the pratihâra, setting, he is the nidhana. That is the Brihat Sâman as interwoven in the sun [1].

Footnote:

1. The sun is brihat. The Brihat Sâman is to be looked upon as the sun, or the Brihat has Âditya for its deity.


Sloka : 2.14.2

स य एवमेतद्बृहदादित्ये प्रोतं वेद तेजस्व्यन्नादो

भवति सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति महान्प्रजया

पशुभिर्भवति महान्कीर्त्या तपन्तं न निन्देत्तद्व्रतम्

॥ २.१४.२॥

sa ya evametadbṛhadāditye protaṃ veda tejasvyannādo

bhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā

paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā tapantaṃ na nindettadvratam

.. 2.14.2..



2. He who knows that the Sāma called Bṛhat is rooted in the sun is spirited and has a great appetite. He lives the full span of his life, has a brilliant career, and is renowned for his children and for his animal wealth. His success in life brings him much fame. The vow he observes is that he will never utter a word against the sun, which gives us heat.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ evam etat bṛhat āditye protam veda, he who knows that the Sāma called Bṛhat is rooted in the sun; tejasvi, is spirited; annādaḥ bhavati, has a great appetite; sarvam āyuḥ etḥ lives the full span of his life; jyok jīvati, has a brilliant life; mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, becomes famous for his children and for his animal wealth; mahān kīrtyā, is highly respected; tapantam na nindet, he never uses a bad word against the hot sun; tat vratam, that is his vow. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows the Brihat as interwoven in the sun, becomes refulgent [1] and strong, he reaches the full life, he lives long, becomes great with children and cattle, great by fame. His rule is, 'Never complain of the heat of the sun.'

Footnote:

1. The same as brahmavarkasin.


Sloka : 2.15.1

॥ इति चतुर्दशः खण्डः ॥

अभ्राणि सम्प्लवन्ते स हिंकारो मेघो जायते

स प्रस्तावो वर्षति स उद्गीथो विद्योतते स्तनयति

स प्रतिहार उद्गृह्णाति तन्निधनमेतद्वैरूपं पर्जन्ये प्रोतम्

॥ २.१५.१॥

.. iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

abhrāṇi samplavante sa hiṃkāro megho jāyate

sa prastāvo varṣati sa udgītho vidyotate stanayati

sa pratihāra udgṛhṇāti tannidhanametadvairūpaṃ parjanye protam

.. 2.15.1..



1. When light clouds consolidate, that is the hiṃkāra. When clouds likely to pour rain collect, that is the prastāva. When the rain begins, that is the udgītha. Then there are flashes of lightning and the roar of thunder. This is the pratihāra. When it all stops, that is the nidhana. This Sāma called Vairūpa is rooted in the clouds.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Abhrāṇi, light clouds [bearing water]; saṃplavante, when they consolidate; saḥ hiṃkāraḥ, that is the hiṃkāra; meghaḥ jāyate, when clouds likely to pour rain appear; saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva; varṣati saḥ udgīthaḥ, when it starts raining that is the udgītha; vidyotate, when lightning flashes; stanayati, [and] thunder roars; saḥ pratihāraḥ, that is the pratihāra; ut gṛhṇāti, when everything is over; tat nidhanam, that is the nidhana; etat vairūpam, this [Sāma called] Vairūpa; parjanye protam, is rooted in the clouds. Commentary:-The word abhra means a cloud which bears ap, water. A cloud that pours rain is called megha. The English word ‘cloud’ is actually in Sanskrit parjanya. Abhra, megha, parjanya—these different names all mean cloud, but indicate the cloud in a different state. This is why the cloud is described here as vairūpa, with different forms. It is the sun that produces the cloud, and this is why the Sāma is first worshipped as the sun and then as the cloud.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The mists gather, that is the hiṅkâra; the cloud has risen, that is the prastâva; it rains, that is the udgîtha; it flashes and thunders, that is the pratihâra; it stops, that is the nidhana. That is the Vairûpa Sâman, as interwoven in Parganya, the god of rain.


Sloka : 2.15.2

स य एवमेतद्वैरूपं पर्जन्ये प्रोतं वेद

विरूपाꣳश्च सुरूपꣳश्च पशूनवरुन्धे

सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति महान्प्रजया पशुभिर्भवति

महान्कीर्त्या वर्षन्तं न निन्देत्तद्व्रतम् ॥ २.१५.२॥

sa ya evametadvairūpaṃ parjanye protaṃ veda

virūpāgͫśca surūpagͫśca paśūnavarundhe

sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati

mahānkīrtyā varṣantaṃ na nindettadvratam .. 2.15.2..



2. He who knows that this Sāma called Vairūpa has its source in the clouds comes to acquire a large variety of animals, and all beautiful animals too. He has a long and brilliant life, and his children and animals are such that he becomes famous for them. His achievements also mark him as a great person.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ evam etat vairūpam parjanye protam veda, he who knows that this [Sāma called] Vairūpa is rooted in the clouds; virūpān ca surūpān ca paśūn avarundhe, he comes to possess a large variety of animals and beautiful animals also; sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life; jyok jīvati, he has a brilliant life; mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he becomes famous for his children and for his animal wealth; mahān kīrtyā, he is renowned for his achievements; varṣantam na nindet tat vratam, his vow is not to criticize the clouds that pour rain. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section. Commentary:-It is a characteristic of those who worship the Sāma that they never find fault with others. This is why they do not say anything bad about even the clouds that give rain.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows the Vairûpa as interwoven in Parganya, obtains all kinds of cattle (virûpa), he reaches the full life, he lives long, becomes great with children and cattle, great by fame. His rule is, 'Never complain of the rain.'


Sloka : 2.16.1

॥ इति पञ्चदशः खण्डः ॥

वसन्तो हिंकारो ग्रीष्मः प्रस्तावो वर्षा उद्गीथः

शरत्प्रतिहारो हेमन्तो निधनमेतद्वैराजमृतुषु प्रोतम्

॥ २.१६.१॥

.. iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

vasanto hiṃkāro grīṣmaḥ prastāvo varṣā udgīthaḥ

śaratpratihāro hemanto nidhanametadvairājamṛtuṣu protam

.. 2.16.1..



1. Spring is the hiṃkāra, summer the prastāva, the rainy season the udgītha, autumn the pratihāra, and winter the nidhana. This Sāma known as Vairāja is rooted in the seasons.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vasantaḥ hiṃkāraḥ, spring is the hiṃkāra; grīṣmaḥ prastāvaḥ, summer is the prastāva; varṣāḥ udgīthaḥ, the rainy season is the udgītha; śarat pratihāraḥ, autumn is the pratihāra; hemantaḥ nidhanam, winter is the nidhana; etat vairājam, this [Sāma called] Vairāja; ṛtuṣu protam, is rooted in the seasons. Commentary:-The clouds determine the seasons. This is why the Sāma is first worshipped as the clouds and after that as the seasons.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The hiṅkâra is spring, the prastâva summer, the udgîtha the rainy season, the pratihâra autumn, the nidhana winter. That is the Vairâga Sâman, as interwoven in the seasons.


Sloka : 2.16.2

स य एवमेतद्वैराजमृतुषु प्रोतं वेद विराजति

प्रजया पशुभिर्ब्रह्मवर्चसेन सर्वमायुरेति

ज्योग्जीवति महान्प्रजया पशुभिर्भवति

महान्कीर्त्यर्तून्न निन्देत्तद्व्रतम् ॥ २.१६.२॥

sa ya evametadvairājamṛtuṣu protaṃ veda virājati

prajayā paśubhirbrahmavarcasena sarvamāyureti

jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati

mahānkīrtyartūnna nindettadvratam .. 2.16.2..



2. He who knows that the Sāma called Vairāja is rooted in the seasons is surrounded by his children and animals and has a radiance about him which is born of Vedic scholarship. He lives a long and brilliant life, and he is considered great for his children and for his animals. He is also highly respected for his great deeds. He follows the vow of never criticizing the seasons.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ evani etat vairājam ṛtuṣu protam veda, he who knows that this [Sāma called] Vairāja is rooted in the seasons; virājati, he lives; prajayā paśubhiḥ, surrounded by his children and animals; brahmavarcasena, he has the kind of radiance that is born of Vedic scholarship; sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life; jyok jīvati, he lives a brilliant life; mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he is known to be great for his children and animals; mahān kīrtyā, he is famous for his deeds; ṛtūn na nindet tat vratam, his vow is that he will never criticize the seasons. Iti ṣoḍhśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section. Commentary:-The person who knows that the Vairāja Sāma is rooted in the seasons becomes like the seasons himself. Each season has a beauty of its own. Similarly, this person has within him the beauty and grandeur of the good things he possesses, such as his wealth, good children, scholarship, and character. The rules of the Sāma forbid him from saying anything bad about the seasons, and he follows this.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows the Vairâga, as interwoven in the seasons, shines (virâgati) through children, cattle, and glory of countenance. He reaches the full life, he lives long, becomes great with children and cattle, great by fame. His rule is, 'Never complain of the seasons.'


Sloka : 2.17.1

॥ इति षोडशः खण्डः ॥

पृथिवी हिंकारोऽन्तरिक्षं प्रस्तावो द्यौरुद्गीथो

दिशः प्रतिहारः समुद्रो निधनमेताः शक्वर्यो

लोकेषु प्रोताः ॥ २.१७.१॥

.. iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

pṛthivī hiṃkāro'ntarikṣaṃ prastāvo dyaurudgītho

diśaḥ pratihāraḥ samudro nidhanametāḥ śakvaryo

lokeṣu protāḥ .. 2.17.1..



1. The earth is the hiṃkāra, the space between the earth and heaven is the prastāva, heaven is the udgītha, the quarters are the pratihāra, and the ocean is the nidhana. The Sāma known as Śakvarī is rooted in the earth and other worlds.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Pṛthivī hiṃkāraḥ, the earth is the hiṃkāra; antarikṣam prastāvaḥ, the space between the earth and heaven is the prastāva; dyauḥ udgīthaḥ, heaven is the udgītha; diśaḥ pratihāraḥ, the quarters are the pratihāra; samudraḥ nidhanam, the ocean is the nidhana; etāḥ śakvaryaḥ lokeṣu protāḥ, these [the Sāma called] Śakvarī are rooted in the earth and other worlds. Commentary:-If the seasons come and go, as they ought to, then things on the earth and the other worlds remain in balance. This is why the Sāma is first worshipped as the seasons and then as the worlds. But the question is:- Sāma is singular. Why then has a plural word, śakvarī, been used here for the Sāma? Doesn’t it imply that there are many Sāmas? No, the Sāma is always one and the same. There are not many Sāmas. The word śakvarī has a plural form, but it stands for the singular Sāma. Śaṅkara gives the example of the word revatī, which is similarly always used in the plural.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The hiṅkâra is the earth, the prastâva the sky, the udgîtha heaven, the pratihâra the regions, the nidhana the sea. These are the Sakvarî Sâmans, as interwoven in the worlds [1].

Footnote:

1. The Sakvarîs are sung with the Mahânâmnîs. These are said to be water, and the worlds are said to rest on water.


Sloka : 2.17.2

स य एवमेताः शक्वर्यो लोकेषु प्रोता वेद लोकी भवति

सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति महान्प्रजया पशुभिर्भवति

महान्कीर्त्या लोकान्न निन्देत्तद्व्रतम् ॥ २.१७.२॥

sa ya evametāḥ śakvaryo lokeṣu protā veda lokī bhavati

sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati

mahānkīrtyā lokānna nindettadvratam .. 2.17.2..



2. He who knows that the Sāma known as Śakvarī is located in the worlds goes to the best world. He also has a long and brilliant life and is well known for his children and for his animal wealth. He is considered to be a great person because of his great deeds. He takes a vow that he will never criticize the worlds.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ evam etāḥ śakvaryaḥ lokeṣu protāḥ veda, he who knows that these [i.e., the Sāma] known as Śakvarī are rooted in the worlds; lokī bhavati, goes to the best world; sarvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full span of his life; jyok jīvati, has a brilliant life; mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, is well known for his children and for his animal wealth; mahān kīrtyā, is well known for his great deeds; lokān na nindet tat vratam, his vow is that he will never criticize the worlds. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows the Sakvarîs, as interwoven in the worlds, becomes possessed of the worlds, he reaches the full life, he lives long, becomes great with children and cattle, great by fame. His rule is, 'Never complain of the worlds.'


Sloka : 2.18.1

॥ इति सप्तदशः खण्डः ॥

अजा हिंकारोऽवयः प्रस्तावो गाव उद्गीथोऽश्वाः प्रतिहारः

पुरुषो निधनमेता रेवत्यः पशुषु प्रोताः ॥ २.१८.१॥

.. iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ajā hiṃkāro'vayaḥ prastāvo gāva udgītho'śvāḥ pratihāraḥ

puruṣo nidhanametā revatyaḥ paśuṣu protāḥ .. 2.18.1..



1. Goats are the hiṃkāra, sheep are the prastāva, cows represent the udgītha, horses are the pratihāra, and a human being is the nidhana. The Sāma called Revatī is established in animals.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ajāḥ hiṃkāraḥ, goats are the hiṃkāra; avayaḥ prastāvaḥ, sheep are the prastāva; gāvaḥ udgītha, cows are the udgītha; aśvāḥ pratihāraḥ, horses are the pratihāra; puruṣaḥ nidhanam, a human being is the nidhana; etāḥ revatyaḥ paśuṣu protāḥ, these [i.e., the Sāma known as] Revatī are established in animals. Commentary:-Animals are useful to all the worlds. That is why, after worshipping the Sāma as the worlds, the worship as animals is suggested. As in the previous section in which the word śakvarī is always used in the plural (as śakvaryaḥ), here also, the word revatī is always used in the plural (revatyaḥ).

Translation By Max Müller

1. The hiṅkâra is goats, the prastâva sheep, the udgîtha cows, the pratihâra horses, the nidhana man. These are the Revatî Sâmans, as interwoven in animals.


Sloka : 2.18.2

स य एवमेता रेवत्यः पशुषु प्रोता वेद

पशुमान्भवति सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति

महान्प्रजया पशुभिर्भवति महान्कीर्त्या

पशून्न निन्देत्तद्व्रतम् ॥ २.१८.२॥

sa ya evametā revatyaḥ paśuṣu protā veda

paśumānbhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati

mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā

paśūnna nindettadvratam .. 2.18.2..



2. He who knows that the Sāma called Revatī is rooted in animals acquires many animals. He has a long and brilliant life and becomes well known for his children and for his animal wealth. He also becomes a truly great person for his great deeds. His vow is that he will never say anything bad about animals.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ evam etaḥ revatyaḥ protāḥ veda, he who knows that these [i.e., the Sāma] called Revatī are rooted in animals; paśumān bhavati, comes to possess many animals; sarvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full span of his life; jyok jīvati, has a brilliant life; mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, becomes a highly respected person because of his children and also his animal wealth; mahān kīrtyā, becomes a truly great person for his great deeds; paśūn na nindet tat vratam, he observes the vow of never saying anything bad about animals. Iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighteenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows these Revatîs, as interwoven in animals, becomes rich in animals [1], he reaches the full life, he lives long, becomes great with children and cattle, great by fame. His rule is, 'Never complain of animals.'

Footnote:

1. Revat means rich.


Sloka : 2.19.1

॥ इति अष्टादशः खण्डः ॥

लोम हिंकारस्त्वक्प्रस्तावो माꣳसमुद्गीथोस्थि

प्रतिहारो मज्जा निधनमेतद्यज्ञायज्ञीयमङ्गेषु

प्रोतम् ॥ २.१९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

loma hiṃkārastvakprastāvo māgͫsamudgīthosthi

pratihāro majjā nidhanametadyajñāyajñīyamaṅgeṣu

protam .. 2.19.1..



1. Hair is the hiṃkāra, skin is the prastāva, flesh is the udgītha, bone is the pratihāra, and marrow is the nidhana. The Sāma called Yajñāyajñīya is spread all over the limbs of the body.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Loma hiṃkāraḥ, hair is the hiṃkāra; tvak prastāvaḥ, skin is the prastāva; māṃsam udgīthaḥ, flesh is the udgītha; asthi pratihāraḥ, bone is the pratihāra; majjā nidhanam, marrow is the nidhana; etat yajñāyajñīyam, this [Sāma called] Yajñāyajñīya; aṅgeṣu protam, is spread all over the limbs of the body. Commentary:-We get much nourishment from animals to sustain our bodies. That is why, in the previous section, the Sāma has been worshipped in the animals, and now it is being worshipped in the various parts of the body. Hair is on top of the body, so it is given first place—the place given to the hiṃkāra when the Sāma is recited. Next to the hair is the skin. Similarly, next to the hiṃkāra is the prastāva. The flesh is the udgītha, for both are the most important part. Then the bones are the pratihāra, because after a body is cremated there will still be pieces of bone left, and these are ‘collected’ by the relatives. The marrow is the nidhana, for that is the end of everything.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The hiṅkâra is hair, the prastâva skin, the udgîtha flesh, the pratihâra bone, the nidhana marrow. That is the Yagñâyagñîya Sâman, as interwoven in the members of the body.


Sloka : 2.19.2

स य एवमेतद्यज्ञायज्ञीयमङ्गेषु प्रोतं वेदाङ्गी भवति

नाङ्गेन विहूर्छति सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति

महान्प्रजया पशुभिर्भवति महान्कीर्त्या संवत्सरं

मज्ज्ञो नाश्नीयात्तद्व्रतं मज्ज्ञो

नाश्नीयादिति वा ॥ २.१९.२॥

sa ya evametadyajñāyajñīyamaṅgeṣu protaṃ vedāṅgī bhavati

nāṅgena vihūrchati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati

mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā saṃvatsaraṃ

majjño nāśnīyāttadvrataṃ majjño

nāśnīyāditi vā .. 2.19.2..



2. He who knows that the Sāma known as Yajñāyajñīya is located in different parts of the body becomes possessed of a firm body and none of his organs has any defect. He has a long and brilliant life; and he becomes great because of his children and his animal wealth. He also becomes famous for his great deeds. His vow is that he will not eat meat for one whole year, or he will not eat it at all.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ evam etat yajñāyajñīyam aṅgeṣu protam veda, he who knows that this Sāma called Yajñāyajñīya is located in the different parts of the body; aṅgī bhavati, has a firm body; na aṅgena vihūrchati, has no defect in his limbs or organs; sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life; jyok jīvati, he has a brilliant life; mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he becomes great in respect of his children and his animal wealth; mahān kīrtyā, he becomes great because of his great deeds; saṃvatsaram, for one whole year; majjñaḥ, meat; na aśnīyāt, will not eat; majjñaḥ na aśnīyāt iti vā, or will not eat meat at all; tat vratam, this is his vow. Iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the nineteenth section. Commentary:-‘A firm body’ means a good, sound body with none of its organs or limbs defective. Even his nails and his hair will be normal. The word majjña, meat, is in the plural here. This implies that both fish and meat should be avoided.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows the Yagñâyagñîya, as interwoven in the members of the body, becomes possessed of strong limbs, he is not crippled in any limb, he reaches the full life, he lives long, becomes great with children and cattle, great by fame. His rule is, 'Do not eat marrow for a year,' or 'Do not eat marrow at all.'


Sloka : 2.20.1

॥ इति एकोनविंशः खण्डः ॥

अग्निर्हिंकारो वायुः प्रस्ताव आदित्य उद्गीथो

नक्षत्राणि प्रतिहारश्चन्द्रमा निधनमेतद्राजनं

देवतासु प्रोतम् ॥ २.२०.१॥

.. iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

agnirhiṃkāro vāyuḥ prastāva āditya udgītho

nakṣatrāṇi pratihāraścandramā nidhanametadrājanaṃ

devatāsu protam .. 2.20.1..



1. Fire is the hiṃkāra, air is the prastāva, the sun is the udgītha, the stars are the pratihāra, and the moon is the nidhana. This Sāma known as Rājana is rooted in the gods and goddesses.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Agniḥ hiṃkāraḥ, fire is the hiṃkāra; vāyuḥ prastāvaḥ, air is the prastāva; ādityaḥ udgīthaḥ, the sun is the udgītha; nakṣatrāṇi pratihāraḥ, the stars are the pratihāra; candramāḥ nidhanam, the moon is the nidhana; etat rājanam, this [Sāma called] Rājana; devatāsu protam, is rooted in the gods and goddesses. Commentary:-In the previous section the Sāma was worshipped in the parts of the body. Now it is being worshipped in the deities—that is, in the forces of nature. Fire is the first among the forces of nature, so it is the hiṃkāra. Next to the hiṃkāra is the prastāva. Air is called the prastāva because it comes next after fire, and it is also infinite. The sun is the udgītha, for just as the udgītha is the best among the Sāma songs, so also the sun is the best among the forces of nature. The stars lie scattered, and as we locate them it seems that we are ‘collecting’ (pratihāra) them. That is why the stars are said to be the pratihāra. The moon is said to be the nidhana, because active people go to Candraloka, the world of the moon, after death. The Sāma called Rājana is rooted in the gods and goddesses, for the deities are by nature luminous (rājana).

Translation By Max Müller

1. The hiṅkâra is fire, the prastâva air, the udgîtha the sun, the pratihâra the stars, the nidhana the moon. That is the Râgana Sâman, as interwoven in the deities.


Sloka : 2.20.2

स य एवमेतद्राजनं देवतासु प्रोतं वेदैतासामेव

देवतानाꣳसलोकताꣳसर्ष्टिताꣳसायुज्यं गच्छति

सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति महान्प्रजया पशुभिर्भवति

महान्कीर्त्या ब्राह्मणान्न निन्देत्तद्व्रतम् ॥ २.२०.२॥

sa ya evametadrājanaṃ devatāsu protaṃ vedaitāsāmeva

devatānāgͫsalokatāgͫsarṣṭitāgͫsāyujyaṃ gacchati

sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati

mahānkīrtyā brāhmaṇānna nindettadvratam .. 2.20.2..



2. He who knows that the Sāma known as Rājana is established in the gods and goddesses shares the same worlds with these gods and goddesses, has the same rights and privileges with them, or has the same form. He also has a long and brilliant life. And he becomes great by virtue of his children and his animal wealth, and also by virtue of his great deeds. His vow is that he will never speak ill of the brāhmins.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ evam etat rājanam devatāsu protam veda, he who knows that this Sāma known as Rājana is established in the gods and goddesses [such as Agni (fire), Vāyu (air), etc.]; etāsām eva devatānām salokatām gacchati, he shares with those gods and goddesses the same worlds; sārṣṭitām, the same rights and privileges; [vā] sāyujyam, [or] the same form; sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life; jyok jīvati, he has a brilliant life; mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he becomes great by virtue of his children and also his animal wealth; mahān kīrtyā, he is great by his great deeds; brāhmaṇān na nindet tat vratam, it is his vow that he will not speak ill of the brāhmins. Iti viṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twentieth section. Commentary:-What does a person gain from worshipping the Sāma in such a way? He gets the right to live with the gods and goddesses in the same world, or to share the same rights and privileges with them, or to have the same form. It is not that he would get all these things. He would get any one of them. The scriptures say that the brāhmins themselves are the gods and goddesses. Obviously then one should not say anything derogatory about the brāhmins. Section Twenty-One

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows the Râgana, as interwoven in the deities, obtains the same world, the same happiness, the same company as the gods, he reaches the full life, he lives long, becomes great with children and cattle, great by fame. His rule is, 'Do not speak evil of the Brâhmanas.'


Sloka : 2.21.1

॥ इति विंशः खण्डः ॥

त्रयी विद्या हिंकारस्त्रय इमे लोकाः स

प्रस्तावोऽग्निर्वायुरादित्यः स उद्गीथो नक्षत्राणि

वयाꣳसि मरीचयः स प्रतिहारः सर्पा गन्धर्वाः

पितरस्तन्निधनमेतत्साम सर्वस्मिन्प्रोतम् ॥ २.२१.१॥

.. iti viṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

trayī vidyā hiṃkārastraya ime lokāḥ sa

prastāvo'gnirvāyurādityaḥ sa udgītho nakṣatrāṇi

vayāgͫsi marīcayaḥ sa pratihāraḥ sarpā gandharvāḥ

pitarastannidhanametatsāma sarvasminprotam .. 2.21.1..



1. The three vidyās [the Ṛk, the Yajuḥ, and the Sāma] are together the hiṃkāra; these three worlds [the earth, the space between the earth and heaven, and heaven] are together the prastāva; fire, air, and the sun are together the udgītha; the stars, the birds, and the rays are together the pratihāra; serpents, gandharvas, and the ancestors are together the nidhana. This Sāma resides in everything.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Trayī vidyā hiṃkāraḥ, the three Vedas [the Ṛk, the Yajuḥ, and the Sāma] are the hiṃkāra; trayaḥ ime lokāḥ, these three worlds [bhūḥ, bhuvaḥ, svaḥ]; saḥ prastāvaḥ, [together] that is the prastāva; agniḥ vāyuḥ ādityaḥ, fire, air, and the sun; saḥ udgīthaḥ, [together] that is the udgītha; nakṣatrāṇi vayāṃsi marīcayaḥ, the stars, the birds, and the rays; saḥ pratihāraḥ, [together] that is the pratihāra; sarpaḥ gandharvāḥ pitaraḥ, serpents, gandharvas [celestial musicians], and the ancestors; tat nidhanam, [together] that is the nidhana; etat sāma sarvasmin protam, this Sāma rests in everything. Commentary:-According to the scriptures the Ṛg Veda comes from fire, the Yajur Veda comes from air, and the Sāma Veda comes from the sun. In the previous section the worship of the Sāma as fire, air, etc., was discussed. Now the worship of the Sāma as the three Vedas is taken up. Knowledge of the three Vedas may be regarded as the hiṃkāra, for you have to use the hiṃkāra before you start doing any worship. After the hiṃkāra comes the prastāva. Similarly, after the three Vedas come the three worlds, so they are said to be the prastāva. Fire, air, and the sun are like the udgītha, for among all things they are of a higher order. The stars, the birds, and the rays come and go, so they are like the pratihāra. The serpents, the gandharvas, and The word Sāma does not refer to any specific Sāma. It refers to anything bearing that name. The word is meant according to the context, just as oblations are offered according to the deities for whom they are meant.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The hiṅkâra is the threefold knowledge, the prastâva these three worlds, the udgîtha Agni (fire), Vâyu (air), and Âditya (sun), the pratihâra the stars, the birds, and the rays, the nidhana the serpents, Gandharvas, and fathers. That is the Sâman, as interwoven in everything.


Sloka : 2.21.2

स य एवमेतत्साम सर्वस्मिन्प्रोतं वेद सर्वꣳ ह

भवति ॥ २.२१.२॥

sa ya evametatsāma sarvasminprotaṃ veda sarvagͫ ha

bhavati .. 2.21.2..



2. He who knows that this Sāma is in everything becomes one with everything [or, becomes the Lord of everything].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ evam etat sāma sarvasmin protam veda, he who knows that this Sāma resides in everything; sarvam ha bhavati, he becomes everything. Commentary:-This is an example of how far the benefit of the knowledge of the Sāma can extend:- If you know that the Sāma is everywhere and in everything, you become the supreme Lord of everything.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who thus knows this Sâman, as interwoven in everything, he becomes everything.


Sloka : 2.21.3

तदेष श्लोको यानि पञ्चधा त्रीणी त्रीणि

तेभ्यो न ज्यायः परमन्यदस्ति ॥ २.२१.३॥

tadeṣa śloko yāni pañcadhā trīṇī trīṇi

tebhyo na jyāyaḥ paramanyadasti .. 2.21.3..



3. Here is a verse in this connection:- There are five parts of Sāma, and each of these is divided into three parts. There is nothing higher than these [fifteen forms of Sāma].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject; yāni pañcadhā, that [Sāma] which is divided into five parts [hiṃkāra, prastāva, udgītha, pratihāra, and nidhana]; trīṇi trīṇi, each again divided into three parts [such as hiṃkāra representing the three Vedas]; tebhyaḥ jyāyaḥ param anyat na asti, there is nothing higher than these. Commentary:-So long we have discussed the five forms of the Sāma:- hiṃkāra, prastāva, udgītha, pratihāra, and nidhana. In the present verse the Upaniṣad says that each of these five can be divided further into three:- hiṃkāra as the Ṛk, the Yajuḥ, and the Sāma; prastāva as the earth, the intermediate space (between the earth and heaven), and heaven; udgītha as fire, air, and the sun; pratihāra as the stars, the birds, and the rays; and nidhana as the snakes, the celestial musicians, and the ancestors. It is Sāma which is manifest in all of these fifteen

Translation By Max Müller

3. And thus it is said in the following verse:- There are the fivefold three (the three kinds of sacrificial knowledge, the three worlds &c. in their fivefold form, i. e. as identified with the hiṅkâra, the prastâva, &c.), and the other forms of the Sâman. Greater than these there is nothing else besides.'


Sloka : 2.21.4

यस्तद्वेद स वेद सर्वꣳ सर्वा दिशो बलिमस्मै हरन्ति

सर्वमस्मीत्युपासित तद्व्रतं तद्व्रतम् ॥ २.२१.४॥

yastadveda sa veda sarvagͫ sarvā diśo balimasmai haranti

sarvamasmītyupāsita tadvrataṃ tadvratam .. 2.21.4..



4. He who knows Sāma knows everything, and gifts come to him from all quarters. His vow will be to constantly say to himself, ‘I am one with all’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ tat veda, he who knows that [Sāma]; saḥ veda sarvam, he knows all; sarvāḥ diśaḥ, all the quarters; balim, gifts; asmai, for him; haranti, bring; sarvam asmi, I am all; iti upāsīta, this is how he will meditate; tat vratam tat vratam, this is his vow, this is his vow. Iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-first section. Commentary:-Sāma is the inmost being of all, and he who knows it as such becomes like Sāma—that is, he becomes the inmost being of all, and he knows everything. People come from everywhere with gifts to show him their respect. ‘I am Sāma, the inmost being of all’—this is how Sāma is to be worshipped. One should constantly repeat this to oneself. In fact, it should be treated as a vow. Section Twenty-Two

Translation By Max Müller

4. He who knows this, knows everything. All regions offer him gifts. His rule is, 'Let him meditate (on the Sâman), knowing that he is. everything, yea, that he is everything [1].'

Footnote:

1. Here ends the Sâmopâsana.


Sloka : 2.22.1

॥ इति एकविंशः खण्डः ॥

विनर्दि साम्नो वृणे पशव्यमित्यग्नेरुद्गीथोऽनिरुक्तः

प्रजापतेर्निरुक्तः सोमस्य मृदु श्लक्ष्णं वायोः

श्लक्ष्णं बलवदिन्द्रस्य क्रौञ्चं बृहस्पतेरपध्वान्तं

वरुणस्य तान्सर्वानेवोपसेवेत वारुणं त्वेव वर्जयेत् ॥ २.२२.१॥

.. iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

vinardi sāmno vṛṇe paśavyamityagnerudgītho'niruktaḥ

prajāpaterniruktaḥ somasya mṛdu ślakṣṇaṃ vāyoḥ

ślakṣṇaṃ balavadindrasya krauñcaṃ bṛhaspaterapadhvāntaṃ

varuṇasya tānsarvānevopaseveta vāruṇaṃ tveva varjayet .. 2.22.1..



1. The vinardi voice for singing the Sāma is good for animals, and Agni, the god of fire, is its presiding deity. I bear this in mind and pray that I may have this voice. The god Prajāpati presides over the udgītha sung in the anirukta [unclear] voice. The one having Soma as its presiding deity is nirukta [clear]. That of Vāyu, the god of air, is soft and pleasant, and Indra’s is strong. That which has Bṛhaspati as its presiding deity is like the voice of the krauñca bird, and that of Varuṇa is like the sound of a broken metal pot. Cultivate all of these, but avoid the one of Varuṇa.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vinardi, the voice called vinardi, which is deep, like that of a bull; sāmnaḥ, for [singing] the Sāma; vṛṇe iti, I pray for; paśavyam, good for animals; agneḥ, of the god of fire; udgītha aniruktaḥ, the udgītha sung in the anirukta voice, which is not very distinct; prajāpateḥ, of Prajāpati, the Lord of all; niruktaḥ, the voice called nirukta, which is clear; somasya, of the god Soma; mṛdu ślakṣṇam, the voice called ślakṣṇa that is soft and soothing; vāyoḥ, of the god Vāyu, air; ślakṣṇam balavat, the voice called ślakṣṇa that is soothing yet powerful; indrasya, of Indra; krauñcam, the voice called krauñca, which is like that of the krauñca bird; bṛhaspateḥ, of Bṛhaspati; apadhvāntam, the voice called apadhvānta, which sounds like a broken metal pot; varuṇasya, of the god Varuṇa; tān sarvān era upaseveta, practise on all of them; tu eva vāruṇam, except that of Varuṇa; varjayet, one should avoid. Commentary:-When you sing the udgītha, be careful that you sing it in the right voice. The voice is important because it determines the benefit you derive from your singing. For instance, there is a type of voice that sounds like that of a bull. Agni, fire, is the presiding deity of this voice. If you sing the udgītha in this type of voice, it means you are singing for the good of the animals and you are also praying that you may have that kind of voice. Similarly, there is a type of voice called anirukta, which has Prajāpati as its presiding deity. Prajāpati, the Lord of all beings, has no form of his own. Similarly, he does not have a distinct voice. This is why it is called anirukta, indistinct. The voice of Soma, the moon, is nirukta, clear; that of Indra is powerful; and that of Bṛhaspati sounds like a krauñca, a bird similar to a crane. Varuṇa’s voice is the worst. It is like the sound of a broken brass vessel. All these voices can be used except that of Varuṇa.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The udgîtha, of which a poet said, I choose the deep sounding note of the Sâman as good for cattle, belongs to Agni; the indefinite note belongs to Pragâpati, the definite note to Soma, the soft and smooth note to Vâyu, the smooth and strong note to Indra, the heron-like note to Brihaspati, the dull note to Varuna. Let a man cultivate all of these, avoiding, however, that of Varuna.


Sloka : 2.22.2

अमृतत्वं देवेभ्य आगायानीत्यागायेत्स्वधां

पितृभ्य आशां मनुष्येभ्यस्तृणोदकं पशुभ्यः

स्वर्गं लोकं यजमानायान्नमात्मन आगायानीत्येतानि

मनसा ध्यायन्नप्रमत्तः स्तुवीत ॥ २.२२.२॥

amṛtatvaṃ devebhya āgāyānītyāgāyetsvadhāṃ

pitṛbhya āśāṃ manuṣyebhyastṛṇodakaṃ paśubhyaḥ

svargaṃ lokaṃ yajamānāyānnamātmana āgāyānītyetāni

manasā dhyāyannapramattaḥ stuvīta .. 2.22.2..



2. One should sing with the resolve:- ‘By singing I will get immortality for the gods and goddesses, food offerings for the ancestors, hope for humanity, food and water for the animals, heaven for those who perform sacrifices, and food for myself. All this I will get by singing.’ Thinking thus, one should sing without raising the voice too much [or, without being too excited].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Āgāyet, one should sing [with the resolve]; amṛtatvam devebhyaḥ āgāyāni iti, I will get immortality for the gods and goddesses by singing; svadhām, offerings; pitṛbhyaḥ, for the ancestors; āśām manuṣyebhyaḥ, hope for humanity; tṛṇodakam paśubhyaḥ, food and water for the animals; svargam lokam, heavenly worlds; yajamānāya, for those who perform sacrifices; annam ātmane, food for myself; āgāyāni iti, I shall win by singing thus; etāni, all these; manasā dhyāyan, thinking mentally; apramattaḥ, without raising the voice too much; stuvīta, one should sing. Commentary:-When you sing the Sāma, you should keep in mind the things you are singing for—such as immortality for the gods and goddesses, etc. But you must also take care that when you sing, your pronunciation and accents are correct, and that you do not miss any syllables.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Let a man sing [1], wishing to obtain by his song immortality for the Devas. 'May I obtain by my song oblations (svadhâ) for the fathers, hope for men, fodder and water for animals, heaven for the sacrificer, food for myself,' thus reflecting on these in his mind, let a man (Udgâtri priest) sing praises, without making mistakes in pronunciation, &c.

Footnote:

1. It would be better if the first ity âgâyet could be left out. The commentator ignores these words.


Sloka : 2.22.3

सर्वे स्वरा इन्द्रस्यात्मानः सर्व ऊष्माणः

प्रजापतेरात्मानः सर्वे स्पर्शा मृत्योरात्मानस्तं

यदि स्वरेषूपालभेतेन्द्रꣳशरणं प्रपन्नोऽभूवं

स त्वा प्रति वक्ष्यतीत्येनं ब्रूयात् ॥ २.२२.३॥

sarve svarā indrasyātmānaḥ sarva ūṣmāṇaḥ

prajāpaterātmānaḥ sarve sparśā mṛtyorātmānastaṃ

yadi svareṣūpālabhetendragͫśaraṇaṃ prapanno'bhūvaṃ

sa tvā prati vakṣyatītyenaṃ brūyāt .. 2.22.3..



3. All the vowels are like Indra’s body with its various parts. The sibilants [śa, ṣa, etc.] are like Prajāpati’s body with its various parts. The consonants, starting with ka, are the body and limbs of Death. If someone finds fault with the way the udgātā pronounces the vowels, he may say to that person:- ‘As I began singing, I took refuge in Indra [i.e., I sought Indra’s blessings]. Ask him and he will give you the right answer [to your criticism].’





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sarve svarāḥ, all the vowels; indrasya ātmānaḥ, are like the body [with its limbs] of Indra; sarve ūṣmāṇaḥ, all the sibilants; prajāpateḥ ātmānaḥ, are like the body [with its limbs] of Prajāpati; sarve sparśāḥ, all the consonants, starting with ka; mṛtyoḥ ātmānaḥ, are like the body [with all its limbs] of Death; yadi upālabheta, if anyone criticizes; tam, him [the udgātā, who is singing the Sāma]; svareṣu, regarding his pronunciation of the vowels; indram śaraṇam prapannaḥ abhūvam, [the udgātā will then say:-] I took refuge in Indra [when I started singing the vowels]; saḥ, he [Indra]; tvā prativakṣyati iti, will give you the right reply; enam brūyāt, say to him. Commentary:-The vowels are said to be Indra’s body, for when you start doing something, including even a recitation, you have to feel strong enough to do the job fully and correctly. And in order that you may feel that you have the requisite strength, you pray for Indra’s blessings, and you feel that he is transmitting his strength to you. You feel that the vowels you are using are his body, the sibilants are the body of Prajāpati, and the consonants are the body of Death. Then if anyone criticizes your pronunciation of the vowels, you can tell him to ask Indra for the reason

Translation By Max Müller

3. All vowels (svara) belong to Indra, all sibilants (ûshman) to Pragâpati, all consonants (sparsa) to Mrityu (death). If somebody should reprove him for his vowels, let him say, 'I went to Indra as my refuge (when pronouncing my vowels):- he will answer thee.'


Sloka : 2.22.4

अथ यद्येनमूष्मसूपालभेत प्रजापतिꣳशरणं

प्रपन्नोऽभूवं स त्वा प्रति पेक्ष्यतीत्येनं

ब्रूयादथ यद्येनꣳ स्पर्शेषूपालभेत मृत्युꣳ शरणं

प्रपन्नोऽभूवं स त्वा प्रति धक्ष्यतीत्येनं ब्रूयात्

॥ २.२२.४॥

atha yadyenamūṣmasūpālabheta prajāpatigͫśaraṇaṃ

prapanno'bhūvaṃ sa tvā prati pekṣyatītyenaṃ

brūyādatha yadyenagͫ sparśeṣūpālabheta mṛtyugͫ śaraṇaṃ

prapanno'bhūvaṃ sa tvā prati dhakṣyatītyenaṃ brūyāt

.. 2.22.4..



4. Then, if someone finds fault with his pronunciation of the sibilants, the singer will say to him:- ‘When I started singing I sought Prajāpati’s blessings. He will therefore crush you.’ Then, if someone finds fault with his pronunciation of the consonants, the singer will say to him:- ‘I sought Death’s protection while singing. He will therefore burn you to ashes’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; yadi enam ūṣmasu upālabheta, if a person criticizes him for his pronunciation of the sibilants; prajāpatim śaraṇam prapanṇaḥ abhūvam, I took refuge in Prajāpati [when I started singing]; saḥ, he [Prajāpati]; tvā pratipekṣati iti, will crush you; enam brūyāt, he will say to him; atha, then; yadi enam sparśeṣu upālabheta, if someone criticizes him for his pronunciation of the consonants; mṛtyum śaraṇam prapannaḥ abhūvam, I took refuge in Death [when I started singing]; saḥ, he [Death]; tvā pratidhakṣyati iti, will burn you to ashes; enam brūyāt, he will say to him. Commentary:-If you are reciting a hymn, seek Prajāpati’s protection concerning the sibilants. Then, even if you err, he will protect you. Similarly, you should seek Death’s protection concerning the consonants. He will protect you from harm for any mistakes you might make. In fact, those who find fault with you will themselves be punished, for by criticizing your singing, they are insulting Prajāpati or Death.

Translation By Max Müller

4. And if somebody should reprove him for his sibilants, let him say, 'I went to Pragâpati as my refuge:- he will smash thee.' And if somebody should reprove him for his consonants, let him say, 'I went to Mrityu as my refuge:- he will reduce thee to ashes.'


Sloka : 2.22.5

सर्वे स्वरा घोषवन्तो बलवन्तो वक्तव्या इन्द्रे बलं

ददानीति सर्व ऊष्माणोऽग्रस्ता अनिरस्ता विवृता

वक्तव्याः प्रजापतेरात्मानं परिददानीति सर्वे स्पर्शा

लेशेनानभिनिहिता वक्तव्या मृत्योरात्मानं

परिहराणीति ॥ २.२२.५॥

sarve svarā ghoṣavanto balavanto vaktavyā indre balaṃ

dadānīti sarva ūṣmāṇo'grastā anirastā vivṛtā

vaktavyāḥ prajāpaterātmānaṃ paridadānīti sarve sparśā

leśenānabhinihitā vaktavyā mṛtyorātmānaṃ

pariharāṇīti .. 2.22.5..



5. Each vowel should be articulated clearly and powerfully, [and while doing so, you should think,] ‘I will give some of my strength to Indra.’ The sibilants also should be uttered fully and distinctly, without sounding as if you are swallowing part of them or spitting them out. [While uttering them, you should think,] ‘I surrender myself to Prajāpati.’ Then each of the consonants also should be uttered separately and clearly, [and while doing so, you should think,] ‘I will save myself from death’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sarve svarāḥ, all the vowels; ghoṣavantaḥ balavantaḥ, clearly and powerfully; vaktavyāḥ, articulated; indre balam dadāni iti, [say to yourself] I have to give strength to Indra [as if you are stronger than Indra and can afford to give him some of your strength]; sarve ūṣmāṇaḥ, all the sibilants; agrastaḥ, clearly uttered [i.e., no part of the letter left within the mouth, as if you are swallowing it]; anirastāḥ, not uttering the letter as if you are throwing it out of your mouth; vivṛtāḥ vaktavyāḥ, clearly expressed; prajāpateḥ ātmānam paridadāni iti, I surrender myself to Prajāpati; sarve sparśāḥ leśena anabhinihitāḥ vaktavyāḥ, each of the consonants should be uttered separately and distinctly; mṛtyoḥ ātmānam pariharāṇi iti, [while thinking] I save myself from Death. Iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-second section. Commentary:-It is important that when we recite a hymn, we recite the vowels, consonants, and the sibilants clearly and loudly. Care has to be taken that no two letters get mixed up, or that any part of a letter remains inside the mouth or seems to be spat out. Here it is said that the vowels are to be pronounced powerfully and that you should pray to Indra while singing, offering him some of your strength. This suggests that you feel very strong, as if you are stronger than Indra. You should also try to surrender yourself to Prajāpati while singing. You will then attain immortality. Section Twenty-Three

Translation By Max Müller

5. All vowels are to be pronounced with voice (ghosha) and strength (bala), so that the Udgâtri may give strength to Indra. All sibilants are to be pronounced, neither as if swallowed (agrasta) [1], nor as if thrown out (nirasta) [2], but well opened [3] (vivrita), so that the Udgâtri may give himself to Pragâpati. All consonants are to be pronounced slowly, and without crowding them together [4], so that the Udgâtri may withdraw himself from Mrityu.

Footnote:

1. Grâsa, according to the Rig-veda-prâtisâkhya 766, is the stiffening of the root of the tongue in pronunciation. 2. Nirâsa, according to the Rig-veda-prâtisâkhya 760, is the withdrawing of the active from the passive organ in pronunciation. 3. The opening, vivrita, may mean two things, either the opening of the vocal chords (kha), which imparts to the ûshmans their surd character (Rig. Prât. 709), or the opening of the organs of pronunciation (karana), which for the ûshmans is asprishtam sthitam (Rig. Prât. 719), or vivrita (Ath. Prât. I, 31; Taitt. Prât. 5). 4. Anabhinihita, for thus the commentaries give the reading, is explained by anabhinikshipta. On the real abhinidhâna, see Rig. Prât. 393. The translation does not follow the commentary. The genitive pragâpateh is governed by paridadâni.


Sloka : 2.23.1

॥ इति द्वाविंशः खण्डः ॥

त्रयो धर्मस्कन्धा यज्ञोऽध्ययनं दानमिति प्रथमस्तप

एव द्वितीयो ब्रह्मचार्याचार्यकुलवासी

तृतीयोऽत्यन्तमात्मानमाचार्यकुलेऽवसादयन्सर्व

एते पुण्यलोका भवन्ति ब्रह्मसꣳस्थोऽमृतत्वमेति ॥ २.२३.१॥

.. iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

trayo dharmaskandhā yajño'dhyayanaṃ dānamiti prathamastapa

eva dvitīyo brahmacāryācāryakulavāsī

tṛtīyo'tyantamātmānamācāryakule'vasādayansarva

ete puṇyalokā bhavanti brahmasagͫstho'mṛtatvameti .. 2.23.1..



1. There are three divisions of religion:- The first comprises sacrifices, study, and charity; the second consists of austerities, such as fasting; and the third is the life of celibacy and living with the teacher in his house till death. People devoted to these three divisions of religion go to heaven after death. But one who is devoted to Brahman attains immortality.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Trayaḥ dharmaskandhaḥ, three divisions of religion; yajñaḥ adhyayanam dānam iti prathamaḥ, the first [division comprises] sacrifices, study, and charity; tapaḥ eva dvitīyaḥ, the second is austerities; tṛtīyaḥ, the third; brahmacārī ācāryakulavāsī atyantam ātmānam ācāryakule avasādayan, the life of celibacy and living with the teacher in his house till death; sarve ete, all these; puṇyalokāḥ bhavanti, attain heavenly worlds; brahmasaṃsthaḥ, [but] one devoted to Brahman; amṛtatvam eti, attains immortality. Commentary:-You may practise religion in three ways:- First, by performing sacrifices, studying the scriptures, and giving in charity; second, by performing austerities; and third, by observing celibacy and living with the teacher till death. All these are good, but they only lead to heaven. If you want immortality (that is, liberation), you have to devote yourself to realizing Brahman. There are certain words in our language that clearly distinguish one thing from another. For instance, barley is a particular type of grain. If you see the word ‘grain,’ it could mean wheat or rice or barley. But if you see the word ‘barley,’ you know exactly what is referred to. Similarly, the words brahmaniṣṭhā, or brahmasaṃstha, refer to a certain type of person whose only concern in life is to realize Brahman. This type of person may be of any age, any class, any caste, or any station of life. What distinguishes this type of person from any other is his or her total commitment to Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

1. There are three branches of the law. Sacrifice, study, and charity are the first [1],

Footnote:

1. Not the first in rank or succession, but only in enumerating the three branches of the law. This first branch corresponds to the second stage, the âsrama of the householder. Austerity is meant for the Vânaprastha, the third âsrama, while the third is intended for the Brahmakârin, the student, only that the naishthika or perpetual Brahmakârin here takes the place of the ordinary student. The Brahmasamstha would represent the fourth âsrama, that of the Sannyâsin or parivrâg, who has ceased to perform any works, even the tapas or austerities of the Vânaprastha.


Sloka : 2.23.2

प्रजापतिर्लोकानभ्यतपत्तेभ्योऽभितप्तेभ्यस्त्रयी विद्या

सम्प्रास्रवत्तामभ्यतपत्तस्या अभितप्ताया एतान्यक्षराणि

सम्प्रास्र्वन्त भूर्भुवः स्वरिति ॥ २.२३.२॥

prajāpatirlokānabhyatapattebhyo'bhitaptebhyastrayī vidyā

samprāsravattāmabhyatapattasyā abhitaptāyā etānyakṣarāṇi

samprāsrvanta bhūrbhuvaḥ svariti .. 2.23.2..



2. Prajāpati [i.e., Virāṭ] thought about the worlds [he would have]. Out of his thinking, the three Vedas took shape. He then began to think about the Vedas. As a result of this thinking, the Vedas gave birth to the three vyāhṛtis:- bhūḥ, bhuvaḥ, and svaḥ.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prajāpatiḥ lokān abhyatapat, Prajāpati meditated on the worlds; tebhyaḥ abhitaptebhyaḥ, from [the worlds] which he meditated on; trayī vidyā samprāsravat, emerged the three Vedas; tām abhyatapat, [Prajāpati] meditated on them [the three Vedas]; tasyāḥ abhitaptāyāḥ, out of [the Vedas] which he meditated upon; etāni akṣarāṇi, these akṣaras [syllables]; samprāsravanta, emerged; bhūḥ bhuvaḥ svaḥ, bhūh, bhuvaḥ, and svaḥ; iti, that is all. Commentary:-How can you attain liberation? You can attain it when you surrender everything for its sake. To make this clear, the story of how the world came into being is narrated:- God (or Virāṭ, or Kaśyapa) created this world by practising austerities. What kind of austerities? He simply planned the creation in his mind. This planning, this mental exercise, is enough austerity for him. And as thinking is doing for him, whatever he thinks immediately comes into being. The worlds emerge from within him. The first to manifest, however, were the three Vedas:- Ṛk, Yajuḥ, and Sāma. When these emerged, the Creator thought about them, and from the Vedas came the three vyāhṛtis (lit., utterances):- bhūḥ, bhuvaḥ, and svaḥ. Then from these came Om, the symbol of Brahman. If we concentrate on Om, we attain Brahman. But we have to surrender everything for the sake of Brahman. This is the conclusion to be drawn from this story. Even the Creator has to concentrate on what he is going to create, and he has to surrender everything else.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Austerity the second, and to dwell as a Brahmakârin in the house of a tutor, always mortifying the body in the house of a tutor, is the third. All these obtain the worlds of the blessed; but the Brahmasamstha alone (he who is firmly grounded in Brahman) obtains immortality.


Sloka : 2.23.3

तान्यभ्यतपत्तेभ्योऽभितप्तेभ्य ॐकारः

सम्प्रास्रवत्तद्यथा शङ्कुना सर्वाणि पर्णानि

संतृण्णान्येवमोंकारेण सर्वा वाक्संतृण्णोंकार एवेदꣳ

सर्वमोंकार एवेदꣳ सर्वम् ॥ २.२३.३॥

tānyabhyatapattebhyo'bhitaptebhya oṃkāraḥ

samprāsravattadyathā śaṅkunā sarvāṇi parṇāni

saṃtṛṇṇānyevamoṃkāreṇa sarvā vāksaṃtṛṇṇoṃkāra evedagͫ

sarvamoṃkāra evedagͫ sarvam .. 2.23.3..



3. [Prajāpati then] meditated on those three vyāhṛtis [bhūḥ, bhuvaḥ, and svaḥ]. Out of the vyāhṛtis, which he thought about, emerged Oṃkāra. Just as a network of ribs is spread all over a leaf, similarly, Oṃkāra permeates every form of speech [or, everything]. All this is Oṃkāra. All this is Oṃkāra.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tāni abhyatapat, he thought about those [vyāhṛtis]; tebhyaḥ abhitaptebhyaḥ, out of those which he thought about; oṃkāra samprāsravat, the syllable Om emerged; tat yathā, just as; śaṅkunā, by the ribs [of a leaf]; sarvāṇi parṇāni saṃtṛṇṇāni, all parts of the leaf are held together; evam, similarly; oṃkāreṇa sarvā vāk saṃtṛṇṇā, Oṃkāra permeates every form of speech; oṃkāraḥ eva idam sarvam oṃkāraḥ eva idam sarvam, all this is Oṃkāra, all this is Oṃkāra [the repetition is for emphasis]. Iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-third section. Commentary:-Om is the essence of everything. Because Prajāpati meditated to create the three worlds, Om manifested itself. Om, in fact, is the support of everything. Section Twenty-Four

Translation By Max Müller

3. Pragâpati brooded on the worlds. From them, thus brooded on, the threefold knowledge (sacrifice) issued forth. He brooded on it, and from it, thus brooded on, issued the three syllables, Bhûh, Bhuvah, Svah.


Sloka : 2.24.1

॥ इति त्रयोविंशः खण्डः ॥

ब्रह्मवादिनो वदन्ति यद्वसूनां प्रातः सवनꣳ रुद्राणां

माध्यंदिनꣳ सवनमादित्यानां च विश्वेषां च

देवानां तृतीयसवनम् ॥ २.२४.१॥

.. iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

brahmavādino vadanti yadvasūnāṃ prātaḥ savanagͫ rudrāṇāṃ

mādhyaṃdinagͫ savanamādityānāṃ ca viśveṣāṃ ca

devānāṃ tṛtīyasavanam .. 2.24.1..



1. Those who believe in Brahman say:- The morning savana is for the Vasus, the midday savana is for the Rudras, and the third, the evening savana, is for the Ādityas and the Viśvadevas [i.e., all the gods and goddesses].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Brahmavādinaḥ, those who believe in Brahman; vadanti, say; yat vasūnām prātaḥsavanam, the morning savana [i.e., the time when the soma juice is extracted from the soma creeper for the sacrifice] is meant for the eight Vasus; mādhyandinam savanam rudrāṇām, the noon savana is meant for the eleven Rudras; tṛtīya savanam, the third [i.e., the evening] savana; ādityānām ca viśveṣām devānām, is meant for the twelve Ādityas and the Viśvadevas. Commentary:-‘The morning savana belongs to the eight Vasus.’ This means that the Vasus control the earth. In the same way, since the midday savana belongs to the eleven Rudras, they control the interspace—the space between the earth and heaven. And as the evening savana belongs to the twelve Ādityas and the Viśvadevas, that means they control heaven. It follows then that there is no world left for the performer of the sacrifice.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The teachers of Brahman (Veda) declare, as the Prâtah-savana (morning-oblation) belongs to the Vasus, the Mâdhyandina-savana (noon-libation) to the Rudras, the third Savana (evening-libation) to the Âdityas and the Visve Devas,


Sloka : 2.24.2

क्व तर्हि यजमानस्य लोक इति स यस्तं न विद्यात्कथं

कुर्यादथ विद्वान्कुर्यात् ॥ २.२४.२॥

kva tarhi yajamānasya loka iti sa yastaṃ na vidyātkathaṃ

kuryādatha vidvānkuryāt .. 2.24.2..



2. Where then is the place for the yajamāna [one who performs a sacrifice]? How can he who does not know that place perform a sacrifice? He who knows can perform a sacrifice.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Kva tarhi yajamānasya lokaḥ iti, where then is the place for one who performs a sacrifice; saḥ yaḥ, he who; tam, that [place for the yajamāna]; na vidyāt, does not know; katham, how [can he]; kuryāt, perform [a sacrifice]; atha vidvān kuryāt, one who knows can [of course] perform [a sacrifice]. Commentary:-When a person performs a sacrifice, he does so in order that he may attain a certain world for himself. But if the three worlds—bhūḥ, bhuvaḥ, and svaḥ—are already occupied by the Vasus and other gods, where is the place left for the sacrificer? In such a situation he would hardly have any inclination to perform a sacrifice, or even to sing attendant hymns such as the Sāma, or to. engage in rituals connected with a sacrifice. Ignorance on the part of a person is no bar to his performing a sacrifice. Rather, this verse is intended to praise knowledge. If a person knows how to recite the Sāma, that is a great help. It should be clearly understood, however, that though the Sāma or Oṃkāra is recited while a sacrifice is being performed, the

Translation By Max Müller

2. Where then is the world of the sacrificer? He who does not know this, how can he perform the sacrifice? He only who knows, should perform it [1].

Footnote:

1. The commentator is always very anxious to explain that though it is better that a priest should know the hidden meaning of the sacrificial acts which he has to perform, yet there is nothing to prevent a priest, who has not yet arrived at this stage of knowledge, from performing his duties.


Sloka : 2.24.3

पुरा प्रातरनुवाकस्योपाकरणाज्जघनेन

गार्हपत्यस्योदाङ्मुख उपविश्य स वासवꣳ

सामाभिगायति ॥ २.२४.३॥

purā prātaranuvākasyopākaraṇājjaghanena

gārhapatyasyodāṅmukha upaviśya sa vāsavagͫ

sāmābhigāyati .. 2.24.3..



3. Before starting the morning chant, the sacrificer sits behind the Gārhapatya fire facing north and sings the Sāma about the Vasus.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prātaḥ anuvākasya upākaraṇāt purā, before beginning the morning chant; jaghanena, behind; gārhapatyasya, the Gārhapatya fire; udaṅmukhaḥ, facing north; upaviśya, sits; saḥ, he [the sacrificed; vāsavam, about the Vasus; sāma abhigāyati, sings the Sāma. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Before the beginning of the Prâtaranuvâka, (matin-chant), the sacrificer, sitting down behind the household altar (gârhapatya), and looking towards the north, sings the Sâman, addressed to the Vasus:-


Sloka : 2.24.4

लो३कद्वारमपावा३र्णू ३३ पश्येम त्वा वयꣳ

रा ३३३३३ हु ३ म् आ ३३ ज्या ३ यो ३ आ ३२१११

इति ॥ २.२४.४॥

lo3kadvāramapāvā3rṇū 33 paśyema tvā vayagͫ

rā 33333 hu 3 m ā 33 jyā 3 yo 3 ā 32111

iti .. 2.24.4..



4. O Fire, please open the door for us—that is, make the path clear—so that we may see you for obtaining full control of the earth.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Lokadvāram apāvṛṇu, [O Fire,] please open the door of the world [i.e., make the path clear]; vayam Commentary:-The additional syllables in the verse have no special meaning. They merely serve to make the Sāma complete.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Open the door of the world (the earth), let us see thee, that we may rule (on earth).'


Sloka : 2.24.5

अथ जुहोति नमोऽग्नये पृथिवीक्षिते लोकक्षिते

लोकं मे यजमानाय विन्दैष वै यजमानस्य लोक

एतास्मि ॥ २.२४.५॥

atha juhoti namo'gnaye pṛthivīkṣite lokakṣite

lokaṃ me yajamānāya vindaiṣa vai yajamānasya loka

etāsmi .. 2.24.5..



5. Then the sacrificer begins the offerings [with this mantra]:- ‘O Agni, you are in this world. I salute you. Please acquire the right world for me, who am performing a sacrifice. I am ready to go to a world appropriate for one who performs sacrifices’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha juhoti, now the sacrificer begins the offerings; pṛthivīkṣite, living on the earth; lokakṣite, living in the loka [world]; agnaye namaḥ, salutations to fire; yajamānāya me, for me, the sacrificer; lokam vinda, acquire the right world; eṣaḥ vai yajamānasya lokaḥ etā asmi, I am going to this world fit for a sacrificer. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. Then he sacrifices, saying:- 'Adoration to Agni, who dwells on the earth, who dwells in the world! Obtain that world for me, the sacrificer! That is the world for the sacrificer!'


Sloka : 2.24.6

अत्र यजमानः परस्तादायुषः स्वाहापजहि

परिघमित्युक्त्वोत्तिष्ठति तस्मै वसवः प्रातःसवनꣳ

सम्प्रयच्छन्ति ॥ २.२४.६॥

atra yajamānaḥ parastādāyuṣaḥ svāhāpajahi

parighamityuktvottiṣṭhati tasmai vasavaḥ prātaḥsavanagͫ

samprayacchanti .. 2.24.6..



6. ‘I, the yajamāna, have run the full course of my life in this world.’ With these words, he will say, ‘Svāhā,’ [and offer his oblation]. Then he will rise, saying, ‘Please unbolt the door to the world for which I am destined.’ The Vasus then give him the ownership of the earth, which is the result of the savana performed in the morning.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atra, here [in this world]; yajamānaḥ parastāt āyuṣaḥ, I, the sacrificer, have lived the full course of life; svāhā, [with these words, he will say] svāhā; parigham, the bolt [of the gateway to the world]; apajahi, remove; iti uktvā, saying this; uttiṣṭhati, he rises; vasavaḥ, the Vasus [to whom the morning savana is offered]; tasmai, to him [the sacrificer]; prātaḥsavanam samprayacchanti, give away the morning savana [i.e., give away this earth]. Commentary:-The yajamāna (the sacrificer) keeps performing his sacrifices till he feels that it is time for him to die. He then offers his last oblation, saying, ‘Svāhā.’ Getting up, he says he is going to the world for which he is destined and demands that the door to that world be unbolted. The Vasus own the earth by virtue of the morning savana (that is, extracting the soma juice and having a morning wash with it). They are pleased with the yajamāna for his performance of the rituals, so they surrender the ownership of the earth to him.

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'I (the sacrificer) shall go thither, when this life is over. Take this! (he says, in offering the libation.) Cast back the bolt!' Having said this, he rises. For him the Vasus fulfil the morning-oblation.


Sloka : 2.24.7

पुरा माध्यंदिनस्य

सवनस्योपाकरणाज्जघनेनाग्नीध्रीयस्योदङ्मुख

उपविश्य स रौद्रꣳसामाभिगायति ॥ २.२४.७॥

purā mādhyaṃdinasya

savanasyopākaraṇājjaghanenāgnīdhrīyasyodaṅmukha

upaviśya sa raudragͫsāmābhigāyati .. 2.24.7..



7. Before starting the midday savana, the yajamāna sits behind the Dakṣiṇāgni fire, facing north. He then sings the Sāma addressed to the Rudras.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [the yajamāna]; upākaraṇāt purā, before beginning; mādhyandinasya savanasya, the midday savana; āgnīdhrīyasya jaghanena, behind the Dakṣiṇāgni fire; udaṅmukhaḥ, facing north; upaviśya, sitting; raudram sāma abhigāyati, sings the Sāma to the Rudras. Commentary:-Earlier, the way the yajamāna conquers the earth was shown. Now how the mid-region can be won is described. After sitting behind the Dakṣiṇāgni fire, facing north, he starts singing the Sāma addressed to the Rudras. He continues doing this with the idea of attaining union with Virāṭ.

Translation By Max Müller

7. Before the beginning of the Mâdhyandina-savana, the noon-oblation, the sacrificer, sitting down behind the Âgnidhrîya altar, and looking towards the north, sings the Sâman, addressed to the Rudras:-


Sloka : 2.24.8

लो३कद्वारमपावा३र्णू३३ पश्येम त्वा वयं

वैरा३३३३३ हु३म् आ३३ज्या ३यो३आ३२१११इति

॥ २.२४.८॥

lo3kadvāramapāvā3rṇū33 paśyema tvā vayaṃ

vairā33333 hu3m ā33jyā 3yo3ā32111iti

.. 2.24.8..



8. O Fire, please open the door for us—that is, make the path clear—so that we may see you for obtaining full control of the world of Virāṭ.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Lokadvāram apāvṛṇu, [O Fire,] please open the door of the world [i.e., make the path clear]; vayam vairājyāya, so we may gain control of the world of Virāṭ; tvā paśyema, [and for that purpose] may see you. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

8. 'Open the door of the world (the sky), let us see thee, that we may rule wide (in the sky).'


Sloka : 2.24.9

अथ जुहोति नमो वायवेऽन्तरिक्षक्षिते लोकक्षिते

लोकं मे यजमानाय विन्दैष वै यजमानस्य लोक

एतास्मि ॥ २.२४.९॥

atha juhoti namo vāyave'ntarikṣakṣite lokakṣite

lokaṃ me yajamānāya vindaiṣa vai yajamānasya loka

etāsmi .. 2.24.9..



9. Then the sacrificer begins the offerings [with this mantra]:- ‘O Vāyu, you are in the mid-region. I salute you. Please acquire the right world for me, who am performing a sacrifice. I am ready to go to a world appropriate for one who performs sacrifices’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha juhoti, now the sacrificer begins the offerings; antarikṣakṣite, living in the mid-region; lokakṣite, living in the loka [world]; vāyave namaḥ, salutations to Vāyu [air]; yajamānāya me, for me, the sacrificer; lokam vinda, acquire the right world; eṣaḥ vai Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

9. Then he sacrifices, saying:- 'Adoration to Vâyu (air), who dwells in the sky, who dwells in the world. Obtain that world for me, the sacrificer! That is the world for the sacrificer!'


Sloka : 2.24.10

अत्र यजमानः परस्तादायुषः स्वाहापजहि

परिघमित्युक्त्वोत्तिष्ठति तस्मै रुद्रा

माध्यंदिनꣳसवनꣳसम्प्रयच्छन्ति ॥ २.२४.१०॥

atra yajamānaḥ parastādāyuṣaḥ svāhāpajahi

parighamityuktvottiṣṭhati tasmai rudrā

mādhyaṃdinagͫsavanagͫsamprayacchanti .. 2.24.10..



10. ‘I, the yajamāna, have run the full course of my life in this world.’ With these words, he will say, ‘Svāhā,’ [and offer his oblation]. Then he will rise, saying, ‘Please unbolt the door to the world for which I am destined.’ The Rudras then give him the ownership of the mid-region, which is the result of the savana performed at midday.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atra, here [in this world]; yajamānaḥ parastāt āyuṣaḥ, I, the sacrificer, have lived the full course of life; svāhā, [with these words, he will say] svāhā; parigham, the bolt [of the gateway to the world]; apajahi, remove; iti uktvā, saying this; uttiṣṭhati, he rises; rudrāḥ, the Rudras [to whom the midday savana is offered]; tasmai, to him [the sacrificer]; mādhyandinam savanam samprayacchanti, give away the midday savana [i.e., give away the mid-region]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

10. 'I (the sacrificer) shall go thither, when this life is over. Take this! Cast back the bolt!' Having said this, he rises. For him the Rudras fulfil the noon-oblation.


Sloka : 2.24.11

पुरा तृतीयसवनस्योपाकरणाज्जघनेनाहवनीयस्योदङ्मुख

उपविश्य स आदित्यꣳस वैश्वदेवꣳ सामाभिगायति

॥ २.२४.११॥

purā tṛtīyasavanasyopākaraṇājjaghanenāhavanīyasyodaṅmukha

upaviśya sa ādityagͫsa vaiśvadevagͫ sāmābhigāyati

.. 2.24.11..



11. Before starting the third [i.e., the evening] savana, the yajamāna sits behind the Āhavanīya fire, facing the north. He then sings the Sāma addressed to the Ādityas and the Viśvadevas.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [the yajamāna]; upākaraṇāt purā, before beginning; tṛtīyasavanasya, the third savana; āhavanīyasya jaghanena, behind the Āhavanīya fire; udaṅmukhaḥ, facing north; upaviśya, sitting; saḥ ādityam vaiśvadevam sāma abhigāyati, he sings the Sāma to the Ādityas and the Viśvadevas. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

11. Before the beginning of the third oblation, the sacrificer, sitting down behind the Âhavanîya altar, and looking towards the north, sings the Sâman, addressed to the Âdityas and Visve Devas:-


Sloka : 2.24.12

लो३कद्वारमपावा३र्णू३३पश्येम त्वा वयꣳ स्वारा

३३३३३ हु३म् आ३३ ज्या३ यो३आ ३२१११ इति

॥ २.२४.१२॥

lo3kadvāramapāvā3rṇū33paśyema tvā vayagͫ svārā

33333 hu3m ā33 jyā3 yo3ā 32111 iti

.. 2.24.12..



12. [Addressing the Ādityas:-] ‘O Fire, please open the door to the world [i.e., heaven] for us so that we may see you for attaining sovereignty’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Lokadvāram apāvṛṇu, [O Fire,] please open the door of the world [of heaven]; vayam svārājyāya, so we may attain sovereignty; tvā paśyema, [and for that purpose] may see you. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

12. 'Open the door of the world (the heaven), let us see thee, that we may rule supreme (in heaven).' This is addressed to the Âdityas.


Sloka : 2.24.13

आदित्यमथ वैश्वदेवं लो३कद्वारमपावा३र्णू३३ पश्येम

त्वा वयꣳसाम्रा३३३३३ हु३म् आ३३ ज्या३यो३आ ३२१११

इति ॥ २.२४.१३॥

ādityamatha vaiśvadevaṃ lo3kadvāramapāvā3rṇū33 paśyema

tvā vayagͫsāmrā33333 hu3m ā33 jyā3yo3ā 32111

iti .. 2.24.13..



13. The earlier verse was addressed to the Ādityas. Now, addressing the Viśvadevas, [the yajamāna says,] ‘O Fire, please open the door to the world [i.e., heaven] for us so that we may see you for attaining sovereignty’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ādityam, that was addressed to the Ādityas; atha, next; vaiśvadevam, to the Viśvadevas; lokadvāram apāvṛṇu, [O Fire,] please open the door of the world [of heaven]; vayam sāmrājyāya, so we may attain sovereignty; tvā paśyema, [and for that purpose] may see you. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

13. Next the Sâman addressed to the Visve Devas:- 'Open the door of the world (heaven), let us see thee, that we may rule supreme (in heaven).'


Sloka : 2.24.14

अथ जुहोति नम आदित्येभ्यश्च विश्वेभ्यश्च देवेभ्यो

दिविक्षिद्भ्यो लोकक्षिद्भ्यो लोकं मे यजमानाय

विन्दत ॥ २.२४.१४॥

atha juhoti nama ādityebhyaśca viśvebhyaśca devebhyo

divikṣidbhyo lokakṣidbhyo lokaṃ me yajamānāya

vindata .. 2.24.14..



14. Then the sacrificer begins the offerings [with this mantra]:- ‘Salutations to those who are in heaven and other worlds, to the Ādityas and the Viśvadevas. May I acquire the yajamāna’s world’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha juhoti, then the sacrificer begins the offerings; namaḥ ādityebhyaḥ ca viśvebhyaḥ ca devebhyaḥ, salutations to the Ādityas and the Viśvadevas; divikṣidbhyaḥ, to those living in heaven; lokakṣidbhyaḥ, to those living in the worlds; lokam me yajamānāya vindata, help me, the yajamāna, acquire the right world. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

14. Then he sacrifices, saying:- 'Adoration to the Âdityas and to the Visve Devas, who dwell in heaven, who dwell in the world. Obtain that world for me, the sacrificer!'


Sloka : 2.24.15

एष वै यजमानस्य लोक एतास्म्यत्र यजमानः

परस्तादायुषः स्वाहापहत परिघमित्युक्त्वोत्तिष्ठति

॥ २.२४.१५॥

eṣa vai yajamānasya loka etāsmyatra yajamānaḥ

parastādāyuṣaḥ svāhāpahata parighamityuktvottiṣṭhati

.. 2.24.15..



15. ‘I am ready to go to a world appropriate for one who performs sacrifices. I will live in this world after my death.’ Saying ‘Svāhā,’ he completes the sacrifice. Then he rises, praying, ‘May the bolt be removed’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Eṣaḥ vai yajamānasya loke etā asmi, I am ready to go to a world appropriate for one who performs sacrifices; atra yajamānaḥ parastāt āyuṣaḥ, I, the yajamāna, will live here after my death; svāhā, [saying] Svāhā [he completes the sacrifice]; uttiṣṭhati, he rises; iti uktvā, saying this; apahata parigham, may the bolt be removed. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

15. 'That is the world for the sacrificer! I (the sacrificer) shall go thither, when this life is over. Take this! Cast back the bolt!' Having said this, he rises.


Sloka : 2.24.16

तस्मा आदित्याश्च विश्वे च देवास्तृतीयसवनꣳ

सम्प्रयच्छन्त्येष ह वै यज्ञस्य मात्रां वेद य एवं वेद

य एवं वेद ॥ २.२४.१६॥

tasmā ādityāśca viśve ca devāstṛtīyasavanagͫ

samprayacchantyeṣa ha vai yajñasya mātrāṃ veda ya evaṃ veda

ya evaṃ veda .. 2.24.16..



16. The Ādityas and the Viśvadevas then present to him, the sacrifices, the result of the third savana. He who knows this knows the true purport of the sacrifice.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmai, to him; ādityāḥ ca viśve devāḥ ca, the Ādityas and the Viśvadevas; tṛtīya savanam sampra- yacchanti, present the result of the third savana; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this; eṣaḥ ha vai yajñasya mātrām veda, he knows the true purport of the sacrifice. Iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-fourth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi dvitīyaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the second chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

16. For him the Âdityas and the Visve Devas fulfil the third oblation. He who knows this, knows the full measure of the sacrifice, yea, he knows it.


Sloka : 3.1.1

॥ इति चतुर्विंशः खण्डः ॥

॥ इति द्वितीयोऽध्यायः ॥

॥ तृतीयोऽध्यायः ॥

असौ वा आदित्यो देवमधु तस्य द्यौरेव

तिरश्चीनवꣳशोऽन्तरिक्षमपूपो मरीचयः पुत्राः ॥ ३.१.१॥

.. iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

.. iti dvitīyo'dhyāyaḥ ..

.. tṛtīyo'dhyāyaḥ ..

asau vā ādityo devamadhu tasya dyaureva

tiraścīnavagͫśo'ntarikṣamapūpo marīcayaḥ putrāḥ .. 3.1.1..



1. The sun over there is honey to the gods. Heaven is the crossbeam, the mid-region is the beehive, and the rays are the eggs.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Asau vai ādityaḥ devamadhu, the sun over there is the honey of the gods; tasya dyauḥ eva tiraścinavaṃśaḥ, heaven is its crossbeam [that supports it]; antarikṣam apūpaḥ, the mid-region is the beehive; marīcayaḥ putrāḥ, the rays are the eggs. Commentary:-This section begins the praise of the sun. The sun represents the sum total of the good work done by human beings. This is why the sun is like honey to the gods and why they love it. Heaven is said to be the crossbeam. It supports the mid-region, which is the beehive. The sun-rays attract water from the earth, and the water-drops in these rays are like the eggs of the bees.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The sun is indeed the honey [1] of the Devas. The heaven is the cross-beam (from which) the sky (hangs as) a hive, and the bright vapours are the eggs of the bees [2].

Footnote:

1. Everybody delights in the sun, as the highest reward of all sacrifices. 2. I am not certain whether this passage is rightly translated. Rajendralal Mitra speaks of an arched bamboo, whence the atmosphere hangs pendant like a hive, in which the vapours are the eggs. Apûpa means a cake, and may mean a hive. In order to understand the simile, we ought to have a clearer idea of the construction of the ancient bee-hive.


Sloka : 3.1.2

तस्य ये प्राञ्चो रश्मयस्ता एवास्य प्राच्यो मधुनाड्यः ।

ऋच एव मधुकृत ऋग्वेद एव पुष्पं ता अमृता

आपस्ता वा एता ऋचः ॥ ३.१.२॥

tasya ye prāñco raśmayastā evāsya prācyo madhunāḍyaḥ .

ṛca eva madhukṛta ṛgveda eva puṣpaṃ tā amṛtā

āpastā vā etā ṛcaḥ .. 3.1.2..



2. The rays of the sun in the east are the eastern honey-cells [of the beehive]. The Ṛk mantras are the bees, and the Ṛg Veda is the flower. The water [from the sacrifice, such as the soma juice and other things] is the nectar [of the flower]. These Ṛk mantras—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasya, of that [sun]; ye, those which are; prāñcaḥ raśmayaḥ, the rays in the east; tāḥ eva, they all; asya prācyaḥ madhunāḍyaḥ, are its eastern honey-cells; ṛcaḥ eva madhukṛtaḥ, the Ṛk mantras are the bees; ṛgvedaḥ eva puṣpam, the Ṛg Veda is the flower; tāḥ āpaḥ amṛtāḥ, the water [of the soma and other things offered as oblations] is the nectar; tāḥ vai etāḥ ṛcaḥ, these Ṛks— Commentary:-The first rays of the sun seen in the east are like the honey cells of a beehive. In these cells are the bees, which are compared to the Ṛk mantras. The sun in the morning is red, like honey. The Ṛk mantras are called bees because bees produce honey, and the Ṛg Veda is called the flower because that is where the bees get the nectar to make the honey. Here, the term Ṛg Veda does not mean words. It means work—that is, the rituals prescribed in the Veda. It is the result of the rituals that is described as honey. Just as the bees collect the juice from the flowers and change it into honey, so the Ṛks seem to collect from the sacrificial fire the liquid, consisting of the soma juice, butter, etc., from the oblations. This is called nectar because after the ingredients have been in the fire, they are transformed into the sweetest and purest thing possible. The result of the sacrificial ritual is the nectar (amṛta), because it leads to immortality. The word amṛta means both ‘nectar’ and ‘immortality.’

Translation By Max Müller

2. The eastern rays of the sun are the honey-cells in front. The Rik verses are the bees, the Rig-veda (sacrifice) is the flower, the water (of the sacrificial libations) is the nectar (of the flower).


Sloka : 3.1.3

एतमृग्वेदमभ्यतपꣳस्तस्याभितप्तस्य यशस्तेज

इन्द्रियं वीर्यमन्नाद्यꣳरसोऽजायत ॥ ३.१.३॥

etamṛgvedamabhyatapagͫstasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja

indriyaṃ vīryamannādyagͫraso'jāyata .. 3.1.3..



3.—stimulated this Ṛg Veda. Out of that Ṛg Veda so stimulated came fame, vitality, the power of the organs, energy, and the essence of food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Etam ṛgvedam, this Ṛg Veda; abhyatapan, stimulated; tasya abhitaptasya, from that [Ṛg Veda] so stimulated; yaśaḥ, fame; tejaḥ, vitality; indriyam, the power of the organs; vīryam, energy; annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food; ajāyata, grew. Commentary:-Earlier the Ṛk mantras were described as the bees and the Ṛg Veda as the flower, and so on. What then is produced from all this? Fame in the worlds, the beauty that comes from strength, the power of the organs, the strength and vigour which give the gods and goddesses supremacy, and so on. The essence of all this comes from the sacrifices performed according to the Ṛg Veda.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Those very Rik verses then (as bees) brooded over the Rig-veda sacrifice (the flower); and from it, thus brooded on, sprang as its (nectar) essence, fame, glory of countenance, vigour, strength, and health [1].

Footnote:

1. Annâdya, explained as food, but more likely meaning power to eat, appetite, health. See III, 13, 1.


Sloka : 3.1.4

तद्व्यक्षरत्तदादित्यमभितोऽश्रयत्तद्वा

एतद्यदेतदादित्यस्य रोहितꣳरूपम् ॥ ३.१.४॥

tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā

etadyadetadādityasya rohitagͫrūpam .. 3.1.4..



4. All this [fame, etc.] spread out to the sun and took shelter there. It is this that accounts for the red look of the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, that [fame, etc.]; vyakṣarat, spread out; tat, it; ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun; aśrayat, took shelter; tat vai etat, it is this; yat etat, which is that; rohitam rūpam, red look; ādityasya, of the sun. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section. Commentary:-The idea here is to praise good work done according to the scriptures. Such work gives people name and fame, strength, vigour, good health, and so on. And with these qualities a person can attain supremacy in the world. These qualities all collect around the sun in the morning, and this is why the sun looks red at that time. Name and fame, strength, etc., are there waiting for those who do virtuous work. This verse is to encourage people to do such work.

Translation By Max Müller

4. That (essence) flowed forth and went towards the sun [1]. And that forms what we call the red (rohita) light of the rising sun.

Footnote:

1. The commentator explains:- The Rik verses, on becoming part of the ceremonial, perform the sacrifice. The sacrifice (the flower), when surrounded by the Rik verses (bees), yields its essence, the nectar. That essence consists in all the rewards to be obtained through sacrifice, and as these rewards are to be enjoyed in the next world and in the sun, therefore that essence or nectar is said to ascend to the sun.


Sloka : 3.2.1

॥ इति प्रथमः खण्डः ॥

अथ येऽस्य दक्षिणा रश्मयस्ता एवास्य दक्षिणा

मधुनाड्यो यजूꣳष्येव मधुकृतो यजुर्वेद एव पुष्पं

ता अमृत आपः ॥ ३.२.१॥

.. iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha ye'sya dakṣiṇā raśmayastā evāsya dakṣiṇā

madhunāḍyo yajūgͫṣyeva madhukṛto yajurveda eva puṣpaṃ

tā amṛta āpaḥ .. 3.2.1..



1. Then the rays of the sun in the south are the southern honey-cells [of the beehive]. The Yajuh mantras are the bees, and the Yajur Veda is the flower. The water [from the sacrifice, such as the soma juice and other things] is nectar [of the flower].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; ye, that which; asya, of it [the sun]; dakṣiṇāḥ raśmayaḥ, the rays in the south; tāḥ eva, they all; asya dakṣiṇāḥ madhunādyaḥ, are its southern honey-cells; yajūṃṣi eva madhukṛtaḥ, the Yajuḥ mantras are the bees; yajurvedaḥ eva puṣpam, the Yajur Veda is the flower; tāḥ āpaḥ amṛtāḥ, the water [of the soma and other things offered as oblations] is the nectar. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The southern rays of the sun are the honey-cells on the right. The Yagus verses are the bees, the Yagur-veda sacrifice is the flower, the water (of the sacrificial libations) is the nectar (of the flower).


Sloka : 3.2.2

तानि वा एतानि यजूꣳष्येतं

यजुर्वेदमभ्यतपꣳस्तस्याभितप्तस्य यशस्तेज इन्द्रियं

वीर्यमन्नाद्यꣳरसोजायत ॥ ३.२.२॥

tāni vā etāni yajūgͫṣyetaṃ

yajurvedamabhyatapagͫstasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja indriyaṃ

vīryamannādyagͫrasojāyata .. 3.2.2..



2. Those Yajuḥ mantras stimulated the Yajur Veda. Out of that Yajur Veda so stimulated came fame, vitality, the power of the organs, energy, and the essence of food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tāni vai etāni, all these; yajūṃṣi, Yajuḥ mantras; etam yajurvedam, this Yajur Veda; abhyatapan, stimulated; tasya abhitaptasya, from that [Yajur Veda] so stimulated; yaśaḥ, fame; tejaḥ, vitality; indriyam, the power of the organs; vīryam, energy; annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food; ajāyata, grew. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Those very Yagus verses (as bees) brooded over the Yagur-veda sacrifice (the flower); and from it, thus brooded on, sprang as its (nectar) essence, fame, glory of countenance, vigour, strength, and health.


Sloka : 3.2.3

तद्व्यक्षरत्तदादित्यमभितोऽश्रयत्तद्वा

एतद्यदेतदादित्यस्य शुक्लꣳ रूपम् ॥ ३.२.३॥

tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā

etadyadetadādityasya śuklagͫ rūpam .. 3.2.3..



3. All this [fame, etc.] spread out to the sun and took shelter there. It is this that accounts for the white look of the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, that [fame, etc.]; vyakṣarat, spread out; tat, it; ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun; aśrayat, took shelter; tat vai etat, it is this; yat etat, which is that; śuklam rūpam, white look; ādityasya, of the sun. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

3. That flowed forth and went towards the sun. And that forms what we call the white (sukla) light of the sun.


Sloka : 3.3.1

॥ इति द्वितीयः खण्डः ॥

अथ येऽस्य प्रत्यञ्चो रश्मयस्ता एवास्य प्रतीच्यो

मधुनाड्यः सामान्येव मधुकृतः सामवेद एव पुष्पं

ता अमृता आपः ॥ ३.३.१॥

.. iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha ye'sya pratyañco raśmayastā evāsya pratīcyo

madhunāḍyaḥ sāmānyeva madhukṛtaḥ sāmaveda eva puṣpaṃ

tā amṛtā āpaḥ .. 3.3.1..



1. Then the rays of the sun in the west are the western honey-cells [of the beehive]. The Sāma mantras are the bees, and the Sāma Veda is the flower. The water [from the sacrifice, such as the soma juice and other things] is the nectar [of the flower].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; ye, that which; asya, of it [the sun]; pratyañcaḥ raśmayaḥ, the rays in the west; tāḥ eva, they all; asya pratīcyaḥ madhunāḍyaḥ, are its western honey-cells; sāmāni eva madhukṛtaḥ, the Sāma mantras are the bees; sāmavedaḥ eva puṣpam, the Sāma Veda Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The western rays of the sun are the honey-cells behind. The Sâman verses are the bees, the Sâma-veda sacrifice is the flower, the water is the nectar.


Sloka : 3.3.2

तानि वा एतानि सामान्येतꣳ

सामवेदमभ्यतपꣳस्तस्याभितप्तस्य यशस्तेज इन्द्रियं

वीर्यमन्नाद्यꣳरसोऽजायत ॥ ३.३.२॥

tāni vā etāni sāmānyetagͫ

sāmavedamabhyatapagͫstasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja indriyaṃ

vīryamannādyagͫraso'jāyata .. 3.3.2..



2. Those Sāma mantras stimulated the Sāma Veda. Out of that Sāma Veda so stimulated came fame, vitality, the power of the organs, energy, and the essence of food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tāni vai etāni, these very; sāmāni, Sāma mantras; etam sāmavedam, this Sāma Veda; abhyatapan, stimulated; tasya abhitaptasya, from that [Sāma Veda] so stimulated; yaśaḥ, fame; tejaḥ, vitality; indriyam, the power of the organs; vīryam, energy; annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food; ajāyata, grew. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Those very Sâman verses (as bees) brooded over the Sâma-veda sacrifice; and from it, thus brooded on, sprang as its (nectar) essence, fame, glory of countenance, vigour, strength, and health.


Sloka : 3.3.3

तद्व्यक्षरत्तदादित्यमभितोऽश्रयत्तद्वा

एतद्यदेतदादित्यस्य कृष्णꣳरूपम् ॥ ३.३.३॥

tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā

etadyadetadādityasya kṛṣṇagͫrūpam .. 3.3.3..



3. All this [fame, etc.] spread out to the sun and took shelter there. It is this that gives rise to the black spots in the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, that [fame, etc.]; vyakṣarat, spread out; tat, it; ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun; aśrayat, took shelter; tat vai etat, it is this; yat etat, which is that; kṛṣṇam rūpam, black look; ādityasya, of the sun. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

3. That flowed forth and went towards the sun. And that forms what we call the dark (krishna) light of the sun.


Sloka : 3.4.1

॥ इति तृतीयः खण्डः ॥

अथ येऽस्योदञ्चो रश्मयस्ता एवास्योदीच्यो

मधुनाड्योऽथर्वाङ्गिरस एव मधुकृत

इतिहासपुराणं पुष्पं ता अमृता आपः ॥ ३.४.१॥

.. iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha ye'syodañco raśmayastā evāsyodīcyo

madhunāḍyo'tharvāṅgirasa eva madhukṛta

itihāsapurāṇaṃ puṣpaṃ tā amṛtā āpaḥ .. 3.4.1..



1. Then the northern rays of the sun are the northern honey-cells [of the beehive]. The mantras envisioned by the sages Atharvā and Aṅgirā are the bees, and the Itihāsas and Purāṇas [i.e., history and legends] are the flower. The water [from the sacrifice, such as the soma juice and other things] is the nectar [of the flower].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; ye, that which; asya, of it [the sun]; udañcaḥ raśmayaḥ, the rays in the north; tāḥ eva, they all; asya udīcyaḥ madhunāḍyaḥ, are its northern honey-cells; atharvāṅgirasaḥ eva madhukṛtaḥ, the mantras envisioned by Atharvā and Aṅgirā are the bees; itihāsapurāṇam eva puṣpam, history and legends are the flower; tāḥ āpaḥ amṛtāḥ, the water [of the soma and other things offered as oblations] is the nectar. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The northern rays of the sun are the honey-cells on the left. The (hymns of the) Atharvâṅgiras are the bees, the Itihâsa-purân[1] (the reading of the old stories) is the flower, the water is the nectar.

Footnote:

1. As there is no Atharva-veda sacrifice, properly so called, we have corresponding to the Atharva-veda hymns the so-called fifth Veda, the Itihâsa-purâna. This may mean the collection of legends and traditions, or the old book of traditions. At all events it is taken as one Purâna, not as many. These ancient stories were repeated at the Asvamedha sacrifice during the so-called Pariplava nights. Many of them have been preserved in the Brâhmanas; others, in a more modern form, in the Mahâbhârata. See Weber, Indische Studien, I, , note.


Sloka : 3.4.2

ते वा एतेऽथर्वाङ्गिरस एतदितिहासपूराणमभ्यतपꣳ

स्तस्याभितप्तस्य यशस्तेज इन्द्रियां

वीर्यमन्नाद्यꣳरसोऽजायत ॥ ३.४.२॥

te vā ete'tharvāṅgirasa etaditihāsapūrāṇamabhyatapagͫ

stasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja indriyāṃ

vīryamannādyagͫraso'jāyata .. 3.4.2..



2. Those Atharvā-Aṅgirasā mantras stimulated the Itihāsas and Purāṇas [i.e., the history and the legends]. Out of that so stimulated emerged fame, vitality, the power of the organs, energy, and the essence of food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te vai ete, these very; atharvāṅgirasaḥ, mantras of Atharvā and Aṅgirā; etat itihāsapurāṇam, the Itihāsas and Purāṇas; abhyatapan, stimulated; tasya abhitap- tasya, from that so stimulated; yaśaḥ, fame; tejaḥ, vitality; indriyam, the power of the organs; vīryam, energy; annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food; ajāyata, grew. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Those very hymns of the Atharvâṅgiras (as bees) brooded over the Itihâsa-purâna; and from it, thus brooded on, sprang as its (nectar) essence, fame, glory of countenance, vigour, strength, and health.


Sloka : 3.4.3

तद्व्यक्षरत्तदादित्यमभितोऽश्रयत्तद्वा

एतद्यदेतदादित्यस्य परं कृष्णꣳरूपम् ॥ ३.४.३॥

tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā

etadyadetadādityasya paraṃ kṛṣṇagͫrūpam .. 3.4.3..



3. All this [fame, etc,] spread out to the sun and took shelter there. It is this that gives rise to the deep black spots in the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, that [fame, etc.]; vyakṣarat, spread out; tat, it; ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun; aśrayat, took shelter; tat vai etat, it is this; yat etat, which is that; param kṛṣṇam rūpam, deep black look; ādityasya, of the sun. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

3. That flowed forth, and went towards the sun. And that forms what we call the extreme dark (parah krishnam) light of the sun.


Sloka : 3.5.1

॥ इति चतुर्थः खण्डः ॥

अथ येऽस्योर्ध्वा रश्मयस्ता एवास्योर्ध्वा

मधुनाड्यो गुह्या एवादेशा मधुकृतो ब्रह्मैव

पुष्पं ता अमृता आपः ॥ ३.५.१॥

.. iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha ye'syordhvā raśmayastā evāsyordhvā

madhunāḍyo guhyā evādeśā madhukṛto brahmaiva

puṣpaṃ tā amṛtā āpaḥ .. 3.5.1..



1. Next, the rays of the sun which are in the higher region are also its honey-cells in the higher region. The secret instructions are the bees, and Brahman [praṇava] is the flower. The water [from the sacrifice] is the nectar.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; asya ye urdhvāḥ raśmayaḥ, those rays [of the sun] which are in the higher region; tāḥ eva asya urdhvāḥ madhunāḍyaḥ, they are its honeycomb in the higher region; guhyāḥ ādeśāḥ eva madhukṛtaḥ, all secret directions are the bees; brahma eva puṣpam, Brahman [i.e., praṇava, Om] is the flower; tāḥ āpaḥ amṛtāḥ, the water [used in this connection] is the nectar. Commentary:-The mantras used in the sacrifices are both secret and mystical. So also are the directions for a successful performance of a sacrifice. The mantras and the directions together constitute the bees in the illustration given here. The word brahman is used here in the sense of ‘word,’ so it means here praṇava, or Om. It is the flower.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The upward rays of the sun are the honey cells above. The secret doctrines are the bees, Brahman (the Om) is the flower, the water is the nectar.


Sloka : 3.5.2

ते वा एते गुह्या आदेशा एतद्ब्रह्माभ्यतपꣳ

स्तस्याभितप्तस्य यशस्तेज इन्द्रियं

वीर्यमन्नाद्यꣳरसोऽजायत ॥ ३.५.२॥

te vā ete guhyā ādeśā etadbrahmābhyatapagͫ

stasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja indriyaṃ

vīryamannādyagͫraso'jāyata .. 3.5.2..



2. These very secret directions stimulated Brahman [in the form of praṇava]. Out of that so stimulated emerged fame, vitality, the power of the organs, energy, and the essence of food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te vai ete, these very; guhyāḥ ādeśāḥ, secret directions; etat brahma, this Brahman [as praṇava]; abhyatapan, stimulated; tasya abhitaptasya, from that so stimulated; yaśaḥ, fame; tejaḥ, vitality; indriyam, the power of the organs; vīryam, energy; annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food; ajāyata, grew. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Those secret doctrines (as bees) brooded over Brahman (the Om); and from it, thus brooded on, sprang as its (nectar) essence, fame, glory of countenance, brightness, vigour, strength, and health.


Sloka : 3.5.3

तद्व्यक्षरत्तदादित्यमभितोऽश्रयत्तद्वा

एतद्यदेतदादित्यस्य मध्ये क्षोभत इव ॥ ३.५.३॥

tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā

etadyadetadādityasya madhye kṣobhata iva .. 3.5.3..



3. All this [fame, etc.] spread out to the sun and took shelter there. It is this that seems to be vibrating within the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, that [fame, etc.]; vyakṣarat, spread out; tat, it; ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun; aśrayat, took shelter; tat vai etat, it is this; yat etat, which is that; kṣobhate iva, seems to be vibrating; ādityasya madhye, within the sun. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. That flowed forth, and went towards the sun. And that forms what seems to stir in the centre of the sun.


Sloka : 3.5.4

ते वा एते रसानाꣳरसा वेदा हि रसास्तेषामेते

रसास्तानि वा एतान्यमृतानाममृतानि वेदा

ह्यमृतास्तेषामेतान्यमृतानि ॥ ३.५.४॥

te vā ete rasānāgͫrasā vedā hi rasāsteṣāmete

rasāstāni vā etānyamṛtānāmamṛtāni vedā

hyamṛtāsteṣāmetānyamṛtāni .. 3.5.4..



4. These colours [red, etc.] are the essence of all essences. The Vedas are the essence, and the colours are the essence of the Vedas. These colours are the nectar of the nectar [the Vedas]. The Vedas are the nectar [and therefore eternal], but the colours are the nectar of the Vedas.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te ete, these [the red and other colours]; vai rasānām rasāḥ, are the essence of the essences; vedāḥ hi rasāḥ, since the Vedas are the essence; teṣām ete rasāḥ, these [colours] are the essence of them [the Vedas]; tāni etāni vai amṛtānām amṛtāni, these [colours] are the nectar of the nectar [the Vedas]; hi vedāḥ amṛtāḥ, as the Vedas are the nectar [or, eternal]; etāni, these [colours]; teṣām amṛtāni, are the nectar of them [the Vedas]. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section. Commentary:-Honey has been shown to be in different directions. This is just to stimulate our interest in seeking the essence of everything. The essence of everything is the Vedas, because through the Vedas we attain immortality. The term Vedas here means the Vedic ceremonies. Through these ceremonies we attain only relative immortality—that is, a long life, but a life that must end sooner or later. The expression ‘essence of the essences’ means that results which follow from the ceremonies are better than the ceremonies themselves. They are better, but they are short-lived. The implication is that we must not stop there.

Translation By Max Müller

4. These (the different colours in the sun) are the essences of the essences. For the Vedas are essences (the best things in the world); and of them (after they have assumed the form of sacrifice) these (the colours rising to the sun) are again the essences. They are the nectar of the nectar. For the Vedas are nectar (immortal), and of them these are the nectar.


Sloka : 3.6.1

॥ इति पञ्चमः खण्डः ॥

तद्यत्प्रथमममृतं तद्वसव उपजीवन्त्यग्निना मुखेन न वै

देवा अश्नन्ति न पिबन्त्येतदेवामृतं दृष्ट्वा

तृप्यन्ति ॥ ३.६.१॥

.. iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tadyatprathamamamṛtaṃ tadvasava upajīvantyagninā mukhena na vai

devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā

tṛpyanti .. 3.6.1..



1. Led by fire, the Vasus enjoy the first nectar [which is the red colour]. As a matter of fact, the gods and goddesses neither eat nor drink. They are pleased merely by seeing the nectar.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat yat, that which; prathamam amṛtam, the first nectar [i.e., the red colour of the sun]; tat, that; vasavaḥ, the Vasus; upajīvanti, enjoy; agninā mukhena, led by fire; vai, as a matter of fact; devāḥ, the gods and goddesses; na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink; etat amṛtam, this nectar; eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they are pleased by only seeing. Commentary:-Earlier it was described what the nectar is and how it may be meditated upon. The gods and goddesses enjoy this nectar. How these gods and goddesses may be meditated upon is now being stated. Early in the morning the sun is red, and this red colour is the first nectar, which is enjoyed by the Vasus led by fire. They enjoy it by seeing, not by eating and drinking. They, in fact, enjoy it by using all their organs. The body is a source of bad odour and bad secretions, but because the gods are all under the protection of the sun, they are therefore exempt from them.

Translation By Max Müller

1. On the first of these nectars (the red light, which represents fame, glory of countenance, vigour, strength, health) the Vasus live, with Agni at their head. True, the Devas do not eat or drink, but they enjoy by seeing the nectar.


Sloka : 3.6.2

त एतदेव रूपमभिसंविशन्त्येतस्माद्रूपादुद्यन्ति ॥ ३.६.२॥

ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti .. 3.6.2..



2. They enter into this [red] colour [of the sun], and they also come out of this colour, [i.e., They look at this red colour and are satisfied. They make no effort to get it. Nevertheless, they are at times attracted to it and try to reach it].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te, they [the gods and goddesses]; etat eva rūpam, this [red] colour; abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]; etasmāt rūpāt, from this colour [i.e., attracted by this colour]; udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it]. Commentary:-The gods and goddesses look at the red colour and keep quiet. Why do they keep quiet? Why do they not try to reach it? Because they feel that the time is not yet ripe for them to get it. When they feel it is the right time, then they start trying. They are fully aware that they must try, and try hard, to attain the things they desire.

Translation By Max Müller

2. They enter into that (red) colour, and they rise from that colour [1].

Footnote:

1. This is differently explained by the commentator. He takes it to mean that, when the Vasus have gone to the sun, and see that there is no opportunity for enjoying that colour, they rest; but when they see that there is an opportunity for enjoying it, they exert themselves for it. I think the colour is here taken for the colour of the morning, which the Vasus enter, and from which they go forth again.


Sloka : 3.6.3

स य एतदेवममृतं वेद वसूनामेवैको भूत्वाग्निनैव

मुखेनैतदेवामृतं दृष्ट्वा तृप्यति स य एतदेव

रूपमभिसंविशत्येतस्माद्रूपादुदेति ॥ ३.६.३॥

sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ veda vasūnāmevaiko bhūtvāgninaiva

mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa ya etadeva

rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti .. 3.6.3..



3. He who knows this nectar thus, becomes one of the Vasus [because only the Vasus know the meaning of this nectar]. Led by fire, he then enjoys looking at the nectar and is happy. He goes into this colour and again comes out of it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; evam, thus; etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar; vasūnām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, having become one of the Vasus; agninā eva mukhena, led by fire; etat eva amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, enjoys by seeing the nectar; saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this [red] colour; etasmāt rūpāt udeti, he also comes out of this colour. Commentary:-Anyone can perform the ceremonies mentioned in the Ṛg Veda and thus attain the results mentioned earlier. These ceremonies are like flowers, and by reciting the Ṛk mantras, you can collect the honey in the form of fame, strength, etc. Not only that, when you attain these things, you are also able to preserve them by the grace of the sun. Further, the beauty and grandeur of the sun in the early morning is like a special gift meant just for you. You are then one of the gods known as the Vasus. You can enjoy this state at will, and if you wish, can enjoy whatever the sun has to give. If you do not want to enjoy anything, you can merely look at it and that is enough enjoyment for you.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He who thus knows this nectar, becomes one of the Vasus, with Agni at their head, he sees the nectar and rejoices. And he, too, having entered that colour, rises again from that colour.


Sloka : 3.6.4

स यावदादित्यः पुरस्तादुदेता पश्चादस्तमेता

वसूनामेव तावदाधिपत्यꣳस्वाराज्यं पर्येता ॥ ३.६.४॥

sa yāvadādityaḥ purastādudetā paścādastametā

vasūnāmeva tāvadādhipatyagͫsvārājyaṃ paryetā .. 3.6.4..



4. As long as the sun rises in the east and sets in the west, so long will that person enjoy the sovereignty and freedom of the Vasus.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yāvat, so long as; ādityaḥ, the sun; purastāt udetā, rises in the east; paścāt astam-etā, sets in the west; eva tāvat, that long; saḥ, he; vasūnām, of the Vasus; ādhipatyam, sovereignty; svārājyam, freedom; pari-etā, will enjoy. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section. Commentary:-There is a difference between those who merely perform sacrifices and those who perform sacrifices but are, at the same time, deeply concerned with their spiritual development. The former may attain heaven, but only for a short while. The latter attain a status like the Vasus and become sovereigns. They attain liberation as and when they like.

Translation By Max Müller

4. So long as the sun rises in the east and sets in the west [1], so long does he follow the sovereign supremacy of the Vasus.

Footnote:

1. 1. East:- Vasus:- red:- Agni. 2. South:- Rudras:- white:- Indra. 3. West:- Âditya:- dark:- Varuna. 4. North:- Marut:- very dark:- Soma. 5. Upward:- Sâdhya:- centre:- Brahman.


Sloka : 3.7.1

॥ इति षष्ठः खण्डः ॥

अथ यद्द्वितीयममृतं तद्रुद्रा उपजीवन्तीन्द्रेण

मुखेन न वै देवा अश्नन्ति न पिबन्त्येतदेवामृतं

दृष्ट्वा तृप्यन्ति ॥ ३.७.१॥

.. iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yaddvitīyamamṛtaṃ tadrudrā upajīvantīndreṇa

mukhena na vai devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ

dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti .. 3.7.1..



1. With Indra as their leader, the Rudras enjoy the second nectar [which is the white colour of the sun]. As a matter of fact, the gods and goddesses neither eat nor drink. They are pleased merely by seeing the nectar.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat, that which; dvitīyam amṛtam, the second nectar [i.e., the white colour of the sun]; tat, that; rudrāḥ, the Rudras; upajīvanti, enjoy; indreṇa mukhena, led by Indra; vai, as a matter of fact; devāḥ, the gods and goddesses; na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink; etat amṛtam, this nectar; eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they are pleased by only seeing. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. On the second of these nectars the Rudras live, with Indra at their head. True, the Devas do not eat or drink, but they enjoy by seeing the nectar.


Sloka : 3.7.2

त एतदेव रूपमभिसंविशन्त्येतस्माद्रूपादुद्यन्ति ॥ ३.७.२॥

ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti .. 3.7.2..



2. They enter into this [white] colour of the sun, and they also come out of this colour.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te, they [the Rudras]; etat eva rūpam, this [white] colour; abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]; etasmāt rūpāt, from this colour [i.e., attracted by this colour]; udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. They enter into that white colour, and they rise from that colour.


Sloka : 3.7.3

स य एतदेवममृतं वेद रुद्राणामेवैको भूत्वेन्द्रेणैव

मुखेनैतदेवामृतं दृष्ट्वा तृप्यति स एतदेव

रूपमभिसंविशत्येतस्माद्रूपादुदेति ॥ ३.७.३॥

sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ veda rudrāṇāmevaiko bhūtvendreṇaiva

mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa etadeva

rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti .. 3.7.3..



3. He who knows this nectar thus, becomes a Rudra himself. With Indra as the leader, he looks at the nectar and is happy. He goes into this colour and again comes out of it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; evam, thus; etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar; rudrāṇām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, becomes one of the Rudras; indreṇa eva mukhena, led by Indra; etat eva amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, enjoys by seeing the nectar; saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this [white] colour; etasmāt rūpāt udeti, he also comes out of this colour. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He who thus knows this nectar, becomes one of the Rudras, with Indra at their head, he sees the nectar and rejoices. And he, having entered that colour, rises again from that colour.


Sloka : 3.7.4

स यावदादित्यः पुरस्तादुदेता पश्चादस्तमेता

द्विस्तावद्दक्षिणत उदेतोत्तरतोऽस्तमेता रुद्राणामेव

तावदाधिपत्यꣳस्वाराज्यं पर्येता ॥ ३.७.४॥

sa yāvadādityaḥ purastādudetā paścādastametā

dvistāvaddakṣiṇata udetottarato'stametā rudrāṇāmeva

tāvadādhipatyagͫsvārājyaṃ paryetā .. 3.7.4..



4. As long as the sun rises in the east and sets in the west, twice that long will he [who knows this] rise in the south and set in the north. That person will also attain sovereignty and freedom like the Rudras.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yāvat, so long as; ādityaḥ, the sun; purastāt udetā, rises in the east; paścāt astam-etā, sets in the west; saḥ, he [who knows this]; dviḥ-tāvat, twice that long; dakṣiṇataḥ udetā, will rise in the south; uttarataḥ astam-etā, [and] set in the north; eva tāvat, that long; rudrāṇām, of the Rudras; ādhipatyam, sovereignty; svārājyam, freedom; pari-etā, will attain. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

4. So long as the sun rises in the east and sets in the west, twice as long does it rise in the south and set in the north; and so long does he follow the sovereign supremacy of the Rudras.


Sloka : 3.8.1

॥ इति सप्तमः खण्डः ॥

अथ यत्तृतीयममृतं तदादित्या उपजीवन्ति वरुणेन

मुखेन न वै देवा अश्नन्ति न पिबन्त्येतदेवामृतं

दृष्ट्वा तृप्यन्ति ॥ ३.८.१॥

.. iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yattṛtīyamamṛtaṃ tadādityā upajīvanti varuṇena

mukhena na vai devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ

dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti .. 3.8.1..



1. With Varuṇa as their leader, the Ādityas enjoy the third nectar [which is dark in colour]. As a matter of fact, the gods and goddesses neither eat nor drink. They are pleased merely by seeing the nectar.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat, that which; tṛtīyam amṛtam, the third nectar [i.e., the dark colour of the sun]; tat, that; ādityāḥ, the Ādityas; upajīvanti, sustain themselves with; varuṇena mukhena, led by Varuṇa; vai, as a matter of fact; devāḥ, the gods and goddesses; na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink; etat amṛtam, this nectar; eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they become happy by only seeing. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. On the third of these nectars the Âdityas live, with Varuna at their head. True, the Devas do not eat or drink, but they enjoy by seeing the nectar.


Sloka : 3.8.2

त एतदेव रूपमभिसंविशन्त्येतस्माद्रूपादुद्यन्ति ॥ ३.८.२॥

ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti .. 3.8.2..



2. They enter into this [dark] colour of the sun, and they also come out of this colour.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te, they [the Ādityas]; etāt eva rūpam, this [dark] colour; abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]; etasmāt rūpāt, from this colour [i.e., attracted by this colour]; udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. They enter into that (dark) colour, and they rise from that colour.


Sloka : 3.8.3

स य एतदेवममृतं वेदादित्यानामेवैको भूत्वा वरुणेनैव

मुखेनैतदेवामृतं दृष्ट्वा तृप्यति स एतदेव

रूपमभिसंविशत्येतस्माद्रूपादुदेति ॥ ३.८.३॥

sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ vedādityānāmevaiko bhūtvā varuṇenaiva

mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa etadeva

rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti .. 3.8.3..



3. He who knows this nectar thus, becomes one of the Ādityas. With Varuṇa as the leader, he enjoys the nectar by looking at it. He goes into this colour and again comes out of it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ he who; evam, thus; etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar; ādityānām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, becomes one of the Ādityas; varuṇena era mukhena, led by Varuṇa; etat era amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, enjoys by seeing the nectar; saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this [dark] colour; etasmāt rūpāt udeti, he also comes out of this colour. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He who thus knows this nectar, becomes one of the Âdityas, with Varuna at their head, he sees the nectar and rejoices. And he, having entered that colour, rises again from that colour.


Sloka : 3.8.4

स यावदादित्यो दक्षिणत उदेतोत्तरतोऽस्तमेता

द्विस्तावत्पश्चादुदेता पुरस्तादस्तमेतादित्यानामेव

तावदाधिपत्यꣳस्वाराज्यं पर्येता ॥ ३.८.४॥

sa yāvadādityo dakṣiṇata udetottarato'stametā

dvistāvatpaścādudetā purastādastametādityānāmeva

tāvadādhipatyagͫsvārājyaṃ paryetā .. 3.8.4..



4. As long as the sun rises in the south and sets in the north, twice that long will he [who knows this] rise in the west and set in the east. That person will also attain sovereignty and freedom like the Ādityas.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yāvat, so long as; ādityaḥ, the sun; dakṣiṇataḥ udetā, rises in the south; uttarataḥ astam-etā, [and] sets in the north; saḥ, he [who knows this]; dviḥ-tāvat, twice that long; paścāt udetā, will rise in the west; purastāt astam-etā, [and] set in the east; eva tāvat, that long; ādityānām, of the Ādityas; ādhipatyam, sovereignty; svārājyam, freedom; pari-etā, will attain. Iti āṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section. Commentary:-The sun neither rises nor sets; it is always stationary. It merely gives the impression of rising and setting.

Translation By Max Müller

4. So long as the sun rises in the south and sets in the north, twice as long does it rise in the west and set in the east; and so long does he follow the sovereign supremacy of the Âdityas.


Sloka : 3.9.1

॥ इति अष्टमः खण्डः ॥

अथ यच्चतुर्थममृतं तन्मरुत उपजीवन्ति सोमेन

मुखेन न वै देवा अश्नन्ति न पिबन्त्येतदेवामृतं

दृष्ट्वा तृप्यन्ति ॥ ३.९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yaccaturthamamṛtaṃ tanmaruta upajīvanti somena

mukhena na vai devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ

dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti .. 3.9.1..



1. With Soma as their leader, the Maruts enjoy the fourth nectar [which is deep black in colour]. As a matter of fact, the gods and goddesses neither eat nor drink. They enjoy merely by seeing the nectar.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat, that which; caturtham amṛtam, the fourth nectar [i.e., the deep black colour of the sun]; tat, that; marutaḥ, the Maruts; upajīvanti, enjoy; somena mukhena, led by Soma; vai, as a matter of fact; devāḥ, the gods and goddesses; na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink; etat amṛtam, this nectar; eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they become happy by only seeing. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. On the fourth of these nectars the Maruts live, with Soma at their head. True, the Devas do not eat or drink, but they enjoy by seeing the nectar.


Sloka : 3.9.2

त एतदेव रूपमभिसंविशन्त्येतस्माद्रूपादुद्यन्ति ॥ ३.९.२॥

ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti .. 3.9.2..



2. They enter into this [deep black] colour of the sun, and they also come out of this colour.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te, they [the Maruts]; etat eva rūpam, this [deep black] colour; abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]; etasmāt rūpāt, from this colour [i.e., attracted by this colour]; udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. They enter in that (very dark) colour, and they rise from that colour.


Sloka : 3.9.3

स य एतदेवममृतं वेद मरुतामेवैको भूत्वा सोमेनैव

मुखेनैतदेवामृतं दृष्ट्वा तृप्यति स एतदेव

रूपमभिसंविशत्येतस्माद्रूपादुदेति ॥ ३.९.३॥

sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ veda marutāmevaiko bhūtvā somenaiva

mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa etadeva

rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti .. 3.9.3..



3. He who knows this nectar thus, becomes one of the Maruts. With Soma as the leader, he enjoys the nectar by looking at it. He goes into this colour and again comes out of it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; evam, thus; etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar; marutām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, becomes one of the Maruts; somena eva mukhena, led by Soma; etat eva amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, he enjoys by seeing the nectar; saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this [deep black] colour; etasmāt rūpāt udeti, he also comes out of this colour. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He who thus knows this nectar, becomes one of the Maruts, with Soma at their head, he sees the nectar and rejoices. And he, having entered that colour, rises again from that colour.


Sloka : 3.9.4

स यावदादित्यः पश्चादुदेता पुरस्तादस्तमेता

द्विस्तावदुत्तरत उदेता दक्षिणतोऽस्तमेता मरुतामेव

तावदाधिपत्य्ꣳस्वाराज्यं पर्येता ॥ ३.९.४॥

sa yāvadādityaḥ paścādudetā purastādastametā

dvistāvaduttarata udetā dakṣiṇato'stametā marutāmeva

tāvadādhipatygͫsvārājyaṃ paryetā .. 3.9.4..



4. As long as the sun rises in the west and sets in the east, twice that long will he [who knows this] rise in the north and set in the south. That person will also attain sovereignty and freedom like the Maruts.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yāvat, so long as; ādityaḥ, the sun; paścāt udetā, rises in the west; purastāt astam-etā, [and] sets in the east; saḥ, he [who knows this]; dviḥ-tāvat, twice that long; uttarataḥ udetā, will rise in the north; dakṣiṇataḥ astam-etā, [and] set in the south; eva tāvat, that long; marutām, of the Maruts; ādhipatyam, sovereignty; svārājyam, freedom; pari-etā, will attain. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

4. So long as the sun rises in the west and sets in the east, twice as long does it rise in the north and set in the south; and so long does he follow the sovereign supremacy of the Maruts.


Sloka : 3.10.1

॥ इति नवमः खण्डः ॥

अथ यत्पञ्चमममृतं तत्साध्या उपजीवन्ति ब्रह्मणा

मुखेन न वै देवा अश्नन्ति न पिबन्त्येतदेवामृतं

दृष्ट्वा तृप्यन्ति ॥ ३.१०.१॥

.. iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yatpañcamamamṛtaṃ tatsādhyā upajīvanti brahmaṇā

mukhena na vai devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ

dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti .. 3.10.1..



1. With Brahman [in the form of praṇava, Om] as their leader, the Sādhyas enjoy the fifth nectar [that which seems to be trembling within the sun]. As a matter of fact, the gods and goddesses neither eat nor drink. They enjoy merely by seeing the nectar.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat, that which; pañcamam amṛtam, the fifth nectar [i.e., what appears to be vibrating within the sun]; tat, that; sādhyāḥ, the Sādhyas; upajīvanti, enjoy; brahmaṇā mukhena, led by Brahman [i.e., praṇava]; vai, as a matter of fact; devāḥ, the gods and goddesses; na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink; etat amṛtam, this nectar; eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they become happy by only seeing. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. On the fifth of these nectars the Sâdhyas live, with Brahman at their head. True, the Devas do not eat or drink, but they enjoy by seeing the nectar.


Sloka : 3.10.2

त एतदेव रूपमभिसंविशन्त्येतस्माद्रूपादुद्यन्ति ॥ ३.१०.२॥

ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti .. 3.10.2..



2. They enter into this form of the sun [which seems to be vibrating], and they also come out of this form.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te, they [the Sādhyas]; etat eva rūpam, this form [of the sun which seems to be vibrating]; abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]; etasmāt rūpāt, from this form [i.e., attracted by this form]; udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. They enter into that colour, and they rise from that colour.


Sloka : 3.10.3

स य एतदेवममृतं वेद साध्यानामेवैको भूत्वा

ब्रह्मणैव मुखेनैतदेवामृतं दृष्ट्वा तृप्यति स एतदेव

रूपमभिसंविशत्येतस्माद्रूपादुदेति ॥ ३.१०.३॥

sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ veda sādhyānāmevaiko bhūtvā

brahmaṇaiva mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa etadeva

rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti .. 3.10.3..



3. He who knows this nectar thus, becomes one of the Sādhyas. With Brahman [in the form of praṇava] as the leader, he enjoys the nectar by looking at it. He goes into this form [of the sun] and again comes out of it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; evam, thus; etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar; sādhyānām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, becomes one of the Sādhyas; brahmaṇā eva mukhena, led by Brahman [as praṇava]; etat eva amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, he enjoys by seeing the nectar; saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this form [of Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He who thus knows this nectar, becomes one of the Sâdhyas, with Brahman at their head; he sees the nectar and rejoices. And he, having entered that colour, rises again from that colour.


Sloka : 3.10.4

स यावदादित्य उत्तरत उदेता दक्षिणतोऽस्तमेता

द्विस्तावदूर्ध्वं उदेतार्वागस्तमेता साध्यानामेव

तावदाधिपत्यꣳस्वाराज्यं पर्येता ॥ ३.१०.४॥

sa yāvadāditya uttarata udetā dakṣiṇato'stametā

dvistāvadūrdhvaṃ udetārvāgastametā sādhyānāmeva

tāvadādhipatyagͫsvārājyaṃ paryetā .. 3.10.4..



4. As long as the sun rises in the north and sets in the south, twice that long will he [who knows this] rise above and set below. That person will also attain sovereighnt and freedom like the Sādhyas [i.e., he can move up and down as he likes].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yāvat, so long as; ādityaḥ, the sun; uttarataḥ udetā, rises in the north; dakṣiṇataḥ astam-etā, [and] sets in the south; saḥ, he [who knows this]; dviḥ-tāvat, twice that long; ūrḍhvaḥ udetā, will rise above; arvāk astam-etā, [and] set down below; eva tāvat, that long; sādhyānām, of the Sādhyas; ādhipatyam, sovereignty; svārājyam, freedom; pari-etā, will attain. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section. Commentary:-The sun is stationary. It neither rises nor sets. If it appears to rise or set, it is because of how we perceive it. Similarly, the sun may seem to rise in a different direction, depending on where we are when we see it. The Vasus, Rudras, Ādityas, etc., are minor gods and goddesses. They have not yet attained the status of Brahman, but they are on their way to doing so. However, anyone can attain the status of a minor god or godddess—that is, he can be like a Rudra, for instance. By performing sacrifices mentioned in the scriptures a person can share with those minor gods and goddesses the special worlds reserved for them. Such a person may even enjoy many powers and privileges, but he is still far away from the status of Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

4. So long as the sun rises in the north and sets in the south, twice as long does it rise above, and set below; and so long does he follow the sovereign power of the Sâdhyas [1].

Footnote:

1. The meaning of the five Khandas from 6 to 10 is clear, in so far as they are intended to show that he who knows or meditates on the sacrifices as described before, enjoys his reward in different worlds with the Vasus, Rudras, &c. for certain periods of time, till at last he reaches the true Brahman. Of these periods each succeeding one is supposed to be double the length of the preceding one. This is expressed by imagining a migration of the sun from east to south, west, north, and zenith. Each change of the sun marks a new world, and the duration of each successive world is computed as double the duration of the preceding world. Similar ideas have been more fully developed in the Purânas, and the commentator is at great pains to remove apparent contradictions between the Paurânik and Vaidik accounts, following, as Ânandagñânagiri remarks, the Dravidâkârya ( , l. 13).


Sloka : 3.11.1

॥ इति दशमः खण्डः ॥

अथ तत ऊर्ध्व उदेत्य नैवोदेता नास्तमेतैकल एव

मध्ये स्थाता तदेष श्लोकः ॥ ३.११.१॥

.. iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha tata ūrdhva udetya naivodetā nāstametaikala eva

madhye sthātā tadeṣa ślokaḥ .. 3.11.1..



1. Next, after giving to all living beings the fruits of their work, the sun will be above such obligations. It will no longer rise nor set, and will stay by itself midway. Here is a verse on the subject:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, next; tataḥ, after that [i.e., after giving the living beings the fruits of their work]; ūrdhvaḥ udetyā, [and] having risen above [such tasks]; na eva udetā, it [the sun] will not rise again; na astam-etā, nor will it set; ekalaḥ, alone; eva madhye sthātā, it will stay midway; tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject. Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. When from thence he has risen upwards, he neither rises nor sets. He is alone, standing in the centre. And on this there is this verse:-


Sloka : 3.11.2

न वै तत्र न निम्लोच नोदियाय कदाचन ।

देवास्तेनाहꣳसत्येन मा विराधिषि ब्रह्मणेति ॥ ३.११.२॥

na vai tatra na nimloca nodiyāya kadācana .

devāstenāhagͫsatyena mā virādhiṣi brahmaṇeti .. 3.11.2..



2. [In answer to a question]—No, indeed, in Brahmaloka the sun never rose, nor did it ever set. O gods, [listen and bear witness to me]. What I am saying is true, and by it may I have no hindrance to my realization of Brahman.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- [You ask about the sunrise and sunset in Brahmaloka]—na vai, no indeed; tatra, there [in Brahmaloka]; kadācana na nimloca, [the sun] never set; na udiyāya, nor did it rise; devāḥ, O gods [listen to me]; tena satyena, by this which is true; aham brahmaṇā mā virādhiṣi, may I not have any hindrance to my realization of Brahman. Commentary:- This is an assertion that there is no day or night in Brahmaloka. When a person makes a statement like this, he invokes the gods to bear witness to what he is saying. He is confident that what he is saying is true and that it will be no bar to his being one with Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'Yonder he neither rises nor sets at any time. If this is not true, ye gods, may I lose Brahman.'


Sloka : 3.11.3

न ह वा अस्मा उदेति न निम्लोचति सकृद्दिवा हैवास्मै

भवति य एतामेवं ब्रह्मोपनिषदं वेद ॥ ३.११.३॥

na ha vā asmā udeti na nimlocati sakṛddivā haivāsmai

bhavati ya etāmevaṃ brahmopaniṣadaṃ veda .. 3.11.3..



3. For him who knows the secret teachings of Brahman there is no sunrise or sunset [or day or night]. For him there is always day [i.e., light].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Na, not; ha vai asmai, so far as he is concerned; udeti, does [the sun] rise; na nimlocati, nor does it set; asmai, for him; sakṛt divā ha eva bhavati, there is always day [i.e., light]; yaḥ, he who; etām, this; evam, in this way; brahmopaniṣadam, the secret teachings about Brahman; veda, knows. Commentary:-Earlier it was described how Brahman manifests itself in various forms—as a crossbeam, a honeycomb, etc., or as various gods enjoying various nectars. If you understand the underlying meaning of such manifestations, you then attain the knowledge of Brahman. To you then there is no day or night. You are like the sun—self-luminous. You are, in fact, one with Brahman—always the same, eternal, infinite.

Translation By Max Müller

3. And indeed to him who thus knows this Brahma-upanishad (the secret doctrine:- of the Veda) the sun does not rise and does not set. For him there is day, once and for all [1].

Footnote:

1. Cf. Kh. Up. VIII, 4, 2.


Sloka : 3.11.4

तद्धैतद्ब्रह्मा प्रजापतय उवाच प्रजापतिर्मनवे

मनुः प्रजाभ्यस्तद्धैतदुद्दालकायारुणये ज्येष्ठाय पुत्राय

पिता ब्रह्म प्रोवाच ॥ ३.११.४॥

taddhaitadbrahmā prajāpataya uvāca prajāpatirmanave

manuḥ prajābhyastaddhaitaduddālakāyāruṇaye jyeṣṭhāya putrāya

pitā brahma provāca .. 3.11.4..



4. First, Brahmā taught this instruction on honey to Prajāpati. Then Prajāpati taught it to Manu, and Manu taught it to his children. The father Aruṇa then taught this knowledge of Brahman to his eldest son Uddālaka Āruṇi.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat ha etat, that [i.e., the teaching on honey]; brahmā prajāpataya uvāca, Brahmā [first] taught to Prajāpati; prajāpatiḥ manave, Prajāpati [taught it] to Manu; manuḥ prajābhyaḥ, Manu [taught it] to his children; tat ha etat, that; brahma, [knowledge of] Brahman; pitā provāca, the father [Aruṇa] taught; jyeṣṭhāya putrāya uddālakāya āruṇaye, to his eldest son Uddālaka Āruṇi. Commentary:-Starting from Brahmā, this knowledge has passed from generation to generation. The mention of this is only to emphasize its importance. This instruction on honey is nothing but Brahma-vidyā, the knowledge of Brahman. It is the secret of how to attain Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

4. This doctrine (beginning with III, 1, 1) Brahman (m. Hiranyagarbha) told to Pragâpati (Virâg), Pragâpati to Manu, Manu to his offspring (Ikshvâku, &c.) And the father told that (doctrine of) Brahman (n.) to Uddâlaka Âruni.


Sloka : 3.11.5

इदं वाव तज्ज्येष्ठाय पुत्राय पिता ब्रह्म

प्रब्रूयात्प्रणाय्याय वान्तेवासिने ॥ ३.११.५॥

idaṃ vāva tajjyeṣṭhāya putrāya pitā brahma

prabrūyātpraṇāyyāya vāntevāsine .. 3.11.5..



5. This knowledge of Brahman a father will pass on to his eldest son or to a competent resident student.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat vāva idam brahma, this knowledge of Brahman [previously mentioned as passing from teacher to student]; pitā jyeṣṭhāya putrāya, the father to his eldest son; vā, or; praṇāyyāya, a fit; antevāsine, resident student; prabrūyāt, will teach [or, pass on]. Commentary:-The knowledge of Brahman is the highest gift a person can confer on another. A father who has this knowledge can give it to his eldest son, or a competent teacher can pass it on to a competent student living with him.

Translation By Max Müller

5. A father may therefore tell that doctrine of Brahman to his eldest son [1], or to a worthy pupil.

Footnote:

1. This was the old, not the present custom, says Ânandagiri. Not the father, but an âkârya, has now to teach his pupils.


Sloka : 3.11.6

नान्यस्मै कस्मैचन यद्यप्यस्मा इमामद्भिः परिगृहीतां

धनस्य पूर्णां दद्यादेतदेव ततो भूय इत्येतदेव

ततो भूय इति ॥ ३.११.६॥

nānyasmai kasmaicana yadyapyasmā imāmadbhiḥ parigṛhītāṃ

dhanasya pūrṇāṃ dadyādetadeva tato bhūya ityetadeva

tato bhūya iti .. 3.11.6..



6. This should never be taught to anyone else, even if one is tempted with the whole world full of riches and surrounded by water. For this knowledge is more precious than that. This knowledge is surely more precious than that.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Na anyasmai kasmaicana, to nobody else; yadi api asmai, even if to him [to the teacher]; imām, this [world]; adbhiḥ parigṛhītām, surrounded by water; dhanasya pūrṇām, full of gold; dadyāt, gives; etat, this [instruction on honey]; eva tataḥ bhūyaḥ. iti, is more precious than that [the repetition is for emphasis]. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

6. But no one should tell it to anybody else, even if he gave him the whole sea-girt earth, full of treasure, for this doctrine is worth more than that, yea, it is worth more.


Sloka : 3.12.1

॥ इति एकादशः खण्डः ॥

गायत्री वा ईदꣳ सर्वं भूतं यदिदं किं च वाग्वै गायत्री

वाग्वा इदꣳ सर्वं भूतं गायति च त्रायते च ॥ ३.१२.१॥

.. iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

gāyatrī vā īdagͫ sarvaṃ bhūtaṃ yadidaṃ kiṃ ca vāgvai gāyatrī

vāgvā idagͫ sarvaṃ bhūtaṃ gāyati ca trāyate ca .. 3.12.1..



1. All that exists in this world, whatever there is, is gāyatrī. It is the word that is gāyatrī, for the word gives names to all things and it also tells them not to fear.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Gāyatrī vai idam sarvam bhūtam, all these beings are gāyatrī; yat idam kiñca, whatever is there; vāk vai gāyatrī, the word is gāyatrī; vāk vai idam sarvam bhūtam gāyati ca, it is vāk that gives names [or sings] to all things; trāyate ca, and also gives protection. Commentary:-Here the importance of the gāyatrī is Being emphasized. True, the gāyatrī is poetry, but it is that poetry which leads to Brahman. This gāyatrī is also called vāk, word, because it is vāk which identifies everything that exists. Vāk gives everything a name and thereby gives it a status. The word gāyatrī means gāyati ca trāyate ca—that which gives names (or sings) to things and also gives them protection. It also means gāyantam trāyate—that is, he who repeats the gāyatrī is saved. (Ga means singing, and tra means saving or protecting.)

Translation By Max Müller

1. The Gâyatrî [1] (verse) is everything whatsoever here exists. Gâyatrî indeed is speech, for speech sings forth (gâya-ti) and protects (trâya-te) everything that here exists.

Footnote:

1. The Gâyatrî is one of the sacred metres, and is here to be meditated on as Brahman. It is used in the sense of verse, and as the name of a famous hymn. The Gâyatrî is often praised as the most powerful metre, and whatever can be obtained by means of the recitation of Gâyatrî verses is described as the achievement of the Gâyatrî. The etymology of gâyatrî from gai and trâ is, of course, fanciful.


Sloka : 3.12.2

या वै सा गायत्रीयं वाव सा येयं पृथिव्यस्याꣳ हीदꣳ

सर्वं भूतं प्रतिष्ठितमेतामेव नातिशीयते ॥ ३.१२.२॥

yā vai sā gāyatrīyaṃ vāva sā yeyaṃ pṛthivyasyāgͫ hīdagͫ

sarvaṃ bhūtaṃ pratiṣṭhitametāmeva nātiśīyate .. 3.12.2..



2. That which is this gāyatrī is that which is this earth. For all things [moving or unmoving] are attached to this earth and cannot get away from it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yā vai sā gāyatrī, that which is this gāyatrī; iyam vāva sā, it is that; yā iyam pṛthivī, which is this earth; hi, for; asyām, to this [earth]; sarvam bhūtam, all things [moving or unmoving]; pratiṣṭhitam, are attached; etām eva na atiśīyate, cannot get away from it. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. That Gâyatrî is also the earth, for everything that here exists rests on the earth, and does not go beyond.


Sloka : 3.12.3

या वै सा पृथिवीयं वाव सा यदिदमस्मिन्पुरुषे

शरीरमस्मिन्हीमे प्राणाः प्रतिष्ठिता एतदेव

नातिशीयन्ते ॥ ३.१२.३॥

yā vai sā pṛthivīyaṃ vāva sā yadidamasminpuruṣe

śarīramasminhīme prāṇāḥ pratiṣṭhitā etadeva

nātiśīyante .. 3.12.3..



3. That which is this earth is this human body, because all the prāṇas are based in this body and cannot exist independent of it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yā vai sā pṛthivī, that which [has earlier been referred to as] this earth; iyam vāva sā, it is that; yat idam asmin puruṣe śarīram, the body which is associated with a human being; hi, because; asmin, on this [body]; ime prāṇāḥ, these prāṇas [i.e., prāṇa, apāna, etc., and also the five elements—ākāśa, vāyu, etc.]; pratiṣṭhitāḥ, are based; etat eva na atiśīyante, they cannot go beyond this [body—i.e., they cannot exist independent of this body]. Commentary:-The earth is the gāyatrī and this gāyatrī is also the human body because the human body is born of the earth. How is the human body borm of the earth? This body is made up of the same elements (space, air, fire, etc.) that the earth is. The five prāṇas (prāṇa, apāna, vyāna, udāna, and samāna) are also known as elements, and they rest on this body. The body is therefore the gāyatrī like the earth. It is the gāyatrī because the prāṇas cannot exist without the body.

Translation By Max Müller

3. That earth again is the body in man, for in it the vital airs (prânas [1], which are everything) rest, and do not go beyond.

Footnote:

1. The prânas may be meant for the five senses, as explained in Kh. I, 2, 1; II, 7, 1; or for the five breathings, as explained immediately afterwards in III, 13, 1. The commentator sees in them everything that here exists (Kh. Up. III, 15, 4), and thus establishes the likeness between the body and the Gâyatrî. As Gâyatrî is the earth, and the earth the body, and the body the heart, Gâyatrî is in the end to be considered as the heart.


Sloka : 3.12.4

यद्वै तत्पुरुषे शरीरमिदं वाव तद्यदिदमस्मिन्नन्तः

पुरुषे हृदयमस्मिन्हीमे प्राणाः प्रतिष्ठिता एतदेव

नातिशीयन्ते ॥ ३.१२.४॥

yadvai tatpuruṣe śarīramidaṃ vāva tadyadidamasminnantaḥ

puruṣe hṛdayamasminhīme prāṇāḥ pratiṣṭhitā etadeva

nātiśīyante .. 3.12.4..



4. That which is in this human body is in this human heart, for all these prāṇas are based in this heart and cannot exist independent of it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yat vai tat puruṣe śarīram, that which is in this human body; idam vāva tat, it is that; yat idam asmin antaḥ puruṣe hṛdayam, which is in this human heart; hi, because; asmin, in this [heart]; ime prāṇāḥ, these prāṇas [the vital forces]; pratiṣṭhitāḥ, are based; etat eva na atiśīyante, they cannot go beyond this [heart—i.e., they cannot exist independent of this heart]. Commentary:-The human body has been described as the gāyatrī. But where is that gāyatrī? It is in the heart. In fact, the heart is the gāyatrī. In what sense can the heart be called the gāyatrī? In the sense that all the prāṇas are in the heart and cannot exist separate from it. And since the body is the gāyatrī, the heart is also the gāyatrī.

Translation By Max Müller

4. That body again in man is the heart within man, for in it the prânas (which are everything) rest, and do not go beyond.


Sloka : 3.12.5

सैषा चतुष्पदा षड्विधा गायत्री तदेतदृचाभ्यनूक्तम्

॥ ३.१२.५॥

saiṣā catuṣpadā ṣaḍvidhā gāyatrī tadetadṛcābhyanūktam

.. 3.12.5..



5. The gāyatrī has four quarters, each being sixfold. This is what is stated in a Ṛk mantra:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sā eṣā gāyatrī catuṣpadā, this gāyatrī has four feet [i.e., quarters]; ṣaṣvidhā, each of them sixfold; tat etat ṛcā abhyanūktam, this is what is stated in a Ṛk mantra [Ṛg Veda 10.10.3]. Commentary:-The gāyatrī is also known as Brahma-gāyatrī. It is one with everything. The Upaniṣad says here that the gāyatrī has four quarters and each quarter has six parts (that is, it

Translation By Max Müller

5. That Gâyatrî has four feet [1] and is sixfold [2]. And this is also declared by a Rik verse (Rig-Veda X, 90, 3):--

Footnote:

1. The four feet are explained as the four quarters of the Gâyatrî metre, of six syllables each. The Gâyatrî really consists of three feet of eight syllables each. 2. The Gâyatrî has been identified with all beings, with speech, earth, body, heart, and the vital airs, and is therefore called sixfold. This, at least, is the way in which the commentator accounts for the epithet 'sixfold.'


Sloka : 3.12.6

तावानस्य महिमा ततो ज्यायाꣳश्च पूरुषः ।

पादोऽस्य सर्वा भूतानि त्रिपादस्यामृतं दिवीति ॥ ३.१२.६॥

tāvānasya mahimā tato jyāyāgͫśca pūruṣaḥ .

pādo'sya sarvā bhūtāni tripādasyāmṛtaṃ divīti .. 3.12.6..



6. Its glory is like this. But the glory of the puruṣa [i.e., Brahman, who fills the whole world] is still greater. All creatures constitute one quarter of him. The remaining three quarters are nectar in heaven.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tāvān, like this; asya mahimā, its glory; tataḥ jyāyān ca puruṣaḥ, that [i.e., the glory] of the puruṣa [i.e., Brahman, who fills the whole world] is still greater; pādaḥ asya sarvā [i.e., sarvāṇi] bhūtāni, all things constitute one foot [or, quarter] of him; tripād asya, [the remaining] three feet [or, quarters] of him; amṛtam divi, are like nectar in heaven. Commentary:-Brahman has been described as the gāyatrī, having four feet (or, quarters) and being sixfold. This is just figurative, however. Brahman is Brahman and there is no way of describing it. In reality, it is without name and form, beyond thought and speech. It is the Absolute. Brahman can be conceived as both the cause and the effect. As the cause (karaṇa) nothing can be predicated about it; it is nirupādhika, without attributes. As the effect (kārya) it is sopādhika, with attributes. Similarly, the gāyatrī is said here to have four quarters and six parts. These are attributes used to help a disciple understand. As the Pañcadaśi says (verse II.58), ‘Niraṃśe api aṃśam āropya....’ (that is, parts are superimposed on that which has no parts in order to explain what cannot be described).

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'Such is the greatness of it (of Brahman, under the disguise of Gâyatrî [1]); greater than it is the Person [2] (purusha). His feet are all things. The immortal with three feet is in heaven (i. e. in himself).'

Footnote:

1. Of Brahman modified as Gâyatrî, having four feet, and being sixfold. 2. The real Brahman, unmodified by form and name.


Sloka : 3.12.7

यद्वै तद्ब्रह्मेतीदं वाव तद्योयं बहिर्धा

पुरुषादाकाशो यो वै स बहिर्धा पुरुषादाकाशः ॥ ३.१२.७॥

yadvai tadbrahmetīdaṃ vāva tadyoyaṃ bahirdhā

puruṣādākāśo yo vai sa bahirdhā puruṣādākāśaḥ .. 3.12.7..



7-9. That which is Brahman is also the space outside the body. That which is the space outside the body is also the space inside the body. And that which is the space inside the body is also the space within the heart. That treasure within the heart is full and unchanging. He who knows this is always full and not subject to change.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yat vai tat brahma iti, that which is Brahman; idam vāva tat, it is that; yaḥ, which; ayam, is this; ākāśaḥ, space; bahirdhā puruṣāt, outside the human body; yaḥ vai saḥ ākāśaḥ, that which is the space; bahirdhā puruṣāt, outside the human body; ayam vāva saḥ, it is that; yaḥ ayam ākāśaḥ, which is this space; antaḥ puruṣe, inside the human body; yaḥ vai saḥ antaḥ puruṣe ākāśaḥ, that which is the space inside the human body; ayam vāva saḥ, it is that; yaḥ ayam ākāśaḥ, which is this space; antaḥ hṛdaye, inside the heart; tat etat, it is that; pūrṇam, full; apravarti, unchanging; śriyam, treasure; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this; pūrṇām apravartinīm labhate, becomes full and is not subject to change. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section. Commentary:-Earlier Brahman was described as the gāyatrī with four quarters and also as amṛta, nectar. Here it is described as space. It is the same space which is inside as well as outside the human body, and also within the heart. The Upaniṣad says that this ākāśa in the heart is full and never changes. That is to say, it is free from desire and because of that it is never subject to change. Anyone who knows that ākāśa in the heart as such is himself always full and free from desire.

Translation By Max Müller

7. The Brahman which has been thus described (as immortal with three feet in heaven, and as Gâyatrî) is the same as the ether which is around us;


Sloka : 3.12.8

अयं वाव स योऽयमन्तः पुरुष अकाशो यो वै सोऽन्तः

पुरुष आकाशः ॥ ३.१२.८॥

ayaṃ vāva sa yo'yamantaḥ puruṣa akāśo yo vai so'ntaḥ

puruṣa ākāśaḥ .. 3.12.8..



Translation By Max Müller

8. And the ether which is around us, is the same as the ether which is within us. And the ether which is within us,


Sloka : 3.12.9

अयं वाव स योऽयमन्तर्हृदय आकाशस्तदेतत्पूर्णमप्रवर्ति

पूर्णमप्रवर्तिनीꣳश्रियं लभते य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१२.९॥

ayaṃ vāva sa yo'yamantarhṛdaya ākāśastadetatpūrṇamapravarti

pūrṇamapravartinīgͫśriyaṃ labhate ya evaṃ veda .. 3.12.9..



Translation By Max Müller

9. That is the ether within the heart. That ether in the heart (as Brahman) is omnipresent and unchanging. He who knows this obtains omnipresent and unchangeable happiness.


Sloka : 3.13.1

॥ इति द्वादशः खण्डः ॥

तस्य ह वा एतस्य हृदयस्य पञ्च देवसुषयः

स योऽस्य प्राङ्सुषिः स प्राणस्तच्चक्षुः

स आदित्यस्तदेतत्तेजोऽन्नाद्यमित्युपासीत

तेजस्व्यन्नादो भवति य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१३.१॥

.. iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tasya ha vā etasya hṛdayasya pañca devasuṣayaḥ

sa yo'sya prāṅsuṣiḥ sa prāṇastaccakṣuḥ

sa ādityastadetattejo'nnādyamityupāsīta

tejasvyannādo bhavati ya evaṃ veda .. 3.13.1..



1. In the heart there are five doors guarded by the gods. The door in the east is prāṇa. It is also the eyes, and it is Āditya. Worship this as the source of brightness and food. He who knows this becomes bright and enjoys food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasya ha vai etasya hṛdayasya, of this heart; pañca devasuṣayaḥ, five passages guarded by the gods; saḥ yaḥ, that which; asya prāṅsuṣiḥ, is its eastern passage; saḥ prāṇaḥ, that is prāṇa; tat cakṣuḥ, that is [also] the eye; saḥ ādityaḥ, [and] that is Āditya [the sun]; tat etat, it is that; tejaḥ annādyam iti upāsīta, meditate on as the source of brightness and food; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this; tejasvī annādaḥ bhavati, becomes bright and an eater of food. Commentary:-If you want to enter a house, you must please those who are at the gates. Similarly, if you want to enter heaven, you must worship Brahman as prāṇa. As you do so, you should attribute to prāṇa the qualities of Àditya and annāda—that is, of brightness and strength. If. prāṇa is pleased with you, you have no difficulty attaining heaven.

Translation By Max Müller

1. For that heart there are five gates belonging to the Devas (the senses). The eastern gate is the Prâna (up-breathing), that is the eye, that is Âditya (the sun). Let a man meditate on that as brightness (glory of countenance) and health. He who knows this, becomes bright and healthy.


Sloka : 3.13.2

अथ योऽस्य दक्षिणः सुषिः स व्यानस्तच्छ्रोत्रꣳ

स चन्द्रमास्तदेतच्छ्रीश्च यशश्चेत्युपासीत

श्रीमान्यशस्वी भवति य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१३.२॥

atha yo'sya dakṣiṇaḥ suṣiḥ sa vyānastacchrotragͫ

sa candramāstadetacchrīśca yaśaścetyupāsīta

śrīmānyaśasvī bhavati ya evaṃ veda .. 3.13.2..



2. Next, the southern door of the heart is vyāna. It is also the ears, and it is the moon. Worship it as the source of prosperity and fame. He who knows this becomes prosperous and famous.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yaḥ asya dakṣiṇaḥ suṣiḥ, that which is its southern passage; saḥ vyānaḥ, that is vyāna; tat śrotram, that is [also] the ear; saḥ candramāḥ, [and] that is the moon; tat etat, it is that; śrīḥ ca yaśaḥ iti upāsīta, meditate on as prosperity and fame; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this; śrīmān yaśasvī bhavati, becomes fortunate and famous. Commentary:-Vyāna is the air that is spread all over the body. It is also the breath you need when you are doing some hard work. Vyāna is the door, or passage, in the southern part of the heart, and it is connected with hearing and the moon. A person learns by hearing, so the ear is said to be the source of knowledge. The moon is the source of food, which gives a person strength, and from strength and knowledge a person acquires prosperity and fame. By worshipping vyāna as Brahman a person can attain heaven, which is his primary concern, and secondarily he attains prosperity and fame.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The southern gate is the Vyâna (back-breathing), that is the ear, that is the moon. Let a man meditate on that as happiness and fame. He who knows this, becomes happy and famous.


Sloka : 3.13.3

अथ योऽस्य प्रत्यङ्सुषिः सोऽपानः

सा वाक्सोऽग्निस्तदेतद्ब्रह्मवर्चसमन्नाद्यमित्युपासीत

ब्रह्मवर्चस्यन्नादो भवति य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१३.३॥

atha yo'sya pratyaṅsuṣiḥ so'pānaḥ

sā vākso'gnistadetadbrahmavarcasamannādyamityupāsīta

brahmavarcasyannādo bhavati ya evaṃ veda .. 3.13.3..



3. Next, the western door of the heart is apāna. It is also vāk, and it is fire. Worship this [Brahman in the form of apāna] as the radiance of Brahman and as food. He who knows this becomes radiant with the light of Brahman and a great eater of food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yaḥ asya prātyāṅsuṣiḥ, that which is its western passage; saḥ apānaḥ, that is apāna; sā vāk, that is [also] vāk [word]; saḥ agniḥ, [and] that is fire; tat etat, it is that [Brahman as apāna]; brahmavarcasam ca annādyam iti upāsīta, meditate on as the radiance of Brahman [that comes from living a disciplined life and from scholarship] and as food; yah evam veda, he who knows this; Commentary:-Apāna’s function is to remove all waste from the body. It is connected with speech and fire. Brahmavarcasa is the radiance a person acquires when he has much scholarship and has led a disciplined life. One who meditates on apāna as Brahman acquires this radiance and also food.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The western gate is the Apâna (down-breathing), that is speech, that is Agni (fire). Let a man meditate on that as glory of countenance and health. He who knows this, becomes glorious and healthy.


Sloka : 3.13.4

अथ योऽस्योदङ्सुषिः स समानस्तन्मनः

स पर्जन्यस्तदेतत्कीर्तिश्च व्युष्टिश्चेत्युपासीत

कीर्तिमान्व्युष्टिमान्भवति य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१३.४॥

atha yo'syodaṅsuṣiḥ sa samānastanmanaḥ

sa parjanyastadetatkīrtiśca vyuṣṭiścetyupāsīta

kīrtimānvyuṣṭimānbhavati ya evaṃ veda .. 3.13.4..



4. Next, the northern door of the heart is samāna. It is also the mind, and it is the god of rain. Worship this [Brahman in the form of samāna] as fame and beauty. He who knows this becomes famous and beautiful.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yaḥ asya udaṅsuṣiḥ, that which is its northern passage; saḥ samānaḥ, that is samāna; tat manaḥ, that is [also] the mind; saḥ parjanyaḥ, [and] that is the god of rain; tat etat, it is that [Brahman as samāna]; kīrtiḥ ca vyuṣṭiḥ ca iti upāsīta, meditate on as fame and beauty; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this; kīrtimān vyuṣṭimān bhavati, becomes famous and beautiful. Commentary:-Samāna is so called because it digests all food and drink and makes them equal (sama). The mind and rain are connnected with samāna, and since fame is connected with the mind, it is attributed to samāna. Like fame, physical beauty is also the result of samāna.

Translation By Max Müller

4. The northern gate is the Samâna (on-breathing), that is mind, that is Parganya (rain). Let a man meditate on that as celebrity and beauty. He who knows this, becomes celebrated and beautiful.


Sloka : 3.13.5

अथ योऽस्योर्ध्वः सुषिः स उदानः स वायुः

स आकाशस्तदेतदोजश्च महश्चेत्युपासीतौजस्वी

महस्वान्भवति य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१३.५॥

atha yo'syordhvaḥ suṣiḥ sa udānaḥ sa vāyuḥ

sa ākāśastadetadojaśca mahaścetyupāsītaujasvī

mahasvānbhavati ya evaṃ veda .. 3.13.5..



5. Next, the door at the top of the heart is udāna. It is also vāyu [air], and it is ākāśa [space]. Worship this [Brahman in the form of udāna] as strength and greatness. He who knows this becomes strong and great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yaḥ asya ūrdhvaḥ suṣiḥ, that which is its passage at the top [of the heart]; saḥ udānaḥ, that is udāna; saḥ vāyuḥ, that is [also] vāyu [air]; saḥ ākāśaḥ, [and] that is ākāśa [space]; tat etat, it is that [Brahman as udāna]; ojaḥ ca mahaḥ ca Commentary:-There is an aperture at the upper part of the heart, and this is known as udāna. Air passes through this aperture from the feet to the head to help maintain the necessary operations of the body. The air that passes thus is also called udāna. Ākāśa (space) is the support of this udāna. Because udāna is one of the gateways to Brahman, it is meditated on as Brahman. If you do this, you become strong and famous. But, more important, you also attain heaven.

Translation By Max Müller

5. The upper gate is the Udâna (out-breathing), that is air, that is ether. Let a man meditate on that as strength and greatness. He who knows this, becomes strong and great.


Sloka : 3.13.6

ते वा एते पञ्च ब्रह्मपुरुषाः स्वर्गस्य लोकस्य

द्वारपाः स य एतानेवं पञ्च ब्रह्मपुरुषान्स्वर्गस्य

लोकस्य द्वारपान्वेदास्य कुले वीरो जायते प्रतिपद्यते

स्वर्गं लोकं य एतानेवं पञ्च ब्रह्मपुरुषान्स्वर्गस्य

लोकस्य द्वारपान्वेद ॥ ३.१३.६॥

te vā ete pañca brahmapuruṣāḥ svargasya lokasya

dvārapāḥ sa ya etānevaṃ pañca brahmapuruṣānsvargasya

lokasya dvārapānvedāsya kule vīro jāyate pratipadyate

svargaṃ lokaṃ ya etānevaṃ pañca brahmapuruṣānsvargasya

lokasya dvārapānveda .. 3.13.6..



6. These five prāṇas are themselves like Brahman, and they are the gatekeepers of heaven. Anyone who regards these prāṇas as Brahman and as the gatekeepers to heaven has a heroic child born in his family. Knowing these prāṇas as Brahman and as the gatekeepers of heaven, a person attains heaven himself.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te vai ete pañca brahma-puruṣāḥ, these five [prāṇas] are the employees of Brahman; svargasya lokasya dvārapāḥ, the gatekeepers of the heavenly world; sāḥ yaḥ veda, he who knows; etān pañca brahma-puruṣān, these five Brahma-puruṣas; svargasya lokasya dvārapān, as gatekeepers of the heavenly world; evam, thus; asya kule vīraḥ jāyate, a heroic child is born in his family; yaḥ etān pañca brahma-puruṣān evam svargasya lokasya dvārapān veda, he who knows these five Brahma-puruṣas thus as the gatekeepers of the heavenly world; svargam lokam pratipadyate, attains the heavenly world. Commentary:-Here the advice is to regard everything as Brahman. If you practise thinking that everything is Brahman, you acquire self-restraint, which is the sine qua non of Self-realization. The advice here is to treat the five prāṇas with great respect, so that they may allow you to enter straight into heaven.

Translation By Max Müller

6. These are the five men of Brahman, the doorkeepers of the Svarga (heaven) world. He who knows these five men of Brahman, the door-keepers of the Svarga world, in his family a strong son is born. He who thus knows these five men of Brahman, as the door-keepers of the Svarga world, enters himself the Svarga world.


Sloka : 3.13.7

अथ यदतः परो दिवो ज्योतिर्दीप्यते विश्वतः पृष्ठेषु

सर्वतः पृष्ठेष्वनुत्तमेषूत्तमेषु लोकेष्विदं वाव

तद्यदिदमस्मिन्नन्तः पुरुषे ज्योतिः ॥ ३.१३.७॥

atha yadataḥ paro divo jyotirdīpyate viśvataḥ pṛṣṭheṣu

sarvataḥ pṛṣṭheṣvanuttameṣūttameṣu lokeṣvidaṃ vāva

tadyadidamasminnantaḥ puruṣe jyotiḥ .. 3.13.7..



7. Then, higher than this heaven, above the world, higher than everything, in the highest world, higher than which nothing exists—the light that shines there is the same light that is in a human being.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; ataḥ paraḥ divaḥ, higher than this heaven; yat jyotiḥ dīpyate, the light which shines; viśvataḥ pṛṣṭheṣu, above the world; sarvataḥ pṛṣṭheṣu, above everything; anuttameṣu uttameṣu lokeṣu, in the highest worlds not excelled by any other world [known as satyaloka]; idam vāva tat, it is that; jyotiḥ, light; yat idam asmin antaḥ puruṣe, which is the same as in a human being. Commentary:-Brahman is said to be above everything else. It is the highest and the best. It shines in the highest world and it also shines in the heart of a human being.

Translation By Max Müller

7. Now that light which shines above this heaven, higher than all, higher than everything, in the highest world, beyond which there are no other worlds, that is the same light which is within man. And of this we have this visible proof [1]:-

Footnote:

1. The presence of Brahman in the heart of man is not to rest on the testimony of revelation only, but is here to be established by the evidence of the senses. Childish as the argument may seem to us, it shows at all events how intently the old Brahmans thought on the problem of the evidence of the invisible.


Sloka : 3.13.8

तस्यैषा दृष्टिर्यत्रितदस्मिञ्छरीरे सꣳस्पर्शेनोष्णिमानं

विजानाति तस्यैषा श्रुतिर्यत्रैतत्कर्णावपिगृह्य निनदमिव

नदथुरिवाग्नेरिव ज्वलत उपश‍ृणोति तदेतद्दृष्टं च

श्रुतं चेत्युपासीत चक्षुष्यः श्रुतो भवति य एवं वेद

य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१३.८॥

tasyaiṣā dṛṣṭiryatritadasmiñcharīre sagͫsparśenoṣṇimānaṃ

vijānāti tasyaiṣā śrutiryatraitatkarṇāvapigṛhya ninadamiva

nadathurivāgneriva jvalata upaśṛṇoti tadetaddṛṣṭaṃ ca

śrutaṃ cetyupāsīta cakṣuṣyaḥ śruto bhavati ya evaṃ veda

ya evaṃ veda .. 3.13.8..



8. Here is proof of it:- When you touch the body you can feel heat in it. There is also an audible proof of it:- When you cover your ears you can hear a sound like a moving chariot, or like the bellowing of a bullock, or like a burning fire. A person should meditate on that light in the body as something that is seen and heard. He who knows this becomes a distinguished person—people want to see him and he is widely known.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasya, its [i.e., of the Self in the bodies]; eṣā dṛṣṭiḥ, this visible [proof]; yatra, when; etat asmin śarīre, in this body; saṃsparśena, by touch; uṣṇimānam, warmth; vijānāti, one can feel; tasya eṣā śrutiḥ, this audible [proof] of it; yatra etat karṇau apigṛhya, when one covers the ears; ninadam iva, like the sound of a moving chariot; nadathuḥ iva, like the bellowing of a bullock; agneḥ iva jvalataḥ, like the sound of a burning fire; upaśṛṇoti, one can hear; tat etat, that [light]; iti upāsīta, one should meditate on; dṛṣṭam ca śrutam ca, as seen and as heard; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this; cakṣuṣyaḥ śrutaḥ bhavati, becomes worth seeing and famous. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section. Commentary:-What proof is there that there is any light in the heart? One proof is the warmth of the body. This warmth comes from the light within. But there is yet another proof:- If you cover your ears you will hear all manner of sounds. The sounds and the feeling of warmth both prove that Brahman is within.

Translation By Max Müller

8. Namely, when we thus perceive by touch the warmth here in the body [1]. And of it we have this audible proof:- Namely, when we thus, after stopping our ears, listen to what is like the rolling of a carriage, or the bellowing of an ox, or the sound of a burning fire [2] (within the ears). Let a man meditate on this as the (Brahman) which is seen and heard. He, who knows this, becomes conspicuous and celebrated, yea, he becomes celebrated.

Footnote:

1. That warmth must come from something, just as smoke comes from fire, and this something is supposed to be Brahman in the heart. 2. Cf. Ait. Âr. III, 2, 4, 11-13.


Sloka : 3.14.1

॥ इति त्रयोदशः खण्डः ॥

सर्वं खल्विदं ब्रह्म तज्जलानिति शान्त उपासीत ।

अथ खलु क्रतुमयः पुरुषो यथाक्रतुरस्मिꣳल्लोके

पुरुषो भवति तथेतः प्रेत्य भवति स क्रतुं कुर्वीत

॥ ३.१४.१॥

.. iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

sarvaṃ khalvidaṃ brahma tajjalāniti śānta upāsīta .

atha khalu kratumayaḥ puruṣo yathākraturasmigͫlloke

puruṣo bhavati tathetaḥ pretya bhavati sa kratuṃ kurvīta

.. 3.14.1..



1. All this is Brahman. Everything comes from Brahman, everything goes back to Brahman, and everything is sustained by Brahman. One should therefore quietly meditate on Brahman. Each person has a mind of his own. What a person wills in his present life, he becomes when he leaves this world. One should bear this in mind and meditate accordingly.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sarvam idam, all this; khalu; no doubt; brahma, is Brahman; tajjalān, from this everything comes, into this everything disappears, and on this everything is sustained; iti śāntaḥ upāsīta, meditate on this fact quietly; atha khalu kratumayaḥ puruṣaḥ, because each person has a mind of his own; asmin loke, [therefore] in his present life; yathā kratuḥ puruṣaḥ bhavati, just as a person wills; itaḥ pretya tathā bhavati, he becomes that when he leaves this world; saḥ kratum kurvīta, [therefore] he should be careful about what he wants. Commentary:-The word brahman means ‘the oldest,’ ‘the biggest.’ Tejas (fire), jala (water), and pṛthivī (earth) emerged from Brahman in that order, so they are called tajja. Then they disappear in Brahman in the reverse order, so they are called talla. In the past, in the present, and in the future—they are sustained in Brahman. They are, therefore, one with Brahman. The Upaniṣad says here to think over this with kratu—that is, with great effort, and with deep concentration. Kratu also means will, or will power. It is your will that decides your destiny. Śrī Kṛṣṇa said to Arjuna (Bhagavad Gītā 8.6):- ‘O son of Kunti, at the time of death when a person leaves the body, he attains whatever object he thinks of, as he has been [previously] constantly absorbed in its thought.’ This shows the importance of your kratu.

Translation By Max Müller

1. All this is Brahman (n.) Let a man meditate on that (visible world) as beginning, ending, and breathing [1] in it (the Brahman). Now man is a creature of will. According to what his will is in this world, so will he be when he has departed this life. Let him therefore have this will and belief:-

Footnote:

1. Galân is explained by ga, born, la, absorbed, and an, breathing. It is an artificial term, but fully recognised by the Vedânta school, and always explained in this manner.


Sloka : 3.14.2

मनोमयः प्राणशरीरो भारूपः सत्यसंकल्प

आकाशात्मा सर्वकर्मा सर्वकामः सर्वगन्धः सर्वरसः

सर्वमिदमभ्यत्तोऽवाक्यनादरः ॥ ३.१४.२॥

manomayaḥ prāṇaśarīro bhārūpaḥ satyasaṃkalpa

ākāśātmā sarvakarmā sarvakāmaḥ sarvagandhaḥ sarvarasaḥ

sarvamidamabhyatto'vākyanādaraḥ .. 3.14.2..



2. He is controlled by the mind [i.e., his mind decides what he should and should not do]. He has a subtle body, and he is luminous. If he wants something, he never fails to get it. His Self is spotless like the sky. The whole world is his creation. [Desires are many, and] all those desires are his desires. All odours are his; similarly, all tastes are his. He is everywhere in the world. He has no sense organs, and he is free from desires.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Manomayaḥ, dominated by the mind; prāṇaśarīraḥ, with a subtle body; bhārūpaḥ, whose body is luminous; satyasaṅkalpaḥ, whose thoughts always prove true; ākāśātmā, spotless like the sky; sarvakarmā, whose creation is this world; sarvakāmaḥ, whose desires are always pure; sarvagandhaḥ, who possesses good odours; sarvarasaḥ, whose tastes are all pure; idam sarvam abhyāttaḥ, this is all-pervasive; avākī anādaraḥ, has no sense organs and no desires. Commentary:-This is how you meditate on your Self. You have a mind, and with the help of that mind you can decide what you will or will not do. You have a subtle body consisting of the five organs of action (pañca karmendriyas), the five organs of perception (pañca jñānendriyas), the vital breath in its five forms (prāṇa, apāna, vyāna, udāna, and samāna), plus the mind and the intellect. You are luminous. Whatever you wish for, you acquire. You are spotless, like the sky, and all-pervasive. You are the sole doer of things. You are the source of all desires, and all your desires are pure. You are also the source of all odours and tastes. You have no organs, and you are everywhere. There is nothing you have not already achieved.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The intelligent, whose body is spirit, whose form is light, whose thoughts are true, whose nature is like ether (omnipresent and invisible), from whom all works, all desires, all sweet odours and tastes proceed; he who embraces all this, who never speaks, and is never surprised,


Sloka : 3.14.3

एष म आत्मान्तर्हृदयेऽणीयान्व्रीहेर्वा यवाद्वा

सर्षपाद्वा श्यामाकाद्वा श्यामाकतण्डुलाद्वैष

म आत्मान्तर्हृदये ज्यायान्पृथिव्या

ज्यायानन्तरिक्षाज्ज्यायान्दिवो ज्यायानेभ्यो

लोकेभ्यः ॥ ३.१४.३॥

eṣa ma ātmāntarhṛdaye'ṇīyānvrīhervā yavādvā

sarṣapādvā śyāmākādvā śyāmākataṇḍulādvaiṣa

ma ātmāntarhṛdaye jyāyānpṛthivyā

jyāyānantarikṣājjyāyāndivo jyāyānebhyo

lokebhyaḥ .. 3.14.3..



3. My Self within my heart is smaller than a grain of rice, smaller than a grain of barley, smaller than a mustard seed, smaller than a grain of millet, smaller even than the kernel of a grain of millet. The Self in my heart is larger than the earth, larger than the mid-region, larger than heaven, and larger even than all these worlds.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Eṣaḥ me ātmā, this my Self; antaḥ hṛdaye, inside the heart; aṇīyān, smaller than; vrīheḥ vā, a grain of rice; yavāt vā, or a grain of barley; sarṣapāt vā, or a mustard seed; śyāmākāt vā, or a grain of millet; śyāmākataṇḍulāt vā, or the kernel of a grain of millet; eṣaḥ me ātmā antaḥ hṛdaye, this Self within my heart; jyāyān pṛthivyā, is larger than the earth; jyāyān antarikṣāt, larger than the mid-region; jyāyān divaḥ, larger than heaven; jyāyān ebhyaḥ lokebhyāḥ, larger than all these worlds. Commentary:-The underlying idea in the verse is that the Self is everything and everywhere. It is therefore smaller than the smallest and bigger than the biggest.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He is my self within the heart, smaller than a corn of rice, smaller than a corn of barley, smaller than a mustard seed, smaller than a canary seed or the kernel of a canary seed. He also is my self within the heart, greater than the earth, greater than the sky, greater than heaven, greater than all these worlds.


Sloka : 3.14.4

सर्वकर्मा सर्वकामः सर्वगन्धः सर्वरसः

सर्वमिदमभ्यात्तोऽवाक्यनादर एष म आत्मान्तर्हृदय

एतद्ब्रह्मैतमितः प्रेत्याभिसंभवितास्मीति यस्य स्यादद्धा

न विचिकित्सास्तीति ह स्माह शाण्डिल्यः शाण्डिल्यः

॥ ३.१४.४॥

sarvakarmā sarvakāmaḥ sarvagandhaḥ sarvarasaḥ

sarvamidamabhyātto'vākyanādara eṣa ma ātmāntarhṛdaya

etadbrahmaitamitaḥ pretyābhisaṃbhavitāsmīti yasya syādaddhā

na vicikitsāstīti ha smāha śāṇḍilyaḥ śāṇḍilyaḥ

.. 3.14.4..



4. He who is the sole creator, whose desires are the desires of all, whose odours are the odours of all, whose tastes are the tastes of all, who is everywhere, who has no sense organs, and who is free from desires—he is my Self and is in my heart. He is no other than Brahman. When I leave this body, I shall attain him. He who firmly believes this has no doubt in his mind. [He will surely attain Brahman.] This is what Śāṇḍilya has said.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ, he who; sarvakarmā, is the sole creator of everything; sarvakāmaḥ, whose desires are the desires of all; sarvagandhaḥ, whose odours are the odours of all; sarvarasaḥ, whose tastes are the tastes of all; sarvam idam abhyāttaḥ, who is in all this; avākī, who is without any organs; anādaraḥ, who is not interested in anything; eṣaḥ me ātmā antaḥ hṛdaye, this Self of mine is within my heart; etat brahma, this is Brahman; itaḥ pretya, upon leaving this body; etam abhisambhavitāsmi iti, I shall attain him; yasya syāt addhā, one who has this kind of belief; na vicikitsā asti, has no doubt in his mind; iti ha sma āha śāṇḍilyaḥ, this is what Śāṇḍilya said; śāṇḍilyaḥ, [this is what] Śāṇḍilya [said]. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section. Commentary:-The word Self here means the Cosmic Self (Paramātman). If you believe that you are the Cosmic Self, and that you will be free as soon as your prārabdha karma (the results of your past actions that are now bearing fruit) is exhausted and your

Translation By Max Müller

4. He from whom all works, all desires, all sweet odours and tastes proceed, who embraces all this, who never speaks and who is never surprised, he, my self within the heart, is that Brahman (n.) When I shall have departed from hence, I shall obtain him (that Self). He who has this faith [1] has no doubt; thus said Sândilya [2], yea, thus he said.

Footnote:

1. Or he who has faith and no doubt, will obtain this. 2. This chapter is frequently quoted as the Sândilya-vidyâ, Vedântasâra, init; Vedânta-sûtra III, 3, 31.


Sloka : 3.15.1

॥ इति चतुर्दशः खण्डः ॥

अन्तरिक्षोदरः कोशो भूमिबुध्नो न जीर्यति दिशो

ह्यस्य स्रक्तयो द्यौरस्योत्तरं बिलꣳ स एष कोशो

वसुधानस्तस्मिन्विश्वमिदꣳ श्रितम् ॥ ३.१५.१॥

.. iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

antarikṣodaraḥ kośo bhūmibudhno na jīryati diśo

hyasya sraktayo dyaurasyottaraṃ bilagͫ sa eṣa kośo

vasudhānastasminviśvamidagͫ śritam .. 3.15.1..



1. There is a chest which has the mid-region as its inside and the earth as its bottom. It never decays. The quarters are its sides and the heaven its opening above. This chest is the container of treasures, for in it rests the whole universe.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Kośaḥ, the chest; antarikṣa-udaraḥ, with the midregion as its inside; bhūmi-budhnaḥ, the earth as its bottom; na jīryati, never decays; diśaḥ, the quarters; hi asya sraktayaḥ, are its sides; dyauḥ, the heaven; asya uttaram bilam, is its opening above; saḥ eṣaḥ kośaḥ, this chest; vasudhānaḥ, [is] the container of treasures; tasmin, in it; viśvam idam śritam, rests this universe. Commentary:-The universe is here compared to a chest. Whatever you put inside a chest is safe there. Similarly, whatever is in the universe is safe and sound. It may change its form, but it does not totally disappear.

Translation By Max Müller

1. The chest which has the sky for its circumference and the earth for its bottom, does not decay, for the quarters are its sides, and heaven its lid above. That chest is a treasury, and all things are within it.


Sloka : 3.15.2

तस्य प्राची दिग्जुहूर्नाम सहमाना नाम दक्षिणा

राज्ञी नाम प्रतीची सुभूता नामोदीची तासां

वायुर्वत्सः स य एतमेवं वायुं दिशां वत्सं वेद न

पुत्ररोदꣳ रोदिति सोऽहमेतमेवं वायुं दिशां वत्सं

वेद मा पुत्ररोदꣳरुदम् ॥ ३.१५.२॥

tasya prācī digjuhūrnāma sahamānā nāma dakṣiṇā

rājñī nāma pratīcī subhūtā nāmodīcī tāsāṃ

vāyurvatsaḥ sa ya etamevaṃ vāyuṃ diśāṃ vatsaṃ veda na

putrarodagͫ roditi so'hametamevaṃ vāyuṃ diśāṃ vatsaṃ

veda mā putrarodagͫrudam .. 3.15.2..



2. The eastern quarter of the chest is called juhū, the southern quarter is called sahamānā, the western quarter is called rājñī, and the northern quarter is called subhūtā. Vāyu [air] is the son of these quarters. He who knows this, that Vāyu is the child of the quarters, does not have to weep over the loss of his child. ‘I know that Vāyu is the child of the quarters. May I never have to weep over the loss of my child.’





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prācī dik, the eastern quarter; tasya, of it [i.e., of the chest]; juhūḥ nāma, is called juhū [after the vessel used for offering oblations facing the east]; dakṣiṇā, the southern [quarter]; sahamānām nāma, is named sahamānā; pratīcī, the western [quarter]; rājñī nāma, is named rājñī [because the western sky is red in the evening]; udīcī, the northern [quarter]; subhūtā nāma, is named subhūtā [because those who are rich dominate this quarter]; vāyaḥ, air; tāsām, their [i.e., the quarters’]; vatsaḥ, son; saḥ yaḥ etam veda, he who knows this; vāyum diśām vatsam, that Vāyu is the child of the quarters; putrarodam na roditi, does not have to weep over the loss of his child; saḥ aham etam evam veda, I know this thus; vāyum diśām vatsam, that Vāyu is the son of the quarters; mā putrarodam rudam, may I not have to weep over the loss of my child. Commentary:-The eastern quarter is called juhū because you face that direction when you offer that oblation in the sacrifice. The southern side is sahamānā because sinners go to that quarter to suffer the consequences of the sins they commit. The western side is called rājñī because when the sun sets in that direction, the sky becomes red. Subhūtā is the name of the northern side, because it is dominated by Śiva, Kubera, and other deities of good fortune. Vāyu (air) is considered the child of the quarters because it arises from the quarters. If you believe that Vāyu is immortal and is the child of the quarters, you will then never suffer the loss of your child.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Its eastern quarter is called Guhû, its southern Sahamânâ, its western Râgñî, its northern Subhûtâ [1]. The child of those quarters is Vâyu, the air, and he who knows that the air is indeed the child of the quarters, never weeps for his sons. 'I know the wind to be the child of the quarters, may I never weep for my sons.'

Footnote:

1. These names are explained by the commentator as follows:- Because people offer libations (guhvati), turning to the east, therefore it is called Guhû. Because evil doers suffer (sahante) in the town of Yama, which is in the south, therefore it is called Sahamânâ. The western quarter is called Râgñî, either because it is sacred to king Varuna (râgan), or on account of the red colour (râga) of the twilight. The north is called Subhûtâ, because wealthy beings (bhûtimat), like Kuvera &c., reside there.


Sloka : 3.15.3

अरिष्टं कोशं प्रपद्येऽमुनामुनामुना

प्राणं प्रपद्येऽमुनामुनामुना भूः प्रपद्येऽमुनामुनामुना

भुवः प्रपद्येऽमुनामुनामुना स्वः प्रपद्येऽमुनामुनामुना

॥ ३.१५.३॥

ariṣṭaṃ kośaṃ prapadye'munāmunāmunā

prāṇaṃ prapadye'munāmunāmunā bhūḥ prapadye'munāmunāmunā

bhuvaḥ prapadye'munāmunāmunā svaḥ prapadye'munāmunāmunā

.. 3.15.3..



3. For the sake of my child’s life, I take refuge in that immortal kośa [i.e., the chest, representing the universe]. For the sake of my child’s life, I take refuge in prāṇa [the vital breath]. For the sake of my child’s life, I take refuge in bhūh [the earth]. For the sake of my child’s life, I take refuge in bhuvaḥ [the mid-region]. For the sake of my child’s life, I take refuge in svaḥ [heaven].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life], for the sake of that [child’s life], for the sake of that [child’s life]; ariṣṭam kośam, in the immortal chest; prapadye, I take refuge; amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life—etc.]; prāṇam prapadye, I take refuge in prāṇa; amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life—etc.]; bhūḥ prapadye, I take refuge in bhūh [the earth]; amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life—etc.]; bhuvaḥ prapadye, I take refuge in bhuvaḥ [the mid-region]; amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life—etc.]; svaḥ prapadye, I take refuge in svah [heaven]. Commentary:-For the welfare of your child, surrender to every power on earth, in the mid-region, and in heaven. Repeat this three times, each time saying the name of the child thrice. Here the word amunā has been used instead of the name of the child.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'I turn to the imperishable chest with such and such and such [1].' 'I turn to the Prâna (life) with such and such and such.' 'I turn to Bhûh with such and such and such.' 'I turn to Bhuvah with such and such and such.' 'I turn to Svah with such and such and such.'

Footnote:

1. Here the names of the sons are to be pronounced.


Sloka : 3.15.4

स यदवोचं प्राणं प्रपद्य इति प्राणो वा इदꣳ सर्वं

भूतं यदिदं किंच तमेव तत्प्रापत्सि ॥ ३.१५.४॥

sa yadavocaṃ prāṇaṃ prapadya iti prāṇo vā idagͫ sarvaṃ

bhūtaṃ yadidaṃ kiṃca tameva tatprāpatsi .. 3.15.4..



4. When I said, ‘I take refuge in prāṇa,’ I meant that prāṇa is everything visible, whatever there is, and therefore I have taken refuge in everything.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yat avocam, when I said; prāṇam prapadye iti, I take refuge in prāṇa; prāṇaḥ vai idam sarvam bhūtam, I meant prāṇa is everything; yat idaṃ kiñca, whatever is here [visible]; tat, therefore; tam eva prāpatsi, I am under the care of that [prāṇa]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'When I said, I turn to Prâna, then Prâna means all whatever exists here--to that I turn.'


Sloka : 3.15.5

अथ यदवोचं भूः प्रपद्य इति पृथिवीं प्रपद्येऽन्तरिक्षं

प्रपद्ये दिवं प्रपद्य इत्येव तदवोचम् ॥ ३.१५.५॥

atha yadavocaṃ bhūḥ prapadya iti pṛthivīṃ prapadye'ntarikṣaṃ

prapadye divaṃ prapadya ityeva tadavocam .. 3.15.5..



5. Then, when I said, ‘I take refuge in bhūḥ,’ what I meant was that I take refuge in the earth, I take refuge in the mid-region, and I take refuge in heaven.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat avocam, when I said; bhūḥ prapadye hi, I take refuge in bhūḥ [the earth]; iti eva tat avocam, it is this that I meant; pṛthivīm prapadye, I take refuge in the earth; antarikṣam prapadye, I take refuge in the mid-region; divam prapadye, I take refuge in heaven. Commentary:-That is to say, I meant that I had taken refuge in all the three worlds.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'When I said, I turn to Bhûh, what I said is, I turn to the earth, the sky, and heaven.'


Sloka : 3.15.6

अथ यदवोचं भुवः प्रपद्य इत्यग्निं प्रपद्ये वायुं

प्रपद्य आदित्यं प्रपद्य इत्येव तदवोचम् ॥ ३.१५.६॥

atha yadavocaṃ bhuvaḥ prapadya ityagniṃ prapadye vāyuṃ

prapadya ādityaṃ prapadya ityeva tadavocam .. 3.15.6..



6. Then, when I said, ‘I take refuge in bhuvaḥ,’ what I meant was that I take refuge in fire, I take refuge in air, and I take refuge in the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat avocam, when I said; bhuvaḥ prapadye hi, I take refuge in bhuvaḥ [the mid-region]; hi eva tat avocam, it is this that I meant; agnim prapadye, I take refuge in fire; vāyum prapadye, I take refuge in air; ādityam prapadye, I take refuge in the sun. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'When I said, I turn to Bhuvah, what I said is, I turn to Agni (fire), Vâyu (air), Âditya (sun).'


Sloka : 3.15.7

अथ यदवोचꣳस्वः प्रपद्य इत्यृग्वेदं प्रपद्ये यजुर्वेदं प्रपद्ये

सामवेदं प्रपद्य इत्येव तदवोचं तदवोचम् ॥ ३.१५.७॥

atha yadavocagͫsvaḥ prapadya ityṛgvedaṃ prapadye yajurvedaṃ prapadye

sāmavedaṃ prapadya ityeva tadavocaṃ tadavocam .. 3.15.7..



7. Then, when I said, “I take refuge in svaḥ,” what I meant was that I take refuge in the Ṛg Veda, I take refuge in the Yajur Veda, and I take refuge in the Sāma Veda. It is this that I meant.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat avocam, when I said; svaḥ prapadye iti, I take refuge in svaḥ [heaven]; iti eva tat avocam, it is this that I meant; ṛg vedam prapadye, I take refuge in the Ṛg Veda; yajur vedam prapadye, I take refuge in the Yajur Veda; sāma vedam prapadye, I take refuge in the Sāma Veda; tat avocam tat avocam, it is this that I meant, this that I meant. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section. Commentary:-One should first meditate on the immortal chest, and then repeat the mantras following the meditation. To emphasize the importance of the worship, the mantras are repeated again and again.

Translation By Max Müller

7. 'When I said, I turn to Svah, what I said is, I turn to the Rig-veda, Yagur-veda, and Sâma-veda. That is what I said, yea, that is what I said.'


Sloka : 3.16.1

॥ इति पञ्चदशः खण्डः ॥

पुरुषो वाव यज्ञस्तस्य यानि चतुर्विꣳशति वर्षाणि

तत्प्रातःसवनं चतुर्विꣳशत्यक्षरा गायत्री गायत्रं

प्रातःसवनं तदस्य वसवोऽन्वायत्ताः प्राणा वाव वसव

एते हीदꣳसर्वं वासयन्ति ॥ ३.१६.१॥

.. iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

puruṣo vāva yajñastasya yāni caturvigͫśati varṣāṇi

tatprātaḥsavanaṃ caturvigͫśatyakṣarā gāyatrī gāyatraṃ

prātaḥsavanaṃ tadasya vasavo'nvāyattāḥ prāṇā vāva vasava

ete hīdagͫsarvaṃ vāsayanti .. 3.16.1..



1. The human body is like a sacrifice, and the first twenty-four years are like the morning libation. The gāyatrī has twenty-four syllables, and the morning libation is accompanied by the gāyatrī. The Vasus reside in this morning libation. The Vasus are the vital breaths and the sense organs, for the word vasu means those who make others live and who live themselves.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Puruṣaḥ vāva yajñaḥ, the human body is like a sacrifice; tasya yāni cāturviṃśati varṣāṇi, its first twenty-four years; tat, that; prātaḥ savanam, is the morning libation; gāyatrī caturviṃśati akṣarā, the gāyatrī is constituted of twenty-four syllables; gāyatram prātaḥ savanam, the morning libation is accompanied by the gāyatrī; asya, of this [i.e., this sacrifice of the human body]; tat, it [the morning libation covering the first twenty-four years]; vasavaḥ, the deities called Vasus; anvāyattāḥ, are connected; prāṇāḥ vāva vasavaḥ, the prāṇas [together with the sense organs] are the Vasus; hi, for; ete, these [Vasus]; idam sarvam, everything in this [world]; vāsayanti, cause to live [and they themselves also live (vasu)]. Commentary:-In the previous section, meditation and repetition of certain mantras was recommended for the long life of one’s children. The same thing is being recommended now for one’s own life. Here the meditation is that one’s life is a sacrifice, and that the first twenty-four years are the morning offering. This offering is connected with the gāyatrī, which has twenty-four syllables. The Vasus are also connected with this offering, and they are thought of as the organs, which abide (vasu) and which also make others abide.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Man is sacrifice. His (first) twenty-four years are the morning-libation. The Gâyatrî has twenty-four syllables, the morning-libation is offered with Gâyatrî hymns. The Vasus are connected with that part of the sacrifice. The Prânas (the five senses) are the Vasus, for they make all this to abide (vâsayanti).


Sloka : 3.16.2

तं चेदेतस्मिन्वयसि किंचिदुपतपेत्स ब्रूयात्प्राणा

वसव इदं मे प्रातःसवनं माध्यंदिनꣳसवनमनुसंतनुतेति

माहं प्राणानां वसूनां मध्ये यज्ञो विलोप्सीयेत्युद्धैव

तत एत्यगदो ह भवति ॥ ३.१६.२॥

taṃ cedetasminvayasi kiṃcidupatapetsa brūyātprāṇā

vasava idaṃ me prātaḥsavanaṃ mādhyaṃdinagͫsavanamanusaṃtanuteti

māhaṃ prāṇānāṃ vasūnāṃ madhye yajño vilopsīyetyuddhaiva

tata etyagado ha bhavati .. 3.16.2..



2. If, within these first twenty-four years of his life, he has some ailment, he should then say:- ‘O Prāṇas, O Vasus, please extend this first libation to the midday libation. As the sacrifice, may I not disappear among the Vasus, who are my prāṇas [i.e., who are like my life].’ [If he prays like this,] he gets rid of his ailment and becomes fully well.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Cet, if; etasmin vayasi, within these [twenty-four] years of his life; tam kiñcit upatapet, something troubles him; saḥ brūyāt, he will say; prāṇāḥ, O Prāṇas; vasavaḥ, O Vasus; idam me prātaḥ savanam, this, my morning libation; mādhyandinam savanam, to the midday libation; anusantanuta iti, extend; mā aham, may I not; yajñaḥ, as the sacrifice; madhye prāṇānām vasūnām, in the midst of the prāṇas, who are the Vasus; vilopsīya iti, disappear; tataḥ ha eva ut-eti, he gets rid of that [ailment]; agadaḥ ha bhavati, [and] becomes well. Commentary:-W SRrīTñī:- 5fFTT ^ ^ iūḍpñ II 3 II

Translation By Max Müller

2. If anything ails him in that (early) age, let him say:- 'Ye Prânas, ye Vasus, extend this my morning-libation unto the midday-libation, that I, the sacrificer, may not perish in the midst of the Prânas or Vasus.' Thus he recovers from his illness, and becomes whole.


Sloka : 3.16.3

अथ यानि चतुश्चत्वारिꣳशद्वर्षाणि तन्माध्यंदिनꣳ

सवनं चतुश्चत्वारिꣳशदक्षरा त्रिष्टुप्त्रैष्टुभं

माध्यंदिनꣳसवनं तदस्य रुद्रा अन्वायत्ताः प्राणा

वाव रुद्रा एते हीदꣳसर्वꣳरोदयन्ति ॥ ३.१६.३॥

atha yāni catuścatvārigͫśadvarṣāṇi tanmādhyaṃdinagͫ

savanaṃ catuścatvārigͫśadakṣarā triṣṭuptraiṣṭubhaṃ

mādhyaṃdinagͫsavanaṃ tadasya rudrā anvāyattāḥ prāṇā

vāva rudrā ete hīdagͫsarvagͫrodayanti .. 3.16.3..



3. Then the next forty-four years are like the midday libation. The triṣṭubh metre has forty-four syllables, and the midday libation is accompanied by a hymn which is in the triṣṭubh metre. The Rudras are connected with this midday libation. The prāṇas are called Rudras because they [are cruel and] make everyone in this world weep.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; yāni catuścatvāriṃśat varṣāṇi, that which is the next forty-four years; tat, that; mādhyandinam savanam, is the midday libation; triṣṭup catuścatvāriṃśat akṣarā, the triṣṭubh metre is constituted of forty-four syllables; traiṣṭubham mādhyandinam savanam, the midday libation is accompanied by a hymn in the triṣṭubh metre; asya, of this [i.e., this sacrifice of the human body]; tat, it [the midday libation covering the next forty-four years]; rudrāḥ, the deities called Rudras; anvāyattāḥ, are connected; prāṇāḥ vāva rudrāḥ, the prāṇas [together with the sense organs] are the Rudras; hi, for; ete, these [Rudras]; idam sarvam rodayanti, make everyone in this world weep. Commentary:-The sense organs become very powerful when a person has reached middle age, and they may make him do things he will regret and for which he will have to ‘weep.’ In this sacrifice, these next forty-four years correspond to the midday worship. The libation offered at this worship is accompanied by a hymn in the triṣṭubh metre, which has forty-four syllables. In this way, one can easily meditate on a human being as a ritualistic sacrifice.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The next forty-four years are the midday-libation. The Trishtubh has forty-four syllables, the midday-libation is offered with Trishtubh hymns. The Rudras are connected with that part of it. The Prânas are the Rudras, for they make all this to cry (rodayanti).


Sloka : 3.16.4

तं चेदेतस्मिन्वयसि किंचिदुपतपेत्स ब्रूयात्प्राणा रुद्रा

इदं मे माध्यंदिनꣳसवनं तृतीयसवनमनुसंतनुतेति

माहं प्राणानाꣳरुद्राणां मध्ये यज्ञो विलोप्सीयेत्युद्धैव

तत एत्यगदो ह भवति ॥ ३.१६.४॥

taṃ cedetasminvayasi kiṃcidupatapetsa brūyātprāṇā rudrā

idaṃ me mādhyaṃdinagͫsavanaṃ tṛtīyasavanamanusaṃtanuteti

māhaṃ prāṇānāgͫrudrāṇāṃ madhye yajño vilopsīyetyuddhaiva

tata etyagado ha bhavati .. 3.16.4..



4. If, within these next forty-four years of his life, he has some ailment, he should then say:- ‘O Prāṇas, O Rudras, please extend my midday libation and join it to the third libation. As the sacrifice, may I not disappear among the Rudras, who are my prāṇas [i.e., who are like my life].’ [If he prays like this,] he gets rid of his ailment and becomes fully well.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Cet, if; etasmin vayasi, within these [forty-four] years of his life; tam kiñcit upatapet, something troubles him; saḥ brūyāt, he will say; prāṇāḥ, O Prāṇas; rudrāḥ, O Rudras; idam me mādhyandinam savanam, this, my midday libation; tṛtīya savanam, to the third libation; anusantanuta iti, extend; mā aham, may I not; yajñaḥ, as the sacrifice; prāṇānām rudrāṇām madhye, in the midst of the prāṇas, who are the Rudras; vilopsīya iti, disappear; tataḥ ha eva ut-eti, he gets rid of that [ailment]; agadaḥ ha bhavati, [and] becomes well. Commentary:-The idea behind this prayer is:- ‘O Rudras, you are like my life. I am the sacrifice, and now the midday libation is going on. Will you please extend this libation so that I may do the third libation without a break [that is, may I live long enough to do the evening libation]? I am the sacrifice, and I don’t want the sacrifice to be stopped before it reaches the end. And I don’t want to be separated from the Rudras, who are like my life.’ If the afflicted person (who is the sacrifice) keeps praying like this, he will then get well and be fully fit again.

Translation By Max Müller

4. If anything ails him in that (second) age, let him say:- 'Ye Prânas, ye Rudras, extend this my midday-libation unto the third libation, that I, the sacrificer, may not perish in the midst of the Prânas or Rudras.' Thus he recovers from his illness, and becomes whole.


Sloka : 3.16.5

अथ यान्यष्टाचत्वारिꣳशद्वर्षाणि

तत्तृतीयसवनमष्टाचत्वारिꣳशदक्षरा

जगती जागतं तृतीयसवनं तदस्यादित्या अन्वायत्ताः

प्राणा वावादित्या एते हीदꣳसर्वमाददते ॥ ३.१६.५॥

atha yānyaṣṭācatvārigͫśadvarṣāṇi

tattṛtīyasavanamaṣṭācatvārigͫśadakṣarā

jagatī jāgataṃ tṛtīyasavanaṃ tadasyādityā anvāyattāḥ

prāṇā vāvādityā ete hīdagͫsarvamādadate .. 3.16.5..



5. Then the next forty-eight years are the third libation. The jagatī metre has forty-eight syllables, and the third libation is accompanied by a hymn which is in the jagatī metre. The Ādityas are connected with this third libation. The prāṇas are called Ādityas because they accept [ādā] all things.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yāni aṣṭācatvāriṃśat varṣāṇi, that which is the next forty-eight years; tat, that; tṛtīya savanam, is the third libation; jagatī aṣṭācatvāriṃśat akṣarā, the jagatī metre is constituted of forty-eight syllables; jāgatam tṛtīya savanam, the third libation is accompanied by a hymn in the jagatī metre; asya, of this [i.e., this sacrifice of the human body]; tat, it [the third libation covering the next forty-eight years]; ādityāḥ, the deities called Ādityas; anvāyattāḥ, are connected; prāṇāḥ vāva ādityāḥ, the prāṇas are the Ādityas; hi, for; ete, these [Ādityas]; idam sarvam ādadate, accept [ādā] all objects. Commentary:-A human being is supposed to live a total of a hundred and sixteen years, which has three phaṣes:- the first twenty-four years, the next forty-four years, and the last forty-eight years. When this life is thought of as a sacrifice, the first twenty-four years would be the morning offering, the next forty-four years would be the midday offering, and the last forty-eight years would be the evening offering. Just as the morning libation is connected with the Vasus, so the first twenty-four years of one’s life are also connected with the Vasus. The gāyatrī is sung during the morning offering, and it has twenty-four syllables. The offering made at midday is connected with the Rudras, and it is accompanied by a hymn in the triṣṭubh metre, having forty-four syllables. Then the evening offering is connected with the Ādityas, and it is sung in the jagatī metre, having forty-eight syllables. The concept of a human life as a sacrifice arises from the similarity to the components of a ritualistic sacrifice.

Translation By Max Müller

5. The next forty-eight years are the third libation. The Gagatî has forty-eight syllables, the third libation is offered with Gagatî hymns. The Âdityas are connected with that part of it. The Prânas are the Âdityas, for they take up all this (âdadate).


Sloka : 3.16.6

तं चेदेतस्मिन्वयसि किंचिदुपतपेत्स ब्रूयात्प्राणा

अदित्या इदं मे तृतीयसवनमायुरनुसंतनुतेति माहं

प्राणानामादित्यानां मध्ये यज्ञो विलोप्सीयेत्युद्धैव

तत एत्यगदो हैव भवति ॥ ३.१६.६॥

taṃ cedetasminvayasi kiṃcidupatapetsa brūyātprāṇā

adityā idaṃ me tṛtīyasavanamāyuranusaṃtanuteti māhaṃ

prāṇānāmādityānāṃ madhye yajño vilopsīyetyuddhaiva

tata etyagado haiva bhavati .. 3.16.6..



6. If, within the next forty-eight years of his life, he has some ailment, he should then say:- ‘O Prāṇas, O Ādityas, please extend my evening libation to the end of my life. As the sacrifice, may I not disappear among the Ādityas, who are my prāṇas [i.e., who are like my life].’ [If he prays like this,] he gets rid of his ailment and becomes well.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Cet, if; etasmin vayasi, within these [forty-eight] years of his life; tam kiñcit upatapet, something troubles him; saḥ brūyāt, he should say; prāṇāḥ, O Prāṇas; ādityāḥ, O Ādityas; idam me tṛtīya savanam, this, my evening libation; āyuḥ, to the full length; anusantanuta iti, extend; mā aham, may I not; yajñaḥ, as the sacrifice; prāṇānām ādityānām madhye, in the midst of the prāṇas, who are the Ādityas; vilopsīya iti, disappear; tataḥ ha eva ut-eti, he gets rid of that [ailment]; agadaḥ ha eva bhavati, [and] becomes well. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. If anything ails him in that (third) age, let him say:- 'Ye Prânas, ye Âdityas, extend this my third libation unto the full age, that I, the sacrificer, may not perish in the midst of the Prânas or Âdityas.' Thus he recovers from his illness, and becomes whole.


Sloka : 3.16.7

एतद्ध स्म वै तद्विद्वानाह महिदास ऐतरेयः

स किं म एतदुपतपसि योऽहमनेन न प्रेष्यामीति

स ह षोडशं वर्षशतमजीवत्प्र ह षोडशं

वर्षशतं जीवति य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१६.७॥

etaddha sma vai tadvidvānāha mahidāsa aitareyaḥ

sa kiṃ ma etadupatapasi yo'hamanena na preṣyāmīti

sa ha ṣoḍaśaṃ varṣaśatamajīvatpra ha ṣoḍaśaṃ

varṣaśataṃ jīvati ya evaṃ veda .. 3.16.7..



7. Having known this, Itarā’s son Mahidāsa said:- ‘O disease, why are you troubling me so? Rest assured, I am not going to die [of this disease].’ He lived for one hundred and sixteen years. A person who knows this also lives that long.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Etat ha vai vidvān, having known this; mahidāsaḥ aitareyaḥ, Mahidāsa Aitareya, the son of Itarā; āha sma, said; saḥ [i.e;, tvam] kim me etat upatapasi, O disease, why are you troubling me; yaḥ aham anena na preṣyāmi iti, who for certain will not die of this; saḥ, he [Mahidāsa Aitareya]; ha ṣoḍaśam varṣaśatam, one hundred and sixteen years; ajīvat, lived; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus; ha -ṣoḍaśam varṣaśatam prajīvati, also lives one hundred and sixteen years Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section. Commentary:-Mahidāsa is an example of one who conquered death by his knowledge and strong will.

Translation By Max Müller

7. Mahidâsa Aitareya (the son of Itarâ), who knew this, said (addressing a disease):- 'Why dost thou afflict me, as I shall not die by it?' He lived a hundred and sixteen years (i.e.


Sloka : 3.17.1

॥ इति षोडशः खण्डः ॥

स यदशिशिषति यत्पिपासति यन्न रमते ता अस्य

दीक्षाः ॥ ३.१७.१॥

.. iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

sa yadaśiśiṣati yatpipāsati yanna ramate tā asya

dīkṣāḥ .. 3.17.1..



1. That he has the desire to eat, the desire to drink, and no desire to indulge in sense pleasures—this is his initiation [i.e., this is how he has to begin practising self-restraint].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [the person who is performing the puruṣa sacrifice just mentioned]; yat aśiśiṣati, that he wants to eat; yat pipāsati, that he wants to drink; yat na ramate, that he has no desire to indulge in sense pleasure; tāḥ, all these; asya dīkṣaḥ, are the initiation rites [to perform the sacrifice]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. When a man (who is the sacrificer) hungers, thirsts, and abstains from pleasures, that is the Dîkshâ (initiatory rite).


Sloka : 3.17.2

अथ यदश्नाति यत्पिबति यद्रमते तदुपसदैरेति ॥ ३.१७.२॥

atha yadaśnāti yatpibati yadramate tadupasadaireti .. 3.17.2..



2. After this he will eat, he will drink, or he will enjoy pleasure, as if he is observing upasad [when he can only take milk or water].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, after this; yat aśnāti, what he eats; yat pibati, what he drinks; yat ramate, the pleasure he enjoys; tat upasadaiḥ eti, that is his upasad [when one fasts by only taking milk or water]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. When a man eats, drinks, and enjoys pleasures, he does it with the Upasadas (the sacrificial days on which the sacrificer is allowed to partake of food).


Sloka : 3.17.3

अथ यद्धसति यज्जक्षति यन्मैथुनं चरति स्तुतशस्त्रैरेव

तदेति ॥ ३.१७.३॥

atha yaddhasati yajjakṣati yanmaithunaṃ carati stutaśastraireva

tadeti .. 3.17.3..



3. After this, he laughs, he eats, and he even enjoys some sense pleasure—these represent the sounds coming from the stutas and śastras.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat hasati, he laughs; yat jakṣati, he eats; yat maithunam carati, he indulges in sense pleasure; stuta-śastraiḥ eva tat eti, they are like [the sounds of] the stutas and śastras [certain hymns and mantras recited during the sacrifice]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. When a man laughs, eats, and delights himself, he does it with the Stuta-sastras (hymns sung and recited at the sacrifices).


Sloka : 3.17.4

अथ यत्तपो दानमार्जवमहिꣳसा सत्यवचनमिति

ता अस्य दक्षिणाः ॥ ३.१७.४॥

atha yattapo dānamārjavamahigͫsā satyavacanamiti

tā asya dakṣiṇāḥ .. 3.17.4..



4. Next, austerity, charity, straightforwardness, nonviolence, and truthfulness—these are his dakṣiṇā.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat tapaḥ, the austerity; dānam, charity; ārjavam, straightforwardness; ahiṃsā, non-violence; satyavacanam, truthfulness; iti tāḥ, all these [good qualities]; asya, of him [the person who regards his life as a sacrifice]; dakṣiṇāḥ, are the special fee paid after the sacrifice. Commentary:-These qualities of austerity, charity, etc., are an additional gain, besides what you get by living a life as if it is a sacrifice. These moral qualities and the life you live both contribute much to the growth of your religious life.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Penance, liberality, righteousness, kindness, truthfulness, these form his Dakshinâs (gifts bestowed on priests, &c.)


Sloka : 3.17.5

तस्मादाहुः सोष्यत्यसोष्टेति पुनरुत्पादनमेवास्य

तन्मरणमेवावभृथः ॥ ३.१७.५॥

tasmādāhuḥ soṣyatyasoṣṭeti punarutpādanamevāsya

tanmaraṇamevāvabhṛthaḥ .. 3.17.5..



5. Therefore people say, ‘He will give birth,’ or ‘He has given birth.’ In either case, it is a rebirth [in the sense that when he starts living his life as a sacrifice, that is his rebirth]. When death overtakes him, that is the conclusion of the sacrifice.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmāt, therefore; āhuḥ, it is said; soṣyati, will give birth to; asoṣṭa iti, has given birth to; punaḥ utpādanam eva, [because] it is a rebirth; tat maraṇam eva asya, the death of the person; avabhṛthaḥ, is the conclusion of the sacrifice. Commentary:-Life is a kind of sacrifice, but when a person dedicates his life as such, he is said to be reborn. The words soṣyati and asoṣṭa are used when a mother is about to give birth, or has given birth, to a child. But they are also used at the time when someone is about to begin performing a sacrifice (soṣyati), or has already begun performing it (asoṣṭa), because it is his rebirth. When death comes to the person who treats his life as a sacrifice, it is the end of the sacrifice, just as it is the end of his life. Just as aṭ the end of a sacrifice, a person bathes and puts on new clothes, so also, when a person dies, his body is bathed and new clothes are put on it. The treatment is the same, whether the sacrifice is that person’s life or it is the usual sacrificial ritual. And the words used on both occasions are the same. This makes the similarity between the ritualistc sacrifice and life as a sacrifice more meaningful.

Translation By Max Müller

5. Therefore when they say, 'There will be a birth,' and 'there has been a birth' (words used at the Soma-sacrifice, and really meaning, 'He will pour out the Soma-juice,' and 'he has poured out the Soma-juice'), that is his new birth. His death is the Avabhritha ceremony (when the sacrificial Vessels are carried away to be cleansed).


Sloka : 3.17.6

तद्धैतद्घोर् आङ्गिरसः कृष्णाय

देवकीपुत्रायोक्त्वोवाचापिपास एव स बभूव

सोऽन्तवेलायामेतत्त्रयं प्रतिपद्येताक्षितमस्यच्युतमसि

प्राणसꣳशितमसीति तत्रैते द्वे ऋचौ भवतः ॥ ३.१७.६॥

taddhaitadghor āṅgirasaḥ kṛṣṇāya

devakīputrāyoktvovācāpipāsa eva sa babhūva

so'ntavelāyāmetattrayaṃ pratipadyetākṣitamasyacyutamasi

prāṇasagͫśitamasīti tatraite dve ṛcau bhavataḥ .. 3.17.6..



6. The sage Ghora, of the family of Aṅgirasa, taught this truth to Kṛṣṇa, the son of Devakī. As a result, Kṛṣṇa became free from all desires. Then Ghora said:- ‘At the time of death a person should repeat these three mantras:- “You never decay, you never change, and you are the essence of life.”’ Here are two Ṛk mantras in this connection:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat ha etat, this [truth]; ghoraḥ āṅgirasaḥ, the sage Ghora, of the family of Aṅgirasa; kṛṣṇāya devakīputrāya uktvā, having taught to Kṛṣṇa, the son of Devakī; apipāsaḥ, free from desire; eva saḥ babhūva, he [Kṛṣṇa] became; uvāca, [Ghora] said; saḥ, a person; antavelāyām, at the time of death; etat trayam, these three [mantras]; pratipadyeta, should take refuge in; akṣitam asi, you never decay; acyutam asi, you never change; prāṇasaṃśitam asi iti, you are the essence of life; tatra, in this connection; ete dve ṛcau bhavataḥ, there are these two Ṛk mantras. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. Ghora Âṅgirasa, after having communicated this (view of the sacrifice) to Krishna, the son of Devăkî [1]--and he never thirsted again (after other knowledge)--said:- 'Let a man, when his end approaches, take refuge with this Triad [2]:- "Thou art the imperishable," "Thou art the unchangeable," "Thou art the edge of Prâna."' On this subject there are two Rik verses (Rig-veda VIII, 6, 30):---

Footnote:

1. The curious coincidence between Krishna Devakîputra, here mentioned as a pupil of Ghora Âṅgirasa, and the famous Krishna, the son of Devakî, was first pointed out by Colebrooke, Miscell. Essays, II, 177. Whether it is more than a coincidence, is difficult to say. Certainly we can build no other conclusions on it than those indicated by Colebrooke, that new fables may have been constructed elevating this personage to the rank of a god. We know absolutely nothing of the old Krishna Devakîputra except his having been a pupil of Ghora Âṅgirasa, nor does there seem to have been any attempt made by later Brahmans to connect their divine Krishna, the son of Vasudeva, with the Krishna Devakîputra of our Upanishad. This is all the more remarkable because the author of the Sândilya-sûtras, for instance, who is very anxious to find a srauta authority for the worship of Krishna Vâsudeva as the supreme deity, had to be satisfied with quoting such modern compilations as the Nârâyanopanishad, Atharvasiras, VI, 9, brahmanyo devakîputro, brahmanyo madhusûdanah (see Sândilya-sûtras, ed. Ballantyne, , translated by Cowell, ), without venturing to refer to the Krishna Devakîputra of the Khândogya-upanishad. The occurrence of such names as Krishna, Vâsudeva, Madhusûdanah stamps Upanishads, like the Âtmabodha-upanishad, as modern (Colebrooke, Essays, 1, 101), and the same remark applies, as Weber has shown, to the Gopâlatâpanî-upanishad (Bibliotheca Indica, No. 183), where we actually find such names as Srîkrishna Govinda, Gopîganavallabha, Devakyâm gâtâh ( ), &c. Professor Weber has treated these questions very fully, but it is not quite clear to me whether he wishes to go beyond Colebrooke and to admit more than a similarity of name between the pupil of Ghora Âṅgirasa and the friend of the Gopîs. 2. Let him recite these three verses.


Sloka : 3.17.7

आदित्प्रत्नस्य रेतसः ।

उद्वयं तमसस्परि ज्योतिः पश्यन्त उत्तरꣳस्वः

पश्यन्त उत्तरं देवं देवत्रा सूर्यमगन्म

ज्योतिरुत्तममिति ज्योतिरुत्तममिति ॥ ३.१७.७॥

āditpratnasya retasaḥ .

udvayaṃ tamasaspari jyotiḥ paśyanta uttaragͫsvaḥ

paśyanta uttaraṃ devaṃ devatrā sūryamaganma

jyotiruttamamiti jyotiruttamamiti .. 3.17.7..



7-8. [Those who know Brahman] see that the light shining in Para-Brahman is the seed of the world. This light is all-pervasive like daylight. It is eternal. It is that great light which is the cause of the world.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ādit, [has no meaning except that it introduces a new line of thought]; pratnasya, ancient; retasaḥ, seed [of the world]; jyotiḥ, light [manifestation]; paśyanti, they see [eveṛywhere]; vāsaram, daylight [i.e., as all-pervasive]; paraḥ, the best; yat, that which; idhyate, shines; divi, in heaven [i.e., in Para-Brahman], Tamasaḥ, darkness [i.e., ignorance]; pari, beyond [dispels]; uttaram, the best; jyotiḥ, light; paśyantaḥ, having seen; svaḥ, in oneself [i.e., in one’s own heart]; devam, bright; devatrā, among all the gods; sūryam, the sun; vayam ut-aganma, we have attained; jyotiḥ uttamam iti jyotiḥ uttamam iti, the best light, the best light. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section. Commentary:-The greatest light is that which dispels the darkness of ignorance. Having seen this light within our own hearts, we have attained that shining god who is the Supreme Light of all. There is an eternal light which is the cause of this universe. This light is the source of the light we see in the luminous Jodies such as the sun, the moon, and the stars. This light is everywhere. Everything in this phenomenal universe moves and works the way it does because of this light. Those who have lived a life of self-discipline, with their minds on the highest thoughts, and have thereby acquired a pure heart, can see this light. They see it within themselves and they also see it outside. They know this light as their own Self and as the Self of all. They know this light as Para Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

7. 'Then they see (within themselves) the ever-present light of the old seed (of the world, the Sat), the highest, which is lighted in the brilliant (Brahman).' Rig-veda I, 50, 10:-- 'Perceiving above the darkness (of ignorance) the higher light (in the sun), as the higher light within the heart, the bright source (of light and life) among the gods, we have reached the highest light, yea, the highest light [1].'

Footnote:

1. Both these verses had to be translated here according to their scholastic interpretation, but they had originally a totally different meaning. Even the text was altered, divâ being changed to divi, svah to sve. The first is taken from a hymn addressed to Indra, who after conquering the dark clouds brings back the light of the sun. When he does that, then the people see again, as the poet says, the daily light of the old seed (from which the sun rises) which is lighted in heaven. The other verse belongs to a hymn addressed to the sun. Its simple meaning. is:- 'Seeing above the darkness (of the night) the rising light, the Sun, bright among the bright, we came towards the highest light.'


Sloka : 3.18.1

॥ इति सप्तदशः खण्डः ॥

मनो ब्रह्मेत्युपासीतेत्यध्यात्ममथाधिदैवतमाकाशो

ब्रह्मेत्युभयमादिष्टं भवत्यध्यात्मं चाधिदैवतं च

॥ ३.१८.१॥

.. iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

mano brahmetyupāsītetyadhyātmamathādhidaivatamākāśo

brahmetyubhayamādiṣṭaṃ bhavatyadhyātmaṃ cādhidaivataṃ ca

.. 3.18.1..



1. The mind is Brahman—this worship is called adhyātma. Next is that called adhidaivata:- Space is Brahman. [That is, meditate on space as Brahman.] These two ways of meditation are advised:- adhyātma and adhidaivata.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Manaḥ brahma iti upāsīta, meditate on the mind as Brahman; iti adhyātmam, this is so far as the body and mind is concerned; atha adhidaivatam, next is [the meditation] on the elements and the worlds; ākāśaḥ brahma iti, space is Brahman; ubhayam ādiṣṭam bhavati, two ways [of meditation] are advised; adhyātmam ca adhidaivatam ca, adhyātma and adhidaivata. Commentary:-Brahman is extremely subtle. Similarly, the mind is also subtle. And it is in the mind that Brahman can be realized. This is why it is comparatively easy to think that the mind is Brahman. In the same way, ākāśa (space) is also close to Brahman. Like Brahman, it is vast, invisible, all-pervasive, and without any attributes whatsoever. It is therefore appropriate to meditate on ākāśa as Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Let a man meditate on mind as Brahman (n.), this is said with reference to the body. Let a man meditate on the ether as Brahman (n.), this is said with reference to the Devas. Thus both the meditation which has reference to the body, and the meditation which has reference to the Devas, has been taught.


Sloka : 3.18.2

तदेतच्चतुष्पाद्ब्रह्म वाक्पादः प्राणः पादश्चक्षुः

पादः श्रोत्रं पाद इत्यध्यात्ममथाधिदैवतमग्निः

पादो वायुः पादा अदित्यः पादो दिशः पाद

इत्युभयमेवादिष्टं भवत्यध्यात्मं चैवाधिदैवतं च

॥ ३.१८.२॥

tadetaccatuṣpādbrahma vākpādaḥ prāṇaḥ pādaścakṣuḥ

pādaḥ śrotraṃ pāda ityadhyātmamathādhidaivatamagniḥ

pādo vāyuḥ pādā adityaḥ pādo diśaḥ pāda

ityubhayamevādiṣṭaṃ bhavatyadhyātmaṃ caivādhidaivataṃ ca

.. 3.18.2..



2. Brahman as the mind has four feet [or, quarters]. The organ of speech is one foot; prāṇa is the next foot; the eyes are the third foot; and the ears are the fourth foot. This is the adhyātma [the physical and mental] aspect of Brahman. Next is the adhidaivata aspect. Fire is one foot; air is another foot; the sun is the next foot; and the quarters are the fourth foot. These two ways of meditation are advised:- adhyātma and adhidaivata.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat etat catuṣpāt brahma, this Brahman [as the mind] is fourfold; vāk pādaḥ, speech is a foot; prāṇaḥ pādaḥ, prāṇa [the vital force] is a foot; cakṣuḥ pādaḥ, the eyes are a foot; śrotram pādaḥ, the ears are a foot; iti adhyātmam, this is the adhyātma [meditation—i.e., on the body and mind]; atha adhidaivatam, next, the meditation relating to the elements and worlds; agniḥ pādaḥ, fire is a foot; vāyuḥ pādaḥ, air is a foot; ādityaḥ pādaḥ, the sun is a foot; diśaḥ pādaḥ, the quarters are a foot; ubhayam ādiṣṭam bhavati, two ways [of meditation] are advised; adhyātmam ca adhidaivatam ca, adhyātma and adhidaivata. Commentary:-The word pāda is not to be taken literally, for Brahman has no feet. Brahman is infinite, but here it is conceived as having four feet—as if it is covering the whole universe with them. Pāda also means a quarter, or a part. First let us imagine our mind and body together as Brahman. This is a meditation on the adhyātma level. Then let us imagine that this Brahman has four feet. What are the four feet? They are the organ of speech, the vital breath, the eyes, and the ears. We can also do this meditation on the adhidaivata level—that is, as the worlds and the elements. First, let us imagine Brahman as ākāśa, space. Brahman’s four feet would then be fire (agni), air (vāyu), the sun (āditya), and the quarters (diśa). A cow has four feet to take it where it wants to go. Similarly, a human being is guided to where he wants to go by his organ of speech, his organ of smelling, his eyes, and his ears. Again, just as the four legs and feet of a cow come out of her body, in the same way, fire, air, the sun, and the quarters seem to come out of space

Translation By Max Müller

2. That Brahman (mind) has four feet (quarters). Speech is one foot, breath is one foot, the eye is one foot, the car is one foot-so much with reference to the body. Then with reference to the gods, Agni (fire) is one foot, Vâyu (air) is one foot, Âditya (sun) is one foot, the quarters are one foot. Thus both the worship which has reference to the body, and the worship which has reference to the Devas, has been taught.


Sloka : 3.18.3

वागेव ब्रह्मणश्चतुर्थः पादः सोऽग्निना ज्योतिषा

भाति च तपति च भाति च तपति च कीर्त्या यशसा

ब्रह्मवर्चसेन य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१८.३॥

vāgeva brahmaṇaścaturthaḥ pādaḥ so'gninā jyotiṣā

bhāti ca tapati ca bhāti ca tapati ca kīrtyā yaśasā

brahmavarcasena ya evaṃ veda .. 3.18.3..



3. Vāk is one of the four feet of Brahman [as the mind]. It shines in the light of fire and also radiates heat. He who knows this shines and radiates warmth with his good work, with his fame, and with the radiance he acquires from leading a scholarly and disciplined life.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vāk eva brahmaṇaḥ caturthaḥ pādaḥ, speech is the fourth foot of [manomaya] Brahman; agninā jyotiṣā, by the light it gets from fire; saḥ bhāti ca tapati ca, it shines and gives heat; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus; bhāti ca tapati ca, shines and radiates warmth; kīrtyā, through good work; yaśasā, through fame; brahmavarcasena, through the radiance that comes from a scholarly and disciplined life. Commentary:-Animals move where they want by their feet. Similarly, people find their way to Brahman by hearing someone speak about it. This is why the organ of speech is called one of the four feet of Brahman. Fire gives both light and heat. And because fire is the presiding deity of speech, speech also is said to give light and heat. A person who can speak well acquires fame and popularity; It is as if he has done much good work, or has given away much money in charity, or is a great scholar and has lived a disciplined life. Such a person has a shining personality and radiates heat (i.e., energy).

Translation By Max Müller

3. Speech is indeed the fourth foot of Brahman. That foot shines with Agni (fire) as its light, and warms. He who knows this, shines and warms through his celebrity, fame, and glory of countenance.


Sloka : 3.18.4

प्राण एव ब्रह्मणश्चतुर्थः पादः स वायुना ज्योतिषा

भाति च तपति च् भाति च तपति च कीर्त्या यशसा

ब्रह्मवर्चसेन य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१८.४॥

prāṇa eva brahmaṇaścaturthaḥ pādaḥ sa vāyunā jyotiṣā

bhāti ca tapati c bhāti ca tapati ca kīrtyā yaśasā

brahmavarcasena ya evaṃ veda .. 3.18.4..



4. Prāṇa [the organ of smelling] is one of the four feet of Brahman [as the mind]. It shines by the light of vāyu [air] and also radiates heat. He who knows this shines and radiates warmth with his good work, with his fame, and with the radiance he acquires from leading a scholarly and disciplined life.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prāṇaḥ eva brahmaṇaḥ caturthaḥ pādaḥ, prāṇa [the organ of smelling] is the fourth foot of [manomaya] Brahman; vāyunā jyotiṣā, by the light it gets from air [its presiding deity]; saḥ bhāti ca tapati ca, it shines and gives heat; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus; bhāti ca tapati ca, shines and radiates warmth; kīrtyā, through good work; yaśasā, through fame; brahmavarcasena, through the radiance that comes from a scholarly and disciplined life. Commentary:-Vāyu, air, is the presiding deity of the organ of smell, because vāyu carries odours and reveals them.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Breath is indeed the fourth foot of Brahman. That foot shines with Vâyu (air) as its light, and warms. He who knows this, shines and warms through his celebrity, fame, and glory of countenance.


Sloka : 3.18.5

चक्षुरेव ब्रह्मणश्चतुर्थः पादः स आदित्येन ज्योतिषा

भाति च तपति च भाति च तपति च कीर्त्या यशसा

ब्रह्मवर्चसेन य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१८.५॥

cakṣureva brahmaṇaścaturthaḥ pādaḥ sa ādityena jyotiṣā

bhāti ca tapati ca bhāti ca tapati ca kīrtyā yaśasā

brahmavarcasena ya evaṃ veda .. 3.18.5..



5. The organ of vision is one of the four feet of Brahman [as the mind]. It shines by the light of the sun and also radiates heat. He who knows this shines and radiates warmth with his good work, with his fame, and with the radiance he acquires from leading a scholarly and disciplined life.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Cakṣuḥ eva brahmaṇaḥ caturthaḥ pādaḥ, the organ of vision is the fourth foot of [manomaya] Brahman; ādityena jyotiṣā, by the light it gets from the sun [its presiding deity]; saḥ bhāti ca tapati ca, it shines and gives heat; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus; bhāti ca tapati ca, shines and radiates warmth; kīrtyā, through good work; yaśasā, through fame; brahmavarcasena, through the radiance that comes from a scholarly and disciplined life. Commentary:-The eyes can distinguish colours because of the light they get from the sun. Just as cows can feel their way with their feet, similarly, human beings can recognize things through their eyes. When a person knows how the eyes serve as feet, he acquires fame, glory, and the brightness of Brahman, for he can then make good use of his eyes. He can read and learn the best things possible, things that transform him into a realized soul.

Translation By Max Müller

5. The eye is indeed the fourth foot of Brahman. That foot shines with Âditya (sun) as its light, and warms. He who knows this, shines and warms through his celebrity, fame, and glory of countenance.


Sloka : 3.18.6

श्रोत्रमेव ब्रह्मणश्चतुर्थः पादः स दिग्भिर्ज्योतिषा

भाति च तपति च भाति च तपति च कीर्त्या यशसा

ब्रह्मवर्चसेन य एवं वेद य एवं वेद ॥ ३.१८.६॥

śrotrameva brahmaṇaścaturthaḥ pādaḥ sa digbhirjyotiṣā

bhāti ca tapati ca bhāti ca tapati ca kīrtyā yaśasā

brahmavarcasena ya evaṃ veda ya evaṃ veda .. 3.18.6..



6. The organ of hearing is one of the four feet of Brahman [as the mind]. It shines by the light of the quarters and also radiates heat. He who knows this shines and radiates warmth with his good work, with his fame, and with the radiance he acquires from leading a scholarly and disciplined life.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Śrotram eva brahmaṇaḥ caturthaḥ pādaḥ, the organ of hearing is the fourth foot of [manomaya] Brahman; digbhiḥ jyotiṣā, by the light it gets from [its presiding deity,] the quarters; sāḥ bhāti ca tapati ca, it shines and gives heat; yaḥ evam veda yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus, he who knows thus; bhāti ca tapati ca, shines and radiates warmth; kīrtyā, through good work; yaśasā, through fame; brahmavarcasena, through the radiance that comes from a scholarly and disciplined life. Iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighteenth section. Commentary:-The organ of hearing derives its power from the quarters, and through this organ we get knowledge. The results of that knowledge may be direct or indirect. True knowledge, however, is knowledge of Brahman. To emphasize this, ‘he who knows’ is repeated. This emphasis suggests that it is the knowledge of Brahman. The organ of hearing is our ‘foot’ because it is the means by which we can know Brahman. Those who know the importance of the organ of hearing and use it in the right way, acquire name, fame, and become radiant like Brahman. They will also eventually realize Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

6. The ear is indeed the fourth foot of Brahman. That foot shines with the quarters as its light, and warms. He who knows this, shines and warms through his celebrity, fame, and glory of countenance.


Sloka : 3.19.1

॥ इति अष्टादशः खण्डः ॥

आदित्यो ब्रह्मेत्यादेशस्तस्योपव्याख्यानमसदेवेदमग्र

आसीत् । तत्सदासीत्तत्समभवत्तदाण्डं निरवर्तत

तत्संवत्सरस्य मात्रामशयत तन्निरभिद्यत ते आण्डकपाले

रजतं च सुवर्णं चाभवताम् ॥ ३.१९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ādityo brahmetyādeśastasyopavyākhyānamasadevedamagra

āsīt . tatsadāsīttatsamabhavattadāṇḍaṃ niravartata

tatsaṃvatsarasya mātrāmaśayata tannirabhidyata te āṇḍakapāle

rajataṃ ca suvarṇaṃ cābhavatām .. 3.19.1..



1. It has been said, ‘Āditya is Brahman.’ Now this is being explained:- This universe was at first non-existent, being without names and forms. [It was not visible, but it existed in a subtle form.] Slowly it manifested itself, as a shoot comes out of a seed. Next it developed into an egg and remained for a whole year like that. It then split in two, one half becoming silver and the other half becoming gold.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ādityaḥ brahma, Āditya [the sun] is Brahman; iti ādeśaḥ, so it is said; tasya upavyākhyānam, [here is] an explanation of that [statement]; idam, this [universe of name and form]; agre asat eva āsīt, was at first unmanifested [i.e., it was without its names and forms]; [lest the word asat give the impression that the universe was like ‘a flower in the sky,’ it is said,] tat, this [universe with its names and forms in a subtle state]; sat āsīt, became manifest; tat, that [subtle universe]; samabhavat, first emerged as a seed; tat āṇḍam niravartata, that developed into an egg; tat, it [i.e., the egg]; saṃvatsarasya mātrām aśayata, lay still for a period of a year; tat, it [the egg]; nirabhidyata, split open; te āṇḍakapāle, those two parts of the egg; rajatam ca suvarṇam ca abhāvatām, turned silver and gold respectively. Commentary:-Earlier Āditya, the sun, was described as a foot of Brahman. Now this is being explained. Many people think that the universe was created. But Vedānta says that something cannot be created out of nothing. The universe has always existed, though sometimes it exists like a seed—invisible and without any names and forms. But why is the sun being called Brahman? Because without the sun there is only darkness, and we are then not conscious of this universe with its names and forms. The universe is non-existent then. And in the absence of the universe, there is no way of knowing that Brahman exists, for it is this universe with its names and forms that makes us aware that Brahman is behind everything. Brahman manifests itself as this universe.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Âditya (the sun [1]) is Brahman, this is the doctrine, and this is the fuller account of it:-- In the beginning this was non-existent [2]. It became existent, it grew. It turned into an egg [3]. The egg lay for the time of a year. The egg broke open. The two halves were one of silver, the other of gold.

Footnote:

1. Âditya, or the sun, had before been represented as one of the four feet of Brahman. He is now represented as Brahman, or as to be meditated on as such. 2. Not yet existing, not yet developed in form and name, and therefore as if not existing. 3. Ânda instead of anda is explained as a Vedic irregularity. A similar cosmogony is given in Manu's Law Book, I, 12 seq. See Kellgren, Mythus de ovo mundano, Helsingfors, 1849.


Sloka : 3.19.2

तद्यद्रजतꣳ सेयं पृथिवी यत्सुवर्णꣳ सा द्यौर्यज्जरायु

ते पर्वता यदुल्बꣳ समेघो नीहारो या धमनयस्ता

नद्यो यद्वास्तेयमुदकꣳ स समुद्रः ॥ ३.१९.२॥

tadyadrajatagͫ seyaṃ pṛthivī yatsuvarṇagͫ sā dyauryajjarāyu

te parvatā yadulbagͫ samegho nīhāro yā dhamanayastā

nadyo yadvāsteyamudakagͫ sa samudraḥ .. 3.19.2..



2. Of these two parts of the egg, the one that is silver is this earth, and the one that is gold is heaven. The thick membranes are the mountains. The thin membranes are the clouds and mist. The veins are the rivers, and the fluid in the bladder is the ocean.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat yat rajatam, that [half] which is silver; sā iyam pṛthivī, that is this earth; yat suvarṇam, that [half] which is gold; sā dyauḥ, that is heaven; yat jarāyu, that which is the thick membrane; te parvatāḥ, they are the mountains; yat ulbam, that which is the thin membrane; sameghaḥ nīhāraḥ, are the clouds and mist; yāḥ dhamanayaḥ, that which are the veins; Commentary:-It has already been stated that at a certain point in time the cosmos takes the shape of an egg, and after remaining in that state for a while, the egg splits in two. The lower part iṣ silver and represents the earth. The upper half is gold and represents heaven. The thick outer membrane around the baby represents the mountains, and the thin inner membrane represents the clouds and mist. The veins of the infant are likened to rivers, and the fluid inside the bladder to the ocean. It is to be noted that these diverse things have all come from one source.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The silver one became this earth, the golden one the sky, the thick membrane (of the white) the mountains, the thin membrane (of the yoke) the mist with the clouds, the small veins the rivers, the fluid the sea.


Sloka : 3.19.3

अथ यत्तदजायत सोऽसावादित्यस्तं जायमानं घोषा

उलूलवोऽनूदतिष्ठन्त्सर्वाणि च भूतानि सर्वे च

कामास्तस्मात्तस्योदयं प्रति प्रत्यायनं प्रति घोषा

उलूलवोऽनूत्तिष्ठन्ति सर्वाणि च भूतानि सर्वे च कामाः

॥ ३.१९.३॥

atha yattadajāyata so'sāvādityastaṃ jāyamānaṃ ghoṣā

ulūlavo'nūdatiṣṭhantsarvāṇi ca bhūtāni sarve ca

kāmāstasmāttasyodayaṃ prati pratyāyanaṃ prati ghoṣā

ulūlavo'nūttiṣṭhanti sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni sarve ca kāmāḥ

.. 3.19.3..



3. Then that which was born was the sun. Its appearance was greeted by joyous sounds from all beings, and many desirable things appeared. Since then, the sunrise and the sunset are both marked by joyous sounds from all beings, and many enjoyable things also appear at that time.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yat tat ajāyata, that which was born; saḥ asau ādityaḥ, it is that sun; tam jāyamānam anu, after it was born; ulūlavaḥ ghoṣāḥ, the sounds of ‘uh’; sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni’, from all beings; sarve ca kāmāḥ, and all desirable things; udatiṣṭhan, came forth; tasmāt, therefore; udayam prati, at the rising; pratyāyanam prati, at the setting; tasya, of that [sun]; ulūlavaḥ ghoṣāḥ, the sounds of ‘ulu’; sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni, from all beings; sarve ca kāmāḥ, and all desirable things; anūttiṣṭhanti, appear. Commentary:-Here it is said that the sun was born from the egg. When a child is born, there is much jubilation in the house, and also in the neighbourhood. Even today, people in India sometimes make the sound of ‘ulu’ on such occasions. Not only that, many precious gifts are also exchanged.

Translation By Max Müller

3. And what was born from it that was Âditya, the sun. When he was born shouts of hurrah arose, and all beings arose, and all things which they desired. Therefore whenever the sun rises and sets, shouts of hurrah arise, and all beings arise, and all things which they desire.


Sloka : 3.19.4

स य एतमेवं विद्वानादित्यं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽभ्याशो ह

यदेनꣳ साधवो घोषा आ च गच्छेयुरुप च

निम्रेडेरन्निम्रेडेरन् ॥ ३.१९.४॥

sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānādityaṃ brahmetyupāste'bhyāśo ha

yadenagͫ sādhavo ghoṣā ā ca gaccheyurupa ca

nimreḍerannimreḍeran .. 3.19.4..



4. One who knows the sun as Brahman and worships it as such very soon hears sounds pleasing to the ears and also has many good things to enjoy.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this as such; ādityam brahma iti upāste, [and] worships the sun as Brahman; abhyāśaḥ, soon; ha, surely; ya, enam āgaccheyuḥ, to him come; sādhavaḥ ghoṣāḥ, pleasant sounds; ca upa-nimreḍeran ca nimreḍeran and also good things to enjoy, good things to enjoy. [The repetition marks the end of the chapter.] It ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the nineteenth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi tṛtīyaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the third chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

4. If any one knowing this meditates on the sun as Brahman, pleasant shouts will approach him and will continue, yea, they will continue.


Sloka : 4.1.1

॥ इति एकोनविंशः खण्डः ॥

॥ इति तृतीयोऽध्यायः ॥

॥ चतुर्थोऽध्यायः ॥

जानश्रुतिर्ह पौत्रायणः श्रद्धादेयो बहुदायी बहुपाक्य आस

स ह सर्वत आवसथान्मापयांचक्रे सर्वत एव

मेऽन्नमत्स्यन्तीति ॥ ४.१.१॥

.. iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

.. iti tṛtīyo'dhyāyaḥ ..

.. caturtho'dhyāyaḥ ..

jānaśrutirha pautrāyaṇaḥ śraddhādeyo bahudāyī bahupākya āsa

sa ha sarvata āvasathānmāpayāṃcakre sarvata eva

me'nnamatsyantīti .. 4.1.1..



1. In ancient times there was a king who was the great-grandson of Janaśruta. He was a highly charitable person, who gave many gifts in charity, and always with due respect. He also had large quantities of food cooked for people. With the thought in mind, ‘People all over will eat my food,’ he had many rest-houses built in different places.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Pautrāyaṇaḥ, the grandson; jānaśrutiḥ, the son of Janaśruta; śraddhādeyaḥ, gave away in charity with due respect; bahudāyī, gave many gifts; bahupākyaḥ, cooked large quantities of food for free distribution; āsa ha, it happened like this; saḥ, he [Jānaśruti]; sarvataḥ, from all quarters; me annam, my food; atsyanti, [people] will eat; iti, this [i.e., with this thought in mind]; sarvataḥ eva, in all directions; āvasathān, rest-houses; māpayāñcakre, built. Commentary:-There was once a king named Jānaśruti, who was the great-grandson of Janaśruta. He was a highly charitable person. He not only made large donations, but whatever he gave he gave with love and respect. Every day large quantities of food were cooked and he fed many people. He also had rest-houses built all over the country. He wanted people to come, stay in those rest-houses, and enjoy his food.

Translation By Max Müller

1. There lived once upon a time Gânasruti Pautrâyana (the great-grandson of Ganasruta), who was a pious giver, bestowing much wealth upon the people, and always keeping open house. He built places of refuge everywhere, wishing that people should everywhere eat of his food.


Sloka : 4.1.2

अथ हꣳसा निशायामतिपेतुस्तद्धैवꣳ हꣳ सोहꣳ समभ्युवाद

हो होऽयि भल्लाक्ष भल्लाक्ष जानश्रुतेः पौत्रायणस्य

समं दिवा ज्योतिराततं तन्मा प्रसाङ्क्षी स्तत्त्वा

मा प्रधाक्षीरिति ॥ ४.१.२॥

atha hagͫsā niśāyāmatipetustaddhaivagͫ hagͫ sohagͫ samabhyuvāda

ho ho'yi bhallākṣa bhallākṣa jānaśruteḥ pautrāyaṇasya

samaṃ divā jyotirātataṃ tanmā prasāṅkṣī stattvā

mā pradhākṣīriti .. 4.1.2..



2. Once he saw some swans flying overhead at night. The swan flying behind called out to the one ahead:- ‘Hey, you short-sided one! Don’t you see that the brightness of Jānaśruti has spread all over the sky like daylight? Beware you don’t touch it. See that it doesn’t bum you’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha, once; haṃsāḥ, swans [i.e., some sages who had taken the form of swans]; niśāyām, at night; atipetuḥ, were flying; tat, then; haṃsaḥ, one of the swans; evam ha abhyuvāda, loudly said; haṃsam, to the other swan; ho ho ayi bhallākṣa bhallākṣa, hey, you short-sided one [don’t you see?]; jānaśruteḥ pautrāyaṇasya jyotiḥ, the light [emanating] from Jānaśruti; divā, in the sky; samam ātatam, has spread like daylight; tat, that [light]; mā prasāṅkṣīḥ, don’t touch; tat tvā mā pradhākṣī iti, don’t let it burn you. Commentary:-One evening the king was resting on the roof of his palace and he noticed a couple of swans flying above him in the sky. These swans were actually sages or gods in disguise. Just then the swan flying behind joked with the one ahead about the king, within the king’s hearing.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Once in the night some Hamsas (flamingoes) flew over his house, and one flamingo said to another:- 'Hey, Bhallâksha, Bhallâksha (short-sighted friend). The light (glory) of Gânasruti Pautrâyana has spread like the sky. Do not go near, that it may not burn thee.'


Sloka : 4.1.3

तमु ह परः प्रत्युवाच कम्वर एनमेतत्सन्तꣳ सयुग्वानमिव

रैक्वमात्थेति यो नु कथꣳ सयुग्वा रैक्व इति ॥ ४.१.३॥

tamu ha paraḥ pratyuvāca kamvara enametatsantagͫ sayugvānamiva

raikvamāttheti yo nu kathagͫ sayugvā raikva iti .. 4.1.3..



3. The swan in front replied:- ‘Say, who is this person? From the way you are talking one would think he was Raikva with the cart.’ Then the other swan asked, ‘And who is this Raikva with the cart you are referring to?’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Paraḥ, the other [i.e., the swan in front]; pratyuvāca, replied; are kam u enam etat santam, [feigning contempt and a mood to debate] say, who is this one; sayugvānam raikvam iva āttha iti, you are talking as if he were Raikva with the cart; yaḥ nu katham sayugvā raikvaḥ iti, [the other swan asked] who is this Raikva with the cart that you are referring to? Commentary:-What the swan in front meant was:- ‘This prince is a worthless fellow. He by no means deserves the honour you are paying him. You are talking of him as if he had attained Self-knowledge—as if he were a great person like Sayugvā Raikva (that is, Raikva who rides the small cart).’ But the other swan did not know who this Sayugvā Raikva was.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The other answered him:- 'How can you speak of him, being what he is (a râganya, noble), as if he were like Raikva with the car [1]?'

Footnote:

1. Sayugvan is explained as possessed of a car with yoked horses or oxen. Could it have meant originally, 'yoke-fellow, equal,' as in Rig-veda X, 130, 4? Anquetil renders it by 'semper cum se ipso camelum solutum habens.'


Sloka : 4.1.4

यथा कृतायविजितायाधरेयाः संयन्त्येवमेनꣳ सर्वं

तदभिसमैति यत्किंच प्रजाः साधु कुर्वन्ति यस्तद्वेद

यत्स वेद स मयैतदुक्त इति ॥ ४.१.४॥

yathā kṛtāyavijitāyādhareyāḥ saṃyantyevamenagͫ sarvaṃ

tadabhisamaiti yatkiṃca prajāḥ sādhu kurvanti yastadveda

yatsa veda sa mayaitadukta iti .. 4.1.4..



4. ‘Just as in a game of dice, when a person wins the toss called kṛta he automatically wins the lower tosses also, in the same way, whatever good work people do goes to the credit of Raikva. If anyone knows what Raikva knows, he becomes like Raikva. This is how I would describe Raikva.’





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yathā, just as; kṛtāya-vijitāya, if a person wins the toss of dice called kṛta; adhareyāḥ, all lower tosses [i.e., tretā, three; dvāpara, two; and kali, one]; samyanti, are included [i.e., are also won]; evam, in the same way; yat kiñca prajāḥ sādhu kurvanti, whatever good work people do; enam sarvam tat abhisamaiti, all that comes under that one [i.e., it Commentary:-Kṛta is the highest number possible in a toss of dice, so it is said to include all the lower numbers within it. The swan says that Raikva is a person like kṛta, because he includes within himself all the good things that other people do. He is the sum total of all that is good in the world. If anyone has the knowledge that Raikva has, then he becomes the same as Raikva.

Translation By Max Müller

4. The first replied:- 'How is it with this Raikva with the car of whom thou speakest?' The other answered:- 'As (in a game of dice) all the lower casts [1] belong to him who has conquered with the Krita cast, so whatever good deeds other people perform, belong to that Raikva. He who knows what he knows, he is thus spoken of by me.'

Footnote:

1. Instead of adhareyâh, we must read adhare 'yâh.


Sloka : 4.1.5

तदु ह जानश्रुतिः पौत्रायण उपशुश्राव

स ह संजिहान एव क्षत्तारमुवाचाङ्गारे ह सयुग्वानमिव

रैक्वमात्थेति यो नु कथꣳ सयुग्वा रैक्व इति ॥ ४.१.५॥

tadu ha jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇa upaśuśrāva

sa ha saṃjihāna eva kṣattāramuvācāṅgāre ha sayugvānamiva

raikvamāttheti yo nu kathagͫ sayugvā raikva iti .. 4.1.5..



5-6. Jānaśruti Pautrāyaṇa overheard what the swan said. He got up from his bed and the first thing he did was to ask his attendant [who was standing nearby]:- ‘O my child, can I be compared to Raikva with the cart? Who is this Raikva with the cart? What sort of person is he?’ [Then he quoted what the swan had said:-] ‘Just as in a game of dice, if a person wins the toss called kṛta, he automatically wins the lower tosses also, in the same way, whatever good work people do goes to the credit of Raikva. If anyone knows what Raikva knows, he becomes like Raikva. This is how I would describe Raikva.’





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-U tat, that [what the swan said]; jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇa upaśuśrāva, the great-grandson of Janaśruta overheard; saḥ ha sañjihānaḥ, he got up from his bed; eva kṣattāram uvāca, and immediately said to his charioteer; aṅga are, O my child; sayugvānam iva raikvam āttha ha iti, do you compare me with Raikva with the cart; yaḥ sayugvā raikva iti, who is this Raikva with the cart; nu katham, what sort of person is he?; Yathā, just as; kṛtāya-vijitāya, if a person wins the toss of dice called kṛta; adhareyāḥ, all lower tosses [i.e., tretā, three; dvāpara, two; and kali, one]; samyanti, are included [i.e., are also won]; evam, in the same way; yat kiñca prajāḥ sādhu kurvanti, whatever good work people do; enam sarvam tat abhisamaiti, all that comes under that one [i.e., it goes to the credit of Raikva]; yaḥ tat veda, he who knows that; yat saḥ veda, whatever he [Raikva] knows; saḥ mayā etat uktaḥ iti, this is said of him by me. Commentary:-Jānaśruti was disturbed by what the swans had said about him. Maybe he could not be compared with Raikva, but in what way did Raikva excel over him? Who was this Raikva with a cart? Jānaśruti had a sleepless night. The next morning when he got up, the first thing he did was to question his attendant about this Raikva. He wanted to somehow find out in what respect Raikva was superior to him.

Translation By Max Müller

5. Gânasruti Pautrâyana overheard this conversation, and as soon as he had risen in the morning, he said to his. door-keeper (kshattri):- 'Friend, dost thou speak of (me, as if I were) Raikva with the car?' He replied:- 'How is it with this Raikva, with the car?'


Sloka : 4.1.6

यथा कृतायविजितायाधरेयाः संयन्त्येवमेनꣳ सर्वं

तदभिसमैति यत्किंच प्रजाः साधु कुर्वन्ति यस्तद्वेद

यत्स वेद स मयैतदुक्त इति ॥ ४.१.६॥

yathā kṛtāyavijitāyādhareyāḥ saṃyantyevamenagͫ sarvaṃ

tadabhisamaiti yatkiṃca prajāḥ sādhu kurvanti yastadveda

yatsa veda sa mayaitadukta iti .. 4.1.6..



Translation By Max Müller

6. The king said:- 'As (in a game of dice), all the lower casts belong to him who has conquered with the Krita cast, so whatever good deeds other people perform, belong to that Raikva. He who knows what he knows, he is thus spoken of by me.'


Sloka : 4.1.7

स ह क्षत्तान्विष्य नाविदमिति प्रत्येयाय तꣳ होवाच

यत्रारे ब्राह्मणस्यान्वेषणा तदेनमर्च्छेति ॥ ४.१.७॥

sa ha kṣattānviṣya nāvidamiti pratyeyāya tagͫ hovāca

yatrāre brāhmaṇasyānveṣaṇā tadenamarccheti .. 4.1.7..



7. [Jānaśruti asked his attendant to go and look for Raikva.] Having looked for him, the attendant thought, ‘I can’t find him,’ and returned to his master. Jānaśruti then said to him:- ‘Well, why don’t you go to places where brāhmins are to be found—in forests and solitary places? Look for him there’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ ha kṣattā, that attendant; anviṣya, having looked [for Raikva]; na avidam iti, thought ‘I have not found him’; pratyeyāya, came back; tam ha uvāca, [then Jānaśruti] said to him; are yatra brāhmaṇasya anveṣaṇā, well, wherever brāhmins are to be found [i.e., in Commentary:-Jānaśruti’s attendant looked for Raikva in many places, but obviously they were unlikely places. Raikva could be found only in a quiet place, such as a forest or by the side of a river. It would be there that such a person would prefer to stay. So Jānaśruti asked the attendant to search in those places.

Translation By Max Müller

7. The door-keeper went to look for Raikva, but returned saying, 'I found him not.' Then the king said:- 'Alas! where a Brâhmana should be searched for (in the solitude of the forest), there go for him.'


Sloka : 4.1.8

सोऽधस्ताच्छकटस्य पामानं कषमाणमुपोपविवेश

तꣳ हाभ्युवाद त्वं नु भगवः सयुग्वा रैक्व

इत्यहꣳ ह्यरा३ इति ह प्रतिजज्ञे स ह क्षत्ताविदमिति

प्रत्येयाय ॥ ४.१.८ ॥

so'dhastācchakaṭasya pāmānaṃ kaṣamāṇamupopaviveśa

tagͫ hābhyuvāda tvaṃ nu bhagavaḥ sayugvā raikva

ityahagͫ hyarā3 iti ha pratijajñe sa ha kṣattāvidamiti

pratyeyāya .. 4.1.8 ..



8. The attendant noticed a man sitting under a cart, scratching a rash on his body. Sitting down close to him, the attendant asked, ‘Sir, are you Raikva with the cart?’ The man answered, ‘Well, yes, I am.’ The attendant thought, ‘I have found him,’ and returned.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [the attendant]; śakaṭasya adhastāt, [noticed a man sitting] under a cart; pāmānam, with a rash on his skin; kaṣamāṇam, scratching; upa upaviveśa, he sat close to him; tam ha abhyuvāda, he said to him; tvam nu bhagavaḥ sayugvā raikva iti, Sir, are you Raikva with the cart; aham hi arā iti, well, yes, I am the same; pratijajñe, he admitted [rather contemptuously]; saḥ ha kṣattā, that attendant; avidam iti, thought ‘I have found him’; pratyeyāya, came back. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, heṛe ends the first section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

8. The door-keeper came to a man who was lying beneath a car and scratching his sores [1]. He addressed him, and said:- 'Sir, are you Raikva with the car? ' He answered:- 'Here I am.' Then the door-keeper returned, and said:- 'I have found him.'

Footnote:

1. It is curious that in a hymn of the Atharva-veda (V, 22, 5, 8) takman, apparently a disease of the skin, is relegated to the Mahâvrishas, where Raikva dwelt. Roth, Zur Literatur des Veda, .


Sloka : 4.2.1

॥ इति प्रथमः खण्डः ॥

तदु ह जानश्रुतिः पौत्रायणः षट्शतानि गवां

निष्कमश्वतरीरथं तदादाय प्रतिचक्रमे तꣳ हाभ्युवाद

॥ ४.२.१॥

.. iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tadu ha jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇaḥ ṣaṭśatāni gavāṃ

niṣkamaśvatarīrathaṃ tadādāya praticakrame tagͫ hābhyuvāda

.. 4.2.1..



1. Then Jānaśruti Pautrāyaṇa went to that place, taking with him six hundred cows, a gold necklace, and a chariot drawn by mules. He said to him [Raikva]:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat u ha, next; jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇaḥ, the great-grandson of Janaśruta; ṣaṭ śatāni gavām, six hundred cows; niṣkam, a gold necklace; aśvatarīratham, a chariot drawn by mules; tat ādāya, that with him; praticakrame, went [there]; tam ha abhyuvāda, he said to him. Commentary:-Hearing the report from his attendant, and thinking that Raikva might be poor and in need of money, Jānaśruti went with some gifts to offer Raikva, so that Raikva would teach him.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then Gânasruti Pautrâyana took six hundred cows, a necklace, and a carriage with mules, went to Raikva and said:-


Sloka : 4.2.2

रैक्वेमानि षट्शतानि गवामयं निष्कोऽयमश्वतरीरथोऽनु

म एतां भगवो देवताꣳ शाधि यां देवतामुपास्स इति

॥ ४.२.२॥

raikvemāni ṣaṭśatāni gavāmayaṃ niṣko'yamaśvatarīratho'nu

ma etāṃ bhagavo devatāgͫ śādhi yāṃ devatāmupāssa iti

.. 4.2.2..



2. ‘O Raikva, all these—six hundred cows, a gold necklace, and a chariot drawn by mules—are for you. Please tell me about the god you worship’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Raikva, O Raikva; imāni, all these; ṣaṭ śatāni gavām, six hundred cows; ayam niṣkaḥ, this gold necklace; ayam aśvatarīrathaḥ, this chariot drawn by mules; bhagavaḥ, sir; anuśādhi me, please teach me; etām devatām, about the god; yām devatām upāsse iti, that god which you worship. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'Raikva, here are six hundred cows, a necklace, and a carriage with mules; teach me the deity which you worship.'


Sloka : 4.2.3

तमु ह परः प्रत्युवाचाह हारेत्वा शूद्र तवैव सह

गोभिरस्त्विति तदु ह पुनरेव जानश्रुतिः पौत्रायणः

सहस्रं गवां निष्कमश्वतरीरथं दुहितरं तदादाय

प्रतिचक्रमे ॥ ४.२.३॥

tamu ha paraḥ pratyuvācāha hāretvā śūdra tavaiva saha

gobhirastviti tadu ha punareva jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇaḥ

sahasraṃ gavāṃ niṣkamaśvatarīrathaṃ duhitaraṃ tadādāya

praticakrame .. 4.2.3..



3. Raikva said to him, ‘You śūdra, the necklace and chariot along with the cows—let all these be yours.’ Jānaśruti left and then again came back—this time with one thousand cows, a gold necklace, a chariot drawn by mules, and his own daughter.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam u, to him [Jānaśruti]; ha paraḥ, the other [i.e., Raikva]; pratyuvāca, replied; aha śūdra, O you śūdra; hāra-itvā, the necklace and chariot; saha gobhiḥ, along with the cows; tava eva astu iti, they may be with you; tat u ha jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇaḥ, then Jānaśruti Pautrāyaṇa; punaḥ eva, again; sahasram gavām, one thousand cows; niṣkam, a gold necklace; aśvatarīratham, a chariot drawn by mules; duhitaram, his own daughter; tat ādāya, taking that with him; praticakrame, he went back. Commentary:-Jānaśruti was a kṣatriya. Why then did Raikva address him as a śūdra? Because Jānaśruti thought he could tempt Raikva to teach him Brahmavidyā, the knowledge of Brahman, through wealth. He did not understand

Translation By Max Müller

3. The other replied:- 'Fie, necklace and carriage be thine, O Sûdra, together with the cows.' Then Gânasruti Pautrâyana took again a thousand cows, a necklace, a carriage with mules, and his own daughter, and went to him.


Sloka : 4.2.4

तꣳ हाभ्युवाद रैक्वेदꣳ सहस्रं गवामयं

निष्कोऽयमश्वतरीरथ इयं जायायं ग्रामो

यस्मिन्नास्सेऽन्वेव मा भगवः शाधीति ॥ ४.२.४ ॥

tagͫ hābhyuvāda raikvedagͫ sahasraṃ gavāmayaṃ

niṣko'yamaśvatarīratha iyaṃ jāyāyaṃ grāmo

yasminnāsse'nveva mā bhagavaḥ śādhīti .. 4.2.4 ..



4. He said to Raikva:- ‘I am giving you these thousand cows, this gold necklace, this chariot drawn by mules, this daughter of mine to be your wife, and also this village in which you live. Now, sir, please teach me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam, to him [Raikva]; ha abhyuvāda, [Jānaśruta] said; raikva, O Raikva; idam sahasram gavām, these thousand cows; ayam niṣkaḥ, this gold necklace; ayam aśvatarīrathaḥ, this chariot drawn by mules; iyam jāyā, this wife [my daughter]; ayam grāmaḥ, this village; yasmin āsse, where you live; [I am presenting all these to you]; bhagavaḥ, sir; eva anuśādhi iti, now please teach me. Commentary:-Jānaśruti offered Raikva many things, but most important, he offered his daughter in marriage and

Translation By Max Müller

4. He said to him:- 'Raikva, there are a thousand cows, a necklace, a carriage with mules, this wife, and this village in which thou dwellest. Sir, teach me!'


Sloka : 4.2.5

तस्या ह मुखमुपोद्गृह्णन्नुवाचाजहारेमाः शूद्रानेनैव

मुखेनालापयिष्यथा इति ते हैते रैक्वपर्णा नाम

महावृषेषु यत्रास्मा उवास स तस्मै होवाच ॥ ४.२.५ ॥

tasyā ha mukhamupodgṛhṇannuvācājahāremāḥ śūdrānenaiva

mukhenālāpayiṣyathā iti te haite raikvaparṇā nāma

mahāvṛṣeṣu yatrāsmā uvāsa sa tasmai hovāca .. 4.2.5 ..



5. Lifting the face of the princess, Raikva said:- ‘You have brought me many things [but they are not making me speak]. It is this face that is making me speak.’ The villages in the Mahāvṛṣa province, where Raikva lived, were known thenceforth as Raikvaparṇā. It was here Raikva taught Jānaśruti. Raikva said to him:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasyāḥ ha mukham upodgṛhṇan, lifting her face; uvāca, [Raikva] said; śūdra, O śūdra; ajahāra, you have brought; imāḥ, all these; anena eva mukhena, by this face [or, mouth]; ālāpayiṣyathā iti, you will make me speak; te ha ete raikvaparṇāḥ nāma, these [villages] known as Raikvaparṇā; mahāvṛṣeṣu, in the province of Mahāvṛṣa; yatra, where; uvāsa, [Raikva] lived; asmai, [and where Raikva taught] him [i.e., Jānaśruti]; tasmai ha uvāca, he said to him. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section. Commentary:-Raikva was a brahmacārin. He had no home, and he lived an austere life. He had, however, attained Self-knowledge. When Jānaśruti approached him for spiritual instructions, he was unwilling. He did not like Jānaśruti’s offering him wealth. This is why he called him a śūdra. But When Jānaśruti offered him his daughter in marriage, Raikva was impressed by his keenness. He then agreed to teach him.

Translation By Max Müller

5. He, opening her mouth [1], said:- 'You have brought these (cows and other presents), O Sûdra, but only by that mouth did you make me speak.' These are the Raikva-parna villages in the country of the Mahâvrishas (mahâpunyas) where Raikva dwelt under him [2]. And he said to him:-

Footnote:

1. To find out her age. The commentator translates, 'Raikva, knowing her mouth to be the door of knowledge, i. e. knowing that for her he might impart his knowledge to Gânasruti, and that Gânasruti by bringing such rich gifts had become a proper receiver of knowledge, consented to do what he had before refused.' 2. The commentator supplies adât, the king gave the villages to him.


Sloka : 4.3.1

॥ इति द्वितीयः खण्डः ॥

वायुर्वाव संवर्गो यदा वा अग्निरुद्वायति वायुमेवाप्येति

यदा सूर्योऽस्तमेति वायुमेवाप्येति यदा चन्द्रोऽस्तमेति

वायुमेवाप्येति ॥ ४.३.१॥

.. iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

vāyurvāva saṃvargo yadā vā agnirudvāyati vāyumevāpyeti

yadā sūryo'stameti vāyumevāpyeti yadā candro'stameti

vāyumevāpyeti .. 4.3.1..



1. The air swallows everything. When fire is extinguished, it disappears into the air. When the sun sets, it disappears into the air. And when the moon sets, it disappears into the air.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vāyuḥ vāva samvargaḥ, the air swallows everything; yadā vai agniḥ udvāyati, when fire is extinguished; vāyum eva apyeti, it disappears into the air; yadā sūryaḥ astam eti, when the sun sets; vāyum eva apyeti, it disappears into the air; yadā candraḥ astam eti, when the moon sets; vāyum eva apyeti, it disappears into the air. Commentary:-Earlier, the question of imparting spiritual instructions has been discussed. Here, how the instruction is given is being shown. The instruction begins with the forces of nature (adhidaivata)—by stressing the importance of air. Air can overcome everything, including even the sun, the moon, and fire.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Air (vâyu) is indeed the end of all [1]. For when fire goes out, it goes into air. When the sun goes down, it goes into air. When the moon goes down, it goes into air.

Footnote:

1. Samvarga, absorption, whence samvargavidyâ, not samsarga. It is explained by samvargana, samgrahana, and samgrasana, in the text itself by adana, eating.


Sloka : 4.3.2

यदाप उच्छुष्यन्ति वायुमेवापियन्ति

वायुर्ह्येवैतान्सर्वान्संवृङ्क्त इत्यधिदैवतम् ॥ ४.३.२॥

yadāpa ucchuṣyanti vāyumevāpiyanti

vāyurhyevaitānsarvānsaṃvṛṅkta ityadhidaivatam .. 4.3.2..



2. When water dries up, it disappears into the air. The air swallows all these. This is the worship of the forces of nature (adhidaivata).





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yadā āpaḥ ucchuṣyanti, when water dries up; vāyum eva apiyanti, it goes into the air; vāyuḥ hi etān sarvān saṃvṛṅkte, the air swallows all these; iti adhidaivatam, this is the worship of the forces of nature. Commentary:-This is to show that air is supreme. It can even destroy such a powerful thing as fire.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'When water dries up, it goes into air. Air indeed consumes them all. So much with reference to the Devas.


Sloka : 4.3.3

अथाध्यात्मं प्राणो वाव संवर्गः स यदा स्वपिति प्राणमेव

वागप्येति प्राणं चक्षुः प्राणꣳ श्रोत्रं प्राणं मनः प्राणो

ह्येवैतान्सर्वान्संवृङ्क्त इति ॥ ४.३.३॥

athādhyātmaṃ prāṇo vāva saṃvargaḥ sa yadā svapiti prāṇameva

vāgapyeti prāṇaṃ cakṣuḥ prāṇagͫ śrotraṃ prāṇaṃ manaḥ prāṇo

hyevaitānsarvānsaṃvṛṅkta iti .. 4.3.3..



3. Next is the worship concerning the body. Prāṇa swallows everything. When a person sleeps, speech, the eyes, the ears, and the mind—all these go into prana. Prāṇa swallows all these.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha adhyātmam, now, that relating to the body; prāṇaḥ vāva samvargaḥ, prāṇa [the vital force] swallows everything; saḥ yadā svapiti, when a person is sleeping; prāṇam eva vāk apyeti, speech disappears into prāṇa; prāṇam cakṣuḥ, the eyes [disappear] into prāṇa; prāṇam śrotram, the ears [disappear] into prāṇa; prāṇam manaḥ, the mind [disappears] into prāṇa; prāṇaḥ hi eva etān sarvān saṃvṛṇkte iti, prāṇa swallows all these. Commentary:-When a person falls asleep, the sense organs stop working. They retire into prāṇa, as if they have been swallowed by it.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'Now with reference to the body. Breath (prâna) is indeed the end of all. When a man sleeps, speech goes into breath, so do sight, hearing, and mind. Breath indeed consumes them all.


Sloka : 4.3.4

तौ वा एतौ द्वौ संवर्गौ वायुरेव देवेषु प्राणः प्राणेषु

॥ ४.३.४॥

tau vā etau dvau saṃvargau vāyureva deveṣu prāṇaḥ prāṇeṣu

.. 4.3.4..



4. These two swallow everything:- air among the gods and prāṇa among the organs.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tau vai etau dvau, these are those two; samvargau, all-swallowing; vāyuḥ eva deveṣu, the air among the gods; prāṇaḥ prāṇeṣu, prāṇa [the vital breath] among the organs. Commentary:-Briefly, vāyu, air, is the source of fire, the sun, the moon, and water. Therefore one should worship vāyu as outside, in nature (adhidaivata). Likewise, prāṇa, the vital breath, is the source of speech, the eyes, the ears, and the mind, and therefore one should worship this prāṇa as within oneself (adhyātma).

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'These are the two ends, air among the Devas, breath among the senses (prânâh).'

________________


Sloka : 4.3.5

अथ ह शौनकं च कापेयमभिप्रतारिणं च काक्षसेनिं

परिविष्यमाणौ ब्रह्मचारी बिभिक्षे तस्मा उ ह न ददतुः

॥ ४.३.५॥

atha ha śaunakaṃ ca kāpeyamabhipratāriṇaṃ ca kākṣaseniṃ

pariviṣyamāṇau brahmacārī bibhikṣe tasmā u ha na dadatuḥ

.. 4.3.5..



5. Once Śaunaka, the son of Kapi, and Abhipratārin, the son of Kakṣasena, were being served their meals when a brahmacārin appeared and begged for some food. They, however, refused to give him any.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha, once; śaunakam kāpeyam ca abhipratāriṇam kākṣasenim ca pariviṣyamāṇau, food was being served to Śaunaka, the son of Kapi, and Abhipratārin, the son of Kaksasena; brahmacārī bibhikṣe, a brahmacārin Commentary:-Śaunaka and Abhipratārin were having their meals, and the cook was serving. Just then a brahmacārin came to them for some food. He was one who had attained the knowledge of Brahman. Śaunaka and Abhipratārin, however, wanted to see if the brahmacārin’s knowledge was genuine, so they did not give him anything.

Translation By Max Müller

5. Once while Saunaka Kâpeya and Abhipratârin Kâkshaseni were being waited on at their meal, a religious student begged of them. They gave him nothing.


Sloka : 4.3.6

स होवाच महात्मनश्चतुरो देव एकः कः स जगार

भुवनस्य गोपास्तं कापेय नाभिपश्यन्ति मर्त्या

अभिप्रतारिन्बहुधा वसन्तं यस्मै वा एतदन्नं तस्मा

एतन्न दत्तमिति ॥ ४.३.६॥

sa hovāca mahātmanaścaturo deva ekaḥ kaḥ sa jagāra

bhuvanasya gopāstaṃ kāpeya nābhipaśyanti martyā

abhipratārinbahudhā vasantaṃ yasmai vā etadannaṃ tasmā

etanna dattamiti .. 4.3.6..



6. The brahmacārin said:- ‘One god has swallowed four sages. Who is he who protects this world? O Kāpeya, O Abhipratārin, that god exists in many forms, but human beings cannot see him. The food is meant for him, but you are not giving it to him’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ ha uvāca, he [the brahmacārin] said; ekaḥ devaḥ, one god; mahātmanaḥ caturaḥ, four sages; jagāra, swallowed; kaḥ saḥ, who is that [god]; bhuvanasya gopāḥ, the guardian of the world; kāpeya abhipratārin, O Kāpeya, O Abhipratārin; martyāḥ tam na abhipaśyanti, human beings cannot see him; bahudhā vasantam, existing in many forms; yasmai, for whom; vai etat annam, this food; tasmai, to him; etat na dattam iti, did not give it. Commentary:-Fire, the sun, the moon, and water—these are said to be four sages. Air controls all these, and air is called the god Prajāpati. Similarly, prāṇa is also the god Prajāpati, and the sages are speech, the eyes, the ears, and the mind. Prajāpati is the protector of all, and he resides in diverse forms—sometimes within the human body (ādhyātmika), Sometimes in the forces of nature (ādhidaivika), and sometimes within other living beings (ādhibautika). People are ignorant about him and do not recognize him. They prepare food for him but do not know it, and they refuse to give it to him.

Translation By Max Müller

6. He said:- 'One god--who is he?--swallowed the four great ones [1], he, the guardian of the world. O Kâpeya, mortals see him not, O Abhipratârin, though he dwells in many places. He to whom this food belongs, to him it has not been given [2].'

Footnote:

1. This must refer to Vâyu and Prâna swallowing the four, as explained in IV, 3, 2, and IV, 3, 3. The commentator explains it by Pragâpati, who is sometimes called Ka. In one sense it would be Brahman, as represented by Vâyu and Prâna. 2. The food which you have refused to me, you have really refused to Brahman.


Sloka : 4.3.7

तदु ह शौनकः कापेयः प्रतिमन्वानः प्रत्येयायात्मा देवानां

जनिता प्रजानाꣳ हिरण्यदꣳष्ट्रो बभसोऽनसूरिर्महान्तमस्य

महिमानमाहुरनद्यमानो यदनन्नमत्तीति वै वयं

ब्रह्मचारिन्नेदमुपास्महे दत्तास्मै भिक्षामिति ॥ ४.३.७॥

tadu ha śaunakaḥ kāpeyaḥ pratimanvānaḥ pratyeyāyātmā devānāṃ

janitā prajānāgͫ hiraṇyadagͫṣṭro babhaso'nasūrirmahāntamasya

mahimānamāhuranadyamāno yadanannamattīti vai vayaṃ

brahmacārinnedamupāsmahe dattāsmai bhikṣāmiti .. 4.3.7..



7. After thinking this over, Śaunaka Kāpeya went to the brahmacārin and said, ‘He who is the self of all the gods and goddesses, the creator of all things moveable and immoveable, who eats with his golden [i.e., firm] teeth, who is intelligent, whom others cannot eat, who eats things which are not food, whose greatness wise people think highly of—O brahmacārin, we worship him.’ After this he said, ‘Give this man alms’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat u ha, that [statement]; śaunaka kāpeyaḥ pratimanvānaḥ, thought over; pratyeyāya, [and then] went to him; ātmā devānām, the self of all the gods and goddesses; janitā, the creator; prajānām, of all things [moving or unmoving]; hiraṇyadaṃstraḥ, with teeth made of gold; babhasaḥ, the eater; anasūriḥ, intelligent; mahāntam, great; asya, its; mahimānam, greatness; āhuḥ, is so described; anadyamānaḥ, uneatable; yat, that; anannam, no food; atti, eats; brahmacārin, O brahmacārin; vayam, we; idam vai ā-upāsmahe iti, worship this one; datta asmai bhikṣām iti, give alms to him. Commentary:-Śaunaka told the brahmacārin:- ‘It is not correct that we do not know him. We do know him. He is Prajāpati. He creates and also destroys everything. He is the self of all, and he is also the destṛoyer of all. He is supreme. All wise people worship him as such.’ Śaunaka then told his servant to give the brahmacārin some food.

Translation By Max Müller

7. Saunaka Kâpeya, pondering on that speech, went to the student and said:- 'He is the self of the Devas, the creator of all beings, with golden tusks, the eater, not without intelligence. His greatness is said to be great indeed, because, without being eaten, he eats even what is not food [1]. Thus do we, O Brahmakârin, meditate on that Being.' Then he said:- 'give him food.'

Footnote:

1. Saunaka wishes the student to understand that though I mortals see him not,' he sees and knows him, viz. the god who, as Vâyu, swallows all the gods, but produces them again, and who, as prâna, swallows during sleep all senses, but produces them again at the time of waking.


Sloka : 4.3.8

तस्म उ ह ददुस्ते वा एते पञ्चान्ये पञ्चान्ये दश

सन्तस्तत्कृतं तस्मात्सर्वासु दिक्ष्वन्नमेव दश कृतꣳ सैषा

विराडन्नादी तयेदꣳ सर्वं दृष्टꣳ सर्वमस्येदं दृष्टं

भवत्यन्नादो भवति य एवं वेद य एवं वेद ॥ ४.३.८॥

tasma u ha daduste vā ete pañcānye pañcānye daśa

santastatkṛtaṃ tasmātsarvāsu dikṣvannameva daśa kṛtagͫ saiṣā

virāḍannādī tayedagͫ sarvaṃ dṛṣṭagͫ sarvamasyedaṃ dṛṣṭaṃ

bhavatyannādo bhavati ya evaṃ veda ya evaṃ veda .. 4.3.8..



8. Then they gave him alms. The first five [Vāyu, etc.] and the second five [prāṇa, etc.] together make ten. That is kṛta [the throw of dice of the highest denomination]. These ten are the ten directions, and they are the food. This kṛta is Virāṭ. As Virāṭ is all-pervasive, everything is its food. By that Virāṭ all this is seen. He who knows this Virāṭ becomes Virāṭ himself. He becomes all-pervasive and everything becomes his food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmai, to him [the brahmacārin]; u ha daduḥ, they gave [alms]; te vai ete, all these; pañca anye, five other [i.e., air, plus the four others (fire, the sun, the moon, and water) constituting its food]; pañca anye, five other [i.e., prāṇa, plus the four others (speech, the eyes, the ears, and the mind) constituting its food]; daśa santaḥ, make ten; tat kṛtam, that is kṛta [the turn of the dice that swallows all others]; tasmāt, therefore; sarvāsu dikṣu daśa, these which are in the ten directions; annam eva, are the food; kṛtam, [and also] kṛta; sā eṣā virāṭ, that is Virāṭ; annādi, that which swallows; tayā, by that [Virāṭ]; sarvam idam dṛṣṭam, all this is seen; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus; asya sarvam idam dṛṣṭam bhavati, all this to him becomes seen; annādaḥ bhavati, [and] he becomes an eater of food. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section. Commentary:-Prāṇa (the vital force), speech, the eyes, the ears, and the mind—these five represent our physical (adhyātmika) self. Air, fire, the sun, the moon, and water—these five represent nature (adhidaivika), which surrounds us. These ten together are compared to the dice throw called kṛta. Being the highest number, kṛta ‘swallows’ the other throws of dice, adds their numbers to itself, and then becomes ten. (Kṛta is 4, so the other numbers are 3, 2, and 1; therefore 4+3+2+1 = 10.) Then if is said that the adhyātmika and adhidaivika elements together are the ten quarters. They represent the whole world, so they are Virāṭ. This Virāṭ is both the eater and the food. The person who knows this then becomes Virāṭ.

Translation By Max Müller

8. They gave him food. Now these five (the eater Vâyu (air), and his food, Agni (fire), Âditya (sun), Kandramas (moon), Ap (water)) and the other five (the eater Prâna (breath), and his food, speech, sight, hearing, mind) make ten, and that is the Krita (the highest [1]) cast (representing the ten, the eaters and the food). Therefore in all quarters those ten are food (and) Krita (the highest cast). These are again the Virâg [2] (of ten syllables) which eats the food. Through this all this becomes seen. He who knows this sees all this and becomes an eater of food, yea, he becomes an eater of food.

Footnote:

1. The words are obscure, and the commentator does not throw much light on them. He explains, however, the four casts of the dice, the Krita = 4, the Tretâ = 3, the Dvâpara = 2, the Kali = 1, making together 10, the Krita cast absorbing the other casts, and thus counting ten. 2. Virâg, name of a metre of ten syllables, and also a name of food. One expects, 'which is the food and eats the food.'


Sloka : 4.4.1

॥ इति तृतीयः खण्डः ॥

सत्यकामो ह जाबालो जबालां मातरमामन्त्रयांचक्रे

ब्रह्मचर्यं भवति विवत्स्यामि किंगोत्रो न्वहमस्मीति

॥ ४.४.१॥

.. iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

satyakāmo ha jābālo jabālāṃ mātaramāmantrayāṃcakre

brahmacaryaṃ bhavati vivatsyāmi kiṃgotro nvahamasmīti

.. 4.4.1..



1. Once Satyakāma Jābāla said to his mother Jabālā:- ‘Revered mother, I would like to live with a teacher as a celibate student. What is my lineage?’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Satyakāmaḥ jābālaḥ ha, once Satyakāma Jābāla; jabālām mātaram āmantrayāñcakre, said to his mother Jabālā; brahmacaryam bhavati vivatsyāmi, O revered mother, I want to live as a brahmacārin [with a teacher]; kim gotraḥ nu aham asmi iti, what is my lineage? Commentary:-To attain Self-realization, one has to practise austerities, study the scriptures, and live a life of self-discipline. The story of Satyakāma illustrates this.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Satyakâma, the son of Gabâlâ, addressed his mother and said:- 'I wish to become a Brahmakârin (religious student), mother. Of what family am I?'


Sloka : 4.4.2

सा हैनमुवाच नाहमेतद्वेद तात यद्गोत्रस्त्वमसि

बह्वहं चरन्ती परिचारिणी यौवने त्वामलभे

साहमेतन्न वेद यद्गोत्रस्त्वमसि जबाला तु नामाहमस्मि

सत्यकामो नाम त्वमसि स सत्यकाम एव जाबालो

ब्रवीथा इति ॥ ४.४.२॥

sā hainamuvāca nāhametadveda tāta yadgotrastvamasi

bahvahaṃ carantī paricāriṇī yauvane tvāmalabhe

sāhametanna veda yadgotrastvamasi jabālā tu nāmāhamasmi

satyakāmo nāma tvamasi sa satyakāma eva jābālo

bravīthā iti .. 4.4.2..



2. Jabālā said to him:- ‘My son, I don’t know what your lineage is. I was very busy serving many people when I was young, and I had you. As this was the situation, I know nothing about your lineage. My name is Jabālā, and your name is Satyakāma. When asked about your lineage, say, “I am Satyakāma Jābāla.”’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sā, she [Jabālā]; ha enam uvāca, said to him; na aham etat veda, I don’t know this; tāta, my son; yat gotraḥ tvam asi, what your lineage is; bahu aham carantī paricāriṇī, I was busy serving many people; yauvane tvām alabhe, I had you when I was young; sā etat, for this reason; aham yat gotraḥ tvam asi na veda, I know nothing about what your lineage is; jabālā tu nāma aham asmi, but my name is Jabālā; satyakāmaḥ nāma tvam asi, your name is Satyakāma; saḥ satyakāmaḥ eva jābālaḥ bruvīthāḥ iti, [when asked about your lineage] say this that you are Satyakāma Jābāla. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. She said to him:- 'I do not know, my child, of what family thou art. In my youth when I had to move about much as a servant (waiting on the guests in my father's house), I conceived thee. I do not know of what family thou art. I am Gabâlâ by name, thou art Satyakâma (Philalethes). Say that thou art Satyakâma Gâbâlâ.'


Sloka : 4.4.3

स ह हारिद्रुमतं गौतममेत्योवाच ब्रह्मचर्यं भगवति

वत्स्याम्युपेयां भगवन्तमिति ॥ ४.४.३॥

sa ha hāridrumataṃ gautamametyovāca brahmacaryaṃ bhagavati

vatsyāmyupeyāṃ bhagavantamiti .. 4.4.3..



3. Satyakāma went to Gautama, the son of Haridrumata, and said:- ‘Revered sir, I wish to live with you as a celibate. I have come, revered sir, to be your disciple’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ ha hāridmmatam gautamam etya, he went to Gautama, the son of Haridrumata; uvāca, [and] said; brahmacaryam bhagavati vatsyāmi, revered sir, I wish to live [with you] as a celibate student; upeyām bhagavantam iti, I have come to you, revered sir, [as a disciple]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He going to Gautama Hâridrumata said to him, 'I wish to become a Brahmakârin with you, Sir. May I come to you, Sir?'


Sloka : 4.4.4

तꣳ होवाच किंगोत्रो नु सोम्यासीति स होवाच

नाहमेतद्वेद भो यद्गोत्रोऽहमस्म्यपृच्छं मातरꣳ

सा मा प्रत्यब्रवीद्बह्वहं चरन्ती परिचरिणी यौवने

त्वामलभे साहमेतन्न वेद यद्गोत्रस्त्वमसि जबाला तु

नामाहमस्मि सत्यकामो नाम त्वमसीति सोऽहꣳ

सत्यकामो जाबालोऽस्मि भो इति ॥ ४.४.४॥

tagͫ hovāca kiṃgotro nu somyāsīti sa hovāca

nāhametadveda bho yadgotro'hamasmyapṛcchaṃ mātaragͫ

sā mā pratyabravīdbahvahaṃ carantī paricariṇī yauvane

tvāmalabhe sāhametanna veda yadgotrastvamasi jabālā tu

nāmāhamasmi satyakāmo nāma tvamasīti so'hagͫ

satyakāmo jābālo'smi bho iti .. 4.4.4..



4. Gautama asked him, ‘O Somya, what is your lineage?’ Satyakāma said:- ‘Sir, I do not know what my lineage is. When I asked my mother, she said to me:- “I was very busy serving many people when I was young, and I had you. As this was the situation, I know nothing about your lineage. My name is Jabālā, and your name is Satyakāma.” So, sir, I am Satyakāma Jābāla’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam ha uvāca, he [Gautama] said to him; kim gotraḥ nu somya asi iti, O Somya, what is your lineage; saḥ ha uvāca, he [Satyakāma] said; na aham etat veda bhoḥ, I do not know this, sir; yat gotraḥ aham asmi, of what lineage I am; apṛccham mātaram, I asked my mother; sā mā pratyabravīt, she said to me; bahu aham carantī paricāriṇī, I was busy serving many people; yauvane tvām alabhe, I had you when I was young; sā etat, for this reason; aham yat gotraḥ tvam asi na veda, I know nothing about what your lineage is; jabālā tu nāma aham asmi, but my name is Jabālā; satyakāmaḥ nāma tvam asi, your name is Satyakāma; saḥ aham satyakāmaḥ jābālaḥ asmi bhoḥ iti, so I am Satyakāma Jābāla, sir. Commentary:-Jabālā told Satyakāma the truth and, should anyone ask him, she told him to tell the truth also—irrespective

Translation By Max Müller

4. He said to him:- 'Of what family are you, my friend?' He replied:- 'I do not know, Sir, of what family I am. I asked my mother, and she answered:- "In my youth when I had to move about much as a servant, I conceived thee. I do not know of what family thou art. I am Gabâlâ by name, thou art Satyakâma," I am therefore Satyakâma Gâbâlâ, Sir.'


Sloka : 4.4.5

तꣳ होवाच नैतदब्राह्मणो विवक्तुमर्हति समिधꣳ

सोम्याहरोप त्वा नेष्ये न सत्यादगा इति तमुपनीय

कृशानामबलानां चतुःशता गा निराकृत्योवाचेमाः

सोम्यानुसंव्रजेति ता अभिप्रस्थापयन्नुवाच

नासहस्रेणावर्तेयेति स ह वर्षगणं प्रोवास ता यदा

सहस्रꣳ सम्पेदुः ॥ ४.४.५॥

tagͫ hovāca naitadabrāhmaṇo vivaktumarhati samidhagͫ

somyāharopa tvā neṣye na satyādagā iti tamupanīya

kṛśānāmabalānāṃ catuḥśatā gā nirākṛtyovācemāḥ

somyānusaṃvrajeti tā abhiprasthāpayannuvāca

nāsahasreṇāvarteyeti sa ha varṣagaṇaṃ provāsa tā yadā

sahasragͫ sampeduḥ .. 4.4.5..



5. Gautama said to him:- ‘No non-brāhmin could speak like this. [Therefore, you must be a brāhmin.] O Somya, go and get me some fuel [for the sacrificial fire]. I will initiate you [as a brāhmin by presenting you with the sacred thread], as you have not deviated from truth.’ After the initiation, he selected four hundred feeble and famished cows. Addressing Satyakāma, Gautama said, ‘O Somya, take these cows away [and look after them].’ As. Satyakāma was taking them away, he said, ‘I will not come back until there are a thousand of them.’ He lived away for many years until they had become a thousand.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam ha uvāca, he [Gautama] said to him; na etat abrāhmaṇaḥ vivaktum arhati, no non-brāhmin could speak like this; samidham āhara, get some fuel; somya, O Somya; tvā upaneṣye, I shall initiate you; na satyāt agāḥ iti, you have not deviated from truth; tam upanīya, having initiated him; kṛśānām abalānām catuḥśatāḥ gāḥ, four hundred thin and famished cows; nirākṛtya uvāca, having chosen, he said; somya, O Somya; anusaṃvraja iti, take these away; tāḥ abhiprasthāpayan, as he was leaving with them; uvāca, he [Satyakāma] said; na āvarteya asahasreṇa, I will not come back until they are a thousand in number; saḥ ha varṣagaṇam provāsa, he lived away for a long time; tāḥ yadā sahasram sampeduḥ, until they were a thousand. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section. Commentary:-The point is, no matter what Satyakāma’s birth was, he had the qualities of a brāhmin—love of truth and learning. Though he had to suffer much hardship living in the forest looking after the cows, he was more concerned with keeping his word than with seeking physical comforts.

Translation By Max Müller

5. He said to him:- 'No one but a true Brâhmana would thus speak out. Go and fetch fuel, friend, I shall initiate you. You have not swerved from the truth.' Having initiated him, he chose four hundred lean and weak cows, and said:- 'Tend these, friend.' He drove them out and said to himself, 'I shall not return unless I bring back a thousand.' He dwelt a number of years (in the forest), and when the cows had become a thousand,


Sloka : 4.5.1

॥ इति चतुर्थः खण्डः ॥

अथ हैनमृषभोऽभ्युवाद सत्यकाम३ इति

भगव इति ह प्रतिशुश्राव प्राप्ताः सोम्य सहस्रꣳ स्मः

प्रापय न आचार्यकुलम् ॥ ४.५.१॥

.. iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hainamṛṣabho'bhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti

bhagava iti ha pratiśuśrāva prāptāḥ somya sahasragͫ smaḥ

prāpaya na ācāryakulam .. 4.5.1..



1. Then a bull called to Satyakāma, saying, ‘O Satyakāma!’ He replied, ‘Yes, lord.’ [The bull then said:-] ‘We are now a thousand. Take us to the teacher’s house’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; ha enam ṛṣabhaḥ abhyuvāda iti, a bull called to him [Satyakāma] saying; satyakāma, O Satyakāma; bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, he replied, ‘Yes, lord’; prāptāḥ somya sahasram smaḥ, we are now a thousand; prāpaya naḥ ācāryakulam, lead us to the teacher’s house. Commentary:-Vāyu (air) is the presiding deity of the quarters (the directions). Being pleased with Satyakāma for the way he fulfilled his promise to his teacher, Vāyu entered the body of a bull and spoke to Satyakāma in a very heavy voice. Satyakāma recognized the deity, and so he addressed him as ‘lord.’

Translation By Max Müller

1. The bull of the herd (meant for Vâyu) said to him:- 'Satyakâma!' He replied:- 'Sir!' The bull said:- 'We have become a thousand, lead us to the house of the teacher;


Sloka : 4.5.2

ब्रह्मणश्च ते पादं ब्रवाणीति ब्रवीतु मे भगवानिति

तस्मै होवाच प्राची दिक्कला प्रतीची दिक्कला

दक्षिणा दिक्कलोदीची दिक्कलैष वै सोम्य चतुष्कलः

पादो ब्रह्मणः प्रकाशवान्नाम ॥ ४.५.२॥

brahmaṇaśca te pādaṃ bravāṇīti bravītu me bhagavāniti

tasmai hovāca prācī dikkalā pratīcī dikkalā

dakṣiṇā dikkalodīcī dikkalaiṣa vai somya catuṣkalaḥ

pādo brahmaṇaḥ prakāśavānnāma .. 4.5.2..



2. The bull said, ‘Let me also tell you about one foot of Brahman.’ Satyakāma replied,’Yes, lord, please tell me.’ Then the bull said to him:- ‘The east is one part of Brahman, the west is another, the south is another, and the north is yet another. O Somya, this is one foot of Brahman, consisting of four parts. This foot is called Prakāśavān, the shining’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Brahmaṇaḥ ca te pādam bravāṇi iti, [the bull said,] let me also tell you about a foot [a quarter] of Brahman; bravītu me bhagavān iti, yes, lord, please tell me; tasmai ha uvāca, [the bull] said to him; prācī dik kalā, the east is one part [i.e., one sixteenth—a quarter of a quarter]; pratīcī dik kalā, the west is one part; dakṣiṇā dik kalā, the south is one part; udīcī dik kalā, the north is one part; eṣaḥ vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādaḥ brahmaṇaḥ, O Somya, this is one foot of Brahman having four parts; prakāśavān nāma, it is called Prakāśavān [the shining]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'And I will declare to you one foot of Brahman.' 'Declare it, Sir,' he replied. He said to him:- 'The eastern region is one quarter, the western region is one quarter, the southern region is one quarter, the northern region is one quarter. This is a foot of Brahman, consisting of the four quarters, and called Prakâsavat (endowed with splendour).


Sloka : 4.5.3

स य एतमेवं विद्वाꣳश्चतुष्कलं पादं ब्रह्मणः

प्रकाशवानित्युपास्ते प्रकाशवानस्मिꣳल्लोके भवति

प्रकाशवतो ह लोकाञ्जयति य एतमेवं विद्वाꣳश्चतुष्कलं

पादं ब्रह्मणः प्रकाशवानित्युपास्ते ॥ ४.५.३॥

sa ya etamevaṃ vidvāgͫścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇaḥ

prakāśavānityupāste prakāśavānasmigͫlloke bhavati

prakāśavato ha lokāñjayati ya etamevaṃ vidvāgͫścatuṣkalaṃ

pādaṃ brahmaṇaḥ prakāśavānityupāste .. 4.5.3..



3. ‘He who knows this foot of Brahman, which has four parts and is called “the Shining,” and worships it as such becomes famous in this world. He who knows this foot of Brahman, which has four parts and is called “the Shining,” and worships it as such attains other worlds which are luminous’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus; catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot [or quarter] of Brahman having four parts; prakāśavān iti, known as the shining; upāste, [and] meditates on it; prakāśavān asmin loke bhavati, becomes famous in this world; yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus; catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts; prakāśavān iti, known as the shining; upāste, [and] meditates on it; prakāśavataḥ ha lokān jayati, wins luminous worlds after death. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section. Commentary:-If you worship Brahman as luminous, you yourself become luminous—that is, you become famous. But not only that, after your death you go to those luminous worlds where gods and goddesses live.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'He who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, by the name of Prakâsavat, becomes endowed with splendour in this world. He conquers the resplendent worlds, whoever knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman, consisting of the four quarters, by the name of Prakâsavat.


Sloka : 4.6.1

॥ इति पञ्चमः खण्डः ॥

अग्निष्टे पादं वक्तेति स ह श्वोभूते ग

आभिप्रस्थापयांचकार ता यत्राभि सायं

बभूवुस्तत्राग्निमुपसमाधाय गा उपरुध्य समिधमाधाय

पश्चादग्नेः प्राङुपोपविवेश ॥ ४.६.१॥

.. iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

agniṣṭe pādaṃ vakteti sa ha śvobhūte ga

ābhiprasthāpayāṃcakāra tā yatrābhi sāyaṃ

babhūvustatrāgnimupasamādhāya gā uparudhya samidhamādhāya

paścādagneḥ prāṅupopaviveśa .. 4.6.1..



1. [Then the bull said,] ‘Agni [fire] will tell you about another foot of Brahman.’ The next day Satyakāma collected the cows and drove them towards his teacher’s house. At dusk they arrived at a place [where they halted for the night]. Having confined the cows and collected some fuel, he lit a fire and sat down just behind it facing east.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Agniḥ te pādam vaktā iti, Agni [fire] will tell you about [another] foot; saḥ ha śvaḥ-bhūte gāḥ abhiprasthāpayāñcakāra, the next day he led the cows [towards his teacher’s house]; yatra sāyam, when it was dusk; tāḥ abhi-babhūvuḥ, they arrived at a place; tatra agnim upasamādhāya, having made a fire there; gāḥ uparudhya, keeping the cows confined; samidham ādhāya, having collected fuel; paścāt agneḥ, behind the fire; prāk upa-upaviveśa, sat facing the east. Commentary:-The next day Satyakāma finished his morning rites and then started for the teacher’s house with the cows. They halted for the night at a suitable spot, and after gathering the cows together, Satyakāma lit a fire and sat by it facing east. The bull had told him that Agni (fire) would teach him about another foot of Brahman. He began to wonder what Agni would say and when he would say it. He could not think of anything else.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Agni will declare to you another foot of Brahman.' (After these words of the bull), Satyakâma, on the morrow, drove the cows (toward the house of the teacher). And when they came towards the evening, he lighted a fire, penned the cows, laid wood on the fire, and sat down behind the fire, looking to the east.


Sloka : 4.6.2

तमग्निरभ्युवाद सत्यकाम३ इति भगव इति

ह प्रतिशुश्राव ॥ ४.६.२॥

tamagnirabhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti bhagava iti

ha pratiśuśrāva .. 4.6.2..



2. Fire called to him, ‘O Satyakāma.’ He replied, ‘Yes, lord’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Agniḥ, fire; tam abhyuvāda, called to him; satyakāma iti, O Satyakāma; bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, he replied, ‘Yes, lord.’ Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Then Agni (the fire) said to him:- 'Satyakâma!' He replied:- 'Sir.'


Sloka : 4.6.3

ब्रह्मणः सोम्य ते पादं ब्रवाणीति ब्रवीतु मे भगवानिति

तस्मै होवाच पृथिवी कलान्तरिक्षं कला द्यौः कला

समुद्रः कलैष वै सोम्य चतुष्कलः पादो

ब्रह्मणोऽनन्तवान्नाम ॥ ४.६.३॥

brahmaṇaḥ somya te pādaṃ bravāṇīti bravītu me bhagavāniti

tasmai hovāca pṛthivī kalāntarikṣaṃ kalā dyauḥ kalā

samudraḥ kalaiṣa vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādo

brahmaṇo'nantavānnāma .. 4.6.3..



3. [Fire said,] ‘O Somya, let me tell you about one foot of Brahman.’ [Satyakāma replied,] ‘Yes, lord, please tell me.’ [Fire] said to him:- ‘The earth is one part, the mid-region is another part, heaven is a third part, and the ocean is a fourth part. O Somya, these are the four parts that make up a foot of Brahman. This foot is named Anantavān, the Unlimited’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; brahmaṇaḥ te pādam bravāṇi iti, I will now tell you about a foot of Brahman; bravītu me bhagavān iti, yes, lord, please tell me; tasmai ha uvāca, [fire] said to him; pṛthivī kalā, the earth is one part; antarikṣam kalā, the space between heaven and earth is one part; dyauḥ kalā, heaven is one part; samudraḥ kalā, the ocean is one part; eṣaḥ vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādaḥ brahmaṇaḥ, O Somya, these are the four parts that make up one foot of Brahman; anantavān nāma, named Anantavān, the Unlimited. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Agni said:- 'Friend, I will declare unto you one foot of Brahman.' 'Declare it, Sir,' he replied. He said to him:- 'The earth is one quarter, the sky is one quarter, the heaven is one quarter, the ocean is one quarter. This is a foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, and called Anantavat (endless).'


Sloka : 4.6.4

स य एतमेवं विद्वाꣳश्चतुष्कलं पादं

ब्रह्मणोऽनन्तवानित्युपास्तेऽनन्तवानस्मिꣳल्लोके

भवत्यनन्तवतो ह लोकाञ्जयति य एतमेवं विद्वाꣳश्चतुष्कलं

पादं ब्रह्मणोऽनन्तवानित्युपास्ते ॥ ४.६.४॥

sa ya etamevaṃ vidvāgͫścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ

brahmaṇo'nantavānityupāste'nantavānasmigͫlloke

bhavatyanantavato ha lokāñjayati ya etamevaṃ vidvāgͫścatuṣkalaṃ

pādaṃ brahmaṇo'nantavānityupāste .. 4.6.4..



4. ‘He who knows this foot of Brahman, which has four parts and is known as “the Unlimited,” and worships it as such becomes long-lived in this world. He who knows this foot of Brahman, which has four parts and is known as “the Unlimited,” and worships it as such attains worlds which are long-lasting’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus; catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts; anantavān iti, known as the Unlimited; upāste, [and] meditates on it; anantavān asmin loke bhavati, becomes long-lived in this world; yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus; catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts; anantavān iti, known as the Unlimited; upāste, [and] meditates on it; anantavataḥ ha lokān jayati, wins long-lasting worlds after death. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'He who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, by the name of Anantavat, becomes endless in this world. He conquers the endless worlds, whoever knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, by the name of Anantavat.


Sloka : 4.7.1

॥ इति षष्ठः खण्डः ॥

हꣳसस्ते पादं वक्तेति स ह श्वोभूते गा

अभिप्रस्थापयांचकार ता यत्राभि सायं

बभूवुस्तत्राग्निमुपसमाधाय गा उपरुध्य समिधमाधाय

पश्चादग्नेः प्राङुपोपविवेश ॥ ४.७.१॥

.. iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

hagͫsaste pādaṃ vakteti sa ha śvobhūte gā

abhiprasthāpayāṃcakāra tā yatrābhi sāyaṃ

babhūvustatrāgnimupasamādhāya gā uparudhya samidhamādhāya

paścādagneḥ prāṅupopaviveśa .. 4.7.1..



1. [Then the fire said,] ‘The swan will tell you about another foot of Brahman.’ The next day Satyakāma collected the cows and drove them towards his teacher’s house. At dusk they arrived at a place [where they halted for the night]. Having confined the cows and collected some fuel, he lit a fire and sat down just behind it facing east.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Haṃsaḥ te pādam vaktā iti, the swan will tell you about [another] foot; saḥ ha śvaḥ-bhūte gāḥ abhiprasthāpayāñcakāra, the next day he led the cows [towards his teacher’s house]; yātra sāyam, when it was dusk; tāḥ abhi-babhūvuḥ, they arrived at a place; tatra agnim upasamādhāya, having made a fire there; gāḥ uparudhya, keeping the cows confined; samidham ādhāya, having collected fuel; paścāt agneḥ, behind the fire; prāk upa-upaviveśa, sat facing the east. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'A Hamsa (flamingo, meant for the sun) will declare to you another foot of Brahman.' (After these words of Agni), Satyakâma, on the morrow, drove the cows onward. And when they came towards the evening, he lighted a fire, penned the cows, laid wood on the fire, and sat down behind the fire, looking toward the east.


Sloka : 4.7.2

तꣳहꣳस उपनिपत्याभ्युवाद सत्यकाम३ इति भगव

इति ह प्रतिशुश्राव ॥ ४.७.२॥

tagͫhagͫsa upanipatyābhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti bhagava

iti ha pratiśuśrāva .. 4.7.2..



2. The swan came flying to him and said, ‘O Satyakāma.’ Satyakāma replied, ‘Yes, lord’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Haṃsaḥ upanipatya, the swan flew near; tam abhyuvāda satyakāma iti, [and] called to him, ‘O Satyakāma’; bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, he replied, ‘Yes, lord.’ Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Then a Hamsa flew near and said to him 'Satyakâma.' He replied:- 'Sir.'


Sloka : 4.7.3

ब्रह्मणः सोम्य ते पादं ब्रवाणीति ब्रवीतु मे भगवानिति

तस्मै होवाचाग्निः कला सूर्यः कला चन्द्रः कला

विद्युत्कलैष वै सोम्य चतुष्कलः पादो ब्रह्मणो

ज्योतिष्मान्नाम ॥ ४.७.३॥

brahmaṇaḥ somya te pādaṃ bravāṇīti bravītu me bhagavāniti

tasmai hovācāgniḥ kalā sūryaḥ kalā candraḥ kalā

vidyutkalaiṣa vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādo brahmaṇo

jyotiṣmānnāma .. 4.7.3..



3. [The swan said,] ‘O Somya, let me tell you about one foot of Brahman.’ [Satyakāma replied,] ‘Yes, lord, please tell me.’ [The swan] said to him:- ‘Fire is one part, the sun is another part, the moon is a third part, and lightning is a fourth part. O Somya, these are the four parts that make up a foot of Brahman. This foot is named Jyotiṣmān, the Luminous’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; brahmaṇaḥ te pādam bravāṇi iti, I will now tell you about a foot [quarter] of Brahman; bravītu me bhagavān iti, yes, lord, please tell me; tasmai ha uvāca, [the swan] said to him; agniḥ kalā, fire is one part; sūryaḥ kalā, the sun is one part; candraḥ kalā, the moon is one part; vidyut kalā, ūghtning is one part; eṣaḥ vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādaḥ brahmaṇaḥ, O Somya, these are the four parts that make up a foot of Brahman; jyotiṣmān nāma, named Jyotiṣmān, the Luminous. Commentary:-The swan is speaking here of luminous things, such as fire, the sun, etc. Its partiality for luminous things gives rise to the suspicion that it is itself something luminous. It is, in fact, Āditya, the sun.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The Hamsa said:- 'Friend, I will declare unto you one foot of Brahman.' 'Declare it, Sir,' he replied. He said to him:- 'Fire is one quarter, the sun is one quarter, the moon is one quarter, lightning is one quarter. This is a foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, and called Gyotishmat (full of light).


Sloka : 4.7.4

स य एतमेवं विद्वाꣳश्चतुष्कलं पादं ब्रह्मणो

ज्योतिष्मानित्युपास्ते ज्योतिष्मानस्मिꣳल्लोके भवति

ज्योतिष्मतो ह लोकाञ्जयति य एतमेवं विद्वाꣳश्चतुष्कलं

पादं ब्रह्मणो ज्योतिष्मानित्युपास्ते ॥ ४.७.४॥

sa ya etamevaṃ vidvāgͫścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇo

jyotiṣmānityupāste jyotiṣmānasmigͫlloke bhavati

jyotiṣmato ha lokāñjayati ya etamevaṃ vidvāgͫścatuṣkalaṃ

pādaṃ brahmaṇo jyotiṣmānityupāste .. 4.7.4..



4. ‘He who knows this foot of Brahman, which has four parts and is known as “the Luminous,” and worships it as such becomes illustrious in this world. He who knows this foot of Brahman, which has four parts and is known as “the Luminous,” and worships it as such attains worlds which are luminous.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus; catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot [or quarter] of Brahman having four parts; jyotiṣmān iti, known as the Luminous; upāste, [and] meditates on it; jyotiṣmān asmin loke bhavati, becomes illustrious in this world; yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus; catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts; jyotiṣmān iti, known as the Luminous; upāste, [and] meditates on it; jyotiṣmataḥ ha lokān jayati, wins luminous worlds after death. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section. Commentary:-If you know luminous things well, you yourself become luminous—that is to say, famous—in this world. Then after death you win a luminous world. The idea is that you attain whatever you worship.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'He who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, by the name of Gyotishmat, becomes full of light in this world. He conquers the worlds which are full of light, whoever knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, by the name of Gyotishmat.


Sloka : 4.8.1

॥ इति सप्तमः खण्डः ॥

मद्गुष्टे पादं वक्तेति स ह श्वोभूते गा अभिप्रस्थापयांचकार

ता यत्राभि सायं बभूवुस्तत्राग्निमुपसमाधाय गा

उपरुध्य समिधमाधाय पश्चादग्नेः प्राङुपोपविवेश ॥ ४.८.१॥

.. iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

madguṣṭe pādaṃ vakteti sa ha śvobhūte gā abhiprasthāpayāṃcakāra

tā yatrābhi sāyaṃ babhūvustatrāgnimupasamādhāya gā

uparudhya samidhamādhāya paścādagneḥ prāṅupopaviveśa .. 4.8.1..



1. [Then the swan said,] ‘The madgu will tell you about another foot of Brahman.’ The next day Satyakāma collected the cows and drove them towards his teacher’s house. At dusk they arrived at a place [where they halted for the night]. Having confined the cows and collected some fuel, he lit a fire and sat down just behind it facing east.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Madguḥ te pādam vaktā iti, the diver-bird will tell you about [another] foot; saḥ ha śvaḥ-bhūte gāḥ abhiprasthāpayāñcakāra, the next day he led the cows [towards his teacher’s house]; yatra sāyam, when it was dusk; tāḥ abhi-babhūvuḥ, they arrived at a place; tatra agnim upasamādhāya, having made a fire there; gāḥ uparudhya, keeping the cows confined; samidham ādhāya, having collected fuel; paścāt agneḥ, behind the fire; prāk upa-upaviveśa, sat facing the east. Commentary:-The madgu, or diver-bird, is most of the time in water. Because of its close connection with water, and because water sustains life, the diver-bird stands for life (prāṇa).

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'A diver-bird (Madgu, meant for Prâna) will declare to you another foot of Brahman.' (After these words of the Hamsa), Satyakâma, on the morrow, drove the cows onward. And when they came towards the evening, he lighted a fire, penned the cows, laid wood on the fire, and sat down behind the fire, looking toward the east.


Sloka : 4.8.2

तं मद्गुरुपनिपत्याभ्युवाद सत्यकाम३ इति भगव इति

ह प्रतिशुश्राव ॥ ४.८.२॥

taṃ madgurupanipatyābhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti bhagava iti

ha pratiśuśrāva .. 4.8.2..



2. The madgu came flying to him and said, ‘O Satyakāma.’ Satyakāma replied, ‘Yes, lord’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Madguḥ upanipatya, the diver-bird flew down; tam abhyuvāda satyakāma iti, [and] called to him, ‘O Satyakāma’; bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, he replied, ‘Yes, lord.’ Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Then a diver flew near and said to him 'Satyakâma.' He replied:- 'Sir.'


Sloka : 4.8.3

ब्रह्मणः सोम्य ते पादं ब्रवाणीति ब्रवीतु मे भगवानिति

तस्मै होवाच प्राणः कला चक्षुः कला श्रोत्रं कला मनः

कलैष वै सोम्य चतुष्कलः पादो ब्रह्मण आयतनवान्नाम

॥ ४.८.३॥

brahmaṇaḥ somya te pādaṃ bravāṇīti bravītu me bhagavāniti

tasmai hovāca prāṇaḥ kalā cakṣuḥ kalā śrotraṃ kalā manaḥ

kalaiṣa vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādo brahmaṇa āyatanavānnāma

.. 4.8.3..



3. [The madgu said,] ‘O Somya, let me tell you about one foot of Brahman.’ [Satyakāma replied,] ‘Yes, lord, please tell me.’ [The madgu] said to him:- ‘Prāṇa is one part, the eyes are another part, the ears are a third part, and the mind is a fourth part. O Somya, these are the four parts that make up a foot of Brahman. This foot is named Āyatanavān, the Support’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; brahmaṇaḥ te pādam bravāṇi iti, I will now tell you about a foot [or quarter] of Brahman; bravītu me bhagavān iti, yes, lord, please tell me; tasmai ha uvāca, [the madgu] said to him; prāṇaḥ kalā, prāṇah [the vital force] is one part; cakṣuḥ kalā, the eyes are one part; śrotram kalā, the ears are one part; manaḥ kalā, the mind is one part; eṣaḥ vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādaḥ brahmaṇaḥ, O Somya, these are the four parts that make up a foot of Brahman; āyatanavān nāma, named Āyatanavān, the Support. Commentary:-This part of the story, about the madgu, is devoted to the teaching of prāṇa. In fact, the madgu represents prāṇa. Here the role of the mind has to be understood. The mind is the fourth part of this foot of Brahman, and it is the repository of all that we experience through our diverse organs. This is why it is called Āyatanavān, the Support.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The diver said:- 'Friend, I will declare unto you one foot of Brahman! 'Declare it, Sir,' he replied. He said to him:- 'Breath is one quarter, the eye is one quarter, the ear is one quarter, the mind is one quarter. This is a foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, and called Âyatanavat (having a home).


Sloka : 4.8.4

स यै एतमेवं विद्वाꣳश्चतुष्कलं पादं ब्रह्मण

आयतनवानित्युपास्त आयतनवानस्मिꣳल्लोके

भवत्यायतनवतो ह लोकाञ्जयति य एतमेवं

विद्वाꣳश्चतुष्कलं पादं ब्रह्मण आयतनवानित्युपास्ते

॥ ४.८.४॥

sa yai etamevaṃ vidvāgͫścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇa

āyatanavānityupāsta āyatanavānasmigͫlloke

bhavatyāyatanavato ha lokāñjayati ya etamevaṃ

vidvāgͫścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇa āyatanavānityupāste

.. 4.8.4..



4. ‘He who knows this foot of Brahman, which has four parts and is known as “the Support,” and worships it as such becomes a support [to others] in this world. He who knows this foot of Brahman, which has four parts and is known as “the Support,” and worships it as such attains worlds which are spacious’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus; catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot [or quarter] of Brahman having four parts; āyatanavān iti, known as the Support; upāste, [and] meditates on it; āyatanavān asmin loke bhavati, becomes āyatanavān [i.e., a support to others] in this world; yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus; catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts; āyatanavān iti, known as the Support [i.e., it is spacious and therefore able to support things]; upāste, [and] meditates on it; āyatanavataḥ ha lokān jayati, wins spacious worlds after death. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section. Commentary:-If a person worships this foot of Brahman as āyatanavān—that is, as spacious—he himself becomes spacious. Being spacious means that he can give shelter to many. He has this advantage as long as he is alive. Then when he dies he is able to attain many larger worlds.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'He who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, by the name of Âyatanavat, becomes possessed of a home in this world. He conquers the worlds which offer a home, whoever knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters, by the name of Âyatanavat.'


Sloka : 4.9.1

॥ इति अष्टमः खण्डः ॥

प्राप हाचर्यकुलं तमाचर्योऽभ्युवाद सत्यकाम३ इति

भगव इति ह प्रतिशुश्राव ॥ ४.९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

prāpa hācaryakulaṃ tamācaryo'bhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti

bhagava iti ha pratiśuśrāva .. 4.9.1..



1. [In due course, Satyakāma] reached his teacher’s house. The teacher greeted him, saying, ‘O Satyakāma.’ He replied, ‘Yes, lord’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prāpa ha, he reached; ācāryakulam, the teacher’s house; tam ācāryaḥ abhyuvāda, the teacher greeted him; satyakāma iti, O Satyakāma; bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, [Satyakāma] replied,’Yes, lord.’ Commentary:-Satyakāma tended his teacher’s cattle, but while doing so he lived an austere life and a life of deep meditation.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Thus he reached the house of his teacher. The teacher said to him:- 'Satyakâma.' He replied:- 'Sir.'


Sloka : 4.9.2

ब्रह्मविदिव वै सोम्य भासि को नु त्वानुशशासेत्यन्ये

मनुष्येभ्य इति ह प्रतिजज्ञे भगवाꣳस्त्वेव मे कामे ब्रूयात्

॥ ४.९.२॥

brahmavidiva vai somya bhāsi ko nu tvānuśaśāsetyanye

manuṣyebhya iti ha pratijajñe bhagavāgͫstveva me kāme brūyāt

.. 4.9.2..



2. The teacher said:- ‘Somya, you shine like one who has known Brahman. Who taught you?’ Satyakāma assured him:- ‘Certainly no human being. But will you, O Lord, please teach me now about Brahman, the subject closest to my heart?’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Brahmavit iva vai somya bhāsi, [the teacher, Gautama, said to Satyakāma,] Somya, you are shining like one who has known Brahman; kaḥ nu tvā anuśaśāsa iti, who taught you; anye manuṣyebhyaḥ, somebody other than a human being; iti ha pratijajñe, he assured him; bhagavān tu eva me kāme bruyāt, but, Lord, teach me now about Brahman, the subject closest to my heart. Commentary:-The look on Satyakāma’s face surprised his teacher. He looked like a knower of Brahman. He was shining. What are the signs of a person who has known Brahman? According to Śaṅkara, that person is happy and cheerful, with a smile on his face all the time. His mind is always under control, as are his sense organs. He is also free from desires and therefore from worries. Satyakāma had these signs. This is why his teacher asked him who had taught him. Satyakāma emphatically said that no human being had taught him. He meant thereby that so long as his teacher was there he needed no other human being to teach him. He also assured his teacher that he had now come to him to learn about Brahman, the subject dearest to him.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The teacher said:- 'Friend, you shine like one who knows Brahman. Who then has taught you [1]?' He replied:- 'Not men. But you only, Sir, I wish, should teach me [2];

Footnote:

1. It would have been a great offence if Satyakâma had accepted instruction from any man, except his recognised teacher. 2. The text should be, bhagavâms tv eva me kâme brûyât (me kâme = mamekkhâyâm).


Sloka : 4.9.3

श्रुतꣳह्येव मे भगवद्दृशेभ्य आचार्याद्धैव विद्या विदिता

साधिष्ठं प्रापतीति तस्मै हैतदेवोवाचात्र ह न किंचन

वीयायेति वीयायेति ॥ ४.९.३॥

śrutagͫhyeva me bhagavaddṛśebhya ācāryāddhaiva vidyā viditā

sādhiṣṭhaṃ prāpatīti tasmai haitadevovācātra ha na kiṃcana

vīyāyeti vīyāyeti .. 4.9.3..



3. [Satyakāma said,] ‘I have heard from revered ones like you that a person learns best when he learns from a competent teacher.’ The teacher then, taught Satyakāma everything. Nothing was left out.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Śrutām hi eva me, I have heard; bhagavat-dṛśebhyaḥ, from revered ones like you; ācāryāt ha eva vidyā viditā sādhiṣṭham prāpati iti, knowledge learned from a competent teacher is the best; tasmai, to him [Satyakāma]; ha etat eva uvāca, he taught all this [i.e., what Satyakāma had already learnt from the bull, fire, the swan, and the madgu]; atra ha na kiñcana vīyāya iti vīyāya iti, nothing was left out, nothing was left out. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section. Commentary:-You learn things best when you learn them from a good teacher. This is why Satyakāma asked Gautama to teach him. Gautama then taught him all sixteen kalās, or parts, about Brahman. That is to say, he taught him everything. Earlier, the bull, fire, the swan, and the madgu had taught him about Brahman. Gautama did not leave that out. He taught him everything. The word vīyāya is repeated twice to emphasize that Gautama did not leave out anything.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'For I have heard from men like you, Sir, that only knowledge which is learnt from a teacher (Âkârya), leads to real good.' Then he taught him the same knowledge. Nothing was left out, Yea, nothing was left out.


Sloka : 4.10.1

॥ इति नवमः खण्डः ॥

उपकोसलो ह वै कामलायनः सत्यकामे जाबाले

ब्रह्मचार्यमुवास तस्य ह द्वादश वार्षाण्यग्नीन्परिचचार

स ह स्मान्यानन्तेवासिनः समावर्तयꣳस्तं ह स्मैव न

समावर्तयति ॥ ४.१०.१॥

.. iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

upakosalo ha vai kāmalāyanaḥ satyakāme jābāle

brahmacāryamuvāsa tasya ha dvādaśa vārṣāṇyagnīnparicacāra

sa ha smānyānantevāsinaḥ samāvartayagͫstaṃ ha smaiva na

samāvartayati .. 4.10.1..



1. Upakosala Kāmalāyana lived twelve years with Satyakāma Jābāla as a celibate disciple, studying the scriptures and looking after his teacher’s sacrificial fires. On the completion of that period, other students were permitted to go home. The only exception was Upakosala. He was detained.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Upakosalaḥ kāmalāyanaḥ ha vai satyakāme jābāle brahmacaryam uvāsa, Upakosala Kāmalāyana lived with Satyakāma Jābāla as a celibate student; tasya ha dvādaśa varṣāṇi agnīn paricacāra, for twelve years he looked after his [teacher’s] sacrificial fires; saḥ, he [Satyakāma]; ha sma anyān antevāsinaḥ samāvartayan, permitted the other disciples to return home [after the completion of their Vedic studies]; tam ha eva na samāvartayati sma, but did not let him [Upakosala] go home. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Upakosala Kâmalâyana dwelt as a Brahmakârin (religious student) in the house of Satyakâma Gâbâla. He tended his fires for twelve years. But the teacher, though he allowed other pupils (after they had learnt the sacred books) to depart to their own homes, did not allow Upakosala to depart.


Sloka : 4.10.2

तं जायोवाच तप्तो ब्रह्मचारी कुशलमग्नीन्परिचचारीन्मा

त्वाग्नयः परिप्रवोचन्प्रब्रूह्यस्मा इति तस्मै हाप्रोच्यैव

प्रवासांचक्रे ॥ ४.१०.२॥

taṃ jāyovāca tapto brahmacārī kuśalamagnīnparicacārīnmā

tvāgnayaḥ paripravocanprabrūhyasmā iti tasmai hāprocyaiva

pravāsāṃcakre .. 4.10.2..



2. Satyakāma’s wife said to him:- ‘The brahmacārin is much reduced by austerities and has looked after the fires with great care. Lest the fires blame you, I suggest you teach him.’ But Satyakāma did not teach him. Instead, he left on a journey.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam, to him [Satyakāma]; jāyā uvāca, his wife said; taptaḥ, much reduced by austerities; brahmacārī; the brahmacārin; kuśalam, with great efficiency; agnīn paricacārīt, has tended the fires; mā tvā agnayaḥ paripravocan, may the fires not speak ill of you; prabrūhi asmai iti, please teach him; tasmai ha aprocya eva, he did not teach him; pravāsāñcakre, he left on a journey. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Then his wife said to him:- 'This student, who is quite exhausted (with austerities), has carefully tended your fires. Let not the fires themselves blame you, but teach him.' The teacher, however, went away on a journey without having taught him.


Sloka : 4.10.3

स ह व्याधिनानशितुं दध्रे तमाचार्यजायोवाच

ब्रह्मचारिन्नशान किं नु नाश्नासीति स होवाच

बहव इमेऽस्मिन्पुरुषे कामा नानात्यया व्याधीभिः

प्रतिपूर्णोऽस्मि नाशिष्यामीति ॥ ४.१०.३॥

sa ha vyādhinānaśituṃ dadhre tamācāryajāyovāca

brahmacārinnaśāna kiṃ nu nāśnāsīti sa hovāca

bahava ime'sminpuruṣe kāmā nānātyayā vyādhībhiḥ

pratipūrṇo'smi nāśiṣyāmīti .. 4.10.3..



3. Upakosala was upset and started fasting. His teacher’s wife said to him:- ‘Brahmacārin, eat something. Why are you not eating?’ Upakosala said:- ‘There are too many desires in me and they are pulling me in different directions. I am like one suffering from many ailments. I don’t want to eat’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [Upakosala]; ha vyādhinā, due to mental affliction; anaśitum dadhre, started fasting; tam ācārya-jāyā uvāca, the teacher’s wife said to him; brahmacārin aśāna, brahmacārin, start eatine; kim nu na āśnāsi iti, why are you not eating; saḥ ha uvāca, he [Upakosala] said; bahavaḥ ime asmin puruṣe kāmāḥ there are many desires in this person; nānātyayāḥ, they are pulling me in different directions; vyādhibhiḥ pratipūrṇaḥ asmi, I am full of ailments; na aśiṣyāmi iti, I will not eat anything. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. The student from sorrow was not able to eat. Then the wife of the teacher said to him:- 'Student, eat! Why do you not eat?' He said:- 'There are many desires in this man here, which lose themselves in different directions. I am full of sorrows, and shall take no food.'


Sloka : 4.10.4

अथ हाग्नयः समूदिरे तप्तो ब्रह्मचारी कुशलं नः

पर्यचारीद्धन्तास्मै प्रब्रवामेति तस्मै होचुः प्राणो ब्रह्म

कं ब्रह्म खं ब्रह्मेति ॥ ४.१०.४॥

atha hāgnayaḥ samūdire tapto brahmacārī kuśalaṃ naḥ

paryacārīddhantāsmai prabravāmeti tasmai hocuḥ prāṇo brahma

kaṃ brahma khaṃ brahmeti .. 4.10.4..



4. Then the fires—the Dakṣiṇāgni, the Gārhapatya, and the Āhavanīya—began to say to each other:- ‘This brahmacārin has become thin from practising austerities. He has so long looked after us with great care. Let us teach him.’ They said to Upakosala, ‘Prāṇa is Brahman, ka [happiness] is Brahman, and kha [space] is Brahman.’





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha agnayaḥ samūdire, then the fires [the Dakṣiṇāgni, the Gārhapatya, and the Āhavanīya] began to say; taptaḥ brahmacārī, the austere brahmacārin; kuśalam, with great care; naḥ paryacārīt, looked after us; hanta asmai prabravāma iti, so we will teach him; tasmai ha ucuḥ, they said to him; prāṇaḥ brahma, prāṇa is Brahman; kam brahma, happiness is Brahman; kham brahma iti, ākāśa [space] is Brahman. Commentary:-The three fires that had been so well taken care of by Upakosala were moved to see his condition. They also felt that a great injustice had been done to him by his teacher, Satyakāma. They then decided to take it upon themselves to teach him.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Thereupon the fires said among themselves:- 'This student, who is quite exhausted, has carefully tended us. Well, let us teach him.' They said to him:-


Sloka : 4.10.5

स होवाच विजानाम्यहं यत्प्राणो ब्रह्म कं च तु खं च न

विजानामीति ते होचुर्यद्वाव कं तदेव खं यदेव खं तदेव

कमिति प्राणं च हास्मै तदाकाशं चोचुः ॥ ४.१०.५॥

sa hovāca vijānāmyahaṃ yatprāṇo brahma kaṃ ca tu khaṃ ca na

vijānāmīti te hocuryadvāva kaṃ tadeva khaṃ yadeva khaṃ tadeva

kamiti prāṇaṃ ca hāsmai tadākāśaṃ cocuḥ .. 4.10.5..



5. Upakosala said:- ‘I know that prāṇa is Brahman. But that ka and kha are Brahman I do not know.’ The fires replied, ‘That which is ka is also kha, and that which is kha is also ka.’ Then the fires taught him that Brahman was both prāṇa and ākāśa [space].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ ha uvāca, he [Upakosala] said; vijānāmi aham yat prāṇa brahma, I know that prāṇa is Brahman; kam ca tu kham ca na vijānāmi iti, but I don’t know that ‘ka’ and ‘kha’ are Brahman; te ha ucaḥ, they [the fires] said; yat vāva kam tat eva kham, that which is ‘ka’ is also ‘kha’; yat eva kham tat eva kam iti, that which is ‘kha’ is also ‘ka’; prāṇam ca ha asmai tat ākāśam ca ucaḥ, then they taught him about prāṇa and ākāśa [space]. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section. Commentary:-Upakosala had no difficulty accepting that prāṇa was Brahman, for prāṇa is the vital breath and Without the vital breath, life is impossible. In view of its importance it may be conceded that prāṇa is Brahman. But how can ka and kha be Brahman? Upakosala thought to himself:- ‘Ka is happiness, but what kind of happiness? It is happiness born of sense experience. It is therefore transitory. It cannot be the same as Brahman. Similarly, kha is also transitory, for it means ākāśa, space. Ākāśa is material and therefore transitory.’ The fires then said that ka and kha are used as both nouns and adjectives, and sometimes they qualify each other. Kha as an adjective may qualify ka when ka stands for Brahman. What does ka mean here? Here it means Brahman without any attributes. Similarly, when we say kha, we mean ākāśa. When we say ka is kha, we mean ‘pleasure’ is ākāśa. But this is not the material ākāśa. Here it means the ākāśa, space, inside the heart. The idea is that Brahman and joy (ka) are both in the space inside the heart (khā).

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'Breath is Brahman, Ka (pleasure) is Brahman, Kha (ether) is Brahman.' He said:- 'I understand that breath is Brahman, but I do not understand Ka or Kha [1].' They said:- 'What is Ka is Kha, what is Kha is Ka [2].' They therefore taught him Brahman as breath, and as the ether (in the heart) [3].

Footnote:

1. I do not understand, he means, how Ka, which means pleasure, and is non-eternal, and how Kha, which means ether, and is not intelligent, can be Brahman. 2. The commentator explains as follows:--Ka is pleasure, and Kha is ether, but these two words are to determine each other mutually, and thus to form one idea. Ka therefore does not mean ordinary pleasures, but pleasures such as belong to Kha, the ether. And Kha does not signify the ordinary outward ether, but the ether in the heart, which alone is capable of pleasure. What is meant by Ka and Kha is therefore the sentient ether in the heart, and that is Brahman, while Prâna, breath, is Brahman, in so far as it is united with the ether in the heart. 3. And as its ether, i.e. as the ether in the heart, the Brahman, with which prâna is connected. Comm.


Sloka : 4.11.1

॥ इति दशमः खण्डः ॥

अथ हैनं गार्हपत्योऽनुशशास पृथिव्यग्निरन्नमादित्य

इति य एष आदित्ये पुरुषो दृश्यते सोऽहमस्मि स

एवाहमस्मीति ॥ ४.११.१॥

.. iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hainaṃ gārhapatyo'nuśaśāsa pṛthivyagnirannamāditya

iti ya eṣa āditye puruṣo dṛśyate so'hamasmi sa

evāhamasmīti .. 4.11.1..



1. Then the Gārhapatya fire said to him [Upakosala]:- ‘The earth, fire, food, and the sun—these are all part of my [i.e., part of Brahman’s] body. The person seen in the solar orb is me. I am that’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha enam gārhapatyaḥ anuśaśāsa, next the Gārhapatya fire gave him this instruction; pṛthivī agniḥ annam ādityaḥ iti, the earth, fire, food, and the sun [are all part of me—i.e., of Brahman]; yaḥ eṣaḥ āditye puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, the person seen in the sun; saḥ aham asmi saḥ eva aham asmi iti, I am he, I am he. Commentary:-First the fires taught Upakosala together. Now they are teaching him separately. The Gārhapatya fire begins. He said:- ‘The earth, fire, food, and the sun—these constitute my body. I divide myself into these things. There in the solar region is a person. That is me. I am known as the Gārhapatya fire and I am also this person in the solar region. Earth and food are both objects of enjoyment and consumption, but fire and the sun are not in this category. They are similar to each other, however, just as food and the earth are similar to each other, being objects that people can enjoy.’

Translation By Max Müller

1. After that the Gârhapatya fire [1] taught him Earth, fire, food, and the sun (these are my forms, or forms of Brahman). The person that is seen in the sun, I am he, I am he indeed [2].

Footnote:

1. The household altar. 2. Fanciful similarities and relations between the fires of the three altars and their various forms and manifestations are pointed out by the commentator. Thus earth and food are represented as warmed and boiled by the fire. The sun is said to give warmth and light like the fire of the altar. The chief point, however, is that in all of them Brahman is manifested.


Sloka : 4.11.2

स य एतमेवं विद्वानुपास्तेऽपहते पापकृत्यां लोकी भवति

सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति नास्यावरपुरुषाः क्षीयन्त उप

वयं तं भुञ्जामोऽस्मिꣳश्च लोकेऽमुष्मिꣳश्च य एतमेवं

विद्वानुपास्ते ॥ ४.११.२॥

sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste'pahate pāpakṛtyāṃ lokī bhavati

sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati nāsyāvarapuruṣāḥ kṣīyanta upa

vayaṃ taṃ bhuñjāmo'smigͫśca loke'muṣmigͫśca ya etamevaṃ

vidvānupāste .. 4.11.2..



2. ‘He who knows this Gārhapatya fire and worships it thus has all his sins removed, and he attains the world of the Gārhapatya fire. He lives a long and bright life, and his descendants do not perish. In this world and the next, we look after that person who knows this fire and worships it thus’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; etam evam vidvān, knowing this in this way; upāste, [and] worships; apahate pāpa-kṛtyām, he destroys his sins; lokī bhavati, becomes a dweller in the world of the god of fire; sarvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full range, of his life; jyok jīvati, he lives a bright life; asya āvarapuruṣāḥ, his descendants; na kṣīyante, do not perish [i.e., his line is never broken]; asmin ca loke amuṣmin ca, in this world and also in the other world; vayam tam upabhuñjāmaḥ, we will look after him; yaḥ etam evam vidvān upāste, he who knows this [fire] thus and worships it. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section. Commentary:-Here the benefit of worshipping the Gārhapatya fire in the right manner is being given. The first benefit is that all the worshipper’s sins are burned away. He also attains the world reserved for the worshippers of this fire. When the fire says that the worshipper’s descendants do not perish, he means that his line will not be broken.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who knowing this meditates on him, destroys sin, obtains the world (of Agni Gârhapatya), reaches his full age, and lives long; his descendants do not perish. We guard him in this world and in the other, whosoever knowing this meditates on him.'


Sloka : 4.12.1

॥ इति एकादशः खण्डः ॥

अथ हैनमन्वाहार्यपचनोऽनुशशासापो दिशो नक्षत्राणि

चन्द्रमा इति य एष चन्द्रमसि पुरुषो दृश्यते सोऽहमस्मि

स एवाहमस्मीति ॥ ४.१२.१॥

.. iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hainamanvāhāryapacano'nuśaśāsāpo diśo nakṣatrāṇi

candramā iti ya eṣa candramasi puruṣo dṛśyate so'hamasmi

sa evāhamasmīti .. 4.12.1..



1. Next the Dakṣiṇāgni [Southern] fire said to Upakosala:- ‘Water, the quarters, the stars, and the moon—these are all part of my [i.e., part of Brahman’s] body. The person seen in the moon is me. I am that’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha enam anvāhārya-pacanaḥ anuśaśāsa, next the Anvāhārya Pacana [the Dakṣiṇāgni, or Southern] fire gave him this instruction; āpaḥ diśaḥ nakṣatrāṇi candramā iti, water, the quarters, the stars, and the moon [are all part of me—i.e., of Brahman]; yaḥ eṣaḥ candramasi puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, the person seen in the moon; saḥ aham asmi saḥ eva aham asmi iti, I am he, I am he. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then the Anvâhârya fire [1] taught him:- Water, the quarters, the stars, the moon (these are my forms). The person that is seen in the moon, I am he, I am he indeed.

Footnote:

1. The altar on the right. Anvâhârya is a sacrificial oblation, chiefly one intended for the manes.


Sloka : 4.12.2

स य एतमेवं विद्वानुपास्तेऽपहते पापकृत्यां लोकी भवति

सर्वमायुरेति ज्योग्जीवति नास्यावरपुरुषाः क्षीयन्त उप

वयं तं भुञ्जामोऽस्मिꣳश्च लोकेऽमुष्मिꣳश्च य एतमेवं

विद्वानुपास्ते ॥ ४.१२.२॥

sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste'pahate pāpakṛtyāṃ lokī bhavati

sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati nāsyāvarapuruṣāḥ kṣīyanta upa

vayaṃ taṃ bhuñjāmo'smigͫśca loke'muṣmigͫśca ya etamevaṃ

vidvānupāste .. 4.12.2..



2. ‘He who knows this Dakṣiṇāgni fire and worships it thus has all his sins removed, and he attains the world of the Dakṣiṇāgni fire. He lives a long and bright life, and his descendants do not perish. In this world and the next, we look after that person who knows this fire and worships it thus’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; etam evam vidvān, knowing this in this way; upāste, [and] worships; apahate pāpakṛtyām, he destroys his sins; lokī bhavati, becomes a dweller in the world of the god of fire; sarvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full range of his life; jyok jīvati, he lives a bright life; asya āvarapuruṣāḥ, his descendants; na kṣīyante, do not perish [i.e., his line is never broken]; asmin ca loke amuṣmin ca, in this world and also in the other world; vayam tam upabhuñjāmaḥ, we will look after him; yaḥ etam evam vidvān upāste, he who knows this [fire] thus and worships it. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who knowing this meditates on him, destroys sin, obtains the world (of Agni Anvâhârya), reaches his full age, and lives long; his descendants do not perish. We guard him in this world and in the other, whosoever knowing this meditates on him.'


Sloka : 4.13.1

॥ इति द्वादशः खण्डः ॥

अथ हैनमाहवनीयोऽनुशशास प्राण आकाशो द्यौर्विद्युदिति

य एष विद्युति पुरुषो दृश्यते सोऽहमस्मि स

एवाहमस्मीति ॥ ४.१३.१॥

.. iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hainamāhavanīyo'nuśaśāsa prāṇa ākāśo dyaurvidyuditi

ya eṣa vidyuti puruṣo dṛśyate so'hamasmi sa

evāhamasmīti .. 4.13.1..



1. Next the Āhavanīya fire said to Upakosala:- ‘Prāṇa, space, heaven, and lightning—these are all part of my [i.e., part of Brahman’s] body. The person seen in lightning is me. I am that’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha enam āhavanīyaḥ ānuśaśāsa, next the Āhavanīya fire gave him this instruction; prāṇaḥ ākāśaḥ dyauḥ vidyut iti, prāṇa, space, heaven, and lightning [are all part of me—i.e., of Brahman]; yaḥ eṣaḥ vidyuti puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, the person seen in lightning; saḥ aham asmi saḥ eva aham asmi iti, I am he, I am he. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then the Âhavanîya [1] fire taught him:- 'Breath, ether, heaven, and lightning (these are my forms). The person that is seen in the lightning, I am he, I am he indeed.

Footnote:

1. The Âhavanîya altar is the altar on the eastern side of the sacrificial ground.


Sloka : 4.13.2

स य एतमेवं विद्वानुपास्तेऽपहते पापकृत्यां लोकी भवति

सर्वमयुरेति ज्योग्जीवति नास्यावरपुरुषाः क्षीयन्त उप

वयं तं भुञ्जामोऽस्मिꣳश्च लोकेऽमुष्मिꣳश्च य एतमेवं

विद्वानुपास्ते ॥ ४.१३.२॥

sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste'pahate pāpakṛtyāṃ lokī bhavati

sarvamayureti jyogjīvati nāsyāvarapuruṣāḥ kṣīyanta upa

vayaṃ taṃ bhuñjāmo'smigͫśca loke'muṣmigͫśca ya etamevaṃ

vidvānupāste .. 4.13.2..



2. ‘He who knows this Āhavanīya fire and worships it thus has all his sins removed, and he attains the world of the Āhavanīya fire. He lives a long and bright life, and his descendants do not perish. In this world and the next, we look after that person who knows this fire and worships it thus’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; etam evam vidvān, knowing this in this way; upāste, [and] worships; apahate pāpa- kṛtyām, he destroys his sins; lokī bhavati, becomes a dweller in the world of the god of fire; sārvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full range of his life; jyok jīvati, he lives a bright life; asya āvarapuruṣāḥ, his descendants; na kṣīyante, do not perish [i.e., his line is never broken]; asmin ca loke amuṣmin ca, in this world and also in the other world; vayam tam upabhuñjāmaḥ, we will look after him; yaḥ etam evam vidvān upāste, he who knows this [fire] thus and worships it. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who knowing this meditates on him, destroys sin, obtains the world (of Agni Âhavanîya), reaches his full age, and lives long; his descendants do not perish. We guard him in this world and in the other, whosoever knowing this meditates on him.'


Sloka : 4.14.1

॥ इति त्रयोदशः खण्डः ॥

ते होचुरुपकोसलैषा सोम्य तेऽस्मद्विद्यात्मविद्या

चाचार्यस्तु ते गतिं वक्तेत्याजगाम

हास्याचार्यस्तमाचार्योऽभ्युवादोपकोसल३ इति

॥ ४.१४.१॥

.. iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

te hocurupakosalaiṣā somya te'smadvidyātmavidyā

cācāryastu te gatiṃ vaktetyājagāma

hāsyācāryastamācāryo'bhyuvādopakosala3 iti

.. 4.14.1..



1. The fires said:- ‘O Somya Upakosala, we have just told you the knowledge of fire. That is also Self-knowledge. Your teacher will tell you about the way to the next world.’ In due course, his teacher returned, and he called him, saying, ‘Upakosala’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te ha ucuḥ, they [the fires] said; upakosala somya, O Somya Upakosala; eṣā te asmat vidyā, this knowledge about us [we have given] to you; ca ātma-vidyā, that is also Self-knowledge; ācāryaḥ tu te gatim vakta iti, but the teacher will tell you about the way [to the next world]; asya ācāryaḥ, his teacher; ājagāma ha, returned; ācāryaḥ abhyuvāda tam upakosala iti, the teacher called him, ‘O Upakosala.’ Commentary:-What the fire meant was that Upakosala’s teacher would give him the final lesson. He would tell Upakosala what he should do to get the full benefit of what he had learned from the fires.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then they all said:- 'Upakosala, this is our knowledge, our friend, and the knowledge of the Self, but the teacher will tell you the way (to another life).'


Sloka : 4.14.2

भगव इति ह प्रतिशुश्राव ब्रह्मविद इव सोम्य ते मुखं भाति

को नु त्वानुशशासेति को नु मानुशिष्याद्भो इतीहापेव

निह्नुत इमे नूनमीदृशा अन्यादृशा इतीहाग्नीनभ्यूदे

किं नु सोम्य किल तेऽवोचन्निति ॥ ४.१४.२॥

bhagava iti ha pratiśuśrāva brahmavida iva somya te mukhaṃ bhāti

ko nu tvānuśaśāseti ko nu mānuśiṣyādbho itīhāpeva

nihnuta ime nūnamīdṛśā anyādṛśā itīhāgnīnabhyūde

kiṃ nu somya kila te'vocanniti .. 4.14.2..



2. [Upakosala] replied, ‘Yes, lord.’ [His teacher said:-] ‘O Somya, your face is shining like that of a knower of Brahman. Who has taught you?’ ‘Sir, who will teach me?’ He said this as if he was trying to hide the truth. Then, pointing to the fires, he said:- ‘Earlier they looked, different. Now they look like this.’ In this way, he indicated the fires. [The teacher asked,] ‘Somya, what did the fires teach you?’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, ‘Yes, lord,’ he replied; brahmavidaḥ iva somya te mukham bhāti, your face is shining like that of a knower of Brahman; kaḥ nu tvā anuśaśāsa iti, who has taught you; kaḥ nu mā anuśiṣyāt bho iti, who will teach me, sir; iha iva apanihnute, [he said this] as if he was trying to hide [the truth]; ime, these [pointing to the fires]; nūnam īdṛśāḥ, look like this [as if they are frightened]; anyādṛśāḥ iti, looked different before; iha agnīn abhyūde, in this way he spoke about the fires; kim nu somya kila te avocan iti, Somya, what did they teach you? Commentary:-Upakosala knew the limitations of the fires, and that is why he did not want to tell his teacher what they had taught him, or that they had taught him anything at all. Further, he noticed that in the presence of his teacher the fires appeared to be frozen with fear. This is why he was vague and evasive in his reply.

Translation By Max Müller

2. In time his teacher came back, and said to him:- 'Upakosala.' He answered:- 'Sir.' The teacher said:- 'Friend, your face shines like that of one who knows Brahman. Who has taught you?' 'Who should teach me, Sir?' he said. He denies, as it were. And he said (pointing) to the fires:- 'Are these fires other than fires?' The teacher said:- 'What, my friend, have these fires told you?'


Sloka : 4.14.3

इदमिति ह प्रतिजज्ञे लोकान्वाव किल सोम्य तेऽवोचन्नहं

तु ते तद्वक्ष्यामि यथा पुष्करपलाश आपो न श्लिष्यन्त

एवमेवंविदि पापं कर्म न श्लिष्यत इति ब्रवीतु मे

भगवानिति तस्मै होवाच ॥ ४.१४.३॥

idamiti ha pratijajñe lokānvāva kila somya te'vocannahaṃ

tu te tadvakṣyāmi yathā puṣkarapalāśa āpo na śliṣyanta

evamevaṃvidi pāpaṃ karma na śliṣyata iti bravītu me

bhagavāniti tasmai hovāca .. 4.14.3..



3. Upakosala replied, ‘This is what they said.’ [And he told his teacher all that the fires had taught him.] The teacher said:- ‘O Somya, they taught you only about the worlds, but I will teach you about Brahman.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Idam iti ha pratijajñe, ‘This [is what they taught,]’ he [Upakosala] replied; lokān vāva kila somya te avocan, they have only told you about the worlds, O Somya; aham tu te tat vakṣyāmi, but I will tell you about that [Brahman]; yathā puṣkara-palāśe āpaḥ na śliṣyante, as water does not stick to the lotus leaf; evam, in the same way; vidi, one who knows [Brahman]; evam, thus; pāpam karma na śliṣyate iti, is not tainted by sinful work; bravītu me bhagavān iti, sir, please teach me; tasmai ha uvāca, he said to him. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section. Commentary:-Just as water never sticks to a lotus leaf, similarly, sin never sticks to one who knows Brahman thus.’ Upakosala replied, ‘Sir, please teach me about Brahman.’ The teacher said— A person who has known Brahman is always pure. Nothing can taint him. He is incapable of doing anything wrong.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He answered:- 'This' (repeating some of what they had told him). The teacher said:- 'My friend, they have taught you about the worlds, but I shall tell you this; and as water does not cling to a lotus leaf, so no evil deed clings to one who knows it.' He said:- 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 4.15.1

॥ इति चतुर्दशः खण्डः ॥

य एषोऽक्षिणि पुरुषो दृश्यत एष आत्मेति

होवाचैतदमृतमभयमेतद्ब्रह्मेति

तद्यद्यप्यस्मिन्सर्पिर्वोदकं वा सिञ्चति वर्त्मनी एव

गच्छति ॥ ४.१५.१॥

.. iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ya eṣo'kṣiṇi puruṣo dṛśyata eṣa ātmeti

hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti

tadyadyapyasminsarpirvodakaṃ vā siñcati vartmanī eva

gacchati .. 4.15.1..



1. The teacher said:- ‘The person seen in the eyes is the Self. It is immortal and fearless. It is Brahman. This is why, if anyone puts clarified butter or water in the eyes, it goes to the corners of the eyes’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ eṣaḥ akṣiṇi puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, this person who is seen in the eyes; eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self; iti ha uvāca, he [the teacher] said; etat amṛtam abhayam, this is immortal and fearless; etat brahma iti, this is Brahman; tat, this is why; asmin, into this [eye]; yadi api sarpiḥ vā udakam vā siñcati, if anyone puts clarified butter or water; vartmanī eva gacchati, it goes into the comers [of the eye]. Commentary:-How do you know the Self? You have to have full self-control. You have to have a gentle nature, and you must withdraw your mind completely from the external world. Then you can see the Self in the eyes. That Self is immortal, fearless, and it is Brahman (literally, ‘the biggest’). As water does not stick to a lotus leaf, so also, if water or something else is put in the eyes, it does not hurt them because the eyelids protect them. This is why the eyelids are called ‘lotuses.’ The eyes are the seat of the Self. What the Upaniṣad is saying is that if the seat of the Self is pure and not susceptible to any impurity, the Self is naturally the same.

Translation By Max Müller

1. He said:- 'The person that is seen in the eye, that is the Self. This is the immortal, the fearless, this is Brahman [1]. Even though they drop melted butter or water on him, it runs away on both sides [2].

Footnote:

1. This is also the teaching of Pragâpati in VIII, 7, 4. 2. It does so in the eye, and likewise with the person in the eye, who is not affected by anything. Cf. Kh. Up. IV, 14, 3.


Sloka : 4.15.2

एतꣳ संयद्वाम इत्याचक्षत एतꣳ हि सर्वाणि

वामान्यभिसंयन्ति सर्वाण्येनं वामान्यभिसंयन्ति

य एवं वेद ॥ ४.१५.२॥

etagͫ saṃyadvāma ityācakṣata etagͫ hi sarvāṇi

vāmānyabhisaṃyanti sarvāṇyenaṃ vāmānyabhisaṃyanti

ya evaṃ veda .. 4.15.2..



2. They call him Saṃyadvāma, for everything that is good and beautiful comes to him. One who knows this has everything that is good and beautiful come to him.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Etam saṃyadvāmaḥ iti ācakṣate, they call him Saṃyadvāma [i.e., one in whom everything that is good is concentrated]; hi, because; etam sarvāṇi vāmāni abhisaṃyanti, all good and beautiful things come to him; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus; sarvāṇi enam vāmāni abhisaṃyanti, all good and beautiful things come to him. Commentary:-The word vāma means ‘attractive,’ ‘beautiful,’ or ‘desirable.’ The Self is Saṃyadvāma because all good things become concentrated in it. And one who knows the Self also becomes the receptacle of all good things.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'They call him Samyadvâma, for all blessings (vâma) go towards him (samyanti). All blessings go towards him who knows this.


Sloka : 4.15.3

एष उ एव वामनीरेष हि सर्वाणि वामानि नयति

सर्वाणि वामानि नयति य एवं वेद ॥ ४.१५.३॥

eṣa u eva vāmanīreṣa hi sarvāṇi vāmāni nayati

sarvāṇi vāmāni nayati ya evaṃ veda .. 4.15.3..



3. This person in the eyes is Vāmanī, the source of all that is good and pure, for he inspires in people all that is good and pure. One who knows this grants all that is good and pure to others.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Eṣaḥ u eva vāmanīḥ, and this [person in the eyes] is Vāmanī [the source of all that is good and pure]; hi, for; eṣaḥ, this [person in the eyes]; eva, surely; sarvāṇi vāmāni nayati, grants all that is good and pure; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus; sarvāṇi vāmāni nayati, grants all that is good and pure. Commentary:-The word vāmanī means one who carries the fruits of good work to all beings according to what they deserve. He is the support of all that is good. One who knows this conveys the fruits of good work to others.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'He is also Vâmanî, for he leads (nayati) all blessings (vâma). He leads all blessings who knows this.


Sloka : 4.15.4

एष उ एव भामनीरेष हि सर्वेषु लोकेषु भाति

सर्वेषु लोकेषु भाति य एवं वेद ॥ ४.१५.४॥

eṣa u eva bhāmanīreṣa hi sarveṣu lokeṣu bhāti

sarveṣu lokeṣu bhāti ya evaṃ veda .. 4.15.4..



4. The person in the eyes is Bhāmanī, shining, for he shines in all the worlds [including the sun]. One who knows this shines in all the worlds.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Eṣaḥ u eva bhāmanīḥ, and this [person in the eyes] is Bhāmanī [shining]; eṣaḥ hi sarveṣu lokeṣu bhāti, for he shines in all the worlds [including the sun]; yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus; sarveṣu lokeṣu bhāti, shines in all the worlds. Commentary:-This person in the eyes is the source of all light. The Kaṭha Upaniṣad [II.2.15] says, ‘All this shines because he shines.’

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'He is also Bhâmanî, for he shines (bhâti) in all worlds. He who knows this, shines in all worlds.


Sloka : 4.15.5

अथ यदु चैवास्मिञ्छव्यं कुर्वन्ति यदि च

नार्चिषमेवाभिसंभवन्त्यर्चिषोऽहरह्न

आपूर्यमाणपक्षमापूर्यमाणपक्षाद्यान्षडुदङ्ङेति

मासाꣳस्तान्मासेभ्यः संवत्सरꣳ

संवत्सरादादित्यमादित्याच्चन्द्रमसं चन्द्रमसो विद्युतं

तत् पुरुषोऽमानवः स एनान्ब्रह्म गमयत्येष देवपथो

ब्रह्मपथ एतेन प्रतिपद्यमाना इमं मानवमावर्तं नावर्तन्ते

नावर्तन्ते ॥ ४.१५.५॥

atha yadu caivāsmiñchavyaṃ kurvanti yadi ca

nārciṣamevābhisaṃbhavantyarciṣo'harahna

āpūryamāṇapakṣamāpūryamāṇapakṣādyānṣaḍudaṅṅeti

māsāgͫstānmāsebhyaḥ saṃvatsaragͫ

saṃvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasaṃ candramaso vidyutaṃ

tat puruṣo'mānavaḥ sa enānbrahma gamayatyeṣa devapatho

brahmapatha etena pratipadyamānā imaṃ mānavamāvartaṃ nāvartante

nāvartante .. 4.15.5..



5. Then, for those who know this, whether proper funeral rites are performed or not, they go after death to the world of light. From the world of light they go to the world of day; from the world of day to the world of the bright fortnight; from the world of the bright fortnight to the six months when the sun moves northward; from there they go to the year; from the year to the sun; from the sun to the moon; and from the moon to lightning. There someone, not human, receives them and leads them to brahmaloka. This is the way of the gods. This is also the way to Brahman. Those who go by this path never return to this mortal world. They never return.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; yat, if; u ca eva asmin, in this situation [i.e., for those who know the Self in the eyes]; śavyam, funeral rites; kurvanti, they perform; yadi ca na, or if not; arciṣam, to light; eva abhisambhavanti, they go; arciṣaḥ, from light; ahaḥ, to day; ahnaḥ, from day; āpūryamāṇapakṣam, to the bright fortnight; āpūryamāṇapakṣāt, from the bright fortnight; ṣaṭ māsān, to the six months; yān udan eti, [when the sun] moves to the north; tān, to that; māsebhyaḥ, from those months; saṃvatsaram, to the year; saṃvatsarāt, from the year; ādityam, to the sun; ādityāt, from the sun; candramasam, to the moon; candramasaḥ, from the moon; vidyutam, to lightning; tat, there; puruṣaḥ, a person [existing there]; amānavaḥ, not human; enān, those [human beings]; saḥ gamayati, he leads; brahma, to brahmaloka; eṣaḥ devapathaḥ, this is the path of the gods; brahmapathaḥ, the way to Brahman; etena, by this [path]; pratipadyamānāḥ, those who go; imam mānavam āvartam, to this world of human beings; na āvartante, do not return; na āvartante, do not return. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section. Commentary:-Normally when a person dies, his funeral rites should be performed with great care. This, however, does not apply in the case of one who has known Brahman. If the funeral rites are performed for him, it is good. But if for one reason or another they are not, it As regards those who worship the Self in the eyes by attributing to it qualities such as saṃyadvāma, vāmanī, or bhāmanī, or those who worship the fires as earth, water, prāṇa, etc., they go after death to the deity of light. From there they go to the deities of day, the bright fortnight, the six months of the northern solstice, and so on. Finally they reach a point where someone appears who is higher than a human being. He leads them to satyaloka, which is the realm of Brahmā. This is not, however, Para Brahman (Pure Consciousness). To attain liberation, one must realize one’s identity with Para Brahman, where there is no going or coming from one realm to another.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'Now (if one who knows this, dies), whether people perform obsequies for him or no, he goes to light (arkis) [1], from light to day, from day to the light half of the moon, from the light half of the moon to the six months during which the sun goes to the north, from the months to the year, from the year to the sun, from the sun to the moon, from the moon to the lightning. There is a person not human,

Footnote:

1. The commentator takes light, day, &c. as persons, or devatâs. Cf. Kh. Up. V, 10, 1.


Sloka : 4.16.1

॥ इति पञ्चदशः खण्डः ॥

एष ह वै यज्ञो योऽयं पवते एष ह यन्निदꣳ सर्वं पुनाति

यदेष यन्निदꣳ सर्वं पुनाति तस्मादेष एव यज्ञस्तस्य

मनश्च वाक्च वर्तनी ॥ ४.१६.१॥

.. iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

eṣa ha vai yajño yo'yaṃ pavate eṣa ha yannidagͫ sarvaṃ punāti

yadeṣa yannidagͫ sarvaṃ punāti tasmādeṣa eva yajñastasya

manaśca vākca vartanī .. 4.16.1..



1. He who blows [i.e., air] is the sacrifice. While moving, he purifies all this. Since he purifies all this while moving, he is the sacrifice. The mind and speech are both his paths.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Eṣaḥ ha vai yajñaḥ, he is a sacrifice; yaḥ ayam pavate, this one who blows [i.e., air]; eṣaḥ ha, he; yan, while moving; idam sarvam, all this; punāti, purifies; yat, since; eṣaḥ yan idam sarvam punāti, he purifies all this while moving; tasmāt, therefore; eṣaḥ eva yajñaḥ, he is the sacrifice; manaḥ ca vāk ca, mind and speech; tasya vartanī, are his paths. Commentary:-Anything that moves can clean or purify things, and this process of cleaning or purifying is a kind of sacrifice. Air is called here a sacrifice because it moves and by moving it purifies. There are two ways by which the air purifies—by speech and by the mind. By speech we utter mantras, and by the mind we understand them. Speech and the mind both operate by the power derived from air.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Verily, he who purifies (Vâyu) is the sacrifice, for he (the air) moving along purifies everything. Because moving along he purifies everything, therefore he is the sacrifice. Of that sacrifice there are two ways, by mind and by speech.


Sloka : 4.16.2

तयोरन्यतरां मनसा सꣳस्करोति ब्रह्मा वाचा

होताध्वर्युरुद्गातान्यतराꣳस यत्रौपाकृते प्रातरनुवाके

पुरा परिधानीयाया ब्रह्मा व्यवदति ॥ ४.१६.२॥

tayoranyatarāṃ manasā sagͫskaroti brahmā vācā

hotādhvaryurudgātānyatarāgͫsa yatraupākṛte prātaranuvāke

purā paridhānīyāyā brahmā vyavadati .. 4.16.2..



2-3. The priest called brahmā in a sacrifice purifies one of these two paths [i.e., the path of the mind] by his [discriminating] mind. The hotā, the adhvaryu, and the udgātā priests purify the other [i.e., the path of speech] by [chaste and elegant] speech. If, however, the brahmā priest breaks his silence when the morning anuvāka has begun, before the paridhānīya Ṛk hymn has been read, then only one path [the path of speech] has been purified. The other is ruined. Just as a one-legged person trying to walk, or a one-wheeled chariot trying to move, is doomed, in the same way the sacrifice is ruined. And when the sacrifice is ruined, the sacrificer is also ruined. In fact, the sacrificer is even liable for having committed a sin by performing the sacrifice in that way.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Brahmā, the priest called brahmā [in a sacrifice]; tayoḥ anyatarām, one of these two; manasā, mentally; saṃskaroti, purifies; vācā, by speech; hotā adhvaryuḥ udgātā anyatarām, the hotā, the adhvaryu, and the udgātā priests [purify] the other; yatra, when; prātaḥ anuvāke upākṛte, the anuvāka which is read in the morning has begun; purā paridhānīyāyāḥ, before the Ṛk hymn called paridhānīya; saḥ, he [the brahmā priest]; vyavavadati, breaks his silence; anyatarām eva vartanīm saṃskaroti, only one path [i.e., the path of speech] he purifies; anyatarā, the other [the path of the mind]; hīyate, is spoiled; yathā, just as; ekapāt, a person with one leg; vrajan, walking; vā, or; rathaḥ ekena cakreṇa vartamānaḥ, a chariot moving on one wheel; riṣyati, is doomed; evam, likewise; asya yajñaḥ riṣyati, his sacrifice is ruined; yajñam riṣyantam, when the sacrifice is ruined; yajamānaḥ anu-riṣyati, the sacrificer is also ruined; saḥ, he [the sacrificed; iṣṭvā, having performed the sacrifice in this way; pāpīyān bhavati, becomes a sinner. Commentary:-In the previous verse, two paths were mentioned for the performance of a sacrifice—the path of speech (vāk) and the path of the mind (manas). In a sacrifice, there are four types of priests:- brahmā, hotā, adhvaryu, and udgātā. The brahmā priest is supposed to purify the path of the mind by his own purified mind, while observing silence. The other three priests take care of the path of speech, purifying it by their pure words. But suppose the brahmā priest breaks his silence while the reading of the morning anuvāka is going on, before the paridhānīya Ṛk hymn has begun. He is supposed to remain silent then, with his mind on a high level. Through this he is to purify the path of the mind. But if he breaks his silence, his mind is no longer ‘pure.’ Then the sacrificer has to make do with only one path—the path of speech. His position is now like that of a one-legged man trying to walk, or like a one-wheeled chariot trying to move. Both the sacrificer and the sacrifice are doomed, and the sacrificer is to be regarded as having committed a sin.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The Brahman priest performs one of them in his mind [1], the Hotri, Adhvaryu, and Udgâtri priests perform the other by words. When the Brahman priest, after the Prâtaranuvâka ceremony has begun, but before the recitation of the Paridhânîyâ hymn, has (to break his silence and) to speak,

Footnote:

1. While the other priests perform the sacrifice, the Brahman priest has to remain silent, following the whole sacrifice in his mind, and watching that no mistake be committed. If a mistake is committed, he has to correct it, and for that purpose certain corrective penances (prâyaskitta) are enjoined. The performance of the Brahman priest resembles the meditations of the sages in the forest, and therefore this chapter is here inserted.


Sloka : 4.16.3

अन्यतरामेव वर्तनीꣳ सꣳस्करोति हीयतेऽन्यतरा

स यथैकपाद्व्रजन्रथो वैकेन चक्रेण वर्तमानो

रिष्यत्येवमस्य यज्ञोरिष्यति यज्ञꣳ रिष्यन्तं

यजमानोऽनुरिष्यति स इष्ट्वा पापीयान्भवति ॥ ४.१६.३॥

anyatarāmeva vartanīgͫ sagͫskaroti hīyate'nyatarā

sa yathaikapādvrajanratho vaikena cakreṇa vartamāno

riṣyatyevamasya yajñoriṣyati yajñagͫ riṣyantaṃ

yajamāno'nuriṣyati sa iṣṭvā pāpīyānbhavati .. 4.16.3..



Translation By Max Müller

3. He performs perfectly the one way only (that by words), but the other is injured. As a man walking on one foot, or a carriage going on one wheel, is injured, his sacrifice is injured, and with the injured sacrifice the sacrificer is injured; yes, having sacrificed, he becomes worse.


Sloka : 4.16.4

अथ यत्रोपाकृते प्रातरनुवाके न पुरा परिधानीयाया ब्रह्मा

व्यवदत्युभे एव वर्तनी सꣳस्कुर्वन्ति न हीयतेऽन्यतरा

॥ ४.१६.४॥

atha yatropākṛte prātaranuvāke na purā paridhānīyāyā brahmā

vyavadatyubhe eva vartanī sagͫskurvanti na hīyate'nyatarā

.. 4.16.4..



4. But in the case of the sacrifice in which the reading of the morning anuvāka has already begun, and the brahmā priest does not break his silence before the paridhānīya has started, then both paths are purified. Neither of them becomes destroyed.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha yatra, in the case of that sacrifice; upākṛte prātaḥ anuvāke, in which the reading of the morning anuvāka has begun; purā paridhānīyāyāḥ, before the beginning of the paridhānīya Ṛk hymn; brahmā na vyavavadati, the brahmā priest does not speak; ubhe eva vartanī, both the paths; saṃskurvanti, they purify; na hīyate anyatarā, neither of them is destroyed. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. But when after the Prâtaranuvâka ceremony has begun, and before the recitation of the Paridhânîyâ hymn, the Brahman priest has not (to break his silence and) to speak, they perform both ways perfectly, and neither of them is injured.


Sloka : 4.16.5

स यथोभयपाद्व्रजन्रथो वोभाभ्यां चक्राभ्यां वर्तमानः

प्रतितिष्ठत्येवमस्य यज्ञः प्रतितिष्ठति यज्ञं प्रतितिष्ठन्तं

यजमानोऽनुप्रतितिष्ठति स इष्ट्वा श्रेयान्भवति ॥ ४.१६.५॥

sa yathobhayapādvrajanratho vobhābhyāṃ cakrābhyāṃ vartamānaḥ

pratitiṣṭhatyevamasya yajñaḥ pratitiṣṭhati yajñaṃ pratitiṣṭhantaṃ

yajamāno'nupratitiṣṭhati sa iṣṭvā śreyānbhavati .. 4.16.5..



5. Just as a person with two legs can walk, or a chariot with two wheels can move, and attain the goal, so also his sacrifice succeeds. And if the sacrifice succeeds, the sacrificer also succeeds. He attains much greatness through his sacrifice.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yathā, as; ubhayapāt, a person with both legs; vrajam, walking; vā, or; rathaḥ ubhābhyām cakrābhyām, a chariot with both wheels; vartamānaḥ, moving; pratitiṣṭhati, succeeds; evam, so also; asya yajñaḥ pratitiṣṭhati, his [the sacrificer’s] sacrifice succeeds; yajñam pratitiṣṭhantam yajamānaḥ anupratitiṣṭhati, if the sacrifice succeeds, the sacrificer also succeeds; saḥ, he [the sacrificer]; iṣṭvā śreyān bhavati, becomes greater through his sacrifice. Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

5. As a man walking on two legs and a carriage going on two wheels gets on, so his sacrifice gets on, and with the successful sacrifice the sacrificer gets on; yes, having sacrificed, he becomes better.


Sloka : 4.17.1

॥ इति षोडशः खण्डः ॥

प्रजापतिर्लोकानभ्यतपत्तेषां तप्यमानानाꣳ

रसान्प्रावृहदग्निं पृथिव्या वायुमन्तरिक्षातादित्यं दिवः

॥ ४.१७.१॥

.. iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

prajāpatirlokānabhyatapatteṣāṃ tapyamānānāgͫ

rasānprāvṛhadagniṃ pṛthivyā vāyumantarikṣātādityaṃ divaḥ

.. 4.17.1..



1. Prajāpati worshipped the worlds, and from those which he worshipped he was able to extract their essence. From earth he took fire, from the interspace he took air, and from heaven he took the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prajāpatiḥ lokān abhyatapat, Prajāpati worshipped the worlds; teṣām tapyamānānām, from those which were worshipped; rasān prāvṛhat, he extracted the essence; agnim pṛthivyāḥ, fire from the earth; vāyum antarikṣāt, air from the space between the earth and heaven; ādityam divaḥ, and the sun from heaven. Commentary:-The brahmā priest must observe silence to maintain the sanctity of the sacrifice he is performing. If the sanctity is lost, then the purpose of the sacrifice will be defeated. So if, for some reason or other, the sanctity is lost, due amends have to be made. One way to make amends is to seek the blessings of the lokas, the worlds. You pray to the worlds and then you are able to get their essence to support Your worship of the worlds is the amends you make, and the extracts you get in return are the blessings that protect you.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Pragâpati brooded over the worlds, and from them thus brooded on he squeezed out the essences, Agni (fire) from the earth, Vâyu (air) from the sky, Âditya (the sun) from heaven.


Sloka : 4.17.2

स एतास्तिस्रो देवता अभ्यतपत्तासां तप्यमानानाꣳ

रसान्प्रावृहदग्नेरृचो वायोर्यजूꣳषि सामान्यादित्यात्

॥ ४.१७.२॥

sa etāstisro devatā abhyatapattāsāṃ tapyamānānāgͫ

rasānprāvṛhadagnerṛco vāyoryajūgͫṣi sāmānyādityāt

.. 4.17.2..



2. Then he worshipped these three deities. From those which he worshipped he extracted the essence. He got the Ṛk mantras from fire, the Yajuḥ mantras from air, and the Sāma mantras from the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ etāḥ tisraḥ devatāḥ abhyatapat, [then] he worshipped these three deities [fire, air, and the sun]; tāsām tapyamānānām, from those which he worshipped; rasān prāvṛhat, he extracted the essence; agneḥ ṛcaḥ, the Ṛk mantras from fire; vāyoḥ yajūṃṣi, the Yajuḥ mantras from air; sāmāni ādityāt, the Sāma mantras from the sun. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He brooded over these three deities, and from them thus brooded on he squeezed out the essences, the Rik verses from Agni, the Yagus verses from Vâyu, the Sâman verses from Âditya.


Sloka : 4.17.3

स एतां त्रयीं विद्यामभ्यतपत्तस्यास्तप्यमानाया

रसान्प्रावृहद्भूरित्यृग्भ्यो भुवरिति यजुर्भ्यः स्वरिति

सामभ्यः ॥ ४.१७.३॥

sa etāṃ trayīṃ vidyāmabhyatapattasyāstapyamānāyā

rasānprāvṛhadbhūrityṛgbhyo bhuvariti yajurbhyaḥ svariti

sāmabhyaḥ .. 4.17.3..



3. Then Prajāpati worshipped these three Vedas. And from those Vedas that were worshipped he extracted the essence. From the Ṛg Veda he got ‘bhūḥ,’ from the Yajur Veda he got ‘bhuvaḥ,’ and from the Sāma Veda he got ‘svaḥ’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ etām trayīm vidyām abhyatapat, [then] he worshipped the knowledge from these three; tasyaḥ tapyamānāyāḥ, from these that he worshipped; rasān prāvṛhat, he extracted the essence; bhūḥ iti ṛgbhyaḥ, ‘bhūḥ’ from the Ṛg Veda; bhuvaḥ iti yajurbhyaḥ, ‘bhuvaḥ’ from the Yajur Veda; svaḥ iti sāmabhyaḥ, ‘svaḥ’ from the Sāma Veda. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He brooded over the threefold knowledge (the three Vedas), and from it thus brooded on he squeezed out the essences, the sacred interjection Bhûs from the Rik verses, the sacred interjection Bhuvas from the Yagus verses, the sacred interjection Svar from the Sâman verses.


Sloka : 4.17.4

तद्यदृक्तो रिष्येद्भूः स्वाहेति गार्हपत्ये जुहुयादृचामेव

तद्रसेनर्चां वीर्येणर्चां यज्ञस्य विरिष्टꣳ संदधाति

॥ ४.१७.४॥

tadyadṛkto riṣyedbhūḥ svāheti gārhapatye juhuyādṛcāmeva

tadrasenarcāṃ vīryeṇarcāṃ yajñasya viriṣṭagͫ saṃdadhāti

.. 4.17.4..



4. This is why, if it seems likely that there will be any harm done to the sacrifice because of a mistake in the Ṛk, the priest should offer oblations in the Gārhapatya fire saying, ‘Bhūḥ svāhā.’ Then, by the essence and strength of the Ṛk, any likely harm done to the sacrifice from a mistake in the Ṛk will be averted.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, that is why; yat ṛktaḥ riṣyet, if there should be any harm done [to the sacrifice] because of [a mistake] in the Ṛk; bhūḥ svāhā iti gārhapatye juhuyāt, then he should offer oblations in the Gārhapatya fire saying, ‘Bhūḥ svāhā’; ṛcām eva tat rasena, by that essence of the Ṛk; ṛcām vīryeṇa, by the strength of the Ṛk; ṛcām yajñasya viriṣṭam, the harm done to the sacrifice by the mistake in the Ṛk; sandadhāti, is averted. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. If the sacrifice is injured from the Rig-Veda side, let him offer a libation in the Gârhapatya fire, saying, Bhûh, Svâha! Thus does he bind together and heal, by means of the essence and the power of the Rik verses themselves, whatever break the Rik sacrifice may have suffered.


Sloka : 4.17.5

स यदि यजुष्टो रिष्येद्भुवः स्वाहेति दक्षिणाग्नौ

जुहुयाद्यजुषामेव तद्रसेन यजुषां वीर्येण यजुषां यज्ञस्य

विरिष्टꣳ संदधाति ॥ ४.१७.५॥

sa yadi yajuṣṭo riṣyedbhuvaḥ svāheti dakṣiṇāgnau

juhuyādyajuṣāmeva tadrasena yajuṣāṃ vīryeṇa yajuṣāṃ yajñasya

viriṣṭagͫ saṃdadhāti .. 4.17.5..



5. Then if it seems likely that there will be any harm done to the sacrifice because of a mistake in the Yajuḥ, the priest should offer oblations in the Dakṣiṇāgni fire saying, ‘Bhuvaḥ svāhā.’ Then, by the essence and strength of the Yajuḥ, any likely harm done to the sacrifice from a mistake in the Yajuḥ will be averted.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha yadi yajuṣṭaḥ riṣyet, then if there should be any harm done [to the sacrifice] because of [a mistake] in the Yajuḥ; bhuvaḥ svāhā iti dakṣiṇāgnau juhuyāt, then he should offer oblations in the Dakṣiṇāgni fire saying, ‘Bhuvaḥ svāhā’; yajuṣām eva tat rasena, by that essence of the Yajuḥ; yajuṣām vīryeṇa, by the strength of the Yajuḥ; yajuṣām yajñasya viriṣṭam, the harm done to the sacrifice by the mistake in the Yajuḥ; sandadhāti, is averted. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. If the sacrifice is injured from the Yagur-veda side, let him offer a libation in the Dakshina fire, saying, Bhuvah, Svâhâ! Thus does he bind together and heal, by means of the essence and the power of the Yagus verses themselves, whatever break the Yagus sacrifice may have suffered.


Sloka : 4.17.6

अथ यदि सामतो रिष्येत्स्वः स्वाहेत्याहवनीये

जुहुयात्साम्नामेव तद्रसेन साम्नां वीर्येण साम्नां यज्ञस्य

विरिष्टं संदधाति ॥ ४.१७.६॥

atha yadi sāmato riṣyetsvaḥ svāhetyāhavanīye

juhuyātsāmnāmeva tadrasena sāmnāṃ vīryeṇa sāmnāṃ yajñasya

viriṣṭaṃ saṃdadhāti .. 4.17.6..



6. Then if it seems likely that there will be any harm done to the sacrifice because of a mistake in the Sāma, the priest should offer oblations in the Āhavanīya fire saying, ‘svaḥ svāhā.’ Then, by the essence and strength of the Sāma, any likely harm done to the sacrifice from a mistake in the Sāma will be averted.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha yadi sāmataḥ riṣyet, then if there should be any harm done [to the sacrifice] because of [a mistake] in the Sāma; svaḥ svāhā iti āhavanīye juhuyāt, then he should offer oblations in the Āhavanīya fire saying, ‘svaḥ svāhā’; sāmnām eva tat rasena, by that essence of the Sāma; sāmnām vīṛyeṇa, by the strength of the Sāma; sāmnām yajñasya viriṣṭam, the harm done to the sacrifice by the mistake in the Sāma; sandadhāti, is averted. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. If the sacrifice is injured by the Sâma-veda side, let him offer a libation in the Âhavanîya fire, saying, Svah, Svâhâ! Thus does he bind together and heal, by means of the essence and the power of the Sâman verses themselves, whatever break the Sâman sacrifice may have suffered.


Sloka : 4.17.7

तद्यथा लवणेन सुवर्णꣳ संदध्यात्सुवर्णेन रजतꣳ

रजतेन त्रपु त्रपुणा सीसꣳ सीसेन लोहं लोहेन दारु

दारु चर्मणा ॥ ४.१७.७॥

tadyathā lavaṇena suvarṇagͫ saṃdadhyātsuvarṇena rajatagͫ

rajatena trapu trapuṇā sīsagͫ sīsena lohaṃ lohena dāru

dāru carmaṇā .. 4.17.7..



7. It is like joining gold with the help of borax, silver with the help of gold, tin with the help of silver, lead with the help of tin, iron with the help of lead, wood with the help of iron, and wood with the help of leather.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat yathā, it is like; lavaṇena, with the help of borax; suvarṇam sandadhyāt, one joins gold; suvarṇena rajatam, silver with the help of gold; rajatena trapu, tin with the help of silver; trapuṇā sīsam, lead with the help of tin; sīsena loham, iron with the help of lead; lohena dāru, wood with the help of iron; dāru carmaṇā, [and] wood with the help of leather. Commentary:-Two things can join together when the right combination of materials is used. In the same way, if there is

Translation By Max Müller

7. As one binds (softens) gold by means of lavan[1] (borax), and silver by means of gold, and tin by means of silver, and lead by means of tin, and iron (loha) by means of lead, and wood by means of iron, or also by means of leather,

Footnote:

1. Lavana, a kind of salt, explained by kshâra and taṅka or taṅkana. It is evidently borax, which is still imported from the East Indies under the name of tincal, and used as a flux in chemical processes.


Sloka : 4.17.8

एवमेषां लोकानामासां देवतानामस्यास्त्रय्या विद्याया

वीर्येण यज्ञस्य विरिष्टꣳ संदधाति भेषजकृतो ह वा

एष यज्ञो यत्रैवंविद्ब्रह्मा भवति ॥ ४.१७.८॥

evameṣāṃ lokānāmāsāṃ devatānāmasyāstrayyā vidyāyā

vīryeṇa yajñasya viriṣṭagͫ saṃdadhāti bheṣajakṛto ha vā

eṣa yajño yatraivaṃvidbrahmā bhavati .. 4.17.8..



8. Similarly, by the power of these worlds, these deities, and these three holy scriptures, any flaws in the sacrifice are made up. Where there is a knowledgeable brahmā priest, that sacrifice gets the right medicine.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Evam, in this way; vīryeṇa, by the strength; eṣām lokānām, of these worlds; āsām devatānām, of these deities; asyāḥ trayyāḥ vidyāyāḥ, of these three holy scriptures; yajñasya viriṣṭam sandadhāti, he [the brahmā priest] makes up for the flaws of a sacrifice; yatra evamvit brahmā bhavati, when there is a knowledgeable brahmā priest; eṣaḥ yajñaḥ, this sacrifice; bheṣajakṛtaḥ ha vai, gets the right medicine. Commentary:-When a person is sick he must take the appropriate medicine. Similar is the case of a sacrifice that has gotten off to a bad start. If the priest is a knowledgeable one, he will take the right steps to rectify the errors. Like a good doctor, he will apply the right medicine—that is, the combined powers of the worlds, the deities, and the scriptures.

Translation By Max Müller

8. Thus does one bind together and heal any break in the sacrifice by means of (the Vyâhritis or sacrificial interjections which are) the essence and strength of the three worlds, of the deities, and of the threefold knowledge. That sacrifice is healed [1] in which there is a Brahman priest who knows this.

Footnote:

1. Bheshagakrita, explained by bheshagena 'iva kritah samskritah, and also by kikitsakena susikshitena 'esha yagño bhavati,' which looks as if the commentator had taken it as a genitive of bheshagakrit.


Sloka : 4.17.9

एष ह वा उदक्प्रवणो यज्ञो यत्रैवंविद्ब्रह्मा भवत्येवंविदꣳ

ह वा एषा ब्रह्माणमनुगाथा यतो यत आवर्तते

तत्तद्गच्छति ॥ ४.१७.९॥

eṣa ha vā udakpravaṇo yajño yatraivaṃvidbrahmā bhavatyevaṃvidagͫ

ha vā eṣā brahmāṇamanugāthā yato yata āvartate

tattadgacchati .. 4.17.9..



9. That sacrifice which is directed by a capable brahmā priest leads to the uttarāyaṇa [the path of the gods]. There is a verse in praise of such a learned priest:- ‘Wherever the sacrifice goes wrong, this priest goes there to set things right’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Eṣaḥ ha vai yajñaḥ udakpravaṇaḥ, this sacrifice is the way to the uttarāyaṇa [the path of the gods]; yatra evamvit brahmā bhavati, where there is a knowledgeable brahmā priest; evam vidam ha vai eṣaḥ brahmāṇam anu gāthā, there is this praise for such a learned brahmā priest; yataḥ yataḥ āvartate, wherever there is a flaw [in the sacrifice]; tat tat gacchati, he [the brahmā priest] goes there [to make amends]. Commentary:-Whenever a sacrifice is to be held, a competent priest should be placed in charge. This will ensure A capable priest is always in demand wherever a sacrifice is being held, because, first, he can avoid mistakes, and second, should there be any mistake, in spite of all the care taken, the priest knows how to correct it.

Translation By Max Müller

9. That sacrifice is inclined towards the north (in the right way) in which there is a Brahman priest who knows this. And with regard to such a Brahman priest there is the following Gâthâ [1]:- 'Whereever it falls back, thither the man [2] goes,'--viz. the Brahman only, as one of the Ritvig priests.

Footnote:

1. This Gâthâ (or, according to Saṅkara, Anugâthâ) is probably a Gâyatrî, though Ânandagiri says that it is not in the Gâyatrî or any other definite metre. It may have been originally 'yato yata âvartate, tattad gakkhati mânavah, kurûn asvâbhirakshati.' This might be taken from an old epic ballad, 'Wherever the army fell back, thither the man went; the mare (mares being preferred to stallions in war) saves the Kurus.' That verse was applied to the Brahman priest succouring the sacrifice, whenever it seemed to waver, and protecting the Kurus, i. e. the performers of the sacrifice. 2. Mânava, explained from mauna, or manana, but possibly originally, a descendant of Manu.


Sloka : 4.17.10

मानवो ब्रह्मैवैक ऋत्विक्कुरूनश्वाभिरक्षत्येवंविद्ध

वै ब्रह्मा यज्ञं यजमानꣳ सर्वाꣳश्चर्त्विजोऽभिरक्षति

तस्मादेवंविदमेव ब्रह्माणं कुर्वीत नानेवंविदं नानेवंविदम्

॥ ४.१७.१०॥

mānavo brahmaivaika ṛtvikkurūnaśvābhirakṣatyevaṃviddha

vai brahmā yajñaṃ yajamānagͫ sarvāgͫścartvijo'bhirakṣati

tasmādevaṃvidameva brahmāṇaṃ kurvīta nānevaṃvidaṃ nānevaṃvidam

.. 4.17.10..



10. A good brahmā priest is one who is able to observe silence, or one who is thoughtful. Just as a horse protects the soldiers, a learned brahmā priest protects the sacrifice, the sacrifices, and all the other priests. Therefore, one should appoint only such a learned brahmā for one’s sacrifice. One should not appoint anyone else.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Mānavaḥ brahmā eva ekaḥ ṛtvik, a true brahmā priest is one who is thoughtful [or, is able to observe silence]; kurūn aśvā abhirakṣati, [just as] a horse protects the soldiers; evamvit ha vai brahmā, such a learned brahmā priest; yajñam yajamānam sarvān ca ṛtvijaḥ abhirakṣati, protects the sacrifice, the sacrificer, and all the other priests; tasmāt, therefore; evam vidam eva brahmāṇam kurvīta, one should appoint only such a learned brahmā priest; na anevam vidam, not one who is otherwise; na anevam vidam, not one who is otherwise. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi caturthaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the fourth chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad. Commentary:-When a priest is able to maintain silence and is by nature thoughtful, he may be appointed as the brahmā for a sacrifice. He is the chief priest by virtue of his scholarship and his character. The Upaniṣad compares him to a horse which protects his master when he is in trouble. A good brahmā priest can take care of the sacrifice, the sacrifices, and the subordinate priests. For this reason, only one who is qualified should be appointed. One who is not fit should not be given the honour.

Translation By Max Müller

10. 'He saves the Kurus as a mare' (viz. a Brahman priest who knows this, saves the sacrifice, the sacrificer, and all the other priests). Therefore let a man make him who knows this his Brahman priest, not one who does not know it, who does not know it.


Sloka : 5.1.1

॥ इति चतुर्थोऽध्यायः ॥

॥ पञ्चमोऽध्यायः ॥

यो ह वै ज्येष्ठं च श्रेष्ठं च वेद ज्येष्ठश्च ह वै श्रेष्ठश्च

भवति प्राणो वाव ज्येष्ठश्च श्रेष्ठश्च ॥ ५.१.१॥

.. iti caturtho'dhyāyaḥ ..

.. pañcamo'dhyāyaḥ ..

yo ha vai jyeṣṭhaṃ ca śreṣṭhaṃ ca veda jyeṣṭhaśca ha vai śreṣṭhaśca

bhavati prāṇo vāva jyeṣṭhaśca śreṣṭhaśca .. 5.1.1..



1. Om. He who knows the oldest and the best himself becomes the oldest and the best. It is prāṇa which is the oldest and the best.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ ha vai, he who; jyeṣṭham ca śreṣṭham ca veda, knows the oldest and the best; jyeṣṭhaḥ ca ha vai śreṣṭhaḥ ca bhavati, himself becomes the oldest and the best; prāṇaḥ vāva jyeṣṭhaḥ ca śreṣṭhaḥ ca, prāṇa is indeed the oldest and the best. Commentary:-The importance of prāṇa has been mentioned earlier. True, it works in conjunction with the organs of speaking, hearing, seeing, etc., but it is the first and foremost of all of them. Prāṇa is in a child even when it is still in it’s mother’s womb. It is active before the various organs are active. Prāṇa therefore commands respect from all. The reason why so much importance is given to prāṇa is to teach us to show respect where respect is due. We should respect both age and merit. Then we also shall command respect from all because of our age and merit. Indirectly, this is a hint that we should respect knowledge.

Translation By Max Müller

1. He who knows the oldest and the best becomes himself the oldest and the best. Breath indeed is the oldest and the best.


Sloka : 5.1.2

यो ह वै वसिष्ठं वेद वसिष्ठो ह स्वानां भवति

वाग्वाव वसिष्ठः ॥ ५.१.२॥

yo ha vai vasiṣṭhaṃ veda vasiṣṭho ha svānāṃ bhavati

vāgvāva vasiṣṭhaḥ .. 5.1.2..



2. He who knows that which is of high standing himself becomes of high standing among his own relatives. Eloquence gives one this high standing [in society].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ ha vai, he who; vasiṣṭham veda, knows that which is of high standing; vasiṣṭhaḥ ha svānām bhavati, becomes of high standing among his own relatives; vāk vāva vasiṣṭhaḥ, speech [i.e., eloquence] is surely of high standing [i.e., it is the secret of high standing]. Commentary:-If a person respects another for his power to influence others, he himself some day has the same power and commands respect from others. It is, in fact, the power of eloquence which is behind this influence.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He who knows the richest, becomes himself the richest. Speech indeed is the richest.


Sloka : 5.1.3

यो ह वै प्रतिष्ठां वेद प्रति ह तिष्ठत्यस्मिꣳश्च

लोकेऽमुष्मिꣳश्च चक्षुर्वाव प्रतिष्ठा ॥ ५.१.३॥

yo ha vai pratiṣṭhāṃ veda prati ha tiṣṭhatyasmigͫśca

loke'muṣmigͫśca cakṣurvāva pratiṣṭhā .. 5.1.3..



3. He who knows the support attains a support in this world and also in the other world [i.e., heaven]. The eye is indeed the support.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ ha vai, he who; pratiṣṭhām veda, knows the support; asmin ca loke, in this world; amuṣmin ca, and in the other [world]; pratitiṣṭhati, attains a support; cakṣuḥ vāva pratiṣṭhā, the eye is surely the support. Commentary:-Good sight is necessary for success in life. A sharp eye is not merely a physical asset; it is also a mental asset. It means a good and sharp sense of judgement. One can easily avoid the pitfalls of life, physical as well as moral, with good sight. Given this quality, you are safe in this world as well as in the other.

Translation By Max Müller

3. He who knows the firm rest, becomes himself firm in this world and in the next. The eye indeed is the firm rest.


Sloka : 5.1.4

यो ह वै सम्पदं वेद सꣳहास्मै कामाः पद्यन्ते

दैवाश्च मानुषाश्च श्रोत्रं वाव सम्पत् ॥ ५.१.४॥

yo ha vai sampadaṃ veda sagͫhāsmai kāmāḥ padyante

daivāśca mānuṣāśca śrotraṃ vāva sampat .. 5.1.4..



4. He who knows affluence has all things desired by human beings and gods come to him. Affluence is represented by the ears.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ ha vai, he who; sampadam veda, knows affluence; asmai, to him; kāmāḥ, desirable things; sam-padyante, come; daivāḥ ca, [things meant for] gods; mānuṣāḥ ca, and [things meant for] human beings; śrotram vāva sampat, the ears are surely affluence. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. He who knows success, his wishes succeed, both his divine and human wishes. The ear indeed is success.


Sloka : 5.1.5

यो ह वा आयतनं वेदायतनꣳ ह स्वानां भवति

मनो ह वा आयतनम् ॥ ५.१.५॥

yo ha vā āyatanaṃ vedāyatanagͫ ha svānāṃ bhavati

mano ha vā āyatanam .. 5.1.5..



5. He who knows the abode becomes the shelter of his family. The mind is the abode.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ ha vai, he who; āyatanam veda, knows the abode; āyatanam ha svānām bhavati, becomes the abode [i.e., shelter] of his family; manaḥ ha vai āyatanam, the mind is surely the abode. Commentary:-There is something in the body-mind complex of human beings called āyatana. If a person knows this ‘āyatana,’ it is to be understood that he is a wise person. And such a person is able to serve as an āyatana to his own relatives. That is to say, he is The mind is the āyatana of the body-mind complex. Why? Because the sense organs have their experiences, but all those experiences take shelter in the mind.

Translation By Max Müller

5. He who knows the home, becomes a home of his people. The mind indeed is the home.


Sloka : 5.1.6

अथ ह प्राणा अहꣳश्रेयसि व्यूदिरेऽहꣳश्रेयानस्म्यहꣳ

श्रेयानस्मीति ॥ ५.१.६॥

atha ha prāṇā ahagͫśreyasi vyūdire'hagͫśreyānasmyahagͫ

śreyānasmīti .. 5.1.6..



6. Once the sense organs began to quarrel among themselves, each one claiming it was supreme. They each said, ‘I am the best. I am the best’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha, once; prāṇāḥ, the sense organs; vyūdire, began to quarrel [among themselves]; aham-śreyasi, each thinking it was the best; aham śreyān asmi aham śreyān asmi iti, saying, ‘I am the best, I am the best.’ Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. The five senses quarrelled together [1], who was the best, saying, I am better, I am better.

Footnote:

1. The same fable, the prânasamvâda or prânavidyâ, is told in the Brihadâranyaka VI, 1, 1-14, the Aitareya Âr. II, 4, the Kaush. Up. III, 3, and the Prasna Up. II, 3. The last is the simplest version of all, but it does not follow therefore that it is the oldest. It would be difficult to find two fables apparently more alike, yet in reality differing from each other more characteristically than this fable and the fable told to the plebeians by Menenius Agrippa.


Sloka : 5.1.7

ते ह प्राणाः प्रजापतिं पितरमेत्योचुर्भगवन्को नः

श्रेष्ठ इति तान्होवाच यस्मिन्व उत्क्रान्ते शरीरं

पापिष्ठतरमिव दृश्येत स वः श्रेष्ठ इति ॥ ५.१.७॥

te ha prāṇāḥ prajāpatiṃ pitarametyocurbhagavanko naḥ

śreṣṭha iti tānhovāca yasminva utkrānte śarīraṃ

pāpiṣṭhataramiva dṛśyeta sa vaḥ śreṣṭha iti .. 5.1.7..



7. The organs then went to their father Prajāpati and said, ‘Revered sir, who among us is the best?’ He replied, ‘He is the best among you on whose departure the body becomes totally untouchable’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te ha prāṇāḥ, those organs; pitaram prajāpatim etya, coming to their father Prajāpati; ucuḥ, said; bhagavan, revered sir; naḥ, among us; kaḥ śreṣṭhaḥ iti, who is the best; tān ha uvāca, he said to them; vaḥ, among you; yasmin utkrānte, on whose leaving; śarīram pāpiṣṭhataram iva dṛśyeta, the body appears to be untouchable; saḥ vaḥ śreṣṭhaḥ, he is the best among you. Commentary:-We all know what happens when life leaves the body. It is not the same body. It shrinks. It becomes ugly. And soon it starts decomposing. No one wants to touch it. Prajāpati indirectly declared in this way that prāṇa was the best among them. When Prajāpati said this, he changed his voice lest he hurt the other organs. The way he changed his voice is called kaku.

Translation By Max Müller

7. They went to their father Pragâpati and said:- 'Sir, who is the best of us?' He replied:- 'He by whose departure the body seems worse than worst, he is the best of you.'


Sloka : 5.1.8

सा ह वागुच्चक्राम सा संवत्सरं प्रोष्य पर्येत्योवाच

कथमशकतर्ते मज्जीवितुमिति यथा कला अवदन्तः

प्राणन्तः प्राणेन पश्यन्तश्चक्षुषा श‍ृण्वन्तः श्रोत्रेण

ध्यायन्तो मनसैवमिति प्रविवेश ह वाक् ॥ ५.१.८॥

sā ha vāguccakrāma sā saṃvatsaraṃ proṣya paryetyovāca

kathamaśakatarte majjīvitumiti yathā kalā avadantaḥ

prāṇantaḥ prāṇena paśyantaścakṣuṣā śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa

dhyāyanto manasaivamiti praviveśa ha vāk .. 5.1.8..



8. First speech left the body. After staying away one whole year, he came back and asked the other organs, ‘How did you sustain yourselves in my absence?’ The rest of the organs said:- ‘Just as mute people do without speaking, but they are able to survive by breathing, and see with the eyes, hear with the ears, and think with the mind. We did the same.’ Hearing all this, speech re-entered the body.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sā ha vāk, that speech; ut-cakrāma, left [the body]; saṃvatsaram proṣya, after staying away one year; sā paretya uvāca, he came back and said; mat ṛte, in my absence; katham, how; jīvitum aśakata iti, did you manage to survive; yathā kalāḥ, [the other organs said:-] just as the mute; avadantaḥ, do not speak; praḥantaḥ prāṇena, [but] are able to survive with the help of prāṇa, the vital force; paśyantaḥ cakṣuṣā, to see with the help of the eyes; śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa, to hear with the help of the ears; dhyāyantaḥ manasā, to think with the help of the mind; evam iti, in the same way; vāk praviveśa ha, [hearing this] speech re-entered the body. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

8. The tongue (speech) departed, and having been absent for a year, it came round and said:- 'How have you been able to live without me?' They replied:- 'Like mute people, not speaking, but breathing with the breath, seeing with the eye, hearing with the ear, thinking with the mind. Thus we lived.' Then speech went back.


Sloka : 5.1.9

चक्षुर्होच्चक्राम तत्संवत्सरं प्रोष्य पर्येत्योवाच

कथमशकतर्ते मज्जीवितुमिति यथान्धा अपश्यन्तः

प्राणन्तः प्राणेन वदन्तो वाचा श‍ृण्वन्तः श्रोत्रेण

ध्यायन्तो मनसैवमिति प्रविवेश ह चक्षुः ॥ ५.१.९॥

cakṣurhoccakrāma tatsaṃvatsaraṃ proṣya paryetyovāca

kathamaśakatarte majjīvitumiti yathāndhā apaśyantaḥ

prāṇantaḥ prāṇena vadanto vācā śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa

dhyāyanto manasaivamiti praviveśa ha cakṣuḥ .. 5.1.9..



9. Next the organ of vision left the body. After staying away one whole year, it came back and asked the other organs, ‘How did you sustain yourselves in my absence?’ The rest of the organs said:- ‘Just as blind people do without seeing, but they are able to survive by breathing, and speak with the organ of speech, hear with the ears, and think with the mind. We did the same.’ Hearing all this, the organ of vision re-entered the. body.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Cakṣuḥ ha, the organ of vision; ut-cakrāma, left [the body]; saṃvatsaram proṣya, after staying away one year; tat paretya uvāca, it came back and said; mat ṛte, in my absence; katham, how; jīvitum aśakata iti, did you manage to survive; yathā andhāḥ, [the other organs said:-] just as the blind; apaśyantaḥ, do not see; prāṇantaḥ prāṇena, [but] are able to survive with the help of prāṇa, the vital force; vadantaḥ vācā, to speak with the help of the organ of speech; śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa, to hear with the help of the ears; dhyāyantaḥ manasā, to think with the help of the mind; evam iti, in the same way; cakṣuḥ praviveśa ha, [hearing this] the organ of vision re-entered the body. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

9. The eye (sight) departed, and having been absent for a year, it came round and said:- 'How have you been able to live without me?' They replied:- 'Like blind people, not seeing, but breathing with the breath, speaking with the tongue, hearing with the ear, thinking with the mind. Thus we lived.' Then the eye went back.


Sloka : 5.1.10

श्रोत्रꣳ होच्चक्राम तत्संवत्सरं प्रोष्य पर्येत्योवाच

कथमशकतर्ते मज्जीवितुमिति यथा बधिरा अश‍ृण्वन्तः

प्राणन्तः प्राणेन वदन्तो वाचा पश्यन्तश्चक्षुषा

ध्यायन्तो मनसैवमिति प्रविवेश ह श्रोत्रम् ॥ ५.१.१०॥

śrotragͫ hoccakrāma tatsaṃvatsaraṃ proṣya paryetyovāca

kathamaśakatarte majjīvitumiti yathā badhirā aśṛṇvantaḥ

prāṇantaḥ prāṇena vadanto vācā paśyantaścakṣuṣā

dhyāyanto manasaivamiti praviveśa ha śrotram .. 5.1.10..



10. Next the organ of hearing left the body. After staying away one whole year, it came back and asked the other organs, ‘How did you sustain yourselves in my absence?’ The rest of the organs said:- ‘Just as deaf people do without hearing, but they are able to survive by breathing, and speak with the organ of speech, see with the eyes, and think with the mind. We did the same.’ Hearing all this, the organ of hearing re-entered the body.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Śrotram ha, the organ of hearing; ut-cakrāma, left [the body]; saṃvatsaram proṣya, after staying away one year; tat paretya uvāca, it came back and said; mat ṛte, in my absence; katham, how; jīvitum aśakata iti, did you manage to survive; yathā badhirāḥ, [the other organs said:-] just as the deaf; aśṛṇvantaḥ, do not hear; prāṇantaḥ prāṇena, [but] are able to survive with the help of prāṇa, the vital force; vadantaḥ vācā, to speak with the help of the organ of speech; paśyantaḥ cakṣuṣā, to see with the help of the eyes; dhyāyantaḥ manasā, to think with the help of the mind; evam iti, in the same way; śrotram praviveśa ha, [hearing this] the organ of hearing re-entered the body. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

10. The ear (hearing) departed, and having been absent for a year, it came round and said:- 'How have you been able to live without me?' They replied:- 'Like deaf people, not hearing, but breathing with the breath, speaking with the tongue, thinking with the mind. Thus we lived.' Then the ear went back.


Sloka : 5.1.11

मनो होच्चक्राम तत्संवत्सरं प्रोष्य पर्येत्योवाच

कथमशकतर्ते मज्जीवितुमिति यथा बाला अमनसः

प्राणन्तः प्राणेन वदन्तो वाचा पश्यन्तश्चक्षुषा

श‍ृण्वन्तः श्रोत्रेणैवमिति प्रविवेश ह मनः ॥ ५.१.११॥

mano hoccakrāma tatsaṃvatsaraṃ proṣya paryetyovāca

kathamaśakatarte majjīvitumiti yathā bālā amanasaḥ

prāṇantaḥ prāṇena vadanto vācā paśyantaścakṣuṣā

śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇaivamiti praviveśa ha manaḥ .. 5.1.11..



11. Next the mind left the body. After staying away one whole year, he came back and asked the other organs, ‘How did you sustain yourselves in my absence?’ The rest of the organs said:- ‘Just as children do without thinking for themselves, but they are able to survive by breathing, and speak with the organ of speech, see with the eyes, and hear with the ears. We did the same.’ Hearing all this, the mind re-entered the body.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Manaḥ ha, the mind; ut-cakrāma, left [the body]; saṃvatsaram proṣya, after staying away one year; tat paretya uvāca, he came back and said; mat ṛte, in my absence; katham, how; jīvitum aśakata iti, did you manage to survive; yathā bālāḥ, [the other organs said:-] just as the children; amanasaḥ, do not receive much support from the mind; prāṇantaḥ prāṇena, [but] are able to survive with the help of prāṇa, the vital force; vadantaḥ vācā, to speak with the help of the organ of speech; paśyantaḥ cakṣuṣā, to see with the help of the eyes; śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa, to hear with the help of the ears; evam iti, in the same way; manaḥ praviveśa ha, [hearing this] the mind re-entered the body. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

11. The mind departed, and having been absent for a year, it came round and said:- 'How have you been able to live without me?' They replied:- 'Like children whose mind is not yet formed, but breathing with the breath, speaking with the tongue, seeing with the eye, hearing with the ear. Thus we lived.' Then the mind went back.


Sloka : 5.1.12

अथ ह प्राण उच्चिक्रमिषन्स यथा सुहयः

पड्वीशशङ्कून्संखिदेदेवमितरान्प्राणान्समखिदत्तꣳ

हाभिसमेत्योचुर्भगवन्नेधि त्वं नः श्रेष्ठोऽसि

मोत्क्रमीरिति ॥ ५.१.१२॥

atha ha prāṇa uccikramiṣansa yathā suhayaḥ

paḍvīśaśaṅkūnsaṃkhidedevamitarānprāṇānsamakhidattagͫ

hābhisametyocurbhagavannedhi tvaṃ naḥ śreṣṭho'si

motkramīriti .. 5.1.12..



12. Now prāṇa, the vital force, decided to leave. Just as a good horse is able to uproot the pegs to which its feet are tied, similarly, the chief prāṇa was about to carry the other organs away with him. Those other organs then came to him and with great humility said:- ‘O lord, be our leader. You are the greatest among us. Please don’t leave us’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha saḥ prāṇaḥ, now that prāṇa, the vital force; uccikramiṣan, wishing to go out; yathā, just as; suhayaḥ, a good horse; paḍvīśa-śaṅkūn, the pegs to which his feet are tied; saṃkhidet, uproots; evam, in the same way; itarān prāṇān, the other organs; samakhidat, began to leave with him; tam abhisametya, coming to him [with great humility]; ucuḥ ha, land] said; bhagavan, lord; edhi, be our leader; naḥ tvam śreṣṭhaḥ asi, you are the best among us; mā utkramīḥ iti, please do not leave us. Commentary:-The organs, beginning with vāk (speech), left the body one after another. But that made little or no difference to the body or to the rest of the organs. Then prāṇa decided to leave. Just as he started to go, all the other organs felt that they were being forced to leave also. They realized then that they were not free; they were utterly dependent on the chief prāṇa. Coming to him, they showed him respect and said that they now recognized his superiority.

Translation By Max Müller

12. The breath, when on the point of departing, tore up the other senses, as a horse, going to start, might tear up the pegs to which he is tethered [1]. They came to him and said:- 'Sir, be thou (our lord); thou art the best among us. Do not depart from us!'

Footnote:

1.


Sloka : 5.1.13

अथ हैनं वागुवाच यदहं वसिष्ठोऽस्मि त्वं

तद्वसिष्ठोऽसीत्यथ हैनं चक्षुरुवाच यदहं

प्रतिष्ठास्मि त्वं तत्प्रतिष्ठासीति ॥ ५.१.१३॥

atha hainaṃ vāguvāca yadahaṃ vasiṣṭho'smi tvaṃ

tadvasiṣṭho'sītyatha hainaṃ cakṣuruvāca yadahaṃ

pratiṣṭhāsmi tvaṃ tatpratiṣṭhāsīti .. 5.1.13..



13. The organ of speech then said to the chief prāṇa, ‘If I have the quality of high standing, it is because you have that quality.’ Next the organ of vision said to him, ‘True, I have the quality of supporting others, but I owe that quality to you’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha enam vāk uvāca, next vāk [speech] said to him [i.e., to prāṇa]; yat aham vasiṣṭhaḥ asmi, I am as much endowed with [the quality of] high standing; tat tvani vasiṣṭhaḥ asi iti, as you are endowed with [the quality of] high standing; atha ha enam cakṣuḥ uvāca, next the organ of vision said to him; yat aham pratiṣṭhā asmi, I am as much endowed with [the quality of] support; tat tvam pratiṣṭhā asi iti, as you are a support. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

13. Then the tongue said to him:- 'If I am the richest, thou art the richest.' The eye said to him:- 'If I am the firm rest, thou art the firm rest [1].'

Footnote:

1.


Sloka : 5.1.14

अथ हैनꣳश्रोत्रमुवाच यदहं सम्पदस्मि त्वं

तत्सम्पदसीत्यथ हैनं मन उवाच यदहमायतनमस्मि

त्वं तदायतनमसीति ॥ ५.१.१४॥

atha hainagͫśrotramuvāca yadahaṃ sampadasmi tvaṃ

tatsampadasītyatha hainaṃ mana uvāca yadahamāyatanamasmi

tvaṃ tadāyatanamasīti .. 5.1.14..



14. The organ of hearing then said to the chief prāṇa, ‘If I have the quality of affluence, it is because you have that quality.’ Next the mind said to him, ‘True, I have the quality of being a shelter to many, but that quality is, in fact, yours’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha enam śrotram uvāca, next the organ of hearing said to him [i.e., to prāṇa]; yat aham sampat asmi, I am as much endowed with [the quality of] affluence; tat tvam sampat asi iti, as you are endowed with [the quality of] affluence; atha ha enam manaḥ uvāca, next the mind said to him; yat aham āyatanam asmi, I am as much endowed with [the quality of] a shelter; tat tvam āyatanam asi iti, as you are a shelter. Commentary:-Tenants may go to their landlord and say many things to please him and exhibit their loyalty. Like that, the various sense organs which had earlier fought among themselves, each claiming superiority, are now, with great humility, declaring that they have nothing of their own—that whatever good qualities they have they owe to their master, the chief prāṇa.

Translation By Max Müller

14. The ear said to him:- 'If I am success, thou art success.' The mind said to him:- 'If I am the home, thou art the home.'


Sloka : 5.1.15

न वै वाचो न चक्षूꣳषि न श्रोत्राणि न

मनाꣳसीत्याचक्षते प्राणा इत्येवाचक्षते प्राणो

ह्येवैतानि सर्वाणि भवति ॥ ५.१.१५॥

na vai vāco na cakṣūgͫṣi na śrotrāṇi na

manāgͫsītyācakṣate prāṇā ityevācakṣate prāṇo

hyevaitāni sarvāṇi bhavati .. 5.1.15..



15. Scholars do not call them organs of speech, eyes, ears, or minds. They call them ‘prāṇas,’ for prāṇa has become all these organs.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Na vai vācaḥ, not organs of speech; na cakṣūṃṣi, not eyes; na śrotrāṇi, not ears; na manāṃsi, not minds; iti eva ācakṣate, they say; prāṇāḥ iti eva ācakṣate, they say the prāṇas; hi, for; prāṇaḥ bhavati, prāṇa has become; etāni sarvāṇi, all these. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section. Commentary:-The Self is the source of everything that exists, living or non-living. The Self manifests itself in many forms—as human beings, animals, plants, etc. And it is because of the Self that we live, speak, and act. Human beings have two sets of organs—organs of perception and organs of action. We also have a mind. These organs are powerful, but the most powerful is the mind. Yet none of these organs is independent. Each one exists and functions only to serve the Self, the master. The Self is within the body as well as without. Within the body it is the Ātman, which functions through prāṇa, the vital breath. As prāṇa, it animates the body and all the organs. Without prāṇa, the body with all its organs is dead, useless.

Translation By Max Müller

15. And people do not call them, the tongues, the eyes, the ears, the minds, but the breaths (prâna, the senses). For breath are all these.


Sloka : 5.2.1

॥ इति प्रथमः खण्डः ॥

स होवाच किं मेऽन्नं भविष्यतीति यत्किंचिदिदमा

श्वभ्य आ शकुनिभ्य इति होचुस्तद्वा एतदनस्यान्नमनो

ह वै नाम प्रत्यक्षं न ह वा एवंविदि किंचनानन्नं

भवतीति ॥ ५.२.१॥

.. iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

sa hovāca kiṃ me'nnaṃ bhaviṣyatīti yatkiṃcididamā

śvabhya ā śakunibhya iti hocustadvā etadanasyānnamano

ha vai nāma pratyakṣaṃ na ha vā evaṃvidi kiṃcanānannaṃ

bhavatīti .. 5.2.1..



1. Prāṇa then asked, ‘What will be my food?’ The other organs said:- ‘Anything that even dogs, birds, and other animals can eat in this world is your food.’ All that is food for ana. Ana is a name of prāṇa. For one who knows this nothing is uneatable. [That is, he can eat any food that an animal can eat.]





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ ha uvāca, he [prāṇa] asked; kim me annam bhaviṣyati iti, what will be my food; iti ucuḥ ha, [the other organs] replied; ā-śvabhyaḥ ā-śakunibhyaḥ, for dogs as well as birds; yat idam kiñcit, whatever there is; tat vai, all that; etat anasya annam, is this food for prāṇa; anaḥ ha vai nāma pratyakṣam, ‘ana’ is the name of prāṇa itself; ha vai evam vidi, for one who knows thus; kiñcana na anannam bhavati iti, nothing becomes uneatable [i.e., anything an animal can eat is food for him]. Commentary:-There is some difference between the words prāṇa and ana. Prāṇa has a limited meaning. It refers to something characterized by breathing. It breathes, and in order to keep breathing it needs food. It may be a specific kind of food. It may not eat every kind of food. Ana, however, is that which can eat any kind of food. The Bṛhadāraṇyaka Upaniṣad (1.5.23) says, ‘The sun rises and sets in prāṇa.’ It also says that the person who knows the true nature of prāṇa is one from whom the sun rises and into whom it sets.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Breath said:- 'What shall be my food?' They answered:- 'Whatever there is, even unto dogs and birds.' Therefore this is food for Ana (the breather). His name is clearly Ana [1]. To him who knows this there is nothing that is not (proper) food.

Footnote:

1. Ana, breather, more general than pra-ana = prâna, forth-breather, and the other more specified names of breath.


Sloka : 5.2.2

स होवाच किं मे वासो भविष्यतीत्याप इति

होचुस्तस्माद्वा एतदशिष्यन्तः

पुरस्ताच्चोपरिष्टाच्चाद्भिः परिदधति

लम्भुको ह वासो भवत्यनग्नो ह भवति ॥ ५.२.२॥

sa hovāca kiṃ me vāso bhaviṣyatītyāpa iti

hocustasmādvā etadaśiṣyantaḥ

purastāccopariṣṭāccādbhiḥ paridadhati

lambhuko ha vāso bhavatyanagno ha bhavati .. 5.2.2..



2. Prāṇa asked, ‘What will be my covering?’ The organs replied, ‘Water.’ This is why, before and after eating their meals, people cover him with water [i.e., they sip water]. He then becomes covered with a cloth and is no longer naked.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ ha uvāca, he [prāṇa] said; kim me vāsaḥ bhaviṣyati iti, what will be my covering; āpaḥ iti ha ucuḥ, [the other organs] replied, ‘Water’; tasmāt, that is why; vai aśiṣyantaḥ purastāt ca, people before eating; upariṣṭāt ca, and after [eating]; etat adbhiḥ paridadhati, cover him [prāṇa] with water [i.e., they sip water]; lambhukaḥ ha vāsaḥ bhavati, thereby he becomes covered with a cloth; anagnaḥ ha bhavati, he is no longer naked. Commentary:-The water that is sipped before the meal is said to be the lower cloth, and that which is sipped afterwards is said to be the upper cloth.

Translation By Max Müller

2. He said:- 'What shall be my dress?' They answered:- 'Water.' Therefore wise people, when they are going to eat food, surround their food before and after with water [1].' He (prâna) thus gains a dress, and is no longer naked [2]'.

Footnote:

1. They rinse the mouth before and after every meal. 2. We expect, 'He who knows this' instead of prâna, but as prâna may apply to every individual prâna, the usual finishing sentence was possibly dropt on purpose.


Sloka : 5.2.3

तद्धैतत्सत्यकामो जाबालो गोश्रुतये वैयाघ्रपद्यायोक्त्वोवाच

यद्यप्येनच्छुष्काय स्थाणवे ब्रूयाज्जायेरन्नेवास्मिञ्छाखाः

प्ररोहेयुः पलाशानीति ॥ ५.२.३॥

taddhaitatsatyakāmo jābālo gośrutaye vaiyāghrapadyāyoktvovāca

yadyapyenacchuṣkāya sthāṇave brūyājjāyerannevāsmiñchākhāḥ

praroheyuḥ palāśānīti .. 5.2.3..



3. Having told this to Vyāghrapada’s son Gośruti, Satyakāma Jābāla said, ‘If a person tells this even to a dry stump [of a tree], branches and leaves will grow off it’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat ha etat, this [teaching]; satyakāmaḥ jābālaḥ, Satyakāma Jābāla; gośrutaye vaiyāhrapadyāya uktva, saying to Vyāghrapada’s son Gośruti; uvāca, he said; yadi api, even if; etat, this [teaching]; śuṣkāya athāṇave brūyāt, a person gives to a dry stump; śākhāḥ praroheyuḥ palāśān, branches and leaves; jāyeran eva asmin, will grow off it. Commentary:-This verse is meant to praise the philosophy of prāṇa. Teaching this philosophy to Gośruti, the son of Vyāghrapada, Satyakāma said that this teaching is capable of restoring life to a dead tree. Even if there is only a dry stump of a tree, leaves and branches will begin to sprout from it on hearing this teaching. Imagine then what effect it will produce if it is taught to a living human being.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Satyakâma Gâbâla, after he had communicated this to Gosruti Vaiyâghrapadya, said to him:- 'If you were to tell this to a dry stick, branches would grow, and leaves spring from it.'

________________


Sloka : 5.2.4

अथ यदि महज्जिगमिषेदमावास्यायां दीक्षित्वा पौर्णमास्याꣳ

रात्रौ सर्वौषधस्य मन्थं दधिमधुनोरुपमथ्य ज्येष्ठाय

श्रेष्ठाय स्वाहेत्यग्नावाज्यस्य हुत्वा मन्थे

सम्पातमवनयेत् ॥ ५.२.४॥

atha yadi mahajjigamiṣedamāvāsyāyāṃ dīkṣitvā paurṇamāsyāgͫ

rātrau sarvauṣadhasya manthaṃ dadhimadhunorupamathya jyeṣṭhāya

śreṣṭhāya svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā manthe

sampātamavanayet .. 5.2.4..



4. Then if anyone wishes to attain greatness, he should first become initiated on a new moon day, and after that, on the night of a full moon, he should prepare a paste of various herbs and mix them together with curd and honey. He should then offer this oblation to the fire saying, ‘Jyeṣṭhāya śreṣṭhāya svāhā,’ [i.e., Svāhā to the oldest and to the best]. Whatever is left over in the offering spoon he should put into the homa pot.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha yadi, then if; mahat jigamiṣet, a person wants to attain greatness; amāvāsyāyām dīkṣitvā, having been initiated on the day of a new moon; paurṇamāsyām rātrau, on the night of the full moon; sarvauṣadhyasya mantham, a paste of various herbs; dadhi-madhunoḥ upamathya, [and] mixing with curd and honey; jyeṣṭhāya śreṣṭhāya svāhā iti, say ‘Svāhā to the oldest and the best’; agnau ājyasya hutvā, offer this as oblations to the fire; manthe sampātam avanayet, put the residue from the offering spoon in the pot. Commentary:-If a person wants to attain greatness, it should not be for worldly gain, but for his spiritual benefit. Here, some instructions are given concerning the sacrifices he should perform. Prior to those sacrifices, however, he should practise strict self-control for some time. This whole discipline is intended to take him to a higher world after death, but the over-all result is that he becomes a better person spiritually.

Translation By Max Müller

4. If [1] a man wishes to reach greatness, let him perform the Dîkshâ [2] (preparatory rite) on the day of the new moon, and then, on the night of the full moon, let him stir a mash of all kinds of herbs with curds and honey, and let him pour ghee on the fire (âvasathya laukika), saying; 'Svâhâ to the oldest and the best.' After that let him throw all that remains (of the ghee) [3] into the mash.

Footnote:

1. The oblation here described is called mantha, a mortar, or what is pounded in a mortar, i. e. barley stirred in some kind of gravy. See Gaim. N. M. V. P. 406. 2. Not the real dîkshâ, which is a preparatory rite for great sacrifices, but penance, truthfulness, abstinence, which take the place of dîkshâ with those who live in the forest and devote themselves to upâsana, meditative worship. 3. What is here called sampâtam avanayati is the same as samsravam avanayati in the Brih. Âr. VI, 3, 2. The commentator says:- Sruvâvalepanam âgyam mantham samsrâvayati.


Sloka : 5.2.5

वसिष्ठाय स्वाहेत्यग्नावाज्यस्य हुत्वा मन्थे

सम्पातमवनयेत्प्रतिष्ठायै स्वाहेत्यग्नावाज्यस्य हुत्वा

मन्थे सम्पातमवनयेत्सम्पदे स्वाहेत्यग्नावाज्यस्य हुत्वा

मन्थे सम्पातमवनयेदायतनाय स्वाहेत्यग्नावाज्यस्य हुत्वा

मन्थे सम्पातमवनयेत् ॥ ५.२.५॥

vasiṣṭhāya svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā manthe

sampātamavanayetpratiṣṭhāyai svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā

manthe sampātamavanayetsampade svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā

manthe sampātamavanayedāyatanāya svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā

manthe sampātamavanayet .. 5.2.5..



5. Saying, ‘Vasiṣṭhāya svāhā’ [i.e., svāhā to high standing], one should offer the oblation to the fire and then put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot. Saying, ‘Pratiṣṭhāyai svāhā’ [i.e., svāhā to the support], one should offer the oblation to the fire and then put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot. Saying, ‘Sampade svāhā’ [i.e., svāhā to affluence], one should offer the oblation to the fire and then put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot. Saying, ‘Āyatanāya svāhā’ [i.e., svāhā to the abode], one should offer the oblation to the fire and then put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vasiṣṭhāya svāhā iti, saying ‘Vasiṣṭhāya svāhā’ [i.e., Svāhā to high standing]; agnau ājyasya hutvā, one should offer the oblation to the fire; manthe sampātam avanayet, and put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot; pratiṣṭhāyai svāhā iti, saying ‘Pratiṣṭhāyai svāhā’ [i.e., Svāhā to the support]; agnau ājyasya hutvā, one should offer the oblation to the fire; manthe sampātam avanayet, and put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot; sampade svāhā iti, saying ‘Sampade svāhā’ [i.e., Svāhā to affluence]; agnau ājyasya hutvā, one should offer the oblation to the fire; manthe sampātam avanayet, and put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot; āyatanāya svāhā iti, saying ‘Āyatanāya svāhā’ [i.e., Svāhā to the abode]; agnau ājyasya hutvā, one should offer the oblation to the fire; manthe sampātam avanayet, and put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. In the same manner let him pour ghee on. the fire, saying, 'Svâhâ to the richest.' After that let him throw all that remains together into the mash. In the same manner let him pour ghee on the fire, saying, 'Svâhâ to the firm rest.' After that let him throw all that remains together into the mash. In the same manner let him pour ghee on the fire, saying, 'Svâhâ to success.' After that let him throw all that remains together into the mash.


Sloka : 5.2.6

अथ प्रतिसृप्याञ्जलौ मन्थमाधाय जपत्यमो नामास्यमा

हि ते सर्वमिदꣳ स हि ज्येष्ठः श्रेष्ठो राजाधिपतिः

स मा ज्यैष्ठ्यꣳ श्रैष्ठ्यꣳ राज्यमाधिपत्यं

गमयत्वहमेवेदꣳ सर्वमसानीति ॥ ५.२.६॥

atha pratisṛpyāñjalau manthamādhāya japatyamo nāmāsyamā

hi te sarvamidagͫ sa hi jyeṣṭhaḥ śreṣṭho rājādhipatiḥ

sa mā jyaiṣṭhyagͫ śraiṣṭhyagͫ rājyamādhipatyaṃ

gamayatvahamevedagͫ sarvamasānīti .. 5.2.6..



6. Then, moving some distance from the fire and holding the homa pot in his hands, he keeps repeating the mantra:- ‘You are named ama, because all this rests on you. You are the first, the best, outstanding, and supreme. May I also be the first, the best, outstanding, and supreme. May I be all all this.’





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; pratisṛpya, moving away [from the fire]; añjalau mantham ādhāya, holding the homa pot in his hands; japati, he keeps repeating; amaḥ nāma asi, you are named ‘ama’; amā hi te, because on you [as prāṇa]; sarvam idam, all this [rests]; saḥ hi jyeṣṭhaḥ śreṣṭhaḥ, he [i.e., prāṇa, called here ‘ama’] is the oldest and the best; rājā, princely; adhipatiḥ, supreme; saḥ, that [prāṇa]; mā gamayatu, make me; jyaiṣṭhyam śraiṣṭhyam rājyam ādhipatyam, the first, the best, outstanding, and supreme; aham eva idam sarvam asāni iti, may I be all this. Commentary:-According to Śaṅkara, ama is another name for prāṇa. The whole world rests on prāṇa. This is why prāṇa is also called ama (all). Prāṇa is the best and the highest. Prāṇa is this world.

Translation By Max Müller

6. Then going forward and placing the mash in his hands, he recites:- 'Thou (Prâna) art Ama [1] by name, for all this together exists in thee. He is the oldest and best, the king, the sovereign May he make me the oldest, the best, the king, the sovereign. May I be all this.'

Footnote:

1. Cf. Brih. Âr. I, 1, 3, 22.


Sloka : 5.2.7

अथ खल्वेतयर्चा पच्छ आचामति तत्सवितुर्वृणीमह

इत्याचामति वयं देवस्य भोजनमित्याचामति श्रेष्ठꣳ

सर्वधातममित्याचामति तुरं भगस्य धीमहीति सर्वं पिबति

निर्णिज्य कꣳसं चमसं वा पश्चादग्नेः संविशति चर्मणि वा

स्थण्डिले वा वाचंयमोऽप्रसाहः स यदि स्त्रियं

पश्येत्समृद्धं कर्मेति विद्यात् ॥ ५.२.७॥

atha khalvetayarcā paccha ācāmati tatsaviturvṛṇīmaha

ityācāmati vayaṃ devasya bhojanamityācāmati śreṣṭhagͫ

sarvadhātamamityācāmati turaṃ bhagasya dhīmahīti sarvaṃ pibati

nirṇijya kagͫsaṃ camasaṃ vā paścādagneḥ saṃviśati carmaṇi vā

sthaṇḍile vā vācaṃyamo'prasāhaḥ sa yadi striyaṃ

paśyetsamṛddhaṃ karmeti vidyāt .. 5.2.7..



7. Then, while saying this Ṛk mantra foot by foot, he eats some of what is in the homa pot. He says, ‘We pray for that food of the shining deity,’ and then eats a little of what is in the homa pot. Saying, ‘We eat the food of that deity,’ he eats a little of what is in the homa pot. Saying, ‘It is the best and the support of all,’ he eats a little of what is in the homa pot. Saying, ‘We quickly meditate on Bhaga,’ he eats the rest and washes the vessel or spoon. Then, with his speech and mind under control, he lies down behind the fire, either on the skin of an animal or directly on the sacrificial ground. If he sees a woman in his dream, he knows that the rite has been successful [and that he will succeed in whatever he does].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha khalu etayā ṛcā, then while [saying] this Ṛk mantra; pacchaḥ foot by foot; ācāmati, he eats a little [of what is in the homa pot]; tat savituḥ vṛṇīmahe, we pray for that [food] of the shining deity; iti ācāmati, saying this he eats a little [of what is in the homa pot]; vayam devasya bhojanam, we eat the food of the deity; iti ācāmati, saying this he eats a little [of what is in the homa pot]; śreṣṭham sarvadhātamam, it is the best and the support of all; iti ācāmati, saying this he eats a little [of what is in the homa pot]; turam, quickly; bhagasya dhīmahi, we meditate on Bhaga; iti sarvam pibati, saying this he drinks the rest; nirṇijya kaṃsam, [and] washing the vessel [i.e., the homa pot]; vā camasam, or spoon; aprasāhaḥ, with his mind under control; vācaṃyamaḥ, [and] his speech under control; agneḥ paścāt, behind the fire; carmaṇi vā sthaṇḍile vā, on the skin of an animal or directly on the sacrificial ground; saṃviśati, he sleeps; saḥ yadi, if he; striyam paśyet, sees a woman [in his dream]; karma samṛddham, the sacrificial rite is successful; iti vidyāt, he knows that. Commentary:-While eating, the sacrificer should repeat the appropriate mantra. That is, he should eat a little and then repeat one foot of the Ṛk mantra; then eat a little more and repeat another foot, and so on. What is this mantra? It is a prayer to Savitā, the sun god. If you repeat this prayer with the appropriate rite, you will become as bright and pure as the sun.

Translation By Max Müller

7. Then he eats with the following Rik verse at every foot:- 'We choose that food'--here he swallows--'Of the divine Savitri (prâna)'--here he swallows--'The best and all-supporting food'--here he swallows--'We meditate on the speed of Bhaga (Savitri, prâna)'--here he drinks all.


Sloka : 5.2.8

तदेष श्लोको यदा कर्मसु काम्येषु स्त्रियꣳ स्वप्नेषु

पश्यन्ति समृद्धिं तत्र जानीयात्तस्मिन्स्वप्ननिदर्शने

तस्मिन्स्वप्ननिदर्शने ॥ ५.२.८॥

tadeṣa śloko yadā karmasu kāmyeṣu striyagͫ svapneṣu

paśyanti samṛddhiṃ tatra jānīyāttasminsvapnanidarśane

tasminsvapnanidarśane .. 5.2.8..



8. Here is a verse in this connection:- When one sees a woman in a dream while performing a rite for the fulfillment of a desire, that means it is successful. One can know this from the dream.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject; yadā, when; karmasu kāmyeṣu, in a rite for fulfilling a desire; striyam svapneṣu paśyati, one sees a woman in a dream; samṛddhim tatra, there is success; jānīyāt tasmin svapnanidarśane tasmin svapnanidarśane, one knows from seeing this in a dream, from seeing this in a dream. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

8. Having cleansed the vessel, whether it be a kamsa or a kamasa, he sits down behind the fire on a skin or on the bare ground, without speaking or making any other effort. If in his dream he sees a woman, let him know this to be a sign that his sacrifice has succeeded.


Sloka : 5.3.1

॥ इति द्वितीयः खण्डः ॥

श्वेतकेतुर्हारुणेयः पञ्चालानाꣳ समितिमेयाय

तꣳ ह प्रवाहणो जैवलिरुवाच कुमारानु

त्वाशिषत्पितेत्यनु हि भगव इति ॥ ५.३.१॥

.. iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

śvetaketurhāruṇeyaḥ pañcālānāgͫ samitimeyāya

tagͫ ha pravāhaṇo jaivaliruvāca kumārānu

tvāśiṣatpitetyanu hi bhagava iti .. 5.3.1..



1. Once Śvetaketu, the grandson of Aruṇa, went to the court of the Pañcālas. Pravāhaṇa, the son of Jīvala, asked him, ‘Young man, did your father teach you?’ [Śvetaketu replied:-] ‘Yes, revered sir, he did’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Śvetaketuḥ āruṇeyaḥ ha, once Śvetaketu, the grandson of Aruṇa; pañcālānām samitim eyāya, went to the court of the Pañcālas; tam ha, to him; pravāhaṇaḥ jaivaliḥ uvāca, Pravāhaṇa, the son of Jīvala, said; kumāra, young man; tvā pitā anu-aśiṣat iti, did your father teach you; bhagavaḥ anu hi iti, yes, revered sir, he did. Commentary:-Those who want liberation should have a strong spirit of renunciation, and they should know the nature of everything, from Brahmā to a blade of grass. Earlier there was a discussion on prāṇa. Now a discussion on agni, fire, begins. The story of Śvetaketu and his father is being introduced here for that purpose.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Svetaketu Âruneya went to an assembly [1] of the Pañkâlas. Pravâhana Gaivali [2] said to him:- 'Boy, has your father instructed you?' 'Yes, Sir,' he replied.

Footnote:

1. Samiti, or parishad, as in the Brih. Âr. 2. He is the same Kshatriya sage who appeared in I, 8, 1, silencing the Brâhmans.


Sloka : 5.3.2

वेत्थ यदितोऽधि प्रजाः प्रयन्तीति न भगव इति वेत्थ

यथा पुनरावर्तन्त३ इति न भगव इति वेत्थ

पथोर्देवयानस्य पितृयाणस्य च व्यावर्तना३ इति

न भगव इति ॥ ५.३.२॥

vettha yadito'dhi prajāḥ prayantīti na bhagava iti vettha

yathā punarāvartanta3 iti na bhagava iti vettha

pathordevayānasya pitṛyāṇasya ca vyāvartanā3 iti

na bhagava iti .. 5.3.2..



2. [Pravāhaṇa asked,] ‘Do you have any idea where, from this world, human beings go in heaven?’ ‘No, sir, I have no idea,’ [replied Śvetaketu]. ‘Do you know how they come back?’ ‘No, sir, I don’t.’ ‘Have you any idea where the two paths—the path of the gods and the path of the ancestors—part?’ ‘No, sir, I don’t know’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vettha, do you know; yat, where; itaḥ, from this place; adhi, high up; prajāḥ, living beings; prayanti iti, go; na bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir, I don’t; vettha, do you know; yathā, the way; punaḥ āvartante iti, they come back; na bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir, I don’t; vettha, do you know; pathoḥ, of the two paths; devayānasya, the path of the gods; pitṛyāṇasya ca, and the path of the ancestors; vyāvartanā iti, where they part; na bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir, I don’t. Commentary:-The path of the gods and the path of the manes both go the same way for some distance. They separate only towards the end. Śvetaketu did not know at what point they separate, nor did he know what path those who are reborn take while coming back to the earth.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'Do you know to what place men go from here?' 'No, Sir,' he replied. 'Do you know how they return again?' 'No Sir,' he replied. 'Do you know where the path of Devas and the path of the fathers diverge?' 'No, Sir,' he replied.


Sloka : 5.3.3

वेत्थ यथासौ लोको न सम्पूर्यत३ इति न भगव इति

वेत्थ यथा पञ्चम्यामाहुतावापः पुरुषवचसो

भवन्तीति नैव भगव इति ॥ ५.३.३ ॥

vettha yathāsau loko na sampūryata3 iti na bhagava iti

vettha yathā pañcamyāmāhutāvāpaḥ puruṣavacaso

bhavantīti naiva bhagava iti .. 5.3.3 ..



3. [Pravāhaṇa asked,] ‘Do you know why the other world [the world of the moon] is not filled with people?’ [Śvetaketu replied,] ‘No, revered sir, I don’t know.’ ‘Do you know why after the fifth oblation water comes to be called “puruṣa” [man]?’ ‘No, sir, I don’t know’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vettha yathā, do you know why; asau lokaḥ, that world [i.e., the world of the moon]; na sampūryate iti, is not filled up; na bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir; vettha yathā, do you know why; pañcamyām āhutau, after the fifth oblation; āpaḥ puruṣavacasaḥ bhavanti iti, water becomes known as ‘man’; na eva bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir, I don’t. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'Do you know why that world [1] never becomes full?' 'No, Sir,' he replied. 'Do you know why in the fifth libation water is called Man [2]? No, Sir,' he replied.

Footnote:

1. That of the fathers. Comm. 2. Or, according to others, why the water has a human voice; purushavâkah in Brih. Âr. XIV, 9, 3.


Sloka : 5.3.4

अथानु किमनुशिष्ठोऽवोचथा यो हीमानि न

विद्यात्कथꣳ सोऽनुशिष्टो ब्रुवीतेति स हायस्तः

पितुरर्धमेयाय तꣳ होवाचाननुशिष्य वाव किल मा

भगवानब्रवीदनु त्वाशिषमिति ॥ ५.३.४ ॥

athānu kimanuśiṣṭho'vocathā yo hīmāni na

vidyātkathagͫ so'nuśiṣṭo bruvīteti sa hāyastaḥ

piturardhameyāya tagͫ hovācānanuśiṣya vāva kila mā

bhagavānabravīdanu tvāśiṣamiti .. 5.3.4 ..



4. [Pravāhaṇa said:-] ‘Why did you say then, “I have been taught”? How can one who does not know these things say, “I have been taught”?’ Śvetaketu was hurt. He went back to his father and said, ‘You have not really taught ṃe, yet you said, “I have taught you.”’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha kim anuśiṣṭaḥ anu avocathāḥ, then why did you say, ‘I have been taught’; yaḥ hi imāni na vidyāt, for he who does not know these things; katham saḥ anuśiṣṭaḥ bruvīta iti, how can he say ‘I have been taught’; saḥ, he [Śvetaketu]; ha āyastaḥ, was hurt; pituḥ ardham eyāya, went back to his father’s place; tam ha uvāca, he said to him [i.e., to his father]; mā ananuśiṣya vāva kila, without really teaching me; bhagavān, revered sir; abravīt tvā anu aśiṣam iti, you said, ‘I have taught you.’ Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Then why did you say (you had been) instructed? How could anybody who did not know these things say that he had been instructed?' Then the boy went back sorrowful to the place of his father, and said:- 'Though you had not instructed me, Sir, you said you had instructed me.


Sloka : 5.3.5

पञ्च मा राजन्यबन्धुः प्रश्नानप्राक्षीत्तेषां

नैकंचनाशकं विवक्तुमिति स होवाच यथा मा त्वं

तदैतानवदो यथाहमेषां नैकंचन वेद

यद्यहमिमानवेदिष्यं कथं ते नावक्ष्यमिति ॥ ५.३.५॥

pañca mā rājanyabandhuḥ praśnānaprākṣītteṣāṃ

naikaṃcanāśakaṃ vivaktumiti sa hovāca yathā mā tvaṃ

tadaitānavado yathāhameṣāṃ naikaṃcana veda

yadyahamimānavediṣyaṃ kathaṃ te nāvakṣyamiti .. 5.3.5..



5. [Śvetaketu said:-] ‘That friend of the princes put five questions to me. I was not able to answer a single one of them.’ [He then told his father the five questions. After pondering over them for some time, his father] said:- ‘Those questions you told me about on your return from the court—I am not able to answer even one of them. If I knew the answers, why should I have not told you?’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Rājanyabandhuḥ, the friend of princes; pañca praśnān mā aprākṣīt, asked me five questions; teṣām na ekañcana aśakam vivaktum iti, I was not able to answer a single one of them; saḥ ha uvāca, he [his father] said; yathā mā tvam tadā, [on your return from the court] as you were then; etān, all these [questions]; avadaḥ, you told [me]; yathā, so; aham eṣām na ekañcana veda, I do not know even one of them; yadi aham imān avediṣyam, if I knew them; katham te na avakṣyam iti, why should I not have told you? Commentary:-The word rājanyabandhuḥ, a friend of kings or princes, is not to be taken literally. Here the word is used sarcastically. Actually, the man is a rogue.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'That fellow of a Râganya, asked me five questions, and I could not answer one of them.' The father said:- 'As you have told me these questions of his, I do not know any one of them [1]. If I knew these questions, how should I not have told you [2]?'

Footnote:

1. I doubt whether the elliptical construction of these sentences is properly filled out by the commentator. In the Brihadâranyaka the construction is much easier. 'You know me well enough to know that whatever I know, I told you.' 2. I read avedishyam, though both the text and commentary give avadishyam. Still viditavân asmi points to an original avedishyam, and a parallel passage, VI, 1, 7, confirms this emendation.


Sloka : 5.3.6

स ह गौतमो राज्ञोऽर्धमेयाय तस्मै ह प्राप्तायार्हां चकार

स ह प्रातः सभाग उदेयाय तꣳ होवाच मानुषस्य

भगवन्गौतम वित्तस्य वरं वृणीथा इति स होवाच तवैव

राजन्मानुषं वित्तं यामेव कुमारस्यान्ते

वाचमभाषथास्तामेव मे ब्रूहीति स ह कृच्छ्री बभूव

॥ ५.३.६॥

sa ha gautamo rājño'rdhameyāya tasmai ha prāptāyārhāṃ cakāra

sa ha prātaḥ sabhāga udeyāya tagͫ hovāca mānuṣasya

bhagavangautama vittasya varaṃ vṛṇīthā iti sa hovāca tavaiva

rājanmānuṣaṃ vittaṃ yāmeva kumārasyānte

vācamabhāṣathāstāmeva me brūhīti sa ha kṛcchrī babhūva

.. 5.3.6..



6. Gautama then went to the king’s palace. On his arrival, the king welcomed him respectfully. The next morning, when the king was in his court, Gautama went there to meet him. The king said to him, ‘Revered Gautama, ask for a boon from me—anything a person might wish for.’ Gautama replied:- ‘Let those things be with you. Please tell me whatever you said to my son.’ Hearing this, the king turned pale.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ ha gautamaḥ, then Gautama; rājñaḥ ardham eyāya, went to the king’s palace; prāptāya, when he arrived; tasmai ha arhām cakāra, the king respectfully welcomed him; saḥ, he [Gautama]; ha prātaḥ, the next morning; sabhāge udeyāya, went to see the king in the court; tam ha uvāca, he [the king] said to him [Gautama]; bhagavan gautama, revered Gautama; mānuṣasya vittasya varam vṛṇīthāḥ iti, ask for any precious thing a person may wish for as a boon; saḥ ha uvāca, he [Gautama] said; rājan, O king; tava eva mānuṣam vittam, let the human wealth be yours; yām eva kumārasya ante vācam abhāṣathāḥ, that which you said to my son; tām eva, the same; me brūhi iti, tell me; saḥ ha kṛcchrī babhūva, he [the king] was very depressed. Commentary:-It was against the custom for a kṣatriya, a king, to teach a brāhmin. This is why the king became depressed.

Translation By Max Müller

6. Then Gautama went to the king's place, and when he had come to him, the king offered him proper respect. In the morning the king went out on his way to the assembly [1]. The king said to him:- 'Sir, Gautama, ask a boon of such things as men possess.' He replied:- 'Such things as men possess may remain with you. Tell me the speech which you addressed to the boy.'

Footnote:

1. Cf. Kh. Up. V, II, 5.


Sloka : 5.3.7

तꣳ ह चिरं वसेत्याज्ञापयांचकार तꣳ होवाच

यथा मा त्वं गौतमावदो यथेयं न प्राक्त्वत्तः पुरा विद्या

ब्राह्मणान्गच्छति तस्मादु सर्वेषु लोकेषु क्षत्रस्यैव

प्रशासनमभूदिति तस्मै होवाच ॥ ५.३.७

tagͫ ha ciraṃ vasetyājñāpayāṃcakāra tagͫ hovāca

yathā mā tvaṃ gautamāvado yatheyaṃ na prāktvattaḥ purā vidyā

brāhmaṇāngacchati tasmādu sarveṣu lokeṣu kṣatrasyaiva

praśāsanamabhūditi tasmai hovāca .. 5.3.7



7. The king then issued orders that Gautama should stay with him for a long time [as a brahmacari. Gautama did that. One day] the king said to him:- ‘O Gautama, regarding the matter which you asked about, no brāhmin before you had access to this knowledge. This is why in the past, in all the worlds, it was only the kṣatriyas who had the right to impart this knowledge.’ Having said this, he proceeded to teach Gautama.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam, to him [to Gautama]; ciram vasa ha iti, stay for a long time; ājñāpayāñcakāra, he issued orders; tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Gautama]; gautama, O Gautama; yathā mā tvam āvadaḥ, as you said to me; yathā iyam vidyā, because this knowledge; prāk tvattaḥ, before you; brāhmaṇān na gacchati, did not go to the brāhmins; purā, in the past; tasmāt u, that is why; sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds; kṣatrasya eva praśāsanam abhūt iti, only kṣatriyas had the right to teach it; tasmai ha uvāca, he said to him. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

7. The king was perplexed, and commanded him, saying:- 'Stay with me some time.' Then he said:- 'As (to what) you have said to me, Gautama, this knowledge did not go to any Brâhmana before you, and therefore this teaching belonged in all the worlds to the Kshatra class alone. Then he began:-


Sloka : 5.4.1

॥ इति तृतीयः खण्डः ॥

असौ वाव लोको गौतमाग्निस्तस्यादित्य एव

समिद्रश्मयो धूमोऽहरर्चिश्चन्द्रमा अङ्गारा नक्षत्राणि

विस्फुलिङ्गाः ॥ ५.४.१॥

.. iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

asau vāva loko gautamāgnistasyāditya eva

samidraśmayo dhūmo'hararciścandramā aṅgārā nakṣatrāṇi

visphuliṅgāḥ .. 5.4.1..



1. O Gautama, heaven is the [sacrificial] fire; the sun is its fuel; the rays are the smoke; day is the flame; the moon is the embers; and the stars are the sparks.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Gautama, O Gautama; asau vāva lokaḥ agniḥ, that world there [i.e., heaven] is the fire; ādityaḥ eva tasya samit, the sun is its fuel; raśmayaḥ dhūmaḥ, the rays are the smoke; ahaḥ arciḥ, the day is the flame; candramāḥ aṅgārāḥ, the moon is the embers; nakṣatrāṇi visphuliṅgāḥ, the stars are the sparks. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'The altar (on which the sacrifice is supposed to be offered) is that world (heaven), O Gautama; its fuel is the sun itself, the smoke his rays, the light the day, the coals the moon, the sparks the stars.


Sloka : 5.4.2

तस्मिन्नेतस्मिन्नग्नौ देवाः श्रद्धां जुह्वति

तस्या अहुतेः सोमो राजा संभवति ॥ ५.४.२ ॥

tasminnetasminnagnau devāḥ śraddhāṃ juhvati

tasyā ahuteḥ somo rājā saṃbhavati .. 5.4.2 ..



2. The gods [i.e., the organs of the sacrificer] offer water as a token of respect to the fire [heaven]. Out of that oblation appears King Soma [the shining moon].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmin etasinin agnau, in that fire [which is also heaven]; devāḥ, the gods [i.e., the organs of the sacrificer]; śraddhām juhvati, offer faith [as water] as the oblation; tasyāḥ āhuteḥ, out of that oblation; rājā somaḥ, King Soma [i.e., the shining moon]; sambhavati, appears. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'On that altar the Devas (or prânas, represented by Agni, &c.) offer the sraddha libation (consisting of water). From that oblation rises Soma, the king [1] (the moon).

Footnote:

1. The sacrificers themselves rise through their oblations to heaven, and attain as their reward a Soma-like nature.


Sloka : 5.5.1

॥ इति चतुर्थः खण्डः ॥

पर्जन्यो वाव गौतमाग्निस्तस्य वायुरेव समिदभ्रं धूमो

विद्युदर्चिरशनिरङ्गाराह्रादनयो विस्फुलिङ्गाः ॥ ५.५.१॥

.. iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

parjanyo vāva gautamāgnistasya vāyureva samidabhraṃ dhūmo

vidyudarciraśaniraṅgārāhrādanayo visphuliṅgāḥ .. 5.5.1..



1. O Gautama, the god of rain is the [sacrificial] fire; air is its fuel; the cloud is the smoke; lightning is the flame; the thunderbolt is the embers; and thunder is the sparks.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Gautama, O Gautama; parjanyaḥ vāva agniḥ, the god of rain is the fire; vāyuḥ eva tasya samit, air is its fuel; abhram dhūmaḥ, the cloud is the smoke; vidyut arciḥ, lightning is the flame; aśaniḥ aṅgārāḥ, the thunderbolt is the embers; hrādanayaḥ visphuliṅgāḥ, thunder is the sparks. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'The altar is Parganya (the god of rain), O Gautama; its fuel is the air itself, the smoke the cloud, the light the lightning, the coals. the thunderbolt, the sparks the thunderings [1].

Footnote:

1. Hrâduni, generally explained by hail, but here by stanayitnusabdâh, rumblings.


Sloka : 5.5.2

तस्मिन्नेतस्मिन्नग्नौ देवाः सोमꣳ राजानं जुह्वति

तस्या आहुतेर्वर्षꣳ संभवति ॥ ५.५.२॥

tasminnetasminnagnau devāḥ somagͫ rājānaṃ juhvati

tasyā āhutervarṣagͫ saṃbhavati .. 5.5.2..



2. The gods offer King Soma [the shining moon] as the oblation to the fire. Out of that oblation appears rain.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmin etasmin agnau, in that fire; devāḥ, the gods; somam rājānam juhvati, offer King Soma [the shining moon] as the oblation; tasyāḥ āhuteḥ, out of that oblation; varṣam, rain; sambhavati, appears. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'On that altar the Devas offer Soma, the king (the moon). From that oblation rises rain [1].

Footnote:

1. The water, which had assumed the nature of Soma, now becomes rain.


Sloka : 5.6.1

॥ इति पञ्चमः खण्डः ॥

पृथिवी वाव गौतमाग्निस्तस्याः संवत्सर एव

समिदाकाशो धूमो रात्रिरर्चिर्दिशोऽङ्गारा

अवान्तरदिशो विस्फुलिङ्गाः ॥ ५.६.१॥

.. iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

pṛthivī vāva gautamāgnistasyāḥ saṃvatsara eva

samidākāśo dhūmo rātrirarcirdiśo'ṅgārā

avāntaradiśo visphuliṅgāḥ .. 5.6.1..



1. O Gautama, the earth is the [sacrificial] fire; the year is its fuel; the sky is the smoke; night is the flame; the quarters are the embers; and the intermediate directions are the sparks.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Gautama, O Gautama; pṛthivī vāva agniḥ, earth is the fire; saṃvatsaraḥ eva tasyāḥ samit, the year is its fuel; ākāśaḥ dhūmaḥ, the sky is the smoke; rātriḥ arciḥ, night is the flame; diśaḥ aṅgārāḥ, the quarters are the embers; avāṅtaradiśaḥ visphuliṅgāḥ, the intermediate directions are the sparks. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'The altar is the earth, O Gautama; its fuel is the year itself, the smoke the ether, the light the night, the coals the quarters, the sparks the intermediate quarters.


Sloka : 5.6.2

तस्मिन्नेतस्मिन्नग्नौ देवा वर्षं जुह्वति

तस्या आहुतेरन्नꣳ संभवति ॥ ५.६.२॥

tasminnetasminnagnau devā varṣaṃ juhvati

tasyā āhuterannagͫ saṃbhavati .. 5.6.2..



2. The gods offer rain as the oblation to the fire. Out of that oblation appears food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmin etasmin agnau, in that fire; devāḥ, the gods; varṣam juhvati, offer rain as the oblation; tasyāḥ āhuteḥ, out of that oblation; annam, food; sambhavati, appears. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'On that altar the Devas (prânas) offer rain. From that oblation rises food (corn, &c.)


Sloka : 5.7.1

॥ इति षष्ठः खण्डः ॥

पुरुषो वाव गौतमाग्निस्तस्य वागेव समित्प्राणो धूमो

जिह्वार्चिश्चक्षुरङ्गाराः श्रोत्रं विस्फुलिङ्गाः ॥ ५.७.१॥

.. iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

puruṣo vāva gautamāgnistasya vāgeva samitprāṇo dhūmo

jihvārciścakṣuraṅgārāḥ śrotraṃ visphuliṅgāḥ .. 5.7.1..



1. O Gautama, man is the [sacrificial] fire; speech is his fuel; prāṇa is the smoke; the tongue is the flame; the eyes are the embers; and the ears are the sparks.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Gautama, O Gautama; puruṣaḥ vāva agniḥ, man is the fire; vāk eva tasya samit, speech is his fuel; prāṇaḥ dhūmaḥ, prāṇa is the smoke; jihvā arciḥ, the tongue is the flame; cakṣuḥ aṅgārāḥ, the eyes are the embers; śrotram visphuliṅgāḥ, the ears are the sparks. Commentary:-Speech is said to be the fuel because it is the source of strength. A person who cannot speak is helpless. Prāṇa is the smoke because the breath comes out of the mouth just as smoke comes out of fire. The tongue is the flame because both are red. The eyes are the embers because both appear to be shining. And the ears are the sparks because both spread out and cover a large area.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'The altar is man, O Gautama; its fuel speech itself, the smoke the breath, the light the tongue, the coals the eye, the sparks the ear.


Sloka : 5.7.2

तस्मिन्नेतस्मिन्नग्नौ देवा अन्नं जुह्वति तस्या

आहुते रेतः सम्भवति ॥ ५.७.२॥

tasminnetasminnagnau devā annaṃ juhvati tasyā

āhute retaḥ sambhavati .. 5.7.2..



2. The gods offer food as the oblation to the fire. Out of that oblation appears semen.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmin etasmin agnau, in that fire; devāḥ, the gods; annam juhvati, offer food as the oblation; tasyāḥ āhuteḥ, out of that oblation; retaḥ, semen; sambhavati, appears. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'On that altar the Devas (prânas) offer food. From that oblation rises seed.


Sloka : 5.8.1

॥ इति सपतमः खण्डः ॥

योषा वाव गौतमाग्निस्तस्या उपस्थ एव समिद्यदुपमन्त्रयते

स धूमो योनिरर्चिर्यदन्तः करोति तेऽङ्गारा अभिनन्दा

विस्फुलिङ्गाः ॥ ५.८.१॥

.. iti sapatamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yoṣā vāva gautamāgnistasyā upastha eva samidyadupamantrayate

sa dhūmo yonirarciryadantaḥ karoti te'ṅgārā abhinandā

visphuliṅgāḥ .. 5.8.1..



1-2. O Gautama, woman is the [sacrificial] fire... The gods offer semen as the oblation to the fire. Out of that oblation appears the foetus.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-nothing, here. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'The altar is woman, O Gautama [1].

Footnote:

1. Tasyâ upastha eva samid, yad upamantrayate sa dhûmo, yonir arkir, yad antah karoti te 'ṅgârâ abhinandâ vishphuliṅgâh.


Sloka : 5.8.2

तस्मिन्नेतस्मिन्नग्नौ देवा रेतो जुह्वति

तस्या आहुतेर्गर्भः संभवति ॥ ५.८.२ ॥

tasminnetasminnagnau devā reto juhvati

tasyā āhutergarbhaḥ saṃbhavati .. 5.8.2 ..



Translation By Max Müller

2. 'On that altar the Devas (prânas) offer seed, From that oblation rises the germ.


Sloka : 5.9.1

॥ इति अष्टमः खण्डः ॥

इति तु पञ्चम्यामाहुतावापः पुरुषवचसो भवन्तीति

स उल्बावृतो गर्भो दश वा नव वा मासानन्तः शयित्वा

यावद्वाथ जायते ॥ ५.९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

iti tu pañcamyāmāhutāvāpaḥ puruṣavacaso bhavantīti

sa ulbāvṛto garbho daśa vā nava vā māsānantaḥ śayitvā

yāvadvātha jāyate .. 5.9.1..



1. Thus, after the fifth oblation, water becomes known as ‘man.’ The foetus lies within the mother’s womb, covered with membrane, for about nine or ten months, and then it is born.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Iti tu, thus [the fifth question has been answered]; pañcamyām āhutau, after the fifth oblation; āpaḥ, water; puruṣavacasaḥ bhavanti iti, becomes known as ‘man’; ulbāvṛtaḥ, covered with membrane; saḥ garbhaḥ, that foetus; daśa vā nava vā māsān, for nine or ten months; yāvat vā, or so; antaḥ śayitvā, lying inside [the mother’s womb]; atha jāyate, is then born. Commentary:-If all five oblations have been offered, then the water of the first oblation becomes a puruṣa, a human being. It lies in its mother’s womb for nine or ten months and is then born as a child. This is the answer to the last of the five questions that Pravāhaṇa asked Śvetaketu. By answering the last question first, he could answer the others more easily.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'For this reason is water in the fifth oblation called Man. This germ, covered in the womb, having dwelt there ten months, or more or less, is born.


Sloka : 5.9.2

स जातो यावदायुषं जीवति तं प्रेतं दिष्टमितोऽग्नय

एव हरन्ति यत एवेतो यतः संभूतो भवति ॥ ५.९.२॥

sa jāto yāvadāyuṣaṃ jīvati taṃ pretaṃ diṣṭamito'gnaya

eva haranti yata eveto yataḥ saṃbhūto bhavati .. 5.9.2..



2. When a person is born, he lives as long as he is destined to live. Then, when he dies as ordained, they [his sons or disciples] take him from his home to the fire from which he came. It is that same fire from which he was born [and to which he owes his birth].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ jātaḥ, [when] he is born; yāvat-āyuṣam jīvati, he lives as long as he is destined; diṣṭam pretam, dying as ordained; itaḥ, from here [his home]; taw agnaye eva haranti, they take him to the fire; yataḥ eva itaḥ, from which he came here; yataḥ sambhūtaḥ bhavati, that from which he was born. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section. Commentary:-From each oblation, something is born that is offered as the next oblation in the fire. The last thing born is a human being. This is why it is said that a human being is born of fire. In the end, when that person dies, his body also is offered in that same fire.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'When born, he lives whatever the length of his life may be. When he has departed, his friends carry him, as appointed, to the fire (of the funeral pile) from whence he came, from whence he sprang.


Sloka : 5.10.1

॥ इति नवमः खण्डः ॥

तद्य इत्थं विदुः। ये चेमेऽरण्ये श्रद्धा तप इत्युपासते

तेऽर्चिषमभिसंभवन्त्यर्चिषोऽहरह्न

आपूर्यमाणपक्षमापूर्यमाणपक्षाद्यान्षडुदङ्ङेति

मासाꣳस्तान् ॥ ५.१०.१॥

.. iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tadya itthaṃ viduḥ. ye ceme'raṇye śraddhā tapa ityupāsate

te'rciṣamabhisaṃbhavantyarciṣo'harahna

āpūryamāṇapakṣamāpūryamāṇapakṣādyānṣaḍudaṅṅeti

māsāgͫstān .. 5.10.1..



1-2. Those who know this [about the five fires], and those who live in the forest practising austerities with faith—they go after death to the world of light. From the world of light they go to the world of day; from the world of day to the world of the bright fortnight; from the world of the bright fortnight to the six months when the sun moves northward; from there they go to the year; from the year to the sun; from the sun to the moon; and from the moon to lightning. There someone, not human, receives them and leads them to brahmaloka. This is the path of the gods.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat ye viduḥ, those who know this [i.e., about the five fires]; ittham, thus; ye ca ime, and these people who; araṇye, in the forest; śraddhā tapaḥ iti upāsate, practise austerities with faith; te arciṣam abhisambhavanti, they become [attain] light; arciṣaḥ, from light; ahaḥ, to the day; ahnaḥ, from the day; āpūryamāṇapakṣam, to the bright fortnight; āpūryamāṇapakṣāt, from the bright fortnight; yān ṣaṭ māsān, to the six months; udan eti, [when the sun] moves to the north; tān, to that; māsebhyaḥ, from those months; saṃvatsaram, to the year; saṃvatsarāt, from the year; ādityam, to the sun; ādityāt, from the sun; candramasam, to the moon; candramasaḥ, from the moon; vidyutam, to lightning; tat, there; puruṣaḥ, a person [existing there]; amānavaḥ, not human; enān, those [human beings]; saḥ gamayati, leads; brahma, to brahmaloka; eṣaḥ devayānaḥ panthāḥ iti, this is the path of the gods Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Those who know this [1] (even though they still be grihasthas, householders) and those who in the forest follow faith and austerities (the vânaprasthas, and of the parivrâgakas those who do not yet know the Highest Brahman) go [2] to light (arkis), from light to day, from day to the light half of the moon, from the light half of the moon to the six months when the sun goes to the north, from the six months when the sun goes to the north to the year, from the year to the sun, from the sun to the moon, from the moon to the lightning. There is a person not human [3],--

Footnote:

1. The doctrine of the five fires, and our being born in them, i. e. in heaven, rain, earth, man, and woman. 2. Cf. Kh. Up. IV, 15, 5. 3. Instead of mânava, human, or amânava, not human, the Brih. Âr. reads mânasa, mental, or created by manas, mind.


Sloka : 5.10.2

मासेभ्यः संवत्सरꣳ संवत्सरादादित्यमादित्याच्चन्द्रमसं

चन्द्रमसो विद्युतं तत्पुरुषोऽमानवः स एनान्ब्रह्म

गमयत्येष देवयानः पन्था इति ॥ ५.१०.२॥

māsebhyaḥ saṃvatsaragͫ saṃvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasaṃ

candramaso vidyutaṃ tatpuruṣo'mānavaḥ sa enānbrahma

gamayatyeṣa devayānaḥ panthā iti .. 5.10.2..



Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He leads them to Brahman (the conditioned Brahman). This is the path of the Devas.


Sloka : 5.10.3

अथ य इमे ग्राम इष्टापूर्ते दत्तमित्युपासते ते

धूममभिसंभवन्ति धूमाद्रात्रिꣳ

रात्रेरपरपक्षमपरपक्षाद्यान्षड्दक्षिणैति

मासाꣳस्तान्नैते संवत्सरमभिप्राप्नुवन्ति ॥ ५.१०.३॥

atha ya ime grāma iṣṭāpūrte dattamityupāsate te

dhūmamabhisaṃbhavanti dhūmādrātrigͫ

rātreraparapakṣamaparapakṣādyānṣaḍdakṣiṇaiti

māsāgͫstānnaite saṃvatsaramabhiprāpnuvanti .. 5.10.3..



3. On the other hand, those who live in the village and perform acts of public service, charity, and so on, attain the world of smoke. From there they go to the world of the night; from night they go to the world of the dark fortnight; and from the dark fortnight they go to the world of the six months when the sun moves to the south. This means that they never attain the world of the year.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; ye ime, these who; grāme, live in the village; iṣṭāpūrte dattam iti upāsate, perform works of public service and give in charity, and so on; te, they; dhūmam abhisambhavanti, go to the world of smoke; dhūmāt rātrim, from the world of smoke to the world of night; rātreḥ aparapakṣam, from the world of night to the world of the dark fortnight; aparapakṣāt yān ṣaḍ māsān tān, from the world of the dark fortnight to the world of the six months when; dakṣiṇa eti, [the sun] moves to the south; ete, they; saṃvatsaram abhiprāpnuvanti, never attain the world of the year. Commentary:-Here, ‘smoke,’ ‘night,’ and so on mean the presiding deities of those realms. This is how ordinary human beings are raised to divine realms through good work.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'But they who living in a village practise (a life of) sacrifices, works of public utility, and alms, they go to the smoke, from smoke to night, from night to the dark half of the moon, from the dark half of the moon to the six months when the sun goes to the south. But they do not reach the year.


Sloka : 5.10.4

मासेभ्यः पितृलोकं पितृलोकादाकाशमाकाशाच्चन्द्रमसमेष

सोमो राजा तद्देवानामन्नं तं देवा भक्षयन्ति ॥ ५.१०.४॥

māsebhyaḥ pitṛlokaṃ pitṛlokādākāśamākāśāccandramasameṣa

somo rājā taddevānāmannaṃ taṃ devā bhakṣayanti .. 5.10.4..



4. From the six months of the southern solstice, they go to the world of the ancestors, and from there they go to the sky. Then from the sky they go to the moon. This is King Soma. This is the food of the gods. The gods enjoy eating this food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Māsebhyaḥ, from the months [of the southern solstice]; pitṛlokam, [they go] to the world of the ancestors; pitṛlokāt ākāśam, from the world of the ancestors to the sky; ākāśāt candramasam, from the sky to the world of the moon; eṣaḥ somaḥ rājā, this is King Soma [the shining moon]; tat, that; devānām annam, is the food of the gods [i.e., Indra and others]; tam devāḥ bhakṣayanti, the gods eat that [food]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'From the months they go to the world of the fathers, from the world of the fathers to the ether, from the ether to the moon. That is Soma, the king. Here they are loved (eaten) by the Devas, yes, the Devas love (eat) them [1].

Footnote:

1. This passage has been translated, 'They are the food of the gods. The gods do eat it.' And this is indeed the literal meaning of the words. But bhag (to enjoy) and bhaksh (to eat) are often used by theosophical writers in India, in the more general sense of cherishing or loving, and anna in the sense of an object of desire, love, and protection. The commentators, however, as the use of bhaksh in this sense is exceptional, or as it has no support in the use of the ancients, warn us here against a possible misunderstanding. If those, they say, who have performed sacrifices enter at last into the essence of Soma, the moon, and are eaten by the Devas, by Indra, &c., what is the use of their good works? No, they reply, they are not really eaten. Food (anna) means only what is helpful and delightful; it is not meant that they are eaten by morsels, but that they form the delight of the Devas. Thus we hear it said that men, women, and cattle are food for kings. And if it is said that women are loved by men, they are, in being loved, themselves loving. Thus these men also, being loved by the Devas, are happy and rejoice with the Devas. Their body, in order to be able to rejoice in the moon, becomes of a watery substance, as it was said before, that the water, called the Sraddha libation, when offered in heaven, as in the fire of the altar, becomes Soma, the king (Kh. Up. V, 4, 1). That water becomes, after various changes, the body of those who have performed good works, and when a man is dead and his body burnt (Kh. Up. V, 9, 2), the water rises from the body upwards with the smoke, and carries him to the moon, where, in that body, he enjoys the fruits of his good works, as long as they last. When they are consumed, like the oil in a lamp, he has to return to a new round of existences.


Sloka : 5.10.5

तस्मिन्यवात्सम्पातमुषित्वाथैतमेवाध्वानं पुनर्निवर्तन्ते

यथेतमाकाशमाकाशाद्वायुं वायुर्भूत्वा धूमो भवति

धूमो भूत्वाभ्रं भवति ॥ ५.१०.५॥

tasminyavātsampātamuṣitvāthaitamevādhvānaṃ punarnivartante

yathetamākāśamākāśādvāyuṃ vāyurbhūtvā dhūmo bhavati

dhūmo bhūtvābhraṃ bhavati .. 5.10.5..



5. Living in the world of the moon until the fruits of his work are exhausted, he then goes back to this world along the path he came. First going to the sky, he then goes to air. Having become air, he next becomes smoke. Having become smoke, he then becomes mist.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmin, in that [world of the moon]; yāvat sampātam, until the fruits of their work are exhausted; uṣitvā, living; atha, thereafter; etam eva punaḥ nivartante, they return again to this [world]; adhvānam, along this path; yathā itam, as one came; ākāśam, to the sky; ākāśāt vāyum, from the sky to the air; vāyuḥ bhūtvā dhūmaḥ bhavati, having become air he becomes smoke; dhūmaḥ bhūtvā, having become smoke; abhram bhavati, he becomes mist. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'Having dwelt there, till their (good) works are consumed, they return again that way as they came [1], to the ether, from the ether to the air. Then the sacrificer, having become air, becomes smoke, having become smoke, he becomes mist,

Footnote:

1. But only to a certain point.


Sloka : 5.10.6

अभ्रं भूत्वा मेघो भवति मेघो भूत्वा प्रवर्षति

त इह व्रीहियवा ओषधिवनस्पतयस्तिलमाषा इति

जायन्तेऽतो वै खलु दुर्निष्प्रपतरं यो यो ह्यन्नमत्ति

यो रेतः सिञ्चति तद्भूय एव भवति ॥ ५.१०.६॥

abhraṃ bhūtvā megho bhavati megho bhūtvā pravarṣati

ta iha vrīhiyavā oṣadhivanaspatayastilamāṣā iti

jāyante'to vai khalu durniṣprapataraṃ yo yo hyannamatti

yo retaḥ siñcati tadbhūya eva bhavati .. 5.10.6..



6. Having become mist, it changes into clouds. Then from clouds, it becomes rain and falls to the earth. Finally it grows as paddy, barley, plants, trees, sesame, beans, and so forth. The change from this state is very difficult. Those who eat these things produce children just like themselves.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Abhram bhūtvā meghaḥ bhavati, having become mist, it becomes a cloud; meghaḥ bhūtvā pravarṣati, having become a cloud, it comes down as rain; te, they; iha, in this world; vrīhi-yavāḥ, paddy and barley; oṣadhi-vanaspatayaḥ, plants and trees; tila-māṣaḥ iti, sesame, beans, and so forth; jāyante, this.is how they are born; ataḥ, from this [state]; vai khalu, for sure; durniṣprapataram, the way is difficult; yaḥ yaḥ, whoever [humans or animals]; hi annam atti, eats this food; yaḥ retaḥ siñcati, as it procreates; tat bhūyaḥ eva bhavati, he becomes like that [its parents]. Commentary:-Here Śaṅkara explains that a person does not become the mist or cloud or paddy, etc. He merely becomes associated with these things as a person is associated with a vehicle he is riding on. Śaṅkara also says that when a person ascends to the higher worlds, he does so in full consciousness. But when he descends, to return to this earth, he is like a person who falls from a tree and immediately becomes unconscious. His friends come and pick him up and carry him to his home without his ever being aware of it. Similarly, a person who descends from the lunar world is never aware of how he returns to the earth.

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'Having become mist, he becomes a cloud, having become a cloud, he rains down. Then he is born as rice and corn, herbs and trees, sesamum. and beans. From thence the escape is beset with most difficulties. For whoever the persons may be that eat the food, and beget offspring, he henceforth becomes like unto them.


Sloka : 5.10.7

तद्य इह रमणीयचरणा अभ्याशो ह यत्ते रमणीयां

योनिमापद्येरन्ब्राह्मणयोनिं वा क्षत्रिययोनिं वा वैश्ययोनिं

वाथ य इह कपूयचरणा अभ्याशो ह यत्ते कपूयां

योनिमापद्येरञ्श्वयोनिं वा सूकरयोनिं वा

चण्डालयोनिं वा ॥ ५.१०.७॥

tadya iha ramaṇīyacaraṇā abhyāśo ha yatte ramaṇīyāṃ

yonimāpadyeranbrāhmaṇayoniṃ vā kṣatriyayoniṃ vā vaiśyayoniṃ

vātha ya iha kapūyacaraṇā abhyāśo ha yatte kapūyāṃ

yonimāpadyerañśvayoniṃ vā sūkarayoniṃ vā

caṇḍālayoniṃ vā .. 5.10.7..



7. Among them, those who did good work in this world [in their past life] attain a good birth accordingly. They are born as a brāhmin, a kṣatriya, or a vaiśya. But those who did bad work in this world [in their past life] attain a bad birth accordingly, being born as a dog, a pig, or as a casteless person.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, among them; ye, those who; iha, in this world; ramaṇīyacaraṇāḥ, did good work; abhyāśaḥ ha yat, like that; te, they; ramaṇīyām yonim, a good birth; āpadyeran, get; brāhmaṇa yonim vā, a birth as a brāhmin; kṣatriya yonim vā, or a birth as a kṣatriya; vaiśya yonim vā, or a birth as a vaiśya; atha, but; ye iha kapūyacaraṇāḥ, those who did bad work here in this world; abhyāśaḥ ha yat, like that; te, they; kapūyām yonim āpadyeran, get a bad birth; śva yonim yā, a birth as a dog; sūkara yonim vā, or a birth as a pig; caṇḍāla yonim vā, or a birth as a casteless person. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

7. 'Those whose conduct has been good, will quickly attain some good birth, the birth of a Brâhmana, or a Kshatriya, or a Vaisya. But those whose conduct has been evil, will quickly attain an evil birth, the birth of a dog, or a hog, or a Kandâla.


Sloka : 5.10.8

अथैतयोः पथोर्न कतरेणचन तानीमानि

क्षुद्राण्यसकृदावर्तीनि भूतानि भवन्ति जायस्व

म्रियस्वेत्येतत्तृतीयꣳस्थानं तेनासौ लोको न सम्पूर्यते

तस्माज्जुगुप्सेत तदेष श्लोकः ॥ ५.१०.८॥

athaitayoḥ pathorna katareṇacana tānīmāni

kṣudrāṇyasakṛdāvartīni bhūtāni bhavanti jāyasva

mriyasvetyetattṛtīyagͫsthānaṃ tenāsau loko na sampūryate

tasmājjugupseta tadeṣa ślokaḥ .. 5.10.8..



8. But those who do not follow either of these two paths are born among small animals and insects again and again. [This can be said about those who are born in] this third state:- ‘Be born and die.’ This is why the other world does not get filled up. Therefore one should despise this state. Here is a verse on the subject—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; etayoḥ pathoḥ, of these two paths [the path of light (i.e., the path of the gods) or the path of smoke (i.e., the path of the ancestors)]; na katareṇa ca na, not by either; tāni imāni, all these; kṣudrāṇi bhūtāni, small beings [i.e., animals and insects, etc.]; asakṛt āvartīni, which are born again and again; jāyasva mriyasva iti, ‘be born and die’; etat tṛtīyaṃ sthānum, this is the third position [which is neither of the two previous paths]; tena, this is why; asau lokaḥ, that world; na sampūryate, is not filled up [with people]; tasmāt, therefore; jugupseta, one should despise it; tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject. Commentary:-Those born in this state are so short-lived that no sooner are they born than they die, as if life has no other purpose for them. This completes the answers to the five questions.

Translation By Max Müller

8. 'On neither of these two ways those small creatures (flies, worms, &c.) are continually returning of whom it may be said, Live and die. Theirs is a third place. 'Therefore that world never becomes full [1] (cf. V, 3, 2). 'Hence let a man take care to himself [2]! And thus it is said in the following Sloka [3]:--

Footnote:

1. In this manner all the five questions have been answered. First, why in the fifth oblation water is called man; secondly, to what place men go after death, some by the path of the Devas, others by the path of the fathers, others again by neither of these paths; thirdly, how they return, some returning to Brahman, others returning to the earth; fourthly, where the paths of the Devas and the fathers diverge, viz. when from the half-year the path of the Devas goes on to the year, while that of the fathers branches off to the world of the fathers; fifthly, why that world, the other world, does never become full, viz. because men either go on to Brahman or return again to this world. Many questions are raised among Indian philosophers on the exact meaning of certain passages occurring in the preceding paragraphs. First, as to who is admitted to the path of the Devas? Householders, who know the secret doctrine of the five fires or the five libations of the Agnihotra, as described above, while other householders, who only perform the ordinary sacrifices, without a knowledge of their secret meaning, go by the path of the fathers. Secondly, those who have retired to the forest, and whose worship there consists in faith and austerities, i. e. Vânaprasthas and Parivrâgakas, before they arrive at a knowledge of the true Brahman. The question then arises, whether religious students also enter the path of the Devas? This is affirmed, because Purânas and Smritis assert it, or because our text, if properly understood, does not exclude it. Those, on the contrary, who know not only a conditioned, but the highest unconditioned Brahman, do not proceed on the path of the Devas, but obtain Brahman immediately. Again, there is much difference of opinion whether, after a man has been in the moon, consuming his works, he can be born again. Birth is the result of former works, and if former works are altogether consumed, there can be no new birth. This, however, is shown to be an erroneous view, because, besides the good sacrificial works, the fruits of which are consumed in the moon, there are other works which have to be enjoyed or expiated, as the case may be, in a new existence. The great difficulty or danger in the round of transmigration arises when the rain has fructified the earth, and passes into herbs and trees, rice, corn, and beans. For, first of all, some of the rain does not fructify at once, but falls into rivers and into the sea, to be swallowed up by fishes and sea monsters. Then, only after these have been dissolved in the sea, and after the sea water has been attracted by the clouds, the rain falls down again, it may be on desert or stony land. Here it may be swallowed by snakes or deer, and these may be swallowed by other animals, so that the round of existence seems endless. Nor is this all. Some rain may dry up, or be absorbed by bodies that cannot be eaten. Then, if the rain is absorbed by rice, corn, &c., and this be eaten, it may be eaten by children or by men who have renounced marriage, and thus again lose the chance of a new birth.. Lastly, there is the danger arising from the nature of the being; in whom the food, such as rice and corn, becomes a new seed, and likewise from the nature of the mother. All these chances have to be met before a new birth as a Brâhmana, Kshatriya, or Vaisya can be secured. Another curious distinction is here made by Saṅkara in his commentary. There are some, he says, who assume the form of rice, corn, &c., not in their descent from a higher world, as described in the Upanishad, but as a definite punishment for certain evil deeds they have committed. These remain in that state till the results of their evil deeds are over, and assume then a new body, according to their work, like caterpillars. With them there is also a consciousness of these states, and the acts which caused them to assume this or that body, leave impressions behind, like dreams. This is not the case with those who in their descent from the moon, pass, as we saw, through an existence as rice, corn, &c. They have no consciousness of such existences, at least not in their descent. In their ascent to the moon, they have consciousness, as a man who climbs up a tree knows what he is about. But in their descent, that consciousness is gone, as it is when a man falls down from a tree. Otherwise a man, who by his good works had deserved rewards in the moon, would, while corn is being ground, suffer tortures, as if he were in hell, and the very object of good works, as taught by the Veda, would be defeated. As we see that a man struck by a hammer can be carried away unconscious, so it is in the descent of souls, till they are born again as men, and gain a new start for the attainment of the Highest Brahman. 2. Let him despise it. Comm. 3. Evidently an old Trishtubh verse, but irregular in the third line. See Manu XI, 54.


Sloka : 5.10.9

स्तेनो हिरण्यस्य सुरां पिबꣳश्च गुरोस्तल्पमावसन्ब्रह्महा

चैते पतन्ति चत्वारः पञ्चमश्चाचरꣳस्तैरिति ॥ ५.१०.९॥

steno hiraṇyasya surāṃ pibagͫśca gurostalpamāvasanbrahmahā

caite patanti catvāraḥ pañcamaścācaragͫstairiti .. 5.10.9..



9. A person who steals gold, or drinks liquor, or goes to bed with his teacher’s wife, or kills a brāhmin—these four are lost. Also lost is the fifth—one who keeps company with such people.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Stenaḥ, a thief; hiraṇyasya, of gold; surām piban ca, and one who drinks liquor; guroḥ talpam āvasan, uses his teacher’s bed [i.e., goes to bed with his teacher’s wife]; brahmahā ca, and a murderer of a brāhmin; ete, these; catvāraḥ, four; patanti, are lost; pañcamaḥ ca, and the fifth; ācaran taiḥ iti, is one who mixes with them. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

9. 'A man who steals gold, who drinks spirits, who dishonours his Guru's bed, who kills a Brahman, these four fall, and as a fifth he who associates with them.


Sloka : 5.10.10

अथ ह य एतानेवं पञ्चाग्नीन्वेद न सह

तैरप्याचरन्पाप्मना लिप्यते शुद्धः पूतः पुण्यलोको भवति

य एवं वेद य एवं वेद ॥ ५.१०.१०॥

atha ha ya etānevaṃ pañcāgnīnveda na saha

tairapyācaranpāpmanā lipyate śuddhaḥ pūtaḥ puṇyaloko bhavati

ya evaṃ veda ya evaṃ veda .. 5.10.10..



10. But he who knows the five fires remains pure even if he is in the company of these people. He who knows this is pure and innocent, and after death he goes to a holy world.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ha, but; yaḥ, he who; evam, thus; etān pañcāgnīn veda, knows these five fires; pāpmanā na lipyate, is not tainted with sin; saha taiḥ api, even with them [the previous five people]; ācaran, he mixes; śuddhaḥ, pure; pūtaḥ, innocent; puṇyalokaḥ, an inhabitant of a holy world; bhavati, he becomes; yaḥ evam veda yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus, Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

10. 'But he who thus knows the five fires is not defiled by sin even though he associates with them. He who knows this, is pure, clean, and obtains the world of the blessed, yea, he obtains the world of the blessed.'


Sloka : 5.11.1

॥ इति दशमः खण्डः ॥

प्राचीनशाल औपमन्यवः सत्ययज्ञः

पौलुषिरिन्द्रद्युम्नो भाल्लवेयो जनः शार्कराक्ष्यो

बुडिल आश्वतराश्विस्ते हैते महाशाला महाश्रोत्रियाः

समेत्य मीमाꣳसां चक्रुः को न आत्मा किं ब्रह्मेति ॥ ५.११.१॥

.. iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

prācīnaśāla aupamanyavaḥ satyayajñaḥ

pauluṣirindradyumno bhāllaveyo janaḥ śārkarākṣyo

buḍila āśvatarāśviste haite mahāśālā mahāśrotriyāḥ

sametya mīmāgͫsāṃ cakruḥ ko na ātmā kiṃ brahmeti .. 5.11.1..



1. Upamanyu’s son, Prācīnaśāla; Puluṣa’s son, Satyayajña; Bhāllavi’s son, Indradyumna; Śarkarākṣa’s son, Jana; and Aśvatarāśva’s son, Buḍila—these eminent householders, who were Vedic scholars, once met to decide the issue:- Who is our Self? And what is Brahman?





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prācīnaśālaḥ aupamanyavaḥ, Upamanyu’s son, Prācīnaśāla; satyayajñaḥ pauluṣiḥ, Puluṣa’s son, Satyayajña; indradyumnaḥ bhāllaveyaḥ, Bhāllavi’s son, Indradyumna; janaḥ śārkarākṣyaḥ, Śarkarākṣa’s son, Jana; buḍilaḥ āśvatarāśviḥ, Aśvatarāśva’s son, Buḍila; te ha ete, these; mahāśālā, eminent householders; mahāśrotriyāḥ, well read in the Vedas; sametya, got together; mīmāṃsām cakruḥ, to decide the issue; kaḥ, who; naḥ ātmā, is our Self; kim brahma iti, what is Brahman? Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Prâkînasâla Aupamanyava, Satyayagña Paulushi, Indradyumna Bhâllaveya, Gana Sârkarâkshya, and Budila Âsvatarasvi, these five great householders and great theologians came once together and held a discussion as to What is our Self, and what is Brahman [1].

Footnote:

1. Âtman and Brâhman are to be taken as predicate and subject.


Sloka : 5.11.2

ते ह सम्पादयांचक्रुरुद्दालको वै भगवन्तोऽयमारुणिः

सम्प्रतीममात्मानं वैश्वानरमध्येति तꣳ

हन्ताभ्यागच्छामेति तꣳ हाभ्याजग्मुः ॥ ५.११.२॥

te ha sampādayāṃcakruruddālako vai bhagavanto'yamāruṇiḥ

sampratīmamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramadhyeti tagͫ

hantābhyāgacchāmeti tagͫ hābhyājagmuḥ .. 5.11.2..



2. They talked among themselves and decided what to do. One of them said:- ‘Revered sirs, Uddālaka Āruṇi is the person who now knows about this Vaiśvānara Self. Let us go to him then.’ So they all went to him.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te ha, they; sampādayān cakruḥ, decided about the matter; bhagavantaḥ, [one of them said to the others:-] revered sirs; ayam, this; uddālakaḥ āruṇiḥ, Uddālaka, the son of Aruṇa; samprati, at the moment; imam ātmānam vaiśvānaram adhyeti, knows about the Vaiśvānara Self; tam, to him; hanta abhyāgacchāma iti, then let us go; tam ha abhyājagmuḥ, they all went to him. Commentary:-The word vaiśvānara has three meanings:- (a) he who is within all; (b) he who leads all; and (c) the friend of all.

Translation By Max Müller

2. They reflected and said:- 'Sirs, there is that Uddâlaka Âruni, who knows at present that Self, called Vaisvânara. Well, let us go to him.' They went to him.


Sloka : 5.11.3

स ह सम्पादयांचकार प्रक्ष्यन्ति मामिमे

महाशाला महाश्रोत्रियास्तेभ्यो न सर्वमिव प्रतिपत्स्ये

हन्ताहमन्यमभ्यनुशासानीति ॥ ५.११.३॥

sa ha sampādayāṃcakāra prakṣyanti māmime

mahāśālā mahāśrotriyāstebhyo na sarvamiva pratipatsye

hantāhamanyamabhyanuśāsānīti .. 5.11.3..



3. [Uddālaka understood that they had come to ask him about the Vaiśvānara Ātman.] He decided:- ‘These eminent householders and Vedic scholars will ask me questions, and I may not be able to answer all of them. Therefore I will direct them to another teacher’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [Uddālaka]; ha sampādayāñcakāra, decided; ime mahāśālāḥ, these eminent householders; mahāśrotriyāḥ, and Vedic scholars; mām prakṣyanti, will ask me questions; tebhyaḥ, to them; sarvam iva na pratipatsye, I will not be able to answer everything; hanta aham anyam abhyanuśāsāni iti, therefore I will direct them to another [teacher]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. But he reflected:- 'Those great householders and great theologians will examine me, and I shall not be able to tell them all; therefore I shall recommend another teacher to them.'


Sloka : 5.11.4

तान्होवाचाश्वपतिर्वै भगवन्तोऽयं कैकेयः

सम्प्रतीममात्मानं वैश्वानरमध्येति

तꣳहन्ताभ्यागच्छामेति तꣳहाभ्याजग्मुः ॥ ५.११.४॥

tānhovācāśvapatirvai bhagavanto'yaṃ kaikeyaḥ

sampratīmamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramadhyeti

tagͫhantābhyāgacchāmeti tagͫhābhyājagmuḥ .. 5.11.4..



4. Uddālaka told them:- ‘Sirs, at the present time King Aśvapati, the son of Kekaya, alone knows about the Vaiśvānara Ātman. With your permission, we will go to him.’ They then left to see Aśvapati.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tān, to them [the Vedic scholars]; ha uvāca, he said; bhagavantaḥ, O sirs; samprati, at the present time; ayam kaikeyaḥ, this son of Kekaya; aśvapatiḥ, Aśvapati; imam, this; vaiśvānaram ātmānam, Vaiśvānara Self [the Self that iṣ in the heart of everyone]; adhyeti, knows; tam hanta abhyāgacchāma iti, if you permit, we will go to him; tam ha abhyājagmuḥ, they went to him. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. He said to them:- 'Sirs, Asvapati Kaikeya knows at present that Self, called Vaisvânara. Well, let us go to him.' They went to him.


Sloka : 5.11.5

तेभ्यो ह प्राप्तेभ्यः पृथगर्हाणि कारयांचकार

स ह प्रातः संजिहान उवाच न मे स्तेनो जनपदे न

कर्दर्यो न मद्यपो नानाहिताग्निर्नाविद्वान्न स्वैरी स्वैरिणी

कुतो यक्ष्यमाणो वै भगवन्तोऽहमस्मि यावदेकैकस्मा

ऋत्विजे धनं दास्यामि तावद्भगवद्भ्यो दास्यामि

वसन्तु भगवन्त इति ॥ ५.११.५॥

tebhyo ha prāptebhyaḥ pṛthagarhāṇi kārayāṃcakāra

sa ha prātaḥ saṃjihāna uvāca na me steno janapade na

kardaryo na madyapo nānāhitāgnirnāvidvānna svairī svairiṇī

kuto yakṣyamāṇo vai bhagavanto'hamasmi yāvadekaikasmā

ṛtvije dhanaṃ dāsyāmi tāvadbhagavadbhyo dāsyāmi

vasantu bhagavanta iti .. 5.11.5..



5. When they arrived, Aśvapati had each of his guests worshipped separately. The next morning, after getting up from bed, he said to them:- ‘There is no thief in my state, no miserly person, no drunkard, no brāhmin who does not perform the agnihotra sacrifice, no one who is uneducated, no adulterer, and therefore no adulteress. Sirs, I am performing a sacrifice. The amount of money I will be giving to each priest in this sacrifice, I will give to each one of you. Revered sirs, please stay here’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tebhyaḥ ha prāptebhyaḥ, when they arrived; pṛthak arjāṇikārayāñcakāra, he had each one of them worshipped; prātaḥ, the next morning; sañjihānaḥ, getting up from bed; saḥ ha uvāca, he said; na me stenaḥ janapade, there is no thief in my kingdom; na kadaryaḥ, no miserly person; na madyapaḥ, no drunkard; na anāhitāgniḥ, no brāhmin who does not perform the agnihotra sacrifice; na avidvān, no one who is uneducated; na svairī, no adulterer; kutaḥ svairiṇī how can there be an adulteress; bhagavantaḥ, O sirs; aham yakṣyamāṇaḥ vai asmi, I am performing a sacrifice; yāvat dhanam, as much wealth; eka-ekasmai ṛtvije dāsyāmi, I will give to each priest; tāvat, that same amount; bhagavadbhyaḥ dāsyāmi, I will give to each of you revered sirs; vasantu bhagavantaḥ iti, sirs, please stay here. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. When they arrived (the king) ordered proper presents to be made separately to each of them. And rising the next morning [1] he said:- 'In my kingdom there is no thief, no miser, no drunkard, no man without an altar in his house, no ignorant person, no adulterer, much less an adulteress. I [2] am going to perform a sacrifice, Sirs, and as much wealth as I give to each Ritvig priest, I shall give to you, Sirs. Please to stay here.'

Footnote:

1. The commentator explains that the king, seeing that they would not accept his presents, and thinking that they did not consider him worthy of bestowing presents on them, made these remarks. 2. When they still refused his presents, he thought the presents he had offered were too small, and therefore invited them to a sacrifice.


Sloka : 5.11.6

ते होचुर्येन हैवार्थेन पुरुषश्चरेत्तꣳहैव

वदेदात्मानमेवेमं वैश्वानरꣳ सम्प्रत्यध्येषि तमेव नो

ब्रूहीति ॥ ५.११.६॥

te hocuryena haivārthena puruṣaścarettagͫhaiva

vadedātmānamevemaṃ vaiśvānaragͫ sampratyadhyeṣi tameva no

brūhīti .. 5.11.6..



6. They said:- ‘When a person visits someone, first and foremost, he states why he has come. At the present time, you are the one who knows about the Vaiśvānara Ātman. Please tell us about it’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te ha ūcuḥ, they said; yena ha eva arthena, the purpose for which; puruṣaḥ caret, a person visits [another]; tam ha eva vadet, he should state that [first]; imam eva ātmānam vaiśvānaram, this Vaiśvānara Ātman; samprati, now; adhyeṣi, you know; tam eva naḥ brūhi iti, please tell us about it. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. They replied:- 'Every man ought to say for what purpose he comes. You know at present that Vaisvânara Self, tell us that.'


Sloka : 5.11.7

तान्होवाच प्रातर्वः प्रतिवक्तास्मीति ते ह समित्पाणयः

पूर्वाह्णे प्रतिचक्रमिरे तान्हानुपनीयैवैतदुवाच ॥ ५.११.७॥

tānhovāca prātarvaḥ prativaktāsmīti te ha samitpāṇayaḥ

pūrvāhṇe praticakramire tānhānupanīyaivaitaduvāca .. 5.11.7..



7. He said to them, ‘I will give you my answer tomorrow morning.’ The next day they went back to him in the forenoon with some fuel in their hands. Without initiating them, he said this—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tān ha uvāca, he said to them; prātaḥ, in the morning; vaḥ prativaktā asmi iti, I will give you the answer; te, they; ha samitpāṇayaḥ, with fuel in their hands; pūrvāhṇe praticakramire, came again the next day in the forenoon; tān ha anupanīya eva, without initiating them; etat uvāca, he said this. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

7. He said:- 'To-morrow I shall give you an answer.' Therefore on the next morning they approached him, carrying fuel in their hands (like students), and he, without first demanding any preparatory rites [1], said to them:-

Footnote:

1. He was satisfied with the humility of the Brahmans, who, being Brahmans, came to him, who was not a Brahman, as pupils. Generally a pupil has first to pass through several initiatory rites before he is admitted to the benefit of his master's teaching.


Sloka : 5.12.1

॥ इति एकादशः खण्डः ॥

औपमन्यव कं त्वमात्मानमुपास्स इति दिवमेव भगवो

राजन्निति होवाचैष वै सुतेजा आत्मा वैश्वानरो यं

त्वमात्मानमुपास्से तस्मात्तव सुतं प्रसुतमासुतं कुले

दृश्यते ॥ ५.१२.१॥

.. iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

aupamanyava kaṃ tvamātmānamupāssa iti divameva bhagavo

rājanniti hovācaiṣa vai sutejā ātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ

tvamātmānamupāsse tasmāttava sutaṃ prasutamāsutaṃ kule

dṛśyate .. 5.12.1..



1. The king said, ‘O son of Upamanyu, whom do you worship as the Vaiśvānara Self?’ The son of Upamanyu replied, ‘O King, I worship heaven.’ The king said:- ‘The Self you worship is the Vaiśvānara Self which is Suteja—i.e., bright and beautiful. That is why whoever is born in your family is bright, brighter, and still brighter’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Aupamanyava, O son of Upamanyu; kam, whom; tvam, you; ātmānam, as your self; upāsse iti, worship; bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king; divam eva iti, [I worship] heaven; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship; eṣaḥ, this [heaven]; vai, for sure; ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is Vaiśvānara Ātman; sutejāḥ, as Suteja [i.e., beautiful and bright]; tasmāt, therefore; tava kule, in your family; sutam, soma juice [i.e., children]; prasutam, better soma juice; āsutam, and much better soma juice; dṛśyate, are seen [i.e., better, much better, and still better children are seen]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Aupamanyava, whom do you meditate on as the Self?' He replied:- 'Heaven only, venerable king.' He said:- 'The Self which you meditate on is the Vaisvânara Self, called Sutegas (having good light). Therefore every kind of Soma libation is seen in your house [1].

Footnote:

1. Soma is said to be suta in the Ekâha, prasuta in the Ahîna, âsuta in the Sattra-sacrifices.


Sloka : 5.12.2

अत्स्यन्नं पश्यसि प्रियमत्त्यन्नं पश्यति प्रियं भवत्यस्य

ब्रह्मवर्चसं कुले य एतमेवमात्मानं वैश्वानरमुपास्ते

मूधा त्वेष आत्मन इति होवाच मूर्धा ते

व्यपतिष्यद्यन्मां नागमिष्य इति ॥ ५.१२.२॥

atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya

brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste

mūdhā tveṣa ātmana iti hovāca mūrdhā te

vyapatiṣyadyanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti .. 5.12.2..



2. ‘You enjoy eating food and you see your dear ones and everything pleasant. He who worships the Vaiśvānara Self thus enjoys eating food and is able to see his dear ones. He also has children in his family who shine with the radiance of Brahman [i.e., they become well known for their good conduct and scholarship]. But heaven is like the head of the Self.’ Then the king said, ‘If you had not come to me your head would have fallen off’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Annam atsi, [the king said:-] you eat food; priyam paśyasḥ you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]; yaḥ, he who; etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus; annam atti, eats food; priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]; asya kule, in his family; brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman; eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ mūrdhā iti, but this [heaven] is like the head of the Self; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; te mūrdhā vyapatiṣyat, your head would have fallen; yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'You eat food, and see your desire (a son, &c.), and whoever thus meditates on that Vaisvânara Self, eats food, sees his desire, and has Vedic glory (arising from study and sacrifice) in his house. That, however, is but the head of the Self, and thus your head would have fallen (in a discussion), if you had not come to me.'


Sloka : 5.13.1

॥ इति द्वादशः खण्डः ॥

अथ होवाच सत्ययज्ञं पौलुषिं प्राचीनयोग्य कं

त्वमात्मानमुपास्स इत्यादित्यमेव भगवो राजन्निति

होवाचैष वै विश्वरूप आत्मा वैश्वानरो यं

त्वमात्मानमुपास्से तस्मात्तव बहु विश्वरूपं कुले

दृश्यते ॥ ५.१३.१॥

.. iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hovāca satyayajñaṃ pauluṣiṃ prācīnayogya kaṃ

tvamātmānamupāssa ityādityameva bhagavo rājanniti

hovācaiṣa vai viśvarūpa ātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ

tvamātmānamupāsse tasmāttava bahu viśvarūpaṃ kule

dṛśyate .. 5.13.1..



1. The king then said to Satyayajña Pauluṣi, ‘O Prācīnayogya, whom do you worship as the Self?’ Satyayajña replied, ‘I worship Āditya, the sun, revered king.’ The king said:- ‘That which you worship as the Vaiśvānara Ātman is named Viśvarūpa. This is why you have in your family wealth in many forms’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; satyayajñam pauluṣim, to Satyayajña Pauluṣi; prācīnayogya, O Prācīnayogya; kam, whom; tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self; bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king; ādityam eva iti, [I worship] Āditya [the sun]; ha uvāca, [the king] said; yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship; eṣaḥ, this [Āditya]; vai, for sure; ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman; viśvarūpaḥ, as Viśvarūpa [having many forms]; tasmāt, therefore; tava kule, in your family; bahu viśvarūpam, wealth in many forms; dṛśyate, is seen. Commentary:-Āditya, the sun, has many colours—white, blue, etc. For that reason Āditya is called Viśvarūpa, ‘of many forms.’ And this is why, by the favour of Āditya, one who worships him is able to have good fortune, both spiritual and material.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then he said to Satyayagña Paulushi:- 'O Prâkînayogya, whom do you meditate on as the Self?' He replied:- 'The sun only, venerable king.' He said:- 'The Self which you meditate on is the Vaisvânara Self, called Visvarûpa (multiform). Therefore much and manifold wealth is seen in your house.


Sloka : 5.13.2

प्रवृत्तोऽश्वतरीरथो दासीनिष्कोऽत्स्यन्नं पश्यसि

प्रियमत्त्यन्नं पश्यति प्रियं भवत्यस्य ब्रह्मवर्चसं कुले

य एतमेवमात्मानं वैश्वानरमुपास्ते चक्षुषेतदात्मन इति

होवाचान्धोऽभविष्यो यन्मां नागमिष्य इति ॥ ५.१३.२॥

pravṛtto'śvatarīratho dāsīniṣko'tsyannaṃ paśyasi

priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya brahmavarcasaṃ kule

ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste cakṣuṣetadātmana iti

hovācāndho'bhaviṣyo yanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti .. 5.13.2..



2. ‘You now have chariots drawn by mules. You are served by maidservants, and you have a necklace. You enjoy eating food and you see your dear ones and everything pleasant. He who worships the Vaiśvānara Self thus enjoys eating food and is able to see his dear ones. He also has children in his family who shine with the radiance of Brahman [i.e., they become well known for their good conduct and scholarship]. But this Āditya is like the eye of the Self.’ Then the king said, ‘If you had not come to me you would have become blind’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Aśvatarīrathaḥ, a chariot drawn by mules; dāsī-niṣ-kaḥ, maidservants and a necklace; pravṛttaḥ, you have; annam atsi, you eat food; priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]; yaḥ, he who; etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus; annam atti, eats food; priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]; asya kule, in his family; brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman; eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ cakṣuḥ iti, but this [Āditya] is like the eye of the Self; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; andhaḥ abhaviṣyaḥ, you would have become blind; yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section. Commentary:-Āditya is like the eye of the Vaiśvānara Ātman, but it is not the whole of it. If one mistakes the part for the whole, that is a great blunder. He misses the truth and is like one who is blind. The king says to Satyayajña, ‘Luckily you have come to me and have been saved from that misfortune.’

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'There is a car with mules, full of slaves and jewels. You eat food and see your desire, and whoever thus meditates on that Vaisvânara Self, eats food and sees his desire, and has Vedic glory in his house. 'That, however, is but the eye of the Self, and you would have become blind, if you had not come to me.'


Sloka : 5.14.1

॥ इति त्रयोदशः खण्डः ॥

अथ होवाचेन्द्रद्युम्नं भाल्लवेयं वैयाघ्रपद्य कं

त्वमात्मानमुपास्स इति वायुमेव भगवो राजन्निति

होवाचैष वै पृथग्वर्त्मात्मा वैश्वानरो यं

त्वमात्मानमुपास्से तस्मात्त्वां पृथग्बलय आयन्ति

पृथग्रथश्रेणयोऽनुयन्ति ॥ ५.१४.१॥

.. iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hovācendradyumnaṃ bhāllaveyaṃ vaiyāghrapadya kaṃ

tvamātmānamupāssa iti vāyumeva bhagavo rājanniti

hovācaiṣa vai pṛthagvartmātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ

tvamātmānamupāsse tasmāttvāṃ pṛthagbalaya āyanti

pṛthagrathaśreṇayo'nuyanti .. 5.14.1..



1. The king then said to Indradyumna Bhāllaveya, ‘O Vaiyāghrapadya, whom do you worship as the Self?’ Indradyumna replied, ‘I worship Vāyu [air], revered king.’ The king said:- ‘That which you worship as the Vaiśvānara Ātman is named Pṛthagvartmā [one who changes direction]. This is why you receive gifts from all directions. And this is also why different kinds of chariots follow you in rows’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; indradyumnam bhāllaveyam, to Indradyumna Bhāllaveya; vaiyāghrapadya, O Vaiyāghrapadya; kam, whom; tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self; bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king; vāyum eva iti, [I worship] Vāyu [air]; ha uvāca, [the king] said; yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship; eṣaḥ, this [Vāyu]; vai, for sure; ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman; pṛthagvartmā, as Pṛthagvartmā [going in many directions]; tasmāt, therefore; pṛthak, from different directions; balayaḥ, gifts; tvām, to you; āyanti, come; pṛthak rathaśreṇayaḥ anuyanti, different lines of chariots follow you [i.e., they are at your disposal]. Commentary:-Air is always the same, but it can change its direction and also serve different purposes. This is why one who worships it as the Self is rewarded with gifts coming from different directions.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then he said to Indradyumna Bhâllaveya:- 'O Vaiyâghrapadya, whom do you meditate on as the Self?' He replied:- 'Air only, venerable king.' He said:- 'The Self which you meditate on is the Vaisvânara Self, called Prithagvartman (having various courses). Therefore offerings come to you in various ways, and rows of cars follow you in various ways.


Sloka : 5.14.2

अत्स्यन्नं पश्यसि प्रियमत्त्यन्नं पश्यति प्रियं भवत्यस्य

ब्रह्मवर्चसं कुले य एतमेवमात्मानं वैश्वानरमुपास्ते

प्राणस्त्वेष आत्मन इति होवाच प्राणस्त

उदक्रमिष्यद्यन्मां नागमिष्य इति ॥ ५.१४.२॥

atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya

brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste

prāṇastveṣa ātmana iti hovāca prāṇasta

udakramiṣyadyanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti .. 5.14.2..



2. ‘You enjoy eating food and you see your dear ones and everything pleasant. He who worships the Vaiśvānara Self thus enjoys eating food and is able to see his dear ones. He also has children in his family who shine with the radiance of Brahman [i.e., they become well known for their good conduct and scholarship]. But Vāyu [air] is like the life [i.e., the vital force] of the Self.’ Then the king said, ‘If you had not come to me your vital force would have left the body’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Annam atsi, [the king said:-] you eat food; priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]; yaḥ, he who; etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus; annam atti, eats food; priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]; asya kule, in his family; brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman; eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ prāṇaḥ iti, but this [Vāyu] is like the life of the Self; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; te prāṇaḥ udakramiṣyat, your life would have left the body; yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'You eat food and see your desire, and whoever thus meditates on that Vaisvânara Self, eats food and sees his desire, and has Vedic glory in his house. 'That, however, is but the breath of the Self, and your breath would have left you, if you had not come to me.'


Sloka : 5.15.1

॥ इति चतुर्दशः खण्डः ॥

अथ होवाच जनꣳशार्कराक्ष्य कं त्वमात्मानमुपास्स

इत्याकाशमेव भगवो राजन्निति होवाचैष वै बहुल

आत्मा वैश्वानरो यं त्वमात्मानमुपस्से तस्मात्त्वं

बहुलोऽसि प्रजया च धनेन च ॥ ५.१५.१॥

.. iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hovāca janagͫśārkarākṣya kaṃ tvamātmānamupāssa

ityākāśameva bhagavo rājanniti hovācaiṣa vai bahula

ātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ tvamātmānamupasse tasmāttvaṃ

bahulo'si prajayā ca dhanena ca .. 5.15.1..



1. The king then said to Jana, ‘O Sārkarākṣya, whom do you worship as the Self?’ Jana replied, ‘I worship Ākāśa [space], revered king.’ The king said:- ‘That which you worship as the Vaiśvānara Ātman is named Bahula [pervasive]. This is why you have so many children and so much wealth’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; janam, to Jana; śārkarākṣya, O Śārkarākṣya; kam, whom; tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self; bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king; ākāśam eva iti, [I worship] Ākāśa [space]; ha uvāca, [the king] said; yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship; eṣaḥ, this [Ākāśa]; vai, for sure; ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman; bahulaḥ, as Bahula [pervasive]; tasmāt, therefore; tvam, you; bahulaḥ asi prajayā ca dhanena ca, have a great number of children and much wealth. Commentary:-The qualifying word bahula is applied to ākāśa (space) because it is vast and pervasive and it also has many other qualities. Those who worship space acquire some of those qualities.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then he said to Gana Sârkarâkshya:- 'Whom do you meditate on as the Self?' He replied:- 'Ether only, venerable king.' He said:- 'The Self which you meditate on is the Vaisvânara Self, called Bahula (full). Therefore you are full of offspring and wealth.


Sloka : 5.15.2

अत्स्यन्नं पश्यसि प्रियमत्त्यन्नं पश्यति प्रियं भवत्यस्य

ब्रह्मवर्चसं कुले य एतमेवमात्मानं वैश्वानरमुपास्ते

संदेहस्त्वेष आत्मन इति होवाच संदेहस्ते व्यशीर्यद्यन्मां

नागमिष्य इति ॥ ५.१५.२॥

atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya

brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste

saṃdehastveṣa ātmana iti hovāca saṃdehaste vyaśīryadyanmāṃ

nāgamiṣya iti .. 5.15.2..



2. ‘You enjoy eating food and you see your dear ones and everything pleasant. He who worships the Vaiśvānara Self thus enjoys eating food and is able to see his dear ones. He also has children in his family who shine with the radiance of Brahman [i.e., they become well known for their good conduct and scholarship]. But Ākāśa [space] is like the mid part of the Self.’ Then the king said, ‘If you had not come to me the middle part of your body would have shrunk’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Annam atsi, [the king said:-] you eat food; priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]; yaḥ, he who; etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus; annam atti, eats food; priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]; asya kule, in his family; brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman; eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ sandehaḥ iti, but this [Ākāśa] is like the mid part of the Self; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; te sandehaḥ vyaśīryat, the middle part of your body would have shrunk; yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section. Commentary:-Space is only the middle part of the Vaiśvānara Ātman, and is not the whole of it. Anyone who makes the

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'You eat food and see your desire, and whoever thus meditates on that Vaisvânara Self, eats food and sees his desire, and has Vedic glory in his house. 'That, however, is but the trunk of the Self, and your trunk would have perished, if you had not come to me.'


Sloka : 5.16.1

॥ इति पञ्चदशः खण्डः ॥

अथ होवाच बुडिलमाश्वतराश्विं वैयाघ्रपद्य कं

त्वमात्मानमुपास्स इत्यप एव भगवो राजन्निति होवाचैष

वै रयिरात्मा वैश्वानरो यं त्वमात्मानमुपास्से

तस्मात्त्वꣳरयिमान्पुष्टिमानसि ॥ ५.१६.१॥

.. iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hovāca buḍilamāśvatarāśviṃ vaiyāghrapadya kaṃ

tvamātmānamupāssa ityapa eva bhagavo rājanniti hovācaiṣa

vai rayirātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ tvamātmānamupāsse

tasmāttvagͫrayimānpuṣṭimānasi .. 5.16.1..



1. The king then said to Buḍila Āśvatarāśvi, ‘O Vaiyāghrapadya, whom do you worship as the Self?’ Buḍila replied, ‘I worship water, revered king.’ The king said:- ‘That which you worship as the Vaiśvānara Ātman is named Rayi [wealth]. This is why you are rich and healthy’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; buḍilam āśvatarāśvim, to Buḍila Āśvatarāśvi; Vaiyāghrapadya, O Vaiyāghrapadya; kam, whom; tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self; bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king; apaḥ eva iti, [I worship] water; ha uvāca, [the king] said; yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship; eṣaḥ, this [water]; vai, for sure; ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman; rayiḥ, as Rayi [wealth]; tasmāt, therefore; tvam, you; rayimān puṣṭimān asi, are rich and have a strong, healthy body. Commentary:-Water is ‘wealth’ (rayi) because it is from water that we get food and all the good things we need.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then he said to Budila Âsvatarâsvi, 'O Vaiyâghrapadya, whom do you meditate on as the Self?' He replied:- 'Water only, venerable king.' He said; 'The Self which you meditate on is the Vaisvânara Self, called Rayi (wealth). Therefore are you wealthy and flourishing.


Sloka : 5.16.2

अत्स्यन्नं पश्यसि प्रियमत्त्यन्नं पश्यति प्रियं भवत्यस्य

ब्रह्मवर्चसं कुले य एतमेवमात्मानं वैश्वानरमुपास्ते

बस्तिस्त्वेष आत्मन इति होवाच बस्तिस्ते व्यभेत्स्यद्यन्मां

नागमिष्य इति ॥ ५.१६.२॥

atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya

brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste

bastistveṣa ātmana iti hovāca bastiste vyabhetsyadyanmāṃ

nāgamiṣya iti .. 5.16.2..



2. ‘You enjoy eating food and you see your dear ones and everything pleasant. He who worships the Vaiśvānara Self thus enjoys eating food and is able to see his dear ones. He also has children in his family who shine with the radiance of Brahman [i.e., they become well known for their good conduct and scholarship]. But water is like the bladder of the Self.’ Then the king said, ‘If you had not come to me your bladder would have burst’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Annam atsi, [the king said:-] you eat food; priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]; yaḥ, he who; etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus; annam atti, eats food; priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]; asya kule, in his family; brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman; eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ bastiḥ itḥ but this [water] is like the bladder of the Self; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; te bastiḥ vyabhetsyat, your bladder would have burst; yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'You eat food and see your desire, and whoever thus meditates on that Vaisvânara Self, eats food and sees his desire, and has Vedic glory in his house. 'That, however, is but the bladder of the Self, and your bladder would have burst, if you had not come to me.'


Sloka : 5.17.1

॥ इति षोडशः खण्डः ॥

अथ होवाचोद्दालकमारुणिं गौतम कं त्वमात्मानमुपस्स

इति पृथिवीमेव भगवो राजन्निति होवाचैष वै

प्रतिष्ठात्मा वैश्वानरो यं त्वमात्मानमुपास्से

तस्मात्त्वं प्रतिष्ठितोऽसि प्रजया च पशुभिश्च ५.१७.१॥

.. iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hovācoddālakamāruṇiṃ gautama kaṃ tvamātmānamupassa

iti pṛthivīmeva bhagavo rājanniti hovācaiṣa vai

pratiṣṭhātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ tvamātmānamupāsse

tasmāttvaṃ pratiṣṭhito'si prajayā ca paśubhiśca 5.17.1..



1. The king then said to Uddālaka Āruṇi, ‘O Gautama, whom do you worship as the Self?’ Uddālaka replied, ‘I worship the earth, revered king.’ The king said:- ‘That which you worship as the Vaiśvānara Ātman is named Pratiṣṭhā [the support]. This is why you have so many children and animals to support you’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; uddālakam āruṇim, to Uddālaka Āruṇi; gautama, O Gautama; kam, whom; tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self; bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king; pṛthivīm eva iti, [I worship] the earth; ha uvāca, [the king] said; yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship; eṣaḥ, this [earth]; vai, for sure; ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman; pratiṣṭhā, as Pratiṣṭhā [the support]; tasmāt, therefore; tvam, you; pratiṣṭhitaḥ prajayā ca paśubhiḥ ca asi, are supported by children and animals. Commentary:-The earth is like the feet of Vaiśvānara Ātman. This is why it is ‘the support.’

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then he said to Auddâlaka Âruni:- 'O Gautama, whom do you meditate on as the Self?' He replied:- 'The earth only, venerable king.' He said:- 'The Self which you meditate on is the Vaisvânara Self, called Pratishthâ (firm rest). Therefore you stand firm with offspring and cattle.


Sloka : 5.17.2

अत्स्यन्नं पश्यसि प्रियमत्त्यन्नं पश्यति प्रियं भवत्यस्य

ब्रह्मवर्चसं कुले य एतमेवमात्मानं वैश्वानरमुपास्ते

पादौ त्वेतावात्मन इति होवाच पादौ ते व्यम्लास्येतां

यन्मां नागमिष्य इति ५.१७.२॥

atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya

brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste

pādau tvetāvātmana iti hovāca pādau te vyamlāsyetāṃ

yanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti 5.17.2..



2. ‘You enjoy eating food and you see your dear ones and everything pleasant. He who worships the Vaiśvānara Self thus enjoys eating food and is able to see his dear ones. He also has children in his family who shine with the radiance of Brahman [i.e., they become well known for their good conduct and scholarship]. But the earth is like the feet of the Self.’ Then the king said, ‘If you had not come to me your feet would have become extremely weak’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Annam atsi, [the king said:-] you eat food; priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]; yaḥ, he who; etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus; annam atti, eats food; priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]; asya kule, in his family; brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman; eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ pādau iti, but this [earth] is like the two feet of the Self; ha uvāca, he [the king] said; te pādau vyamlāsyetām, your feet would have become very weak; yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'You eat food and see your desire, and whoever thus meditates on that Vaisvânara Self, eats food and sees his desire, and has Vedic glory in his house. 'That, however, are but the feet of the Self, and your feet would have given way, if you had not come to me.'


Sloka : 5.18.1

॥ इति सप्तदशः खण्डः ॥

तान्होवाचैते वै खलु यूयं पृथगिवेममात्मानं

वैश्वानरं विद्वाꣳसोऽन्नमत्थ यस्त्वेतमेवं

प्रादेशमात्रमभिविमानमात्मानं वैश्वानरमुपास्ते स सर्वेषु

लोकेषु सर्वेषु भूतेषु सर्वेष्वात्मस्वन्नमत्ति ॥ ५.१८.१॥

.. iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tānhovācaite vai khalu yūyaṃ pṛthagivemamātmānaṃ

vaiśvānaraṃ vidvāgͫso'nnamattha yastvetamevaṃ

prādeśamātramabhivimānamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste sa sarveṣu

lokeṣu sarveṣu bhūteṣu sarveṣvātmasvannamatti .. 5.18.1..



1. The king said to the brāhmins:- ‘Those of you who are here meditate on the Vaiśvānara Self only in part. [That is why when you eat you think you are eating separately.] He who worships the Self as all-pervasive and infinite, enjoys eating through whoever eats in the worlds, through all beings, and through all selves.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tān, to them [the brāhmins]; ha uvāca, [the king] said; ete yūyam vai khalu, those of you here; imam vaiśvānaram ātmānam vidvāṃsaḥ, have known this [undivided] Vaiśvānara Ātman; pṛthak iva, only in part [and as separate in each individual]; annam attha, [and that is why] you eat food [thinking you are eating separately; yaḥ tu, but he who; etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus; prādeśamātram, as all-pervasive [i.e., as covering the various worlds]; abhivimānam, [and] infinite; saḥ, he; sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds; sarveṣu bhūteṣu, in all beings; sarveṣu ātmasu, in all selves; annam atti, eats food. Commentary:-Prādeśamātra means one who covers all the worlds, from heaven to the earth—including everything and every being. Abhivimāna means infinite, beyond measure. Here the principle is that if you worship God as finite, you remain finite; if you worship him as infinite, you become infinite. Another principle suggested is that you are one with all. You are happy if all are happy. You cannot expect anything for yourself to the exclusion of others. Yet another principle is to regard your body as the place of an Agnihotra sacrifice, and the food you eat as the oblation. The six scholars mentioned here worshipped the Vaiśvānara Ātman in part—as either heaven, the sun, air, space, water, or the earth. Aśvapati told them their worship was not complete. They should include their own self also as the Vaiśvānara Ātman. In fact, they should realize that there is but one Self and that Self is in everything and in every being.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Then he said to them all:- 'You eat your food, knowing that Vaisvânara Self as if it were many. But he who worships the Vaisvânara Self as a span long, and as [1] identical with himself, he eats food in all worlds, in all beings, in all Selfs.

Footnote:

1. The two words prâdesamâtra and abhivimâna are doubtful. The commentator explains the first in different ways, which are all more or less fanciful. He is measured or known (mâtra) as Self, by means of heaven as his head and the earth as his feet, these being the prâdesas; or, in the mouth and the rest, which are instruments, he is known as without action himself; or, he has the length from heaven to earth, heaven and earth being called prâdesa, because they are taught. The interpretation, supported by the Gâbâlasruti, that prâdesa is the measure from the forehead to the chin, he rejects. Abhivimâna is taken in the same meaning as abhimâna in the Vedânta, seeing everything in oneself. Vaisvânara is taken as the real Self of all beings, and, in the end, of all Selfs, and as thus to be known and worshipped.


Sloka : 5.18.2

तस्य ह वा एतस्यात्मनो वैश्वानरस्य मूर्धैव

सुतेजाश्चक्षुर्विश्वरूपः प्राणः पृथग्वर्त्मात्मा संदेहो

बहुलो बस्तिरेव रयिः पृथिव्येव पादावुर एव वेदिर्लोमानि

बर्हिर्हृदयं गार्हपत्यो मनोऽन्वाहार्यपचन आस्यमाहवनीयः

॥ ५.१८.२॥

tasya ha vā etasyātmano vaiśvānarasya mūrdhaiva

sutejāścakṣurviśvarūpaḥ prāṇaḥ pṛthagvartmātmā saṃdeho

bahulo bastireva rayiḥ pṛthivyeva pādāvura eva vedirlomāni

barhirhṛdayaṃ gārhapatyo mano'nvāhāryapacana āsyamāhavanīyaḥ

.. 5.18.2..



2. Suteja [i.e., ‘the bright and beautiful’—heaven] is the head of this Vaiśvānara Self; Viśvarūpa [‘having many forms’—the sun] is the eye; Pṛthagvartmā [‘one who changes direction’—air] is the prāṇa; Bahula [‘pervasive’—space] is the middle part; Rayi [‘wealth’—water] is the bladder; the earth [Pratiṣṭhā—‘the support’] is the feet; the sacrificial altar is the chest; the kuśa grass is the hair on the chest; the Gārhapatya fire is the heart; the Anvāhāryapacana [i.e., the Dakṣiṇāgni] fire is the mind; and the Āhavanīya fire is the mouth.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasya etasya ha vai vaiśvānarasya ātmanaḥ, of this Vaiśvānara Ātman; sutejāḥ eva mūrdhā, heaven is the head; viśvarūpaḥ cakṣuḥ, the sun is the eye; pṛthakvartmātmā prāṇaḥ, air is prāṇa; bahulaḥ sandehaḥ, the sky is the middle part of the body; rayiḥ bastiḥ eva, water is the bladder; pṛthivī eva pādau, the earth is the feet; vediḥ, the sacrificial altar; ura eva, is the chest; barhiḥ lomāni, the kuśa grass [used in the sacrifice] is the hair [on the chest]; gārhapatyaḥ hṛdayam, the Gārhapatya fire is the heart; anvāhāryapacana manaḥ, the Anvāhāryapacana fire [i.e., the Dakṣiṇāgni fire] is the mind; āhavanīyaḥ āsyam, the Āhavanīya fire is the mouth. Iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighteenth section. Commentary:-The implication is that none of these taken separately can be the Vaiśvānara Self. It is only a part of it.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'Of that Vaisvânara Self the head is Sutegas (having good light), the eye Visvarûpa (multiform), the breath Prithagvartman (having various courses), the trunk Bahula (full), the bladder Rayi (wealth), the feet the earth, the chest the altar, the hairs the grass on the altar, the heart the Gârhapatya fire, the mind the Anvâhârya fire, the mouth the Âhavanîya fire.


Sloka : 5.19.1

॥ इति अष्टादशः खण्डः ॥

तद्यद्भक्तं प्रथममागच्छेत्तद्धोमीयꣳ स यां

प्रथमामाहुतिं जुहुयात्तां जुहुयात्प्राणाय स्वाहेति

प्राणस्तृप्यति ॥ ५.१९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tadyadbhaktaṃ prathamamāgacchettaddhomīyagͫ sa yāṃ

prathamāmāhutiṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyātprāṇāya svāheti

prāṇastṛpyati .. 5.19.1..



1. The first part of the food is like the first oblation. One who eats should offer it as an oblation to prāṇa, saying, ‘Prāṇāya svāhā’ [i.e., I offer this as an oblation to prāṇa]. With this, your prāṇa becomes pleased.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, therefore; yat bhaktam, that food which; prathamam āgacchet, comes first; tat, that; homīyam, is meant as an oblation; saḥ, he [who eats]; yām prathamām āhutim, that first oblation; juhuyāt, offers; tām, that; juhuyāt, offers; prāṇāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Prāṇāya svāhā’; prāṇaḥ tṛpyati, [then] prāṇa is pleased. Commentary:-Here eating is being compared to performing a sacrifice. Every time you put food into your mouth, it is as if you are offering an oblation. Prāṇa is the deity to whom you offer the first oblation. The word prāṇa in this context means that aspect of the vital force which is responsible for respiration.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Therefore [1] the first food which a man may take, is in the place of Homa. And he who offers that first oblation, should offer it to Prâna (up-breathing), saying Svâhâ. Then Prâna (up-breathing) is satisfied,

Footnote:

1. The object now is to show that to him who knows the Vaisvânara Self, the act of feeding himself is like feeding Vaisvânara, and that feeding Vaisvânara is the true Agnihotra.


Sloka : 5.19.2

प्राणे तृप्यति चक्षुस्तृप्यति चक्षुषि

तृप्यत्यादित्यस्तृप्यत्यादित्ये तृप्यति द्यौस्तृप्यति

दिवि तृप्यन्त्यां यत्किंच द्यौश्चादित्यश्चाधितिष्ठतस्तत्तृप्यति

तस्यानुतृप्तिं तृप्यति प्रजया पशुभिरन्नाद्येन तेजसा

ब्रह्मवर्चसेनेति ॥ ५.१९.२॥

prāṇe tṛpyati cakṣustṛpyati cakṣuṣi

tṛpyatyādityastṛpyatyāditye tṛpyati dyaustṛpyati

divi tṛpyantyāṃ yatkiṃca dyauścādityaścādhitiṣṭhatastattṛpyati

tasyānutṛptiṃ tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena tejasā

brahmavarcaseneti .. 5.19.2..



2. When prāṇa is pleased, the eye is pleased; when the eye is pleased, the sun is pleased; when the sun is pleased, heaven is pleased; when heaven is pleased, whatever there is ruled by heaven and the sun is pleased. Then when that is pleased, the eater derives pleasure from his children, from his animals, from an abundance of food, from physical strength, and from his good life and scholarship.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prāṇe tṛpyati, when prāṇa is pleased; cakṣuḥ tṛpyati, the eye is pleased; cakṣuṣi tṛpyati, when the eye is pleased; ādityaḥ tṛpyati, the sun is pleased; āditye tṛpyati, when the sun is pleased; dyauḥ tṛpyati, heaven is pleased; divi tṛpyantyām, when heaven is pleased; yat kiñca, whatever; dyauḥ ca ādityaḥ ca adhitiṣṭhataḥ, is there ruled by heaven and the sun; tat tṛpyati, that is pleased; tasya anu tṛptim, with its being pleased; tṛpyati, he [the eater] is pleased; prajayā, by children; paśubhiḥ, by animals; annādyena, by food; tejasā, by vigour; brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the nineteenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'If Prâna is satisfied, the eye is satisfied, if the eye is satisfied, the sun is satisfied, if the sun is satisfied, heaven is satisfied, if heaven is satisfied, whatever is under heaven and under the sun is satisfied.. And through their satisfaction he (the sacrificer or eater) himself is satisfied with offspring, cattle, health, brightness, and Vedic splendour.


Sloka : 5.20.1

॥ इति एकोनविंशः खण्डः ॥

अथ यां द्वितीयां जुहुयात्तां जुहुयाद्व्यानाय स्वाहेति

व्यानस्तृप्यति ॥ ५.२०.१॥

.. iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yāṃ dvitīyāṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyādvyānāya svāheti

vyānastṛpyati .. 5.20.1..



1. When he [the eater] offers the second oblation, he offers it saying, ‘Vyānāya svāhā’ [I offer this as an oblation to vyāna]. With this, vyāna becomes pleased.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yām dvitīyām juhuyāt, when he offers the second [oblation]; tām juhuyāt, he offers that; vyānāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Vyānāya svāhā’; vyānaḥ tṛpyati, [then] vyāna is pleased. Commentary:-Vyāna is the aspect of the vital force responsible for our speech and for feats requiring great effort. It operates on the nerves.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'And he who offers the second oblation, should offer it to Vyâna (back-breathing), saying Svâhâ. Then Vyâna is satisfied,


Sloka : 5.20.2

व्याने तृप्यति श्रोत्रं तृप्यति श्रोत्रे तृप्यति

चन्द्रमास्तृप्यति चन्द्रमसि तृप्यति दिशस्तृप्यन्ति

दिक्षु तृप्यन्तीषु यत्किंच दिशश्च चन्द्रमाश्चाधितिष्ठन्ति

तत्तृप्यति तस्यानु तृप्तिं तृप्यति प्रजया पशुभिरन्नाद्येन

तेजसा ब्रह्मवर्चसेनेति ॥ ५.२०.२॥

vyāne tṛpyati śrotraṃ tṛpyati śrotre tṛpyati

candramāstṛpyati candramasi tṛpyati diśastṛpyanti

dikṣu tṛpyantīṣu yatkiṃca diśaśca candramāścādhitiṣṭhanti

tattṛpyati tasyānu tṛptiṃ tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena

tejasā brahmavarcaseneti .. 5.20.2..



2. When vyāna is pleased, the ear is pleased; when the ear is pleased, the moon is pleased; when the moon is pleased, the quarters are pleased; with the quarters being pleased, whatever there is ruled by the quarters and the moon is pleased. Then when that is pleased, the eater derives pleasure from his children, from his animals, from an abundance of food, from physical strength, and from his good life and scholarship.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vyāne tṛpyati, when vyāna is pleased; śrotram tṛpyati, the ear is pleased; śrotre tṛpyati, when the ear is pleased; candramāḥ tṛpyati, the moon is pleased; candramasi tṛpyati, when the moon is pleased; diśaḥ tṛpyanti, the quarters are pleased; dikṣu tṛpyantīṣu, if the quarters are pleased; yat kiñca, whatever; diśaḥ ca candramāḥ ca adhitiṣṭhanti, there is ruled by the quarters and the moon; tat tṛpyati, that is pleased; tasya anu tṛptim, with its being pleased; tṛpyati, he [the eater] is pleased; prajayā, by children; paśubhiḥ, by animals; annādyena, by food; tejasā, by vigour; brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti viṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twentieth section. Commentary:-Section Twenty-One

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'If Vyâna is satisfied, the ear is satisfied, if the ear is satisfied, the moon is satisfied, if the moon is satisfied, the quarters are satisfied, if the quarters are satisfied, whatever is under the quarters and under the moon is satisfied. And through their satisfaction he (the sacrificer or eater) himself is satisfied with offspring, cattle, health, brightness, and Vedic splendour.


Sloka : 5.21.1

॥ इति विंशः खण्डः ॥

अथ यां तृतीयां जुहुयात्तां जुहुयादपानाय

स्वाहेत्यपानस्तृप्यति ॥ ५.२१.१॥

.. iti viṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yāṃ tṛtīyāṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyādapānāya

svāhetyapānastṛpyati .. 5.21.1..



1. When he [the eater] offers the third oblation, he offers it saying, ‘Apānāya svāhā’ [I offer this as an oblation to apāna]. With this, apāna becomes pleased.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yām tṛtīyām juhuyāt, when he offers the third [oblation]; tām juhuyāt, he offers that; apānāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Apānāya svāhā’; apānaḥ tṛpyati, [then] apāna is pleased. Commentary:-Apāna is the aspect of the vital force responsible for elimination of waste from the body.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'And he who offers the third oblation, should offer it to Apâna (down-breathing), saying Svâhâ. Then Apâna is satisfied. If Apâna is satisfied, the tongue is satisfied, if the tongue is satisfied, Agni (fire) is satisfied, if Agni is satisfied, the earth is satisfied, if the earth is satisfied, whatever is under the earth and under fire is satisfied.


Sloka : 5.21.2

अपाने तृप्यति वाक्तृप्यति वाचि तृप्यन्त्यामग्निस्तृप्यत्यग्नौ

तृप्यति पृथिवी तृप्यति पृथिव्यां तृप्यन्त्यां यत्किंच

पृथिवी चाग्निश्चाधितिष्ठतस्तत्तृप्यति

तस्यानु तृप्तिं तृप्यति प्रजया पशुभिरन्नाद्येन तेजसा

ब्रह्मवर्चसेनेति ॥ ५.२१.२॥

apāne tṛpyati vāktṛpyati vāci tṛpyantyāmagnistṛpyatyagnau

tṛpyati pṛthivī tṛpyati pṛthivyāṃ tṛpyantyāṃ yatkiṃca

pṛthivī cāgniścādhitiṣṭhatastattṛpyati

tasyānu tṛptiṃ tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena tejasā

brahmavarcaseneti .. 5.21.2..



2. When apāna is pleased, the organ of speech is pleased; the organ of speech being pleased, fire is pleased; when fire is pleased, the earth is pleased; the earth being pleased, whatever is under the control of the earth and fire is pleased. Then when that is pleased, the eater derives pleasure from his children, from his animals, from an abundance of food, from physical strength, and from his good -life and scholarship.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Apāne tṛpyati, when apāna is pleased; vāk tṛpyati, the organ of speech is pleased; vāci tṛpyantyām, the organ of speech being pleased; agniḥ tṛpyati, fire is pleased; agnau tṛpyati, when fire is pleased; pṛthivī tṛpyati, the earth is pleased; pṛthivyām tṛpyantyām, the earth being pleased; yat kiñca, whatever; pṛthivī ca agniḥ ca adhitiṣṭhataḥ, is under the control of the earth and fire; tat tṛpyati, that is pleased; tasya anu tṛptim, with its being pleased; tṛpyāti, he [the eater] is pleased; prajayā, by children; paśubhiḥ, by animals; annādyena, by food; tejasā, by vigour; brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-first section. Commentary:-Section Twenty-Two

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'And through their satisfaction he (the sacrificer or eater) himself is satisfied with offspring, cattle, health, brightness, and Vedic splendour.


Sloka : 5.22.1

॥ इति एकविंशः खण्डः ॥

अथ यां चतुर्थीं जुहुयात्तां जुहुयात्समानाय स्वाहेति

समानस्तृप्यति ॥ ५.२२.१॥

.. iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yāṃ caturthīṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyātsamānāya svāheti

samānastṛpyati .. 5.22.1..



1. When he [the eater] offers the fourth oblation, he offers it saying, ‘Samānāya svāhā’ [I offer this as an oblation to samāna]. With this, samāna becomes pleased.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yām caturthīm juhuyāt, when he offers the fourth [oblation]; tām juhuyāt, he offers that; samānāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Samānāya svāhā’; samānaḥ tṛpyati, [then] samāna is pleased. Commentary:-Samāna is the aspect of the vital force responsible for digestion and assimilation of food.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'And he who offers the fourth oblation, should offer it to Samâna (on-breathing), saying Svâhâ. Then Samâna is satisfied,


Sloka : 5.22.2

समाने तृप्यति मनस्तृप्यति मनसि तृप्यति पर्जन्यस्तृप्यति

पर्जन्ये तृप्यति विद्युत्तृप्यति विद्युति तृप्यन्त्यां यत्किंच

विद्युच्च पर्जन्यश्चाधितिष्ठतस्तत्तृप्यति तस्यानु तृप्तिं

तृप्यति प्रजया पशुभिरन्नाद्येन तेजसा ब्रह्मवर्चसेनेति

॥ ५.२२.२ ॥

samāne tṛpyati manastṛpyati manasi tṛpyati parjanyastṛpyati

parjanye tṛpyati vidyuttṛpyati vidyuti tṛpyantyāṃ yatkiṃca

vidyucca parjanyaścādhitiṣṭhatastattṛpyati tasyānu tṛptiṃ

tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena tejasā brahmavarcaseneti

.. 5.22.2 ..



2. When samāna is pleased, the mind is pleased; when the mind is pleased, the cloud is pleased; when the cloud is pleased, lightning is pleased; lightning being pleased, whatever is under the control of lightning and the cloud is pleased. Then when that is pleased, the eater derives pleasure from his children, from his animals, from an abundance of food, from physical strength, and from his good life and scholarship.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Samāne tṛpyati, when samāna is pleased; manaḥ tṛpyati, the mind is pleased; manasi tṛpyati, when the mind is pleased; parjanyaḥ tṛpyati, the cloud is pleased; parjanye tṛpyati, when the cloud is pleased; vidyut tṛpyati, lightning is pleased; vidyuti tṛpyantyām, lightning being pleased; yat kiñca, whatever; vidyut ca parjanyaḥ ca adhitiṣṭhataḥ, is under the control of lightning and the cloud; tat tṛpyati, that is pleased; tasya am tṛptim, with its being pleased; tṛpyati, he [the eater] is pleased; prajayā, by children; paśubhiḥ, by animals; annādyena, by food; tejasā, by vigour; brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-second section. Commentary:-Section Twenty-Three

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'If Samâna is satisfied, the mind is satisfied, if the mind is satisfied, Parganya (god of rain) is satisfied, if Parganya is satisfied, lightning is satisfied, if lightning is satisfied, whatever is under Parganya and under lightning is satisfied. And through their satisfaction he (the sacrificer or cater) himself is satisfied with offspring, cattle, health, brightness, and Vedic splendour.


Sloka : 5.23.1

॥ इति द्वाविंशः खण्डः ॥

अथ यां पञ्चमीं जुहुयात्तां जुहुयादुदानाय

स्वाहेत्युदानस्तृप्यति ॥ ५.२३.१॥

.. iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yāṃ pañcamīṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyādudānāya

svāhetyudānastṛpyati .. 5.23.1..



1. When he [the eater] offers the fifth oblation, he offers it saying, ‘Udānāya svāhā’ [I offer this as an oblation to udāna]. With this, udāna becomes pleased.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yām pañcamīm juhuyāṭ when he offers the fifth [oblation]; tām juhuyāt, he offers that; udānāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Udānāya svāhā’; udānaḥ tṛpyati, [then] udāna is pleased. Commentary:-Udāna is the aspect of the vital force responsible for helping the individual self leave the body at the time of death.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'And he who offers the fifth oblation, should offer it to Udâna (out-breathing), saying Svâhâ. Then Udâna is satisfied,


Sloka : 5.23.2

उदाने तृप्यति त्वक्तृप्यति त्वचि तृप्यन्त्यां वायुस्तृप्यति

वायौ तृप्यत्याकाशस्तृप्यत्याकाशे तृप्यति यत्किंच

वायुश्चाकाशश्चाधितिष्ठतस्तत्तृप्यति तस्यानु तृप्तिं

तृप्यति प्रजया पशुभिरन्नाद्येन तेजसा ब्रह्मवर्चसेन

॥ ५.२३.२॥

udāne tṛpyati tvaktṛpyati tvaci tṛpyantyāṃ vāyustṛpyati

vāyau tṛpyatyākāśastṛpyatyākāśe tṛpyati yatkiṃca

vāyuścākāśaścādhitiṣṭhatastattṛpyati tasyānu tṛptiṃ

tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena tejasā brahmavarcasena

.. 5.23.2..



2. When udāna is pleased, the organ of touch is pleased; the organ of touch being pleased, air is pleased; when air is pleased, space is pleased; when space is pleased, whatever is under the control of air and space is pleased. Then when that is pleased, the eater derives pleasure from his children, from his animals, from an abundance of food, from physical strength, and from his good life and scholarship.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Udāne tṛpyati, when udāna is pleased; tvak tṛpyati, the organ of touch [i.e., the skin] is pleased; tvaci tṛpyantyām, the organ of touch being pleased; vāyuḥ tṛpyati, air is pleased; vāyau tṛpyati, when air is pleased; ākāśaḥ tṛpyati, space is pleased; ākāśe tṛpyati, when space is pleased; yat kiñca, whatever; vāyuḥ ca ākāśaḥ ca adhitiṣṭhataḥ, is under the control of air and space; tat tṛpyati, that is pleased; tasya anu tṛptim, with its being pleased; tṛpyati, he [the eater] is pleased; prajayā, by children; paśubhiḥ, by animals; annādyena, by food; tejasā, by vigour; brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-third section. Commentary:-Section Twenty-Four

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'If Udâna is satisfied, Vâyu (air) is satisfied, if Vâyu is satisfied, ether is satisfied, if ether is satisfied, whatever is under Vâyu, and under the ether is satisfied. And through their satisfaction he (the sacrificer or eater) himself is satisfied with offspring, cattle, health, brightness, and Vedic splendour.


Sloka : 5.24.1

॥ इति त्रयोविंशः खण्डः ॥

स य इदमविद्वाग्निहोत्रं जुहोति यथाङ्गारानपोह्य

भस्मनि जुहुयात्तादृक्तत्स्यात् ॥ ५.२४.१॥

.. iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

sa ya idamavidvāgnihotraṃ juhoti yathāṅgārānapohya

bhasmani juhuyāttādṛktatsyāt .. 5.24.1..



1. If a person performs the Agnihotra sacrifice without knowing anything about the Vaiśvānara Self, it will be like offering oblations into ashes instead of the fire.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; agnihotram juhoti, performs the Agnihotra sacrifice; idam avidvān, without knowing this [i.e., about the Vaiśvānara Ātman]; yathā, just Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'If, without knowing this, one offers an Agnihotra, it would be as if a man were to remove the live coals and pour his libation on dead ashes.


Sloka : 5.24.2

अथ य एतदेवं विद्वानग्निहोत्रं जुहोति तस्य सर्वेषु लोकेषु

सर्वेषु भूतेषु सर्वेष्वात्मसु हुतं भवति ॥ ५.२४.२॥

atha ya etadevaṃ vidvānagnihotraṃ juhoti tasya sarveṣu lokeṣu

sarveṣu bhūteṣu sarveṣvātmasu hutaṃ bhavati .. 5.24.2..



2. But he who performs the Agnihotra sacrifice with full knowledge of the Vaiśvānara Self is deemed to have offered oblations to all the worlds, to all beings, and to all selves.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, but; yaḥ, he who; agnihotram juhoti, performs the Agnihotra sacrifice; etat evam vidvān, knowing it accordingly; tasya, his; hutam bhavati, oblation is offered; sarveṣu lokeṣu, to all the worlds; sarveṣu bhūteṣu, to all beings; sarveṣu ātmasu, to all selves. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'But he who offers this Agnihotra with a full knowledge of its true purport, he offers it (i.e. he eats food) [1] in all worlds, in all beings, in all Selfs.

Footnote:

1. Cf. V, 18, 1.


Sloka : 5.24.3

तद्यथेषीकातूलमग्नौ प्रोतं प्रदूयेतैवꣳहास्य सर्वे

पाप्मानः प्रदूयन्ते य एतदेवं विद्वानग्निहोत्रं जुहोति

॥ ५.२४.३॥

tadyatheṣīkātūlamagnau protaṃ pradūyetaivagͫhāsya sarve

pāpmānaḥ pradūyante ya etadevaṃ vidvānagnihotraṃ juhoti

.. 5.24.3..



3. Just as the cotton fibres of the iṣīkā grass are totally consumed when thrown into the fire, similarly all sins are consumed of one who performs the Agnihotra sacrifice with the knowledge of the Vaiśvānara Self.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat yathā, just as; iṣīkā-tūlam, the cotton-like fibre of the iṣīkā grass; agnau, into the fire; protam, on being thrown; pradūyeta, is totally consumed; evam, like this; asya ha, his; sarve pāpmānaḥ, all sins; pradūyante, are burnt up; yaḥ, he who; etat evam vidvān, having known this in this way; agnihotram juhoti, performs the Agnihotra sacrifice. Commentary:-Iṣīkā is a kind of grass that grows very tall and has a cotton-like substance coming from it which is easily consumed when thrown into fire. Similarly, the knowledge that a person is one with all easily consumes the fruits of his sañcita (accumulated) karma and his āgāmī (future) karma. But a person may have to suffer from prārabdha karma, which is already in the process of bearing fruit. Prārabdha karma is like an arrow that has already been shot.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'As the soft fibres of the Ishîkâ reed, when thrown into the fire, are burnt, thus all his sins are burnt whoever offers this Agnihotra with a full knowledge of its true purport.


Sloka : 5.24.4

तस्मादु हैवंविद्यद्यपि चण्डालायोच्छिष्टं

प्रयच्छेदात्मनि हैवास्य तद्वैश्वानरे हुतꣳ स्यादिति

तदेष श्लोकः ॥ ५.२४.४॥

tasmādu haivaṃvidyadyapi caṇḍālāyocchiṣṭaṃ

prayacchedātmani haivāsya tadvaiśvānare hutagͫ syāditi

tadeṣa ślokaḥ .. 5.24.4..



4. Therefore, even if a person who knows the Vaiśvānara Ātman gives the remnants of his food after eating to a person who has no caste, that will be like his oblation offered to his own Vaiśvānara Self. Here is a verse on the subject:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasmāt, therefore; u ha evam vit, one who knows [the Vaiśvānara Self]; yadi api, even if; caṇḍālāya, to a caṇḍāla [an outcaste]; ucchiṣṭam, part of the food left after eating; prayacchet, one gives; tat, that [leftover food]; asya ha eva hutam syāt, will be his oblation offered; vaiśvānare ātmani iti, to the Vaiśvānara Ātman; tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject. Commentary:-Normally food that is left over after eating should not be given to anyone. But suppose a person has realized his Vaiśvānara Self and he gives such food to an outcaste. That is not a breach of any rule. Rather, it will be like an oblation offered to his own Self, for it is the same Self who is giving and who is receiving.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Even if he gives what is left of his food to a Kandâla, it would be offered in his (the Kandâla's) Vaisvânara Self. And so it is said in this Sloka:--


Sloka : 5.24.5

यथेह क्षुधिता बाला मातरं पर्युपासत एवꣳ सर्वाणि

भूतान्यग्निहोत्रमुपासत इत्यग्निहोत्रमुपासत इति ॥ ५.२४.५॥

yatheha kṣudhitā bālā mātaraṃ paryupāsata evagͫ sarvāṇi

bhūtānyagnihotramupāsata ityagnihotramupāsata iti .. 5.24.5..



5. Just as here in this world, when children are hungry they go to their mother and beg for food, in the same way, all living beings beg that the Agnihotra sacrifice may be performed without any delay.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yathā, just as; iha, in this world; kṣudhitāḥ bālāḥ, hungry children; mātaram paryupāsate, go to their mother [for food]; evam, in the same way; sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all living beings; agnihotram upāsate iti, wait for the Agnihotra sacrifice to begin; agnihotram upāsate iti, wait for the Agnihotra sacrifice to begin. Iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-fourth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi pañcamaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the fifth chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad. Commentary:-Here the reference is to a person who has attained Self-knowledge. When such a person performs his Agnihotra sacrifice as described before, by taking his meal, it is as if all living beings are eating. This happens because he is one with all.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'As hungry children here on earth sit (expectantly) round their mother, so do all beings sit round the Agnihotra, yea, round the Agnihotra.'


Sloka : 6.1.1

॥ इति चतुर्विंशः खण्डः ॥

॥ इति पञ्चमोऽध्यायः ॥

॥ षष्ठोऽध्यायः ॥

श्वेतकेतुर्हारुणेय आस तꣳ ह पितोवाच श्वेतकेतो

वस ब्रह्मचर्यं न वै सोम्यास्मत्कुलीनोऽननूच्य

ब्रह्मबन्धुरिव भवतीति ॥ ६.१.१॥

.. iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

.. iti pañcamo'dhyāyaḥ ..

.. ṣaṣṭho'dhyāyaḥ ..

śvetaketurhāruṇeya āsa tagͫ ha pitovāca śvetaketo

vasa brahmacaryaṃ na vai somyāsmatkulīno'nanūcya

brahmabandhuriva bhavatīti .. 6.1.1..



1. Āruṇi had a son named Śvetaketu. Once Āruṇi told him:- ‘Śvetaketu, you should now live as a brahmacārin. No one in our family has not studied the scriptures and has not been a good brāhmin’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Śvetaketuḥ ha Āruṇeyaḥ āsa, Āruṇi had a son named Śvetaketu; tam ha pita uvāca, his father said to him [to Śvetaketu]; śvetaketo, O Śvetaketu; vasa brahmacaryam, live as a brahmacārin [i.e., a celibate student]; na vai somya asmat kulīnaḥ, no one in our family, my child; ananūcya, has not studied the scriptures; brahma-bandhuḥ iva bhavati iti, and has not been a good brāhmin. Commentary:-Om. The word brahma-bandhu literally means a relative or friend of a brāhmin—in other words, one who is a brāhmin in name only. The question arises here, why did Āruṇi himself not invest his son with the sacred thread, initiating him into the life of a brahmacārin? Why did he suggest that his son go to another brāhmin for his sacred thread and for his education and training? Śaṅkara says, it is likely that Āruṇi was about to start on a journey and would be away from home for some time, and that is why he decided to send his son to another brāhmin.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Harih, Om. There lived once Svetaketu Âruneya (the grandson of Aruna). To him his father (Uddâlaka, the son of Aruna) said:- 'Svetaketu, go to school; for there is none belonging to our race, darling, who, not having studied (the Veda), is, as it were, a Brâhmana by birth only.'


Sloka : 6.1.2

स ह द्वादशवर्ष उपेत्य चतुर्विꣳशतिवर्षः

सर्वान्वेदानधीत्य महामना अनूचानमानी स्तब्ध

एयाय तꣳह पितोवाच ॥ ६.१.२॥

sa ha dvādaśavarṣa upetya caturvigͫśativarṣaḥ

sarvānvedānadhītya mahāmanā anūcānamānī stabdha

eyāya tagͫha pitovāca .. 6.1.2..



2. Śvetaketu went to his teacher’s house at the age of twelve. After studying all the Vedas, he returned home when he was twenty-four, having become very serious and vain, and thinking himself to be a great scholar. [Noticing this,] his father said to him:- ‘O Śvetaketu, you have now become very serious and vain, and you think you are a great scholar. But did you ask your teacher for that teaching [about Brahman]—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ ha, he [Śvetaketu]; dvādaśa-varṣaḥ, at the age of twelve; upetya, having gone [to his teacher as directed by his father]; caturviṃśati-varṣaḥ, till he was twenty-four; sarvān vedān adhītya, having studied all the Vedas; eyāya, returned home; mahāmanāḥ, very serious; anūcānamānī, vain; stabdhaḥ, having a high opinion of his scholarship; tam ha pita uvāca, his father said to him; śvetaketo, O Śvetaketu; yat nu idam somya, now young man; mahāmanāḥ asi, you have become very serious; anūcānamānī, vain; stabdhaḥ, thinking yourself to be a great scholar; tam ādeśam, that teaching; aprākṣyaḥ uta, did you ask [your teacher]. Commentary:-Āruṇi must have been disappointed to see Śvetaketu’s manners when he returned home. In order to instil into Śvetaketu the spirit of humility, Āruṇi put a question to him. He wanted to remind his son that scholarship was not the same as Self-knowledge. He also wanted Śvetaketu to understand that unless he knew the secret of Self-knowledge, his education was pointless. This secret of Self-knowledge is ādeśa.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Having begun his apprenticeship (with a teacher) when he was twelve years of age [1], Svetaketu returned to his father, when he was twenty-four, having then studied all the Vedas,--conceited, considering himself well-read, and stern.

Footnote:

1. This was rather late, for the son of a Brahman might have begun his studies when he was seven years old. Âpastamba-sûtras I, 1, 18. Twelve years was considered the right time for mastering one of the Vedas.


Sloka : 6.1.3

श्वेतकेतो यन्नु सोम्येदं महामना अनूचानमानी

स्तब्धोऽस्युत तमादेशमप्राक्ष्यः येनाश्रुतꣳ श्रुतं

भवत्यमतं मतमविज्ञातं विज्ञातमिति कथं नु भगवः

स आदेशो भवतीति ॥ ६.१.३॥

śvetaketo yannu somyedaṃ mahāmanā anūcānamānī

stabdho'syuta tamādeśamaprākṣyaḥ yenāśrutagͫ śrutaṃ

bhavatyamataṃ matamavijñātaṃ vijñātamiti kathaṃ nu bhagavaḥ

sa ādeśo bhavatīti .. 6.1.3..



3.‘—that teaching by which what is never heard becomes heard, what is never thought of becomes thought of, what is never known becomes known?’ [Śvetaketu asked,] ‘Sir, what is that teaching?’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yena, [that teaching] by which; aśrutam, what is never heard; śrutam bhavati, becomes heard; amatam matam, what is never thought of [becomes] thought of; avijñātam vijñātam iti, what is never known [becomes] known; bhagavaḥ, O lord; katham nu saḥ ādeśaḥ bhavati iti, what is that teaching? Commentary:-How can there be such a thing by knowing which you know everything else? This is what is puzzling Śvetaketu. Is it possible that by knowing one thing you also know something else? Separate things are to be known separately. But the claim is being made here that unless you know the Self you know nothing. And if you know the Self you know everything. This sounds like an absurd proposition. This ādeśa, or teaching, that Āruṇi is talking about is the secret that opens up one’s eyes, that makes one conscious of the fact that until and unless one knows the Self, one knows nothing.

Translation By Max Müller

3. His father said to him:- 'Svetaketu, as you are so conceited, considering yourself so well-read, and so stern, my dear, have you ever asked for that instruction by which we hear what cannot be heard, by which we perceive what cannot be perceived, by which we know what cannot be known?'


Sloka : 6.1.4

यथा सोम्यैकेन मृत्पिण्डेन सर्वं मृन्मयं विज्ञातꣳ

स्याद्वाचारम्भणं विकारो नामधेयं मृत्तिकेत्येव सत्यम्

॥ ६.१.४॥

yathā somyaikena mṛtpiṇḍena sarvaṃ mṛnmayaṃ vijñātagͫ

syādvācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ mṛttiketyeva satyam

.. 6.1.4..



4. O Somya, it is like this:- By knowing a single lump of earth you know all objects made of earth. All changes are mere words, in name only. But earth is the reality.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, young man; yathā, just as; ekena mṛtpiṇḍena, from one single lump of earth; sarvam mṛnmayam vijñātam, all objects made of earth are known; vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only; mṛttika iti eva satyam, the earth is the reality. Commentary:-What is this ādeśa that Śvetaketu’s father wanted him to learn from his teacher? It is that there is only one single reality in this world, and that reality appears to be many because of the different names and forms superimposed on it. Here he is using earth as an example. If you know a single thing made of earth—for instance, a pot—then you know all things made of earth. How? The word ‘pot’ is merely a name; the real object is earth. Earth may assume different names and forms, but it remains the same earth.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'What is that instruction, Sir?' he asked. The father replied:- 'My dear, as by one clod of clay all that is made of clay is known, the difference [1] being only a name, arising from speech, but the truth being that all is clay;

Footnote:

1. Vikâra, difference, variety, change, by form and name, development, cf. VI, 3, 3.


Sloka : 6.1.5

यथा सोम्यैकेन लोहमणिना सर्वं लोहमयं विज्ञातꣳ

स्याद्वाचारम्भणं विकारो नामधेयं लोहमित्येव

सत्यम् ॥ ६.१.५॥

yathā somyaikena lohamaṇinā sarvaṃ lohamayaṃ vijñātagͫ

syādvācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ lohamityeva

satyam .. 6.1.5..



5. O Somya, it is like this:- By knowing a single lump of gold you know all objects made of gold. All changes are mere words, in name only. But gold is the reality.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, young man; yathā, just as; ekena lohamaṇinā, from one single lump of gold; saryam lohamayam vijñātam, all objects made of gold [bangles, crowns, necklaces, etc.] are known; vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only; loham iti eva satyam, the gold is the reality. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'And as, my dear, by one nugget of gold [1] all that is made of gold is known, the difference being only a name, arising from speech, but the truth being that all is gold?

Footnote:

1. The commentator takes lohamani here as suvarnapinda.


Sloka : 6.1.6

यथा सोम्यिकेन नखनिकृन्तनेन सर्वं कार्ष्णायसं विज्ञातꣳ

स्याद्वाचारम्भणं विकारो नामधेयं कृष्णायसमित्येव

सत्यमेवꣳसोम्य स आदेशो भवतीति ॥ ६.१.६॥

yathā somyikena nakhanikṛntanena sarvaṃ kārṣṇāyasaṃ vijñātagͫ

syādvācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ kṛṣṇāyasamityeva

satyamevagͫsomya sa ādeśo bhavatīti .. 6.1.6..



6. O Somya, it is like this:- By knowing a single nail-cutter you know all objects made of iron. All changes are mere words, in name only. But iron is the reality. O Somya, this is the teaching I spoke of.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, young man; yathā, just as; ekena nakhanikṛntanena, from one single nail-cutter; sarvam kārṣṇāyasam vijñātam, all objects made of iron are known; vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only; kṛṣṇāyasam iti eva satyam, the iron is the reality; somya, O Somya; evam saḥ ādeśaḥ bhavati iti, this is that teaching [I told you of]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'And as, my dear, by one pair of nail-scissors all that is made of iron (kârshnâyasam) is known, the difference being only a name, arising from speech, but the truth being that all is iron,--thus, my dear, is that instruction.'


Sloka : 6.1.7

न वै नूनं भगवन्तस्त एतदवेदिषुर्यद्ध्येतदवेदिष्यन्कथं

मे नावक्ष्यन्निति भगवाꣳस्त्वेव मे तद्ब्रवीत्विति तथा

सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.१.७॥

na vai nūnaṃ bhagavantasta etadavediṣuryaddhyetadavediṣyankathaṃ

me nāvakṣyanniti bhagavāgͫstveva me tadbravītviti tathā

somyeti hovāca .. 6.1.7..



7. [Śvetaketu said:-] ‘Surely my revered teachers did not know this truth. If they knew it, why should they not have told me? So please explain it to me, sir.’ His father said, ‘Let it be so, my son’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Bhagavantaḥ te, those revered teachers; na vai nūnam avediṣuḥ, surely did not know; etat, this [fact that if you know one you know all]; yat, if; hi, for sure; etat avediṣyan, they knew this; me, to me [their favourite disciple]; katham, why; na avakṣyan iti, did they not impart it; bhagavān, sir; tu eva me tat bravītu iti, so please explain it to me; tathā, let it be so; somya, young man; iti ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

7. The son said:- 'Surely those venerable men (my teachers) did not know that. For if they had known it, why should they not have told it me? Do you, Sir, therefore tell me that.' 'Be it so,' said the father.


Sloka : 6.2.1

॥ इति प्रथमः खण्डः ॥

सदेव सोम्येदमग्र आसीदेकमेवाद्वितीयम् ।

तद्धैक आहुरसदेवेदमग्र आसीदेकमेवाद्वितीयं

तस्मादसतः सज्जायत ॥ ६.२.१॥

.. iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

sadeva somyedamagra āsīdekamevādvitīyam .

taddhaika āhurasadevedamagra āsīdekamevādvitīyaṃ

tasmādasataḥ sajjāyata .. 6.2.1..



1. Somya, before this world was manifest there was only existence, one without a second. On this subject, some maintain that before this world was manifest there was only non-existence, one without a second. Out of that non-existence, existence emerged.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, young man; idam, this [world as we see it, with its names and forms]; agre, before [its manifestation]; sat eva, was existence only; ekam eva advitīyam, one without a second; āsīt, existed; tat, about that; eke, some [Buddhists and others]; āhuḥ, say; idam, this [world]; agre, first [before its manifestation]; asat eva, nothingness only; ekam eva advitīyam, one without a second; āsīt, existed; tasmāt, from that; asataḥ, nothingness; sat jāyata, existence emerged. Commentary:-‘Something out of nothing’ is an absurd idea. If there is a tree, it must have come out of a seed, whether the seed was seen by anyone or not. Sometimes you see a tree sprouting from a crack on the roof of a building. Where did it come from? From a seed which the wind must have blown on to the roof. A tree can only grow from a seed. Similarly, existence can only come from existence. This is what the Upaniṣad is suggesting when it says that before the world was manifest there was existence, one without a second. The word means ‘existence.’ The Vedānta scriptures describe this existence as a state of being. It is one without a second. It is pure, all-pervasive, beyond thought and speech, and formless. It is consciousness. Some philosophers maintain, however, that before the world originated there was nothing, one without a second. They claim that the world emerged from this nothing. Vedānta says, suppose you are passing by a potter’s house and you see him with a huge lump of clay. Then you return that same way a few hours later, and you are surprised to see that the nameless and formless lump of clay is transformed into a number of pots, plates, bowls, cups, etc.—each distinct with a name and a form. Similarly, existence becomes manifest as this world, but it remains existence. It The Naiyāyikas, the Buddhists, and others think just the opposite—that existence has come out of non-existence. But how can they know anything about a past non-existence? And how can they know, in particular, that it is one only without a second? In fact, the concept of non-existence is being introduced here only to make a stronger foundation for the concept of existence. In order to know what to avoid, one must be able to see it. Similarly, the concept of non-existence is added only to make it clear what is meant by existence.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'In the beginning,' my dear, 'there was that only which is (τὸ ὄν), one only, without a second. Others say, in the beginning there was that only which is not (τὸ μὴ ὄν), one only, without a second; and from that which is not, that which is was born.


Sloka : 6.2.2

कुतस्तु खलु सोम्यैवꣳस्यादिति होवाच कथमसतः

सज्जायेतेति। सत्त्वेव सोम्येदमग्र

आसीदेकमेवाद्वितीयम् ॥ ६.२.२॥

kutastu khalu somyaivagͫsyāditi hovāca kathamasataḥ

sajjāyeteti. sattveva somyedamagra

āsīdekamevādvitīyam .. 6.2.2..



2. The father said:- ‘O Somya, what proof is there for this—that from nothing something has emerged? Rather, before this world came into being, O Somya, there was only existence, one without a second’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; kutaḥ tu, but what [proof is there]; khalu, indeed; evam syāt, could this be so; iti ha uvāca, he [Āruṇi] said; katham, in what way; asataḥ, from non-existence; sat, existence; jāyata iti, will come; tu, on the other hand; somya, O Somya; idam agre, before this [world]; sat eva āsīt, there Commentary:-Let us say the world was not here before, but it came into existence at a certain point of time. What does this mean? Does this mean that there was a void and out of that void the world as we now see it emerged? As has been stated already, the idea of something coming out of nothing is absurd. Yet some Buddhist scholars, who believe that existence comes from non-existence, argue that unless a seed is destroyed, a tree cannot grow from it. So according to them something comes out of nothing. Śaṅkara argues that it is only the form of the seed that is destroyed. The material that makes up the seed goes on to produce the tree. There is no example anywhere of something coming from nothing. A potter makes pots out of clay. Can he make a pot out of nothing? No. But then the Buddhists argue, can a pot produce another pot? Vedānta says, no, but a pot can change its form. It can become potsherds or it can go back to the form of clay. Vedānta says, the world always existed, but it did not always exist in the form we see it now. A snake is always a snake, whether it is lying like a long rope or it is coiled up. The world is Sat (Existence), and it is nameless and formless. But how it does come to have names and forms? The answer is that Existence is the only reality, but if it seems to have different names and forms, they are merely superimpositions and are not real.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'But how could it be thus, my dear?' the father continued. 'How could that which is, be born of that which is not? No, my dear, only that which is, was in the beginning, one only, without a second.


Sloka : 6.2.3

तदैक्षत बहु स्यां प्रजायेयेति तत्तेजोऽसृजत तत्तेज

ऐक्षत बहु स्यां प्रजायेयेति तदपोऽसृजत ।

तस्माद्यत्र क्वच शोचति स्वेदते वा पुरुषस्तेजस एव

तदध्यापो जायन्ते ॥ ६.२.३॥

tadaikṣata bahu syāṃ prajāyeyeti tattejo'sṛjata tatteja

aikṣata bahu syāṃ prajāyeyeti tadapo'sṛjata .

tasmādyatra kvaca śocati svedate vā puruṣastejasa eva

tadadhyāpo jāyante .. 6.2.3..



3. That Existence decided:- ‘I shall be many. I shall be born.’ He then created fire. That fire also decided:- ‘I shall be many. I shall be born.’ Then fire produced water. That is why whenever or wherever a person mourns or perspires, he produces water.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat, that [existence]; aikṣata, decided; bahu syām, I shall be many; prajāyeya iti, I shall be born; tat, that [existence]; asṛjata, created; tejaḥ, fire; tat tejaḥ, that [existence as] fire; aikṣata, decided; bahu syām, I shall be many; prajāyeya iti, I shall be born; tat, that [fire]; apaḥ, water; asṛjata, created; tasmāt, that is why; yatra kva ca, whenever and wherever; puruṣaḥ, a person; śocati, grieves; svedate vā, or perspires; tat, [it happens] that; tejasaḥ eva, from fire; āpaḥ adhijāyante, water comes. Commentary:-The word aikṣata means ‘saw,’ ‘thought,’ or ‘decided.’ It can only apply to a conscious principle, because only a conscious principle can decide or think or see. And only a conscious being can say that he will be many. The scriptures say that this Existence, or Brahman, is one without a second, always the same, unchanging, and unchangeable. So how can it at the same time be many? Vedānta says that it is like a lump of earth sometimes taking different forms of pots, cups, etc. Or it is like a rope which sometimes looks like a snake. The change is only in names and forms. It is not a real change. Vedānta says, this applies to all that we see in this world. Underlying the seeming diversity there is unity. This unity—this One—supports the diversity. It is this One that has become many, but only in appearance. To go back to the example of the earth, the earth remains earth, though in appearance it may take the form of a lump or of some pots or of some other things. An apt description of this is ‘unity in diversity.’ It is Brahman that has become everything—space, air, fire, water, earth. Then the question arises, how can fire, which is inanimate, think? The answer is that here fire stands for Brahman. Brahman as fire is making things happen. Brahman is the source of everything. It is the base, the reality. Just as earth can be in the form of a lump or a pot, similarly, Brahman can be in the form of fire, water, or something else. It is not that Brahman undergoes any change. Brahman remains Brahman. It is Sat, eternal Existence. It is the Absolute. It is never conditioned by anything. When it says it will be ‘many,’ it means it will appear in many forms, just as earth or gold can be in many forms. But it must be borne in mind that this Existence is also pure consciousness.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'It thought [1], may I be many, may I grow forth. It sent forth fire [2]. 'That fire [3] thought, may I be many, may I grow forth. It sent forth water [4]. 'And therefore whenever anybody anywhere is hot and perspires, water is produced on him from fire alone.

Footnote:

1. Literally, it saw. This verb is explained as showing that the Sat is conscious, not unconscious (bewusst, nicht unbewusst). 2. In other Upanishads the Sat produces first âkâsa, ether, then vâyu, air, and then only tegas, fire. Fire is a better rendering for tegas than light or heat. See Jacobi, Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenl. Gesellschaft, XXIX, . The difficulties, however, of accurately translating tegas are not removed by rendering if by fire, as may be seen immediately afterward in VI, 4, 1, where tegas is said to supply the red colour of agni, the burning fire, not the god of fire. See also VI, 8, 6. In later philosophical treatises the meaning of tegas is more carefully determined than in the Upanishads. 3. Really the Sat, in the form of fire. Fire is whatever burns, cooks, shines, and is red. 4. By water is meant all that is fluid, and bright in colour.


Sloka : 6.2.4

ता आप ऐक्षन्त बह्व्यः स्याम प्रजायेमहीति ता

अन्नमसृजन्त तस्माद्यत्र क्व च वर्षति तदेव भूयिष्ठमन्नं

भवत्यद्भ्य एव तदध्यन्नाद्यं जायते ॥ ६.२.४॥

tā āpa aikṣanta bahvyaḥ syāma prajāyemahīti tā

annamasṛjanta tasmādyatra kva ca varṣati tadeva bhūyiṣṭhamannaṃ

bhavatyadbhya eva tadadhyannādyaṃ jāyate .. 6.2.4..



4. That water decided:- ‘I shall be many; I shall be born.’ That water then created food. This is why whenever and wherever there is rain, at once food grows in great abundance. It is from water that food is produced.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tāḥ āpaḥ, that water; aikṣanta, decided; bahvyaḥ syāma, I shall be many; prajāyemahi iti, I shall be born; tāḥ, that [water]; annam asṛjanta, produced food; tasmāt, that is why; yatra kva ca, whenever and wherever; varṣati, it rains; taṭ at once; bhūyiṣṭham, in great abundance; annam bhavati, food grows; adbhyaḥ eva, it is from water; tat, then; annādyam adhijāyate, food is produced. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section. Commentary:-Here, food represents earth.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Water thought, may I be many, may I grow forth. It sent forth earth [1] (food). 'Therefore whenever it rains anywhere, most food is then produced. From water alone is eatable food produced.

Footnote:

1. By anna, food, is here meant the earth, and all that is heavy, firm, dark in colour.


Sloka : 6.3.1

॥ इति द्वितीयः खण्डः ॥

तेषां खल्वेषां भूतानां त्रीण्येव बीजानि

भवन्त्याण्डजं जीवजमुद्भिज्जमिति ॥ ६.३.१॥

.. iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

teṣāṃ khalveṣāṃ bhūtānāṃ trīṇyeva bījāni

bhavantyāṇḍajaṃ jīvajamudbhijjamiti .. 6.3.1..



1. Living beings have their origin in three ways:- from eggs, from parents, and from plants.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Teṣām khalu eṣām bhūtānām, of these living beings; trīṇi eva bījāni bhavanti, there are three kinds of origin; āṇḍajam, birth from eggs; jīvajam, from parents; udbhijjam iti, from plants. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Of all living things there are indeed three origins only [1], that which springs from an egg (oviparous), that which springs from a living being (viviparous), and that which springs from a germ.

Footnote:

1. In the Ait. Up. four are mentioned, andaga, here ândaga, gâruga (i.e. garâyuga), here gîvaga, svedaga, and udbhigga, svedaga, born from heat, being additional. Cf. Atharva-veda I, 12, 1.


Sloka : 6.3.2

सेयं देवतैक्षत हन्ताहमिमास्तिस्रो देवता अनेन

जीवेनात्मनानुप्रविश्य नामरूपे व्याकरवाणीति ॥ ६.३.२॥

seyaṃ devataikṣata hantāhamimāstisro devatā anena

jīvenātmanānupraviśya nāmarūpe vyākaravāṇīti .. 6.3.2..



2. That god [Existence] decided:- ‘Entering into these three deities [fire, water, and earth], as the individual self, I shall manifest myself in many names and forms’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Sā iyam devatā, that deity [i.e., Sat, Existence]; aikṣata, decided; hanta, so; aham, I; imāḥ tisraḥ devatāḥ, these three gods [i.e., fire, water, and earth]; anena jīvena ātmanā, as the jīvātman [i.e., the individual self]; anupraviśya, having entered; nāmarūpe, as names and forms; vyākaravāṇi iti, I shall manifest. Commentary:-The Self (Sat) is within fire, water, and earth, but that is not to say that it is in any way affected by them. If you stand before a mirror, you see your reflection. The reflection may be good or it may not be good, but does that affect the mirror? The sun gives light to the eyes, but if there is anything wrong with the eyes, does that affect the sun? Similarly, the Self is everywhere and in everything. But wherever it is, it is the same. Names and forms, apart from the Self, are false. But there is, in reality, nothing apart from the Self. Everything is the Self. In that sense, the names and forms are also the Self and therefore real.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'That Being [1] (i. e. that which had produced fire, water, and earth) thought, let me now enter those three beings [2], and let me then reveal (develop) names and forms.

Footnote:

1. The text has devatâ, deity; here used in a very general sense. The Sat, though it has produced fire, water, and earth, has not yet obtained its wish of becoming many. 2. This living self is only a shadow, as it were, of the Highest Self; and as the sun, reflected in the water, does not suffer from the movement of the water, the real Self does not suffer pleasure or pain on earth, but the living self only.


Sloka : 6.3.3

तासां त्रिवृतं त्रिवृतमेकैकां करवाणीति सेयं

देवतेमास्तिस्रो देवता अनेनैव जीवेनात्मनानुप्रविश्य

नामरूपे व्याकरोत् ॥ ६.३.३॥

tāsāṃ trivṛtaṃ trivṛtamekaikāṃ karavāṇīti seyaṃ

devatemāstisro devatā anenaiva jīvenātmanānupraviśya

nāmarūpe vyākarot .. 6.3.3..



3. Sat [Existence] thought, ‘I shall divide each of these three deities threefold.’ Then, having entered into these three deities as the individual self, he manifested himself as names and forms.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tāsām, of these [three deities]; trivṛtam trivṛtam, dividing them threefold; ekaikām, each of them; karavāṇi iti, I shall make; sā iyam devatā, that deity [Existence]; imāḥ tisraḥ devatā, these three deities; anena jīvena eva ātmanā, as the individual self; anupraviśya, having entered; nāmarūpe vyākarot, manifested himself as names and forms. Commentary:-Trivṛtam is applied in the case of fire, water, and earth as follows:- gross fire = 1/2 subtle fire + 1/4 subtle water + 1/4 subtle earth gross water = 1/2 subtle water + 1/4 subtle fire + 1/4 subtle earth gross earth = 1/2 subtle earth + 1/4 subtle fire + 1/4 subtle water This mixture turns the subtle elements into gross elements. It makes them separate and yet one. A similar process, called pañcikaraṇa, is applied in the case of the five elements—space, air, fire, water, and earth. Sat, or Brahman, is present in all the elements as their Self. First he is manifest as their sum total, called Virāṭ He then manifests himself as names and forms.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'Then that Being having said, Let me make each of these three tripartite (so that fire, water, and earth should each have itself for its principal ingredient, besides an admixture of the other two) entered into those three beings (devatâ) with this living self only, and revealed names and forms.


Sloka : 6.3.4

तासां त्रिवृतं त्रिवृतमेकैकामकरोद्यथा तु खलु

सोम्येमास्तिस्रो देवतास्त्रिवृत्त्रिवृदेकैका भवति

तन्मे विजानीहीति ॥ ६.३.४ ॥

tāsāṃ trivṛtaṃ trivṛtamekaikāmakarodyathā tu khalu

somyemāstisro devatāstrivṛttrivṛdekaikā bhavati

tanme vijānīhīti .. 6.3.4 ..



4. [Having so decided,] he made each of these three elements threefold. But as to how each of these three deities becomes threefold, O Somya, learn this from me.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tāsām of those [three elements]; ekaikām, each one of them; trivṛtam trivṛtam akarot, he made threefold; somya, O Somya; yathā tu khalu, but as to how; imāḥ tisraḥ devatā, these three deities; trivṛt trivṛt ekaikā bhavati, each becomes threefold; tat me vijānīhi iti, learn this from me. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'He made each of these tripartite; and how these three beings become each of them tripartite, that learn from me now, my friend!


Sloka : 6.4.1

॥ इति तृतीयः खण्डः ॥

यदग्ने रोहितꣳरूपं तेजसस्तद्रूपं यच्छुक्लं तदपां

यत्कृष्णं तदन्नस्यापागादग्नेरग्नित्वं वाचारम्भणं

विकारो नामधेयं त्रीणि रूपाणीत्येव सत्यम् ॥ ६.४.१॥

.. iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yadagne rohitagͫrūpaṃ tejasastadrūpaṃ yacchuklaṃ tadapāṃ

yatkṛṣṇaṃ tadannasyāpāgādagneragnitvaṃ vācārambhaṇaṃ

vikāro nāmadheyaṃ trīṇi rūpāṇītyeva satyam .. 6.4.1..



1. The red colour of gross fire is from subtle fire, the white colour is from subtle water, and the dark colour is from subtle earth. Thus that which constitutes the ‘fire’-ness of fire is gone. All changes are mere words, in name only [i.e., fire is only a name indicating a certain condition]. The three colours are the reality.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yat agneḥ rohitam rūpam, that red colour of [gross] fire; tat rūpam tejasaḥ, that colour is from [subtle] fire; yat śuklam, that which is white; tat apām, that is from [subtle] water; yat kṛṣṇam, that which is dark; tat annasya, that is from [subtle] earth [lit., food]; agneḥ agnitvam apāgāt, [thus] the ‘fire’-ness of fire is gone; vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only; trīṇi rūpāṇi iti eva satyam, only the three colours are the reality [i.e., outside of the three colours, there is no fire]. Commentary:-When fire is gross it has a red colour which comes from its subtle aspect. But there is also a white colour in it which comes from the subtle water element. Similarly, sometimes it has a dark colour which comes from the subtle earth element. The Upaniṣad says, in reality, fire is nothing beyond these three colours—red, white, and black. This proves the falsity of the idea of gross fire.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'The red colour of burning fire (agni) is the colour of fire, the white colour of fire is the colour of water, the black colour of fire the colour of earth. Thus vanishes what we call fire, as a mere variety, being a name, arising from speech. What is true (satya) are the three colours (or forms).


Sloka : 6.4.2

यदादित्यस्य रोहितꣳरूपं तेजसस्तद्रूपं यच्छुक्लं तदपां

यत्कृष्णं तदन्नस्यापागादादित्यादादित्यत्वं वाचारम्भणं

विकारो नामधेयं त्रीणि रूपाणीत्येव सत्यम् ॥ ६.४.२॥

yadādityasya rohitagͫrūpaṃ tejasastadrūpaṃ yacchuklaṃ tadapāṃ

yatkṛṣṇaṃ tadannasyāpāgādādityādādityatvaṃ vācārambhaṇaṃ

vikāro nāmadheyaṃ trīṇi rūpāṇītyeva satyam .. 6.4.2..



2. The red colour of the sun is from fire, the white colour is from water, and the dark colour is from earth. Thus that which constitutes the ‘sun’-ness of the sun is gone. All changes are mere words, in name only. The three colours are the reality.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yat ādityasya rohitam rūpam, that red colour of the sun; tat rūpam tejasaḥ, that colour is from fire; yat śuklam, that which is white; tat apām, that is from water; yat kṛṣṇam, that which is dark; tat annasya, that is from earth [lit., food]; ādityāt ādityatvam apāgāt, [thus] the ‘sun’-ness of the sun is gone; vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only; trīṇi rūpāṇi iti eva satyam, only the three colours are the reality [i.e., outside of the three colours, there is no sun]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'The red colour of the sun (âditya) is the colour of fire, the white of water, the black of earth. Thus vanishes what we call the sun, as a mere variety, being a name, arising from speech. What is true are the three colours.


Sloka : 6.4.3

यच्छन्द्रमसो रोहितꣳरूपं तेजसस्तद्रूपं यच्छुक्लं तदपां

यत्कृष्णं तदन्नस्यापागाच्चन्द्राच्चन्द्रत्वं वाचारम्भणं

विकारो नामधेयं त्रीणि रूपाणीत्येव सत्यम् ॥ ६.४.३॥

yacchandramaso rohitagͫrūpaṃ tejasastadrūpaṃ yacchuklaṃ tadapāṃ

yatkṛṣṇaṃ tadannasyāpāgāccandrāccandratvaṃ vācārambhaṇaṃ

vikāro nāmadheyaṃ trīṇi rūpāṇītyeva satyam .. 6.4.3..



3. The red colour of the moon is from fire, the white colour is from water, and the dark colour is from earth. Thus that which constitutes the ‘moon’-ness of the moon is gone. All changes are mere words, in name only. The three colours are the reality.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yat candramasaḥ rohitam rūpam, that red colour of the moon; tat rūpam tejasaḥ, that colour is from fire; yat śuklam, that which is white; tat apām, that is from water; yat kṛṣṇam, that which is dark; tat annasya, that is from earth [lit., food]; candrāt candratvam apāgāt, [thus] the ‘moon’-ness of the moon is gone; vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only; trīṇi rūpāṇi iti eva satyam, only the three colours are the reality [i.e., outside of the three colours, there is no moon]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'The red colour of the moon is the colour of fire, the white of water, the black of earth. Thus vanishes what we call the moon, as a mere variety, being a name, arising from speech. What is true are the three colours.


Sloka : 6.4.4

यद्विद्युतो रोहितꣳरूपं तेजसस्तद्रूपं यच्छुक्लं तदपां

यत्कृष्णं तदन्नस्यापागाद्विद्युतो विद्युत्त्वं वाचारम्भणं

विकारो नामधेयं त्रीणि रूपाणीत्येव सत्यम् ॥ ६.४.४॥

yadvidyuto rohitagͫrūpaṃ tejasastadrūpaṃ yacchuklaṃ tadapāṃ

yatkṛṣṇaṃ tadannasyāpāgādvidyuto vidyuttvaṃ vācārambhaṇaṃ

vikāro nāmadheyaṃ trīṇi rūpāṇītyeva satyam .. 6.4.4..



4. The red colour of lightning is from fire, the white colour is from water, and the dark colour is from earth. Thus that which constitutes the ‘lightning’-ness of lightning is gone. All changes are mere words, in name only. The three colours are the reality.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yat vidyutaḥ rohitam rūpam, that red colour of lightning; tat rūpam tejasaḥ, that colour is from fire; yat śuklam, that which is white; tat apām, that is from water; yat kṛṣṇam, that which is dark; tat annasya, that is from earth [lit., food]; vidyutaḥ vidyuttvam apāgāt, [thus] the ‘lightning’-ness of lightning is gone; vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only; trīṇi rūpāṇi iti eva satyam, only the three colours are the reality [i.e., outside of the three colours, there is no lightning]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'The red colour of the lightning is the colour of fire, the white of water, the black of earth. Thus vanishes what we call the lightning, as a mere variety, being a name, arising from speech. What is true are the three colours.


Sloka : 6.4.5

एतद्ध स्म वै तद्विद्वाꣳस आहुः पूर्वे महाशाला

महाश्रोत्रिया न नोऽद्य

कश्चनाश्रुतममतमविज्ञातमुदाहरिष्यतीति ह्येभ्यो

विदांचक्रुः ॥ ६.४.५॥

etaddha sma vai tadvidvāgͫsa āhuḥ pūrve mahāśālā

mahāśrotriyā na no'dya

kaścanāśrutamamatamavijñātamudāhariṣyatīti hyebhyo

vidāṃcakruḥ .. 6.4.5..



5. The earlier great householders, who were well read in the Vedas, knew this. They said, ‘There is nothing anyone can mention that is not heard of or thought of or already known to us.’ I his is because they came to know about the three colours.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat etat vidvāṃsaḥ ha, having known this; vai pūrve, the earlier; mahāśālāḥ, great householders; mahāśrotriyāḥ, who were well read in the Vedas; āhuḥ sma, said; adya, now; kaścana, anyone [i.e., any scholar]; naḥ, to us; aśrutam, unheard of; amatam, unthought of; avijñātam, unknown; udāhariṣyati iti, can speak of; hi, since; ebhyaḥ, these three [colours]; vidāñcakraḥ, they came to know [that by knowing one, a person knows all]. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'Great householders and great theologians of olden times who knew this, have declared the same, saying, "No one can henceforth mention to us anything which we have not heard, perceived, or known [1]." Out of these (three colours or forms) they knew all.

Footnote:

1. This reminds one of the Aristotelian διὰ γὰρ ταῦτα καὶ ἐκ τούτων τἄλλα γνωρίζεται, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ ταῦτα διὰ τῶν ὑποκειμένων.


Sloka : 6.4.6

यदु रोहितमिवाभूदिति तेजसस्तद्रूपमिति तद्विदांचक्रुर्यदु

शुक्लमिवाभूदित्यपाꣳरूपमिति तद्विदांचक्रुर्यदु

कृष्णमिवाभूदित्यन्नस्य रूपमिति तद्विदांचक्रुः ॥ ६.४.६॥

yadu rohitamivābhūditi tejasastadrūpamiti tadvidāṃcakruryadu

śuklamivābhūdityapāgͫrūpamiti tadvidāṃcakruryadu

kṛṣṇamivābhūdityannasya rūpamiti tadvidāṃcakruḥ .. 6.4.6..



6. They knew that whatever else was seen as red was the colour of fire; whatever else was seen as white was the colour of water; and whatever else was seen as dark was the colour of earth.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yat u rohitam iva abhūt iti, whatever else was seen as red; tat rūpam tejasaḥ iti, that is the colour of fire; tat vidāñcakruḥ, they knew that; yat u śuklam iva abhūt iti, whatever else was seen as white; tat apām rūpam iti, that is the colour of water; vidāñcakruḥ, they knew; yat u kṛṣṇam iva abhūt iti, whatever else was seen as dark; tat annasya rūpam iti, that is the colour of earth [lit., food]; vidāñcakruḥ, they knew. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'Whatever they thought looked red, they knew was the colour of fire. Whatever they thought looked white, they knew was the colour of water. Whatever they thought looked black, they knew was the colour of earth.


Sloka : 6.4.7

यद्वविज्ञातमिवाभूदित्येतासामेव देवतानाꣳसमास इति

तद्विदांचक्रुर्यथा तु खलु सोम्येमास्तिस्रो देवताः

पुरुषं प्राप्य त्रिवृत्त्रिवृदेकैका भवति तन्मे विजानीहीति

॥ ६.४.७॥

yadvavijñātamivābhūdityetāsāmeva devatānāgͫsamāsa iti

tadvidāṃcakruryathā tu khalu somyemāstisro devatāḥ

puruṣaṃ prāpya trivṛttrivṛdekaikā bhavati tanme vijānīhīti

.. 6.4.7..



7. And whatever else was not properly known they understood was the combination of those three deities [fire, water, and earth]. O Somya, now learn from me how these three deities enter into a person and become threefold.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yat u avijñātam iva abhūt iti, and whatever they saw that was not properly known; samāsaḥ iti, the combination; etāsām eva devatānām, of these deities [fire, water, and earth]; tat vidāñcakruḥ, that they knew; somya, my son; yathā, as to how; imāḥ khalu nu, these very; tisraḥ devatāḥ, three deities; puruṣam, a living being; prāpya, entering [as food]; trivṛt trivṛt ekaikā bhavati, each one becomes threefold; tat me vijānīhi iti, learn that from me. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section. Commentary:-Previously the scholars did not know these deities—the three elements—separately. They began to understand better when they saw the elements working in living beings.

Translation By Max Müller

7. 'Whatever they thought was altogether unknown, they knew was some combination of those three beings (devatâ). 'Now learn from me, my friend, how those three beings, when they reach man, become each of them tripartite.


Sloka : 6.5.1

॥ इति चतुर्थः खण्डः ॥

अन्नमशितं त्रेधा विधीयते तस्य यः स्थविष्ठो

धातुस्तत्पुरीषं भवति यो मध्यमस्तन्माꣳसं

योऽणिष्ठस्तन्मनः ॥ ६.५.१॥

.. iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

annamaśitaṃ tredhā vidhīyate tasya yaḥ sthaviṣṭho

dhātustatpurīṣaṃ bhavati yo madhyamastanmāgͫsaṃ

yo'ṇiṣṭhastanmanaḥ .. 6.5.1..



1. When we eat food, it divides itself into three parts. The grossest part of it becomes excreta; that which is less gross becomes our flesh; and the finest part becomes our mind.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Annam aśitam, when food is eaten; tredhā, in three ways; vidhīyate, is divided; tasya, of it; yaḥ sthaviṣṭhaḥ, that which is the grossest; dhātuḥ, part; tat purīṣam bhavati, that becomes excreta; yaḥ madhyamaḥ, that which is less gross [lit., middle]; tat māṃsam, that [becomes] flesh; yaḥ aṇiṣṭhaḥ, that which is the subtlest; tat manaḥ, that [becomes] the mind. Commentary:-When we eat, the food nourishes the body in different ways. How? First, the grossest part of the food is rejected by the body. Then that which is less gross, a bit finer, becomes our flesh. And finally the finest part becomes the mind. According to Vedānta, the mind is material. It functions through the nervous system, which is called hitā. How does this food get transformed into the mind? Śaṅkara says that the subtlest part of the food becomes blood and enters into the heart. From there it goes through the veins and nerves, nourishing the mind. The term mind refers here to the phenomena of our thinking, feeling, willing, etc., plus the aggregate of our sense organs—our seeing, hearing, and so forth. Suppose you do not eat anything. What happens? Slowly you will feel that your mind is becoming more and more feeble. Your memory starts failing, and you cannot concentrate. The finest part of your system is affected. Then the body begins to shrink. You become thinner and thinner, and finally you die. Food nourishes all these. This is why Vedānta says that the mind is material.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'The earth (food) when eaten becomes threefold; its grossest portion becomes feces, its middle portion flesh, its subtilest portion mind.


Sloka : 6.5.2

आपः पीतास्त्रेधा विधीयन्ते तासां यः स्थविष्ठो

धातुस्तन्मूत्रं भवति यो मध्यमस्तल्लोहितं योऽणिष्ठः

स प्राणः ॥ ६.५.२॥

āpaḥ pītāstredhā vidhīyante tāsāṃ yaḥ sthaviṣṭho

dhātustanmūtraṃ bhavati yo madhyamastallohitaṃ yo'ṇiṣṭhaḥ

sa prāṇaḥ .. 6.5.2..



2. When we drink water, it becomes divided in three parts. The grossest part of it becomes urine; that which is less gross becomes blood; and the finest part becomes prāṇa, the vital force.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Āpaḥ, water; pītāḥ, when drunk; tredhā, in three ways; vidhīyante, is divided; tāsām, of it; yaḥ sthaviṣṭaḥ dhātuḥ, that which is the grossest part; tat mūtram bhavati, that becomes urine; yaḥ madhyamaḥ, that which is less gross; tat lohitam, that [becomes] blood; yaḥ aṇiṣṭhaḥ, that which is the finest part; saḥ prāṇaḥ, that is prāṇa. Commentary:-Water also has a threefold function. When we drink water, the grossest part of it flushes our whole system and at last passes out of the body as urine. Then that which is less gross becomes blood. If I do not drink water, the blood would clot and there would be no more blood supply. Then the finest aspect becomes prāṇa, the vital force. Without water, we could not breathe or live.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'Water when drunk becomes threefold; its grossest portion becomes water, its middle portion blood, its subtilest portion breath.


Sloka : 6.5.3

तेजोऽशितं त्रेधा विधीयते तस्य यः स्थविष्ठो

धातुस्तदस्थि भवति यो मध्यमः स मज्जा

योऽणिष्ठः सा वाक् ॥ ६.५.३॥

tejo'śitaṃ tredhā vidhīyate tasya yaḥ sthaviṣṭho

dhātustadasthi bhavati yo madhyamaḥ sa majjā

yo'ṇiṣṭhaḥ sā vāk .. 6.5.3..



3. When we eat fire [i.e., butter, oil, etc.], it divides itself into three parts. The grossest part of it becomes bone; that which is less gross becomes marrow; and the subtlest part becomes speech.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tejaḥ aśitam, when fire [i.e., oil, butter, etc., which produce energy] is eaten; tredhā, in three ways; vidhīyāte, is divided; tasya, of it; yaḥ sthaviṣṭhaḥ, that which is the grossest; dhātuḥ, part; tat asthi bhavati, that becomes bone; yaḥ madhyamaḥ, that which is midway; saḥ majjā, that [becomes] marrow; yaḥ aṇiṣṭhaḥ, that which is the subtlest; sā vāk, that is speech. Commentary:-Tejas literally means ‘fire.’ The idea here is that if you eat butter or fatty substances such as oil, it is like eating fire. Why? Because butter and oil are sources of tejas—that is, they provide us energy and vitality. These substances, when eaten, also become transformed into three different things. That which is gross becomes our bones; that which is between the gross and the subtle becomes our marrow; and that which is subtle becomes our speech. If our organ of speech is supported by the right kind of food, we are able to speak logically and articulately. The Upaniṣad is showing us here how we depend on these elements—earth, water, and fire. We. are able to think, speak, and move about all because of the support we get from them. But all these things depend on Brahman, pure Spirit. If you think of the way nature functions, and how the planets rotate in their orbits, and so forth, you are extremely impressed. Everything is so well organized. But we must remember, it is Brahman that is manifesting as nature, as the planets, as you and me and each individual—as even the tiny insects. The idea is that the One has become the many. Let us not be deluded by seeing the many.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'Fire (i. e. in oil, butter, &c.) when eaten becomes threefold; its grossest portion becomes bone, its middle portion marrow, its subtilest portion speech [1].

Footnote:

1. Food, water, and fire are each to be taken as tripartite; hence animals which live on one of the three elements only, still share in some measure the qualities of the other elements also.


Sloka : 6.5.4

अन्नमयꣳहि सोम्य मनः आपोमयः प्राणस्तेजोमयी

वागिति भूय एव मा भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति तथा

सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.५.४॥

annamayagͫhi somya manaḥ āpomayaḥ prāṇastejomayī

vāgiti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā

somyeti hovāca .. 6.5.4..



4. ‘O Somya, the mind is nourished by food, prāṇa by water, and speech by fire.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, will you please explain this to me again?’ ‘Yes, Somya, I will explain again,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; manaḥ hi annamayam, the mind is nourished by food; prāṇaḥ āpomayaḥ, the vital force is nourished by water; vāk tejomayī iti, speech is nourished by fire; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ eva, again; mā, to me; vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section. Commentary:-In the Vedānta philosophy there are said to be five elements. The first two—ākāśa (space, or ether) and vāyu (air)—are not visible to us. The other three—pṛthivī (earth—here referred to as annam, food), āpa (water), and agni, or tejas (fire, or energy)—are visible, and this is why they have been discussed here. These three elements, however, are never to be found in their pure form. When we perceive them, they are always in a combined state. For instance, the water that we see always has some earth and other elements mixed with it. In reality, though, it is pure Spirit which we see as earth, water, or fire. The father has been telling his son that the mind is the finest product of food, that prāṇa, the vital force, is the finest product of water, and that speech is the finest product of fire. Naturally the son is confused. It is not very clear. So he asks his father to explain it further.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'For truly, my child, mind comes of earth, breath of water, speech of fire.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son. Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.6.1

॥ इति पञ्चमः खण्डः ॥

दध्नः सोम्य मथ्यमानस्य योऽणिमा स उर्ध्वः समुदीषति

तत्सर्पिर्भवति ॥ ६.६.१॥

.. iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

dadhnaḥ somya mathyamānasya yo'ṇimā sa urdhvaḥ samudīṣati

tatsarpirbhavati .. 6.6.1..



1. When curd is churned, the finest part of it rises to the surface. That becomes butter.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; dadhnaḥ mathyamānasya, of curd when it is churned; yaḥ aṇimā, what is the finest part; sāḥ ūrdhvaḥ samudīṣati, that rises to the surface; tat sarpiḥ bhavati, that becomes butter. Commentary:-Even now, in many homes in India, people make their own butter by churning curd. When you churn the curd, cream starts appearing on the surface. Gradually that cream turns into butter. It was already in the curd. In fact, it was the finest part of the curd. Only the churning was needed to make it rise to the top.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'That which is the subtile portion of curds, when churned, rises upwards, and becomes butter.


Sloka : 6.6.2

एवमेव खलु सोम्यान्नस्याश्यमानस्य योऽणिमा स उर्ध्वः

समुदीषति तन्मनो भवति ॥ ६.६.२॥

evameva khalu somyānnasyāśyamānasya yo'ṇimā sa urdhvaḥ

samudīṣati tanmano bhavati .. 6.6.2..



2. O Somya, in the same way, the finest part of the food that is eaten rises to the surface and becomes the mind.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Evam eva khalu, in the same way; somya, O Somya; annasya aśyamānasya, of the food that is eaten; yaḥ aṇimā, that which is the finest part; saḥ ūrdhvaḥ samudīṣati, it rises to the surface; tat manaḥ bhavati, that becomes the mind. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'In the same manner, my child, the subtile portion of earth (food), when eaten, rises upwards, and becomes mind.


Sloka : 6.6.3

अपाꣳसोम्य पीयमानानां योऽणिमा स उर्ध्वः समुदीषति

सा प्राणो भवति ॥ ६.६.३ ॥

apāgͫsomya pīyamānānāṃ yo'ṇimā sa urdhvaḥ samudīṣati

sā prāṇo bhavati .. 6.6.3 ..



3. O Somya, the finest part of water that is drunk rises to the surface and becomes our prāṇa.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Anna means the food that you eat—any food. Wheat, rice, fish, meat, vegetables, milk, and so on—all this is anna. The Upaniṣad says, that which is the finest part of the food rises to the surface, like the butter in curd. It then becomes the mind. It is the subtlest part of the food, the essence. According to Vedānta, the mind is material. It is a by-product of food and is nourished by food. Somya, O Somya; apām pīyāmānānām, of the water that is drunk; yaḥ aṇimā, that which is the finest part; saḥ ūrdhvaḥ samudīṣati, it rises to the surface; saḥ prāṇaḥ bhavati, that becomes prāṇa, the vital force. Commentary:-Similarly, if you drink water, the finest part of that water becomes separated from the rest and rises to the surface to become prāṇa, the vital force. This is why in Sanskrit water and life (jala and jīvana) are synonymous. Without water, life cannot exist. In fact, science says that life first appeared in water.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'That which is the subtile portion of water, when drunk, rises upwards, and becomes breath.


Sloka : 6.6.4

तेजसः सोम्याश्यमानस्य योऽणिमा स उर्ध्वः समुदीषति

सा वाग्भवति ॥ ६.६.४॥

tejasaḥ somyāśyamānasya yo'ṇimā sa urdhvaḥ samudīṣati

sā vāgbhavati .. 6.6.4..



4. O Somya, the finest part of fire [butter, etc.] that is eaten rises to the surface and becomes our speech.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; tejasaḥ aśyamānasya, of the fire [butter, etc.] that is eaten; yaḥ aṇima, that which is the finest part; saḥ ūrdhvaḥ samudīṣati, it rises to the surface; sā vāk bhavati, that becomes speech. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'That which is the subtile portion of fire, when consumed, rises upwards, and becomes speech.


Sloka : 6.6.6

अन्नमयꣳ हि सोम्य मन आपोमयः प्राणस्तेजोमयी वागिति

भूय एव मा भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति तथा सोम्येति होवाच

॥ ६.६.६॥

annamayagͫ hi somya mana āpomayaḥ prāṇastejomayī vāgiti

bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca

.. 6.6.6..



6. ‘O Somya, the mind is certainly nourished by food, pṛāṇa by water, and speech by fire.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, will you please explain this to me again?’ ‘Yes, I will explain again, O Somya,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; manaḥ hi annamayam, the mind is certainly nourished by food; prāṇaḥ āpomayaḥ, the vital force is nourished by water; vāk tejomayī iti, speech is nourished by fire; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ eva, again; mā, to me; vijnāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'For mind, my child, comes of earth, breath of water, speech of fire.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son. 'Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.7.1

॥ इति षष्ठः खण्डः ॥

षोडशकलः सोम्य पुरुषः पञ्चदशाहानि माशीः

काममपः पिबापोमयः प्राणो नपिबतो विच्छेत्स्यत

इति ॥ ६.७.१॥

.. iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ṣoḍaśakalaḥ somya puruṣaḥ pañcadaśāhāni māśīḥ

kāmamapaḥ pibāpomayaḥ prāṇo napibato vicchetsyata

iti .. 6.7.1..



1. O Somya, a person has sixteen parts, [and all your sixteen parts are intact]. Do not eat anything for fifteen days, but drink as much water as you like. Life is dependent on water. If you do not drink water, you will lose your life.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; puruṣaḥ, a person; ṣoḍaśakalaḥ, has sixteen parts; pañcadaśa ahāni, for fifteen days; mā aśīḥ, do not eat; apaḥ piba, drink water; kāmam, as much as you like; prāṇaḥ āpomayaḥ, life is dependent on water; na pibataḥ, if you do not drink water; vicchetsyate iti, it will leave. Commentary:-Now the son says, ‘I still can’t understand.’ So the father tries something else. A normal human being in good health is said, in Vedānta, to be made up of sixteen parts. If a person neither eats nor drinks water for fifteen days, he will die. But if he does not eat yet continues to drink water during that time he will remain alive. When Gandhiji used to fast, he would drink plenty of water and would put some lemon juice in it. That would keep him alive. But what happens to a person when he drinks water but does not eat? His mind fails. He cannot remember anything. So, to convince his son, the father asks him to fast for fifteen days but to drink water.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Man (purusha), my son, consists of sixteen parts. Abstain from food for fifteen days, but drink as much water as you like, for breath comes from water, and will not be cut off, if you drink water.'


Sloka : 6.7.2

स ह पञ्चदशाहानि नशाथ हैनमुपससाद किं ब्रवीमि

भो इत्यृचः सोम्य यजूꣳषि सामानीति स होवाच न वै

मा प्रतिभान्ति भो इति ॥ ६.७.२॥

sa ha pañcadaśāhāni naśātha hainamupasasāda kiṃ bravīmi

bho ityṛcaḥ somya yajūgͫṣi sāmānīti sa hovāca na vai

mā pratibhānti bho iti .. 6.7.2..



2. Śvetaketu did not eat anything for fifteen days. After that he came to his father and said, ‘O Father, what shall I recite?’ His father said, ‘Recite the Ṛk, Yajuḥ, and Sāma mantras.’ Śvetaketu replied, ‘I can’t recall any of them, sir’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [Śvetaketu]; ha pañcadaśa ahāni, for fifteen days; na āśa, did not eat anything; atha, then [on the sixteenth day]; enam ha upasasāda, he went to him [his father]; bhoḥ, O Father; kim bravīmi iti, what shall I recite; somya, O Somya; ṛcaḥ yajūṃṣi sāmāni iti, the Ṛk, the Yajuḥ, and the Sāmas; saḥ ha uvāca, [Śvetaketu] said; bhoḥ, O Father; na vai mā pratibhānti iti, they do not come to my mind. Commentary:-Now the father says to his son, ‘Will you please recite to me the Ṛk, Yajuḥ, and Sāma mantras?’ But the son replies:- ‘They are completely gone. I do not remember them. They do not appear in my mind at all.’ Having been without food for fifteen days, Śvetaketu’s mind was almost gone. The mind is the finest part, the essence, of food—not of water, not of anything else. Therefore, the mind must be material.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Svetaketu abstained from food for fifteen days. Then he came to his father and said:- 'What shall I say?' The father said:- 'Repeat the Rik, Yagus, and Sâman verses.' He replied:- 'They do not occur to me, Sir.'


Sloka : 6.7.3

तꣳ होवाच यथा सोम्य महतोऽभ्या हितस्यैकोऽङ्गारः

खद्योतमात्रः परिशिष्टः स्यात्तेन ततोऽपि न बहु

दहेदेवꣳसोम्य ते षोडशानां कलानामेका कलातिशिष्टा

स्यात्तयैतर्हि वेदान्नानुभवस्यशानाथ मे विज्ञास्यसीति

॥ ६.७.३॥

tagͫ hovāca yathā somya mahato'bhyā hitasyaiko'ṅgāraḥ

khadyotamātraḥ pariśiṣṭaḥ syāttena tato'pi na bahu

dahedevagͫsomya te ṣoḍaśānāṃ kalānāmekā kalātiśiṣṭā

syāttayaitarhi vedānnānubhavasyaśānātha me vijñāsyasīti

.. 6.7.3..



3. The father said to Śvetaketu:- ‘O Somya, from a blazing fire, if there is but a small piece of ember left, the size of a firefly, it cannot bum anything bigger than that. Similarly, O Somya, because only one small part of your sixteen parts remains, you cannot remember the Vedas. Eat something and then you will understand what I am saying’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Śvetaketu]; somya, O Somya; yathā, as; mahataḥ abhyāhitasya, of a big blazing fire; ekaḥ aṅgāraḥ, one ember; khadyotamātraḥ, the size of a firefly; pariśiṣṭaḥ syāt, that is left; tena, by that; tataḥ api bahu, anything larger than its size; na dahet, cannot bum; evam, like that; somya, my son; ekā kalā, only one part; ṣoḍaśānām kalānām, of [yourl sixteen parts; atiśiṣṭā syāt, has remained; etarhi, now; tayā, by that [small part]; vedān, the Vedas; na anubhavasi, you do not remember; aśāna, eat; atha, then; me, my [words]; vijñāsyasi iti, you will grasp. Commentary:-Suppose you have a big pile of wood, and you start a fire with it. After awhile practically the whole pile is consumed, and there is only a small spark left—a spark as small as a firefly. Very little can be burnt with such a tiny spark, yet even so, if you add some fuel to it you can again start a big fire. ‘Similarly,’ Uddālaka says to his son, ‘your mind is like that tiny spark. It is not functioning now because you have not given it any fuel these last fifteen days. There is just a flicker of your mind working, and it cannot serve any useful purpose. If you eat something now, everything will come back to your mind.’

Translation By Max Müller

3. The father said to him:- 'As of a great lighted fire one coal only of the size of a firefly may be left, which would not burn much more than this (i. e. very little), thus, my dear son, one part only of the sixteen parts (of you) is left, and therefore with that one part you do not remember the Vedas. Go and eat!


Sloka : 6.7.4

स हशाथ हैनमुपससाद तꣳ ह यत्किंच पप्रच्छ

सर्वꣳह प्रतिपेदे ॥ ६.७.४॥

sa haśātha hainamupasasāda tagͫ ha yatkiṃca papraccha

sarvagͫha pratipede .. 6.7.4..



4. Śvetaketu ate something and then went to his father. Whatever his father asked him, he was able to follow.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [Śvetaketu]; ha āśa, ate; atha, then; enam, to him [his father]; ha upasasāda, he went; tam, to him [to Śvetaketu]; yat kiñca, whatever; papraccha, he asked; sarvam ha pratipede, he was able to follow everything. Commentary:-After eating, Śvetaketu’s mind was back to normal. He then approached his father, and everything his father said was clear to him.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Then wilt thou understand me.' Then Svetaketu. ate, and afterwards approached his father. And whatever his father asked him, he knew it all by heart. Then his father said to him:-


Sloka : 6.7.5

तꣳ होवाच यथा सोम्य महतोऽभ्याहितस्यैकमङ्गारं

खद्योतमात्रं परिशिष्टं तं तृणैरुपसमाधाय

प्राज्वलयेत्तेन ततोऽपि बहु दहेत् ॥ ६.७.५॥

tagͫ hovāca yathā somya mahato'bhyāhitasyaikamaṅgāraṃ

khadyotamātraṃ pariśiṣṭaṃ taṃ tṛṇairupasamādhāya

prājvalayettena tato'pi bahu dahet .. 6.7.5..



5. The father said to him:- ‘O Somya, from a blazing fire, if there is but a small piece of ember left, the size of a firefly, the fire can again blaze up when you add some grass. The fire, in fact, can then blaze up even more than it did before’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Śvetaketu]; somya, O Somya; yathā, just as; mahataḥ abhyāhitasya, of a big blazing fire; ekam aṅgāram, one ember; khadyotamātram, the size of a firefly; pariśiṣṭam, that is left; tam, that; tṛṇaiḥ upasamādhāya, with some grass; prājvalayet, becomes blazing; tena, by that [grass]; tataḥ api bahu, even more than before; dahet, bums. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'As of a great lighted fire one coal of the size of a firefly, if left, may be made to blaze up again by putting grass upon it, and will thus burn more than this,


Sloka : 6.7.6

एवꣳ सोम्य ते षोडशानां कलानामेका

कलातिशिष्टाभूत्सान्नेनोपसमाहिता प्राज्वाली

तयैतर्हि वेदाननुभवस्यन्नमयꣳहि सोम्य मन आपोमयः

प्राणस्तेजोमयी वागिति तद्धास्य विजज्ञाविति विजज्ञाविति

॥ ६.७.६॥

evagͫ somya te ṣoḍaśānāṃ kalānāmekā

kalātiśiṣṭābhūtsānnenopasamāhitā prājvālī

tayaitarhi vedānanubhavasyannamayagͫhi somya mana āpomayaḥ

prāṇastejomayī vāgiti taddhāsya vijajñāviti vijajñāviti

.. 6.7.6..



6. ‘In the same way, O Somya, of your sixteen parts, only one remained. But that, when nourished by food, has revived, and by that you are now able to follow the Vedas. O Somya, this is why I said that the mind was nourished by food, prāṇa was nourished by water, and speech was nourished by fire.’ Śvetaketu now understood what his father was saying.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Evam, in the same way; somya, O Somya; ekā kalā, one part; te ṣoḍaśānām kalānām, of your sixteen parts; atiśiṣṭā abhūt, remained; sā, it; upasamāhitā annena, nourished by food; prājvālī, has revived; etarhi, now; tayā, by that [remaining part]; vedān, the Vedas; anubhavasi, you can understand; somya, O Somya; hi, this is why [I said]; manaḥ annamayam, the mind is nourished by food; prāṇaḥ āpomayaḥ, prāṇa is nourished by water; vāk tejomayī iti, speech is nourished by fire; asya, of that [what his father had said]; tat ha vijajñau iti, he understood it; vijajñau iti, he understood. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section. Commentary:-Just as a fire will go out if fuel is not added to it, so also the mind will cease to function if you do not eat. After fasting for fifteen days, Śvetaketu still had a small portion of his mind left working. It was reduced to a fragment, as it were. But after eating, his memory returned and his mind was again active and vigorous. The idea is, this human body is a very powerful instrument. The mind is powerful; speech is powerful; life itself is powerful. But it is all dependent on food (i.e., earth), water, and energy (i.e., fire). Yet even these gross elements are not independent. As we have seen earlier, earth is a mixture of water and fire with earth. Water also is a mixture of earth and fire with water. Similarly, fire is a mixture of earth and water with fire. This process is called trivṛta, or triplication. It is the permutation and combination of the three elements. Vedānta says, we cannot see these elements in their pure form, because that pure form is Existence, sat. What the Upaniṣad is saying is suggestive:- That which we do not see in its pure form, but in a form which is a by-product of a combination of other things, really does not exist. This is the argument Buddhism also advances. They say:- ‘You talk about a chariot, but where is the chariot? Is it a reality? No, it can’t be a reality, because a chariot is a combination of different things put together. Where is the chariot? Is it the wheels? The platform? The canopy? No. When you speak of an object which is not independent, which is dependent on factors combining together, then it is not real.’ Here is the same argument. All objects are dependent. What exists then? Vedānta says it is sat, Existence. That Existence is our own Self, the real Self, the essence, the real being, pure Spirit. When the Upaniṣad refers to our mind, our life force, and our speech, it is referring to this phenomenal world. We have to look at these things from two levels:- From the cosmic level there is one Reality, one Existence. From the individual level we owe our mind, life force, and speech to these elements. But in reality all these elements, all these manifestations of creation, are pure Spirit. One Reality, pure Spirit, has assumed diverse forms. The whole manifestation of this universe is dependent. Even the mind. Where does the mind come from? Science has not yet been able to answer this question. According to Vedānta, the mind is nothing but matter; yet consciousness, which is pure Spirit, is the source. Vedānta does not make any distinction between matter and consciousness. We say it is one and the same. Consciousness is the source, and out of that one source, all that exists—call it matter, call it energy, call it mind—has come. Science has its own terms. They may call the source of life DNA or something else. Vedānta says it is tat, That. Or it is sat, Existence. From Existence, everything has emerged. In essence there is one—the same thing appearing in different forms. You may ask, how did the. One became manifest as many? Why did it happen? The fact that we can ask this question shows that that One is conscious. Only a conscious being can think, plan, and wish. Because that one Reality is consciousness it can say, ‘I will be many.’ If it were inert, it could not wish to become many. So Vedānta says, that one Reality, pure Spirit, is consciousness. Yet, that consciousness can also take the form of something inert. Matter and consciousness are not different. For instance, if you break a paperweight into atoms, and then smash even those atoms, you will find so much energy—so much motion. So, whether the manifestations of this creation are conscious or unconscious, intelligent or unintelligent, they all have their source in that one conscious Reality.

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'Thus, my dear son, there was one part of the sixteen parts left to you, and that, lighted up with food, burnt up, and by it you remember now the Vedas.' After that, he understood what his father meant when he said:- 'Mind, my son, comes from food, breath from water, speech from fire.' He understood what he said, yea, he understood it [1].

Footnote:

1. The repetition shows that the teaching of the Trivrikarana, the tripartite nature of things, is ended.


Sloka : 6.8.1

॥ इति सप्तमः खण्डः ॥

उद्दालको हारुणिः श्वेतकेतुं पुत्रमुवाच स्वप्नान्तं मे सोम्य

विजानीहीति यत्रैतत्पुरुषः स्वपिति नाम सता सोम्य तदा

सम्पन्नो भवति स्वमपीतो भवति तस्मादेनꣳ

स्वपितीत्याचक्षते स्वꣳह्यपीतो भवति ॥ ६.८.१॥

.. iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

uddālako hāruṇiḥ śvetaketuṃ putramuvāca svapnāntaṃ me somya

vijānīhīti yatraitatpuruṣaḥ svapiti nāma satā somya tadā

sampanno bhavati svamapīto bhavati tasmādenagͫ

svapitītyācakṣate svagͫhyapīto bhavati .. 6.8.1..



1. Uddālaka Āruṇi said to his son Śvetaketu:- ‘O Somya, let me explain to you the concept of deep sleep. When a person is said to be sleeping, O Somya, he becomes one with Sat [Existence], and he attains his real Self. That is why people say about him, “He is sleeping.” He is then in his Self’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Uddālakaḥ āruṇih, Uddālaka Āruṇi [the son of Aruṇa]; śvetaketum putram, to his son Śvetaketu; ha uvāca, said; svapnāntam, the concept of [deep] sleep; me, from me; somya, O Somya; vijānīhi iti, learn; yatra, when; etat puruṣaḥ, this person; svapiti nāma, is said to be in deep sleep; somya, O Somya; tadā, then; sampannaḥ bhavati, he is merged; satā, with Sat [Existence, Paramātmā]; svam apītaḥ bhavati, he attains his real Self; tasmāt, for this, reason; ācakṣate, people say; enam, about him; svapiti iti, he is sleeping; svam hi apītaḥ bhavati, he attains his real Self. Commentary:-In ancient India, all skills were passed from the father to the son. This is how the caste system eventually became so rigid. A father tended to be selfish and favour his son over his other students, especially if the father was a great scholar. Unless he had a student who was exceptionally good and intelligent, he would generally pass on the best things to his own son. Why does Uddālaka call his son Śvetaketu by the name Somya? The name Somya means one who is quiet, humble, very good, and gentle. If you want to learn something, you must be quiet and modest. So the father is saying, vijānīhi—‘learn from me, you who are so quiet and humble.’ The word puruṣa means pure, ‘in the heart,’ and śayate, ‘residing.’ That which resides in the heart—i.e., the Self. It is a living being. It could be a man, a woman, an animal, or an insect. The word svapnāntam means the concept of deep sleep, or dreamless sleep. When we dream, our sleep is disturbed, and it does not give us any rest. But dreamless sleep is very restful. If we have that kind of sleep for even a few minutes, we become temporarily free from this world. When we wake up then, it takes us some time to realize where we are and what time of day it is. While we were sleeping, the whole world was wiped out for us. When we say, ‘This person is sleeping,’ what does that mean? What happens when we sleep? Where does the mind go? That is what is being discussed here. The Upaniṣad says, during deep sleep a person becomes united with the Self. The individual self—that is, the jīva who is ignorant—merges into the Cosmic Self. The individual self has to have a body and a mind, and it is the mind that is closest to the Self. In fact, many people think the mind is the Self. The mind, however, is like a crystal. A crystal has no colour of its own, but suppose you put a red flower next to it. What happens? The crystal assumes the colour of the flower. Similarly, the mind has no consciousness of its own. But because it is close to the Paramātman, the Supreme Self, it gets the reflection of consciousness from the Self. Then, through the mind, all our organs function—the eyes, the ears, the hands, the feet, etc. The organs and the mind are all dependent on the Self. When we are awake, the body and mind are both functioning. Then when we are dreaming, the body is not functioning but the mind is still functioning. But when we are in deep sleep, the mind also ceases to function. We then become one with our own Self. That is why deep sleep is so refreshing. Yet when we wake up we are the same individual that we were before we slept. The Self is there. We are always one with it. Yet sleep does not give us any knowledge of our Self. Why? Because our ignorance creates a barrier that keeps us from knowing our real nature. But if we are one with the Self, how can we be separate from it? In reality, we are never separate from the Self, but when we are attached to our names and forms, we have desires. And when we have desires, ignorance has its full grip on us. During dreamless sleep the barrier that keeps us from the Self is temporarily removed, but we are not conscious of it. That is why, when we wake up, we are exactly the same person we were before we slept. If I was a tiger before I went to sleep, I am a tiger again when I get up. A sleeping tiger cannot do any harm, but if it wakes up, beware! Similarly, if I was a bad person before, I am still a bad person when I wake up. So, when I sleep, for the time being my ignorance is also sleeping, as it were. Only Self-knowledge can dispel my ignorance and give me true peace. It is a common belief in India that if you bathe in the Ganga, you will get rid of all your sins. Sri Ramakrishna used to say, though, that the sins are very clever. As you go to the river the sins say to each other:- ‘Well, this person is going into the Ganga. Let’s take shelter on that tree.’ So they fly off and perch on a tree. Then, when you come out of the river, they all pounce back on you and once again you are in their grip. Similarly, deep sleep can give us temporary rest, but it cannot remove our ignorance. Only if we have real knowledge, knowledge of the Self, can we remove the seeds of our karma. Knowledge is like a sword. With that sword we can cut off the roots of our ignorance and become free. Once we attain Self-knowledge we are totally transformed, because it goes to the root of our being. And when we wake up from our sleep of ignorance we are no longer the same individual.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Uddâlaka Âruni said to his son Svetaketu:- Learn from me the true nature of sleep (svapna). When a man sleeps here, then, my dear son, he becomes united with the True [1], he is gone to his own (Self). Therefore they say, svapiti, he sleeps, because he is gone (apîta) to his own (sva) [2].

Footnote:

1. The deep sushupta sleep is meant, in which personal consciousness is lost, and the self for a time absorbed in the Highest Self. Sleep is produced by fatigue. Speech, mind, and the senses rest, breath only remains awake, and the gîva, the living soul, in order to recover from his fatigue, returns for a while to his true Self (âtmâ). The Sat must be taken as a substance, nay, as the highest substance or subject, the Brahman. The whole purpose of the Upanishad is obscured if we translate sat or satyam by truth, instead of the True, the true one,τὸ ὄντως ὄν. 2. This is one of the many recognised plays on words in the Upanishads and the Vedânta philosophy. Svapiti, he sleeps, stands for sva (his own), i.e. the self, and apîta, gone to.


Sloka : 6.8.2

स यथा शकुनिः सूत्रेण प्रबद्धो दिशं दिशं

पतित्वान्यत्रायतनमलब्ध्वा बन्धनमेवोपश्रयत

एवमेव खलु सोम्य तन्मनो दिशं दिशं

पतित्वान्यत्रायतनमलब्ध्वा प्राणमेवोपश्रयते

प्राणबन्धनꣳ हि सोम्य मन इति ॥ ६.८.२ ॥

sa yathā śakuniḥ sūtreṇa prabaddho diśaṃ diśaṃ

patitvānyatrāyatanamalabdhvā bandhanamevopaśrayata

evameva khalu somya tanmano diśaṃ diśaṃ

patitvānyatrāyatanamalabdhvā prāṇamevopaśrayate

prāṇabandhanagͫ hi somya mana iti .. 6.8.2 ..



2. Just as a bird tied to a rope flutters here and there, and when it cannot get any shelter anywhere, it surrenders itself to its bondage; in the same way, O Somya, the mind runs in every direction, and when it fails to get a resting place anywhere, it surrenders itself to prāṇa, the vital force. The mind, O Somya, is tied to prāṇa.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yathā, it is like; śakuniḥ, a bird; sūtreṇa prabaddhaḥ, tied to a rope; diśam diśam, in all directions; patitvā, fluttering; anyatra, elsewhere; āyatanam, a shelter; alabdhvā, without getting; bandhanam eva upaśrayate, surrenders to its bondage; evam eva khalu, similarly; somya, O Somya; tat manaḥ, this mind; diśam diśam, in all directions; patitvā, running about; anyatra, elsewhere; āyatanam, a shelter; alabdhvā, without getting; prāṇam eva upaśrayate, surrenders to prāṇa; somya, O Somya; prāṇa-bandhanam hi manaḥ iti, the mind is tied to prāṇa. Commentary:-When we are sound asleep, what happens to the mind? The mind withdraws; it retires and temporarily goes back to the Self. Is this the same as samādhi, the superconscious state? Vedānta says, no, there is a distinction between samādhi and this experience of sound sleep. Both experiences bring great joy and peace, but deep sleep is only temporary. It is just for a while. We are still held by the rope of ignorance, and we do not know our real Self. When we come back from deep sleep, we are just as tightly bound as we were before we slept. The Upaniṣad gives the example here of a bird tied to a rope, struggling to get free. It starts flying in all directions, seeking a safe place—any place, anywhere else than where it is bound. At last it must give up and return to its place of bondage. Sri Ramakrishna used to give an illustration very similar to this. A bird is sitting on the mast of a ship and soon falls asleep. It does not notice that the ship has set sail. Finally, when the ship has gone far out to sea, it wakes up and starts looking around for land. Flying to the east, it eventually gets tired, and, not finding any land, comes back to the ship. In the same way, it flies out to the west, to the north, and to the south, but all it sees is water everywhere. At last the bird decides to take refuge on the mast of the ship. Swami Vivekananda says that all of us are struggling to be free. Freedom is our birthright. You are trying to be free; a student is trying to be free; a teacher is trying to be free. All of us, irrespective of our situation in life, are trying in one way or another to attain freedom. The Upaniṣad is saying that when we are awake, we are like the bird flying in different directions. We are constantly fluttering around, doing this and doing that. Sometimes we are attracted by something here, and then again by something there. Our minds are always roaming about. But finally we get tired and surrender our minds to prāṇa—that is, we lie down and go to sleep. And if we are lucky, we have good sound sleep. The word prāṇa here means the Self. Meister Eckhart once said that the mind has two eyes. One eye is always looking outside, looking at the things around. But the other eye is looking inside, looking and searching, as it were, into one’s own Being. Finally one discovers the ‘Castle of Security.’ What is this Castle of Security? It is the Self. When we enter into this castle we are at peace. That is what the Upaniṣad also says here. When a person is able to retreat into his own Self, even temporarily, he attains a state of peace and joy. In deep sleep, we temporarily enter the castle. It

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'As a bird when tied by a string flies first in every direction, and finding no rest anywhere, settles down at last on the very place where it is fastened, exactly in the same manner, my son, that mind (the gîva, or living Self in the mind, see VI, 3, 2), after flying in every direction, and finding no rest anywhere, settles down on breath [1]; for indeed, my son, mind is fastened to breath.

Footnote:

1. The commentator takes prâna here in the sense of Sat, which it often has elsewhere. If so, this illustration would have the same object as the preceding one. If we took prâna in the sense of breath, breath being the result of water, this paragraph might be taken to explain the resignation of the living Self to its bondage to breath, while on earth.


Sloka : 6.8.3

अशनापिपासे मे सोम्य विजानीहीति

यत्रैतत्पुरुषोऽशिशिषति नामाप एव तदशितं नयन्ते

तद्यथा गोनायोऽश्वनायः पुरुषनाय इत्येवं तदप

आचक्षतेऽशनायेति तत्रितच्छुङ्गमुत्पतितꣳ सोम्य

विजानीहि नेदममूलं भविष्यतीति ॥ ६.८.३॥

aśanāpipāse me somya vijānīhīti

yatraitatpuruṣo'śiśiṣati nāmāpa eva tadaśitaṃ nayante

tadyathā gonāyo'śvanāyaḥ puruṣanāya ityevaṃ tadapa

ācakṣate'śanāyeti tatritacchuṅgamutpatitagͫ somya

vijānīhi nedamamūlaṃ bhaviṣyatīti .. 6.8.3..



3. O Somya, now learn from me about hunger and thirst. When a person is said to be hungry, it is to be understood that the food he ate has been earned away by water. Just as people refer to a leader of cows, or a leader of horses, or a leader of people, similarly, people say that water is the leader of food. So also, O Somya, know that this sprout [i.e., the body] is the product of something [i.e., of food and drink]. It cannot be without a root.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; me, from me; aśanā pipāse, about hunger and thirst; vijānīhi iti, learn; yatra, when; puruṣaḥ, a person; aśiśiṣati etat nāma, is said to be hungry; tat, then; āpaḥ eva aśitam, the water which has been drunk; nayante, has carried [the food that he ate] away; tat yathā, just as, for example; go-nāyaḥ, a leader of cows; aśva-nāyaḥ, a leader of horses; puruṣa-nāyaḥ, one who leads other people; iti, these terms people use; evam, similarly; tat apaḥ, that water; ācakṣate, people say; aśanāya iti, is the leader of food; tatra, so also; vijānīhi, know; somya, O Somya; etat śuṅgam, this sprout [i.e., the body]; Commentary:-In this universe we always see two things—one is the cause, and the other is the effect. These two forces are always at work. The cause becomes the effect, and again the effect becomes the cause of something else. For instance, a duck is the effect of an egg, and again, that same duck is the cause of another egg. Buddhism also emphasizes this point. Many people are under the impression that Buddhism is an entirely new religion. But really speaking, it is not a new religion, as Buddha himself pointed out. In Buddhism, the cause and effect theory is termed pratītya-samutpāda, ‘dependent-arising’—that is, an effect arises dependent on its cause. The Upaniṣad here takes the example of a sprout and its roots. When you see a sprout, you know at once that there must be roots, and out of those roots the sprout has come. Similarly, we see ṃ this universe many things. They seem to have come from different sources, but in reality the ultimate source is one and the same. It is Sat, pure Existence, Brahman. In this verse, the father begins by telling his son about hunger and thirst. What does it mean when a person says, ‘I am hungry’? A few hours previously he ate something, but again he is hungry. What happened? It means that whatever he ate before has been carried away by water. Some of the water becomes blood and distributes the food to different parts of the body, and then the water carries away the waste part of the food and takes it out of the body. Then the person feels hungry again. This is why. water is said to be the leader of food. The Upaniṣad says it is like a herd of cows. Wherever there is a herd of cows, you will find that the herd chooses a particular cow as the leader. When the cows move from place to place, the leader is ahead and all the others follow behind. Similarly, water is the leader, and the food you eat is distributed and then taken away by the water. The idea is, this body comes from food, and water is what gives it life. They go together. Nothing is independent. Just as this body has a source, this universe also has a source. The Upaniṣad says that when you see a sprout, you know it has its source in a root. Similarly, this universe and everything that makes up this universe—such as food and water—has a source, and that source is Sat, pure Existence.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'Learn from me, my son, what are hunger and thirst. When a man is thus said to be hungry, water is carrying away (digests) what has been eaten by him. Therefore as they speak of a cow-leader (go-nâya), a horse-leader (asva-nâya), a man-leader (purusha-nâya), so they call water (which digests food and causes hunger) food-leader (asa-nâya). Thus (by food digested &c.), my son, know this offshoot (the body) to be brought forth, for this (body) could not be without a root (cause).


Sloka : 6.8.4

तस्य क्व मूलꣳ स्यादन्यत्रान्नादेवमेव खलु सोम्यान्नेन

शुङ्गेनापो मूलमन्विच्छाद्भिः सोम्य शुङ्गेन तेजो

मूलमन्विच्छ तेजसा सोम्य शुङ्गेन सन्मूलमन्विच्छ

सन्मूलाः सोम्येमाः सर्वाः प्रजाः सदायतनाः

सत्प्रतिष्ठाः ॥ ६.८.४॥

tasya kva mūlagͫ syādanyatrānnādevameva khalu somyānnena

śuṅgenāpo mūlamanvicchādbhiḥ somya śuṅgena tejo

mūlamanviccha tejasā somya śuṅgena sanmūlamanviccha

sanmūlāḥ somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sadāyatanāḥ

satpratiṣṭhāḥ .. 6.8.4..



4. Where else, except in food, can the body have its root? In the same way, O Somya, when food is the sprout, search for water as the root; when water is the sprout, O Somya, search for fire as the root; when fire is the sprout, O Somya, search for Sat [Existence] as the root. O Somya, Sat is the root, Sat is the abode, and Sat is the support of all these beings.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasya, of it [the body]; annāt, [besides] from food; anyatra kva, where else; mūlam syāt, can the root [of the body] be; evam eva khalu, in this way; somya, O Somya; annena śuṅgena, with food as the sprout; apaḥ mūlam, water as the root; anviccha, search for; adbhiḥ śuṅgena, water as the sprout; somya, O Somya; tejaḥ mūlam, fire as the root; anviccha, search for; tejasā śuṅgena, fire as the sprout; somya, O Somya; sat mūlam, Sat [Existence] as the root; anviccha, search for; somya, O Somya; imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings; sat mūlam, have Sat as the root; sat āyatanāḥ, Sat as the abode; sat pratiṣṭhāḥ, Sat as the support. Commentary:-Where there is a sprout, you know there is a root. Similarly, where there is a body, you know there is a root—that is, a source, and that source is food. Then what is the root of food? It is water. Again, water has its root in fire, and fire has its root in Existence. The Upaniṣad gives a number of links here. They follow one after another. But the ultimate root, the ultimate source, is Sat, Existence—pure Spirit. All beings—men, women, children, trees, animals, everything—are based on Sat. Praja means what is born. All that are born (sarvā prajā) are dependent on and resting on Sat.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'And where could its root be except in food (earth) [1]? And in the same manner, my son, as food (earth) too is an offshoot, seek after its root, viz. water. And as water too is an offshoot, seek after its root, viz. fire. And as fire too is an offshoot, seek after its root, viz. the True. Yes, all these creatures, my son, have their root in the True, they dwell in the True, they rest in the True.

Footnote:

1. That food is the root of the body is shown by the commentator in the following way:- Food when softened by water and digested becomes a fluid, blood (sonita). From it comes flesh, from flesh fat, from fat bones, from bones marrow, from marrow seed. Food eaten by a woman becomes equally blood (lohita), and from seed and blood combined the new body is produced. We must always have before us the genealogical table:-- Sat, τὸ ὄν.
  |
Tegas (fire) = Vâk (speech).
  |
Ap (water) = Prâna (breath).
  |
Anna (earth)= Manas (mind).


Sloka : 6.8.5

अथ यत्रैतत्पुरुषः पिपासति नाम तेज एव तत्पीतं नयते

तद्यथा गोनायोऽश्वनायः पुरुषनाय इत्येवं तत्तेज

आचष्ट उदन्येति तत्रैतदेव शुङ्गमुत्पतितꣳ सोम्य

विजानीहि नेदममूलं भविष्यतीति ॥ ६.८.५॥

atha yatraitatpuruṣaḥ pipāsati nāma teja eva tatpītaṃ nayate

tadyathā gonāyo'śvanāyaḥ puruṣanāya ityevaṃ tatteja

ācaṣṭa udanyeti tatraitadeva śuṅgamutpatitagͫ somya

vijānīhi nedamamūlaṃ bhaviṣyatīti .. 6.8.5..



5. Then when a person is said to be thirsty, it is to be understood that the water he drank has been carried away by fire. Just as people refer to a leader of cows, or a leader of horses, or a leader of people, similarly, people say that fire is the leader of water. So also, O Somya, know that this sprout [i.e., the body] is the product of something [i.e., of food and drink]. It cannot be without a root.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; yatra, when; puruṣaḥ, a person; pipāsati etat nāma, is said to be thirsty; tat, then; tejaḥ eva pītam nayate, fire has earned away [the water that he drank]; tat yathā, just as, for example; go-nāyaḥ, a leader of cows; aśva-nāyaḥ, a leader of horses; puruṣa-nāyaḥ, one who leads other people; iti, these terms people use; evam, similarly; tat tejaḥ, that fire; ācaṣṭe, is called; udanyā iti, the leader of water; tatra, so also; vijānīhi, know; somya, O Somya; etat eva śuṅgam, this sprout [i.e., the body]; utpatitam, is produced [by something]; idam, it; amūlam na bhaviṣyati iti, is not without a root. Commentary:-When does a person feel thirsty? When there is a shortage of water in his body. How does this shortage occur? It occurs when the heat in the body turns the water into blood and other things. As soon as the water is consumed in this way a person feels that he has to drink more water.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'When a man is thus said to be thirsty, fire carries away what has been drunk by him. Therefore as they speak of a cow-leader (go-nâya), of a horse-leader (asva-nâya), of a man-leader (purusha-nâya), so they call fire udanyâ, thirst, i. e. water-leader. Thus (by water digested &c.), my son, know this offshoot (the body) to be brought forth:- this (body) could not be without a root (cause).


Sloka : 6.8.6

तस्य क्व मूलꣳ स्यादन्यत्राद्भ्य्ऽद्भिः सोम्य शुङ्गेन तेजो

मूलमन्विच्छ तेजसा सोम्य शुङ्गेन सन्मूलमन्विच्छ

सन्मूलाः सोम्येमाः सर्वाः प्रजाः सदायतनाः सत्प्रतिष्ठा

यथा तु खलु सोम्येमास्तिस्रो देवताः पुरुषं प्राप्य

त्रिवृत्त्रिवृदेकैका भवति तदुक्तं पुरस्तादेव भवत्यस्य

सोम्य पुरुषस्य प्रयतो वाङ्मनसि सम्पद्यते मनः प्राणे

प्राणस्तेजसि तेजः परस्यां देवतायाम् ॥ ६.८.६॥

tasya kva mūlagͫ syādanyatrādbhy'dbhiḥ somya śuṅgena tejo

mūlamanviccha tejasā somya śuṅgena sanmūlamanviccha

sanmūlāḥ somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sadāyatanāḥ satpratiṣṭhā

yathā tu khalu somyemāstisro devatāḥ puruṣaṃ prāpya

trivṛttrivṛdekaikā bhavati taduktaṃ purastādeva bhavatyasya

somya puruṣasya prayato vāṅmanasi sampadyate manaḥ prāṇe

prāṇastejasi tejaḥ parasyāṃ devatāyām .. 6.8.6..



6. Where else, except in water, can the body have its root? O Somya, when water is the sprout, search for fire as the root; when fire is the sprout, O Somya, search for Sat [Existence] as the root. O Somya, Sat is the root, Sat is the abode, and Sat is the support of all these beings. As to how, O Somya, these three deities [fire, water, and earth] enter a body and each becomes threefold, this has already been explained. O Somya, as this person is dying, his speech merges into the mind, his mind into prāṇa, his prāṇa into fire, and then fire merges into Brahman, the Supreme Deity.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasya, of it [the body]; adbhyaḥ, [besides] from water; anyatra kva, where else; mūlam syāt, can the root [of the body] be; somya, O Somya; adbhiḥ śuṅgena, with water as the sprout; tejaḥ mūlam, fire as the root; anviccha, search for; tejasā śuṅgena, fire as the sprout; somya, O Somya; sat mūlam, Sat [Existence] as the root; anviccha, search for; somya, O Somya; imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings; sat mūlam, have Sat as the root; sat āyatanāḥ, Sat as the abode; sat pratiṣṭhāḥ, Sat as the support; yathā nu khalu, as to how; somya, O Somya; imāḥ tisraḥ devatāḥ, these three deities [fire, water, and earth]; puruṣam prāpya, enter a person; ekaikā bhavati, each one becomes; trivṛt trivṛt, threefold; tat uktam purastāt eva bhavati, this has been explained already; somya, O Somya; asya puruṣasya prayataḥ, as this person is dying; vāk, the organ of speech; manasi sampadyate, merges into the mind; manaḥ prāne, the mind into prāṇa; prāṇaḥ tejasi, prāṇa into fire; tejaḥ parasyām devatāyām, fire into the Supreme Deity [Brahman], Commentary:-What happens when a person dies? First, his speech merges into his mind. He cannot speak any more, but his mind is still active. Sometimes when a person has a stroke, he cannot speak but his mind is alert. Then the mind merges into prāṇa, his life force. The mind ceases to function, but he is still breathing. Then prāṇa merges into fire. Fire here means the heat in the body. If the body is still warm, you

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'And where could its root be except in water? As water is an offshoot, seek after its root, viz. fire. As fire is an offshoot, seek after its root, viz. the True. Yes, all these creatures, O son, have their root in the True, they dwell in the True, they rest in the True. 'And how these three beings (devatâ), fire, water, earth, O son, when they reach man, become each of them tripartite, has been said before (VI, 4, 7). When a man departs from hence, his speech [1] is merged in his mind, his mind in his breath, his breath in heat (fire), heat in the Highest Being.

Footnote:

1. If a man dies, the first thing which his friends say is, He speaks no more. Then, he understands no more. Then, he moves no more. Then, he is cold.


Sloka : 6.8.7

स य एषोऽणिमैतदात्म्यमिदꣳ सर्वं तत्सत्यꣳ स

आत्मा तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति भूय एव मा

भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति तथा सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.८.७॥

sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidagͫ sarvaṃ tatsatyagͫ sa

ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā

bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca .. 6.8.7..



7. ‘That which is the subtlest of all is the Self of all this. It is the Truth. It is the Self. That thou art, O Śvetaketu.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, please explain this to me again.’ ‘Yes, Somya, I will explain again,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, that which; eṣaḥ, this; aṇimā, the subtlest of all; idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this; tat satyam, that is the Truth; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; tat, that; tvam, you; asi, are; śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ eva, again; mā, to me; vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section. Commentary:-That which is the finest of all things, the subtlest, has that Existence, Sat, as its Self. That is the Truth, the Reality. We see all these forms before us. They are constantly changing. But that which we cannot see, which is the essence of everything, does not change. And that is our real identity. ‘That thou art’—this is the final message that Vedānta has to give. That Self, that essence, that pure Spirit, is your real identity. The phenomena we see before us are nothing but names and forms—nāma and rūpa. They are attributes superimposed on that which is constant, unchanging, unchangeable. You may call a person by one name today, but tomorrow he may have another name. And as regards forms, these are always changing. We are never the same. Then again, after some time these forms are gone. Vedānta defines satya, real, as that which existed in the past, which exists now, and which will exist in the future. But the names and forms we see before us are ephemeral. One day they are here and the next they are gone, so they cannot be real. Vedānta says, forget about your name and form. You are that eternal, unchanging Reality. Our form, our body, is the starting point of all our troubles. As soon aṣ we identify ourselves with the body we feel we are separate and different from others. ‘I am a brāhmin.’ ‘I am learned.’ ‘I am ignorant.’ ‘I come from such-and-such a place.’ Then you go on adding and adding—‘I am tall.’ ‘I am short.’ ‘I am fair.’ ‘I am dark.’ Remove these. Go to the essence, to the root—mūlā. Sir P.C. Roy did not believe in the caste system. In fact, he had contempt for it. Sometimes he would get together with some students and argue with them. Among the students, some were brāhmins and some were non-brāhmins. He would say:- ‘Look, I am a chemist. I can prove that the blood of the brāhmin and the blood of the śūdra are both the same. They are composed of the same elements. But you say that this is a person of brāhmin blood and this is a person of śūdra blood. These distinctions are not real.’ Vedānta also says these differences are mere upādhis, attributes. They are superimpositions. What is real? Pure Spirit. In essence we are all one.

Translation By Max Müller

7. 'Now that which is that subtile essence (the root of all), in it all that exists has its self. It is the True. It is the Self, and thou, O Svetaketu, art it.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son. 'Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.9.1

॥ इति अष्टमः खण्डः ॥

यथा सोम्य मधु मधुकृतो निस्तिष्ठन्ति नानात्ययानां

वृक्षाणाꣳरसान्समवहारमेकताꣳरसं गमयन्ति ॥ ६.९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yathā somya madhu madhukṛto nistiṣṭhanti nānātyayānāṃ

vṛkṣāṇāgͫrasānsamavahāramekatāgͫrasaṃ gamayanti .. 6.9.1..



1. O Somya, as bees produce honey by collecting the juice from various trees and mixing them together to make one juice—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yathā, as; somya, O Somya; madhukṛtaḥ, bees; madhu nistiṣṭhanti, produce honey; nānātyayānām Commentary:-Śvetaketu was still having a hard time understanding, so his father gave another example:- You see bees going around to different places. They collect pollen from many different trees and put it all together to make honey. Can you distinguish which flower a particular drop of honey came from? No, The pollen has become mixed together to make the honey.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'As the bees [1], my son, make honey by collecting the juices of distant trees, and reduce the juice into one form,

Footnote:

1. At the beginning of each chapter the commentator supplies the question which the son is supposed to have asked his father. The first is:- All creatures falling every day into deep sleep (sushupti) obtain thereby the Sat, the true being. How is it then that they do not know that they obtain the Sat every day?


Sloka : 6.9.2

ते यथा तत्र न विवेकं लभन्तेऽमुष्याहं वृक्षस्य

रसोऽस्म्यमुष्याहं वृक्षस्य रसोऽस्मीत्येवमेव खलु

सोम्येमाः सर्वाः प्रजाः सति सम्पद्य न विदुः सति

सम्पद्यामह इति ॥ ६.९.२ ॥

te yathā tatra na vivekaṃ labhante'muṣyāhaṃ vṛkṣasya

raso'smyamuṣyāhaṃ vṛkṣasya raso'smītyevameva khalu

somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sati sampadya na viduḥ sati

sampadyāmaha iti .. 6.9.2 ..



2.—O Somya, and just as those juices now are no longer conscious of their separate identities, thinking, ‘I am the juice from such-and-such tree,’ and ‘I am the juice from such-and-such tree’; similarly, when all these beings attain unity in the Self, they are not conscious of it. They do not think, ‘We [were once separate, but] now we are all one with the Self’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te, those [juices which have mixed together]; yathā tatra, now as [honey]; aham amuṣya vṛkṣasya rasaḥ asmi iti, I am the juice of such-and-such tree; aham amuṣya vṛkṣasya rasaḥ asmi iti, I am the juice of such-and-such tree; vivekam na labhante, this kind of consciousness [i.e., discrimination] they do not have; somya, O Somya; evarn eva, like this; khalu, surely; imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings; sati, in the Self [Brahman]; sampadya, having attained unity; sati sampadyāmahe, we are now all one with the Self; na viduḥ iti, are not conscious of this. Commentary:-Can a drop of honey say, ‘I am from one tree, and you are from another tree’? No, there is no such discrimination there. The pollen from different flowers becomes one mass of honey. Similarly, we may seem to come from different sources, but in essence we are all one. When we merge into pure Being, we are free from all such discriminating ideas. There is no more diversity there.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'And as these juices have no discrimination, so that they might say, I am the juice of this tree or that, in the same manner, my son, all these creatures, when they have become merged in the True (either in deep sleep or in death), know not that they are merged in the True.


Sloka : 6.9.3

त इह व्यघ्रो वा सिꣳहो वा वृको वा वराहो वा कीटो वा

पतङ्गो वा दꣳशो वा मशको वा यद्यद्भवन्ति तदाभवन्ति

॥ ६.९.३ ॥

ta iha vyaghro vā sigͫho vā vṛko vā varāho vā kīṭo vā

pataṅgo vā dagͫśo vā maśako vā yadyadbhavanti tadābhavanti

.. 6.9.3 ..



3. Whatever they were before in this world—whether a tiger or lion or leopard or boar or bug or insect or flea or mosquito—they are born again. [They never know that they came from Sat].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Te, these; iha, here [in this world]; vyāghraḥ vā, a tiger; siṃhaḥ vā, or a lion; vṛkaḥ vā, or a leopard; varāhaḥ vā, or a boar; kīṭaḥ vā, or a bug; pataṅgaḥ vā, or an insect; daṃśaḥ vā, or a flea; maśakaḥ vā, or a mosquito; yat yat, whatever; bhavanti, they are [before]; tat, that; ābhavanti, they are after [because they do not yet know the Self]. Commentary:-We are born again and again till we overcome our ignorance and attain Self-knowledge. Death, for an ignorant person, is not liberation. It is like going into deep sleep. And when you are reborn it is as if you are waking up. You die again and again, and again and again you are reborn. This goes on until you attain Self-knowledge. Once you know the Self, you are free—free from birth and death.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'Whatever these creatures are here, whether a lion, or a wolf, or a boar, or a worm, or a midge, or a gnat, or a musquito, that they become again and again.


Sloka : 6.9.4

स य एषोऽणिमैतदात्म्यमिदꣳ सर्वं तत्सत्यꣳ स आत्मा

तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति भूय एव मा भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति

तथा सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.९.४॥

sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidagͫ sarvaṃ tatsatyagͫ sa ātmā

tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti

tathā somyeti hovāca .. 6.9.4..



4. ‘That which is the subtlest of all is the Self of all this. It is the Truth. It is the Self. That thou art, O Śvetaketu.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, please explain this to me again.’ ‘Yes, Somya, I will explain it again,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, that which; eṣaḥ, this; aṇimā, the subtlest of all; idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this; tat satyam, that is the Truth; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; tat, that; tvam, you; asi, are; śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ eva, again; mā, to me; vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section. Commentary:-“Tat tvam asi”—thou art that. This is called the mahāvākya, the great saying, it is the magic formula. If your mind has been purified, as soon as the mahāvākya is uttered your eyes are opened and you realize your own Self. But this can happen only after a long process of preparation. It does not come by a fluke. After years of hard work and after shedding many tears, at last one day your mind becomes pure and free from ego. You have attained cittaśuddhi, purification of the mind. Your mind is then like a clean mirror. Now there is a layer of dust on the Once you know who you are you can never be deluded. Can there be darkness where there is light? If you are really enlightened there can be no room for ignorance in your mind. But without cittaśuddhi, even if the teacher tells you that you are the Self, you will not believe it. You will think:- ‘No, that is nonsense. I am this body.’ The father is again telling Śvetaketu, ‘You are That,’ but still it is not clear to him. How does it become clear? First we must study the Upaniṣads. Then we have to try and grasp the ideas intellectually. So long as the teacher is giving us instructions the idea fascinates us. That’s fine, but it’s not enough. We must realize it. We must feel it in the very depth of our being. Spiritual knowledge does not come through an intellectual process. It’s something more, something deeper, something that touches the very root of our being. It’s an experience. When you have this experience you are totally transformed. You are not the same individual anymore.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Now that which is that subtile essence, in it all that exists has its self. It is the True. It is the Self, and thou, O Svetaketu, art it.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son. 'Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.10.1

॥ इति नवमः खण्डः ॥

इमाः सोम्य नद्यः पुरस्तात्प्राच्यः स्यन्दन्ते

पश्चात्प्रतीच्यस्ताः समुद्रात्समुद्रमेवापियन्ति स समुद्र

एव भवति ता यथा तत्र न विदुरियमहमस्मीयमहमस्मीति

॥ ६.१०.१॥

.. iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

imāḥ somya nadyaḥ purastātprācyaḥ syandante

paścātpratīcyastāḥ samudrātsamudramevāpiyanti sa samudra

eva bhavati tā yathā tatra na viduriyamahamasmīyamahamasmīti

.. 6.10.1..



1. O Somya, those rivers belonging to the east run to the east, and those belonging to the west run to the west. Rising from the sea, they go back to it and become one with it. Just as, when they reach the sea, they do not know their separate identities—‘I am this river,’ or ‘I am that river’—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Imāḥ, these; somya, O Somya; nadyaḥ, rivers; purastāt, of the east; prācyaḥ syandante, flow to the east; pratīcyaḥ, of the west; paścāt, to the west; tāḥ, they; samudrāt, [rising] from the sea; samudram eva apiyanti, go to the sea; saḥ samudraḥ eva bhavati, become one with that sea; yathā, as; tatra, there; tāḥ, they; na viduḥ, do not know; iyam aham asmi iyam aham asmi iti, I am this [river], I am this [river]. Commentary:-Uddālaka gives another illustration. There are so many rivers in this country, and each originates from a different area. Ultimately, however, they all flow into the sea. They then lose their separate identities and become one with the sea. When the Ganga flows into the sea, you can no longer identify it as such. Can a drop of water in the sea say, ‘I am the Ganga,’ or ‘I am the Sindhu’? No. So also, when we die our sense of identity disappears temporarily. Then again, where did these rivers come from? They came from the sea. Sea water becomes vapour, rises, and forms into clouds. The clouds then go over the land and pour down rain, which eventually goes into the rivers and at last into the sea. The rivers come from the sea and go back to the sea. The sea is the source, but the rivers do not know this. This cycle is going on all the time. So also we come from pure Spirit and go back to pure Spirit, but we are not aware of it. We are only conscious of our separate identities. In dreamless sleep, our separate identities are wiped out for the time being. We sleep so soundly we do not even know we exist. We are then part of the Cosmic Self. Then when we wake up, we resume our separate identities again. Similarly, when we die, it is the body that dies. The individual self continues and is one with Existence. This does not mean liberation, however. We do not know that we have become one with Existence. It is as if we are in deep sleep. As the water rises from the sea and again falls down to become the Ganga or the Sindhu, so also, we again become some individual with a new body. Why are we not liberated? Because ignorance is there. When we die our ignorance is suspended for some time, and we are temporarily not conscious of our separate existence. But when we are reborn we resume our life from the point where we left off. We then have a new body but we retain all the impressions that we had in our previous life. These impressions manifest themselves again in our new birth because they have become part of our being. This is why we often find so much difference between one brother and another. Two brothers may be close in age but poles apart in temperament. One may be very studious, with scholarly inclinations, and the other may be very outgoing, more interested in sports and other activities. Even in terms of physical appearance they may be quite different. They are two separate identities. So, unless we attain Self-knowledge and become free, death is like going into deep sleep. It is a temporary pause in our life’s struggle. But the struggle must go on because of our ignorance.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'These rivers, my son, run, the eastern (like the Gangâ) toward the east, the western (like the Sindhu) toward the west. They go from sea to sea (i. e. the clouds lift up the water from the sea to the sky, and send it back as rain to the sea). They become indeed sea. And as those rivers, when they are in the sea, do not know, I am this or that river,


Sloka : 6.10.2

एवमेव खलु सोम्येमाः सर्वाः प्रजाः सत आगम्य न विदुः

सत आगच्छामह इति त इह व्याघ्रो वा सिꣳहो वा

वृको वा वराहो वा कीटो वा पतङ्गो वा दꣳशो वा मशको वा

यद्यद्भवन्ति तदाभवन्ति ॥ ६.१०.२॥

evameva khalu somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sata āgamya na viduḥ

sata āgacchāmaha iti ta iha vyāghro vā sigͫho vā

vṛko vā varāho vā kīṭo vā pataṅgo vā dagͫśo vā maśako vā

yadyadbhavanti tadābhavanti .. 6.10.2..



2.—In the same way, O Somya, all these beings, having come from Sat [Brahman], never know this. They never think, ‘We have come from Sat.’ Whatever they were before in this world—whether a tiger or lion or leopard or boar or bug or insect or flea or mosquito—they are born again [according to their karma. They never know that they came from Sat].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Evam eva khalu, in the same way; somya, O Somya; imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings; sataḥ, from Sat [Brahman]; āgamya, having come; sataḥ āgacchāmahe iti, we have come from Sat; na viduḥ, do not know; te, these [beings]; iha, here [in this world]; vyāghraḥ vā, a tiger; siṃhaḥ vā, or a lion; vṛkaḥ vā, or a leopard; varāhaḥ vā, or a boar; kīṭaḥ vā, or a bug; pataṅgaḥ vā, or an insect; daṃśaḥ vā, or a flea; maśakaḥ vā, or a mosquito; yatyat, whatever; bhavanti, they are [before]; tat, that; ābhavanti, they are after [because they do not yet know the Self]. Commentary:-The Upaniṣad does not mean to imply in this example of the rivers that we are not divine now and we are trying to become divine. No, we are always divine. Whether we know it or not, we are never separate from pure Spirit. But it is our misfortune that we do not know it. Here the Upaniṣad is giving us a warning. Our goal is Self-knowledge. Death or deep sleep is not our goal.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'In the same manner, my son, all these creatures, when they have come back from the True, know not that they have come back from the True. Whatever these creatures are here, whether a lion, or a wolf, or a boar, or a worm, or a midge, or a gnat, or a musquito, that they become again and again.


Sloka : 6.10.3

स य एषोऽणिमैतदात्म्यमिदꣳ सर्वं तत्सत्यꣳ स आत्मा

तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति भूय एव मा भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति

तथा सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.१०.३॥

sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidagͫ sarvaṃ tatsatyagͫ sa ātmā

tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti

tathā somyeti hovāca .. 6.10.3..



3. ‘That which is the subtlest of all is the Self of all this. It is the Truth. It is the Self. That thou art, O Śvetaketu.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, please explain this to me again.’ ‘Yes, Somya, I will explain it again,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, that which; eṣaḥ, this; aṇimā, the subtlest of all; idam sarvam aitaḍātmyam, the Self of all this; tat satyam, that is the Truth; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; tat, that; tvam, you; asi, are; śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ eva, again; mā, to me; vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'That which is that subtile essence, in it all that exists has its self. It is the True. It is the Self, and thou, O Svetaketu, art it.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son. 'Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.11.1

॥ इति दशमः खण्डः ॥

अस्य सोम्य महतो वृक्षस्य यो मूलेऽभ्याहन्याज्जीवन्स्रवेद्यो

मध्येऽभ्याहन्याज्जीवन्स्रवेद्योऽग्रेऽभ्याहन्याज्जीवन्स्रवेत्स

एष जीवेनात्मनानुप्रभूतः पेपीयमानो मोदमानस्तिष्ठति

॥ ६.११.१॥

.. iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

asya somya mahato vṛkṣasya yo mūle'bhyāhanyājjīvansravedyo

madhye'bhyāhanyājjīvansravedyo'gre'bhyāhanyājjīvansravetsa

eṣa jīvenātmanānuprabhūtaḥ pepīyamāno modamānastiṣṭhati

.. 6.11.1..



1-2. O Somya, if someone strikes at the root of a big tree, it will continue to live, though it may exude some juice. If he strikes at the middle, it will still live, though it may exude some juice. If he strikes at the top of the tree, it will survive, though it may exude some juice. Pervaded by the self, the tree will keep drinking juice and living happily. But if the self leaves a branch of a tree, that branch withers away and dies. If it leaves a second branch, that branch too will die. If it leaves a third branch, that branch also will die. If the self withdraws from the whole tree, then the whole tree will die.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; asya mahataḥ vṛkṣasya, of this big tree; yaḥ mūle abhyāhanyāt, [if] a person strikes at the root; jīvan, it [the tree] continues to live; sravet, [though] it exudes juice; yaḥ madhye abhyāhanyāt, [if] a person strikes in the middle; jīvan, it [the tree] continues to live; sravet, [though] it exudes juice; yaḥ agre abhyāhanyāt, [if] a person strikes at the top; jīvan, it [the tree] continues to live; sravet, [though] it exudes juice; saḥ eṣaḥ, this [tree]; jīvena ātmanā anuprabhūtaḥ, is pervaded by the living Self; pepīyamānaḥ, it continues drinking; modamānaḥ tiṣṭhati, [and] living happily, Yat, if; jīvaḥ, the self [life]; asya ekām śākhām, one branch of it [the tree]; jahāti, abandons; atha, then; sā śuṣyati, it [the branch] withers away; dvitīyām, a second [branch]; jahāti, [if] it leaves; atha sā śuṣyati, then it [the branch] withers away; tṛtīyām, a third [branch]; jahāti, [if] it leaves; atha sā śuṣyati, then it [the branch] withers away; sarvam jahāti, [if] it leaves all [the whole tree]; sarvaḥ śuṣyati, the whole tree withers away. Commentary:-Suppose you strike at a tree. If the tree is not dead, water will come out of the wound, and eventually the wound will heal. According to Vedānta, a tree is a living individual, like a human being. It has life; it has a self. As my self permeates the whole of my body, similarly, the self of a tree permeates the whole body of the tree. If one part of my body becomes paralyzed, it means that the self which previously permeated the whole of my body has withdrawn itself from that part. So also, if the self of a tree leaves a limb of the tree, that limb becomes dried up. The Upaniṣad is trying to say here that death merely means the withdrawal of the individual self from the whole body. Suppose you are living at a certain house. If you leave that house and move somewhere else, that house becomes vacant and useless. It’s exactly like that. When the Self leaves the body, the body becomes empty and useless.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'If some one were to strike at the root of this large tree here, it would bleed, but live. If he were to strike at its stem, it would bleed, but live. If he were to strike at its top, it would bleed, but live. Pervaded by the living Self that tree stands firm, drinking in its nourishment and rejoicing;


Sloka : 6.11.2

अस्य यदेकाꣳ शाखां जीवो जहात्यथ सा शुष्यति

द्वितीयां जहात्यथ सा शुष्यति तृतीयां जहात्यथ सा

शुष्यति सर्वं जहाति सर्वः शुष्यति ॥ ६.११.२॥

asya yadekāgͫ śākhāṃ jīvo jahātyatha sā śuṣyati

dvitīyāṃ jahātyatha sā śuṣyati tṛtīyāṃ jahātyatha sā

śuṣyati sarvaṃ jahāti sarvaḥ śuṣyati .. 6.11.2..



Translation By Max Müller

2. 'But if the life (the living Self) leaves one of its branches, that branch withers; if it leaves a second, that branch withers; if it leaves a third, that branch withers. If it leaves the whole tree, the whole tree withers [1]. In exactly the same manner, my son, know this.' Thus he spoke:-

Footnote:

1. The commentator remarks that according to the Veda, trees are conscious, while Buddhists and followers of Kanâda hold them to be unconscious. They live, because one sees how their sap runs and how it dries up, just as one sees the sap in a living body, which, as we saw, was produced by food and water. Therefore the simile holds good. The life, or, more correctly, the liver, the living Self, pervades the tree, as it pervades man, when it has entered the organism which produces breath, mind, and speech. If any accident happens to a branch, the living Self draws himself away from that branch, and then the branch withers. The sap which caused the living Self to remain, goes, and the living Self goes away with it. The same applies to the whole tree. The tree dies when the living Self leaves it, but the living Self does not die; it only leaves an abode which it had before occupied. Some other illustrations, to show that the living Self remains, are added by the commentator:- First, with regard to the living Self being the same when it awakes from deep sleep (sushupti), he remarks that we remember quite well that we have left something unfinished before we fell asleep. And then with regard to the living Self being the same when it awakes from death to a new life, he shows that creatures, as soon as they are born take the breast, and exhibit terror, which can only be explained, as he supposes, by their possessing a recollection of a former state of existence.


Sloka : 6.11.3

एवमेव खलु सोम्य विद्धीति होवाच जीवापेतं वाव किलेदं

म्रियते न जीवो म्रियते इति स य एषोऽणिमैतदात्म्यमिदꣳ

सर्वं तत्सत्यꣳ स आत्मा तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति भूय एव

मा भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति तथा सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.११.३॥

evameva khalu somya viddhīti hovāca jīvāpetaṃ vāva kiledaṃ

mriyate na jīvo mriyate iti sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidagͫ

sarvaṃ tatsatyagͫ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva

mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca .. 6.11.3..



3. The father said; ‘O Somya, know this:- When the self leaves the body, the body surely dies. The self, however, never dies. That which is the subtlest of all is the Self of all this. It is the Truth. It is the Self. That thou art, O Śvetaketu.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, please explain this to me again.’ ‘Yes, Somya, I will explain it again,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Evam eva khalu, like this; somya, O Somya; viddhi, know; iti ha uvāca, he said; jīva-apetam, deserted by the self; idam, this [body]; vāva kila mriyate, is truly dead; jīvaḥ na mriyate, the self never dies; saḥ yaḥ, that which; eṣaḥ, this; aṇimā, the subtlest of all; idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this; tat satyam, that is the Truth; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; tat, that; tvam, you; asi, are; śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ eva, again; mā, to me; vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section. Commentary:-The self is immortal. It is the body that dies, and it dies when the self leaves it. Suppose you go to sleep leaving some of your work incomplete. As soon as you wake up, you remember that it was not finished, and you immediately start doing the work from where you left off. Your sleep was like the death of your body, for it was inactive and you were totally unconscious of your body. But the self never dies, and that is why when you wake up you remember your work is unfinished. Whether you are awake or asleep, you are the same self. The self never changes. You may have seen how a new-born kitten behaves. It knows where to get its mother’s milk. No one teaches it, but how does it know? It knows from its past life. Some of the scriptures say to perform sacrifices such as the Agnihotra. They say we will be duly rewarded for this. But we are asked to perform them to the last day of our life. If we perform them till we die, when are we going to get the reward? Obviously in our future life. The individual is born again and again to receive rewards and punishments, but the real Self remains the same.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'This (body) indeed withers and dies when the living Self has left it; the living Self dies not. 'That which is that subtile essence, in it all that exists has its self. It is the True. It is the Self, and thou, Svetaketu, art it.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son. 'Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.12.1

॥ इति एकादशः खण्डः ॥

न्यग्रोधफलमत आहरेतीदं भगव इति भिन्द्धीति भिन्नं

भगव इति किमत्र पश्यसीत्यण्व्य इवेमा धाना भगव

इत्यासामङ्गैकां भिन्द्धीति भिन्ना भगव इति किमत्र

पश्यसीति न किंचन भगव इति ॥ ६.१२.१॥

.. iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

nyagrodhaphalamata āharetīdaṃ bhagava iti bhinddhīti bhinnaṃ

bhagava iti kimatra paśyasītyaṇvya ivemā dhānā bhagava

ityāsāmaṅgaikāṃ bhinddhīti bhinnā bhagava iti kimatra

paśyasīti na kiṃcana bhagava iti .. 6.12.1..



1. Uddālaka said, ‘Bring me a fruit from this banyan tree.’ Śvetaketu replied, ‘I have brought it, sir.’ Uddālaka:- ‘Break it.’ Śvetaketu:- ‘I’ve broken it, sir.’ Uddālaka:- ‘What do you see inside?’ Śvetaketu:- ‘There are tiny seeds, sir.’ Uddālaka:- ‘Break one of them, my son.’ Śvetaketu:- ‘Sir, I’ve broken it.’ Uddālaka:- ‘What do you see in it?’ Śvetaketu:- ‘Nothing, sir’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Nyagrodha-phalam ataḥ āhara iti, [Uddālaka said,] bring me a fruit from this banyan tree; idam bhagavaḥ iti, [Śvetaketu replied,] here it is, sir; bhinddhi iti, break it; bhinnam bhagavaḥ iti, I have broken it sir; kim atra paśyasi iti, what do you see in it; aṇvyaḥ iva imāḥ dhānāḥ, these tiny seeds; bhagavaḥ iti, sir; āsām ekām bhinddhi, break one of them; aṅga iti, my child; bhinnā bhagavaḥ iti, it is broken, sir; kim atra paśyasi iti, what do you see in it; na kiñcana bhagavaḥ iti, nothing, sir. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Fetch me from thence a fruit of the Nyagrodha tree.' 'Here is one, Sir.' Break it.' 'It is broken, Sir.' 'What do you see there?' 'These seeds, almost infinitesimal.' 'Break one of them.' 'It is broken, Sir.' 'What do you see there?' 'Not anything, Sir.'


Sloka : 6.12.2

तꣳ होवाच यं वै सोम्यैतमणिमानं न निभालयस

एतस्य वै सोम्यैषोऽणिम्न एवं महान्यग्रोधस्तिष्ठति

श्रद्धत्स्व सोम्येति ॥ ६.१२.२॥

tagͫ hovāca yaṃ vai somyaitamaṇimānaṃ na nibhālayasa

etasya vai somyaiṣo'ṇimna evaṃ mahānyagrodhastiṣṭhati

śraddhatsva somyeti .. 6.12.2..



2. Uddālaka said:- ‘O Somya, the finest part in that seed is not visible to you. But in that finest part lies hidden the huge banyan tree. Have faith in what I say, O Somya’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tam, to him [his son]; ha uvāca, [Uddālaka] said; somya, O Somya; etam vai aṇimānam, that subtle part; yam na nibhālayase, which you do not see; etasya vai, of this very; aṇimnaḥ, subtle part; somya, O Somya; eṣaḥ mahānyagrodhaḥ, this big banyan tree; tiṣṭhati, exists; śraddhatsva somya iti, have faith [in what I say], O Somya. Commentary:-A banyan tree is such a huge tree, but its seed is very tiny. If you split open the seed what do you see? Nothing. Yet the essence of that big tree is there in that tiny seed. How do you know? If you put the seed in the ground, very soon a sprout will appear. Then that sprout will grow and gradually become a big tree. Though there seems to be nothing inside the seed, the essence of the tree must be there; otherwise a tree could not grow from it. Then the father says, ‘Have śraddhā, faith—faith in what I am saying.’ Śaṅkara says that faith makes the mind concentrated. If your mind is restless and always running after sense pleasures, you will never realize the Self. How can a mind that is outgoing and attached to gross external things, see that which is fine? It can’t. In the Kaṭha Upaniṣad, Yama said to Naciketā that our senses are all outgoing. The eyes, the ears, the mind—they are all going to the sense objects. We must reverse the process—that is, we must turn the senses inward. But this is very difficult to do if you lack faith. Sri Ramakrishna used to say that the mind was like a bag of mustard seeds. Suppose there is a leak in a bag of mustard seeds. The mustard seeds will fall out and be scattered all over the place, and it is then very difficult to gather them up again. Similarly, the leak in the bag is like our attachment to sense enjoyments. Once the mind is scattered on external things, it is difficult to bring it back and focus it on the Self. But if you have faith—faith that the Self is the Reality—then it becomes easy to concentrate the mind. Once you have control over the mind, you can grasp the subtleties of spiritual truths very quickly. In fact, it is said that the Truth reveals itself to you. This is quite rational. If you really want to know something, your mind will automatically be focussed on it. And if you are not interested, your mind will be elsewhere. You may be sitting in front of the teacher, but if your mind is on a cricket game you will not hear anything the teacher says.

Translation By Max Müller

2. The father said:- 'My son, that subtile essence which you do not perceive there, of that very essence this great Nyagrodha tree exists.


Sloka : 6.12.3

स य एषोऽणिमैतदात्म्यमिदद्ꣳ सर्वं तत्सत्यꣳ स आत्मा

तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति भूय एव मा भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति

तथा सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.१२.३॥

sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidadgͫ sarvaṃ tatsatyagͫ sa ātmā

tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti

tathā somyeti hovāca .. 6.12.3..



3. ‘That which is the subtlest of all is the Self of all this. It is the Truth. It is the Self. That thou art, O Śvetaketu.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, please explain this to me again.’ ‘Yes, Somya, I will explain it again,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, that which; eṣaḥ, this; aṇimā, the subtlest of all; idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this; tat satyam, that is the Truth; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; tat, that; tvam, you; asi, are; śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ eva, again; mā, to me; vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section. Commentary:-This idea is very difficult to grasp, but how much patience the father has. Now Śvetaketu has another doubt:- You say that the Self exists, but it cannot be seen. You say it is aṇimā, extremely fine—finer than an atom. Yet everything has come from the Self. How then did the Self become so gross? How did it become this physical universe that we can see? Here we must remember the principle of cause and effect. The cause becomes the effect. The cause is subtle, fine, but when it becomes the effect it becomes gross. The tiny seed becomes the vast banyan tree. The Self manifests itself as everything that exists. The goal of life is to realize the Self. Life is useless otherwise. This is why Śvetaketu keeps bothering his father. Again and again he says, ‘Father, please explain further.’ Uddālaka is patient. The relationship between the Self and the world is quite a riddle. How the invisible Self becomes the visible world is difficult to comprehend. The example of the seed and the banyan tree helps, but it is still not clear, so Śvetaketu pesters his father for more explanation. His father then tells him to have faith. ‘Faith’ means faith in the teacher, in the scriptures, and even in oneself. Faith is what at last clears all doubts.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'Believe it, my son. That which is the subtile essence, in it all that exists has its self. It is the True. It is the Self, and thou, O Svetaketu, art it.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son. 'Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.13.1

॥ इति द्वादशः खण्डः ॥

लवणमेतदुदकेऽवधायाथ मा प्रातरुपसीदथा इति

स ह तथा चकार तꣳ होवाच यद्दोषा लवणमुदकेऽवाधा

अङ्ग तदाहरेति तद्धावमृश्य न विवेद ॥ ६.१३.१॥

.. iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

lavaṇametadudake'vadhāyātha mā prātarupasīdathā iti

sa ha tathā cakāra tagͫ hovāca yaddoṣā lavaṇamudake'vādhā

aṅga tadāhareti taddhāvamṛśya na viveda .. 6.13.1..



1-2. [Uddālaka said,] ‘Put this lump of salt into water and come to me in the morning.’ Śvetaketu did as he was told. Uddālaka said to him, ‘My son, bring me the salt that you put in the water.’ Śvetaketu looked, but he could not find it, as the salt had dissolved in the water. [Uddālaka said,] ‘My son, drink the water at the surface.’ [Śvetaketu did that, and Uddālaka asked,] ‘How does it taste?’ [Śvetaketu replied,] ‘It is saline.’ [Uddālaka then said:-] ‘Drink it from the middle. How does it taste?’ ‘It is saline.’ ‘Drink it from the bottom. How does it taste?’ ‘It is saline.’ ‘Throw the water away and then come to me.’ Śvetaketu did so. The father said to him:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Lavaṇam etat, this salt; udake, in water; avadhāya, put; atha mā, then to me; prātaḥ, in the morning; upasīdathāḥ iti, come; saḥ, he [Śvetaketu]; tathā, that way; ha cakāra, did; tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Śvetaketu]; yat lavaṇam, that salt which; doṣā, at night; udake avādhāḥ, you put into water; aṅga, my son; tat, that; āhara iti, bring it back; tat, that; ha avamṛśya, having searched for; na viveda, he did not find, Yathā, since; vilīnam eva, it had disappeared [in the water]; aṅga, my son; asya antāt ācāma iti, drink from its surface; katham iti, how is it; lavaṇam iti, saline; madhyāt ācāma iti, drink from the middle; katham iti, how is it; lavaṇam iti, saline; antāt ācāma iti, drink from the bottom; katham iti, how is it; lavaṇam iti, saline; abhiprāya etat, throw this away; atha mā upasīdathāḥ iti, then come to me; tat ha tathā cakāra, he did likewise; tat, that [salinity]; śaśvat, always; saṃvartate, prevails everywhere; tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Śvetaketu]; atra vāva kila, here [in this body]; somya, O Somya; sat, the self [exists]; na nibhālayase, [but] you do not see it; atra eva kila iti, here [in the body]. Commentary:-‘There is salt in every part of the water, yet you cannot see it. Similarly, O Somya, Sat [the Self] is here in this body, yet you cannot see it in the body.’ The question that is being examined is, why are we not able to perceive the Self, which is the essence of our being? It is because the Self is all-pervasive. The Self and I are one and the same. If the Self were something separate from me, then I could see it. Can I see myself? I can see myself if I have a mirror—something else. But there is nothing but the Self, so how can I see it? It’s not possible. Because you don’t see something that doesn’t mean it does not exist. The process of seeing involves separate entities:- the seer and the seen—that is, the subject and the object. These two must be separate. Then only the process of seeing can take place. But if there is only one, who sees whom? The Upaniṣad gives two examples of how things may exist that we do not perceive. One is of the banyan tree and the seed, and the other is of salt in water. Suppose you put a lump of salt in a glass of water. Soon the salt dissolves. You no longer see it, but that doesn’t mean it is not there. If you taste the water you will find that it tastes salty throughout. Similarly, just because we do not see the Self, that doesn’t prove it does not exist. Reality is not something that is perceptible to our sense organs. It is vākyamanātīta—beyond speech and mind, beyond thought. Words fail to describe it and our mind cannot grasp it, because it is so fine, so subtle. The Self is not something on the relative plane that we can see or touch. Our sense organs are very limited. Our eyes can see things only up to a point and beyond that they cannot see any more. There are many things around us that our eyes cannot see. Similarly with our hearing and other organs. So, in order to perceive the Self we must go beyond the relative plane to the transcendental level. Śaṅkara says that this body is a product of food (or, earth), water, and fire, and the Self is within this body. Though you cannot see the Self, it permeates the body—just as the salt permeates the water

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Place this salt in water, and then wait on me in the morning.' The son did as he was commanded. The father said to him:- 'Bring me the salt, which you placed in the water last night.' The son having looked for it, found it not, for, of course, it was melted.


Sloka : 6.13.2

यथा विलीनमेवाङ्गास्यान्तादाचामेति कथमिति लवणमिति

मध्यादाचामेति कथमिति लवणमित्यन्तादाचामेति

कथमिति लवणमित्यभिप्रास्यैतदथ मोपसीदथा इति

तद्ध तथा चकार तच्छश्वत्संवर्तते तꣳ होवाचात्र

वाव किल तत्सोम्य न निभालयसेऽत्रैव किलेति ॥ ६.१३.२॥

yathā vilīnamevāṅgāsyāntādācāmeti kathamiti lavaṇamiti

madhyādācāmeti kathamiti lavaṇamityantādācāmeti

kathamiti lavaṇamityabhiprāsyaitadatha mopasīdathā iti

taddha tathā cakāra tacchaśvatsaṃvartate tagͫ hovācātra

vāva kila tatsomya na nibhālayase'traiva kileti .. 6.13.2..



Translation By Max Müller

2. The father said:- 'Taste it from the surface of the water. How is it?' The son replied:- 'It is salt.' 'Taste it from the middle. How is it?' The son replied:- 'It is salt.' 'Taste it from the bottom. How is it?' The son replied 'It is salt.' The father said Throw it away [1] and then wait on me.' He did so; but salt exists for ever. Then the father said:- 'Here also, in this body, forsooth, you do not perceive the True (Sat), my son; but there indeed it is.

Footnote:

1. Read abhiprâsya, which is evidently intended by the commentary:- abhiprâsya parityagya. See B. R. Sanskrit Dictionary, s. v.


Sloka : 6.13.3

स य एषोऽणिमैतदात्म्यमिदꣳ सर्वं तत्सत्यꣳ स आत्मा

तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति भूय एव मा भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति

तथा सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.१३.३॥

sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidagͫ sarvaṃ tatsatyagͫ sa ātmā

tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti

tathā somyeti hovāca .. 6.13.3..



3. ‘That which is the subtlest of all is the Self of all this. It is the Truth. It is the Self. That thou art, O Śvetaketu.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, please explain this to me again.’ ‘Yes, Somya, I will explain it again,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, that which; eṣaḥ, this; aṇimā, the subtlest of all; idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this; tat satyam, that is the Truth; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; tat, that; tvam, you; asi, are; śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ era, again; mā, to me; vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section. Commentary:-Again, the same idea:- Just as salt is everywhere in the glass of water, pervading all the particles of the water, so also, the Self is all-pervasive. It is the essence. That is the Reality, and you are that.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'That which is the subtile essence, in it all that exists has its self. It is the True. It is the Self, and thou, O Svetaketu, art it.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son. 'Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.14.1

॥ इति त्रयोदशः खण्डः ॥

यथा सोम्य पुरुषं गन्धारेभ्योऽभिनद्धाक्षमानीय तं

ततोऽतिजने विसृजेत्स यथा तत्र प्राङ्वोदङ्वाधराङ्वा

प्रत्यङ्वा प्रध्मायीताभिनद्धाक्ष आनीतोऽभिनद्धाक्षो

विसृष्टः ॥ ६.१४.१॥

.. iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yathā somya puruṣaṃ gandhārebhyo'bhinaddhākṣamānīya taṃ

tato'tijane visṛjetsa yathā tatra prāṅvodaṅvādharāṅvā

pratyaṅvā pradhmāyītābhinaddhākṣa ānīto'bhinaddhākṣo

visṛṣṭaḥ .. 6.14.1..



1. O Somya, as when a person is brought blindfolded from the Gandhāra country and left in a deserted place, he turns sometimes to the east, sometimes to the north, sometimes to the south, and sometimes to the west, shouting:- ‘I have been brought here blindfolded! I have been left here blindfolded!’—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yathā, just as; somya, O Somya; puruṣam, a person, gandhārebhyaḥ, from the Gandhāra region; abhinaddha-akṣam-ānīya, is brought blindfolded; tataḥ, from there; tam visṛjet, [and] leaves him; atijane, in a deserted place; yathā, as; saḥ, he; tatra, there; prāṅ vā, facing the east; udaṅ vā, or facing the north; adharāṅ vā, or facing the south; pratyaṅ vā, or facing the west; pradhmāyīta, shouts; abhinaddhākṣaḥ ānītaḥ, I have been brought blindfolded; abhinaddhākṣaḥ visṛṣṭaḥ, I have been left blindfolded. Commentary:-The Upaniṣad is trying to convey a very difficult idea, but fortunately it gives many illustrations. Here is another one:- Suppose you have been seized by some robbers. They put a blindfold on your eyes and then take you away into the forest and leave you there. Perhaps the forest is infested with wild animals. Somehow or other you have to get out, but you don’t know where you are and you can’t see anything. What do you do? You run around in every direction, shouting:- ‘I am so-and-so. I belong to such-and-such village. I can’t see anything. Please help me get out of here.’ Then at last someone takes pity on you and leads you out of the forest. That someone is the teacher. You are ignorant and don’t know the way. You don’t know how to reach God, how to attain the Truth. But someone has compassion on you—someone who knows the way. You say, ‘I must go back home.’ But what is this home? It is the Self. The small self wants to return to the Cosmic Self. It is as if the self is alienated from itself—as if there is a barrier between one self and the other. The individual self and the Cosmic Self are the same, but there seems to be a barrier between them. We have to remove that barrier.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'As one might lead a person with his eyes covered away from the Gandhâras [1], and leave him then in a place where there are no human beings; and as that person would turn towards the east, or the north, or the west, and shout, "I have been brought here with my eyes covered, I have been left here with my eyes covered,"

Footnote:

1. The Gandhâras, but rarely mentioned in the Rig-veda and the Ait. Brâhmana, have left their name in Κάνδαροι and Candahar. The fact of their name being evidently quite familiar to the author of the Upanishad might be used to prove either its antiquity or its Northern origin.


Sloka : 6.14.2

तस्य यथाभिनहनं प्रमुच्य प्रब्रूयादेतां दिशं गन्धारा

एतां दिशं व्रजेति स ग्रामाद्ग्रामं पृच्छन्पण्डितो मेधावी

गन्धारानेवोपसम्पद्येतैवमेवेहाचार्यवान्पुरुषो वेद

तस्य तावदेव चिरं यावन्न विमोक्ष्येऽथ सम्पत्स्य इति

॥ ६.१४.२॥

tasya yathābhinahanaṃ pramucya prabrūyādetāṃ diśaṃ gandhārā

etāṃ diśaṃ vrajeti sa grāmādgrāmaṃ pṛcchanpaṇḍito medhāvī

gandhārānevopasampadyetaivamevehācāryavānpuruṣo veda

tasya tāvadeva ciraṃ yāvanna vimokṣye'tha sampatsya iti

.. 6.14.2..



2.—And as someone may remove that person’s blindfold and say, ‘Gandhāra is this way; go this way,’ and the intelligent man goes from one village to another, asking his way and relying on the information people give, until he reaches Gandhāra; similarly, a person who gets a teacher attains knowledge. His delay is only as long as he is not free of his body. After that he becomes merged in the Self.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yathā, as; tasya, his; abhinahanam, blindfold; pramucya, having removed; prabrūyāt, someone says; etām diśam, this way; gandhārāḥ, is the Gandhāra country; etām diśam vraja iti, go this way; saḥ, he; grāmāt grāmam pṛcchan, asking from village to village; paṇḍitaḥ medhāvī, the enlightened person who gets knowledge [of what direction to go in]; gandhārān eva upasampadyeta, reaches Gandhāra itself; evam eva, in the same way; iha, in this world; puruṣaḥ veda, a person knows; ācāryavān, guided by a teacher; tasya, his; tāvat eva, that long; ciram, delay; yāvat, as long as; na vimokṣye, he is hot free [from the body]; atha sampatsye iti, then he becomes merged in the Self. Commentary:-The question being considered here is, if I am ignorant how will my ignorance be removed? It can be removed through the instructions of a teacher. But he must be a competent teacher. Can a blind person lead another blind person? No. There is sure to be a disaster if they try. In this verse the Upaniṣad gives an example of a person led blindfolded into a forest and left there. We are like that person. We are blind, ignorant, and we are unhappy and suffer because of our ignorance. This world of attachment is like a dense forest. Though it is self-created, we do not know the way out. We need someone to help us—someone who knows the way. We need a good teacher. Śaṅkara says the word medhāvī means one who is capable of understanding. You may have a good teacher, and you may have been given instructions, but you have to use your intelligence also. Now suppose you have a good teacher and you have attained Self-knowledge. According to Vedānta, when you attain Self-knowledge you automatically attain liberation. But the Upaniṣad says there is still one snag. What is that snag? Our prārabdha karma. Karma means the results of our actions. If I do something good, I will experience a good result; and if I do something bad, I must suffer. Vedānta says, there are three kinds of karma. One kind is called sañcita karma. It is our karma that has been accumulated from one birth to another. We have done so many things, and all these actions are waiting to bear fruit. Another kind of karma is called āgāmī karma. While we are experiencing the fruits of our past actions, we are also creating new karma now by our present actions. Some of these actions will bear fruit immediately, but others will take time. The third kind of karma is called prārabdha karma. It is that which has already started bearing fruit in our present life. According to Vedānta, if you have attained Self-knowledge, both your sañcita karma and your āgāmī karma are destroyed. Śaṅkara says they are burned in the fire of knowledge (jñānāgni). But your prārabdha karma will continue. It is the momentum. If you are to suffer from cancer or something else, you cannot escape it. You have to wait till your prārabdha karma exhausts itself. There are two examples of prārabdha karma. One example is:- Suppose you are sawing a tree down. You saw it through completely, but it keeps standing there. It does not immediately fall down. Then a little breeze comes and it falls over. Prārabdha is like the tree standing for a while before falling down. Then there is the example of the arrow that has been shot. Once you shoot an arrow, you cannot call it back. The same is the case with prārabdha karma. It goes on till the force that has put it into motion is expended. Now, if you have attained Self-knowledge, your actions will not be like those of an ordinary person. Whatever you do from then on is for the good of others. Śaṅkara says a liberated person does nothing out of desire. If you do something out of desire, that action binds you, even if it is something good. Very often a person does something good out of desire for fame, for power, or for some other selfish motive. A liberated person, according to Śaṅkara, will do nothing that is against the spirit of the scriptures. His actions will always be right. And they will be only for the good of others (lokahitārtham), or for God (Īśvarārtham).

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'And as thereupon some one might loose his bandage and say to him, "Go in that direction, it is Gandhâra, go in that direction;" and as thereupon, having been informed and being able to judge for himself, he would by asking his way from village to village arrive at last at Gandhâra,--in exactly the same manner does a man, who meets with a teacher to inform him, obtain the true knowledge [1]. For him there is only delay so long as he is not delivered (from the body); then he will be perfect [2].

Footnote:

1. Tedious as the commentator is in general, he is sometimes almost eloquent in bringing out all that is implied or supposed to be implied in the sacred text. He explains the last simile as follows:- A man was carried away by robbers from his own country. After his eyes had been covered, he was taken to a forest full of terrors and dangers arising from tigers, robbers, &c. Not knowing where he was, and suffering from hunger and thirst, he began to cry, wishing to be delivered from his bonds. Then a man took pity on him and removed his bonds, and when he had returned to his home, he was happy. Next follows the application. Our real home is the True (Sat), the Self of the world. The forest into which we are driven is the body, made of the three elements, fire, water, earth, consisting of blood, flesh, bones, &c., and liable to cold, heat, and many other evils. The bands with which our eyes are covered are our desires for many things, real or unreal, such as wife children, cattle, &c., while the robbers by whom we are driven into the forest are our good and evil deeds. Then we cry and say:- 'I am the son of so and so, these arc my relatives, I am happy, I am miserable, I am foolish, I am wise, I am just, I am born, I am dead, I am old, I am wretched, my son is dead, my fortune is gone, I am undone, how shall I live, where shall I go, who will save me?' These and hundreds and thousands of other evils are the bands which blind us. Then, owing to some supererogatory good works we may have done, we suddenly meet a man who knows the Self of Brahman, whose own bonds have been broken, who takes pity on us and shows us the way to see the evil which attaches to all that we love in this world. We then withdraw ourselves from all worldly pleasures. We learn that we are not mere creatures of the world, the son of so and so, &c., but that we are that which is the True (Sat). The bands of our ignorance and blindness are removed, and, like the man of Gandhâra, we arrive at our own home, the Self, or the True. Then we are happy and blessed. 2. The last words are really--'for him there is only delay so long as I shall not be delivered; then I shall be perfect.' This requires some explanation. First of all, the change from the third to the first person, is best explained by assuming that at the point where all individuality vanishes, the father, as teacher, identifies himself with the person of whom he is speaking. The delay (the kira or kshepa) of which he speaks is the time which passes between the attainment of true knowledge and death, or freedom from the effects of actions performed before the attainment of knowledge. The actions which led to our present embodiment must be altogether consumed, before the body can perish, and then only are we free. As to any actions performed after the attainment of knowledge, they do not count; otherwise there would be a new embodiment, and the attainment of even true knowledge would never lead to final deliverance.


Sloka : 6.14.3

स य एषोऽणिमैतदात्म्यमिदꣳ सर्वं तत्सत्यꣳ स आत्मा

तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति भूय एव मा भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति

तथा सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.१४.३॥

sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidagͫ sarvaṃ tatsatyagͫ sa ātmā

tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti

tathā somyeti hovāca .. 6.14.3..



3. ‘That which is the subtlest of all is the Self of all this. It is the Truth. It is the Self. That thou art, O Śvetaketu.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, please explain this to me again.’ ‘Yes, Somya, I will explain it again,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, that which; eṣaḥ, this; aṇimā, the subtlest of all; idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this; tat satyam, that is the Truth; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; tat, that; tvam, you; asi, are; śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ eva, again; mā, to me; vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'That which is the subtile essence, in it all that exists has its self. It is the True. It is the Self, and thou, O Svetaketu, art it.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son. 'Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.15.1

॥ इति चतुर्दशः खण्डः ॥

पुरुषꣳ सोम्योतोपतापिनं ज्ञातयः पर्युपासते जानासि

मां जानासि मामिति तस्य यावन्न वाङ्मनसि सम्पद्यते

मनः प्राणे प्राणस्तेजसि तेजः परस्यां देवतायां

तावज्जानाति ॥ ६.१५.१॥

.. iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

puruṣagͫ somyotopatāpinaṃ jñātayaḥ paryupāsate jānāsi

māṃ jānāsi māmiti tasya yāvanna vāṅmanasi sampadyate

manaḥ prāṇe prāṇastejasi tejaḥ parasyāṃ devatāyāṃ

tāvajjānāti .. 6.15.1..



1. When a person is seriously ill, O Somya, his relatives sit around him and ask:- ‘Do you recognize me? Do you recognize me?’ So long as his speech does not merge with his mind, his mind with his prāṇa, his prāṇa with the heat in his body, and the heat with the Supreme Self, he will be able to recognize them.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Puruṣam, a person; uta, also; somya, O Somya; upatāpinam, who is sick; jñātayaḥ, relatives; pari-upāsate, sit around him; jānāsi mām jānāsi mām iti, saying ‘Do you recognize me, do you recognize me?’; yāvaṭ, so long as; tasya, his; vāk, speech; manasi na sampadyate, does not merge in his mind; manaḥ prāṇe, the mind into prāṇa; prāṇaḥ tejasi, prāṇa into heat; tejaḥ parasyām devatāyām, heat into the Supreme Deity; tāvat jānāti, that long he knows [them]. Commentary:-The Upaniṣad has previously said that from the Self comes heat, from heat comes prāṇa (the life force), from prāṇa comes the mind, and from the mind comes speech. Then at the time of death, these things go back in the reverse order—speech goes back into the mind, etc. The resting place is the Self, Pure Spirit. Everything goes back there, and everything comes from there. When a person is dying, it is common for his relatives to gather round and ask the person, ‘Do you recognize me?’ How long does he recognize them? So long as heat has not left the body. Even though his breathing has stopped, as long as the body is warm, the person is still alive.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'If a man is ill, his relatives assemble round him and ask:- "Dost thou know me? Dost thou know me?" Now as long as his speech is not merged in his mind, his mind in breath, breath in heat (fire), heat in the Highest Being (devatâ), he knows them.


Sloka : 6.15.2

अथ यदास्य वाङ्मनसि सम्पद्यते मनः प्राणे प्राणस्तेजसि

तेजः परस्यां देवतायामथ न जानाति ॥ ६.१५.२॥

atha yadāsya vāṅmanasi sampadyate manaḥ prāṇe prāṇastejasi

tejaḥ parasyāṃ devatāyāmatha na jānāti .. 6.15.2..



2. Then when his speech merges into his mind, his mind into prāṇa, his prāṇa into the heat in his body, and the heat into the Supreme Self, he no longer knows them.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; yadā, when; asya, his; vāk manasi sampadyate, speech merges into the mind; manaḥ prāṇe, the mind into prāṇa; prāṇaḥ tejasi, prāṇa into heat; tejaḥ parasyām devatāyām, heat into the Supreme Self; atha na jānāti, then he does not know. Commentary:-After heat leaves the body, a person can no longer recognize anyone. Heat merges in the Self. The Self is the final resting place. Then what is the difference between the death of an ignorant person and the death of one who has attained Self-knowledge? Śaṅkara says a person who is ignorant merges in the Self only to re-emerge again and be reborn. But when a person who is enlightened dies, that is his mokṣa, his liberation. Why are we born again and again? Because we have unfulfilled desires. Suppose we die now—what happens to those desires? They have to be fulfilled, so again we seek a body. Perhaps we want to be rich, or we want to rule over people, or we want to eat good food, or we want to be a great scholar. Unless we have a body, we cannot fulfil these desires. But our goal is desirelessness. Only when we become desireless can we attain Self-knowledge. Holy Mother, Sri Sarada Devi, used to say, ‘If you have to pray for anything, pray for desirelessnes But some people say:- ‘What’s the harm in being reborn? Life is fun.’ The scriptures say:- ‘All right, go ahead. But how long will the fun last? At some point you will be tired of all this and realize what a bondage life is. Then you will seek liberation from this cycle of birth and death.’ On the other hand, there are a few people who, after becoming free themselves, want to help others become free. In Mahāyāna Buddhism, these people are called bodhisattvas. They have knowledge, but as long as others are suffering, they will not take the benefit of that knowledge to attain final release. They will return to this world for the good of others. There is a very interesting story about Rāmānuja, the expounder of Viśiṣṭādvaita (qualified monism). When Rāmānuja was initiated, his guru said to him:- ‘You see, this is a very great mantra. You must keep it a secret and not tell it to others.’ Then Rāmānuja asked, ‘What would happen if others hear this mantra?’ The teacher answered, ‘They would all be liberated, but you would go to hell.’ As soon as Rāmānuja left his teacher, he went to the top of a temple tower and called all the people to come. When everyone had gathered there, he repeated the mantra to them all. This is the ideal. There is a theory called sarvamuktivāda—all shall be liberated together. That is to say, I do not want to be liberated until all are liberated. Sri Ramakrishna used to say that some people are very selfish. Even when they go to a public feast they enjoy it themselves and then quietly leave without telling others about it. But there are others who, as soon as they hear about it, gather everyone together to enjoy it with them. One day Swami Vivekananda went to Sri Ramakrishna and begged him to let him remain absorbed in samādhi. But Sri Ramakrishna scolded him, saying:- ‘I thought you would be like a big banyan tree, giving shade and rest to many people who are scorched by the This is the ideal—to be like that tree, to make no distinction between a good person and a bad person, to be ready to give relief to everyone, whether friend or foe. That is a bodhisattva. When you have that ideal you do not care for your own liberation. That is true selflessness. What we have to remember is that we are all one in the Self. Unless we are conscious of this, we are not liberated.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'But when his speech is merged in his mind, his mind in breath, breath in heat (fire), heat in the Highest Being, then he knows them not.


Sloka : 6.15.3

स य एषोऽणिमैतदात्म्यमिदꣳ सर्वं तत् सत्यꣳ स आत्मा

तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति भूय एव मा भगवान्विज्ञापयत्विति

तथा सोम्येति होवाच ॥ ६.१५.३॥

sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidagͫ sarvaṃ tat satyagͫ sa ātmā

tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti

tathā somyeti hovāca .. 6.15.3..



3. ‘That which is the subtlest of all is the Self of all this. It is the Truth. It is the Self. That thou art, O Śvetaketu.’ [Śvetaketu then said,] ‘Sir, please explain this to me again.’ ‘Yes, Somya, I will explain it again,’ replied his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, that which; eṣaḥ, this; aṇimā, the subtlest of all; idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this; tat satyam, that is the Truth; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; tat, that; tvam, you; asi, are; śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu; bhagavān, sir; bhūyaḥ eva, again; mā, to me; vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain; tathā, so be it; somya iti, O Somya; ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'That which is the subtile essence, in it all that exists has its self. It is the True. It is the Self, and thou, O Svetaketu, art it.' 'Please, Sir, inform me still more,' said the son.' 'Be it so, my child,' the father replied.


Sloka : 6.16.1

॥ इति पञ्चदशः खण्डः ॥

पुरुषꣳ सोम्योत

हस्तगृहीतमानयन्त्यपहार्षीत्स्तेयमकार्षीत्परशुमस्मै

तपतेति स यदि तस्य कर्ता भवति तत एवानृतमात्मानं

कुरुते सोऽनृताभिसंधोऽनृतेनात्मानमन्तर्धाय

परशुं तप्तं प्रतिगृह्णाति स दह्यतेऽथ हन्यते ॥ ६.१६.१॥

.. iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

puruṣagͫ somyota

hastagṛhītamānayantyapahārṣītsteyamakārṣītparaśumasmai

tapateti sa yadi tasya kartā bhavati tata evānṛtamātmānaṃ

kurute so'nṛtābhisaṃdho'nṛtenātmānamantardhāya

paraśuṃ taptaṃ pratigṛhṇāti sa dahyate'tha hanyate .. 6.16.1..



1. O Somya, suppose a man is brought with his hands tied, and they say:- ‘This man has stolen something. He has committed robbery. Heat up an axe for him.’ If he has committed the offence, then surely he will prove himself to be a liar. Being dishonest and trying to hide under the cover of falsehood, he will be burned when he grasps the hot axe, and then he will be killed.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Somya, O Somya; puruṣam, a person; hastagṛhītam, with his hands tied; ānayanti, they bring; apahārṣīt, he has stolen something; steyam akārṣīt, he has committed robbery; paraśum, an axe; asmai, for him; tapata iti, heat; yadi, if; saḥ, he; kartā tasya bhavati, is the one who has done it; tataḥ, then; eva, surely; anṛtam, false [a liar]; ātmānam kurute, proves himself; anṛta-abhisandhaḥ, having a dishonest character; saḥ ātmānam, he himself; anṛtena, by falsehood; antardhāya, under the cover [of falsehood]; paraśum taptam, the hot axe; pratigṛhṇāti, grasps; saḥ dahyate, he gets burned; atha hanyate, then he dies. Commentary:-What is liberation? Liberation is the state in which I know I am the Self—I know that I am never born and will never die. When I know that I am free, then I am aptakāma, fully satisfied. There is nothing more to achieve, because nothing more exists outside of myself. If there is something outside myself, then I might think, ‘Oh, let me have that.’ But if I am everything, if everything exists within me, what is there to desire? Sarvam khalu idam brahma—all this is Brahman. And I am that Brahman. I am free, immortal. There is no more birth and death for me. Now here the question arises, what is the test of whether you have Self-knowledge or not? The Upaniṣad gives another illustration:- Suppose someone is brought to you and you are told he has committed a theft. You ask him if he has done it and he denies it. But all the evidence seems to point to him as the culprit. What do you do? In ancient days they had a test, a rather cruel test. They put the blade of an axe in fire, and when it was very hot they would put it against the hand of the suspect. If his hand was burnt he was considered guilty, because he was covered, as it were, by falsehood. And if his hand was not burnt he was considered innocent, because he was protected by truth. Similarly, if we do not have Self-knowledge, we will continue to bum in this world. We will be born again and again. But if we have attained Self-knowledge, we will be liberated. Truth will set us free. Self-knowledge is not something you can demonstrate or take out and show. The only proof of it is that we do not have to continue in this cycle of birth and death. Nevertheless, when a person attains Self-knowledge, he is not the same any more. His attitude towards others changes. For instance, he can never hurt anyone, because if he hurts someone he hurts himself. Then again, no one is a stranger to him. He accepts everyone. If someone is happy, he is happy. If someone is in pain, he is also in pain. If someone has done well, he feels proud of that person—as if it is his own success. He can never be jealous, because he feels one with everybody.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'My child, they bring a man hither whom they have taken by the hand, and they say:- "He has taken something, he has committed a theft." (When he denies, they say), "Heat the hatchet for him." If he committed the theft, then he makes himself to be what he is not. Then the false-minded, having covered his true Self by a falsehood, grasps the heated hatchet--he is burnt, and he is killed.


Sloka : 6.16.2

अथ यदि तस्याकर्ता भवति ततेव सत्यमात्मानं कुरुते

स सत्याभिसन्धः सत्येनात्मानमन्तर्धाय परशुं तप्तं

प्रतिगृह्णाति सन दह्यतेऽथ मुच्यते ॥ ६.१६.२॥

atha yadi tasyākartā bhavati tateva satyamātmānaṃ kurute

sa satyābhisandhaḥ satyenātmānamantardhāya paraśuṃ taptaṃ

pratigṛhṇāti sana dahyate'tha mucyate .. 6.16.2..



2. But if he has not committed the offence, then surely he will prove himself to be truthful. Being honest, he will be protected by the cover of truth and will not be burned when he grasps the hot axe. He will then be set free.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, but; yadi, if; akartā tasya bhavati, he is not the one who has done it; tataḥ, then; eva, surely; satyam, truthful; ātmānam kurute, proves himself; satya-abhisandhaḥ, having an honest character; saḥ ātmānam, he himself; satyena, by truth; antardhāya, under the cover [of truth]; paraśum taptam, the hot axe; pratigṛhṇāti, grasps; saḥ na dahyate, he does not get burned; atha mucyate, then he is set free. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'But if he did not commit the theft, then he makes himself to be what he is. Then the true-minded, having covered his true Self by truth, grasps the heated hatchet--he is not burnt, and he is delivered.


Sloka : 6.16.3

स यथा तत्र नादाह्येतैतदात्म्यमिदꣳ सर्वं तत्सत्यꣳ स

आत्मा तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति तद्धास्य विजज्ञाविति

विजज्ञाविति ॥ ६.१६.३॥

sa yathā tatra nādāhyetaitadātmyamidagͫ sarvaṃ tatsatyagͫ sa

ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti taddhāsya vijajñāviti

vijajñāviti .. 6.16.3..



3. ‘That man, being honest, is not affected by the hot axe. That [Self] is the Self of all this. It is the Truth. It is the Self. That thou art, O Śvetaketu.’ Śvetaketu learnt this well from his father.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yathā, as; saḥ, he; tatra, in such circumstances; na adāhyet, is not burned; idam sarvarn aitadātmyam, the Self of all this; tat satyam, that is the Truth; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; tat, that; tvam, you; asi, are; śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu; asya, from him [his father]; tat ha, that [Self]; vijajñau iti, he clearly learnt; vijajñau iti, he clearly leamt. Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi ṣaṣṭhaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the sixth chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad. Commentary:-“Idam sarvam”—all this. ‘This’ refers to this phenomenal world which we see, with which we are familiar. Please remember, even in this unreal phenomenal world that one unchangeable essence exists. Tat satyam—that is the Reality. Sri Ramakrishna used to give the example of pillows. Pillows may be different sizes, different shapes, and have different functions, but inside all of them is the same silk-cotton, the same essence. Similarly, within this phenomenal world there is one essence, one Reality. And that is our Self. Tat tvam asi—you are that. This chapter stresses the idea that there is something—we call it pure Spirit—from which everything has emerged, on which everything rests, and into which everything finally merges. There is something common from which we have all come, on which we all rest, and into which we all go back. That something is always constant. Think of the ocean, for example. Where do the waves come from? The ocean. What supports them? The ocean. Where do they finally go? Back to the ocean. This coming and going, back and forth—we see this happening all the time, with everything. We are born, we remain for a while, and then we die. Over and over again—we come from Brahman, we are sustained by Brahman, and we go back to Brahman. But all the time we are that Brahman. As the waves are nothing but the ocean, similarly, we are nothing but Brahman. Sri Ramakrishna used to say that the relative and the Absolute are the same. The Absolute is compared to a snake coiled up, sleeping on the ground, and the relative is like a snake in motion, raising its hood. But when everything disappears, when there is no phenomenal world, what remains? We do not know. There is a vast, infinite One. We cannot describe it, because it has no name and no form. How can you describe something that is nameless and formless? Suppose you say ‘white.’ Can you understand ‘white’ without a white object? There must be a particularization. A white flower, or a white shirt, we can understand. Similarly, how can we understand pure Existence? This is why the Upaniṣad simply calls it tat, that. Vedānta says that the One has become many, but this many does not make a real modification or change in the One. The One remains One. It only appears to be many.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'As that (truthful) man is not burnt, thus has all that exists its self in That. It is the True. It is the Self, and thou, O Svetaketu, art it.' He understood what he said, yea, he understood it.


Sloka : 7.1.1

॥ इति षोडशः खण्डः ॥

॥ इति षष्ठोऽध्यायः ॥

॥ सप्तमोऽध्यायः ॥

अधीहि भगव इति होपससाद सनत्कुमारं नारदस्तꣳ

होवाच यद्वेत्थ तेन मोपसीद ततस्त ऊर्ध्वं वक्ष्यामीति

स होवाच ॥ ७.१.१॥

.. iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

.. iti ṣaṣṭho'dhyāyaḥ ..

.. saptamo'dhyāyaḥ ..

adhīhi bhagava iti hopasasāda sanatkumāraṃ nāradastagͫ

hovāca yadvettha tena mopasīda tatasta ūrdhvaṃ vakṣyāmīti

sa hovāca .. 7.1.1..



1. Nārada went [for spiritual instruction] to Sanatkumāra and said, ‘Sir, please teach me.’ Sanatkumāra said to him:- ‘First tell me what you know already. I’ll teach you from that point.’ Nārada said—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Bhagavaḥ, sir; adhīhi iti, please teach me; sanatkumāram, to Sanatkumāra; nāradaḥ ha upasasāda, Nārada went [and said]; tam ha uvāca, [Sanatkumāra] said to him; yat vettha, whatever you know; tena mā upasīda, tell me that; tataḥ ūrdhvam, from that point; te vakṣyāmi iti, I will teach you; saḥ ha uvāca, he [Nārada] said. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Nârada approached Sanatkumâra and said, 'Teach me, Sir!' Sanatkumâra said to him:- 'Please to tell me what you know; afterward I shall tell you what is beyond.'


Sloka : 7.1.2

ऋग्वेदं भगवोऽध्येमि यजुर्वेदꣳ सामवेदमाथर्वणं

चतुर्थमितिहासपुराणं पञ्चमं वेदानां वेदं पित्र्यꣳ राशिं

दैवं निधिं वाकोवाक्यमेकायनं देवविद्यां ब्रह्मविद्यां

भूतविद्यां क्षत्रविद्यां नक्षत्रविद्याꣳ

सर्पदेवजनविद्यामेतद्भगवोऽध्येमि ॥ ७.१.२॥

ṛgvedaṃ bhagavo'dhyemi yajurvedagͫ sāmavedamātharvaṇaṃ

caturthamitihāsapurāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ vedānāṃ vedaṃ pitryagͫ rāśiṃ

daivaṃ nidhiṃ vākovākyamekāyanaṃ devavidyāṃ brahmavidyāṃ

bhūtavidyāṃ kṣatravidyāṃ nakṣatravidyāgͫ

sarpadevajanavidyāmetadbhagavo'dhyemi .. 7.1.2..



2. Sir, I have read the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth—the Atharva Veda; then the fifth—history and the Purāṇas; also, grammar, funeral rites, mathematics, the science of omens, the science of underground resources, logic, moral science, astrology, Vedic knowledge, the science of the elements, archery, astronomy, the science relating to snakes, plus music, dance, and other fine arts. Sir, this is what I know.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Bhagavaḥ, sir; adhyemi, I know; ṛg vedam yajur vedam sāma vedam ātharvaṇam caturtham, the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth, the Atharva Veda; itihāsa purāṇam pañcamam, history and the Purāṇas, as the fifth; vedānām vedam, grammar [lit., the Veda of the Vedas]; pitryam, rites offered out of respect to the ancestors; rāśim, mathematics; daivam, the science of meteors and other natural phenomena [and omens]; nidhim, the science of underground resources; vākovākyam, logic; ekāyanam, moral science; deva-vidyām, astrology; brahma-vidyām, knowledge of the Vedas; bhūta-vidyām, geology; kṣattra-vidyām, archery; nakṣatra-vidyām, astronomy; sarpa[-vidyām], snake-charming; devajana-vidyām, fine arts; bhagavaḥ, sir; etat adhyemi, I know all this. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Nârada said:- 'I know the Rig-veda, Sir, the Yagur-veda, the Sâma-veda, as the fourth the Âtharvana, as the fifth the Itihâsa-purâna (the Bhârata); the Veda of the Vedas (grammar); the Pitrya (the rules for the sacrifices for the ancestors); the Râsi (the science of numbers); the Daiva (the science of portents); the Nidhi (the science of time); the Vâkovâkya (logic); the Ekâyana (ethics); the Deva-vidyâ (etymology); the Brahma-vidyâ (pronunciation, sikshâ, ceremonial, kalpa, prosody, khandas); the Bhûta-vidyâ (the science of demons); the Kshatra-vidyâ (the science of weapons); the Nakshatra-vidyâ (astronomy); the Sarpa and Devagana-vidyâ (the science of serpents or poisons, and the sciences of the genii, such as the making of perfumes, dancing, singing, playing, and other fine arts) [1]. All this I know, Sir.

Footnote:

1. This passage, exhibiting the sacred literature as known at the time, should be compared with the Brihadâranyaka, II, 4, 10. The explanation of the old titles rests on the authority of Saṅkara, and he is not always consistent. See Colebrooke, Miscellaneous Essays, 1873, 11, .


Sloka : 7.1.3

सोऽहं भगवो मन्त्रविदेवास्मि नात्मविच्छ्रुतꣳ ह्येव मे

भगवद्दृशेभ्यस्तरति शोकमात्मविदिति सोऽहं भगवः

शोचामि तं मा भगवाञ्छोकस्य पारं तारयत्विति

तꣳ होवाच यद्वै किंचैतदध्यगीष्ठा नामैवैतत् ॥ ७.१.३॥

so'haṃ bhagavo mantravidevāsmi nātmavicchrutagͫ hyeva me

bhagavaddṛśebhyastarati śokamātmaviditi so'haṃ bhagavaḥ

śocāmi taṃ mā bhagavāñchokasya pāraṃ tārayatviti

tagͫ hovāca yadvai kiṃcaitadadhyagīṣṭhā nāmaivaitat .. 7.1.3..



3. ‘True, I have learnt much, but I know only the word meaning. I do not know the Self. Sir, I have heard from great persons like you that only those who know the Self are able to overcome sorrow. I am suffering from sorrow. Please take me across the ocean of sorrow.’ Sanatkumāra then said to Nārada, ‘Everything you have learnt so far is just words’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Bhagavaḥ, sir; saḥ aham mantravit eva asmi, [though I have studied much] I know only the word meaning; na ātmavit, I do not know the Self; śrutam hi eva me, I have also heard; bhagavat dṛśebhyaḥ, from people like you; tarati śokam ātmavit iti, one who knows the Self overcomes sorrow; bhagavaḥ, sir, saḥ aham śocāmi, I am suffering from sorrow; tam mā bhagavān śokasya pāram tārayatu iti, sir, please take me across [the ocean of] sorrow; tam ha uvāca, [Sanatkumāra] said to him; yat vai kiñca etat, whatever it is; adhyagīṣṭhāḥ etat nāma eva, you have learnt is only words. Commentary:- Nārada was a great scholar. But in spite of all his knowledge, he did not know the Self and was very unhappy. So, with great humility, he approached the sage Sanatkumāra and said, ‘Sir, would you please teach me?’ Sanatkumāra replied, ‘Tell me what you already know.’ The teacher must know what level the student is at so he can raise him from where he is. Then Nārada began to list all the subjects he had studied:- the Vedas, history and mythology, grammar, mathematics, astrology, and so forth. But Nārada felt that all this was pointless. It served no purpose, because if he did not know the Self he knew nothing. His knowledge was merely aparā vidyā, lower knowledge, and not parā vidyā, higher knowledge—that is, knowledge of the Self. Moreover, Nārada said:- ‘I know only the words. I do not know the Self.’ The finest, most subtle, knowledge is knowledge of the Self You begin with the gross and go step by step until you reach the finest. First you are only a mantra-vit—that is, you know only the word meanings of the scriptures. But this is nothing. The scriptures are all about the Self. If you don’t know the Self, your knowledge of the scriptures is useless. Being a scholar without knowing the real meaning of the scriptures is like being a beast of burden. A donkey may carry a load of sandalwood. In fact, his back may almost be breaking with the weight of it. Yet he does not enjoy the fragrance. Similarly, being a scholar is not the same as having Self-knowledge. Nārada has great yearning. He says:- ‘I have heard that saints like you have no more grief because you know the Self. Please take me across the ocean of sorrow. You alone can do that by giving me Self-knowledge. Life has a purpose. Please make me feel that I have achieved that purpose.’ Now Sanatkumāra says to Nārada:- ‘You have studied much, but you have studied only words. Each word has a meaning, and that meaning has to be grasped.’ How do we grasp the meaning? Śaṅkara gives an example here:- Suppose the king is coming by in a procession and you are very anxious to see him. But along with the king are thousands of other people, bands, vehicles, horses, elephants—so much pomp and grandeur. Where is the king? Śaṅkara says this world is like that procession. The king is there, but he is hidden from you—hidden behind all the pomp and pageantry. Similarly, in this world we perceive only names and forms—words, not substance. Merely knowing the word Brahman Now the question may arise:- Sanatkumāra says that this knowledge of the Vedas and other things is mere words. But perhaps you have studied all the scriptures and performed many sacrifices—is all this then futile? Śaṅkara says no, it’s not futile. He gives the example:- Suppose a child wants to know what the moon is. How do you show him the moon? First you say, ‘Do you see that big tree over there?’ When the child says yes, you say, ‘Do you see the top of the tree?’ Again, when the child says yes, you say:- ‘Do you see that big shining ball behind the branches? That is the moon.’ You go step by step. Can you teach an ignorant person the highest science? Will he be able to grasp it? You must start with something he can understand. Similarly, there is the world of sense experience before us, and it is very real to us. We don’t see the Self, so we can’t understand what it is. Self-knowledge is the highest knowledge. We cannot expect to attain it immediately. First we must know what this world is. First we must know what it is to have money, scholarship, fame, and other things. After experiencing these things of the world and finding them to be hollow, only then can we become disillusioned with this world. And only then can we renounce this world of name and form and fix our minds on the Self. We may hear about the Self, but first we must know that this world we are so

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'But, Sir, with all this I know the Mantras only, the sacred books, I do not know the Self. I have heard from men like you, that he who knows the Self overcomes grief. I am in grief. Do, Sir, help me over this grief of mine.' Sanatkumâra, said to him:- 'Whatever you have read, is only a name.


Sloka : 7.1.4

नाम वा ऋग्वेदो यजुर्वेदः सामवेद आथर्वणश्चतुर्थ

इतिहासपुराणः पञ्चमो वेदानां वेदः पित्र्यो राशिर्दैवो

निधिर्वाकोवाक्यमेकायनं देवविद्या ब्रह्मविद्या भूतविद्या

क्षत्रविद्या नक्षत्रविद्या सर्पदेवजनविद्या

नामैवैतन्नामोपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.१.४ ॥

nāma vā ṛgvedo yajurvedaḥ sāmaveda ātharvaṇaścaturtha

itihāsapurāṇaḥ pañcamo vedānāṃ vedaḥ pitryo rāśirdaivo

nidhirvākovākyamekāyanaṃ devavidyā brahmavidyā bhūtavidyā

kṣatravidyā nakṣatravidyā sarpadevajanavidyā

nāmaivaitannāmopāssveti .. 7.1.4 ..



4. Name is the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth—the Atharva Veda; then the fifth—history and the Purāṇas; also, grammar, funeral rites, mathematics, the science of omens, the science of underground resources, logic, moral science, astrology, Vedic knowledge, the science of the elements, archery, astronomy, the science relating to snakes, plus music, dance, and other fine arts. These are only names. Worship name.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Nāma vai, name is; ṛg vedaḥ yajur vedaḥ sāma vedaḥ ātharvaṇaḥ caturthaḥ, the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth, the Atharva Veda; itihāsa purāṇaḥ pañcamaḥ, history and the Purāṇas, as the fifth; vedānām vedaḥ, grammar [lit., the Veda of the Vedas]; pitryaḥ, rites offered out of respect to the ancestors; rāśiḥ, mathematics; daivaḥ, the science of meteors and other natural phenomena [and omens]; nidhiḥ, the science of underground resources; vākovākyam, logic; ekāyanam, moral science; deva-vidyā, astrology; brahma-vidyā, knowledge of the Vedas; bhūta-vidyā, geology; kṣattra-vidyā, archery; nakṣatra-vidyā, astronomy; sarpa [-vidyā], snake-charming; devajana-vidyā, fine arts; nāma eva etat, these are mere names; nāma upāssva iti, worship name. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'A name is the Rig-veda, Yagur-veda, Sâma-veda, and as the fourth the Âtharvana, as the fifth the Itihâsa-purâna, the Veda of the Vedas, the Pitrya, the Râsi, the Daiva, the Nidhi, the Vâkovâkya, the Ekâyana, the Deva-vidyâ, the Brahma-vidyâ, the Bhûta-vidyâ, the Kshatra-vidyâ, the Nakshatra-vidyâ, the Sarpa and Devagana-vidyâ. All these are a name only. Meditate on the name.


Sloka : 7.1.5

स यो नाम ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते यावन्नाम्नो गतं तत्रास्य

यथाकामचारो भवति यो नाम ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति

भगवो नाम्नो भूय इति नाम्नो वाव भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे

भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.१.५॥

sa yo nāma brahmetyupāste yāvannāmno gataṃ tatrāsya

yathākāmacāro bhavati yo nāma brahmetyupāste'sti

bhagavo nāmno bhūya iti nāmno vāva bhūyo'stīti tanme

bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.1.5..



5. ‘Anyone who worships name as Brahman can do what he pleases within the limits of the name.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than name?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than name,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; nāma brahma iti upāste, worships name as Brahman; yāvat nāmnaḥ gatam, as far as name can go; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ nāma brahma iti upāste, he who worships name as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; nāmnaḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than name; nāmnaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than name; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section. Commentary:-If you worship name as Brahman then you can achieve anything you want within certain limits. But Brahman is the real purport. The names by themselves are not important. Names have a limited use. When you call a flower a rose, you are obviously referring to a particular species of flower. Within the limits of that species, you have as much freedom as you like. You may be referring to a rose of any colour you like—white, red, yellow, etc. You are free within the limits of the colours and other characteristics of the rose. But when you identify the rose as Brahman, you impose on Brahman the limitations that the name ‘rose’ has. As Brahman is nameless, you have no right to impose the limitations that name implies on it.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'He who meditates on the name as Brahman [1], is, as it were, lord and master as far as the name reaches-he who meditates on the name as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than a name?' 'Yes, there is something better than a name.' 'Sir, tell it me.'

Footnote:

1. Why a man who knows the Veda should not know the Self, while in other places it is said that the Veda teaches the Self, is well illustrated by the commentary. If a royal procession approaches, he says, then, though. we do not see the king, because he is hidden by flags, parasols, &c., yet we say, there is the king. And if we ask who is the king, then again, though we cannot see him and point him out, we can say, at least, that he is different from all that is seen. The Self is hidden in the Veda as a king is hidden in a royal procession.


Sloka : 7.2.1

॥ इति प्रथमः खण्डः ॥

वाग्वाव नाम्नो भूयसी वाग्वा ऋग्वेदं विज्ञापयति यजुर्वेदꣳ

सामवेदमाथर्वणं चतुर्थमितिहासपुराणं पञ्चमं वेदानां वेदं

पित्र्यꣳराशिं दैवं निधिं वाकोवाक्यमेकायनं देवविद्यां

ब्रह्मविद्यां भूतविद्यां क्षत्रविद्याꣳ सर्पदेवजनविद्यां

दिवं च पृथिवीं च वायुं चाकाशं चापश्च तेजश्च

देवाꣳश्च मनुष्याꣳश्च पशूꣳश्च वयाꣳसि च

तृणवनस्पतीञ्श्वापदान्याकीटपतङ्गपिपीलकं

धर्मं चाधर्मं च सत्यं चानृतं च साधु चासाधु च

हृदयज्ञं चाहृदयज्ञं च यद्वै वाङ्नाभविष्यन्न धर्मो

नाधर्मो व्यज्ञापयिष्यन्न सत्यं नानृतं न साधु नासाधु

न हृदयज्ञो नाहृदयज्ञो वागेवैतत्सर्वं विज्ञापयति

वाचमुपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.२.१॥

.. iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

vāgvāva nāmno bhūyasī vāgvā ṛgvedaṃ vijñāpayati yajurvedagͫ

sāmavedamātharvaṇaṃ caturthamitihāsapurāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ vedānāṃ vedaṃ

pitryagͫrāśiṃ daivaṃ nidhiṃ vākovākyamekāyanaṃ devavidyāṃ

brahmavidyāṃ bhūtavidyāṃ kṣatravidyāgͫ sarpadevajanavidyāṃ

divaṃ ca pṛthivīṃ ca vāyuṃ cākāśaṃ cāpaśca tejaśca

devāgͫśca manuṣyāgͫśca paśūgͫśca vayāgͫsi ca

tṛṇavanaspatīñśvāpadānyākīṭapataṅgapipīlakaṃ

dharmaṃ cādharmaṃ ca satyaṃ cānṛtaṃ ca sādhu cāsādhu ca

hṛdayajñaṃ cāhṛdayajñaṃ ca yadvai vāṅnābhaviṣyanna dharmo

nādharmo vyajñāpayiṣyanna satyaṃ nānṛtaṃ na sādhu nāsādhu

na hṛdayajño nāhṛdayajño vāgevaitatsarvaṃ vijñāpayati

vācamupāssveti .. 7.2.1..



1. Speech is certainly superior to name. Speech makes known the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth—the Atharva Veda; then the fifth—history and the Purāṇas; also, grammar, funeral rites, mathematics, the science of omens, the science of underground resources, logic, moral science, astrology, Vedic knowledge, the science of the elements, archery, astronomy, the science relating to snakes, plus music, dance, and other fine arts; also heaven and earth; air, space, water, and fire; the gods and human beings; cattle and birds; creepers and big trees; animals of prey as well as worms, fleas, and ants; merit and demerit; truth and untruth; good and evil; and the pleasant and the unpleasant. If speech did not exist there would be no awareness of merit and demerit, nor of truth and untruth, good and evil, the pleasant and the unpleasant. Speech alone makes it possible to understand all this. Worship speech.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vāk vāva nāmnaḥ bhūyasī, speech is certainly superior to name; vāk vai vijñāpayati, speech makes known; ṛg vedam yajur vedam sāma vedam ātharvaṇam caturtham, the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth, the Atharva Veda; itihāsa purāṇam pañcamam, history and the Purāṇas, as the fifth; vedānām vedam, grammar [lit., the Veda of the Vedas]; pitryam, rites offered out of respect to the ancestors; rāśim, mathematics; daivam, the science of meteors and other natural phenomena [and omens]; nidhim, the science of underground resources; vākovākyam, logic; ekāyanam, moral science; deva-vidyām, astrology; brahma-vidyām, knowledge of the Vedas; bhūta-vidyām, geology; kṣattra-vidyām, archery; nakṣatra-vidyām, astronomy; sarpa [-vidyām], snake-charming; devajana-vidyām, fine arts; divam ca, heaven; pṛthivīm ca, and the earth; vāyum ca, and air; ākāśam ca, and space; āpaḥ ca, and water; tejaḥ ca, and fire; devān ca, and the gods; manuṣyān ca, and human beings; paśūn ca, and animals; vayāṃsi ca, and birds; tṛṇa-vanaspatīn, creepers and big trees; śvāpadāni, animals of prey; ākīṭa-pataṅga-pipīlikam, worms, fleas, and ants; dharmam ca adharmam ca, merit and demerit; satyam ca anṛtam ca, and truth and untruth; sādhu ca asādhu ca, and good and evil; hṛdayajnam ca ahṛdayajñam ca, pleasant and unpleasant; yat vai vāk, if speech; na abhaviṣyat, did not exist; na dharmaḥ na adharmaḥ vyajñāpayiṣyat, there would be no awareness of merit and demerit; satyani na anṛtam, nor of truth and untruth; sādhu na asādhu na, nor of good and evil; hṛdayajñaḥ na ahṛdayajñaḥ, nor of pleasant and unpleasant; vāk era etat sarvam vijñāpayati, speech alone makes it possible to understand all this; vāk upāssva iti, worship speech. Commentary:-Vāk is the organ of speech. It produces not only words, but words with deep meanings. For instance, we have access to the wisdom of the Vedas through these words. These words represent Brahman and should be worshipped as such.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Speech is better than a name. Speech makes us understand the Rig-veda, Yagur-veda, Sâma-veda, and as the fourth the Âtharvana, as the fifth the Itihâsa-purâna, the Veda of the Vedas, the Pitrya, the Râsi, the Daiva, the Nidhi, the Vâkovâkya, the Ekâyana, the Deva-vidyâ, the Brahma-vidyâ, the Kshatra-vidyâ, the Nakshatra-vidyâ, the Sarpa and Devagana-vidyâ; heaven, earth, air, ether, water, fire, gods, men, cattle, birds, herbs, trees, all beasts down to worms, midges, and ants; what is right and what is wrong; what is true and what is false; what is good and what is bad; what is pleasing and what is not pleasing. For if there were no speech, neither right nor wrong would be known [1], neither the true nor the false, neither the good nor the bad, neither the pleasant nor the unpleasant. Speech makes us understand all this. Meditate on speech.

Footnote:

1. The commentator explains vyagñâpayishyat by avigñâtam abhavishyat. Possibly hridayagño stands for hridayagñam.


Sloka : 7.2.2

स यो वाचं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते यावद्वाचो गतं तत्रास्य

यथाकामचारो भवति यो वाचं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति

भगवो वाचो भूय इति वाचो वाव भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे

भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.२.२॥

sa yo vācaṃ brahmetyupāste yāvadvāco gataṃ tatrāsya

yathākāmacāro bhavati yo vācaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti

bhagavo vāco bhūya iti vāco vāva bhūyo'stīti tanme

bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.2.2..



2. ‘Anyone who worships speech as Brahman can do what he pleases within the limits of speech.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than speech?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than speech,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yah, he who; vācam brahma iti upāste, worships speech as Brahman; yāvat vācaḥ gatam, as far as the power of speech goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ vācam brahma iti upāste, he who worships speech as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; vācaḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than speech; vācaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than speech; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on speech as Brahman, is, as it were, lord and master as far as speech reaches he who meditates on speech as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than speech 'Yes, there is something better than speech.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.3.1

॥ इति द्वितीयः खण्डः ॥

मनो वाव वाचो भूयो यथा वै द्वे वामलके द्वे वा कोले

द्वौ वाक्षौ मुष्टिरनुभवत्येवं वाचं च नाम च

मनोऽनुभवति स यदा मनसा मनस्यति

मन्त्रानधीयीयेत्यथाधीते कर्माणि कुर्वीयेत्यथ कुरुते

पुत्राꣳश्च पशूꣳश्चेच्छेयेत्यथेच्छत इमं च

लोकममुं चेच्छेयेत्यथेच्छते मनो ह्यात्मा मनो हि लोको

मनो हि ब्रह्म मन उपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.३.१ ॥

.. iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

mano vāva vāco bhūyo yathā vai dve vāmalake dve vā kole

dvau vākṣau muṣṭiranubhavatyevaṃ vācaṃ ca nāma ca

mano'nubhavati sa yadā manasā manasyati

mantrānadhīyīyetyathādhīte karmāṇi kurvīyetyatha kurute

putrāgͫśca paśūgͫśceccheyetyathecchata imaṃ ca

lokamamuṃ ceccheyetyathecchate mano hyātmā mano hi loko

mano hi brahma mana upāssveti .. 7.3.1 ..



1. The mind is superior to speech. Just as a person can hold in his fist two āmalaka fruits, or two kola fruits [plums], or two akṣa fruits, so also the mind can hold within it both speech and name. If a person thinks, ‘I will read the mantras,’ he reads them. If he thinks, ‘I will do this,’ he does it. If he decides, ‘I will have children and animals,’ he can try to have them. If he decides, ‘I will conquer this world and the next,’ he can try to do it. [This is the characteristic of the mind. If it says it will do something, it can do it.] The mind is the self. The mind is the world. The mind is Brahman. Worship the mind.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Manaḥ vāva vācaḥ bhūyaḥ, the mind is certainly superior to speech; yathā vai, just as; dve vā āmalake, two āmalaka fruits; dve vā kole, or two kolas [plums]; dvau vā akṣau, or two akṣa fruits; muṣṭiḥ anubhavati, the fist can hold; evam, in the same way; manaḥ anubhavati, the mind can hold; vācam ca nāma ca, speech and mind; yadā, when; saḥ, someone; manasā, in his mind; manasyati, thinks; mantrān adhīyīya iti, I will read the mantras; atha, then; adhīte, he reads; karmāṇi kurvīya iti, I will work; atha, then; kurute, he works; putrān ca paśūn ca, children and animals; iccheya iti, let me wish for; atha icchate, then he wishes; imam ca lokam amum ca, this world and the other world; iccheya iti, let me wish for; atha icchate, then he wishes; manaḥ hi ātmā, the mind is the self; manaḥ hi lokaḥ, the mind is the world; manaḥ hi brahma, the mind is Brahman; manaḥ upāssva iti, worship the mind. Commentary:-Speech and name are important, but they are not enough. They will not take you very far. Suppose you repeat the name of God, but your mind is elsewhere, thinking of something else. Will that serve any purpose? No. The Upaniṣad says here, first you decide in your mind what you will do, and after that you act on the thought. Just as you hold fruits within your hand, similarly, you hold within your mind what you want—whether it is children, property, scholarship, or something else. So the mind is higher than speech.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Mind (manas) is better than speech. For as the closed fist holds two amalaka or two kola or two aksha fruits, thus does mind hold speech and name. For if a man is minded in his mind to read the sacred hymns, he reads them; if he is minded in his mind to perform any actions, he performs them; if he is minded to wish for sons and cattle, he wishes for them; if he is minded to wish for this world and the other, he wishes for them. For mind is indeed the self [1], mind is the world, mind is Brahman. Meditate on the mind.

Footnote:

1. The commentator explains this by saying that, without the instrument of the mind, the Self cannot act or enjoy.


Sloka : 7.3.2

स यो मनो ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते यावन्मनसो गतं तत्रास्य

यथाकामचारो भवति यो मनो ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति

भगवो मनसो भूय इति मनसो वाव भूयोऽस्तीति

तन्मे भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.३.२॥

sa yo mano brahmetyupāste yāvanmanaso gataṃ tatrāsya

yathākāmacāro bhavati yo mano brahmetyupāste'sti

bhagavo manaso bhūya iti manaso vāva bhūyo'stīti

tanme bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.3.2..



2. ‘Anyone who worships the mind as Brahman can dp what he pleases within the limits of the mind.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than the mind?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than the mind,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; manaḥ brahma iti upāste, worships the mind as Brahman; yāvat manasaḥ gatam, as far as the mind goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ manaḥ brahma iti upāste, he who worships the mind as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; manasaḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than the mind; manasaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than the mind; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on the mind as Brahman, is, as it were, lord and master as far as the mind reaches--he who meditates on the mind as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than mind?' 'Yes, there is something better than mind.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.4.1

॥ इति तृतीयः खण्डः ॥

संकल्पो वाव मनसो भूयान्यदा वै संकल्पयतेऽथ

मनस्यत्यथ वाचमीरयति तामु नाम्नीरयति नाम्नि

मन्त्रा एकं भवन्ति मन्त्रेषु कर्माणि ॥ ७.४.१॥

.. iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

saṃkalpo vāva manaso bhūyānyadā vai saṃkalpayate'tha

manasyatyatha vācamīrayati tāmu nāmnīrayati nāmni

mantrā ekaṃ bhavanti mantreṣu karmāṇi .. 7.4.1..



1. The will is certainly superior to the mind. When a person wills, he starts thinking. Then he directs the organ of speech, and finally he makes the organ of speech utter the name. All the mantras merge in the names and all the actions merge in the mantras.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saṅkalpaḥ vāva manasaḥ bhūyān, the will is indeed superior to the mind; yadā vai, when; saṅkalpayate, a person decides; atha, then; manasyati, he thinks; atha, then; vācam īrayati, he directs the organ of speech; tām u nāmni īrayati, he makes speech utter the name; nāmni, in the names; mantrāḥ, all the mantras; ekam bhavanti, are united; mantreṣu karmāṇi, the actions [are united] in the mantras. Commentary:-The mind is very important, but it heeds to be guided by the will. Why? Because the mind is always wavering. It cannot decide. In the Bhagavad Gītā the mind is described as being vāyoḥ iva, like the wind. It is restless and difficult to control. Sometimes the mind is even compared to a mad elephant. All of us have minds, no doubt, but not all have an equal degree of will power, or determination. For instance, anyone may utter some mantras, but unless they are recited with saṅkalpa, they do not mean anything. They are just words. When you add saṅkalpa to the mantras, then the words become active and powerful. This is why saṅkalpa is higher.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Will [1] (saṅkalpa) is better than mind. For when a man wills, then he thinks in his mind, then he sends forth speech, and he sends it forth in a name. In a name the sacred hymns are contained, in the sacred hymns all sacrifices.

Footnote:

1. Saṅkalpa is elsewhere defined as a modification of manas. The commentator says that, like thinking, it is an activity of the inner organ. It is difficult to find any English term exactly corresponding to saṅkalpa. Rajendralal Mitra translates it by will, but it implies not only will, but at the same time conception, determination, and desire.


Sloka : 7.4.2

तानि ह वा एतानि संकल्पैकायनानि संकल्पात्मकानि

संकल्पे प्रतिष्ठितानि समकॢपतां द्यावापृथिवी

समकल्पेतां वायुश्चाकाशं च समकल्पन्तापश्च

तेजश्च तेषाꣳ सं कॢप्त्यै वर्षꣳ संकल्पते

वर्षस्य संकॢप्त्या अन्नꣳ संकल्पतेऽन्नस्य सं कॢप्त्यै

प्राणाः संकल्पन्ते प्राणानाꣳ सं कॢप्त्यै मन्त्राः संकल्पन्ते

मन्त्राणाꣳ सं कॢप्त्यै कर्माणि संकल्पन्ते कर्मणां

संकॢप्त्यै लोकः संकल्पते लोकस्य सं कॢप्त्यै सर्वꣳ

संकल्पते स एष संकल्पः संकल्पमुपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.४.२ ॥

tāni ha vā etāni saṃkalpaikāyanāni saṃkalpātmakāni

saṃkalpe pratiṣṭhitāni samakḷpatāṃ dyāvāpṛthivī

samakalpetāṃ vāyuścākāśaṃ ca samakalpantāpaśca

tejaśca teṣāgͫ saṃ kḷptyai varṣagͫ saṃkalpate

varṣasya saṃkḷptyā annagͫ saṃkalpate'nnasya saṃ kḷptyai

prāṇāḥ saṃkalpante prāṇānāgͫ saṃ kḷptyai mantrāḥ saṃkalpante

mantrāṇāgͫ saṃ kḷptyai karmāṇi saṃkalpante karmaṇāṃ

saṃkḷptyai lokaḥ saṃkalpate lokasya saṃ kḷptyai sarvagͫ

saṃkalpate sa eṣa saṃkalpaḥ saṃkalpamupāssveti .. 7.4.2 ..



2. All these things [mind, speech, name, etc.] merge in saṅkalpa, arise from saṅkalpa, and are supported by saṅkalpa. [That is the will decides the direction of everything you do. It is the soul of everything.] Heaven and earth will, and so do air, space, water, and fire. [That is, it is their will that determines their work.] Through their will the rain wills, and through the will of the rain, food wills. The will of food is the will of life. The will of life is the will of the mantras, and the will of the mantras is the will of all activities. The will of the activities is the will of the worlds, and the will of the worlds determines the will of everything. Such is the will. Worship this will.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tāni ha vai etāni, all these [i.e., mind, speech, name, mantra, and karma]; saṅkalpa-ekāyanāni, merge in saṅkalpa; saṅkalpātmakāni, rise from saṅkalpa; saṅkalpe pratiṣṭhitāni, supported by saṅkalpa; dyāvāpṛthivī, heaven and the earth; samaklṛpatām, will; vāyuḥ cā ākāśam ca, the air and the sky; samakalpetām, will; āpaḥ ca tejaḥ ca, water and fire; samakalpanta, will; teṣām saṃklṛptyai, through their will; varṣam saṅkalpate, rain wills; varṣasya saṃklṛptyai, because the rain wills; annam saṅkalpate, food wills; annasya saṃklṛptyai, because of the will of food; prāṇāḥ saṅkalpante, the prāṇas will; prāṇānām saṃklṛptyai, because of the will of the prāṇas; mantrāḥ saṅkalpante, the mantras will; mantrāṇām saṃklṛptyai, because the mantras will; karmāṇi saṅkalpante, the karmas will; karmaṇām saṃklṛptyai, because the karmas will; lokaḥ saṅkalpate, the heaven and other worlds will; lokasya saṃklṛptyai, because the worlds will; sarvam saṅkalpate, everything wills; saḥ eṣaḥ, this is the way; saṅkalpaḥ, will [works]; saṅkalpam upāssva iti, worship will. Commentary:-Sanatkumāra says here that because of saṅkalpa, each of the forces of nature plays its role—as if each knows the duty it’s supposed to perform and has taken a vow to do it. For instance, the earth remains steady—as if it decided long ago that it would remain firm and unmoving. The world goes on, nature goes on, society goes on—all due to this saṅkalpa, to the principle of each doing his or her own duty.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'All these therefore (beginning with mind and ending in sacrifice) centre in will, consist of will, abide in will. Heaven and earth willed, air and ether willed, water and fire willed. Through the will of heaven and earth &c. rain wills; through the will of rain food wills; through the will of food the vital airs will; through the will of the vital airs the sacred hymns will; through the will of the sacred hymns the sacrifices will; through the will of the sacrifices the world (as their reward) wills; through the will of the world everything wills [1]. This is will. Meditate on will.

Footnote:

1.


Sloka : 7.4.3

स यः संकल्पं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते संकॢप्तान्वै स लोकान्ध्रुवान्ध्रुवः

प्रतिष्ठितान् प्रतिष्ठितोऽव्यथमानानव्यथमानोऽभिसिध्यति

यावत्संकल्पस्य गतं तत्रास्य यथाकामचारो भवति यः

संकल्पं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति भगवः संकल्पाद्भूय इति

संकल्पाद्वाव भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.४.३॥

sa yaḥ saṃkalpaṃ brahmetyupāste saṃkḷptānvai sa lokāndhruvāndhruvaḥ

pratiṣṭhitān pratiṣṭhito'vyathamānānavyathamāno'bhisidhyati

yāvatsaṃkalpasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yaḥ

saṃkalpaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavaḥ saṃkalpādbhūya iti

saṃkalpādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.4.3..



3. ‘One who worships saṅkalpa as Brahman can attain any world he wills. He becomes true and attains the world of truth. He is firmly established and also attains a world which is firmly established. He is free from pain and attains also a world free from pain. One who worships saṅkalpa as Brahman can do what he pleases within the limits of saṅkalpa.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than saṅkalpa?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than saṅkalpa,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ saṅkalpam brahma iti upāste, he who worships will-power as Brahman; klṛptān vai saḥ lokān dhruvān, the true worlds he wishes for; dhruvaḥ, being true himself; pratiṣṭhitān, the well-established [worlds]; pratiṣṭhitaḥ, [himself being] well-established; avyathamānān, [the worlds] free from pain; avyathamānaḥ, [himself being] free from pain; abhisidhyati, he attains; yāvat saṅkalpasya gatam, as far as will can go; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ saṅkalpam brahma iti upāste, he who worships saṅkalpa as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; saṅkalpāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than saṅkalpa; saṅkalpāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than saṅkalpa; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section. Commentary:-The will is the beginning and end of everything concerning the ṃind. Not only that—the will is the root of the earth, heaven, of all the worlds, of space, air, fire, water, food, life, the mantras, and work. The will is the origin and end of the phenomenal world. If you meditate on this, you learn the secret of progress in life. But if you are a true seeker of Truth, you soon begin to feel that there must be something higher. This is divine discontent. And this is why Nārada asks Sanatkumāra if there is anything higher. Sanatkumāra takes him step by step, from a lower truth to a higher truth.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'He who meditates on will as Brahman, he, being himself safe, firm, and undistressed, obtains the safe, firm, and undistressed worlds which he has willed; he is, as it were, lord and master as far as will reaches--he who meditates on will as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than will?' 'Yes, there is something better than will.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.5.1

॥ इति चतुर्थः खण्डः ॥

चित्तं वाव सं कल्पाद्भूयो यदा वै चेतयतेऽथ

संकल्पयतेऽथ मनस्यत्यथ वाचमीरयति तामु नाम्नीरयति

नाम्नि मन्त्रा एकं भवन्ति मन्त्रेषु कर्माणि ॥ ७.५.१॥

.. iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

cittaṃ vāva saṃ kalpādbhūyo yadā vai cetayate'tha

saṃkalpayate'tha manasyatyatha vācamīrayati tāmu nāmnīrayati

nāmni mantrā ekaṃ bhavanti mantreṣu karmāṇi .. 7.5.1..



1. Intelligence is certainly superior to will-power. A person first comprehends, and then he wills. Next he thinks it over again and again, and then he directs the organ of speech. Finally he makes the organ of speech utter the name. All the mantras then merge in the names, and all the actions merge in the mantras.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Cittam vāva saṅkalpāt bhūyaḥ, intelligence is certainly higher than saṅkalpa [will-power]; yadā vai cetayate, when one comprehends; atha saṅkalpayate, then one wills; atha, then; manasyati, he thinks; atha, then; vācam īrayati, he directs the organ of speech; tām u nāmni īrayati, he makes speech utter the name; nāmni, in the names; mantrāḥ, all the mantras; ekam bhavanti, are united; mantreṣu karmāṇi, the actions [are united] in the mantras. Commentary:-Higher than saṅkalpa is citta. Just as saṅkalpa is part of the mind, so also is citta. Śaṅkara says that here citta means intelligence. It is right understanding of what to do in a present situation in the light of past experience. You have in your mind your past experiences and your future plans, and according to that you weigh the pros and cons of your present condition and decide what to do. Citta is the power to judge what is good and bad, what is right and wrong, and then make a decision promptly and correctly. A person who has this intelligence never does things impulsively. Saṅkalpa, or will, is good, but suppose you cannot discriminate and you apply your will to a wrong purpose. A foolish person may be very obstinate, but that kind of will-power will eventually land him in trouble. Our will must be guided by our intelligence. You may have noticed that the order here is from gross to fine. First Sanatkumāra mentions words, which are gross; then the mind, which is finer; then saṅkalpa, which is more fine; and now citta, still finer. He does not reject the gross. The gross level is also truth, but it is a lower truth. Gradually he takes Nārada to the finest, the highest,

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Consideration (kitta) [1] is better than will. For when a man considers, then he wills, then he thinks in his mind, then he sends forth speech, and he sends it forth in a name. In a name the sacred hymns are contained, in the sacred hymns all sacrifices.

Footnote:

1. Kitta, thought, implies here consideration and reflection.


Sloka : 7.5.2

तानि ह वा एतानि चित्तैकायनानि चित्तात्मानि चित्ते

प्रतिष्ठितानि तस्माद्यद्यपि बहुविदचित्तो भवति

नायमस्तीत्येवैनमाहुर्यदयं वेद यद्वा अयं

विद्वान्नेत्थमचित्तः स्यादित्यथ यद्यल्पविच्चित्तवान्भवति

तस्मा एवोत शुश्रूषन्ते चित्तꣳह्येवैषामेकायनं

चित्तमात्मा चित्तं प्रतिष्ठा चित्तमुपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.५.२ ॥

tāni ha vā etāni cittaikāyanāni cittātmāni citte

pratiṣṭhitāni tasmādyadyapi bahuvidacitto bhavati

nāyamastītyevainamāhuryadayaṃ veda yadvā ayaṃ

vidvānnetthamacittaḥ syādityatha yadyalpaviccittavānbhavati

tasmā evota śuśrūṣante cittagͫhyevaiṣāmekāyanaṃ

cittamātmā cittaṃ pratiṣṭhā cittamupāssveti .. 7.5.2 ..



2. All these [will-power, mind, etc.] merge in intelligence, are directed by intelligence, and are supported by intelligence. That is why, a person may be learned but if he is dull, people [ignore him and] say:- ‘He does not exist, no matter how much he seems to know. If he were really learned, he would not be so foolish.’ On the other hand, if a person is not learned but he is intelligent, people will listen to him [with respect]. It is intelligence that governs all these. It is their soul and their support. Therefore, worship intelligence.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tāni ha vai etāni, all these [saṅkalpa, mind, speech, etc.]; citta-ekāyanāni, merge in the citta [intelligence]; cittātmāni, citta is the self [of all these]; citte pratiṣṭitāni, they rest in citta; tasmāt, that is why; yadi api, even if; bahuvit, a person knows much; acittaḥ bhavati, but is dull [i.e., is lacking in true understanding]; na ayam asti iti, that person does not exist; eva enam āhuḥ, people say about him; yat ayam veda, no matter how much he knows; yat vai ayam vidvān, if he were really learned; na ittham acittaḥ syāt iti, he would not be foolish like this; atha, but; yadi alpavit bhavati, if there is a person without much knowledge; cittavān, [but] with intelligence; tasmā eva uta śuśrūṣante, they would like to hear him speak; eṣām, of all these; cittam hi eva ekāyanam, intelligence is where they merge; cittam ātmā, intelligence is their soul; cittam pratiṣṭhā, intelligence is their support; cittam upāssva iti, worship intelligence. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'All these (beginning with mind and ending in sacrifice) centre in consideration, consist of consideration, abide in consideration. Therefore if a man is inconsiderate, even if he possesses much learning, people say of him, he is nothing, whatever he may know; for, if he were learned, he would not be so inconsiderate. But if a man is considerate, even though he knows but little, to him indeed do people listen gladly. Consideration is the centre, consideration is the self, consideration is the support of all these. Meditate on consideration.


Sloka : 7.5.3

स यश्चित्तं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते चित्तान्वै स लोकान्ध्रुवान्ध्रुवः

प्रतिष्ठितान्प्रतिष्ठितोऽव्यथमानानव्यथमानोऽभिसिध्यति

यावच्चित्तस्य गतं तत्रास्य यथाकामचारो भवति यश्चित्तं

ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति भगवश्चित्ताद्भूय इति चित्ताद्वाव

भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.५.३॥

sa yaścittaṃ brahmetyupāste cittānvai sa lokāndhruvāndhruvaḥ

pratiṣṭhitānpratiṣṭhito'vyathamānānavyathamāno'bhisidhyati

yāvaccittasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yaścittaṃ

brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavaścittādbhūya iti cittādvāva

bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.5.3..



3. ‘One who worships intelligence as Brahman attains worlds of intelligence [i.e., things he regards as important]. He becomes true and attains the world of truth. He is firmly established and also attains a world which is firmly established. He is free from pain and also attains a world free from pain. One who worships intelligence as Brahman can do what he pleases within the limits of intelligence.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than intelligence?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than intelligence,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; cittam brahma iti upāste, worships intelligence as Brahman; abhisidhyati, he attains; cittān vai lokān, worlds of intelligence; dhruvān, [worlds that are] true; dhruvaḥ, being true himself; pratiṣṭhitān, the well-established [worlds]; pratiṣṭhitaḥ, [himself being] well-established; avyathamānān, [the worlds] free from pain; avyathamānaḥ, [himself being] free from pain; yāvat cittasya gatam, as far as intelligence can go; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ cittam brahma iti upāste, he who worships intelligence as Brahman; bhagavah, sir; cittāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than intelligence; cittāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than intelligence; bhaga- Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'He who meditates on consideration as Brahman, he, being himself safe, firm, and undistressed, obtains the safe, firm, and undistressed worlds which he has considered; he is, as it were, lord and master as far as consideration reaches--he who meditates on consideration as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than consideration?' 'Yes, there is something better than consideration.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.6.1

॥ इति पञ्चमः खण्डः ॥

ध्यानं वाव चित्ताद्भूयो ध्यायतीव पृथिवी

ध्यायतीवान्तरिक्षं ध्यायतीव द्यौर्ध्यायन्तीवापो

ध्यायन्तीव पर्वता देवमनुष्यास्तस्माद्य इह मनुष्याणां

महत्तां प्राप्नुवन्ति ध्यानापादाꣳशा इवैव ते भवन्त्यथ

येऽल्पाः कलहिनः पिशुना उपवादिनस्तेऽथ ये प्रभवो

ध्यानापादाꣳशा इवैव ते भवन्ति ध्यानमुपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.६.१॥

.. iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

dhyānaṃ vāva cittādbhūyo dhyāyatīva pṛthivī

dhyāyatīvāntarikṣaṃ dhyāyatīva dyaurdhyāyantīvāpo

dhyāyantīva parvatā devamanuṣyāstasmādya iha manuṣyāṇāṃ

mahattāṃ prāpnuvanti dhyānāpādāgͫśā ivaiva te bhavantyatha

ye'lpāḥ kalahinaḥ piśunā upavādinaste'tha ye prabhavo

dhyānāpādāgͫśā ivaiva te bhavanti dhyānamupāssveti .. 7.6.1..



1. Meditation is certainly superior to intelligence. The earth seems to be meditating. The space between the earth and heaven seems to be meditating. So also, heaven seems to be meditating. Water seems to be meditating. The mountains seem to be meditating. Gods and human beings also seem to be meditating.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Dhyānam vāva cittāt bhūyaḥ, meditation is certainly superior to intelligence; dhyāyati iva pṛthivī, the earth seems to be meditating; antarikṣam dhyāyati iva, the space between the earth and heaven seems to be meditating; dyauḥ dhyāyati iva, the heaven seems to be meditating; āpaḥ dhyāyanti iva, water seems to be meditating; parvatāḥ dhyāyanti iva, the mountains seem to be meditating; deva-manuṣyāḥ dhyāyanti iva, gods and human beings seem to be meditating; tasmāt, this is why; ye, those who; iha, in this world; manuṣyāṇām, among human beings; mahattām prāpnuvanti, attain greatness; dhyānāpādāṃśāḥ iva eva te bhavanti, they seem to enjoy the fruits of meditation; atha, but; ye alpāḥ, those who are small; kalahinaḥ, are quarrelsome; piśunāḥ, crooked; upavādinaḥ, those who love scandel-mongering; atha, but; ye prabhavaḥ, those who are great; dhyānāpādāṃśāḥ iva eva te bhavanti, they seem to enjoy the fruits of meditation; dhyānam upāssva iti, worship meditation. Commentary:-This is why, those people in this world who attain greatness seem to enjoy the fruits of meditation. But there are people of small calibre. They are quarrelsome, crooked, and always finding fault with others. Those who are great, however, are so because of their habit of meditation. Therefore worship meditation. According to Śaṅkara, dhyāna is an uninterrupted stream of thought directed towards some object. Thinking of some idea, you concentrate your mind on it without breaking the flow, without any interruption—like pouring oil from one vessel to another in a continuous stream. In the same way, you must fix your mind on God. You may meditate on him as something abstract, as an idea. Or, if that is difficult, you may meditate on him with some kind of form. Sanatkumāra says here that everything seems to be meditating—the earth, the intermediate region, heaven, the mountains. Once Swami Vivekananda said:- ‘Look at the Himalayas. Does it not strike you that it is a yogi meditating?’ Śaṅkara also compares the earth to a yogi sitting in meditation, firm and unmoving. As the earth is steady and fixed, so we also should be steady and fixed when we meditate. Before Buddha attained illumination he vowed:- Ihāsane śuṣyatu me śarīraṃ tvagasthimāṃsaṃ pralayaṃ ca yātu; Aprāpya bodhiṃ bahukalpadurlabhāṃ naivāsanātkāyamataścaliṣyate. May my body shrivel up on this seat; may my skin, bones, and flesh disintegrate. Without attaining enlightenment, which is so hard to attain, I shall not leave this seat. This is the sort of determination we must have. If you can think of everything as meditating, then you also will be able to meditate. And those people who meditate attain greatness, because they constantly think of great things. Śaṅkara says that greatness comes through knowledge or wealth or some other thing. But in order to become great you must think in a great way, speak in a great way, and behave in a great way. Suppose you cannot think in terms of being great. You condemn yourself and think, ‘Oh, that is not for me.’ This is not humility. It is foolishness. It is being small-minded, and it is condemned by the scriptures. Swami Vivekananda used to say, ‘You may have faith in all the gods and goddesses, but if you do not have faith in yourself you will never achieve anything.’ Similarly, if you are jealous or speak ill of others, you will not be able to meditate on great things. And if you cannot meditate on great things, your nature will deteriorate. Someone once told Vidyasagar that a certain person was criticizing him. Vidyasagar said, ‘I don’t remember having helped him in any way, so why should he criticize me?’ Sometimes you find that the very people who have received your help try to harm you. This is the nature of small-minded people. Thinking shapes our character. If we meditate on noble things we become noble.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Reflection (dhyâna) [1] is better than consideration. The earth reflects, as it were, and thus does the sky, the heaven, the water, the mountains, gods and men. Therefore those who among men obtain greatness here on earth, seem to have obtained a part of the object of reflection (because they show a certain repose of manner). Thus while small and vulgar people are always quarrelling, abusive, and slandering, great men seem to have obtained a part of the reward of reflection. Meditate on reflection.

Footnote:

1. Reflection is concentration of all our thoughts on one object, ekâgratâ. And as a man who reflects and meditates on the highest objects acquires thereby repose, becomes firm and immovable, so the earth is supposed to be in repose and immovable, as it were, by reflection and meditation.


Sloka : 7.6.2

स यो ध्यानं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते यावद्ध्यानस्य गतं तत्रास्य

यथाकामचारो भवति यो ध्यानं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति

भगवो ध्यानाद्भूय इति ध्यानाद्वाव भूयोऽस्तीति

तन्मे भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.६.२॥

sa yo dhyānaṃ brahmetyupāste yāvaddhyānasya gataṃ tatrāsya

yathākāmacāro bhavati yo dhyānaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti

bhagavo dhyānādbhūya iti dhyānādvāva bhūyo'stīti

tanme bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.6.2..



2. ‘One who worships meditation as Brahman can do what he pleases within the limits of meditation.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than meditation?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than meditation,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ dhyānam brahma iti upāste, one who worships meditation as Brahman; yāvat dhyānasya gatam, as far as meditation can go; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ dhyānam brahma iti upāste, he who worships meditation as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; dhyānāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than meditation; dhyānāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than meditation; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on reflection as Brahman, is lord and master, as it were, as far as reflection reaches--he who meditates on reflection as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than reflection?' 'Yes, there is something better than reflection.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.7.1

॥ इति षष्ठः खण्डः ॥

विज्ञानं वाव ध्यानाद्भूयः विज्ञानेन वा ऋग्वेदं विजानाति

यजुर्वेदꣳ सामवेदमाथर्वणं चतुर्थमितिहासपुराणं

पञ्चमं वेदानां वेदं पित्र्यꣳराशिं दैवं निधिं

वाकोवाक्यमेकायनं देवविद्यां ब्रह्मविद्यां भूतविद्यां

क्षत्रविद्यां नक्षत्रविद्याꣳसर्पदेवजनविद्यां दिवं च

पृथिवीं च वायुं चाकाशं चापश्च तेजश्च देवाꣳश्च

मनुष्याꣳश्च पशूꣳश्च वयाꣳसि च

तृणवनस्पतीञ्छ्वापदान्याकीटपतङ्गपिपीलकं

धर्मं चाधर्मं च सत्यं चानृतं च साधु चासाधु च

हृदयज्ञं चाहृदयज्ञं चान्नं च रसं चेमं च लोकममुं

च विज्ञानेनैव विजानाति विज्ञानमुपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.७.१ ॥

.. iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

vijñānaṃ vāva dhyānādbhūyaḥ vijñānena vā ṛgvedaṃ vijānāti

yajurvedagͫ sāmavedamātharvaṇaṃ caturthamitihāsapurāṇaṃ

pañcamaṃ vedānāṃ vedaṃ pitryagͫrāśiṃ daivaṃ nidhiṃ

vākovākyamekāyanaṃ devavidyāṃ brahmavidyāṃ bhūtavidyāṃ

kṣatravidyāṃ nakṣatravidyāgͫsarpadevajanavidyāṃ divaṃ ca

pṛthivīṃ ca vāyuṃ cākāśaṃ cāpaśca tejaśca devāgͫśca

manuṣyāgͫśca paśūgͫśca vayāgͫsi ca

tṛṇavanaspatīñchvāpadānyākīṭapataṅgapipīlakaṃ

dharmaṃ cādharmaṃ ca satyaṃ cānṛtaṃ ca sādhu cāsādhu ca

hṛdayajñaṃ cāhṛdayajñaṃ cānnaṃ ca rasaṃ cemaṃ ca lokamamuṃ

ca vijñānenaiva vijānāti vijñānamupāssveti .. 7.7.1 ..



1. Vijñāna [the practical application of knowledge] is certainly superior to meditation. Through vijñāna one knows the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth—the Atharva Veda; then the fifth—history and the Purāṇas; also, grammar, funeral rites, mathematics, the science of omens, the science of underground resources, logic, moral science, astrology, Vedic knowledge, the science of the elements, archery, astronomy, the science relating to snakes, plus music, dance, and other fine arts; also heaven and earth; air, space, water, and fire; the gods and human beings; cattle and birds; creepers and big trees; animals of prey as well as worms, fleas, and ants; merit and demerit; truth and untruth; good and evil; the pleasant and the unpleasant; food and water; and this world and the other world. One knows all this through vijñāna. Worship vijñāna.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Vijñānam vāva dhyānāt bhūyaḥ, vijñāna [i.e., the practical application of knowledge] is certainly superior to meditation; vijñānena vai vijānāti, through vijñāna one knows; ṛg vedam yajur vedam sāma vedam ātharvaṇam caturtham, the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth, the Atharva Veda; itihāsa purāṇam pañcamam, history and the Purāṇas, as the fifth; vedānām vedam, grammar [lit., the Veda of the Vedas]; pitryam, rites offered out of respect to the ancestors; rāśim, mathematics; daivam, the science of meteors and other natural phenomena [and omens]; nidhim, the science of underground resources; vākovākyam, logic; ekāyanam, moral science; deva-vidyām, astrology; brahma-vidyām, knowledge of the Vedas; bhūta-vidyām, geology; kṣattra-vidyām, archery; nakṣatra-vidyām, astronomy; sarpa [-vidyām], snakecharming; devajana-vidyām, fine arts; divam ca, heaven; pṛthivīm ca, and the earth; vāyum ca, and air; ākāśam ca, and space; āpaḥ ca, and water; tejaḥ ca, and fire; devān ca, and the gods; manuṣyān ca, and human beings; paśūn ca, and animals; vayāṃsi ca, and birds; tṛṇa-vanaspatīn, creepers and big trees; śvāpadāni, animals of prey; ākīṭa-pataṅga-pipīlikam, worms, fleas, and ants; dharmam ca adharmam ca, merit and demerit; satyam ca anṛtam ca, and truth and untruth; sādhu ca asādhu ca, and good and evil; hṛdayajñam ca ahṛdayajñam ca, pleasant and unpleasant; annam ca rasam ca, food and water; imam ca lokam amum ca, this world and the other world; vijñānena eva vijānāti, one knows this through vijñāna; vijñānam upāssva iti, worship vijñāna. Commentary:-Vijñāna is higher than dhyāna, meditation. What is vijñāna? It is knowledge of the meaning of the scriptures (vjñānam śāstrārthaviṣayam jñānam). There are so many scriptures, but suppose you are able to recite all of them from memory. That is not enough. You must understand the real purport of what each is saying and then put the teachings into practice. Some people have one book that they read over and over again. It may be the Gītā or The Gospel When Swami Turiyananda was young he would read one verse at a time from the Gītā and spend the whole day, or the next several days, meditating on it. He would not go on to the next verse until he had realized the truth of the one he had just read. This is vijñāna, and this is why vijñāna is higher than meditation.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Understanding (vigñâna) is better than reflection. Through understanding we understand the Rig-veda, the Yagur-veda, the Sâma-veda, and as the fourth the Âtharvana, as the fifth the Itihâsa-purân[1], the Veda of the Vedas, the Pitrya, the Râsi, the Daiva, the Nidhi, the Vâkovâkya, the Ekâyana, the Deva-vidyâ, the Brahma-vidyâ, the Bhûta-vidyâ, the Kshatra-vidyâ, the Nakshatra-vidyâ, the Sarpa and Devagana-vidyâ, heaven, earth, air, ether, water, fire, gods, men, cattle, birds, herbs, trees, all beasts down to worms, midges, and ants; what is right and what is wrong; what is true and what is false; what is good and what is bad; what is pleasing and what is not pleasing; food and savour, this world and that, all this we understand through understanding. Meditate on understanding.

Footnote:

1. See before, .


Sloka : 7.7.2

स यो विज्ञानं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते विज्ञानवतो वै स

लोकाञ्ज्ञानवतोऽभिसिध्यति यावद्विज्ञानस्य गतं तत्रास्य

यथाकामचारो भवति यो विज्ञानं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति भगवो

विज्ञानाद्भूय इति विज्ञानाद्वाव भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे

भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.७.२॥

sa yo vijñānaṃ brahmetyupāste vijñānavato vai sa

lokāñjñānavato'bhisidhyati yāvadvijñānasya gataṃ tatrāsya

yathākāmacāro bhavati yo vijñānaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo

vijñānādbhūya iti vijñānādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme

bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.7.2..



2. ‘One who worships vijñāna as Brahman attains the vijñānamaya and jñānamaya worlds. One who worships vijñāna as Brahman can do what he pleases within the limits of vijñāna.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than vijñāna?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than vijñāna,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; vijñānam brahma iti upāste, worships vijñāna [i.e., the practical application of knowledge] as Brahman; saḥ vai vijñānavataḥ jñānavataḥ lokān abhisidhyati, attains the vijñānamaya and jñānamaya worlds; yāvat vijñānasya gatam, as far as vijñāna goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ vijñānam brahma iti upāste, he who worships vijñāna as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; vijñānāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than vijñāna; vijñānāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than vijñāna; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on understanding as Brahman, reaches the worlds where there is understanding and knowledge [1]; he is, as it were, lord and master as far as understanding reaches--he who meditates on understanding as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than understanding?' 'Yes, there is something better than understanding.' 'Sir, tell it me.'

Footnote:

1. The commentator takes vigñâna here as understanding of sacred books, gñâna as cleverness with regard to other subjects.


Sloka : 7.8.1

॥ इति सप्तमः खण्डः ॥

बलं वाव विज्ञानाद्भूयोऽपि ह शतं विज्ञानवतामेको

बलवानाकम्पयते स यदा बली भवत्यथोत्थाता

भवत्युत्तिष्ठन्परिचरिता भवति परिचरन्नुपसत्ता

भवत्युपसीदन्द्रष्टा भवति श्रोता भवति मन्ता भवति

बोद्धा भवति कर्ता भवति विज्ञाता भवति बलेन वै पृथिवी

तिष्ठति बलेनान्तरिक्षं बलेन द्यौर्बलेन पर्वता बलेन

देवमनुष्या बलेन पशवश्च वयाꣳसि च तृणवनस्पतयः

श्वापदान्याकीटपतङ्गपिपीलकं बलेन लोकस्तिष्ठति

बलमुपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.८.१॥

.. iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

balaṃ vāva vijñānādbhūyo'pi ha śataṃ vijñānavatāmeko

balavānākampayate sa yadā balī bhavatyathotthātā

bhavatyuttiṣṭhanparicaritā bhavati paricarannupasattā

bhavatyupasīdandraṣṭā bhavati śrotā bhavati mantā bhavati

boddhā bhavati kartā bhavati vijñātā bhavati balena vai pṛthivī

tiṣṭhati balenāntarikṣaṃ balena dyaurbalena parvatā balena

devamanuṣyā balena paśavaśca vayāgͫsi ca tṛṇavanaspatayaḥ

śvāpadānyākīṭapataṅgapipīlakaṃ balena lokastiṣṭhati

balamupāssveti .. 7.8.1..



1. Strength is certainly superior to understanding. One strong person can make even a hundred people of understanding shake with fear. If a person is strong, he will be enthusiastic and up and about. He will then start serving his teacher, and while serving his teacher he will be close to him. While sitting close to the teacher, he Will watch him and listen to what he says. Then he will think it over and try to understand. He will then act on it, and finally he will grasp the inner meaning. Strength supports the earth. It also supports the interspace, heaven, the mountains, gods and human beings, cattle, birds, creepers, and trees. It supports animals of prey as well as worms, fleas, and ants. It supports the whole world. Worship strength.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Balanm vāva vijñānāt bhūyaḥ, strength is superior to understanding; ekaḥ balavān, one strong person; api ha śatam vijñānavatāin ākampayate, can make even a hundred persons of understanding shake [with fear]; yadā saḥ balī bhavati, when a person is strong [he is full of enthusiasm]; atha utthātā bhavati, he is then up and about; uttiṣṭhan, being up; paricaritā bhavati, he looks after [his teacher]; paricaran, attending to the needs [of his teacher]; upasattā bhavati, he sits near [the teacher]; upasīdan, sitting near him; draṣṭā bhavati, he watches [what the teacher does]; śrotā bhavati, he listens [to what the. teacher says]; mantā bhavati, [and] thinks it over; boddhā bhavati, he tries to understand the meaning; kartā bhavati, he does what he is supposed to do; vijñātā bhavati, he grasps the meaning [of what the teacher had said]; balena vai pṛthivī tiṣṭhati, through power the whole world is sustained; balena antarikṣam, through power, the interspace [is sustained]; balena dyauḥ, through power, heaven; balena parvatāḥ, through strength, the mountains; balena deva-manuṣyāḥ, through strength, gods and human beings; balena paśavaḥ ca, through strength, cattle; vayāṃsi ca tṛṇa-vanaspatayaḥ, and birds and creepers and big trees; śvāpadāni, animals of prey; ākīṭa-pataṅga-pipīlikam, worms, fleas, and ants; balena lokaḥ tiṣṭhati, through strength the whole world is sustained; balam upāssva iti, worship strength. Commentary:-What is higher than understanding? Strength. You might remember that startling remark Swami Vivekananda made in the course of a lecture:- ‘You will reach heaven quicker by playing football than by reading the Gita.’ Why do we play football? To be strong, to have strong muscles and a healthy body. How will you understand what Śrī Kṛṣṇa is saying unless you have a strong body and nerves? If you are weak, you can never grasp the real meaning of the Gītā. As the Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad (III.ii.4) says, ‘Nāyamātmā balahīnena labhyaḥ—This Self cannot be known by the weak.’ This, of course, does not mean just physical strength. Intellectual strength is also necessary—in fact, strength at all levels. Everyone follows a strong person. Gandhi was very strong-minded. If he made up his mind to do something, nothing on earth could make him change—even if he had to do it alone. He meant what he said, and that is why he commanded so much respect. It is very important to mean what you say and say what you mean. Weak people cannot do that. Sanatkumāra says that in the presence of a strong man, a hundred men of understanding tremble. If you are strong you will be enterprising, but weak people are always vacillating. They never know their minds. A strong person will start acting immediately. He is never idle. If a person wants to gain anything materially, he has to work hard. How often does someone gain something by a fluke? And this is even more important if one is seeking the Truth. Lots of us say, ‘Oh, when will I realize the Self?’ But are we prepared to work hard to do it? In ancient days if people wanted to learn the Vedas they would have to go to a teacher and live with him. Besides attending to their studies, the students would serve the teacher. They would have many duties to perform. It was a difficult life. There was a devotee who used to come with his classmates to Belur Math when Swami Brahmananda was there. He noticed that Swami Brahmananda would sometimes ask one of his disciples to bring him a glass of water, or do some other little service. This devotee always hoped that some day Swami Brahmananda would ask him to do something. Finally one day the postman came with a parcel for Swami Brahmananda, who wanted someone to unpack it for him. As if in answer to this devotee’s prayers, Swami Brahmananda turned to him and said:- ‘Would you do me this favour? Take this pared, unpack it, and bring me the contents. But look, be sure you don’t tear the paper or cut the ropes with which it is tied.’ So, with great care, the devotee did as he was asked. Sri Ramakrishna was also like this—punctilious. If you are a seeker of Truth, you have to be correct in every detail. You may think that attaining Self-knowledge is only a matter of renunciation and practice of meditation and so on. But how can you meditate if your mind is not attentive to every detail? Through service the teacher watches the student. He sees whether the student is careless or absent-minded or lazy. When you serve the teacher you become intimate, and if you are intimate, he will gladly share his knowledge with you. A good teacher is always looking for a good student, and he is happy when he finds a student who is attentive, humble, keen to learn, and who loves him. Swami Nirvanananda was considered the best of Swami Brahmananda’s attendants. Swami Brahmananda was always surrounded by young people who loved him and wanted to serve him. But none could surpass Swami Nirvanananda because he would not wait for Swami Brahmananda to tell him what he needed. Swami Nirvanananda would anticipate his needs beforehand. Whether it was a cup of tea, a glass of water, or something to eat, it would be there before Swami Brahmananda would ask. Most of the time Swami Brahmananda would be on a high spiritual plane, forgetful of his physical needs. A good attendant had to know what he needed beforehand and provide it. Religion is not just something intellectual. It is a transformation of the whole personality. The teacher is the mould, and you try to form yourself according to that mould. How? First you hear what the teacher says, and then you reason:- ‘Why did he say that? What did he mean by that?’ Then you watch what he does. Very soon the truth of what the teacher says reveals itself to you. You realize what he is saying, and then you act accordingly. This earth is an example of what strength can do. The earth sustains everything through its own strength. In fact, everything in nature is sustained by its own inherent strength. It is not strength borrowed from something else. Similarly, we must support ourselves by our own strength. So Sanatkumāra says first you rise. That is to say, once you have decided to attain Self-knowledge, don’t be idle. Begin immediately, As Swami Vivekananda

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Power (bala) is better than understanding. One powerful man shakes a hundred men of understanding. If a man is powerful, he becomes a rising man. If he rises, he becomes a man who visits wise people. If he visits, he becomes a follower of wise people. If he follows them, he becomes a seeing, a hearing, a perceiving, a knowing, a doing, an understanding man. By power the earth stands firm, and the sky, and the heaven, and the mountains, gods and men, cattle, birds, herbs, trees, all beasts down to worms, midges, and ants; by power the world stands firm. Meditate on power.


Sloka : 7.8.2

स यो बलं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते यावद्बलस्य गतं तत्रास्य

यथाकामचारो भवति यो बलं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति भगवो

बलाद्भूय इति बलाद्वाव भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे

भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.८.२॥

sa yo balaṃ brahmetyupāste yāvadbalasya gataṃ tatrāsya

yathākāmacāro bhavati yo balaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo

balādbhūya iti balādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme

bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.8.2..



2. ‘One who worships strength as Brahman can do what he pleases within the limits of strength.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than strength?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than strength,’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; balam brahma iti upāste, worships strength as Brahman; yāvat balasya gatam, as far as strength goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ balam brahma iti upāste, he who worships strength as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; balāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than strength; balāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than strength; bhagavāṃ sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section. Commentary:-Strength here means strength produced by food. If you starve, you become weak and then you do not understand the scriptures. Perhaps your teacher will ask you to recite something from the scriptures, but you won’t be able to because of your weakness from fasting. A strong person, however, can please his teacher by his enthusiasm and service. He can also carry out his teacher’s instructions to the latter’s satisfaction. By virtue of his strength, he becomes an ideal person in all respects.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on power as Brahman, is, as it were, lord and master as far as power reaches--he who meditates on power as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than power?' 'Yes, there is something better than power.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.9.1

॥ इति अष्टमः खण्डः ॥

अन्नं वाव बलाद्भूयस्तस्माद्यद्यपि दश

रात्रीर्नाश्नीयाद्यद्यु ह

जीवेदथवाद्रष्टाश्रोतामन्ताबोद्धाकर्ताविज्ञाता

भवत्यथान्नस्यायै द्रष्टा भवति श्रोता भवति मन्ता

भवति बोद्धा भवति कर्ता भवति विज्ञाता

भवत्यन्नमुपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

annaṃ vāva balādbhūyastasmādyadyapi daśa

rātrīrnāśnīyādyadyu ha

jīvedathavādraṣṭāśrotāmantāboddhākartāvijñātā

bhavatyathānnasyāyai draṣṭā bhavati śrotā bhavati mantā

bhavati boddhā bhavati kartā bhavati vijñātā

bhavatyannamupāssveti .. 7.9.1..



1. Food is certainly superior to strength. This is why if a person fasts for ten days and nights, he may survive but he will not be able to see, hear, think, understand, work, or fully grasp the meaning of what he is taught. But if he eats food, he can then see, hear, think, understand, work, and fully grasp the meaning of the teachings. Therefore worship food.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Annam vāva balāt bhūyaḥ, food is certainly superior to strength; tasmāt, that is why; yadi api, even if; daśa rātrīḥ na aśnīyāt, a person fasts for ten [days and] nights; yadi u ha jīvet, though he may live; atha vā adraṣṭā, he may not be able to see; aśrotā, or hear; amantā, think; aboddhā, understand; akartā, work; avijñātā bhavati, nor can he fully grasp [the meaning of what he is taught]; atha, but; annasya āyai, when he eats food; draṣṭā bhavati, he can see; śrotā bhavati, he can hear; mantā bhavati, he can think; boddhā bhavati, he can understand; kartā bhavati, he can work; vijñātā bhavati, he can grasp the meaning; annam upāssva iti, worship food. Commentary:-Food creates strength. Suppose you fast for ten days or so. What will happen? It is possible you could die, but even if you don’t, your sense organs will not function. You won’t be able to see, hear, or think. If you went to a teacher you would not be able to learn anything from him. But then if you resume eating, your organs and your mind would again start functioning. You could then study and serve the teacher and learn from him.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Food (anna) is better than power. Therefore if a man abstain from food for ten days, though he live, he would be unable to see, hear, perceive, think, act, and understand. But when he obtains food, he is able to see, hear, perceive, think, act, and understand. Meditate on food.


Sloka : 7.9.2

स योऽन्नं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽन्नवतो वै स

लोकान्पानवतोऽभिसिध्यति यावदन्नस्य गतं तत्रास्य

यथाकामचारो भवति योऽन्नं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति

भगवोऽन्नाद्भूय इत्यन्नाद्वाव भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे

भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.९.२॥

sa yo'nnaṃ brahmetyupāste'nnavato vai sa

lokānpānavato'bhisidhyati yāvadannasya gataṃ tatrāsya

yathākāmacāro bhavati yo'nnaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti

bhagavo'nnādbhūya ityannādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme

bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.9.2..



2. ‘One who worships food as Brahman attains worlds full of food and drink. One who worships food as Brahman can do what he pleases within the limits of food.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than food?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than food,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; annam brahma iti upāste, worships food as Brahman; saḥ abhisidhyati, he attains; annavataḥ vai lokān pānavataḥ, worlds hill of food and drink; yāvat annasya gatam, as far as food goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ annam brahma iti upāste, he who worships food as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; annāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than food; annāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than food; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on food as Brahman, obtains the worlds rich in food and drink; he is, as it were, lord and master as far as food reaches--he who meditates on food as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than food 'Yes, there is something better than food.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.10.1

॥ इति नवमः खण्डः ॥

आपो वावान्नाद्भूयस्तस्माद्यदा सुवृष्टिर्न भवति

व्याधीयन्ते प्राणा अन्नं कनीयो भविष्यतीत्यथ यदा

सुवृष्टिर्भवत्यानन्दिनः प्राणा भवन्त्यन्नं बहु

भविष्यतीत्याप एवेमा मूर्ता येयं पृथिवी यदन्तरिक्षं

यद्द्यौर्यत्पर्वता यद्देवमनुष्यायत्पशवश्च वयाꣳसि च

तृणवनस्पतयः श्वापदान्याकीटपतङ्गपिपीलकमाप

एवेमा मूर्ता अप उपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.१०.१॥

.. iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

āpo vāvānnādbhūyastasmādyadā suvṛṣṭirna bhavati

vyādhīyante prāṇā annaṃ kanīyo bhaviṣyatītyatha yadā

suvṛṣṭirbhavatyānandinaḥ prāṇā bhavantyannaṃ bahu

bhaviṣyatītyāpa evemā mūrtā yeyaṃ pṛthivī yadantarikṣaṃ

yaddyauryatparvatā yaddevamanuṣyāyatpaśavaśca vayāgͫsi ca

tṛṇavanaspatayaḥ śvāpadānyākīṭapataṅgapipīlakamāpa

evemā mūrtā apa upāssveti .. 7.10.1..



1. Water is certainly superior to food. That is why if there is no rain, people worry and think, ‘There will not be enough food.’ But if there is a good rainfall, they are happy, thinking, ‘There will be plenty of food.’ All these are water in different forms:- the earth, the interspace, heaven, the mountains, gods and human beings, cattle and birds, creepers and trees, animals of prey, worms, insects, and ants. All these are water in different forms. Therefore worship water.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Āpaḥ vāva annāt bhūyaḥ, water is certainly superior than food; tasmāt, this is why; yadā suvṛṣṭiḥ na bhavati, when there is not enough rain; prāṇāḥ vyādhīyante, people are anxious; annam kanīyaḥ bhaviṣyati iti, [thinking,] there will not be much food; atha yadā suvṛṣṭiḥ bhavati, then when it rains; prāṇāḥ ānandinaḥ bhavanti, people become happy; annam bahu bhaviṣyati iti, [thinking,] there will be much food; āpaḥ eva imāḥ, water is all this; mūrtāḥ, different forms; yā iyam pṛthivī, this earth; yat antarikṣam, this interspace; yat dyauḥ, this heaven; yat parvatāḥ, these mountains; yat deva-manuṣyāḥ, these gods and human beings; yat paśavaḥ ca, these cattle; vayāṃsi ca, and birds; tṛṇa-vanaspatayaḥ, and creepers and trees; śvāpadāni, animals of prey; ākīṭa-pataṅga-pipīlikam, worms, insects, and ants; āpaḥ eva imāḥ mūrtāḥ, these are all water in different forms; apaḥ upāssva iti, worship water. Commentary:-Suppose one year there is very little rainfall. Everyone then becomes very worried. They say:- ‘What will happen to us? This is a bad year. The crops will fail and there will be a famine.’ On the other hand, if there is good rain during the year, then there is a good harvest. People say, ‘This year we will have plenty to eat.’ The bodies of all living beings are products of water and are dependent on water.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Water (ap) is better than food. Therefore if there is not sufficient rain, the vital spirits fail from fear that there will be less food. But if there is sufficient rain, the vital spirits rejoice, because there will be much food. This water, on assuming different forms, becomes this earth, this sky, this heaven, the mountains, gods and men, cattle, birds, herbs and trees, all beasts down to worms, midges, and ants. Water indeed assumes all these forms. Meditate on water.


Sloka : 7.10.2

स योऽपो ब्रह्मेत्युपास्त आप्नोति सर्वान्कामाꣳस्तृप्तिमान्भवति

यावदपां गतं तत्रास्य यथाकामचारो भवति योऽपो

ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति भगवोऽद्भ्यो भूय इत्यद्भ्यो वाव

भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.१०.२॥

sa yo'po brahmetyupāsta āpnoti sarvānkāmāgͫstṛptimānbhavati

yāvadapāṃ gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yo'po

brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo'dbhyo bhūya ityadbhyo vāva

bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.10.2..



2. ‘One who worships water as Brahman gets all he desires and is happy. One who worships water as Brahman can do what he pleases within the limits of water.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than water?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than water,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; apaḥ brahma iti upāste, worships water as Brahman; sarvān kāmān āpnoti, gets all he wishes; tṛptimān bhavati, [and] he is happy; yāvat apām gatam, as far as water goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ apaḥ brahma iti upāste, he who worships water as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; adbhyaḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than water; adbhyaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than water; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section. Commentary:-The Upaniṣad says that if you worship water as Brahman all your desires are fulfilled and you become happy. You can also do whatever you please. This is an exaggeration, but the Upaniṣad is trying to entice you to understand the value of water.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on water as Brahman, obtains all wishes, he becomes satisfied; he is, as it were, lord and master as far as water reaches--he who meditates on water as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than water?' 'Yes, there is something better than water.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.11.1

॥ इति दशमः खण्डः ॥

तेजो वावाद्भ्यो भूयस्तद्वा एतद्वायुमागृह्याकाशमभितपति

तदाहुर्निशोचति नितपति वर्षिष्यति वा इति तेज एव

तत्पूर्वं दर्शयित्वाथापः सृजते तदेतदूर्ध्वाभिश्च

तिरश्चीभिश्च विद्युद्भिराह्रादाश्चरन्ति तस्मादाहुर्विद्योतते

स्तनयति वर्षिष्यति वा इति तेज एव तत्पूर्वं दर्शयित्वाथापः

सृजते तेज उपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.११.१॥

.. iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tejo vāvādbhyo bhūyastadvā etadvāyumāgṛhyākāśamabhitapati

tadāhurniśocati nitapati varṣiṣyati vā iti teja eva

tatpūrvaṃ darśayitvāthāpaḥ sṛjate tadetadūrdhvābhiśca

tiraścībhiśca vidyudbhirāhrādāścaranti tasmādāhurvidyotate

stanayati varṣiṣyati vā iti teja eva tatpūrvaṃ darśayitvāthāpaḥ

sṛjate teja upāssveti .. 7.11.1..



1. Fire [or, heat] is certainly better than water. That fire, taking air as its support, heats the sky. Then people say:- ‘It is very hot. The body is burning. It will rain soon.’ Fire first produces these signs, and then creates the rain. This is why there is lightning going straight up or going sideways in a zigzag manner, and along with it thunder. This is why people say:- ‘There is lightning and thunder. It will rain soon’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tejaḥ vāva adbhyaḥ bhūyaḥ, fire is certainly superior to water; tat vai etat, that [fire]; vāyum āgṛhya, taking the support of air; ākāśam abhitapati, heats the sky; tadā, then; āhaḥ, people say; niśocati, it is very hot; nitapati, it is burning; varṣiṣyati vai iti, there will be rain; tejaḥ eva tat, there is fire; pūrvam, first; darśayitvā, showing; atha apaḥ, then water; sṛjate, creates; tat etat, that [fire]; ūrdhvābhiḥ ca tiraścībhiḥ ca, going upwards and sideways in an irregular way; vidyudbhiḥ, with lightning; āhrādāḥ, the roar of thunder; caranti, moves about; tasmāt, this is why; āhuḥ, people say; vidyotate, there is lightning; stanayati, there is thunder; varṣiṣyati vai iti, there will certainly be rain; tejaḥ eva tat pūrvam darśayitvā, first heat is seen; atha apaḥ sṛjate, then it creates water; tejaḥ upāssva iti, worship fire. Commentary:-In Indian philosophy, there is no such thing as creation—that is, something created out of nothing. But there is manifestation. This universe is always there, only sometimes it is manifest and sometimes it is not. When it is not manifest it is in a seed form. But Brahman is the essence of everything. It is infinite Existence, and that Existence is Consciousness. The first manifestation of Brahman is space. After that comes air and then fire. Water comes from fire, or energy. Finally, earth comes from water. Some things in this universe are gross, and some are subtle, but according to Indian philosophy all are by-products of earth, water, fire, air, and space. This universe is nothing but a permutation and combination of these five elements. Tejas means fire, heat, or energy. Fire is superior to water in the sense that it is the cause, and the cause is always superior to the effect. Fire is said to take air as its support and then make the air motionless through its power. The heat then spreads through space. We all know that when the atmosphere becomes very hot, it will soon rain. Also, before it rains we often see lightning and hear the roar of thunder. This indicates that the atmosphere is surcharged with electricity. So it is said that fire is the cause of water. Fire manifests itself as water. It is not that these elements are separate things.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Fire (tegas) is better than water. For fire united with air, warms the ether. Then people say, It is hot, it burns, it will rain. Thus does fire, after showing this sign (itself) first, create water. And thus again thunderclaps come with lightnings, flashing upwards and across the sky. Then people say, There is lightning and thunder, it will rain. Then also does fire, after showing this sign first, create water. Meditate on fire.


Sloka : 7.11.2

स यस्तेजो ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते तेजस्वी वै स तेजस्वतो

लोकान्भास्वतोऽपहततमस्कानभिसिध्यति यावत्तेजसो गतं

तत्रास्य यथाकामचारो भवति यस्तेजो ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति

भगवस्तेजसो भूय इति तेजसो वाव भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे

भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.११.२॥

sa yastejo brahmetyupāste tejasvī vai sa tejasvato

lokānbhāsvato'pahatatamaskānabhisidhyati yāvattejaso gataṃ

tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yastejo brahmetyupāste'sti

bhagavastejaso bhūya iti tejaso vāva bhūyo'stīti tanme

bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.11.2..



2. ‘One who worships fire as Brahman becomes bright himself, and he attains worlds that are bright, shining, and without a hint of darkness. One who worships fire as Brahman can do what he pleases within the range of fire.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than tejas?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than tejas,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; tejaḥ brahma iti upāste, worships fire as Brahman; saḥ vai tejasi, he becomes energetic and bright; abhisidhyati, [and] attains; tejasvataḥ bhāsvataḥ lokān, worlds that are bright and shining; apahatatamaskān, and without a hint of darkness; yāvat tejasaḥ gatam, as far as tejas goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ tejaḥ brahma iti upāste, he who worships fire as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; tejasaḥ bhūyaḥ aṣṭi iti, is there anything higher than tejas; tejasaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher Commentary:-From ancient times there has been the practice of worshipping fire in different cultures all over the world. In India during the Vedic period people performed sacrifices to fire and always kept their fire burning. But among the religions of the world now, the Parsees are especially known for their worship of fire. The Upaniṣad says that if you worship fire you become like fire—radiant, bright, strong, and shining. That is the Hindu idea. You choose some model, called an iṣṭa. My iṣṭa is my desired state of excellence. Suppose I choose Buddha as my iṣṭa. If I worship him and meditate on him, slowly my character will be changed and I will be transformed. But fire does not just give radiance. Fire, or light, is also a symbol of knowledge as well as a symbol of purity. Fire is said to burn away all impurities. When you meditate on fire as a symbol of knowledge, you meditate on all that is good, bright, and radiant. Slowly we are approaching Brahman. We are going to the source. Suppose we want to walk from Calcutta to Gangotri, the source of the Ganga. How do we do it? We follow the course of the river. Gradually, step by step, we leave Calcutta behind and go further and further north, until at last we find ourselves at Gangotri. In the same way, Sanatkumāra is taking Nārada step by step to the knowledge of the Self.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on fire as Brahman, obtains, resplendent himself, resplendent worlds, full of light and free of darkness; he is, as it were, lord and master as far as fire reaches--he who meditates on fire as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than fire?' 'Yes, there is something better than fire.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.12.1

॥ इति एकादशः खण्डः ॥

आकाशो वाव तेजसो भूयानाकाशे वै सूर्याचन्द्रमसावुभौ

विद्युन्नक्षत्राण्यग्निराकाशेनाह्वयत्याकाशेन

श‍ृणोत्याकाशेन प्रतिश‍ृणोत्याकाशे रमत आकाशे न रमत

आकाशे जायत आकाशमभिजायत आकाशमुपास्स्वेति

॥ ७.१२.१॥

.. iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ākāśo vāva tejaso bhūyānākāśe vai sūryācandramasāvubhau

vidyunnakṣatrāṇyagnirākāśenāhvayatyākāśena

śṛṇotyākāśena pratiśṛṇotyākāśe ramata ākāśe na ramata

ākāśe jāyata ākāśamabhijāyata ākāśamupāssveti

.. 7.12.1..



1. Ākāśa [space] is certainly superior to fire. The sun and the moon are both within ākāśa, and so are lightning, the stars, and fire. Through ākāśa one person is able to speak to another. Through ākāśa one is able to hear. And through ākāśa one is able to hear what others are saying. In ākāśa one enjoys, and in ākāśa one suffers. A person is born in ākāśa, and plants and trees grow pointing to ākāśa. Worship ākāśa.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Ākāśaḥ vāva tejasaḥ bhūyān, space is certainly superior to fire; ākāśe vai, within space; sūryā-candra-māsau ubhau, are both the sun and the moon; vidyut, lightning; nakṣatrāṇi, the stars; agniḥ, [and] fire; ākāśena, through space; āhvayati, one calls; ākāśena śṛṇoti, through space one hears; ākāśena pratiśṛṇoti, through space one hears what others are saying; ākāśe ramate, in space one enjoys; ākāśe na ramate, in space one suffers; ākāśe jāyate, in space one is born; ākāśam abhijāyate, [trees and plants] grow pointing to space; ākāśam upāssva iti, worship space. Commentary:-You may find what seem to be errors in every religion, because no religion can reveal the whole of the Ultimate Truth. No religion can exhaust God. It can reveal only one or two aspects of God. So we see here, Sanatkumāra is taking Nārada from a lower truth to a higher truth. He is showing how the cause is higher than the effect. Suppose there is no such thing as space. Where would fire be? Or lightning? Or the sun or the moon or the stars? So space is higher than fire, or energy. Without space there would be no sound, and no one could speak to another. Nor could anyone be born or grow.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Ether (or space) is better than fire. For in the ether exist both sun and moon, the lightning, stars, and fire (agni). Through the ether we call, through the ether we hear, through the ether we answer [1]. In the ether or space we rejoice (when we are together), and rejoice not (when we are separated). In the ether everything is born, and towards the ether everything tends when it is born [2]. Meditate on ether.

Footnote:

1. Cf. Kh. Up. IV, 5, 2 2. The seed grows upwards towards the ether; not downwards.


Sloka : 7.12.2

स य आकाशं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्त आकाशवतो वै स

लोकान्प्रकाशवतोऽसंबाधानुरुगायवतोऽभिसिध्यति

यावदाकाशस्य गतं तत्रास्य यथाकामचारो भवति

य आकाशं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति भगव आकाशाद्भूय इति

आकाशाद्वाव भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति

॥ ७.१२.२॥

sa ya ākāśaṃ brahmetyupāsta ākāśavato vai sa

lokānprakāśavato'saṃbādhānurugāyavato'bhisidhyati

yāvadākāśasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati

ya ākāśaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagava ākāśādbhūya iti

ākāśādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti

.. 7.12.2..



2. ‘One who worships ākāśa [space] as Brahman attains worlds that are spacious, shining, free from all drawbacks, and extensive. One who worships ākāśa as Brahman can do what he pleases within the range of ākāśa.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than ākāśa?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than ākāśa,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; ākāśam brahma iti upāste, worships space as Brahman; saḥ vai lokān, he attains worlds; ākāśavataḥ prakāśavataḥ, that are spacious and shining; asambādhān, free from all hindrances; urugāyavataḥ, [and] extensive; yāvat ākāśasya gatam, as far as space goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ ākāśam brahma iti upāste, he who worships space as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; ākāśāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than ākāśa; ākāśāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than ākāśa; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section. Commentary:-If you meditate on something vast, you become vast. Space is infinite, so when you meditate on space you gradually envelop the whole universe. You become so vast that you find there are no hurdles in your way. Why do we practise meditation? One reason is to quicken our growth, our inner development. When we meditate on the deity we like most, we are, in fact, meditating on the qualities that deity embodies. Then gradually we find we are acquiring those same qualities. There is a Sanskrit saying:- ‘As you think, so you are.’ If you think you are good, then you will be good. But if you start thinking you are bad, you will soon discover that you are deteriorating. This is why we must meditate on that which is good and noble. Again Nārada is not content. He asks if there is something higher. The student has to ask; otherwise, if he is not interested, there is no point in teaching him. The student must have the urge within himself

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on ether as Brahman, obtains the worlds of ether and of light, which are free from pressure and pain, wide and spacious [1]; he is, as it were, lord and master as far as ether reaches--he who meditates on ether as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than ether?' Yes, there Is something better than ether.' 'Sir, tell it me.'

Footnote:

1. Cf. Kâth. Up. II, 11.


Sloka : 7.13.1

॥ इति द्वादशः खण्डः ॥

स्मरो वावाकाशाद्भूयस्तस्माद्यद्यपि बहव आसीरन्न

स्मरन्तो नैव ते कंचन श‍ृणुयुर्न मन्वीरन्न विजानीरन्यदा

वाव ते स्मरेयुरथ श‍ृणुयुरथ मन्वीरन्नथ विजानीरन्स्मरेण

वै पुत्रान्विजानाति स्मरेण पशून्स्मरमुपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.१३.१॥

.. iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

smaro vāvākāśādbhūyastasmādyadyapi bahava āsīranna

smaranto naiva te kaṃcana śṛṇuyurna manvīranna vijānīranyadā

vāva te smareyuratha śṛṇuyuratha manvīrannatha vijānīransmareṇa

vai putrānvijānāti smareṇa paśūnsmaramupāssveti .. 7.13.1..



1. Memory is certainly superior to ākāśa [space]. This is why, if many people get together but their memory fails, then they cannot hear or think or know anything. But if they remember, they can then hear, think, and know. Through memory one knows one’s children and animals. Therefore, worship memory.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Smaraḥ vāva ākāśāt bhūyaḥ, memory is certainly superior to ākāśa [space]; tasmāt, this is why; yadi api, even if; bahavaḥ, many people; āsīran, get together; na smarantaḥ, [but] they cannot remember; te, they; na eva kañcana śṛṇuyuḥ, cannot hear anything; na manvīran, nor think; na vijānīran, nor know; yadā vāva te smareyuḥ, but if they can remember; atha śṛṇuyuḥ, then they can hear; atha manvīran, then they can think; atha vijānīran, then they can know; smareṇa vai, by virtue of memory; putrān vijānāti, one knows one’s children; smareṇa paśūn, by virtue of memory [one knows one’s] animals; smaram upāssva iti, worship memory. Commentary:-Memory is the medium through which we learn. Without memory we cannot progress, because we cannot retain anything. Because we have the faculty of memory, we hear something, we understand it, and then we are prompted to action. Suppose someone tells me:- ‘Beware! There is a snake over there. Don’t go that way.’ If I cannot remember what that person has said, then I will go in that direction and be bitten by the snake. When the guru gives us spiritual instructions, we have to hear it correctly, think over it and ponder it, and then meditate on it again and again. We must think deeply on it. Without memory we cannot do that.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Memory [1] (smara) is better than ether. Therefore where many are assembled together, if they have no memory, they would hear no one, they would not perceive, they would not understand. Through memory we know our sons, through memory our cattle. Meditate on memory.

Footnote:

1. The apparent distance between ether and memory is bridged over by the commentator pointing out that without memory everything would be as if it were not, so far as we are concerned.


Sloka : 7.13.2

स यः स्मरं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते यावत्स्मरस्य गतं तत्रास्य

यथाकामचारो भवति यः स्मरं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति भगवः

स्मराद्भूय इति स्मराद्वाव भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे

भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.१३.२॥

sa yaḥ smaraṃ brahmetyupāste yāvatsmarasya gataṃ tatrāsya

yathākāmacāro bhavati yaḥ smaraṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavaḥ

smarādbhūya iti smarādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme

bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.13.2..



2. ‘One who worships memory as Brahman has free movement as far as memory goes.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than memory?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than memory,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; smaram brahma iti upāste, worships memory as Brahman; yāvat smarasya gatam, as far as memory goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ smaram brahma iti upāste, he who worships memory as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; smarāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than memory; smarāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than memory; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section. Commentary:-Sanatkumāra says to meditate on memory as Brahman. Even the lowest truth is Brahman. But we must not stop there. That is not the goal. True knowledge is not a collection of information stored in our memory. True knowledge is attained through assimilation. We have to grasp it, absorb it. Knowledge has to become part and parcel of our being; otherwise we are like beasts of burden. It is no use knowing the truth unless we act in the light of that truth. Until scholarship has made some impact on our character, it is nothing. Only when it makes us a new individual do we become truly enlightened. Sri Ramakrishna used to give the example of a vulture. A vulture flies very high in the sky, but it is always looking down at the ground—looking for the dead body of some animal so that it can come down and eat the flesh. Similarly, merely going up won’t do. That is to say, merely stuffing your mind with information is not enough. You have to use that information to overcome the obstacles in your life. That’s what is meant.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on memory as Brahman, is, as it were, lord and master as far as memory reaches;--he who meditates on memory as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than memory?' 'Yes, there is something better than memory.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.14.1

॥ इति त्रयोदशः खण्डः ॥

आशा वाव स्मराद्भूयस्याशेद्धो वै स्मरो मन्त्रानधीते

कर्माणि कुरुते पुत्राꣳश्च पशूꣳश्चेच्छत इमं च

लोकममुं चेच्छत आशामुपास्स्वेति ॥ ७.१४.१॥

.. iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

āśā vāva smarādbhūyasyāśeddho vai smaro mantrānadhīte

karmāṇi kurute putrāgͫśca paśūgͫścecchata imaṃ ca

lokamamuṃ cecchata āśāmupāssveti .. 7.14.1..



1. Hope is certainly better than memory. Hope inspires a person’s memory, and one uses one’s memory to learn the mantras and perform rituals. One then wishes for children and animals, and one also wishes to attain this world and the next. Therefore, worship hope.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Āśā vāva smarāt bhūyasī, hope is certainly superior to memory; āśā-iddhaḥ vai, fired by hope; smaraḥ, memory; mantrān, the mantras; adhīte, learns; karmāṇi kurute, performs the rituals; putrān ca, children; paśūn ca, and animals; icchate, he wishes for; imam ca lokam amum ca, this world and the other [world]; icchate, he wishes for; āśām upāssva iti, worship hope. Commentary:-Suppose there is something you want. You have not got it, but you hope to get it. This kind of desire can be helpful. Maybe you have money, children, and a good reputation, but you are not happy. You discover that any amount of material prosperity you attain does not give you peace of mind. You see many people who are very prosperous but unhappy. You then start yearning for spiritual enlightenment. This is called divine discontent. This discontent pushes you on and on to make progress. Without burning desire, you cannot attain anything in spiritual life.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Hope (âsâ) is better than memory. Fired by hope does memory read the sacred hymns, perform sacrifices, desire sons and cattle, desire this world and the other. Meditate on hope.


Sloka : 7.14.2

स य आशां ब्रह्मेत्युपास्त आशयास्य सर्वे कामाः

समृध्यन्त्यमोघा हास्याशिषो भवन्ति यावदाशाया

गतं तत्रास्य यथाकामचारो भवति य आशां

ब्रह्मेत्युपास्तेऽस्ति भगव आशाया भूय इत्याशाया वाव

भूयोऽस्तीति तन्मे भगवान्ब्रवीत्विति ॥ ७.१४.२॥

sa ya āśāṃ brahmetyupāsta āśayāsya sarve kāmāḥ

samṛdhyantyamoghā hāsyāśiṣo bhavanti yāvadāśāyā

gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati ya āśāṃ

brahmetyupāste'sti bhagava āśāyā bhūya ityāśāyā vāva

bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti .. 7.14.2..



2. ‘One who worships hope as Brahman has all his desires fulfilled. He gets whatever he wants without fail. One who worships hope as Brahman has free movement as far as hope goes.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, is there anything higher than hope?’ ‘Of course there is something higher than hope,’ replied Sanatkumāra. Nārada then said, ‘Sir, please explain that to me’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yaḥ, he who; āśām brahma iti upāste, worships hope as Brahman; āśayā, by that hope; asya sarve kāmāḥ, all his desires; samṛdhyanti, are fulfilled; amoghāḥ, without fail; ha asya āśiṣaḥ bhavanti, his desires are fulfilled; yāvat āśāyāḥ gatam, as far as hope goes; tatra, that far; asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go; yaḥ āśām brahma iti upāste, he who worships hope as Brahman; bhagavaḥ, sir; āśāyāḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than hope; āśāyāḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than hope; bhagavān, sir; tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section. Commentary:-The message given here is that one must not lose heart. No doubt there are many difficulties in the way, but they can be overcome, and they are overcome

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'He who meditates on hope as Brahman, all his desires are fulfilled by hope, his prayers are not in vain; he is, as it were, lord and master as far as hope reaches--he who meditates on hope as Brahman.' 'Sir, is there something better than hope?' 'Yes, there is something better than hope.' 'Sir, tell it me.'


Sloka : 7.15.1

॥ इति चतुर्दशः खण्डः ॥

प्राणो वा आशाया भूयान्यथा वा अरा नाभौ समर्पिता

एवमस्मिन्प्राणे सर्वꣳसमर्पितं प्राणः प्राणेन याति

प्राणः प्राणं ददाति प्राणाय ददाति प्राणो ह पिता प्राणो

माता प्राणो भ्राता प्राणः स्वसा प्राण आचार्यः

प्राणो ब्राह्मणः ॥ ७.१५.१॥

.. iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

prāṇo vā āśāyā bhūyānyathā vā arā nābhau samarpitā

evamasminprāṇe sarvagͫsamarpitaṃ prāṇaḥ prāṇena yāti

prāṇaḥ prāṇaṃ dadāti prāṇāya dadāti prāṇo ha pitā prāṇo

mātā prāṇo bhrātā prāṇaḥ svasā prāṇa ācāryaḥ

prāṇo brāhmaṇaḥ .. 7.15.1..



1. Prāṇa [the vital force] is certainly superior to hope. Just as spokes on a wheel are attached to the hub, similarly everything rests on prāṇa. Prāṇa works through its own power [i.e., prāṇa is the means as well as the end]. Prāṇa gives prāṇa to prāṇa, and prāṇa directs prāṇa to prāṇa. Prāṇa is the father, prāṇa is the mother, prāṇa is the brother, prāṇa is the sister, prāṇa is the teacher, and prāṇa is the brāhmin.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prāṇaḥ vāva āśāyāḥ bhūyān, prāṇa [the vital force] is certainly superior to hope; yathā vai arāḥ, just as the spokes; nābhau samarpitāḥ, are attached to the hub; evam, in the same way; asmin prāṇe, on this prāṇa; sarvarn, all this; samarpitam, are resting; prāṇaḥ prāṇena yāti, prāṇa works by its own power; prāṇaḥ prāṇam dadāti, prāṇa gives prāṇa; prāṇāya, to prāṇa; dadāti, [and again] gives; prāṇaḥ ha pitā, prāṇa is the father; prāṇaḥ mātā, prāṇa is the mother; Commentary:-Prāṇa, the vital force, is superior to hope. Suppose you are dead. Can hope do anything for you then? You must have life. If you are not living then there can be no hope, no memory—nothing. The Upaniṣad says that prāṇa is the resting place of everything. It is like a wheel with its spokes. All the spokes are fixed on the hub of the wheel. Similarly, my mind and my organs are all fixed on prāṇa. My eyes are very powerful, but if I am dead they may still be intact but they cannot see. Prāṇa functions on the individual level in you, in me, in plants and insects and animals. But we represent only a small portion of this life force, because prāṇa also functions on the cosmic level. On the cosmic level prāṇa is Hiraṇyagarbha, the first manifestation of Brahman. The whole cosmos is governed and activated by prāṇa. Brahman is beyond thought and If I stop breathing my body and organs can no longer function, and eventually they disintegrate. Similarly, if the cosmic life force withdraws itself from this universe, everything comes to a halt. The sun does not shine; the air does not blow. The whole life process comes to a standstill. We see so many beings around us. Someone is your mother, someone your father, someone your brother, someone your sister, but they are all prāṇa. Prāṇa is in the form of your mother. Prāṇa is in the form of your father, or your sister, or your teacher, and so on. Our family, society, the entire humanity, all living beings—all are prāṇa in different forms. Prāṇa takes various forms and then assumes different relationships.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Spirit [1] (prâna) is better than hope. As the spokes of a wheel hold to the nave [2], so does all this (beginning with names and ending in hope) hold to spirit. That spirit moves by the spirit, it gives spirit to the spirit. Father means spirit, mother is spirit, brother is spirit, sister is spirit, tutor is spirit, Brâhmana is spirit.

Footnote:

1. Prâna is used here in a technical sense. It does not mean simply breath, but the spirit, the conscious self (pragñâtman) which, as we saw, enters the body in order to reveal the whole variety of forms and names. It is in one sense the mukhya prâna. 2. The commentary carries the simile Still further. The felloe he says, holds to the spokes, the spokes to the nave. So do the bhûtamâtrâs hold to the pragñâmâtrâs, and these to the prâna.


Sloka : 7.15.2

स यदि पितरं वा मातरं वा भ्रातरं वा स्वसारं वाचार्यं

वा ब्राह्मणं वा किंचिद्भृशमिव प्रत्याह

धिक्त्वास्त्वित्येवैनमाहुः पितृहा वै त्वमसि मातृहा वै

त्वमसि भ्रातृहा वै त्वमसि स्वसृहा वै त्वमस्याचार्यहा

वै त्वमसि ब्राह्मणहा वै त्वमसीति ॥ ७.१५.२॥

sa yadi pitaraṃ vā mātaraṃ vā bhrātaraṃ vā svasāraṃ vācāryaṃ

vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā kiṃcidbhṛśamiva pratyāha

dhiktvāstvityevainamāhuḥ pitṛhā vai tvamasi mātṛhā vai

tvamasi bhrātṛhā vai tvamasi svasṛhā vai tvamasyācāryahā

vai tvamasi brāhmaṇahā vai tvamasīti .. 7.15.2..



2. If a person speaks rudely to his father, mother, brother, sister, teacher, or to a brāhmin, people say to him:- ‘Shame on you! You have murdered your father. You have murdered your mother. You have murdered your brother. You have murdered your sister. You have murdered your teacher. You have murdered a brāhmin’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ yadi, if anyone; pitaram vā mataram vā, his father or mother; bhrātaram vā svasāram vā, or brother or sister; ācāryam vā brāhmaṇam vā, or teacher or a brāhmin; kiñcit, anything; bhṛśam iva, discourteously; pratyāha, answers; dhik tvā astu iti, shame on you; enam eva āhuḥ, [people] say to him; pitṛhā vai tvam asi, you have killed your father; mātṛhā vai tvam asi, you have killed your mother; bhrātṛhā vai tvam asi, you have killed your brother; svasṛhā vai tvam asi, you have killed your sister; ācāryahā vai tvam asi, you have killed your teacher; brāhmaṇahā vai tvam asi iti, you have killed a brāhmin. Commentary:-According to Śaṅkara, using the informal tvam (you) instead of the more formal bhavān would be such an offense. Here the Upaniṣad means that you should treat everyone with respect. Being disrespectful to people is as good as murdering them.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'For if one says anything unbecoming to a father, mother, brother, sister, tutor or Brâhmana, then people say, Shame on thee! thou hast offended thy father, mother, brother, sister, tutor, or a Brâhmana.


Sloka : 7.15.3

अथ यद्यप्येनानुत्क्रान्तप्राणाञ्छूलेन समासं

व्यतिषंदहेन्नैवैनं ब्रूयुः पितृहासीति न मातृहासीति

न भ्रातृहासीति न स्वसृहासीति नाचार्यहासीति

न ब्राह्मणहासीति ॥ ७.१५.३॥

atha yadyapyenānutkrāntaprāṇāñchūlena samāsaṃ

vyatiṣaṃdahennaivainaṃ brūyuḥ pitṛhāsīti na mātṛhāsīti

na bhrātṛhāsīti na svasṛhāsīti nācāryahāsīti

na brāhmaṇahāsīti .. 7.15.3..



3. But when they have died, if a person piles their bodies on a funeral pyre and bums them, piercing them with a spear [so that the body burns more quickly], no one will say to him, ‘You have killed your father,’ or ‘You have killed your mother,’ or ‘You have killed your brother,’ or ‘You have killed your sister,’ or ‘You have killed your teacher,’ or ‘You have killed a brāhmin’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, but; yadi api enān, if even all these; utkrāntaprāṇān, when life has departed; śūlena, with the help of a spear; vyatiṣan, tears the bodies to pieces; samāsam, puts them in a pile; dahet, [and] bums them; na eva enam brūyaḥ, people will not say to him; pitṛhā asi iti, you killed your father; na mātṛhā asi iti, nor you killed your mother; na bhrātṛhā asi iti, nor you killed your brother; na svasṛhā asi iti, nor you killed your sister; na ācāryahā asi iti, nor you killed your teacher; na brāhmaṇahā asi iti, nor you killed a brāhmin. Commentary:-Suppose you say something very rude to your father. People will say:- ‘Shame on you! You have killed your father.’ But suppose your father has died. You will then have to burn or bury his body. Yet no one will scold you or blame you for doing something wrong, because prāṇa has left the body. This is the difference between prāṇa existing in the body and prāṇa not existing in the body.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'But, if after the spirit has departed from them, one shoves them together with a poker, and burns them to pieces, no one would say, Thou offendest thy father, mother, brother, sister, tutor or a Brâhmana.


Sloka : 7.15.4

प्राणो ह्येवैतानि सर्वाणि भवति स वा एष एवं पश्यन्नेवं

मन्वान एवं विजानन्नतिवादी भवति तं

चेद्ब्रूयुरतिवाद्यसीत्यतिवाद्यस्मीति ब्रूयान्नापह्नुवीत

॥ ७.१५.४॥

prāṇo hyevaitāni sarvāṇi bhavati sa vā eṣa evaṃ paśyannevaṃ

manvāna evaṃ vijānannativādī bhavati taṃ

cedbrūyurativādyasītyativādyasmīti brūyānnāpahnuvīta

.. 7.15.4..



4. It is prāṇa that is all this. He who sees thus, thinks thus, and knows thus becomes a superior speaker. If anyone says to him, ‘You are a superior speaker,’ he may say, ‘Yes, I am a superior speaker.’ He need not deny it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Prāṇaḥ hi eva etāni sarvāṇi bhavati, prāṇa is all this; saḥ vai eṣaḥ, he who; evam, thus; paśyan, seeing; evam manvānaḥ, thus considering; evam vijānan, thus knowing; ativādī bhavati, becomes a superior speaker; cet, if; tarn brūyuḥ, anybody says to him; ativādī asi iti, you are a superior speaker; ativādī asmi iti brūyān, he will say, ‘Yes I am a superior speaker’; na apahnuvīta, he will not deny it. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section. Commentary:-Who is an ativādī? Here ativādī means ‘a superior speaker.’ It is one who has realized the Truth and has thereby acquired the ability to say nothing but the truth. When a holy person speaks, his words make sense. There is a ring of truth about them. They are authoritative. Such a person is an ativādī We all speak. We are speaking all the time. But for most of us our words are like the cawing of crows. Our words are just sounds. They make no sense. But when the speaker is a holy person, one who has realized God, who has seen the Truth face to face, everything he says is true. If you have read Josephine McLeod’s reminiscences of Swami Vivekananda, you will remember how she described the first time she heard Swamiji speak:- ‘He stood up and said something, and I thought, “Yes, this is true.” Again he said something, and I thought, “Yes, this is true too.” Yet again he said something and I said to myself, “This is also true.” Whatever he said was true.’ Such a person is an ativādī. In one of the Upaniṣads we find a ṛṣi calling to humanity:- ‘Hear me, O children of immortal bliss. I have known the Truth. If you know it you overcome

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Spirit then is all this. He who sees this, perceives this, and understands this, becomes an ativâdin [1]. If people say to such a man, Thou art an ativâdin, he may say, I am an ativâdin; he need not deny it.'

Footnote:

1. One who declares something that goes beyond all the declarations made before, beginning with the declaration that names are Brahman, and ending with the declaration that hope is Brahman;--one who knows that prâna, spirit, the conscious self, is Brahman. This declaration represents the highest point reached by ordinary people, but Nârada wishes to go beyond. In the Mundaka, III, 1, 4, an ativâdin is contrasted with one who really knows the highest truth.


Sloka : 7.16.1

॥ इति पञ्चदशः खण्डः ॥

एष तु वा अतिवदति यः सत्येनातिवदति सोऽहं भगवः

सत्येनातिवदानीति सत्यं त्वेव विजिज्ञासितव्यमिति सत्यं

भगवो विजिज्ञास इति ॥ ७.१६.१॥

.. iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

eṣa tu vā ativadati yaḥ satyenātivadati so'haṃ bhagavaḥ

satyenātivadānīti satyaṃ tveva vijijñāsitavyamiti satyaṃ

bhagavo vijijñāsa iti .. 7.16.1..



1. ‘But a person must first know the Truth. Then he is truly an ativādī.’ Nārada said, ‘Sir, I want to be an ativādī by knowing the Truth.’ Sanatkumāra replied, ‘But one must earnestly desire to know the Truth.’ ‘Sir, I earnestly desire to know the Truth,’ Nārada said.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Eṣaḥ, this [person]; tu, but; vai ativadati, is truly an ativādī; yaḥ, who; satyena ativadati, who speaks of Truth after having known the Truth; bhagavaḥ, sir; saḥ aham, as I am that [i.e., one who is unhappy]; satyena ativadāni iti, I want to be an ativādī by knowing the Truth; satyam tu eva vijijñāsitavyam iti, but Truth must be thoroughly enquired into; bhagavaḥ, sir; satyam vijijñāse iti, I wish to thoroughly enquire into Truth. Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section. Commentary:-Hearing Sanatkumāra’s words about prāṇa, Nārada concluded that prāṇa is everything, that it is the ultimate. Thinking he was now an ativādī, he kept quiet. He did not make any further enquiries. Sanatkumāra understood, however, and told him:- ‘No, you do not know it yet. This is not the ultimate. This is not Brahman. Prāṇa is a manifestation of Brahman but not Brahman itself. In order to know Brahman one must know the Truth.’ That is to say, one must know the meaning behind the words. You may speak of God, but have you seen God yourself? If you have not seen him, if you have not realized him, what right have you got to talk about him? You are like a blind man trying to lead another blind man. Have you yourself realized the Truth?—that is the criterion. You must have direct experience of the Truth—not just some information you have picked up from books or from other people. It must be a-parokṣa—that is, not through another source. It must be direct, personal, immediate. Nārada immediately understood his mistake and with great humility asked to learn the Truth. This spirit of humility is very important. As Sri Ramakrishna says, water cannot accumulate in a high place. It always runs down to a low place. Similarly, good qualities cannot remain in a proud person. They will soon run off. Only in a humble person can they be retained. If you are humble the teacher will be glad to teach you. So also, a good teacher will never say:- ‘I am supreme. I know everything.’

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'But in reality he is an ativâdin who declares the Highest Being to be the True (Satya, τὸ ὄντως ὄν).' 'Sir, may I become an ativâdin by the True?' 'But we must desire to know the True.' 'Sir, I desire to know the True.'


Sloka : 7.17.1

॥ इति षोडशः खण्डः ॥

यदा वै विजानात्यथ सत्यं वदति नाविजानन्सत्यं वदति

विजानन्नेव सत्यं वदति विज्ञानं त्वेव विजिज्ञासितव्यमिति

विज्ञानं भगवो विजिज्ञास इति ॥ ७.१७.१॥

.. iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yadā vai vijānātyatha satyaṃ vadati nāvijānansatyaṃ vadati

vijānanneva satyaṃ vadati vijñānaṃ tveva vijijñāsitavyamiti

vijñānaṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti .. 7.17.1..



1. Sanatkumāra said:- ‘When a person knows for certain, then he can truly speak of the Truth. But without knowing well, he cannot speak of the Truth. One who knows for certain speaks of Truth. But one must seek knowledge in depth.’ Nārada said, ‘Sir, I seek knowledge in depth’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yadā, when; vai vijānāti, a person knows well; atha, then; satyam vadati, he speaks what he knows to be the Truth; avijānan, without knowing it well; satyam na vadati, he does not speak of Truth; vijānan eva, knowing it well; satyam vadati, one can speak of Truth; vijñānam tu eva vijijñāsitavyam iti, but one must seek knowledge in depth; vijñānam bhagavaḥ vijijñāse iti, sir, I seek knowledge in depth. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section. Commentary:-Sanatkumāra says that when you know the Truth, whatever you say is nothing but the truth. You cannot say anything that is not the truth. Truth is Truth, and there is no compromise in it. Once you know this Truth, everything else is irrelevant. But what if that Truth is associated with names and forms? Is that Truth? The scriptures admit it as a relative truth. It is not, however, the Absolute Truth. The Absolute Truth is called ‘that’ because it is beyond the reach of the sense organs. As regards the relative truth, it is called ‘this’, because it is within the reach of the sense organs. The Absolute Truth is difficult to understand. For instance, the elements in their pure form are beyond the reach of the sense organs, so they are sometimes referred to as ‘that’, but they are not the Absolute Truth. Brahman is the Absolute Truth. In this connection it is to be remembered that fire was said to be red, water white, and earth black. Though it was said that the colours alone were real, this is not ‘real’ from the standpoint of Absolute Truth. These colours are also attributes. This is why the Absolute Truth is difficult to understand. Knowing the Absolute Truth is vijñāna.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'When one understands the True, then one declares the True. One who does not understand it, does not declare the True [1]. Only he who understands it, declares the True. This understanding, however, we must desire to understand.' 'Sir, I desire to understand it.'

Footnote:

1.


Sloka : 7.18.1

॥ इति सप्तदशः खण्डः ॥

यदा वै मनुतेऽथ विजानाति नामत्वा विजानाति मत्वैव

विजानाति मतिस्त्वेव विजिज्ञासितव्येति मतिं भगवो

विजिज्ञास इति ॥ ७.१८.१॥

.. iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yadā vai manute'tha vijānāti nāmatvā vijānāti matvaiva

vijānāti matistveva vijijñāsitavyeti matiṃ bhagavo

vijijñāsa iti .. 7.18.1..



1. Sanatkumāra said:- ‘When a person learns to think well, then he can know deeply. Without thinking well, one cannot know deeply. One knows for certain when one thinks deeply. But one must want to know how to think well.’ Nārada replied, ‘Sir, I want to know how to think well’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yadā vai manute, when one learns to think well; atha vijānāti, then one can know deeply; amatvā, without applying the mind; na vijānāti, one cannot know deeply; matvā eva vijānāti, a person knows deeply when he thinks deeply; matiḥ tu eva vijijñāsitavya iti, but one must want to know how to think well; bhagavaḥ, sir; matim vijijñāse iti, I want to know what this thinking is. Iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighteenth section. Commentary:-How do we know something? We know it by applying our mind—that is, by concentrating our mind on it. Swami Turiyananda used to say that if you continue reading the Gītā with a concentrated mind, then whenever you read it new meanings will unfold, meanings which you never suspected. Sanatkumāra says that without applying your mind seriously, you will not understand what you are studying. At Belur Math, Swamiji used to have the monks debate on different issues. One person would say something, and another would contradict him. When two people debate about something, they both get excited and the heat rises. As one of the monks used to say, ‘When there is some heat there will also be some light.’ Debating is like churning milk. As you chum the milk the cream gradually begins to appear. So also, when there is a debate, truth gradually comes to the surface. Suppose you have a thorn stuck in your foot. What do you do? As Sri Ramakrishna used to say, you take another thorn and use it to remove the first thorn. Then you throw away both. Similarly, you have to use your mind to go beyond the mind. Vedānta says that Truth is within you. But you must first hear about it from a teacher. Then you must reflect on it. Think over it again and again:- ‘What does this mean? How can I be one with Brahman?’ You go on questioning, searching for the real meaning of the, words. After that you must deeply meditate on it. Then only the real meaning dawns on you. It comes as if in a flash. What else is this mind for? If we don’t think, we are as good as dead. Human beings are superior Śaṅkara gives a wonderful definition of reflection. He says it means having great love for the subject being considered.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'When one perceives, then one understands. One who does not perceive, does not understand. Only he who perceives, understands. This perception, however, we must desire to understand.' 'Sir, I desire to understand it.'


Sloka : 7.19.1

॥ इति अष्टादशः खण्डः ॥

यदा वै श्रद्दधात्यथ मनुते नाश्रद्दधन्मनुते

श्रद्दधदेव मनुते श्रद्धा त्वेव विजिज्ञासितव्येति

श्रद्धां भगवो विजिज्ञास इति ॥ ७.१९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yadā vai śraddadhātyatha manute nāśraddadhanmanute

śraddadhadeva manute śraddhā tveva vijijñāsitavyeti

śraddhāṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti .. 7.19.1..



1. Sanatkumāra said:- ‘When a person has respect [for what he hears], then he gives due thought to it. Without this respect he attaches ho importance to what he hears. One thinks deeply over something that one respects. But one must try to attain this respect.’ Nārada replied, ‘Sir, I want to have this respect’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yadā vai śraddadhāti, when a person has respect [for something or someone—or faith in something or someone]; atha manute, then he thinks deeply [of that thing or person]; aśraddadhat, if there is no respect; na manute, he does not think deeply; śraddadhat eva manute, one thinks deeply when one has respect; śraddhā tu eva vijijñāsitavya iti, but one must try to have this respect; śraddhām bhagavaḥ vijijñāse iti, sir, I want to have this respect. Iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the nineteenth section. Commentary:-Reflecting is good, but one should do it with śraddhā, faith. Śraddhā also means respect. For instance, if my guru tells me something, I know it must be true because I know he will never mislead me. When you go to a guru you should have faith in what he says. Then later you will get the confirmation of what he has taught you from within, and at that point your own mind becomes the guru. But to begin with you must have respect for what the guru says. This does not mean, however, that you cannot ask him questions. You have every right to have things clarified. But if you say, ‘Well, after all, this person knows nothing; he is just trying to fool me,’ and so on, then you will never get anywhere. Rather, one must listen with an open mind, thinking, ‘This person is held in high respect, so I will listen and I will study.’ Ramakrishna, for instance, made many statements which some of his disciples, such as Swami Vivekananda, had difficulty accepting, so they would question him and argue. And Ramakrishna would welcome their questions and arguments. Others would protest and say, ‘When Ramakrishna has said something, why not accept it?’ But Ramakrishna would reply, ‘No, let them question.’ It was because their enquiry was done with śraddhā, respect, and with a keen desire to know. Suppose you don’t have śraddhā. Then you would not care. You would not even give a moment’s thought to finding out the Truth. Only when you have śraddhā can you go on thinking and reflecting on it.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'When one believes, then one perceives. One who does not believe, does not perceive. Only he who believes, perceives. This belief, however, we must desire to understand.' 'Sir, I desire to understand it.'


Sloka : 7.20.1

॥ इति एकोनविंशतितमः खण्डः ॥

यदा वै निस्तिष्ठत्यथ श्रद्दधाति

नानिस्तिष्ठञ्छ्रद्दधाति निस्तिष्ठन्नेव श्रद्दधाति

निष्ठा त्वेव विजिज्ञासितव्येति निष्ठां भगवो

विजिज्ञास इति ॥ ७.२०.१॥

.. iti ekonaviṃśatitamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yadā vai nistiṣṭhatyatha śraddadhāti

nānistiṣṭhañchraddadhāti nistiṣṭhanneva śraddadhāti

niṣṭhā tveva vijijñāsitavyeti niṣṭhāṃ bhagavo

vijijñāsa iti .. 7.20.1..



1. Sanatkumāra:- ‘When a person is steady and devoted to his teacher, then he has respect. Without being steady, one cannot have respect. One has steadiness when one has genuine respect and devotion. But one must seek this steadiness with great earnestness.’ Nārada replied, ‘I seek this steadiness’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yadā vai nistiṣṭhati, when one is steady in one’s service and devotion to one’s teacher; atha śraddadhāti, then one has respect; anistiṣṭhan, where this steadiness and devotion is missing; na śraddadhāti, there is no respect; nistiṣṭhan era śraddadhāti, a person has respect when he has this steadiness; niṣṭhā tu era vijijñāsitavya iti, but one must be determined to have this steadiness Commentary:-It is difficult to translate the word niṣṭhā. The closest word in English is probably ‘steadiness.’ For instance, you say you want to know something, but actually it is only a passing mood on your part. You really don’t mean it. This is the opposite of steadiness. But if you really mean it, if you go on struggling to get that knowledge, no matter how difficult or frustrating it may be to acquire it, then this is niṣṭhā, steadiness. Śaṅkara says that niṣṭhā comes from serving the guru with devotion. When you devotedly serve your teacher, your love for the subject of your enquiry grows stronger and stronger, and your conviction also grows stronger and stronger. You begin to think:- ‘Yes, there is such a thing as Self-realization. How else can I explain my teacher being so good, so kind, so affectionate, so selfless?’ You find that your teacher is unfailing in his loyalty to the ideals which he professes, and slowly you are able to understand the real implication of the words tyāga, renunciation, titikṣā, forbearance, and so forth, because you see him putting them Section Twenty-one

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'When one attends on a tutor (spiritual guide), then one believes. One who does not attend on a tutor, does not believe. Only he who attends, believes. This attention on a tutor, however, we must desire to understand.' 'Sir, I desire to understand it.'


Sloka : 7.21.1

॥ इति विंशतितमः खण्डः ॥

यदा वै करोत्यथ निस्तिष्ठति नाकृत्वा निस्तिष्ठति

कृत्वैव निस्तिष्ठति कृतिस्त्वेव विजिज्ञासितव्येति

कृतिं भगवो विजिज्ञास इति ॥ ७.२१.१॥

.. iti viṃśatitamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yadā vai karotyatha nistiṣṭhati nākṛtvā nistiṣṭhati

kṛtvaiva nistiṣṭhati kṛtistveva vijijñāsitavyeti

kṛtiṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti .. 7.21.1..



1. Sanatkumāra said:- ‘When a person keeps doing his duty, he becomes steady. If one does not do one’s duty, one cannot have steadiness. One attains steadiness by doing one’s duty. But one should try to know what duty means.’ Nārada replied, ‘Sir, I want to know about duty’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yadā vai karoti, when a person does his duty [i.e., when he practises self-restraint and concentration of the mind]; atha nistiṣṭḥati, then he is steady; akṛtvā, without doing one’s duty; na nistiṣṭhati, one cannot be steady; kṛtvā eva nistiṣṭhati, one becomes steady by doing one’s duty; kṛtiḥ tu eva vijijñāsitavya iti, but one should know well the nature of duty; bhagavaḥ kṛtim vijijñāse iti, sir, I want to know the nature of duty. Iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-first section. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'When one performs all sacred duties [1], then one attends really on a tutor. One who does not perform his duties, does not really attend on a tutor. Only he who performs his duties, attends on his tutor. This performance of duties, however, we must desire to understand.' 'Sir, I desire to understand it.'

Footnote:

1. The duties of a student, such as restraint of the senses, concentration of the mind, &c.


Sloka : 7.22.1

॥ इति एकविंशः खण्डः ॥

यदा वै सुखं लभतेऽथ करोति नासुखं लब्ध्वा करोति

सुखमेव लब्ध्वा करोति सुखं त्वेव विजिज्ञासितव्यमिति

सुखं भगवो विजिज्ञास इति ॥ ७.२२.१॥

.. iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yadā vai sukhaṃ labhate'tha karoti nāsukhaṃ labdhvā karoti

sukhameva labdhvā karoti sukhaṃ tveva vijijñāsitavyamiti

sukhaṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti .. 7.22.1..



1. Sanatkumāra said:- ‘A person works when he gets happiness. He does not care to work if he does not get happiness. By getting happiness one does one’s duty. But one must try to understand the true nature of this happiness.’ Nārada replied, ‘Sir, I want to know well the true nature of happiness’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Kṛtiḥ means ‘application,’ or ‘repeated practice.’ How do we get niṣṭhā, or steadiness? Śaṅkara says it comes through repeated practice of self-restraint and self-discipline—that is, through the control of the organs and the mind. Section Twenty-two Yadā vai sukham labhate, when a person gets happiness; atha karoti, he then works; asukham labdhvā, without getting happiness; na karoti, he does not do his duty; sukham eva labdhvā karoti, one works by getting happiness; sukham tu eva vijijñāsitavyam iti, but one should try to understand the nature of this happiness; bhagavaḥ sukham vijijñāse iti, sir, I want to understand the nature of this happiness. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-second section. Commentary:-Section Twenty-three

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'When one obtains bliss (in oneself), then one performs duties. One who does not obtain bliss, does not perform duties. Only he who obtains bliss, performs duties. This bliss, however, we must desire to understand.' 'Sir, I desire to understand it.'


Sloka : 7.23.1

॥ इति द्वाविंशः खण्डः ॥

यो वै भूमा तत्सुखं नाल्पे सुखमस्ति भूमैव सुखं

भूमा त्वेव विजिज्ञासितव्य इति भूमानं भगवो

विजिज्ञास इति ॥ ७.२३.१॥

.. iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yo vai bhūmā tatsukhaṃ nālpe sukhamasti bhūmaiva sukhaṃ

bhūmā tveva vijijñāsitavya iti bhūmānaṃ bhagavo

vijijñāsa iti .. 7.23.1..



1. Sanatkumāra said:- ‘That which is infinite is the source of happiness. There is no happiness in the finite. Happiness is only in the infinite. But one must try to understand what the infinite is.’ Nārada replied, ‘Sir, I want to clearly understand the infinite’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yaḥ vai bhūmā, that which is infinite [lit., big, or the biggest]; tat sukham, that is happiness; na alpe sukham asti, there is no happiness in the finite [small]; bhūmā eva sukham, happiness is only in the infinite; bhūmā tu eva vijijñāsitavyaḥ iti, but one must try to understand the true nature of the infinite; bhūmānam bhagavaḥ vijijñāse iti, sir, I want to understand the true nature of the infinite. Iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-third section. Commentary:-If you attain bhūmā, then you have real happiness. What is bhūmā? It is Brahman. It is the biggest. It is infinite. Something is infinite when it is without any limitations in terms of time and space. Even our own lives are limited. We were born at a certain point in time and we shall live for a certain span of time. It may be for a hundred years or it may be less, but the body will not last forever. Then why should we bother about God or Brahman or something that is said to be infinite? Because we want to be happy. Perhaps you are very fond of sweets and enjoy eating them. But when you have finished eating them your joy is gone. Moreover, if you eat too many then you become sick and are miserable. Only in the infinite is there real joy, real happiness, real peace—peace that is constant, always there, and never disturbed. As Sanatkumāra says, ‘Na alpe sukham asti—there is no happiness in that which is small, limited, or short-lived.’ Śaṅkara says, anything that is finite causes tṛṣṇā, thirst—that is, it increases your desire for more. Whatever you get, you desire still more. Suppose you possess the whole world; even then you would not be happy. Therefore that which is finite is duḥkhabījam—the seed of unhappiness. As long as you are confined to the limited world of sense experience you can never be happy. You have to go beyond sense experience. When you attain the state of bhūmā you feel you have got everything you have ever wanted. As the Gītā says (VI.22):- ‘Attaining that, one does not regard anything to be higher.’ Section Twenty-four

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'The Infinite (bhûman) [1] is bliss. There is no bliss in anything finite. Infinity only is bliss. This Infinity, however, we must desire to understand.' 'Sir, I desire to understand it.'

Footnote:

1.


Sloka : 7.24.1

॥ इति त्रयोविंशः खण्डः ॥

यत्र नान्यत्पश्यति नान्यच्छृणोति नान्यद्विजानाति स

भूमाथ यत्रान्यत्पश्यत्यन्यच्छृणोत्यन्यद्विजानाति

तदल्पं यो वै भूमा तदमृतमथ यदल्पं तन्मर्त्य्ꣳ स

भगवः कस्मिन्प्रतिष्ठित इति स्वे महिम्नि यदि वा

न महिम्नीति ॥ ७.२४.१॥

.. iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

yatra nānyatpaśyati nānyacchṛṇoti nānyadvijānāti sa

bhūmātha yatrānyatpaśyatyanyacchṛṇotyanyadvijānāti

tadalpaṃ yo vai bhūmā tadamṛtamatha yadalpaṃ tanmartygͫ sa

bhagavaḥ kasminpratiṣṭhita iti sve mahimni yadi vā

na mahimnīti .. 7.24.1..



1. Sanatkumāra said:- ‘Bhūmā [the infinite] is that in which one sees nothing else, hears nothing else, and knows [i.e., finds] nothing else. But alpa [the finite] is that in which one sees something else, hears something else, and knows something else. That which is infinite is immortal, and that which is finite is mortal.’ Nārada asked, ‘Sir, what does bhūmā rest on?’ Sanatkumāra replied, ‘It rests on its own power—or not even on that power [i.e., it depends on nothing else]’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yatra, where; na anyat paśyati, one sees nothing else; na anyat śṛṇoti, hears nothing else; na anyat vijānāti, knows nothing about other things; saḥ bhūmā, that is bhūmā [the infinite]; atha, but; yatra, where; anyat paśyati, one sees something else; anyat śṛṇoti, hears something else; anyat vijānāti, knows of something else; tat alpam, that is small [finite]; yaḥ vai bhūmā, that which is infinite; tat amṛtam, that is immortal; atha, but; yat alpam, that which is finite; tat martyam, that is mortal; bhagavaḥ, sir; kasmin saḥ pratiṣṭhitaḥ iti, on what does that [bhūmā] rest; sve mahimni, on its own power; yadi vā na mahimni iti, or not even on that power. Commentary:-At the level of bhūmā, the infinite, there is only bhūmā—nothing but bhūmā. And when you attain that level, you see nothing but bhūmā. If you see anything else, then you know at once it is alpa, finite. Suppose you are alone in a room with a hundred mirrors. What will you see? Only yourself—the same self multiplied a hundred times. But if you attain the state of bhūmā, or Brahman, this is just the experience you will have. You will see yourself everywhere—the same Self in all beings. We talk of love and compassion, but how can there be love unless there is a feeling of oneness? When you have this feeling of oneness, then if someone is in pain, you are also in pain. True love is possible only when we realize that ‘you’ and ‘I are one and the same. This is the supreme experience. Once at Dakshineswar two boatmen were having a quarrel and one of them started beating the other. Ramakrishna saw it from a distance and felt as if he were being beaten. Even the marks of the beating were seen on his body. Another day he saw someone walking on some grass, and he felt that the person was stepping on him. When Ramakrishna had throat cancer he could hardly eat a thing. One day some of his disciples went to him and begged him to ask Mother Kali to cure him. Ramakrishna replied that he could not ask such a thing from her, that he depended totally on her will. But the disciples would not let him alone. They pleaded again and again:- ‘Do it for our sake.’ They could not bear to see him suffer. Finally Ramakrishna agreed to say something to the Mother. When the disciples came back to him later to ask if he had talked to the Mother, Ramakrishna said, ‘I told Mother that I could not eat because of the pain in my throat, and I asked her to allow me to eat something.’ ‘What did she say?’ they asked. Ramakrishna replied:- ‘She showed me all of you, and then she said, “But you are eating through so many mouths.” I was ashamed and could not utter another word.’ There is a story about Ganesh and his mother Parvati. Once when Ganesh was playing with a cat, he became very rough and beat it. Later, when he went to his mother, he noticed wounds all over her body. Ganesh was alarmed and asked, ‘Who has beaten you, Mother?’ Parvati replied:- ‘Son, you have done this. You beat the cat, but I am also in the cat. If you hurt the cat you hurt me too.’ The Vedāntic idea is that the same Self is everywhere. It is the same consciousness. In some cases that consciousness is more manifest, and in other cases it is less, but it is the same Self permeating everything. From a tiny atom to the whole cosmos, it is all one. The difference is only in the degree of manifestation. Where there is duality there is conflict, so we must beware of the finite. We must beware of limiting ourselves to our own body. That is the small ‘I’. The body will die, and you think you will die. But if you are one with bhūmā, you are immortal. Nārada is a very intelligent person. He asks:- ‘There is this bhūmā. But who or what supports it?’ Sanatkumāra replies:- ‘Bhūmā is self-sufficient. It supports itself. In fact, there is nothing besides bhūmā to speak of supporting or not supporting. There is just one. If there are two things, then only does the question of supporting arise.’

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Where one sees nothing else, hears nothing else, understands nothing else, that is the Infinite. Where one sees something else, hears something else, understands something else, that is the finite. The Infinite is immortal, the finite is mortal.' 'Sir, in what does the Infinite rest?' 'In its own greatness--or not even in greatness [1].'

Footnote:

1.


Sloka : 7.24.2

गोअश्वमिह महिमेत्याचक्षते हस्तिहिरण्यं दासभार्यं

क्षेत्राण्यायतनानीति नाहमेवं ब्रवीमि ब्रवीमीति

होवाचान्योह्यन्यस्मिन्प्रतिष्ठित इति ॥ ७.२४.२॥

goaśvamiha mahimetyācakṣate hastihiraṇyaṃ dāsabhāryaṃ

kṣetrāṇyāyatanānīti nāhamevaṃ bravīmi bravīmīti

hovācānyohyanyasminpratiṣṭhita iti .. 7.24.2..



2. In this world it is said that cattle, horses, elephants, gold, servants, wives, farmlands, and houses are a person’s glory. I do not mean this type of glory, for these things are not independent of each other. This is what I am talking about—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Go-aśvam, cows and horses; iha, in this world; mahimā iti ācakṣate, are called the glory; hasti-hiraṇyam, elephants and gold; dāsa-bhāryam, servants and wives; kṣetrāṇi āyatanāni iti, farmlands and houses; aham evam na bravīmi, I am not speaking of this kind [of glory]; anyaḥ hi anyasmin pratiṣṭhitaḥ iti, something depending on something else; bravīmi iti ha uvāca, this is what I am saying. Iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-fourth section. Commentary:-In those days in India if you had cattle and other animals, you were considered very rich because they supported you. They were a source of income. So also if you had gold or fields or other property. In this type of situation, there are two separate things—you, the owner, and the things you own. One supports the other. But if there is only one, then the question of supporting does not arise. Who supports whom? So Sanatkumāra tells Nārada, bhūmā is everything. It is one without a second, and it is self-sufficient. Section Twenty-five

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'In the world they call cows and horses, elephants and gold, slaves, wives, fields and houses greatness. I do not mean this,' thus he spoke; 'for in that case one being (the possessor) rests in something else, (but the Infinite cannot rest in something different from itself)


Sloka : 7.25.1

॥ इति चतुर्विंशः खण्डः ॥

स एवाधस्तात्स उपरिष्टात्स पश्चात्स पुरस्तात्स

दक्षिणतः स उत्तरतः स एवेदꣳ सर्वमित्यथातोऽहंकारादेश

एवाहमेवाधस्तादहमुपरिष्टादहं पश्चादहं पुरस्तादहं

दक्षिणतोऽहमुत्तरतोऽहमेवेदꣳ सर्वमिति ॥ ७.२५.१॥

.. iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

sa evādhastātsa upariṣṭātsa paścātsa purastātsa

dakṣiṇataḥ sa uttarataḥ sa evedagͫ sarvamityathāto'haṃkārādeśa

evāhamevādhastādahamupariṣṭādahaṃ paścādahaṃ purastādahaṃ

dakṣiṇato'hamuttarato'hamevedagͫ sarvamiti .. 7.25.1..



1. That bhūmā is below; it is above; it is behind; it is in front; it is to the right; it is to the left. All this is bhūmā. Now, as regards one’s own identity:- I am below; I am above; I am behind; I am in front; I am to the right; I am to the left. I am all this.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Saḥ, that [bhūmā]; eva adhastāt, is down below; saḥ upariṣṭāt, that is up above; saḥ paścāt, that is behind; saḥ purastāt, that is in front; saḥ dakṣiṇataḥ, that is to the right; saḥ uttarataḥ, that is to the left; saḥ eva idam sarvam iti, it is truly all this; atha ataḥ, next; ahaṅkāra ādeśaḥ eva, the instruction regarding one’s own identity; aham eva adhastāt, I am down below; aham upariṣṭāt, I am up above; aham paścāt, I am behind; aham purastāt, I am in front; aham dakṣiṇataḥ, I am to the right; aham uttarataḥ, I am to the left; aham eva idam sarvam iti, I am truly all this. Commentary:- Our Self is the Self of all. Our Self is in the sky, in the air, in the water, in the tiny insect, and in the biggest animal. It is all-embracing, everywhere, in every being, in everything. It is Existence itself. Imagine that the whole cosmos is a vast ocean, and in that ocean there are waves. Some of the waves are huge and some of them are very small, maybe only ripples. But it is the same water. Similarly, there is one Existence, but we see diversity. This diversity, however, is only in name and form. It is not real. Underlying the diversity is one Existence, and that Existence is our own Self. This is not just an intellectual theory. There are great saints who have actually experienced this. They say, suppose you throw a stone into the middle of a lake. Immediately the water surrounding the spot where you have thrown the stone becomes disturbed. Then gradually you discover that the entire mass of water is disturbed. Similarly, if someone is in pain somewhere, then you also are in pain. You may have noticed that if you play a stringed instrument in a room where there are other stringed instruments, you will find that sounds are coming from the other instruments. The sound vibration from one will affect the others. Swami Vivekananda had many such experiences. Once one of his brother disciples found him pacing back and forth outside his room at midnight. The brother disciple asked Swamiji why he was not sleeping, and Swamiji replied that he had suddenly woken up with the feeling that something terrible had just happened, that a great calamity had just happened somewhere. The next day when the newspaper arrived people found that there had been a terrible volcanic eruption that night in a certain place, and many people had died. A great person has that kind of sensitivity, because he feels that there is just one heart, one mind, one consciousness. What you think, he thinks. If you are suffering, he can at once see it when he looks at you. You may ask, ‘Is it possible for me to identify myself with everything?’ The scriptures say, ‘Yes, it is possible.’ Now you think of yourself as small, as alpa. You think you are an individual and separate from others. But when you identify yourself with the cosmos, you become bhūmā, infinite. Swamiji once said, suppose you are a small drop of water in a cloud in the sky. Then one day it rains. You start falling towards the ocean, and you cry, ‘Oh, I am lost, I am lost!’ But what happens when you reach the ocean? You are no longer a tiny drop. You are one with the vast ocean. It is the sense of separateness that makes us feel we are small. Then we become jealous of each other or afraid of others, and because of this we are unhappy. Vedānta says, when you have the feeling that you are one with the whole cosmos, that you alone exist, then you will be happy. It is all a question of how you think of yourself. The Upaniṣad says here to think:- ‘I am below. I am above. I am everywhere. I am everything.’ Many people have a hint of this experience at some time or other in their life. For instance, you may have seen someone in terrible pain. Maybe you didn’t even know the person, yet at the very sight of that person’s suffering, you felt that you were suffering. Though physically you were not affected, still you felt the pain. A human being’s development towards this sense of oneness is the sign of real progress. This is not to deny differences among us, however. Of course there are differences. Differences are accepted. They are natural. We would not like uniformity. But the differences are only minor details. Now we may think, ‘I am short and that person is tall.’ But when we begin to look at things as a whole, then we shall see that we are everywhere. Then we will think:- ‘Sometimes I am tall, and sometimes I am short.’ Instead of thinking, ‘Some people are very bright and others are dull,’ we will think:- ‘The bright person is me, and the dull person is also me. All are me in different forms.’ As long as you think you are separate from others, you will sometimes be good to others and sometimes be very selfish and not care about others. And even when you do something for others, you will do it only out of a temporary sense of pity. But when you feel your identity with others you never lose that feeling of oneness, and then there is never any room for selfishness. “Aham eva idam sarvam”—I am all this. Idam means ‘this.’ It is this physical world, this empirical world. It is all that you see and feel. It is the world of sense experience. We think we know this world, but in reality we do not. You may say something is hard, but to me it may be soft. You may say something looks red, but I may see it as orange. This is the nature of this world. No two people have the same experience of it. Yet, the Upaniṣad says, behind this world of sense experience is bhūmā. It is the same Self everywhere, in different forms and with different names.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'The Infinite indeed is below, above, behind, before, right and left--it is indeed all this. 'Now follows the explanation of the Infinite as the I:- I am below, I am above, I am behind, before, right and left--I am all this.


Sloka : 7.25.2

अथात आत्मादेश एवात्मैवाधस्तादात्मोपरिष्टादात्मा

पश्चादात्मा पुरस्तादात्मा दक्षिणत आत्मोत्तरत

आत्मैवेदꣳ सर्वमिति स वा एष एवं पश्यन्नेवं मन्वान एवं

विजानन्नात्मरतिरात्मक्रीड आत्ममिथुन आत्मानन्दः स

स्वराड्भवति तस्य सर्वेषु लोकेषु कामचारो भवति

अथ येऽन्यथातो विदुरन्यराजानस्ते क्षय्यलोका भवन्ति

तेषाꣳ सर्वेषु लोकेष्वकामचारो भवति ॥ ७.२५.२॥

athāta ātmādeśa evātmaivādhastādātmopariṣṭādātmā

paścādātmā purastādātmā dakṣiṇata ātmottarata

ātmaivedagͫ sarvamiti sa vā eṣa evaṃ paśyannevaṃ manvāna evaṃ

vijānannātmaratirātmakrīḍa ātmamithuna ātmānandaḥ sa

svarāḍbhavati tasya sarveṣu lokeṣu kāmacāro bhavati

atha ye'nyathāto viduranyarājānaste kṣayyalokā bhavanti

teṣāgͫ sarveṣu lokeṣvakāmacāro bhavati .. 7.25.2..



2. Next is the instruction on the Self:- The Self is below; the Self is above; the Self is behind; the Self is in front; the Self is to the right; the Self is to the left. The Self is all this. He who sees in this way, thinks in this way, and knows in this way, has love for the Self, sports with the Self, enjoys the company of the Self, and has joy in the Self, he is supreme and can go about as he likes in all the worlds. But those who think otherwise are under the control of others. They cannot remain in the worlds they live in, nor can they move about in the worlds as they like [i.e., they are under many limitations].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha ataḥ, next; ātmādeśaḥ eva, the instruction regarding the Self; ātmā eva adhastāt, the Self is down below; ātmā upariṣṭāt, the Self is up above; ātmā paścāt, the Self is behind; ātmā purastāt, the Self is in front; ātmā dakṣiṇataḥ, the Self is to the right; ātmā uttarataḥ, the Self is to the left; ātmā eva idam sarvam iti, the Self is truly all this; saḥ vai eṣaḥ, that [worshipper] who; evam paśyan, sees in this way; evam manvānaḥ, thinks in this way; evam vijānan, knows in this way; ātmaratiḥ, has love for the Self; ātmakrīḍah, sports with the Self; ātmamithunaḥ, enjoys the company of the Self; ātmānandaḥ, has joy in the Self; saḥ svarāṭ bhavati, he becomes supreme [a sovereign]; sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds; tasya kāmacāraḥ bhavati, he can go about as he likes; atha, then; ye, those who; anyatha ataḥ vidaḥ, know otherwise; anyarājānaḥ, are under the control of others; te kṣayyalokāḥ bhavanti, they live in worlds that are not permanent; sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds; teṣām akāmacāraḥ bhavati, he cannot move about as he likes. Iti pañcaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-fifth section. Commentary:-The Upaniṣad says, you see yourself in all that exists. When you have the experience, ‘I am infinite, I am one with all,’ then there is no duality. You enjoy your own Self. Normally we look for friends so we can enjoy ourselves in their company. But when you realize bhūmā, you don’t need any companions. You know that everything is within and not outside. Now we are so dependent on things outside. If someone is harsh to us we feel bad, and if someone is good to us we are happy. Similarly, we may be addicted to cigarettes and are miserable if we don’t get them. So our happiness always depends on external conditions. Where is our freedom? This is not freedom. We are simply beggars. A free soul, however, is always happy within himself. He is not bothered by external conditions. Sri Ramakrishna was not dependent on anyone or anything. Once some servants came to him and told him that the owner of the temple garden said he must leave immediately. Sri Ramakrishna at once got up and started walking out of the temple compound, just as he was. He did not stop to pack anything or take a second look at his room. He simply started leaving. The owner happened to see him leaving, and asked:- ‘Sir, why are you leaving? I asked your nephew to leave, not you.’ Then Sri Ramakrishna replied, ‘Oh, you don’t want me to leave?’ and he immediately turned around and went back to his room as if nothing had happened. Suppose you enjoy a certain kind of music, but another person does not care for it. Why does this happen? It is because that music evokes in you a certain feeling or emotion which it does not evoke in the other person. The enjoyment is not in the music. It is within you. So also, sometimes you may sit and daydream, thinking of a pilgrimage you took in the Himalayas long back. You go on thinking and enjoying the memories even though the Himalayas are no longer in front of you. The enjoyment is totally within you. So when you realize your Self, you no longer need the world outside. In fact, it no longer exists for you. You alone exist. Some people may say this is selfishness, but it is not. Rather, your self has expanded. It has become all-embracing. It has become bhūmā. ‘Saḥ svarāṭ bhavati—he becomes a sovereign.’ When you attain sovereignty you no longer identify yourself with the body. You feel yourself to be one with the entire cosmos. This is the goal of life—to realize that there is only One which appears as many, with different names and forms. Section Twenty-six

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'Next follows the explanation of the Infinite as the Self:- Self is below, above, behind, before, right and left--Self is all this. 'He who sees, perceives, and understands this, loves the Self, delights in the Self, revels in the Self, rejoices in the Self--he becomes a Svarâg, (an autocrat or self-ruler); he is lord and master in all the worlds. 'But those who think differently from this, live in perishable worlds, and have other beings for their rulers.


Sloka : 7.26.1

॥ इति पञ्चविंशः खण्डः ॥

तस्य ह वा एतस्यैवं पश्यत एवं मन्वानस्यैवं विजानत

आत्मतः प्राण आत्मत आशात्मतः स्मर आत्मत आकाश

आत्मतस्तेज आत्मत आप आत्मत

आविर्भावतिरोभावावात्मतोऽन्नमात्मतो बलमात्मतो

विज्ञानमात्मतो ध्यानमात्मतश्चित्तमात्मतः

संकल्प आत्मतो मन आत्मतो वागात्मतो नामात्मतो मन्त्रा

आत्मतः कर्माण्यात्मत एवेदꣳसर्वमिति ॥ ७.२६.१॥

.. iti pañcaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tasya ha vā etasyaivaṃ paśyata evaṃ manvānasyaivaṃ vijānata

ātmataḥ prāṇa ātmata āśātmataḥ smara ātmata ākāśa

ātmatasteja ātmata āpa ātmata

āvirbhāvatirobhāvāvātmato'nnamātmato balamātmato

vijñānamātmato dhyānamātmataścittamātmataḥ

saṃkalpa ātmato mana ātmato vāgātmato nāmātmato mantrā

ātmataḥ karmāṇyātmata evedagͫsarvamiti .. 7.26.1..



1. For a person like this who sees in this way, thinks in this way, and has this knowledge, everything comes from the Self:- Life, hope, memory, space, fire, water, birth and death, food, strength, knowledge in depth, meditation, the heart, resolution, the mind, speech, name, mantras, and all work—all this comes from the Self.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tasya ha vai etasya, of a person like this; evam paśyataḥ, who sees in this way; evam manvānasya, who thinks in this way; evam vijānataḥ, who has such knowledge; ātmataḥ prāṇaḥ, life [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ āśā, hope [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ smaraḥ, memory [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ ākāśaḥ, space [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ tejaḥ, fire [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ āpaḥ, water [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ āvirbhāva-tirobhāvau, birth and death [come] from the Self; ātmataḥ annam, food [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ balam, strength [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ vijñānam, knowledge in depth [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ dhyānam, meditation [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ cittam, the heart [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ saṅkalpaḥ, resolution [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ manaḥ, the mind [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ vāk, speech [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ nāma, name [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ mantrāḥ, the mantras [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ karmāṇi, all work [comes] from the Self; ātmataḥ eva idam sarvam iti, all this [comes] from the Self. Commentary:-Just as waves rise from and fall back on the ocean, so also all these things—prāṇa, hope, memory, birth, death, happiness, unhappiness, etc.—come from the Self and go back to the Self. They are all within our own self. Once we know the Self, the phenomenal world no longer exists for us.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'To him who sees, perceives, and understands this [1], the spirit (prâna) springs from the Self, hope springs from the Self, memory springs from the Self; so do ether, fire, water, appearance and disappearance [2], food, power, understanding, reflection, consideration, will, Mind, speech, names, sacred hymns, and sacrifices--aye, all this springs from the Self.

Footnote:

1. Before the acquirement of true knowledge, all that has been mentioned before, spirit, hope, memory, &c., on to names, was supposed to spring from the Sat, as something different from oneself. Now he is to know that the Sat is the Self. 2. In the preceding paragraphs appearance and disappearance (birth and death) are not mentioned. This shows how easy it was in these treatises either to omit or to add anything that seemed important.


Sloka : 7.26.2

तदेष श्लोको न पश्यो मृत्युं पश्यति न रोगं नोत दुःखताꣳ

सर्वꣳ ह पश्यः पश्यति सर्वमाप्नोति सर्वश इति

स एकधा भवति त्रिधा भवति पञ्चधा

सप्तधा नवधा चैव पुनश्चैकादशः स्मृतः

शतं च दश चैकश्च सहस्राणि च

विꣳशतिराहारशुद्धौ सत्त्वशुद्धौ ध्रुवा स्मृतिः

स्मृतिलम्भे सर्वग्रन्थीनां विप्रमोक्षस्तस्मै

मृदितकषायाय तमसस्पारं दर्शयति

भगवान्सनत्कुमारस्तꣳ स्कन्द इत्याचक्षते

तꣳ स्कन्द इत्याचक्षते ॥ ७.२६.२॥

tadeṣa śloko na paśyo mṛtyuṃ paśyati na rogaṃ nota duḥkhatāgͫ

sarvagͫ ha paśyaḥ paśyati sarvamāpnoti sarvaśa iti

sa ekadhā bhavati tridhā bhavati pañcadhā

saptadhā navadhā caiva punaścaikādaśaḥ smṛtaḥ

śataṃ ca daśa caikaśca sahasrāṇi ca

vigͫśatirāhāraśuddhau sattvaśuddhau dhruvā smṛtiḥ

smṛtilambhe sarvagranthīnāṃ vipramokṣastasmai

mṛditakaṣāyāya tamasaspāraṃ darśayati

bhagavānsanatkumārastagͫ skanda ityācakṣate

tagͫ skanda ityācakṣate .. 7.26.2..



2. Here is a verse on the subject:- ‘He who has realized the Self does not see death. For him there is no disease or sorrow. Such a seer sees everything [as it is] and also attains everything in whatever way [he wants].’ He is one [i.e., before creation; but after creation], he is in three forms, five forms, seven forms, and nine forms. Then again, he is in eleven, a hundred and ten, and even a thousand and twenty forms. If one eats pure food, one’s mind becomes pure. If the mind is pure, one’s memory becomes strong and steady. If the memory is good, one becomes free from all bondages. The revered Sanatkumāra freed Nārada from all his shortcomings and led him beyond darkness [i.e., ignorance]. The wise say that Sanatkumāra is a man of perfect knowledge.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject; paśyaḥ, a person who sees thus [i.e., who knows the Self]; mṛtyum na paśyati, does not see death; na rogam, nor disease; na uta duḥkhatam, nor suffering; paśyaḥ, a person who sees thus; sarvam ha paśyati, sees everything; sarvam āpnoti, he obtains all; sarvaśaḥ, in every way. Saḥ ekadhā bhavati, he is one [before the creation]; tridhā bhavati, [and] he is in three forms [fire, water, and earth]; pañcadhā, in five forms; saptadhā, in seven forms; ca eva navadhā, and in nine forms; punaḥ ca, also; ekādaśaḥ smṛtaḥ, he is thought of as having eleven forms; śatam ca daśa ca, and one hundred and ten forms; ekaḥ ca sahasrāṇi ca viṃśatiḥ, and also one thousand and twenty forms; āhāra-śuddhau, if the food is pure; sattva-śuddhiḥ, the mind is pure; sattva-śuddhau, if the mind is pure; dhruvā smṛtiḥ, the memory is strong and steady; smṛtilambhe, when the memory is good; sarva-granthīnām, from all bondages; vipramokṣaḥ, one is freed; tasmai, to him [to Nārada]; mṛditakaṣāyāya, who was free from all impurities; bhagavān sanatkumāraḥ, revered Sanatkumāra; tamasaḥ pāram, beyond darkness; darśayati, showed; tam, him [Sanatkumāra]; skanda iti ācakṣate, they refer to as ‘Skanda’ [the wise]; tam, him [Sanatkumāra]; skanda iti ācakṣate, they refer to as ‘Skanda’ [the wise]. Iti ṣaḍviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-sixth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi saptamaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the seventh chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad. Commentary:-But how do you attain this knowledge? You have to have pure food. Pure food makes the body and mind pure, and you are then able to keep the mind under control. By controlling the mind, you are able to go beyond ignorance and become free from bondage. Like Sanatkumāra, you earn the title ‘Skanda,’ the wise one.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'There is this verse, "He who sees this, does not see death, nor illness, nor pain; he who sees this, sees everything, and obtains everything everywhere. '"He is one (before creation), he becomes three (fire, water, earth), he becomes five, he becomes seven, he becomes nine; then again he is called the eleventh, and hundred and ten and one thousand and twenty [1]." 'When the intellectual aliment has been purified, the whole nature becomes purified. When the whole nature has been purified, the memory becomes firm. And when the memory (of the Highest Self) remains firm, then all the ties (which bind us to a belief in anything but the Self) are loosened. 'The venerable Sanatkumâra showed to Nârada, after his faults had been rubbed out, the other side of darkness. They call Sanatkumâra Skanda, yea, Skanda they call him.'

Footnote:

1. This too is meant as a verse. The commentary says that the various numbers are intended to show the endless variety of form on the Self after creation. Cf. Mait. Up. V, 2.


Sloka : 8.1.1

॥ इति षड्विंशः खण्डः ॥

॥ इति सप्तमोऽध्यायः ॥

॥ अष्टमोऽध्यायः ॥

अथ यदिदमस्मिन्ब्रह्मपुरे दहरं पुण्डरीकं वेश्म

दहरोऽस्मिन्नन्तराकाशस्तस्मिन्यदन्तस्तदन्वेष्टव्यं

तद्वाव विजिज्ञासितव्यमिति ॥ ८.१.१॥

.. iti ṣaḍviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

.. iti saptamo'dhyāyaḥ ..

.. aṣṭamo'dhyāyaḥ ..

atha yadidamasminbrahmapure daharaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ veśma

daharo'sminnantarākāśastasminyadantastadanveṣṭavyaṃ

tadvāva vijijñāsitavyamiti .. 8.1.1..



1. Om. This body is the city of Brahman. Within it is an abode in the shape of a lotus [i.e., the heart], and within that there is a small space. One must search within this space and earnestly desire to know what is there.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, next; asmin brahmapure, in this city of Brahman [i.e., the body]; yat idam daharam, this small; puṇḍarīkam, lotus; veśma, an abode [i.e., the heart]; asmin, in this; daharaḥ antarākāśaḥ, is a small space; tasmin yat antaḥ, within that; tat anveṣṭavyam, one must seek that; tat vāva vijijñāsitavyam iti, one must earnestly desire to know that. Commentary:-The scriptures try to help us know our real identity, because when we know that, we know we are all one with Brahman. But first we must have a pure mind. The mind becomes purified by living a good life and by practising self-restraint and truthfulness. It is in the pure mind that the Self reveals itself. The heart is said to be like a lotus, and in that lotus resides the Self—as if this is the home of the Self.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Harih, Om. There is this city of Brahman (the body), and in it the palace, the small lotus (of the heart), and in it that small ether. Now what exists within that small ether, that is to be sought for, that is to be understood.


Sloka : 8.1.2

तं चेद्ब्रूयुर्यदिदमस्मिन्ब्रह्मपुरे दहरं पुण्डरीकं वेश्म

दहरोऽस्मिन्नन्तराकाशः किं तदत्र विद्यते यदन्वेष्टव्यं

यद्वाव विजिज्ञासितव्यमिति स ब्रूयात् ॥ ८.१.२॥

taṃ cedbrūyuryadidamasminbrahmapure daharaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ veśma

daharo'sminnantarākāśaḥ kiṃ tadatra vidyate yadanveṣṭavyaṃ

yadvāva vijijñāsitavyamiti sa brūyāt .. 8.1.2..



2. If the disciples ask, ‘This body is the city of Brahman; within it is an abode in the shape of a lotus [i.e., the heart], and within that there is a small space; what is it that one must search for within this space, and what should one earnestly desire to know?’—the teacher should reply:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Cet, if; tam, to him [the teacher]; brūyuḥ, [the disciples] ask; asmin brahmapure, in this city of Brahman [i.e., the body]; yat idam daharam, this small; puṇḍarīkam, lotus; veśma, an abode [i.e., the heart]; asmin, in this; daharaḥ antarākāśaḥ, is a small space; kim tat atra, what is it that is there; yat anveṣṭavyam, which one must seek; yat vāva vijijñāsitavyam iti, which one must earnestly desire to know; saḥ brūyāt, he [the teacher] should reply. Commentary:-The disciples wanted to know what was within the heart. The teacher had said there is a space there. But is there anything within this space? If so, is it something very special? Why is it necessary that they should know about it? They asked, ‘Should we investigate it?’ The scriptures say, ‘Yes, investigate it.’

Translation By Max Müller

2. And if they should say to him:- 'Now with regard to that city of Brahman, and the palace in it, i. e. the small lotus of the heart, and the small ether within the heart, what is there within it that deserves to be sought for, or that is to be understood?'


Sloka : 8.1.3

यावान्वा अयमाकाशस्तावानेषोऽन्तर्हृदय अकाश

उभे अस्मिन्द्यावापृथिवी अन्तरेव समाहिते

उभावग्निश्च वायुश्च सूर्याचन्द्रमसावुभौ

विद्युन्नक्षत्राणि यच्चास्येहास्ति यच्च नास्ति सर्वं

तदस्मिन्समाहितमिति ॥ ८.१.३॥

yāvānvā ayamākāśastāvāneṣo'ntarhṛdaya akāśa

ubhe asmindyāvāpṛthivī antareva samāhite

ubhāvagniśca vāyuśca sūryācandramasāvubhau

vidyunnakṣatrāṇi yaccāsyehāsti yacca nāsti sarvaṃ

tadasminsamāhitamiti .. 8.1.3..



3. [The teacher replies:-] ‘The space in the heart is as big as the space outside. Heaven and earth are both within it, so also fire and air, the sun and the moon, lightning and the stars. Everything exists within that space in the embodied self—whatever it has or does not have’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yāvān, as much as; ayam ākāśaḥ, this space; tāvān, so that much; eṣaḥ antaḥ-hṛdaye ākāśe, this space inside the heart; ubhe, both; asmin, in this; dyāvā-pṛthivī, heaven and earth; antaḥ eva samāhite, are resting deep within; ubhau agniḥ ca vāyuḥ ca, both fire and air; sūryā-candramasau ubhau, both the sun and the moon; vidyut, lightning; nakṣatrāṇi, the stars; yat ca, whatever; asya, of it [of the self with the body]; iha, in this world; asti, exists; yat ca na asti, or whatever does not exist; sarvam tat, all that; asmin samāhitam iti, is resting within. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Then he should say:- 'As large as this ether (all space) is, so large is that ether within the heart. Both heaven and earth are contained within it, both fire and air, both sun and moon, both lightning and stars; and whatever there is of him (the Self) here in the world, and whatever is not (i. e. whatever has been or will be), all that is contained within it [1].'

Footnote:

1. The ether in the heart is really a name of Brahman. He is there, and therefore all that comes of him when he assumes bodily shapes, both what is and what is not, i.e. what is no longer or not yet; for the absolute nothing is not intended here.


Sloka : 8.1.4

तं चेद्ब्रूयुरस्मिꣳश्चेदिदं ब्रह्मपुरे सर्वꣳ समाहितꣳ

सर्वाणि च भूतानि सर्वे च कामा यदैतज्जरा वाप्नोति

प्रध्वꣳसते वा किं ततोऽतिशिष्यत इति ॥ ८.१.४॥

taṃ cedbrūyurasmigͫścedidaṃ brahmapure sarvagͫ samāhitagͫ

sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni sarve ca kāmā yadaitajjarā vāpnoti

pradhvagͫsate vā kiṃ tato'tiśiṣyata iti .. 8.1.4..



4. If the disciples ask the teacher, ‘If in this body [brahmapura] are all this, all things, and all desires, is there anything left behind when the body gets old or perishes?’—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Cet, if; tam, to him [the teacher]; brūyuḥ, [the disciples] ask; asmin brahmapure, in this city of Brahman [i.e., the body]; idam sarvam cet, if all this; samāhitam, are lying; sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni, and all things; sarve ca kāmaḥ, and all desires [that people may have]; yadā, when; etat, this [body]; jarā, old age; āpnoti vā, attains; pradhvaṃsate vā, or it perishes; kim, what; tataḥ, then; atiśiṣyate iti, remains? Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. And if they should say to him:- 'If everything that exists is contained in that city of Brahman, all beings and all desires (whatever can be imagined or desired), then what is left of it, when old age reaches it and scatters it, or when it falls to pieces?'


Sloka : 8.1.5

स ब्रूयात्नास्य जरयैतज्जीर्यति न वधेनास्य हन्यत

एतत्सत्यं ब्रह्मपुरमस्मिकामाः समाहिताः एष

आत्मापहतपाप्मा विजरो विमृत्युर्विशोको

विजिघत्सोऽपिपासः सत्यकामः सत्यसंकल्पो यथा ह्येवेह

प्रजा अन्वाविशन्ति यथानुशासनम् यं यमन्तमभिकामा

भवन्ति यं जनपदं यं क्षेत्रभागं तं तमेवोपजीवन्ति

॥ ८.१.५॥

sa brūyātnāsya jarayaitajjīryati na vadhenāsya hanyata

etatsatyaṃ brahmapuramasmikāmāḥ samāhitāḥ eṣa

ātmāpahatapāpmā vijaro vimṛtyurviśoko

vijighatso'pipāsaḥ satyakāmaḥ satyasaṃkalpo yathā hyeveha

prajā anvāviśanti yathānuśāsanam yaṃ yamantamabhikāmā

bhavanti yaṃ janapadaṃ yaṃ kṣetrabhāgaṃ taṃ tamevopajīvanti

.. 8.1.5..



5.—in reply the teacher will say:- ‘The body may decay due to old age, but the space within [i.e., brahmapura] never decays. Nor does it perish with the death of the body. This is the real abode of Brahman. All our desires are concentrated in it. It is the Self—free from all sins as well as from old age, death, bereavement, hunger, and thirst. It is the cause of love of Truth and the cause of dedication to Truth. If a person strictly follows whatever the ruler of the country commands, he may then get as a reward some land, or even an estate’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Saḥ, he [the teacher]; brūyāt, will say; asya, its [the body’s]; jarayā, by old age; etat, this [i.e., the space within the heart—the Self]; na jīryati, is not affected; vadhena asya na hanyate, nor does it meet death by being killed; etat, this; satyam brahmapuram, city of Brahman is real; asmin, in this; kāmāḥ, all desires; samāhitāḥ, are contained; eṣaḥ ātmā, this Self; apahatapāpmā, is free from all sins [or, sorrows]; vijaraḥ, free from old age; vimṛtyuḥ, deathless; viśokaḥ, free from bereavement; vijighatsaḥ, without hunger; apipāsaḥ, without thirst; satyakāmaḥ, love of Truth; satyasaṅkalpaḥ, committed to Truth; yathā, like; hi eva iha, in this world; prajāḥ, people; anu-āviśanti, come and go; yathā-anuśāsanam, according to the law of the country; yam yam, whatever; antam, province; abhikāmaḥ bhavanti, they desire; yam janapadam, any village; yam kṣetrabhāgam, [or] any field; tam tam eva, that very [place]; upajīvanti, they enjoy. Commentary:-The idea is that an ignorant person may get whatever he wants as the fruit of his actions, but he remains bound.

Translation By Max Müller

5. Then he should say:- 'By the old age of the body, that (the ether, or Brahman within it) does not age; by the death of the body, that (the ether, or Brahman within it) is not killed. That (the Brahman) is the true Brahma-city (not the body [1]). In it all desires are contained. It is the Self, free from sin, free from old age, from death and grief, from hunger and thirst, which desires nothing but what it ought to desire, and imagines nothing but what it ought to imagine. Now as here on earth people follow as they are commanded, and depend on the object which they are attached to, be it a country or a piece of land,

Footnote:

1. I translate this somewhat differently from the commentator, though the argument remains the same.


Sloka : 8.1.6

तद्यथेह कर्मजितो लोकः क्षीयत एवमेवामुत्र पुण्यजितो

लोकः क्षीयते तद्य इहात्मानमनुविद्य व्रजन्त्येताꣳश्च

सत्यान्कामाꣳस्तेषाꣳ सर्वेषु लोकेष्वकामचारो

भवत्यथ य इहात्मानमनिवुद्य व्रजन्त्येतꣳश्च

सत्यान्कामाꣳस्तेषाꣳ सर्वेषु लोकेषु कामचारो भवति

॥ ८.१.६॥

tadyatheha karmajito lokaḥ kṣīyata evamevāmutra puṇyajito

lokaḥ kṣīyate tadya ihātmānamanuvidya vrajantyetāgͫśca

satyānkāmāgͫsteṣāgͫ sarveṣu lokeṣvakāmacāro

bhavatyatha ya ihātmānamanivudya vrajantyetagͫśca

satyānkāmāgͫsteṣāgͫ sarveṣu lokeṣu kāmacāro bhavati

.. 8.1.6..



6. Everything perishes, whether it is something you have acquired through hard work in this world or it is a place in the other world which you have acquired through meritorious deeds. Those who leave this world without knowing the Self and the Truths which they should know are not free, no matter where they go. But those who leave this world after knowing the Self and the Truths which they should know are free, no matter where they are.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Tat yathā, just as; iha, in this world; karmajitaḥ, results acquired according to one’s efforts; lokaḥ, this world; kṣīyate, perishes; evam eva, similarly; amutra; in the other world; puṇyajitaḥ, what is earned by meritorious work [such as performing the Agnihotra and other sacrifices]; lokaḥ, heaven [or other worlds]; kṣīyate, perishes; tat ye, those; iha, in this world; ātmānam ananuvidya, without knowing the Self; etān ca satyān kāmān, and these worthwhile things; vrajanti, leave [this world]; teṣām, for them; sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds; akāmacāraḥ bhavati, there is bondage; atha, but; ye, those who; iha, in this world; ātmānam anuvidya, knowing the self; etān ca satyān kāmān, and these worthwhile things; vrajanti, leave this world; teṣām, for them; sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds; kāmacāraḥ bhavati, they are free to go anywhere. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section. Commentary:-

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'And as here on earth, whatever has been acquired by exertion, perishes, so perishes whatever is acquired for the next world by sacrifices and other good actions performed on earth. Those who depart from hence without having discovered the Self and those true desires, for them there is no freedom in all the worlds. But those who depart from hence, after having discovered the Self and those true desires [1], for them there is freedom in all the worlds.

Footnote:

1. True desires are those which we ought to desire, and the fulfilment of which depends on ourselves, supposing that we have acquired the knowledge which enables us to fulfil them.


Sloka : 8.2.1

॥ इति प्रथमः खण्डः ॥

स यदि पितृलोककामो भवति संकल्पादेवास्य पितरः

समुत्तिष्ठन्ति तेन पितृलोकेन सम्पन्नो महीयते ॥ ८.२.१॥

.. iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

sa yadi pitṛlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya pitaraḥ

samuttiṣṭhanti tena pitṛlokena sampanno mahīyate .. 8.2.1..



1. If that person wishes to be in the company of his forefathers, they appear before him as he wishes. Joining his forefathers in that world, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Yadi, if; saḥ, he [who has realized the Self and is free to go where he wants]; pitṛlokakāmaḥ bhavati, wishes for a place in the world of fathers; pitaraḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, the fathers appear; asya saṅkalpāt era, through his wish; tena pitṛlokena sampannaḥ, joining his forefathers in that world; mahīyate, he becomes great. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Thus he who desires the world [1] of the fathers, by his mere will the fathers come to receive him, and having obtained the world of the fathers, he is happy.

Footnote:

1. World is the nearest approach to loka:- it means life with the fathers, or enjoying the company of the fathers.


Sloka : 8.2.2

अथ यदि मातृलोककामो भवति संकल्पादेवास्य मातरः

समुत्तिष्ठन्ति तेन मातृलोकेन सम्पन्नो महीयते ॥ ८.२.२॥

atha yadi mātṛlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya mātaraḥ

samuttiṣṭhanti tena mātṛlokena sampanno mahīyate .. 8.2.2..



2. Then if he wishes to be in the company of mothers, they appear before him as he wishes. Joining the mothers in that world, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:-Atha, then; yadi, if; mātṛlokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a place in the world of mothers; mātaraḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, the mothers appear; asya. saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish; tena mātṛlokena sampannaḥ, joining the mothers in that world; mahīyate, he becomes great. Commentary:-There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'And he who desires the world of the mothers, by his mere will the mothers come to receive him, and having obtained the world of the mothers, he is happy.


Sloka : 8.2.3

अथ यदि भ्रातृलोककामो भवति संकल्पादेवास्य भ्रातरः

समुत्तिष्ठन्ति तेन भ्रातृलोकेन सम्पन्नो महीयते ॥ ८.२.३॥॥

atha yadi bhrātṛlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya bhrātaraḥ

samuttiṣṭhanti tena bhrātṛlokena sampanno mahīyate .. 8.2.3....



3. Then if he wishes to be in the company of brothers, they appear before him as he wishes. Joining the brothers in that world, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yadi, if; bhrātṛlokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a place in the world of brothers; bhrātaraḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, brothers appear; asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish; tena bhrātṛlokena sampannaḥ, joining brothers in that world; mahīyate, he becomes great. Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'And he who desires the world of the brothers, by his mere will the brothers come to receive him, and having obtained the world of the brothers, he is happy.


Sloka : 8.2.4

अथ यदि स्वसृलोककामो भवति संकल्पादेवास्य स्वसारः

समुत्तिष्ठन्ति तेन स्वसृलोकेन सम्पन्नो महीयते ॥ ८.२.४॥

atha yadi svasṛlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya svasāraḥ

samuttiṣṭhanti tena svasṛlokena sampanno mahīyate .. 8.2.4..



4. Then if he wishes to be in the company of sisters, they appear before him as he wishes. Joining the sisters in that world, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yadi, if; svasṛlokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a place in the world of sisters; svasāraḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, sisters appear; asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish; tena svasṛlokena sampannaḥ, joining the sisters in that world; mahīyate, he becomes great. Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'And he who desires the world of the sisters, by his mere will the sisters come to receive him, and having obtained the world of the sisters, he is happy.


Sloka : 8.2.5

अथ यदि सखिलोककामो भवति संकल्पादेवास्य सखायः

समुत्तिष्ठन्ति तेन सखिलोकेन सम्पन्नो महीयते ॥ ८.२.५॥

atha yadi sakhilokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya sakhāyaḥ

samuttiṣṭhanti tena sakhilokena sampanno mahīyate .. 8.2.5..



5. Then if he wishes to be in the company of friends, they appear before him as he wishes. Joining friends in that world, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yadi, if; sakhilokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a place in the world of friends; sakhāyaḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, friends appear; asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish; tena sakhilokena sampannaḥ, joining friends in that world; mahīyate, he becomes great. Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'And he who desires the world of the friends, by his mere will the friends come to receive him, and having obtained the world of the friends, he is happy.


Sloka : 8.2.6

अथ यदि गन्धमाल्यलोककामो भवति संकल्पादेवास्य

गन्धमाल्ये समुत्तिष्ठतस्तेन गन्धमाल्यलोकेन सम्पन्नो

महीयते ॥ ८.२.६॥

atha yadi gandhamālyalokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya

gandhamālye samuttiṣṭhatastena gandhamālyalokena sampanno

mahīyate .. 8.2.6..



6. Then if he wishes for a world of fragrant flower garlands, they appear before him as he wishes. By having fragrant flower garlands in that world, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yadi, if; gandhamālyalokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a world of fragrant flower garlands; gandhamālye sam -ut-tiṣṭhataḥ, the fragrant flower garlands appear; asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish; tena gandhamālyalokena sampannaḥ, by having fragrant flower garlands in that world; mahīyate, he becomes great. Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'And he who desires the world of perfumes and garlands (gandhamâlya), by his mere will perfumes and garlands come to him, and having obtained the world of perfumes and garlands, he is happy.


Sloka : 8.2.7

अथ यद्यन्नपानलोककामो भवति संकल्पादेवास्यान्नपाने

समुत्तिष्ठतस्तेनान्नपानलोकेन सम्पन्नो महीयते ॥ ८.२.७॥

atha yadyannapānalokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsyānnapāne

samuttiṣṭhatastenānnapānalokena sampanno mahīyate .. 8.2.7..



7. Then if he wishes for a world of food and drink, they appear before him as he wishes. By having food and drink in that world, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yadi, if; annapānalokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a world of food and drink; annapāne sam-ut-tiṣṭhataḥ, food and drink appear; asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish; tena annapānalokena sampannaḥ, by having food and drink in that world; mahīyate, he becomes great. Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

7. 'And he who desires the world of food and drink, by his mere will food and drink come to him, and having obtained the world of food and drink, he is happy.


Sloka : 8.2.8

अथ यदि गीतवादित्रलोककामो भवति संकल्पादेवास्य

गीतवादित्रे समुत्तिष्ठतस्तेन गीतवादित्रलोकेन सम्पन्नो

महीयते ॥ ८.२.८॥

atha yadi gītavāditralokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya

gītavāditre samuttiṣṭhatastena gītavāditralokena sampanno

mahīyate .. 8.2.8..



8. Then if he wishes for a world of music, that world appears to him as he wishes. By enjoying music in that world, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yadi, if; gītavāditralokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a world of music; gītavāditre sam-ut-tiṣṭhataḥ, music comes; asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish; tena gītavāditralokena sampannaḥ, by having music in that world; mahīyate, he, becomes great. Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

8. 'And he who desires the world of song and music, by his mere will song and music come to him, and having obtained the world of song and music, he is happy.


Sloka : 8.2.9

अथ यदि स्त्रीलोककामो भवति संकल्पादेवास्य स्त्रियः

समुत्तिष्ठन्ति तेन स्त्रीलोकेन सम्पन्नो महीयते ॥ ८.२.९॥

atha yadi strīlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya striyaḥ

samuttiṣṭhanti tena strīlokena sampanno mahīyate .. 8.2.9..



9. Then if he wishes for the company of women, they appear before him as he wishes. Being with women in that world, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yadi, if; strīlokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for the company of women; striyaḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

9. 'And he who desires the world of women, by his mere will women come to receive him, and having obtained the world of women, he is happy.


Sloka : 8.2.10

यं यमन्तमभिकामो भवति यं कामं कामयते सोऽस्य

संकल्पादेव समुत्तिष्ठति तेन सम्पन्नो महीयते ॥ ८.२.१०॥

yaṃ yamantamabhikāmo bhavati yaṃ kāmaṃ kāmayate so'sya

saṃkalpādeva samuttiṣṭhati tena sampanno mahīyate .. 8.2.10..



10. Whatever province he wishes for, whatever good thing he wishes to have, it appears before him just as he wishes. By acquiring it, he becomes great.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Yam yam antam abhikāmaḥ bhavati, whatever province he wishes for; yam kāmam kāmayate, [and] whatever good thing he wishes to have; saḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhati, that appears; asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish; tena sampannaḥ, by acquiring that; mahīyate, he becomes great. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section. Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

10. 'Whatever object he is attached to, whatever object he desires, by his mere will it comes to him, and having obtained it, he is happy.


Sloka : 8.3.1

॥ इति द्वितीयः खण्डः ॥

त इमे सत्याः कामा अनृतापिधानास्तेषाꣳ सत्यानाꣳ

सतामनृतमपिधानं यो यो ह्यस्येतः प्रैति न तमिह

दर्शनाय लभते ॥ ८.३.१॥

.. iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ta ime satyāḥ kāmā anṛtāpidhānāsteṣāgͫ satyānāgͫ

satāmanṛtamapidhānaṃ yo yo hyasyetaḥ praiti na tamiha

darśanāya labhate .. 8.3.1..



1. But all these true desires are under a false cover. Though they rest on the Self, they are all false. This is why if a relative dies, one does not see him again in this world.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Te ime, all these; satyaḥ kāmāḥ, true desires; anṛtāpidhānāḥ, with a false look; teṣām satyānām satām, of those true desires [resting in the Self]; anṛtam apidhānam, have a false look; yaḥ yaḥ hi asya, whoever of one’s [relatives]; itaḥ, from this world; praiti, leaves; tam, he; iha, here [in this world]; darśanāya na labhate, cannot be seen again. Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'These true desires, however, are hidden by what is false; though the desires be true, they have a covering which is false. Thus, whoever belonging to us has departed this life, him we cannot gain back, so that we should see him with our eyes.


Sloka : 8.3.2

अथ ये चास्येह जीवा ये च प्रेता यच्चान्यदिच्छन्न

लभते सर्वं तदत्र गत्वा विन्दतेऽत्र ह्यस्यैते सत्याः

कामा अनृतापिधानास्तद्यथापि हिरण्यनिधिं निहितमक्षेत्रज्ञा

उपर्युपरि सञ्चरन्तो न विन्देयुरेवमेवेमाः सर्वाः प्रजा

अहरहर्गच्छन्त्य एतं ब्रह्मलोकं न विन्दन्त्यनृतेन हि

प्रत्यूढाः ॥ ८.३.२॥

atha ye cāsyeha jīvā ye ca pretā yaccānyadicchanna

labhate sarvaṃ tadatra gatvā vindate'tra hyasyaite satyāḥ

kāmā anṛtāpidhānāstadyathāpi hiraṇyanidhiṃ nihitamakṣetrajñā

uparyupari sañcaranto na vindeyurevamevemāḥ sarvāḥ prajā

aharahargacchantya etaṃ brahmalokaṃ na vindantyanṛtena hi

pratyūḍhāḥ .. 8.3.2..



2. Further, those of his relatives who are still alive and those who are dead, and also those things a person cannot get even if he wishes for them—all these he gets by going within his heart. All true desires of a person are in his heart, though they are hidden. It is like when there is gold hidden someplace underground and people who are ignorant of it walk over that spot again and again, knowing nothing about it. Similarly, all these beings go to Brahmaloka every day, and yet they know nothing about it because they are covered by ignorance.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, further; ye asya jīvāḥ ca, those of his [i.e., the relatives of one who knows the Self] who are alive; ye ca pretāḥ, and those who are dead; yat ca anyat, and whatever else; icchan, one wishes for; na labhate, [but] does not get; sarvam tat, all that; atra, here; gatvā, going; vindate, one gets; atra hi, for here; asya, his; ete satyāḥ kāmāḥ, these true desires; anṛtāpidhānaḥ, with a false look; tat yathā, as; akṣetrajñāḥ nihitam, those who have no idea about what is hidden underground; api hiraṇyanidhim, though precious as gold; upari-upari, again and again; sañcarantaḥ, going over it; na vindeyaḥ, do not get it; evam eva, in this way; imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings; ahaḥ ahaḥ, daily; gacchantyaḥ, going; etam brahmalokam, to this world of Brahman; na vindanti, do not attain it; hi, because; anṛtena, by falsehood [i.e., ignorance]; pratyūḍhaḥ, they are covered. Commentary:- Inside the heart is the whole universe. When we have suṣupti, dreamless sleep, we are then one with Bṛahman and one with the whole world. We are not conscious of it, however, because of our ignorance.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'Those who belong to us, whether living or departed, and whatever else there is which we wish for and do not obtain, all that we find there (if we descend into our heart, where Brahman dwells, in the ether of the heart), There are all our true desires, but hidden by what is false [1]. As people who do not know the country, walk again and again over a gold treasure that has been hidden somewhere in the earth and do not discover it, thus do all these creatures day after day go into the Brahma-world (they are merged in Brahman, while asleep), and yet do not discover it, because they are carried away by untruth (they do not come to themselves, i. e. they do not discover the true Self in Brahman, dwelling in the heart).

Footnote:

1. All the desires mentioned before are fulfilled, if we find their fulfilment in our Self, in the city of Brahman within our heart. There we always can possess those whom we have loved, only we must not wish to see them with our eyes; that would be a false covering to a true desire.


Sloka : 8.3.3

स वा एष आत्मा हृदि तस्यैतदेव निरुक्तꣳ हृद्ययमिति

तस्माद्धृदयमहरहर्वा एवंवित्स्वर्गं लोकमेति ॥ ८.३.३॥

sa vā eṣa ātmā hṛdi tasyaitadeva niruktagͫ hṛdyayamiti

tasmāddhṛdayamaharaharvā evaṃvitsvargaṃ lokameti .. 8.3.3..



3. The Self resides in the heart. The word hṛdayam is derived thus:- hṛdi + ayam—‘it is in the heart.’ Therefore the heart is called hṛdayam. One who knows thus goes daily to the heavenly world [i.e., in his dreamless sleep he is one with Brahman].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Saḥ vai eṣaḥ, it is this; ātmā hṛdi, the Self in the heart; tasya etat eva niruktam, this is the meaning of it; hṛdi + ayam iti, ‘it is in the heart’; tasmāt, therefore; hṛdayam, it is [known as] the heart; evam vit, one who knows this; ahaḥ ahaḥ vai, every day; svargam lokam eti, goes to the heavenly world. Commentary:- Where is the Self? It is within. Normally when we think of God, we look up in the sky or we go to a temple, thinking he is there. But in reality God is within us, in our own heart. The heart is the place where we experience the Self. It is the seat of Self-realization. So here the Upaniṣad says, for this reason we worship our own heart as Brahman. Svarga loka normally means the ‘heavenly world.’ But here it means that we go into our own Self. We become one with the Self. The word hṛdayam means hṛdi plus ayam. Hṛdi means ‘in the heart,’ and ayam means ‘this’—that is, this Self, the Cosmic Self, which is the source of everything, is within the heart.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'That Self abides in the heart. And this is the etymological explanation. The heart is called hrid-ayam, instead of hridy-ayam, i. e. He who is in the heart. He who knows this, that He is in the heart, goes day by day (when in sushupti, deep sleep) into heaven (svarga), i.e. into the:- Brahman of the heart.


Sloka : 8.3.4

अथ य एष सम्प्रसादोऽस्माच्छरीरात्समुत्थाय परं

ज्योतिरुपसम्पद्य स्वेन रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यत एष आत्मेति

होवाचैतदमृतमभयमेतद्ब्रह्मेति तस्य ह वा एतस्य

ब्रह्मणो नाम सत्यमिति ॥ ८.३.४॥

atha ya eṣa samprasādo'smāccharīrātsamutthāya paraṃ

jyotirupasampadya svena rūpeṇābhiniṣpadyata eṣa ātmeti

hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti tasya ha vā etasya

brahmaṇo nāma satyamiti .. 8.3.4..



4. The teacher said:- ‘Then, this person, who is the embodiment of happiness, emerging from the body and attaining the highest light, assumes his real nature. This is the Self. It is immortal and also fearless. It is Brahman. Another name for Brahman is satya, Truth.’





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yaḥ eṣaḥ samprasādaḥ, this [Self] which is the embodiment of happiness [from dreamless sleep]; asmāt śarīrāt samutthāya, emerging from the body; param jyotiḥ upasampadya, attaining the highest light; svena rūpeṇa abhiniṣpadyate, he assumes his real nature; eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self; iti ha uvāca, he [the teacher] said; etat amṛtam, this is immortal; abhayam, fearless; etat brahma iti, this is Brahman; tasya ha vai etasya brahmaṇaḥ nāma satyam iti, this Brahman is [also] called ‘Truth.’ Commentary:- When the self leaves the body during deep sleep, it assumes its real nature. What is that nature? Does it have any form? Not exactly. It attains its real nature as light. Knowledge is very often associated with light. We sometimes repeat the prayer, ‘Tamasaḥ mā jyotiḥ gamaya—lead us from darkness to light.’ That is to say, lead us from the darkness of ignorance to the light of knowledge. When we are attached to the body, we are always trying to enjoy more and more sense objects. For that reason we are always disturbed and unhappy. There is no peace or calmness in us—no serenity. If you look at an image of Buddha, what do you see? His face is calm and peaceful. If you look at the face of any god or goddess you see that peace and serenity. That serenity is our very nature, but when we are attached to the body we rarely feel it. Sometimes we smile, but that smile often signifies more pain than pleasure. It is superficial. It does not come from within. Indian scriptures remind us again and again that everything is within. Strength, knowledge, joy—it is all within us. When we know our true nature, we are no longer attached to the body, and it is nothing for us to leave it behind. Once Sarada Devi was in a state of ecstasy and saw herself outside her body. She thought to herself:- ‘How can I go back to such a body?’ For people like her, leaving the body is a matter of choice. They can assume a body or reject it as they like. After a long time she persuaded herself to return to the body. When you can overcome the delusion that you are the body, you can reject it. You then get back your true nature, as it were. You realize you are free, full of bliss, and enlightened. You are then immortal (amṛtam) and fearless (abhayām). You have conquered fear. So long as you feel you are the body, you have fear. One day you may fall sick and die—that fear is always haunting you. When you know you are Brahman, however, you know you will never, die. The Upaniṣad says Brahman is named satya, Truth. Truth is that which was true in the past, is now true in the present, and will be true in the future. This Self is Truth itself.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Now that serene being [1] which, after having risen from out this earthly body, and having reached the highest light (self-knowledge), appears in its true form, that is the Self,' thus he spoke (when asked by his pupils). This is the immortal, the fearless, this is Brahman. And of that Brahman the name is the True, Satyam,

Footnote:

1. Cf. Kh. Up. VIII, 12, 3.


Sloka : 8.3.5

तानि ह वा एतानि त्रीण्यक्षराणि सतीयमिति

तद्यत्सत्तदमृतमथ यत्ति तन्मर्त्यमथ यद्यं तेनोभे

यच्छति यदनेनोभे यच्छति तस्माद्यमहरहर्वा

एवंवित्स्वर्गं लोकमेति ॥ ८.३.५॥

tāni ha vā etāni trīṇyakṣarāṇi satīyamiti

tadyatsattadamṛtamatha yatti tanmartyamatha yadyaṃ tenobhe

yacchati yadanenobhe yacchati tasmādyamaharaharvā

evaṃvitsvargaṃ lokameti .. 8.3.5..



5. Sa, tī, and yam—these are the three syllables [which represent Brahman]. Sa stands for that which is immortal. Ti stands for that which is mortal. And yam stands for that which controls both the mortal and the immortal. As both [the mortal and the immortal] are controlled by it, it is called yam. The person who knows the significance of these three syllables enjoys divine bliss every day in dreamless sleep.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tāni ha vai etāni trīṇi akṣarāṇi, these are the three syllables; sa tī yam iti, ‘sa’, ‘tī’, and ‘yam’; tat yat sat, that which is ‘sat’ [i.e., ‘sa’]; tat amṛtam, that is immortal; atha, then; yat ti, what is ‘ti’; tat martyam, that is mortal; atha, then; yat yam, what is ‘yam’; tena ubhe yacchati, both are controlled by it; yat anena ubhe yacchati, as both are controlled by it [i.e., by ‘yam’]; tasmāt, therefore; yam, it is ‘yam’; evamvit, one who knows thus; ahaḥ ahaḥ, daily; vai svargam lokam eti, goes to the heavenly world [in deep sleep]. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section. Commentary:- The Upaniṣad says there are three syllables that make up the word satyam—sa, tī, and yam. Sa stands for sat. Sat is derived from the root as, which means ‘existence.’ It is Existence Absolute, eternal. Here the Upaniṣad says, sa is that which is immortal and ti is that which is mortal. We have both immortal and mortal aspects to us. At the transcendental level we are immortal, but at the empirical, or phenomenal, level we are mortal. At the transcendental level there is no ‘I’ or ‘you’. There is no duality at all. There is only one. Where does this universe come from? It comes from that which is immortal. That is to say, the immortal becomes the mortal. The Absolute becomes the relative. The syllable yam stands for saṃyama, to control. It is the Self that controls both the relative and the Absolute. Similarly, one who has realized his true nature has control of both the transcendental and the relative. He is always the same, everywhere—whether in the transcendental world, in samādhi, which is here called sat, or in the phenomenal world, ti, the world that “Evamvit ahaḥ ahaḥ svargam lokam eti”—one who knows this goes every day into heaven. That is to say, when we are in deep sleep we are in svargaloka, the world of peace. We are then one with the Self, resting on the Self. It’s like a bird resting on its nest. It is happy and safe. But sometimes the bird has to go about after food. Similarly, when we wake up we have to be involved in this empirical world. Then there is diversity—no more unity. Śaṅkara says that when even the syllables of satyam, which is the name of Brahman, are so significant, how great then must be the state that the word signifies. Similarly, even the idea ‘I am Brahman’ is so inspiring—what to speak of having the experience itself. Suppose you have been hearing for a long time about Benaras but you have never been there. You have some idea about it and would love to go there. Even the word Benaras excites you. How thrilled you feel then when you at last get there. From our experience of deep sleep we have some idea of what Brahman is like. We know, even from this brief experience, how wonderful it is to be one with the Self. But when we are firmly established in Brahman and our ignorance is gone, what a wonderful thing it is. So, as Śaṅkara says, we have to go on meditating that we are one with Brahman, and gradually this meditation will lead us to the experience itself. The experience is what we need. We have to have that. Swami Vivekananda used to say that religion is realization. Suppose we go on talking about Brahman. This may help us and inspire us. It may even give us some impetus, but that’s all. We must not stop there. Our goal is the experience.

Translation By Max Müller

5. This name Sattyam consists of three syllables, sat-tî-yam [1]. Sat signifies the immortal, t, the mortal, and with yam he binds both. Because he binds both, the immortal and the mortal, therefore it is yam. He who knows this goes day by day into heaven (svarga).

Footnote:

1. We ought probably to read Sattyam, and then Sat-tî-yam. The î in tî would then be the dual of an anubandha ĭ. Instead of yaddhi, I conjecture yatti. See Ait. Âranyaka II, 5, 5.


Sloka : 8.4.1

॥ इति तृतीयः खण्डः ॥

अथ य आत्मा स सेतुर्धृतिरेषां लोकानामसंभेदाय

नैतꣳ सेतुमहोरात्रे तरतो न जरा न मृत्युर्न शोको न

सुकृतं न दुष्कृतꣳ सर्वे पाप्मानोऽतो

निवर्तन्तेऽपहतपाप्मा ह्येष ब्रह्मलोकः ॥ ८.४.१॥

.. iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha ya ātmā sa seturdhṛtireṣāṃ lokānāmasaṃbhedāya

naitagͫ setumahorātre tarato na jarā na mṛtyurna śoko na

sukṛtaṃ na duṣkṛtagͫ sarve pāpmāno'to

nivartante'pahatapāpmā hyeṣa brahmalokaḥ .. 8.4.1..



1. Next, this Self is like a dam. It supports the worlds and protects them from getting mixed up. Day and night cannot cross over this dam, nor can old age, death, bereavement, good actions, and bad actions. All sins turn away from it, for this Brahmaloka is free from evil.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, next; yaḥ ātmā, that Self; saḥ, it; setuḥ, [is like] a dam; vidhṛtiḥ, the support; eṣām lokānām, of these worlds; asambhedāya, for their protection [so that they may remain separate from one another]; ahorātre, day and night; etam setum na tarataḥ, cannot cross over this dam; na jarā, nor old age; na mṛtyuḥ, nor death; na śokaḥ, nor bereavement; na sukṛtam, nor good actions; na duṣkṛtam, nor bad actions; sarve Commentary:- In this world there are so many varieties of things, and each has its role to play. Human beings have their role to play; animals have theirs, and plants have theirs. The sun rises at a certain time. It never fails. Each thing is in its place, doing what it’s supposed to be doing. There should be no mix-up. If there were a mix-up, there would be chaos. Who supervises all this so that everything is in its proper place? It is the Self. The word setu usually means ‘bridge,’ but here it means a dam. Suppose you have a large river and you want to separate the water for some reason or other. You then erect a dam. This keeps the two sides apart and prevents them from mixing. Similarly, the Upaniṣad says, in this phenomenal world the Self acts as a dam so that everything functions as it should, without getting mixed up. The Self stands as a barrier, keeping each thing in its place. It is never failing. Day and night, sorrow, sin, the castes and stages of life, material things—animate or inanimate—whatever there is in the world of diversity, It is the Self that creates all the diversity—good, bad, rich, poor, educated, ignorant. There are so many kinds of people and so many kinds of plants, animals, and objects. The Self not only manifests all this diversity—it also maintains it. It does not want the diversity to disappear, because this diversity is necessary for the phenomenal world to go on. But these divisions do not touch the Self. Nothing can affect it. It is the Master, controlling everything, but it is not controlled by anything. Mṛtyu (death), for instance, is so powerful. Everyone is subject to death, but it cannot overcome this dam, the Self. No blemish or impurity can even approach the Self. It is never affected by the good or bad that exists in the world. It is always the same—constant and pure. The Self is also called here brahma-loka. The Self, the ātman, is Brahman. When you look at the world, you say, ‘Sarvam khalu idam brahma’—all this is Brahman. When you look inside, within you, you say, ‘Aham brahmāsmi’—I am Brahman, or ‘Ayam ātmā brahma’—this self is Brahman. It is the same Self, inside and outside. Śaṅkara says that if you know you are the Self, you are not affected by anything. But how do you realize the Self? Śaṅkara says you realize it by brahmacarya, by continence and self-control.

Translation By Max Müller

1. That Self is a bank [1], a boundary, so that these worlds may not be confounded. Day and night do not pass that bank, nor old age, death, and grief; neither good nor evil deeds. All evil-doers turn back from it, for the world of Brahman is free from all evil.

Footnote:

1. Setu, generally translated by bridge, was originally a bank of earth (mridâdimaya), thrown up to serve as a pathway (pons) through water or a swamp. Such banks exist still in many places, and they serve at the same time as boundaries (maryâdâ) between fields belonging to different properties. Cf. Mait. Up. VII, 7; Kâth Up. III, 2; Talav. Up. comm. ; Mund. Up. II, 2, 5.


Sloka : 8.4.2

तस्माद्वा एतꣳ सेतुं तीर्त्वान्धः सन्ननन्धो भवति

विद्धः सन्नविद्धो भवत्युपतापी सन्ननुपतापी भवति

तस्माद्वा एतꣳ सेतुं तीर्त्वापि नक्तमहरेवाभिनिष्पद्यते

सकृद्विभातो ह्येवैष ब्रह्मलोकः ॥ ८.४.२॥

tasmādvā etagͫ setuṃ tīrtvāndhaḥ sannanandho bhavati

viddhaḥ sannaviddho bhavatyupatāpī sannanupatāpī bhavati

tasmādvā etagͫ setuṃ tīrtvāpi naktamaharevābhiniṣpadyate

sakṛdvibhāto hyevaiṣa brahmalokaḥ .. 8.4.2..



2. Therefore, by crossing this dam, if you are blind you do not feel you are blind. Similarly, if you are hurt, you do not feel you are hurt, and if you are mentally upset, you no longer feel the sorrow. This is why if you cross this dam, even night will be like day, for this world of Brahman is always full of light.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tasmāt, this is why; vai etam setum tīrtvā, when crossing this dam; andhaḥ san, if a person is blind; anandhaḥ bhavati, he behaves as if he is not blind; viddhaḥ san, if a person is hurt; aviddhaḥ bhavati, he behaves as if he is not hurt; upatāpī san, if a person is mentally upset; anupatāpī bhavati, he behaves as if he is not mentally upset; tasmāt, this is why; vai etam setum tīrtvā, when crossing this dam; api naktam, even night; ahaḥ eva abhiniṣpadyate, looks like day; hi eva eṣaḥ brahmalokaḥ, for this Brahmaloka; sakṛt vibhātaḥ, is always manifest. Commentary:- Again and again the Upaniṣad stresses knowledge of the Self. Why? This knowledge is necessary for us to live in this world; otherwise we are not safe. We are vulnerable to all the forces of this phenomenal world. These forces may sweep us off our feet. Sri Ramakrishna used to say, ‘Tie the knowledge of Advaita in the corner of your cloth and then go wherever you like.’ That is, once we know we are the Self, nothing can affect us. We are like that dam, without any change. A person may be a householder or a monk—it doesn’t matter. He is safe. Here, the Upaniṣad says, you may be blind, but you do not feel you are blind. The blindness does not affect you. It affects the body, but you know you are not the body. Similarly, you may have some disease or illness in the body, but you do not feel you are ill. If you are conscious of the body then you will also be conscious of its limitations. Blindness is a limitation, so you will be conscious that you are blind. But the pure Self is not conditioned by anything. If you feel you are the Self you are not subject to the limitations of the body. This applies to the mind also. Swami Turiyananda would now and then get carbuncles that would have to be removed by surgery. He would not let the doctor give him any anaesthetic, however. He would ask the doctor to give him a few minutes’ warning, and he would meditate for a while. Then he would tell the doctor he was ready. The carbuncle might be large and require a long time for the surgery, but Swami Turiyananda would not show any sign When Swami Shivananda was old he suffered from asthma. Sometimes he had no sleep at all during the night, but in the morning people would come and find him very cheerful. They would ask him, ‘Sir, how are you?’ and he would smile and say, ‘I am fine.’ Then he would say:- ‘Look, if you are asking about the body, then I will say this body is old and diseased. But by the grace of my Master, I know I am not this body, so I am not affected by it.’ Suppose there is something wrong with the shirt you are wearing. You would not think there is something wrong with you. You know you are independent of the shirt. Similarly, your body is just a covering, as it were. You are independent of your body. The example the Upaniṣad gives of the dam is very apt. A dam stands supreme. Nothing can affect it. Similarly, if you know your true nature, you will stand firm like a rock even when waves of sorrow come and try to overwhelm you. Disease, poverty, humiliation—all kinds of misfortunes may come, but they will all be forced back without making any impression on you, as if there is a dam that stands between the world and your Self. The scriptures are constantly reminding us that this is what we are missing. Why else should we care for Self-knowledge? All this is just to encourage us and to invite us to taste the bliss of Self-knowledge. Lots of people say:- ‘What do you mean by Self-knowledge? I know who I am. What else should I know?’ But do they know they are not the body? Do they know they cannot be affected by old age, disease, or death, or by poverty or misfortune? Most people are slaves of their circumstances. Only one who knows his real Self is free. Most of our external conditions cannot be changed. They are not under our control. If it is summer it will be hot. Can you change it? No, but you can change yourself. Similarly, with other circumstances in our lives. Our attitude should be:- ‘Well, I don’t care. I will face this problem. It can never affect my real Self.’ When you have this attitude, you know you will not be cowed by adversities and external circumstances. This is the message of the Upaniṣads and also of the Gītā. In the Gītā Kṛṣṇa again and again talks about the sthitā-prajña, the person of steady wisdom, who is firmly rooted in Self-knowledge, and whom nothing can sway. When Alexander the Great came to India, he met a yogī and was so impressed with him that he wanted to bring him to Greece. Alexander tried in many ways to tempt the yogī to go to Greece, but nothing worked. Then Alexander threatened to kill him. The yogī just laughed and said:- ‘You have never told such a lie. You cannot kill me. You may kill the body, but I am not the body. I am the Self.’ The Upaniṣad says that when you know the Self, night and day are the same to you. It may appear to be night to others, but for you there is always light. You always have inner light. You always see yourself as Brahman. Śaṅkara says that the word Brahmaloka here means the state of Brahman. Whether you are blind or not, whether you are healthy or not, you are always conscious that you are Brahman. Not for a moment do you forget it.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Therefore he who has crossed that bank, if blind, ceases to be blind; if wounded, ceases to be wounded; if afflicted, ceases to be afflicted. Therefore when that bank has been crossed, night becomes day indeed, for the world of Brahman is lighted up once for all [1].

Footnote:

1. Kh. Up. III, 1, 3.


Sloka : 8.4.3

तद्य एवैतं ब्रह्मलोकं ब्रह्मचर्येणानुविन्दन्ति

तेषामेवैष ब्रह्मलोकस्तेषाꣳ सर्वेषु लोकेषु कामचारो

भवति ॥ ८.४.३॥

tadya evaitaṃ brahmalokaṃ brahmacaryeṇānuvindanti

teṣāmevaiṣa brahmalokasteṣāgͫ sarveṣu lokeṣu kāmacāro

bhavati .. 8.4.3..



3. Those who attain this Brahmaloka through brahmacarya become the masters of Brahmaloka. They can visit all worlds as they like.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tat ye, those who; era etain brahmalokam, this Brahmaloka; brahmacaryeṇa, through the practice of brahmacarya; anuvindanti, attain; teṣām era, for such people; eṣaḥ brahmalokaḥ, is this Brahmaloka; teṣām, for them; sarveṣu lokeṣu, to all the worlds; kāmacāraḥ bhavati, they can go as they like. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section. Commentary:- There is a wonderful statement in one of the scriptures that says scholars talk about sweets but they never taste them. That is to say, the scholars talk about things they know nothing about. The scholars, it says, get only takra, whey. But the yogīs are the ones who taste the kṣīra, the thickened, sweet milk. Unless you eat the kṣīra, how do you know what it is like? Similarly, you may talk very well about Brahman. What you say may sound very good. But unless you have the experience of Brahman, you can’t understand what it is like. Here the Upaniṣad says, how do you get this experience? Through brahmacarya, self-control. The word brahmacarya means brahma carati—that is, one who is always at the level of Brahman. The scriptures say there are two paths open to us—śreyas, the good, and preyas, the pleasant, the attractive. One who practises brahmacarya will reflect on these two and say:- ‘I shall not accept that which is merely attractive. I shall only have śreyas, that which is the highest.’ Religion does not come by magic. It comes through self-discipline, and that means a lot of hard work, sweat, and tears. You have to yearn for it and cry for it, saying, ‘Oh when am I going to succeed?’ Sri Ramakrishna would often have no sleep at night and no food for the whole day. Sometimes someone would have to force food into his mouth in order to get him to eat. He had no body consciousness. Moreover, he would never accept money. The Upaniṣad says that if you practise brahmacarya you are free and everything is at your disposal. But, like Ramakrishna, your attitude is:- ‘I don’t care for all this. I don’t want anything in all these worlds. I want only Brahman.’ Vedānta says, you are free because you feel you are one with everything. Everything is within your grasp. There is no barrier between you and the world outside. Now there is a barrier. We want to see something because we think it is separate from us, outside of us. But when this idea of separation ceases, we feel we are everything.

Translation By Max Müller

3. And that world of Brahman belongs to those only who find it by abstinence--for them there is freedom in all the worlds.


Sloka : 8.5.1

॥ इति चतुर्थः खण्डः ॥

अथ यद्यज्ञ इत्याचक्षते ब्रह्मचर्यमेव तद्ब्रह्मचर्येण

ह्येव यो ज्ञाता तं विन्दतेऽथ यदिष्टमित्याचक्षते

ब्रह्मचर्यमेव तद्ब्रह्मचर्येण ह्येवेष्ट्वात्मानमनुविन्दते

॥ ८.५.१॥

.. iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yadyajña ityācakṣate brahmacaryameva tadbrahmacaryeṇa

hyeva yo jñātā taṃ vindate'tha yadiṣṭamityācakṣate

brahmacaryameva tadbrahmacaryeṇa hyeveṣṭvātmānamanuvindate

.. 8.5.1..



1. Then that which is known as yajña [sacrifice] is brahmacarya. This is because one who knows the Self attains Brahmaloka through brahmacarya. Again, that which is known as iṣṭa [worship] is brahmacarya, for the desired Self is attained through brahmacarya.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yat, that which; yajñaḥ iti ācakṣate, is called ‘yajña’ [sacrifice]; tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya; hi, because; yaḥ jñātā, one who knows this; brahmacaryeṇa, through brahmacarya; tam vindate, attains that [Brahmaloka]; atha, then; yat iṣṭam iti ācakṣate, that which is called ‘iṣṭa’ [worship]; tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya; hi, because; brahmacaryeṇa eva, through brahmacarya; iṣṭvā ātmānam anuvindate, one attains the desired Self. Commentary:- Whatever you do with the idea of self-restraint is brahmacarya. Worship is brahmacarya; fasting is brahmacarya; observing silence is brahmacarya. If you retire from the world and go to the forest, that also is brahmacarya. The whole idea is self-restraint. Many people observe silence for a certain length of time. Gandhiji, for instance, would observe absolute silence once a week. Some people may say this is silly, but it’s not. Such observances bring strength. Suppose something has provoked you and you are angry, but through strength of mind you get control of your emotions and you do not retaliate. Similarly, you may feel tempted to do something you shouldn’t and you refuse to do it. Or you may see some good food and feel tempted to eat something that is bad for you, but then you restrain yourself. Self-control in any form is brahmacarya. It is brahmacarya because it ultimately leads to Self-realization and union with Brahman. The Upaniṣad says here that the performance of a sacrifice is also brahmacarya because there are many restrictions imposed on the sacrificer. For instance, he cannot eat until he finishes the worship. The word for sacrifice is yajña, which comes from yaḥ Another reason why worship is called brahmacarya is that the worship is done to a particular deity (iṣṭa), and you must meditate on that deity. That is, you are wishing (iṣ) for that deity, or wishing for your union with that deity. The only way to control the mind is through mental strength. According to Vedānta, strength is not outside. It is within. And self-control is the source of strength. First and foremost is brahmacarya. In fact, it is first and last. It’s not that you practise self-control for some time and then you say, ‘I don’t need to observe this any more.’ No, all through we need self-control. Gradually, however, it becomes natural. By constantly observing truthfulness, you find you are incapable of saying what is immoral or wrong.

Translation By Max Müller

1. What people call sacrifice (yagña), that is really abstinence (brahmakarya). For he who knows, obtains that (world of Brahman, which others obtain by sacrifice), by means of abstinence. What people call sacrifice (ishta), that is really abstinence, for by abstinence, having searched (ishtvâ), he obtains the Self.


Sloka : 8.5.2

अथ यत्सत्त्रायणमित्याचक्षते ब्रह्मचर्यमेव तद्ब्रह्मचर्येण

ह्येव सत आत्मनस्त्राणं विन्दतेऽथ यन्मौनमित्याचक्षते

ब्रह्मचर्यमेव तब्ब्रह्मचर्येण ह्येवात्मानमनुविद्य मनुते '॥ ८.५.२॥

atha yatsattrāyaṇamityācakṣate brahmacaryameva tadbrahmacaryeṇa

hyeva sata ātmanastrāṇaṃ vindate'tha yanmaunamityācakṣate

brahmacaryameva tabbrahmacaryeṇa hyevātmānamanuvidya manute '.. 8.5.2..



2. Then, that which is known as ‘Sattrāyaṇa’ [a sacrifice lasting a long time] is brahmacarya, for it is through brahmacarya that the individual self gets liberated [attains union with the Cosmic Self]. Then, that which is called ‘mauna’ [silence] is brahmacarya, for through brahmacarya one realizes the Self, and having realized the Self one remains absorbed in the thought of it.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yat sattrāyaṇam iti ācakṣate, that which is called a ‘Sattrāyaṇa’ [a long sacrifice]; tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya; hi, for; brahmacaryeṇa eva, through brahmacarya; sataḥ, from Sat [i.e., the Cosmic Self]; ātmanaḥ trāṇam vindate, the individual self attains its liberation [union with the Cosmic Self]; atha, then; yat maunam iti ācakṣate, that which is called ‘mauna’ [silence]; tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya; hi, for; ātmānam anuvidya, knowing the Self; brahmacaryeṇa eva, through brahmacarya; manute, one remains absorbed in thinking. Commentary:- There is a particular sacrifice called Sattrāyaṇa, which involves the services of many priests. It is a big affair. The Upaniṣad says it is considered brahmacarya to perform this Sattrāyaṇa sacrifice because through Existence (sat) a person gets protection (trāṇa) for oneself (ātmana). You always feel you are protected by Sat, so you are sure of yourself. In the same way, when you are practising brahmacarya, you know nothing is going to sway you from the vow you have taken. As the Gītā says, the self is your own friend and it is also your own enemy. By practising brahmacarya you will gradually become stronger, and as you grow Mauna, a vow of silence, is also a form of brahmacarya. We all know that when we are doing something serious we like to be quiet. We don’t like to talk much, nor do we like our mind to be restless. We want to be able to fix our mind on what we are doing. Similarly, brahmacarya means that our mind is fixed on Brahman. We are in touch with Brahman, always reminding ourselves that we are not this body and not this mind. We are the Self. We are Brahman. So taking a vow of silence (mauna) means that a person contemplates, or meditates, (manute) on his identity with Brahman. Śaṅkara says that this meditation on Brahman comes after seeking the help of the scriptures and the teacher. Both are necessary. The scriptures give you guidelines, but the teacher takes you by the hand and leads you to the goal.

Translation By Max Müller

2. What people call sacrifice (sattrâyana), that is really abstinence, for by abstinence he obtains from the Sat (the true), the safety (trâna) of the Self. What people call the vow of silence (mauna), that is really abstinence, for he who by abstinence has found out the Self, meditates (manute).


Sloka : 8.5.3

अथ यदनाशकायनमित्याचक्षते ब्रह्मचर्यमेव तदेष

ह्यात्मा न नश्यति यं ब्रह्मचर्येणानुविन्दतेऽथ

यदरण्यायनमित्याचक्षते ब्रह्मचर्यमेव तदरश्च ह वै

ण्यश्चार्णवौ ब्रह्मलोके तृतीयस्यामितो दिवि तदैरं

मदीयꣳ सरस्तदश्वत्थः सोमसवनस्तदपराजिता

पूर्ब्रह्मणः प्रभुविमितꣳ हिरण्मयम् ॥ ८.५.३॥

atha yadanāśakāyanamityācakṣate brahmacaryameva tadeṣa

hyātmā na naśyati yaṃ brahmacaryeṇānuvindate'tha

yadaraṇyāyanamityācakṣate brahmacaryameva tadaraśca ha vai

ṇyaścārṇavau brahmaloke tṛtīyasyāmito divi tadairaṃ

madīyagͫ sarastadaśvatthaḥ somasavanastadaparājitā

pūrbrahmaṇaḥ prabhuvimitagͫ hiraṇmayam .. 8.5.3..



3. Then, that which is known as ‘anāśakāyana’ [the path of fasting] is brahmacarya, for through brahmacarya one attains the Self which is immortal. Then, that which is called ‘araṇyāyana’ [life in the forest] is brahmacarya. This is because in Brahmaloka, which is the third world from the earth, there are two oceans called Ara and Ṇya. There also one finds a lake called Airammadīya [so-called because its waters are intoxicating], a peepal tree always exuding soma juice, a city called Aparājitā [the Invincible] belonging to Brahmā, and a canopy of gold specially made by the Lord.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, next; yat anāśakāyanam iti ācakṣate, that which is called ‘anāśakāyana’ [i.e., anāśaka + ayana, the path of fasting]; tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya; hi, for; eṣaḥ ātmā, this Self; yam brahmacaryeṇa anuvindate, which one attains through brahmacarya; na naśyati, never perishes; atha, then; yat araṇyāyanam iti ācakṣate, that which is called ‘araṇyāyana’ [i.e., araṇya + ayana, life in the forest]; tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya; tat, there; araḥ ca ha vai ṇyaḥ ca, Ara and Ṇya; arṇavau, are the two oceans; brahmaloke, in Brahmaloka; tṛtīyasyām itaḥ divi, in the third heaven from here [i.e., from the earth]; tat, [and] there; airammadīyam saraḥ, is a lake called ‘Airammadīya’; tat aśvatthaḥ, [and] there is a peepal tree; somasavanaḥ, which exudes soma juice; tat aparājitā pūḥ, [and] there is the city Aparājitā [the ‘Invincible’]; brahmaṇaḥ, belonging to Brahmā; prabhu-vimitam, built specially by the Lord; hiraṇmayam, [a canopy] made of gold. Commentary:- When you practise brahmacarya, you are always moving on the plane of the Self. Fasting (anāśakāyana) is also called brahmacarya, because when you fast you attain (ayana) the Self that is protected (anāśaka). So also, if you retire to the forest, that is brahmacarya. You say, ‘I’ve had enough of this drama of life,’ so you go and live in the forest to meditate on Brahman. Then finally, by practising continence and self-control, you become transformed and you enter the realm of Brahman. In that world there is a vast lake which is filled with a sweet drink. When you taste that drink you are exhilarated. There is also a banyan tree from which streams of nectar flow. You are now in a world which is not meant for the weak. Only those with strong will-power, who have practised continence and self-control over the years, can enter this world. It is the world of bliss. The Upaniṣad says this is the third world. The first world is this earth, the second is the intermediate region, and the third is this heaven. You are close to Brahman here, and you are happy and enjoy yourself.

Translation By Max Müller

3. What people call fasting (anâsakâyana), that is really abstinence, for that Self does not perish (na nasyati), which we find out by abstinence. What people call a hermit's life (aranyâyana), that is really abstinence. Ara [1] and Nya are two lakes in the world of Brahman, in the third heaven from hence; and there is the lake Airanimadîya, and the Asvattha tree, showering down Soma, and the city of Brahman (Hiranyagarbha) Aparâgitâ [2], and the golden Prabhuvimita (the hall built by Prabhu, Brahman).

Footnote:

1. In the Kaush. Br. Up. I, 3, the lake is called Ara, at least according to the commentator. 2. In the Kaush. Br. Up. Aparâgita is not pûh, but âyatanam.


Sloka : 8.5.4

तद्य एवैतवरं च ण्यं चार्णवौ ब्रह्मलोके

ब्रह्मचर्येणानुविन्दन्ति तेषामेवैष ब्रह्मलोकस्तेषाꣳ

सर्वेषु लोकेषु कामचारो भवति ॥ ८.५.४॥

tadya evaitavaraṃ ca ṇyaṃ cārṇavau brahmaloke

brahmacaryeṇānuvindanti teṣāmevaiṣa brahmalokasteṣāgͫ

sarveṣu lokeṣu kāmacāro bhavati .. 8.5.4..



4. When they attain through brahmacarya the two oceans, Ara and Ṇya, in Brahmaloka, that Brahmaloka is theirs, and they can then move freely in all the worlds.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tat ye, those who; etau arṇavau, these two oceans; aram ca ṇyam ca, Ara and Ṇya; brahmaloke, in Brahmaloka; anuvindanti, attain; brahmacaryeṇa, through brahmacarya; teṣām eva, for them; eṣaḥ brahmalokaḥ, is this Brahmaloka; sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds; teṣām kāmacāraḥ bhavati, they can go freely. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section, Commentary:- Brahmaloka is not a physical region like this earth. It is a state of being. It is next to liberation. You are almost free there, but not quite. Vedānta says there are four states. The first and the highest is when a person merges immediately into Brahman at the time of death. The next state is Brahmaloka. After that is Svargaloka, heaven. This is where people who have done good things go after death. They are very happy there, but they must eventually come back to earth. The majority of people, however, fall into the fourth category. After death they must immediately come back to this world. They have desires, and in order to fulfil their desires they must have a body.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Now that world of Brahman belongs to those who find the lakes Ara and Nya in the world of Brahman by means of abstinence; for them there is freedom in all the worlds [1].

Footnote:

1. The fifth khanda is chiefly meant to recommend brahmakarya or abstinence from all worldly enjoyments, enjoined on the brahmakârin, the student, as a means of obtaining a knowledge of Brahman. But instead of showing that such abstinence is indispensable for a proper concentration of our intellectual faculties, we are told that abstinence is the same as certain sacrifices; and this is shown, not by arguments, but by a number of very far-fetched plays on words. These it is impossible to render in any translation, nay, they hardly deserve being translated. Thus abstinence is said to be identical with sacrifice, yagña, because yo gñâtâ, 'he who knows,' has a certain similarity with yagña. Ishta, another kind of sacrifice, is compared with eshanâ, search; sattrâyana with Sat, the True, the Brahman, and trâyana, protection; mauna, silence, with manana, meditating (which may be right); anâsakâyana, fasting, with nas, to perish, and aranyâgana, a hermit's life, with ara, nya, and ayana, going to the two lakes Ara and Nya, which are believed to exist in the legendary world of Brahman. Nothing can be more absurd. Having once struck the note of Brahmanic legends, such as we find it, for instance, in the Kaushîtaki-brâhmana-upanishad, the author goes on. Besides the lakes Ara and Nya (in the Kaushîtaki-brâhmana-upanishad we have only one lake, called Âra), he mentions the Airammadîya lake, and explains it as aira (irâ annam, tanmaya airo mandas, tena pûrnam airam) and madîya, delightful. The Asvattha tree, which pours down Soma, is not tortured into anything else, except that Soma is explained as the immortal, or nectar. Aparâgita becomes the city of Brahman, because it can be conquered by no one except those who have practised abstinence. And the hall which elsewhere is called Vibhu-pramita becomes Prabhu-vimitam, or Prabhu-vinirmita, made by Prabhu, i.e. Brahman. All the fulfilled desires, as enumerated in khandas 2-5, whether the finding again of our fathers and mothers, or entering the Brahmaloka with its lakes and palaces, must be taken, not as material (sthûla), but as mental only (mânasa). On that account, however, they are by no means considered as false or unreal, as little as dreams are. Dreams are false and unreal, relatively only, i. e. relatively to what we see, when we awake; but not in themselves. Whatever we see in waking, also, has been shown to be false; because it consists of forms and names only; yet these forms and names have a true element in them, viz. the Sat. Before we know that Sat, all the objects we see in waking seem true; as dreams seem true in dreaming. But when once we awake from our waking by true knowledge, we see that nothing is true but the Sat. When we imagine we see a serpent, and then discover that it is a rope, the serpent disappears as false, but what was true in it, the rope, remains true.


Sloka : 8.6.1

॥ इति पञ्चमः खण्डः ॥

अथ या एता हृदयस्य नाड्यस्ताः पिङ्गलस्याणिम्नस्तिष्ठन्ति

शुक्लस्य नीलस्य पीतस्य लोहितस्येत्यसौ वा आदित्यः

पिङ्गल एष शुक्ल एष नील एष पीत एष लोहितः

॥ ८.६.१॥

.. iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha yā etā hṛdayasya nāḍyastāḥ piṅgalasyāṇimnastiṣṭhanti

śuklasya nīlasya pītasya lohitasyetyasau vā ādityaḥ

piṅgala eṣa śukla eṣa nīla eṣa pīta eṣa lohitaḥ

.. 8.6.1..



1. Then these veins connected with the heart are each filled with a thin liquid, coloured reddish-yellow, white, blue, yellow, and red. The sun there also has these colours—reddish-yellow, white, blue, yellow, and red.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yaḥ etāḥ hṛdayasya nāḍyaḥ, these veins which are in the heart; taḥ, they; piṅgalasya aṇimnaḥ tiṣṭhanti, are filled with a very thin, tawny-coloured liquid; śuklasya, of white; nīlasya, of blue; pītasya, of yellow; lohitasya iti, of red; asau vai ādityaḥ, the sun there; piṅgalaḥ, is tawny; eṣaḥ śuklaḥ, it is white; eṣaḥ nīlaḥ, it is blue; eṣaḥ pītaḥ, it is yellow; eṣaḥ lohitaḥ, it is red. Commentary:- The heart is the place where one meditates on Brahman. The heart is said to be shaped like a lotus bud, and it also has some similarities to the sun. The sun emits its rays, which spread out in all directions. Similarly, the veins arise from the heart and spread out in all directions. These veins are filled with a very thin substance. This substance changes its colour, and along with it, the veins also change colour. Sometimes it is reddish-yellow, sometimes blue, sometimes white, etc. The sun changes its colour likewise.

Translation By Max Müller

1. Now those arteries of the heart consist of a brown substance, of a white, blue, yellow, and red substance, and so is the sun brown, white, blue, yellow, and red.


Sloka : 8.6.2

तद्यथा महापथ आतत उभौ ग्रामौ गच्छतीमं चामुं

चैवमेवैता आदित्यस्य रश्मय उभौ लोकौ गच्छन्तीमं चामुं

चामुष्मादादित्यात्प्रतायन्ते ता आसु नाडीषु सृप्ता

आभ्यो नाडीभ्यः प्रतायन्ते तेऽमुष्मिन्नादित्ये सृप्ताः

॥ ८.६.२॥

tadyathā mahāpatha ātata ubhau grāmau gacchatīmaṃ cāmuṃ

caivamevaitā ādityasya raśmaya ubhau lokau gacchantīmaṃ cāmuṃ

cāmuṣmādādityātpratāyante tā āsu nāḍīṣu sṛptā

ābhyo nāḍībhyaḥ pratāyante te'muṣminnāditye sṛptāḥ

.. 8.6.2..



2. Just as a big, broad road connects one village with another one which is far-off, in the same way, the rays emerge from the sun and reach out to a person, connecting one with the other. After entering the veins of that person, they emerge from them and then go back into the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tat yathā, just as; ātataḥ mahāpathaḥ, a long and broad road; ubhau grāmau gacchati, connects two villages; imam ca amum ca, this one with that; evam eva, like that; etāḥ ādityasya raśmayaiḥ these rays [which are blue, yellow, etc.] of the sun; ubhau lokau gacchanti, connect two worlds; imam ca amum ca, this [the human body] with that [the sun]; tāḥ, these [rays]; amuṣmāt ādityāt, from the solar region; pratāyante, emerge; āsu nāḍīṣu, into these veins; sṛptāḥ, enter; te, these [rays]; ābhyaḥ nāḍībhyaḥ pratāyante, emerge from the veins; te amuṣmin āditye sṛptāḥ, [and] they go back into the solar region. Commentary:- How are the rays of the sun related to the veins of a human body? The Upaniṣad compares the rays to a big, wide road connecting two villages far away from each other. The rays of the sun go out and enter the veins of a human body, and then they return to the sun.  

Translation By Max Müller

2. As a very long highway goes to two places, to one at the beginning, and to another at the end, so do the rays of the sun go to both worlds, to this one and to the other. They start from the sun, and enter into those arteries; they start from those arteries, and enter into the sun.


Sloka : 8.6.3

तद्यत्रैतत्सुप्तः समस्त्ः सम्प्रसन्नः स्वप्नं न विजानात्यासु

तदा नाडीषु सृप्तो भवति तं न कश्चन पाप्मा स्पृशति

तेजसा हि तदा सम्पन्नो भवति ॥ ८.६.३॥

tadyatraitatsuptaḥ samastḥ samprasannaḥ svapnaṃ na vijānātyāsu

tadā nāḍīṣu sṛpto bhavati taṃ na kaścana pāpmā spṛśati

tejasā hi tadā sampanno bhavati .. 8.6.3..



3. When a person is sound asleep, all his organs are inactive and quiet. He is free from all worries, and he does not have any dreams. The organs then disappear into the veins. No sin can affect him then, for the rays of the sun have surrounded him.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tat yatra; then when; etat suptaḥ, a person is sleeping; samastaḥ, with all the organs quiet; samprasannaḥ, free from worry; svapnam na vijānāti, has no dreams; tadā, then; āsu nāḍīṣu, into the [blue, yellow, etc.] veins; sṛptaḥ bhavati, he enters; tam, him; na kaścana pāpmā spṛśati, no sin whatever can touch; hi tadā, for then; tejasā sampannaḥ bhavati, he is surrounded by the rays of the sun. Commentary:- There are two kinds of sleep:- one kind in which you have dreams, and another in which you have no dreams. The latter is called suṣupti. In suṣupti all your organs merge within you, and this means you have no contact whatsoever with the world outside. The energy of the sun fills your veins, and your sense organs then remain inactive. As a result, there is no way anything good or bad can touch you or contaminate you. You are therefore in your true state—free and pure.

Translation By Max Müller

3. And when a man is asleep, reposing, and at perfect rest, so that he sees no dream [1], then he has entered into those arteries. Then no evil touches him, for he has obtained the light (of the sun).

Footnote:

1. Svapna in Sanskrit is both somnus and somnium. Hence one might translate also, 'so that he is not aware that he is asleep,' which in some respects would seem even more appropriate in our passage; cf. VIII, 11, 1.


Sloka : 8.6.4

अथ यत्रैतदबलिमानं नीतो भवति तमभित आसीना

आहुर्जानासि मां जानासि मामिति स

यावदस्माच्छरीरादनुत्क्रान्तो भवति तावज्जानाति

॥ ८.६.४॥

atha yatraitadabalimānaṃ nīto bhavati tamabhita āsīnā

āhurjānāsi māṃ jānāsi māmiti sa

yāvadasmāccharīrādanutkrānto bhavati tāvajjānāti

.. 8.6.4..



4. Then when a person becomes weak, his relations sit around him and keep asking:- ‘Do you know me? Do you know me?’ As long as he has not left the body, he is able to recognize them.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yatra, when; etat, a person; abalimānam, weakness; nītaḥ bhavati, is reduced to; tam abhitaḥ, around him; āsīnāḥ, those sitting; āhaḥ, say; jānāsi mām jānāsi mām iti, do you know me, do you know me; saḥ, he; yāvat, as long as; asmāt śarīrāt, from this body; anutkrāntaḥ bhavati, does not leave; tāvat jānāti, that long he knows [them]. Commentary:- When a person is dying, he is surrounded by his relatives and friends, and they keep asking him:- ‘Do you know me? Do you recognize us?’ As long as there is life left in his body he can recognize them. But when he has left the body, he cannot answer, because the body cannot speak without him.

Translation By Max Müller

4. And when a man falls ill, then those who sit round him, say, 'Do you know me? Do you know me?' As long as he has not departed from this body, he knows them.


Sloka : 8.6.5

अथ यत्रैतदस्माच्छरीरादुत्क्रामत्यथैतैरेव

रश्मिभिरूर्ध्वमाक्रमते स ओमिति वा होद्वा मीयते

स यावत्क्षिप्येन्मनस्तावदादित्यं गच्छत्येतद्वै खलु

लोकद्वारं विदुषां प्रपदनं निरोधोऽविदुषाम् ॥ ८.६.५॥

atha yatraitadasmāccharīrādutkrāmatyathaitaireva

raśmibhirūrdhvamākramate sa omiti vā hodvā mīyate

sa yāvatkṣipyenmanastāvadādityaṃ gacchatyetadvai khalu

lokadvāraṃ viduṣāṃ prapadanaṃ nirodho'viduṣām .. 8.6.5..



5. Then when a person leaves the body, he goes upward with the help of these rays. If he dies while meditating on Om, his going up is assured; otherwise not. In the amount of time it takes his mind to move from one thought to another he can reach the realm of the sun. The sun is the gateway to Brahmaloka. Those who known the meaning of Om and think of it at the time of death enter Brahmaloka, but those who are ignorant of it have no chance of entering.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yatra, when; etat, this [person]; asmāt śarīrāt, from this body; utkrāmati, leaves; atha, then; etaiḥ eva raśmibhiḥ, by these rays; ūrdhvam ākramate, is carried upward; saḥ, he; om iti, by meditating on Om; vā ha ut mīyate, he surely goes up; vā, or [i.e., otherwise not]; yāvat, in the time that; manaḥ kṣipyet, the mind moves; tāvat, in that time; saḥ ādityam gacchati, he goes to the realm of the sun; etat vai, that [sun]; lokadvāram khalu, is the gateway [to the world of Brahman]; viduṣām prapadanam, for those who know [this Om] it is the entrance; nirodhaḥ aviduṣām, for the ignorant, entry is barred. Commentary:- Brahmaloka. Those who know the meaning of Om and think of it at the time of death enter Brahmaloka, but those who are ignorant of it have no chance of entering. What happens to a person when he dies? If he is a good person and has been meditating on Om, at the time of death he will try to meditate on Om in the heart. In Hinduism, it is the practice for religious people to die thinking of God. Here the Upaniṣad suggests meditation on Om. Then when the dying person leaves the body, he quickly goes through the sun rays to the realm of the sun. How quickly? As quick as the mind can move. Suppose we think of someone who lives very close to us. Then we think of someone in England, or somewhere else far away. That is how fast the mind can move. Similarly, that is how fast it takes for a person to reach the sun. The Upaniṣad says that the sun is the door to Brahmaloka. If you have meditated on your oneness with Om, then you go through this door to Brahmaloka. But what if a person is not religious and does not think of God or Om at the time of death? Then that door is closed for him. He cannot enter within. Vedānta says, you are the architect of your own fate. A good person will have a good world to go to. And if he knows his true nature, he will go right to Brahmaloka. But those who still have desires are not free. They must stay in lower regions to wait for their rebirth.

Translation By Max Müller

5. But when he departs from this body, then he departs upwards by those very rays (towards the worlds which he has gained by merit, not by knowledge); or he goes out while meditating on Om [1] (and thus securing an entrance into the Brahmaloka). And while his mind is failing, he is going to the sun. For the sun is the door of the world (of Brahman). Those who know, walk in; those who do not know, are shut out.

Footnote:

1. According to the explanation given of the Om in the Upanishads, and more particularly in the Dahara-vidyâ contained in this Prapâthaka.


Sloka : 8.6.6

तदेष श्लोकः । शतं चैका च हृदयस्य नाड्यस्तासां

मूर्धानमभिनिःसृतैका । तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति

विष्वङ्ङन्या उत्क्रमणे भवन्त्युत्क्रमणे भवन्ति ॥ ८.६.६॥

tadeṣa ślokaḥ . śataṃ caikā ca hṛdayasya nāḍyastāsāṃ

mūrdhānamabhiniḥsṛtaikā . tayordhvamāyannamṛtatvameti

viṣvaṅṅanyā utkramaṇe bhavantyutkramaṇe bhavanti .. 8.6.6..



6. There is a verse about this:- There are a hundred and one arteries connected with the heart. One of them goes up to the top of the head. A person who goes up following this artery attains immortality. The other arteries go in different directions and cause one to depart from the body in other ways.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, there is a verse about this; śatam ca ekā ca, one hundred and one; hṛdayasya nāḍyaḥ, arteries of the heart; tāsām ekā, one of them; mūrdhānam abhiniḥsṛtā, extends to the top of the head; tayā, by that [artery]; urdhvam āyan, going up; amṛtatvam eti, one attains immortality; anyāḥ, as regards the others; viṣvan utkramaṇe bhavanti utkramaṇe bhavanti, they cause one to depart from the body in different directions, they cause one to depart. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section. Commentary:- The Upaniṣad says, there are a hundred and one arteries, and one of these goes up to the crown of the head. That is the sūrya nāḍī, the passage to the sun, described in the previous verse. It goes from the heart to the top of the head. Those who depart from the body through this passage attain immortality—that is, liberation. But what happens to other people? Those who depart through other passages must be reborn. They may be reborn as a human being, or they may be reborn as an animal, or even as an insect. But please note:- It is the same Self that is a human being, an animal, and an insect. From an amoeba to the state of Brahman, it is the same Consciousness. You may start as an amoeba, never mind. If you are Brahman, you are always Brahman, whether you have a good body or not. You may not know you are Brahman. But that does not change the fact that you are Brahman. You may think you are just an amoeba, because you identify yourself with an amoeba body. Similarly, you may think you are a dog because you have a dog body. Or you may think you are a human being because you are in a human body. But this is all ignorance. Your goal is to realize yourself as Brahman, and, no matter what kind of body you have now, some day you will reach that goal.

Translation By Max Müller

6. There is this verse [1]:- 'There are a hundred and one arteries of the heart; one of them penetrates the crown of the head; moving upwards by it a man reaches the immortal; the others serve for departing in different directions, yea, in different directions [2].'

Footnote:

1. 2.


Sloka : 8.7.1

॥ इति षष्ठः खण्डः ॥

य आत्मापहतपाप्मा विजरो विमृत्युर्विशोको

विजिघत्सोऽपिपासः सत्यकामः सत्यसंकल्पः सोऽन्वेष्टव्यः

स विजिज्ञासितव्यः स सर्वाꣳश्च लोकानाप्नोति

सर्वाꣳश्च कामान्यस्तमात्मानमनुविद्य विजानातीति ह

प्रजापतिरुवाच ॥ ८.७.१॥

.. iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ya ātmāpahatapāpmā vijaro vimṛtyurviśoko

vijighatso'pipāsaḥ satyakāmaḥ satyasaṃkalpaḥ so'nveṣṭavyaḥ

sa vijijñāsitavyaḥ sa sarvāgͫśca lokānāpnoti

sarvāgͫśca kāmānyastamātmānamanuvidya vijānātīti ha

prajāpatiruvāca .. 8.7.1..



1. Prajāpati once said:- ‘The Self is free from sin, free from old age, free from death, free from sorrow, and free from hunger and thirst. It is the cause of desire for Truth and for commitment to Truth. This Self has to be sought for and thoroughly known. The person who has sought for and known the Self attains all worlds and all desires’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Yaḥ ātmā apahatapāpmā, the Self is free from sin; vijaraḥ, free from the effects of age; vimṛtyuḥ, free from death; viśokaḥ, free from sorrow; vijighatsaḥ, free from hunger; apipāsaḥ, free from thirst; satyakāmaḥ, is the cause of desire for Truth; satyasaṅkalpaḥ, is the cause of commitment to Truth; saḥ, that; anveṣṭavyaḥ, has to be sought; saḥ vijijñāsitavyaḥ, that has to be thoroughly investigated; saḥ, a person; sarvān ca lokān āpnoti, attains all worlds; sarvān ca kāmān, and all desires; yaḥ, who; tam ātmānam, that Self; anuvidya, having learned; vijānāti, [and] knows it; prajāpatiḥ iti ha uvāca, Prajāpati once said. Commentary:- Again and again the Upaniṣads glorify Self-knowledge, but what is the nature of the Self, and how do we attain that knowledge? Here the Upaniṣad begins a story to answer this. Once Prajāpati, the creator, decided to teach people about the Self. He described the Self as apahata-pāpmā, free from sins, or blemishes (pāpa)—that is to say, it is pure. Vijara—it never ages, or decays. Vimṛtyu—it is free from death. The body, of course, is subject to decay and it perishes. When you look at an old person you can tell at once that the body has decayed. It has become weak, and there are wrinkles and grey hair, and so on. Then gradually it must perish. That which has birth also has death. No matter when the body was born, it will eventually begin to fall apart and die. But the Self will never die. Then Prajāpati says, the Self is viśoka, without sorrow, vijighatsa, not subject to hunger, and apipāsa, not subject to thirst. Besides this, the Self is satyakāma and satyasaṅkalpa—seeking the Truth and always rooted in Truth. That is to say, it is Truth itself. It is always one with Truth, so it can never deviate from Truth. “Saḥ anveṣṭavyaḥ”—that has to be known. This is the purpose of life. Sri Ramakrishna used to say, ‘To realize God is the goal of life.’ The goal is not money, not power, not scholarship. It is nothing but God. Saḥ vijijñāsitavyaḥ—it has to be enquired about. You cannot sit back and wait for it to reveal itself to you. You must go and find someone to teach you about it. And when you have found a capable teacher, you must fall at his feet and beg him to teach you. Then you must ask again and again until your doubts are removed:- ‘Is it like this? Is it like that?’ But you must go to someone who knows the Self. Can a blind man lead another blind man? If the teacher does not know the Self, how will you learn? When you fulfil these conditions, what happens? You get everything you want. You become supreme. The Upaniṣad says, you conquer the whole universe. How? Because you realize you are the Self. And that Self is the Self of all that exists. You are everything. In this way too, all your desires are fulfilled. Self-knowledge gives you the highest. You may have everything else—friends, relatives, great political power, money, scholarship, a high social standing—but if you do not have Self-knowledge, everything is useless. Prajāpati has declared:- ‘This is the nature of the Self. And if you know the Self, you attain everything.’ He has sent out an invitation, as it were:- ‘Come and learn from me.’ Here, in order to teach the nature of the Self, and also to emphasize the need for self-discipline to attain Self-knowledge, the Upani-

Translation By Max Müller

1. Pragâpati said:- 'The Self which is free from sin, free from old age, from death and grief, from hunger and thirst, which desires nothing but what it ought to desire, and imagines nothing but what it ought to imagine, that it is which we must search out, that it is which we must try to understand. He who has searched out that Self and understands it, obtains all worlds and all desires.'


Sloka : 8.7.2

तद्धोभये देवासुरा अनुबुबुधिरे ते होचुर्हन्त

तमात्मानमन्वेच्छामो यमात्मानमन्विष्य सर्वाꣳश्च

लोकानाप्नोति सर्वाꣳश्च कामानितीन्द्रो हैव

देवानामभिप्रवव्राज विरोचनोऽसुराणां तौ

हासंविदानावेव समित्पाणी प्रजापतिसकाशमाजग्मतुः

॥ ८.७.२॥

taddhobhaye devāsurā anububudhire te hocurhanta

tamātmānamanvecchāmo yamātmānamanviṣya sarvāgͫśca

lokānāpnoti sarvāgͫśca kāmānitīndro haiva

devānāmabhipravavrāja virocano'surāṇāṃ tau

hāsaṃvidānāveva samitpāṇī prajāpatisakāśamājagmatuḥ

.. 8.7.2..



2. Both the gods and the demons came to know from people what Prajāpati had said. They said, ‘We shall search for that Self, by knowing which we can attain all the worlds and whatever things we desire.’ With this object in view, Indra among the gods and Virocana among the demons went to Prajāpati, carrying fuel in their hands. But they did not let each other know their plans.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tat ha, that [what Prajāpati had said]; ubhaye deva-asurāḥ, both the gods and the demons; anububudhire, learned from what other people said; te ha ucuḥ, they said [among themselves]; hanta tam ātmānam anvicchāmaḥ, so let us search for the Self; yam ātmānam, that Self; anviṣya, by seeking; sarvān ca lokān āpnoti, a person attains all worlds; sarvān ca kāmān hi, and all desires; indraḥ, Indra; ha eva devānām, among all the gods; abhipravrāja, went [to Prajāpati]; virocanaḥ asurānām, [and] Virocana from among the asuras; tau, those two; ha asaṃvidānau, without letting each other know; eva samitpāṇī, with fuel in hand; prajāpati-sakāśam, to Prajāpati; ājagmatuḥ, went. Commentary:- Indra is the chief of the gods and goddesses, and Virocana is the chief of the demons. Though Prajāpati is the grandparent of both of them, they are adversaries. Both Indra and Virocana heard from people what Prajāpati had said about the Self, and they were curious. They each decided to go to Prajāpati for instructions. As they often fought with one another, they never let each other know what they were doing. Everything was secret and confidential. But by chance both Indra and Virocana came to Prajāpati at the same time. How did they go? Śaṅkara says they went with great humility. Both of them were rulers, yet they put aside their royal robes and regalia, and wore the simplest clothes. They also came samitpāṇī ‘with fuel in hand,’ as an offering and as a sign of humility. Why? To show that they knew this knowledge to be superior even to rulership of the three worlds. In the Kaṭha Upaniṣad, Yama told Naciketā he would give him anything he wanted instead of Naciketā’s request for knowledge of the Self. Naciketā could have been ruler of the three worlds if he wanted,

Translation By Max Müller

2. The Devas (gods) and Asuras (demons) both heard these words, and said:- 'Well, let us search for that Self by which, if one has searched it out, all worlds and all desires are obtained.' Thus saying Indra went from the Devas, Virokana from the Asuras, and both, without having communicated with each other, approached Pragâpati, holding fuel in their hands, as is the custom for pupils approaching their master.


Sloka : 8.7.3

तौ ह द्वात्रिꣳशतं वर्षाणि ब्रह्मचर्यमूषतुस्तौ ह

प्रजापतिरुवाच किमिच्छन्तावास्तमिति तौ होचतुर्य

आत्मापहतपाप्मा विजरो विमृत्युर्विशोको

विजिघत्सोऽपिपासः सत्यकामः सत्यसंकल्पः सोऽन्वेष्टव्यः

स विजिज्ञासितव्यः स सर्वाꣳश्च लोकानाप्नोति सर्वाꣳश्च

कामान्यस्तमात्मानमनुविद्य विजानातीति भगवतो वचो

वेदयन्ते तमिच्छन्ताववास्तमिति ॥ ८.७.३॥

tau ha dvātrigͫśataṃ varṣāṇi brahmacaryamūṣatustau ha

prajāpatiruvāca kimicchantāvāstamiti tau hocaturya

ātmāpahatapāpmā vijaro vimṛtyurviśoko

vijighatso'pipāsaḥ satyakāmaḥ satyasaṃkalpaḥ so'nveṣṭavyaḥ

sa vijijñāsitavyaḥ sa sarvāgͫśca lokānāpnoti sarvāgͫśca

kāmānyastamātmānamanuvidya vijānātīti bhagavato vaco

vedayante tamicchantāvavāstamiti .. 8.7.3..



3. Both of them spent thirty-two years there living as brahmacarins. One day Prajāpati said to them:- ‘For what purpose are you staying here?’ They replied:- ‘“The Self is free from sin, free from old age, free from death, free from sorrow, and free from hunger and thirst. It is the cause of desire for Truth and for commitment to Truth. This Self has to be sought for and thoroughly known. The person who has learned about the Self and known it attains all worlds and all desires.”—Sir, this is your message. We wish to know that Self, and this is why we are here’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tau, those two; ha dvātriṃśatam varṣāṇi, for thirty-two years; brahmacaryam ūṣataḥ, lived there practising strict self-control; tau ha prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said to them; kim icchantau avāstam iti, for what purpose have you stayed here; tau ha ucatuḥ, they said; yaḥ ātmā apahatapāpmā, the Self is free from sin; vijaraḥ, free from the effects of age; vimṛtyuḥ, free from death; viśokaḥ, free from sorrow; vijighatsaḥ, free from hunger; apipāsaḥ, free from thirst; satyakāmaḥ, is the cause of desire for Truth; satyasaṅkalpaḥ, is the cause of commitment to Truth; saḥ, that; anveṣṭavyaḥ, has to be sought; saḥ vijijñāsitavyaḥ, that has to be thoroughly investigated; saḥ, a person; sarvān ca lokān āpnoti, attains all worlds; sarvān ca kāmān, and all desires; yaḥ, who; taw ātmānam, that Self; anuvidya, having learned; vijānāti iti, [and] knows it; bhagavataḥ, sir; vacaḥ vedayante, this is your message; tarn icchantau, wishing for that [knowledge of the Self]; avāstam iti, we have lived here. Commentary:- Indra and Virocana heard that Prajāpati had said the Self was pure, undecaying, without death, and so on, and they decided to go and learn from him. But a student must first go through some disciplines and prepare himself to receive these instructions. So for thirty-two years they practised brahmacarya, living with Prajāpati. They served him with humility, forgetting After thirty-two years, Prajāpati one day sent for them and asked:- ‘Why are you here? What do you want from me?’ Indra and Virocana replied:- ‘We heard from people that you said the Self is without decay, without death, and without sorrow. We want to know that Self. This is why we have come to you. We have been living here the past thirty-two years because we want to know the Self.’ Śaṅkara says that previously Indra and Virocana were hostile to each other. But now they are humble and no longer jealous, and they have even become friendly. Why has their nature changed? Because they have practised brahmacarya, self-control. “Brahmacarya” means brahma carati, one who moves around Brahman—that is, one who is always thinking of Brahman and trying to feel that he is Brahman. His whole life is centred around Brahman. Such a person lives a simple and austere life—with simple food, simple clothes, and so on. And he always practises self-restraint in everything he does. In Hinduism, self-restraint is the key to everything. If you want to achieve anything, even in secular life, you have to practise self-restraint.

Translation By Max Müller

3. They dwelt there as pupils for thirty-two years. Then Pragâpati asked them:- 'For what purpose have you both dwelt here?' They replied:- 'A saying of yours is being repeated, viz. "the Self which is free from sin, free from old age, from death and grief, from hunger and thirst, which desires nothing but what it ought to desire, and imagines nothing but what it ought to imagine, that it is which we must search out, that it is which we must try to understand. He who has searched out that Self and understands it, obtains all worlds and all desires." Now we both have dwelt here because we wish for that Self.'


Sloka : 8.7.4

तौ ह प्रजापतिरुवाच य एषोऽक्षिणि पुरुषो दृश्यत

एष आत्मेति होवाचैतदमृतमभयमेतद्ब्रह्मेत्यथ योऽयं

भगवोऽप्सु परिख्यायते यश्चायमादर्शे कतम एष

इत्येष उ एवैषु सर्वेष्वन्तेषु परिख्यायत इति होवाच

॥ ८.७.४॥

tau ha prajāpatiruvāca ya eṣo'kṣiṇi puruṣo dṛśyata

eṣa ātmeti hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmetyatha yo'yaṃ

bhagavo'psu parikhyāyate yaścāyamādarśe katama eṣa

ityeṣa u evaiṣu sarveṣvanteṣu parikhyāyata iti hovāca

.. 8.7.4..



4. Prajāpati said to those two, ‘That which is seen in the eyes is the Self.’ He also said:- ‘This Self is immortal and fearless. It is Brahman.’ Then they asked:- ‘Lord, we see something when we look in water and again when we look in a mirror. Which is it?’ Prajāpati replied, ‘The Self is seen in all these’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tau, to those two; prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca, Prajāpati said; yaḥ eṣaḥ puruṣaḥ, that person which; akṣiṇi dṛśyate, is seen in the eye; eṣaḥ ātmā iti, that is the Self; ha uvāca, [then] he said; etat amṛtam, that is immortal; abhayam, [and] fearless; etat brahma iti, that is Brahman; atha, then [they asked]; bhagavaḥ, Lord; yaḥ ayam apsu parikhyāyate, that which is seen in water; yaḥ ca ayam ādarśe, and that which is in a mirror; katamaḥ eṣaḥ iti, which is it; eṣaḥ, this [Self]; u eva eṣu parikhyāyate, is that which is seen; sarveṣu anteṣu, in all these; iti ha uvāca, he said. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section. Commentary:- According to Hindu philosophy, Supreme Knowledge is not meant for people whose minds are not pure. Though Indra and Virocana had been with Prajāpati for thirty-two years and they had made some progress towards purity, their minds were not yet pure enough to receive Self-knowledge. So Prajāpati’s first instruction was neither here nor there. It didn’t help them much. To begin with, Prajāpati said the Self is in the eyes. We all know that if We stand in front of someone, we can see our own reflection on that person’s eyes, and this is what Indra and Virocana thought Prajāpati meant. They said:- ‘We see a similar reflection when we look in water or in a mirror. We see ourselves reflected there. Which of these is the Self?’ Prajāpati answered, ‘The Self is in all these.’ Here Śaṅkara raises the question:- What did he mean by this? Was he misleading them? No, he was not misleading them, because it is true the Self is everywhere and in everything. But a person has to search. They could take his statement literally, but that would be a mistake. He wanted them to ask questions and use their judgement. He knew they would not understand, however. They were not yet ready for the highest Truth. He felt they had to spend more time practising brahmacarya.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Pragâpati said to them:- 'The person that is seen in the eye [1], that is the Self. This is what I have said. This is the immortal, the fearless, this is Brahman.' They asked:- 'Sir, he who is perceived in the water, and he who is perceived in a mirror, who is he?' He replied:- 'He himself indeed is seen in all these [2].'

Footnote:

1. The commentator explains this rightly. Pragâpati means by the person that is seen in the eye, the real agent of seeing, who is seen by sages only, even with their eyes shut. His pupils, however, misunderstand him. They think of the person that is seen, not of the person that sees (Yoga-sûtras II, 6). The person seen in the eye is to them the small figure imaged in the eye, and they go on therefore to ask, whether the image in the water or in a mirror is not the Self. 2. The commentators are at great pains to explain that Pragâpati told no falsehood. He meant by purusha the personal element in the highest sense, and it was not his fault that his pupils took purusha for man or body.


Sloka : 8.8.1

॥ इति सप्तमः खण्डः ॥

उदशराव आत्मानमवेक्ष्य यदात्मनो न विजानीथस्तन्मे

प्रब्रूतमिति तौ होदशरावेऽवेक्षांचक्राते तौ ह

प्रजापतिरुवाच किं पश्यथ इति तौ होचतुः

सर्वमेवेदमावां भगव आत्मानं पश्याव आ लोमभ्यः आ

नखेभ्यः प्रतिरूपमिति ॥ ८.८.१॥

.. iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

udaśarāva ātmānamavekṣya yadātmano na vijānīthastanme

prabrūtamiti tau hodaśarāve'vekṣāṃcakrāte tau ha

prajāpatiruvāca kiṃ paśyatha iti tau hocatuḥ

sarvamevedamāvāṃ bhagava ātmānaṃ paśyāva ā lomabhyaḥ ā

nakhebhyaḥ pratirūpamiti .. 8.8.1..



1. [Prajāpati said:-] ‘Look at yourselves in a vessel full of water. If you have any doubts about the Self then let me know.’ They then looked at themselves in the water, and Prajāpati asked, ‘What do you see?’ They replied, ‘We see the reflection of our whole self, including even our hair and nails’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Udaśarāve ātmānam avekṣya, look at yourself in a vessel filled with water; yat ātmanaḥ na vijānīthaḥ, what you do not understand about the Self; tat me prabrūtam iti, tell me what it is; tau ha udaśarāve avekṣāñcakrāte, [then] they looked [at themselves] in the water; tau ha prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said to them; kim paśyathaḥ iti, what do you see; tau ha ucatuḥ, the two of them said; āvām, we both; bhagavaḥ, Lord; sarvam eva idam ātmānam paśyāvaḥ, see the whole of our self; pratirūpam, a reflection; ālomabhyaḥ, from the hair; ānakhebhyaḥ, to the nails. Commentary:- Prajāpati told them to bring a pan of water. They brought it, and he said:- ‘Look in the water. What do you see? If you have any doubt, if it is not clear to you exactly what I mean when I say the Self is in the water, then ask me.’ A kind teacher is always ready to answer any question that a student may put. But instead of thinking and questioning, they simply said they saw the reflection of their own bodies—to the hair and the nails. When they even included the hair and nails, it should have been obvious to them that this could not be the Self. In the Vedānta philosophy there is the illustration of the pole-star. How do you show someone the pole-star? First you draw that person’s attention to a tree. Then you point to a big branch of the tree, and then to a smaller branch, and then to the pole-star beyond that. So you take the person step by step. This is what Prajāpati is trying to do. He is not trying to mislead them, but to take them from where they are, one step at a time.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Look at your Self in a pan of water, and whatever you do not understand of your Self [1], come and tell me.' They looked in the water-pan. Then Pragâpati said to them:- 'What do you see?' They said:- 'We both see the self thus altogether, a picture even to the very hairs and nails.'

Footnote:

1. I take âtmanah as a genitive, governed by yad, not as an accusative plural.


Sloka : 8.8.2

तौ ह प्रजापतिरुवाच साध्वलंकृतौ सुवसनौ परिष्कृतौ

भूत्वोदशरावेऽवेक्षेथामिति तौ ह साध्वलंकृतौ

सुवसनौ परिष्कृतौ भूत्वोदशरावेऽवेक्षांचक्राते

तौ ह प्रजापतिरुवाच किं पश्यथ इति ॥ ८.८.२॥

tau ha prajāpatiruvāca sādhvalaṃkṛtau suvasanau pariṣkṛtau

bhūtvodaśarāve'vekṣethāmiti tau ha sādhvalaṃkṛtau

suvasanau pariṣkṛtau bhūtvodaśarāve'vekṣāṃcakrāte

tau ha prajāpatiruvāca kiṃ paśyatha iti .. 8.8.2..



2. Prajāpati said to them, ‘After getting well-dressed and putting on fine clothes and making yourselves neat and clean, then look into the pan of water.’ So the two of them got well-dressed in fine clothes, and made themselves neat and clean. Then they looked into the water. Prajāpati asked, ‘What do you see?’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tau ha prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said to them; sādhu-alaṅkṛtau, well-dressed; suvasanau, wearing fine clothes; pariṣkṛtau bhūtvā, having become neat and clean; udaśarāve avekṣethām iti, look into the vessel of water; sādhu-alaṅkṛtau bhūtvā, having become well-dressed; suvasanau, wearing fine clothes; pariṣkṛtau, neat and clean; tau ha udaśarāve avekṣāñcakrāte, they looked in the vessel of water; tau ha prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said to them; kim paśyathaḥ iti, what do you see? Commentary:- Now Prajāpati tells them to wash themselves and put on fine clothes and ornaments, and then look again into the pan of water. He was trying to raise a doubt in their minds. This is one way of teaching the Truth.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Pragâpati said to them:- 'After you have adorned yourselves, have put on your best clothes and cleaned yourselves, look again into the water-pan. They, after having adorned themselves, having put on their best clothes and cleaned themselves, looked into the water-pan. Pragâpati said:- 'What do you see?'


Sloka : 8.8.3

तौ होचतुर्यथैवेदमावां भगवः साध्वलंकृतौ सुवसनौ

परिष्कृतौ स्व एवमेवेमौ भगवः साध्वलंकृतौ सुवसनौ

परिष्कृतावित्येष आत्मेति होवाचैतदमृतमभयमेतद्ब्रह्मेति

तौ ह शान्तहृदयौ प्रवव्रजतुः ॥ ८.८.३॥

tau hocaturyathaivedamāvāṃ bhagavaḥ sādhvalaṃkṛtau suvasanau

pariṣkṛtau sva evamevemau bhagavaḥ sādhvalaṃkṛtau suvasanau

pariṣkṛtāvityeṣa ātmeti hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti

tau ha śāntahṛdayau pravavrajatuḥ .. 8.8.3..



3. The two of them said, ‘Revered sir, just as we are well-dressed in fine clothes, and neat and clean, in the same way, these two reflections are well-dressed in fine clothes, and neat and clean.’ Prajāpati said:- ‘That is the Self. It is immortal and fearless. It is Brahman.’ The two of them left then, happy in mind.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tau ha ucatuḥ, they both said; bhagavaḥ, sir; yathā eva, just as; idam āvām, we two here; sādhu-alaṅkṛtau, well-dressed; suvasanau, wearing fine clothes; pariṣkṛtau svaḥ, are neat and clean; evam eva, like this; bhagavaḥ, lord; imau, these two [reflections]; sādhu-alaṅkṛtau, well-dressed; suvasanau, wearing fine clothes; pariṣkṛtau iti, neat and clean; iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said; eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self; etat amṛtam, this is immortal; abhayam, fearless; etat brahma iti, this is Brahman; tau, both of them; śāntahṛdayau pravavrajatuḥ, left happy in mind. Commentary:- Now Indra and Virocana see themselves with fine clothes and ornaments on. Just as it should have been obvious to them that the Self is not the body with its hair and nails, even more so it should be obvious that the Self is not the body with its fine clothes, as they were not wearing those clothes before. Prajāpati was trying to provoke them into thinking. Is the body with its fine clothes deathless and free from fear? If it is unchanging, why does it look different when you put on different clothes? But they went away very happy, thinking they had the answer. Ordinarily our minds are wavering back and forth with doubts and indecision. That is the nature of the mind. But the Upaniṣad says Indra and Virocana went away śāntahṛdaya, with their minds at rest. That means without any doubt, without any question. It means they think they have received a satisfactory answer to their question, and the problem is solved.

Translation By Max Müller

3. They said:- 'Just as we are, well adorned, with our best clothes and clean, thus we are both there, Sir, well adorned, with our best clothes and clean.' Pragâpati said:- 'That is the Self, this is the immortal, the fearless, this is Brahman.' Then both went away satisfied in their hearts.


Sloka : 8.8.4

तौ हान्वीक्ष्य प्रजापतिरुवाचानुपलभ्यात्मानमननुविद्य

व्रजतो यतर एतदुपनिषदो भविष्यन्ति देवा वासुरा वा ते

पराभविष्यन्तीति स ह शान्तहृदय एव

विरोचनोऽसुराञ्जगाम तेभ्यो हैतामुपनिषदं

प्रोवाचात्मैवेह महय्य आत्मा परिचर्य आत्मानमेवेह

महयन्नात्मानं परिचरन्नुभौ लोकाववाप्नोतीमं चामुं चेति

॥ ८.८.४॥

tau hānvīkṣya prajāpatiruvācānupalabhyātmānamananuvidya

vrajato yatara etadupaniṣado bhaviṣyanti devā vāsurā vā te

parābhaviṣyantīti sa ha śāntahṛdaya eva

virocano'surāñjagāma tebhyo haitāmupaniṣadaṃ

provācātmaiveha mahayya ātmā paricarya ātmānameveha

mahayannātmānaṃ paricarannubhau lokāvavāpnotīmaṃ cāmuṃ ceti

.. 8.8.4..



4. Seeing them leave, Prajāpati said to himself:- ‘They are going without realizing or knowing anything about the Self. Anyone among them, whether a god or a demon, who will understand the teaching this way [thinking the body to be the Self] will be lost.’ Virocana, the king of the demons, went back to the demons happy in mind and explained to them the upaniṣad:-





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tau ha anu-īkṣya, having observed them; prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said; anupalabhya ātmānam, without realizing the Self; ananuvidya, without knowing; vrajatah, they have left; yatare, whoever among these two [gods or demons]; etat upaniṣadaḥ bhaviṣyanti, will understand this teaching this way; devāḥ vā asurāḥ vā, whether gods or demons; te parābhaviṣyanti iti, they will be destroyed; saḥ ha virocanaḥ, that Virocana; śāntahṛdayaḥ eva, with a happy mind; asurān jagāma, went to the demons; tebhyaḥ, to them; etām upaniṣadam ha provāca, explained the meaning of this upaniṣad; ātmā eva ha iha mahayyaḥ, the body is an object of worship in this world; ātmā paricaryaḥ, the body should be well taken care of; ātmānam eva iha mahayan, by treating the body with due respect in this world; ātmānam paricaran, by taking good care of it; ubhau lokau, both worlds; imam ca amum ca, this and the other; āpnoti iti, one attains. Commentary:- ‘The body is the Self, and in this world it should be worshipped and taken care of. If the body is worshipped and well taken care of in this world, one attains both this world and the next.’ Prajāpati deplored the fact that they had left without asking for clarification. He was their teacher and well-wisher, and he was also their grandfather. He said:- ‘Poor children, they have gone away without knowing anything. They should have asked me, “When the body changes, does that mean the Self also changes?” But they did not ask any questions. Because they do not understand, they will fall away from the right path.’ Virocana went back to the demons and said:- ‘I have got the answer. The body is the Self.’ Nourish this body, and look after it; eat, drink, and be merry; enjoy yourselves—this is the aim of life for a demon, that is, for a materialist. That which is gross, which can be perceived by the sense organs, that is the reality. And that which cannot be perceived is not real. This is the doctrine that Virocana preached. The Upaniṣad uses the word upaniṣad to refer to what Virocana taught the demons, but it uses the word ironically. The word upaniṣad means niḥśeṣa—that is to say, it ‘totally destroys’ your ignorance. An Upaniṣad is supposed to give you Self-knowledge. But Virocana took the teaching to mean that the body was the Self. He thought that by worshipping and taking care of the body one would gain not only this world, but the other world also.

Translation By Max Müller

4. And Pragâpati, looking after them, said:- 'They both go away without having perceived and without having known the Self, and whoever of these two [1], whether Devas or Asuras, will follow this doctrine (upanishad), will perish.' Now Virokana, satisfied in his heart, went to the Asuras and preached that doctrine to them, that the self (the body) alone is to be worshipped, that the self (the body) alone is to be served, and that he who worships the self and serves the self, gains both worlds, this and the next.

Footnote:

1. The commentator reads yatare for yatah.


Sloka : 8.8.5

तस्मादप्यद्येहाददानमश्रद्दधानमयजमानमाहुरासुरो

बतेत्यसुराणाꣳ ह्येषोपनिषत्प्रेतस्य शरीरं भिक्षया

वसनेनालंकारेणेति सꣳस्कुर्वन्त्येतेन ह्यमुं लोकं

जेष्यन्तो मन्यन्ते ॥ ८.८.५॥

tasmādapyadyehādadānamaśraddadhānamayajamānamāhurāsuro

batetyasurāṇāgͫ hyeṣopaniṣatpretasya śarīraṃ bhikṣayā

vasanenālaṃkāreṇeti sagͫskurvantyetena hyamuṃ lokaṃ

jeṣyanto manyante .. 8.8.5..



5. This is why in this world even today people say, ‘Oh, he is a demon,’ if that person is devoid of the feeling of charity, has no respect for others, and never cares to perform a sacrifice, because the demons have the idea that the body is the Self. When a person dies they decorate the body with all kinds of offerings, new clothes, and jewellery, for they think that by this, the person will conquer the other world.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tasmāt, this is why; api adya, till today; iha, here in this world; adadānam, one incapable of giving anything in charity; aśraddadhānam, one who has no respect for others; ayajamānam, one who never performs a sacrifice; āhuḥ, they say; āsuraḥ bata iti, ‘Oh, he is like a demon’; asurānām hi eṣaḥ upaniṣat, because this knowledge is suited for the demons; pretasya, of a dead person; śarīram, the body; bhikṣayā, with gifts [flowers, food, drink, etc.]; vasanena, with clothes; alaṅkāreṇa, with jewellery; saṃskurvanti, they decorate; hi, for; etena, in this way; annum lokam, the other world; jeṣyantaḥ, they will win; manyante, they think. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section. Commentary:- Here the Upaniṣad says that there is a class of people who are not interested in self-discipline. They are the demons. They are only interested in sense pleasure, and they only believe in what can be perceived by the senses and what is present before them. They do not believe in God, and they are not interested in higher things. They are selfish and do not give anything in charity. They do not have faith in higher things, nor do they have respect for anything that is good—for good people or for good deeds. And they do not believe in sacrifice. Their attitude is:- ‘Why should I share what I have? I want everything for myself.’ What is the aim of their life? What is their ideal? Only that which concerns their body. The body is everything to them. Even when someone dies, they decorate the body with all kinds of things they like—flowers, garlands, fragrance, ornaments, silk clothes. Everything is done to make the body appear beautiful, as if a dead body is beautiful! They think if the body is properly decorated in this way, the deceased will look like a prince and will conquer heaven. They think the gods and goddesses will receive him as their ruler, and so on. In ancient Egypt, when the Pharaohs died, their bodies were treated with special ointments to preserve them. Then when they were put in their tombs, the bodies of their servants and attendants were also put there so they could look after them. Besides this, all the vessels and things the Pharaohs used were put in the tomb. Everything went with them. The Hindu concept, however, is that the body will decay and perish, but the self is independent of the body. The self will never decay and never perish. It is a common experience that when a person dies, we see all his organs intact, but if we talk to him he does not answer. Why? Because the self has left the body. The Upaniṣad does not mean to say that the body is not important. As a means to attain Self-knowledge it is important. It is a tool that we need for progress in our spiritual life and also in our mundane life. As the Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad says, ‘Nāyamātmā balahīnena labhyaḥ—this Self is not attained by one who has no strength.’ If you have a weak, feeble body, then you cannot struggle or make sustained effort in any vocation—whether spiritual or secular. But when too much importance is given to the body, we forget that we are not the body, but the Self.

Translation By Max Müller

5. Therefore they call even now a man who does not give alms here, who has no faith, and offers no sacrifices, an Âsura, for this is the doctrine (upanishad) of the Asuras. They deck out the body of the dead with perfumes, flowers, and fine raiment by way of ornament, and think they will thus conquer that world [1].

Footnote:

1. This evidently refers to the customs and teaching of tribes not entirely conforming to the Brahmanic system. Whether the adorning of the dead body implies burial instead of burning, seems doubtful.


Sloka : 8.9.1

॥ इति अष्टमः खण्डः ॥

अथ हेन्द्रोऽप्राप्यैव देवानेतद्भयं ददर्श यथैव

खल्वयमस्मिञ्छरीरे साध्वलंकृते साध्वलंकृतो भवति

सुवसने सुवसनः परिष्कृते परिष्कृत

एवमेवायमस्मिन्नन्धेऽन्धो भवति स्रामे स्रामः परिवृक्णे

परिवृक्णोऽस्यैव शरीरस्य नाशमन्वेष नश्यति

नाहमत्र भोग्यं पश्यामीति ॥ ८.९.१॥

.. iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

atha hendro'prāpyaiva devānetadbhayaṃ dadarśa yathaiva

khalvayamasmiñcharīre sādhvalaṃkṛte sādhvalaṃkṛto bhavati

suvasane suvasanaḥ pariṣkṛte pariṣkṛta

evamevāyamasminnandhe'ndho bhavati srāme srāmaḥ parivṛkṇe

parivṛkṇo'syaiva śarīrasya nāśamanveṣa naśyati

nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti .. 8.9.1..



1. But even before Indra returned to the gods, a doubt arose in his mind:- ‘When the body is well decorated, the reflection is also well decorated. When the body is in fine clothes, the reflection is also in fine clothes. When the body is neat and clean, the reflection is also neat and clean. Again, suppose a person is blind. Then the reflection will show a blind body. Or if the body is lame, the reflection will show a lame body. Or if the body is hurt in some way, the reflection will show the same. Then again, if the body is destroyed, the reflection is gone. I don’t see that anything good will come from this’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, but; indraḥ, Indra, the king of the gods; ha aprāpya eva, even before getting back; devān, to the gods; etat bhayam dadarśa, saw this fear [i.e., doubt]; yathā eva, just as; asmin śarīre sādhu-alaṅkṛte, with this body being well decorated; khalu ayam, this [reflection of the body]; sādhu-alaṅkṛtah bhavati, is also well decorated; suvasane suvasanaḥ, when the body is in fine clothes, the reflection is wearing fine clothes; pariṣkṛte pariṣkṛtaḥ, when the body is neat and clean, the reflection is neat and clean; evam eva, like this; asmin andhe, if [the body] is blind; ayam andhaḥ bhavati, this [reflection] is of a blind person; srāme srāmaḥ, if the body is lame, the reflection is of a lame person; parivṛkṇe parivṛkṇaḥ, if the body is hurt, the reflection is of an injured body; asya śarīrasya eva nāśam anu, on the body’s destruction; eṣaḥ naśyati, this [reflection] is destroyed; aham atra bhogyam na paśyāmi iti, I see nothing good in this. Commentary:- Virocana was happy. He had no more doubts or questions. He liked the idea of the body being the Self. But what about Indra? Indra was a higher being. He was a god and was endowed with some spiritual qualities. Whereas Virocana thought Prajāpati was saying the body was the Self, Indra thought he was saying the reflection was the Self. Indra also left Prajāpati and started to go back home, but then he was struck by a doubt:- ‘How can that reflection be my Self? It can’t be. When I first looked at the reflection in the water it looked one way. Then when I put on fine clothes it looked another way. Suppose I lose a limb. The reflection will show that there is a limb missing. Whatever change there is in the body will show on the reflection. And if the body perishes, the reflection will be gone. But Prajāpati himself spoke of the Self as something constant, free from all defects, and immortal. It is something that does not change. What did Prajāpati mean when he said, “This is the Self”? Surely the

Translation By Max Müller

1. But Indra, before he had returned to the Devas, saw this difficulty. As this self (the shadow in the water) [1] is well adorned, when the body is well adorned, well dressed, when the body is well dressed, well cleaned, if the body is well cleaned, that self will also be blind, if the body is blind, lame, if the body is lame [2], crippled, if the body is crippled, and will perish in fact as soon as the body perishes. Therefore I see no good in this (doctrine).

Footnote:

1. The commentator remarks that though both Indra and Virokana had mistaken the true import of what Pragâpati said, yet while Virokana took the body to be the Self, Indra thought that the Self was the shadow of the body. 2. Srâma, lame, is explained by the commentator as one-eyed, ekanetra.


Sloka : 8.9.2

स समित्पाणिः पुनरेयाय तꣳ ह प्रजापतिरुवाच

मघवन्यच्छान्तहृदयः प्राव्राजीः सार्धं विरोचनेन

किमिच्छन्पुनरागम इति स होवाच यथैव खल्वयं

भगवोऽस्मिञ्छरीरे साध्वलंकृते साध्वलंकृतो भवति

सुवसने सुवसनः परिष्कृते परिष्कृत

एवमेवायमस्मिन्नन्धेऽन्धो भवति स्रामे स्रामः

परिवृक्णे परिवृक्णोऽस्यैव शरीरस्य नाशमन्वेष

नश्यति नाहमत्र भोग्यं पश्यामीति ॥ ८.९.२॥

sa samitpāṇiḥ punareyāya tagͫ ha prajāpatiruvāca

maghavanyacchāntahṛdayaḥ prāvrājīḥ sārdhaṃ virocanena

kimicchanpunarāgama iti sa hovāca yathaiva khalvayaṃ

bhagavo'smiñcharīre sādhvalaṃkṛte sādhvalaṃkṛto bhavati

suvasane suvasanaḥ pariṣkṛte pariṣkṛta

evamevāyamasminnandhe'ndho bhavati srāme srāmaḥ

parivṛkṇe parivṛkṇo'syaiva śarīrasya nāśamanveṣa

naśyati nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti .. 8.9.2..



2. Indra returned with fuel in hand. Prajāpati asked:- ‘Indra, you left with Virocana happy in mind. What has made you come back?’ Indra replied:- ‘Lord, when the body is well decorated, the reflection is also well decorated. When the body is in fine clothes, the reflection is also in fine clothes. When the body is neat and clean, the reflection is also neat and clean. Again, suppose a person is blind. Then the reflection will show a blind body. Or if the body is lame, the reflection will show a lame body. Or if the body is hurt in some way, the reflection will show the same. Then again, if the body is destroyed, the reflection is gone. I don’t see anything good in this’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Saḥ, he [Indra]; punaḥ eyāya, again went back; samitpāṇiḥ, with fuel in hand; tam, to him; prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca, Prajāpati said; maghavan, O Maghavan [Indra]; yat prāvrājīḥ, you left; śāntahṛdayaḥ, satisfied; sārdham virocanena, along with Virocana; kim icchan, what do you want; punaḥ āgamaḥ iti, that you have come back again; saḥ ha uvāca, he [Indra] said; bhagavaḥ, lord; yathā era, just as; asmin śarīre sādhu-alaṅkṛte, with this body being well decorated; khalu ayam, this [reflection of the body]; sādhu-alaṅkṛtah bhavati, is also well decorated; suvasane suvasanaḥ, when the body is in fine clothes, the reflection is wearing fine clothes; pariṣkṛte pariṣkṛtaḥ, when the body is neat and clean, the reflection is neat and clean; evam era, like this; asmin andhe, if [the body] is blind; ayam andhaḥ bhavati, this [reflection] is of a blind person; srāme srāmaḥ, if the body is lame, the reflection is of a lame person; parivṛkṇe parivṛkṇaḥ, if the body is hurt, the reflection is of an injured body; asya śarīrasya eva nāśam anu, on the body’s destruction; eṣaḥ naśyati, this [reflection] is destroyed; aham atra bhogyam na paśyāmi iti, I see nothing good in this. Commentary:- Again Indra went to Prajāpati with fuel in hand as a symbol of surrender and humility. Śaṅkara makes a very significant comment here. The question is raised, ‘Virocana went away satisfied, but why did Indra come back?’ Śaṅkara says that we understand a thing according to our own level and inclination—according to our own nature. Śaṅkara cites the example given in the Bṛhadāraṇyaka Upaniṣad of Prajāpati’s instruction to the gods, humans, and asuras. To all of them Prajāpati gave the same instruction:- he simply said, ‘da.’ The gods understood him to be saying dāmyata, be self-controlled. The human beings took it to mean datta, give in charity. And the asuras thought he was saying dayadhvam, be compassionate. They all heard the same thing, but they interpreted it differently, according to their nature. The gods have the purest nature. They are the closest to Brahman. What is preventing them from being united with Brahman? Just a very thin layer of ignorance. They have to have a full measure of purity, and self-discipline is what leads to this purity. This is why they took the instruction to mean they should practise self-control. The next are human beings. They are good, but they could be better. How? By practising selflessness. They should give whatever they can, share what they have with others, and not be selfish. But the demons are not ready for self-control or charity. They are very cruel and passionate by nature. Therefore they took the instruction to mean that they These are the three characteristics we find among people. One kind of person needs to practise self-control; another kind, charity; and a third kind, mercy. It all depends on the level one is at. Vedānta says you have to be ready to receive Self-knowledge. You have to be prepared. How a person understands the instructions is based on how much preparation he has had. Prajāpati was not trying to deceive Indra and Virocana. He was testing them, but he knew they were not prepared to receive Self-knowledge.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Taking fuel in his hand he came again as a pupil to Pragâpati. Pragâpati said to him:- 'Maghavat (Indra), as you went away with Virokana, satisfied in your heart, for what purpose did you come back?' He said:- 'Sir, as this self (the shadow) is well adorned, when the body is well adorned, well dressed, when the body is well dressed, well cleaned, if the body is well cleaned, that self will also be blind, if the body is blind, lame, if the body is lame, crippled, if the body is crippled, and will perish in fact as soon as the body perishes. Therefore I see no good in this (doctrine).'


Sloka : 8.9.3

एवमेवैष मघवन्निति होवाचैतं त्वेव ते

भूयोऽनुव्याख्यास्यामि वसापराणि द्वात्रिꣳशतं वर्षाणीति

स हापराणि द्वात्रिꣳशतं वर्षाण्युवास तस्मै होवाच

॥ ८.९.३॥

evamevaiṣa maghavanniti hovācaitaṃ tveva te

bhūyo'nuvyākhyāsyāmi vasāparāṇi dvātrigͫśataṃ varṣāṇīti

sa hāparāṇi dvātrigͫśataṃ varṣāṇyuvāsa tasmai hovāca

.. 8.9.3..



3. Prajāpati said:- ‘Indra, it is so. I will explain the matter to you again. Stay here another thirty-two years.’ Indra lived another thirty-two years there. Then Prajāpati said to him—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Evam eva eṣaḥ, it is like that; maghavan, O Maghavan; iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said; etam tu eva bhūyaḥ anuvyākhyāsyāmi, I will explain it once again; te, to you; vasā, stay here; aparāṇi dvātriṃśatam, another thirty-two; varṣāṇi iti, years; saḥ, he [Indra]; ha aparāṇi dvātriṃśatam varṣāṇi, for another thirty-two years; uvāsa, lived there; tasmai ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said to him. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section. Commentary:- Prajāpati was obviously pleased that Indra had come back, but he wanted him to practise brahmacarya for another thirty-two years. Then he would again give him instructions.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'So it is indeed, Maghavat,' replied Pragâpati; 'but I shall explain him (the true Self) further to you. Live with me another thirty-two years.' He lived with him another thirty-two years, and then Pragâpati said:-


Sloka : 8.10.1

॥ इति नवमः खण्डः ॥

य एष स्वप्ने महीयमानश्चरत्येष आत्मेति

होवाचैतदमृतमभयमेतद्ब्रह्मेति स ह शान्तहृदयः

प्रवव्राज स हाप्राप्यैव देवानेतद्भयं ददर्श

तद्यद्यपीदꣳ शरीरमन्धं भवत्यनन्धः स भवति यदि

स्राममस्रामो नैवैषोऽस्य दोषेण दुष्यति ॥ ८.१०.१॥

.. iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ya eṣa svapne mahīyamānaścaratyeṣa ātmeti

hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti sa ha śāntahṛdayaḥ

pravavrāja sa hāprāpyaiva devānetadbhayaṃ dadarśa

tadyadyapīdagͫ śarīramandhaṃ bhavatyanandhaḥ sa bhavati yadi

srāmamasrāmo naivaiṣo'sya doṣeṇa duṣyati .. 8.10.1..



1. ‘That person who goes about being worshipped in dreams is the Self. It is immortal and fearless. It is Brahman.’ Indra then left happy in mind. But even before he returned to the gods, a doubt arose in his mind:- ‘A person may be blind, but when he is dreaming he is not blind. He may be lame, but when he is dreaming he is not lame. There may be some defects in his body, but his dream body is not affected by them’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Yaḥ eṣaḥ, this [person] who; svapne mahīyamānaḥ, [appearing to be] worshipped in dreams; carati, goes about; eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self; iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said; etat amṛtam abhayam, it is immortal and fearless; etat brahma iti, it is Brahman; saḥ ha śāntahṛdayaḥ pravavrāja, he left happy in mind; ha aprāpya eva, even before getting back; devān, to the gods; etat bhayam dadarśa, saw this fear [i.e., doubt]; yadi api, even if; tat idam śarīram, this body; andham bhavati, is blind; saḥ anandhaḥ bhavati, this [dream body] is not blind; yadi srāmam asrāmaḥ, if [the body] is lame, the [dream body] is not lame; na eva eṣaḥ asya doṣena duṣyati, nor is this [dream body] affected by the defects [of the body]. Commentary:- Then after thirty-two years, Prajāpati said to Indra, ‘When you are asleep you have dreams and you find yourself moving about, as if you are the ruler of all, as if you are very great and powerful. That Indra left satisfied, but on the way back home he began to think about what Prajāpati had said:- ‘When I saw the reflection in the water, it was just as my body was. If the body was decorated, the reflection also was decorated. That means if the body is blind, the reflection shows a blind body. But suppose I am blind and I am dreaming. At that time I can see so many things. So it is true, the condition of the body does not affect the Self. The Self is something different.’

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'He who moves about happy in dreams, he is the Self, this is the immortal, the fearless, this is Brahman.' Then Indra went away satisfied in his heart. But before he had returned to the Devas, he saw this difficulty. Although it is true that that self is not blind, even if the body is blind, nor lame, if the body is lame, though it is true that that self is not rendered faulty by the faults of it (the body),


Sloka : 8.10.2

न वधेनास्य हन्यते नास्य स्राम्येण स्रामो घ्नन्ति त्वेवैनं

विच्छादयन्तीवाप्रियवेत्तेव भवत्यपि रोदितीव नाहमत्र

भोग्यं पश्यामीति ॥ ८.१०.२॥

na vadhenāsya hanyate nāsya srāmyeṇa srāmo ghnanti tvevainaṃ

vicchādayantīvāpriyavetteva bhavatyapi roditīva nāhamatra

bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti .. 8.10.2..



2. ‘The body may be killed but the other is not killed. Nor is the dream body lame if the body is lame. Nevertheless, in dreams it may seem as if people are killing him; it may seem as if people are chasing him; it may seem as if there is something unpleasant. He may even seem to be weeping. I see nothing good in this’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Asya vadhena na hanyate, [the dream body] is not killed when [the body] is killed; na asya srāmyeṇa srāmaḥ, nor is it lame with [the body’s] lameness; tu, nevertheless; enam eva ghnanti, as if they are killing him; vicchādayanti iva, as if they are chasing him; apriyavettā iva bhavati, as if there is something unpleasant; api roditi iva, as if he is even weeping; aham atra bhogyam na paśyāmi iti, I see nothing good in this. Commentary:- Indra continued to think about what Prajāpati had said. This is the nature of someone who has discrimination. And this is what Prajāpati expected him to do. In fact, Prajāpati would have been disappointed if Indra had not questioned what he had said. A good teacher is ready to give his knowledge, but the student also has to be ready. He has to be mentally alert and ask questions. Indra thought:- ‘It is true, the dream-self is independent of the body. But I find that even in my dreams I am sometimes happy and sometimes unhappy. Sometimes I am in pain, and sometimes I am crying. And sometimes I even see myself being chased by someone and I am frightened. Prajāpati said the Self is free from fear, so how could this fear come? It should not happen. If the Self is subject to such limitations and unpleasant experiences, then it is not free and perfect. No, I cannot accept this answer.’

Translation By Max Müller

2. Nor struck when it (the body) is struck, nor lamed when it is lamed, yet it is as if they struck him (the self) in dreams, as if they chased him [1]. He becomes even conscious, as it were, of pain, and sheds tears. Therefore I see no good in this.

Footnote:

1. I have adopted the reading vikkhâyayanti, because it is the most difficult, and therefore explains most easily the various corruptions, or it may be emendations, that have crept into the text. Saṅkara explains vikkhâdayanti by vidrâvayanti, and this shows that he too must have read vikkhâyayanti, for he could not have explained vikkhâdayanti, which means they uncover or they deprive of their clothing, by vidrâvayanti, they drive away. It is true that vikkhâyayanti may be explained in two ways; it may be the causative of khâ, to cut, but this meaning is not very appropriate here, and quite inadmissible in another passage where vikkhâyayanti occurs, whereas, if derived from vikh (ὀίχομαι) in a causative sense, Saṅkara could hardly have chosen a better explanation than vidrâvayanti, they make run away. The root vikh, vikkhâyayati is recognised in Pânini III, 1, 28, and in the Dhâtupâtha 28, 129, but it has hitherto been met with in this passage only, and in Brihadâranyaka, Up. IV, 3, 20. Here also the author speaks of a man who imagines that people kill him or do him violence, or that an elephant chases him or that he falls into a pit. Here we have hastîva vikkhâyayati, and Saṅkara, at least as printed by Dr. Roer, explains this by vikkhâpayati, vikkhâdayati, vidrâvayati; dhâvatîty arthah. Much better is Dvivedaganga's commentary, as published by Dr. Weber, Satap. Brâhm. , Kadâkid enam hastî vikkhâyayatîva vidrâvayatîva; vikha gatau, gupûdhûpavikhipanipanibhya âya iti (Pân. III, 1, 28) svârtha âyapratyayah. In the Dictionary of Boehtlingk and Roth the derivation from khâ, to cut, is preferred; see Nachträge, s. v. khâ.


Sloka : 8.10.3

स समित्पाणिः पुनरेयाय तꣳ ह प्रजापतिरुवाच

मघवन्यच्छान्तहृदयः प्राव्राजीः किमिच्छन्पुनरागम

इति स होवाच तद्यद्यपीदं भगवः शरीरमन्धं भवत्यनन्धः

स भवति यदि स्राममस्रामो नैवैषोऽस्य दोषेण दुष्यति

॥ ८.१०.३॥

sa samitpāṇiḥ punareyāya tagͫ ha prajāpatiruvāca

maghavanyacchāntahṛdayaḥ prāvrājīḥ kimicchanpunarāgama

iti sa hovāca tadyadyapīdaṃ bhagavaḥ śarīramandhaṃ bhavatyanandhaḥ

sa bhavati yadi srāmamasrāmo naivaiṣo'sya doṣeṇa duṣyati

.. 8.10.3..



3. Indra returned with fuel in hand. Prajāpati asked:- ‘Indra, you left happy in mind. What has made you come back?’ Indra replied:- ‘Lord, a person may be blind, but when he is dreaming he is not blind. He may be lame, but when he is dreaming he is not lame. There may be some defects in his body, but his dream body is not affected by them’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Saḥ, he [Indra]; punaḥ eyāya, again went back; samitpāṇiḥ, with fuel in hand; tam, to him; prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca, Prajāpati said; maghavan, O Maghavan [Indra]; yat prāvrājīḥ, you left; śāntahṛdayaḥ, satisfied; kim icchan, what do you want; punaḥ āgamaḥ iti, that you have come back again; saḥ ha uvāca, he [Indra] said; bhagavaḥ, lord; yadi api, even if; tat idam śarīram, this body; andham bhavati, is blind; saḥ anandhaḥ bhavati, this [dream body] is not blind; yadi srāmam asrāmaḥ, if [the body] is lame, the [dream body] is not lame; na eva eṣaḥ asya doṣena duṣyati, nor is this [dream body] affected by the defects [of the body]. Commentary:- Most of us think the body is everything. But the idea of Vedānta is that we are independent of the body and the mind. The body and the mind are limitations. In reality, however, nothing can limit us. Our real Self is free and fearless. Prajāpati is happy that Indra has discovered this.

Translation By Max Müller

3. Taking fuel in his hands, he went again as a pupil to Pragâpati. Pragâpati said to him:- 'Maghavat, as you went away satisfied in your heart, for what purpose did you come back?' He said:- 'Sir, although it is true that that self is not blind even if the body is blind, nor lame, if the body is lame, though it is true that that self is not rendered faulty by the faults of it (the body),


Sloka : 8.10.4

न वधेनास्य हन्यते नास्य स्राम्येण स्रामो घ्नन्ति त्वेवैनं

विच्छादयन्तीवाप्रियवेत्तेव भवत्यपि रोदितीव नाहमत्र

भोग्यं पश्यामीत्येवमेवैष मघवन्निति होवाचैतं त्वेव ते

भूयोऽनुव्याख्यास्यामि वसापराणि द्वात्रिꣳशतं वर्षाणीति

स हापराणि द्वात्रिꣳशतं वर्षाण्युवास तस्मै होवाच

॥ ८.१०.४॥

na vadhenāsya hanyate nāsya srāmyeṇa srāmo ghnanti tvevainaṃ

vicchādayantīvāpriyavetteva bhavatyapi roditīva nāhamatra

bhogyaṃ paśyāmītyevamevaiṣa maghavanniti hovācaitaṃ tveva te

bhūyo'nuvyākhyāsyāmi vasāparāṇi dvātrigͫśataṃ varṣāṇīti

sa hāparāṇi dvātrigͫśataṃ varṣāṇyuvāsa tasmai hovāca

.. 8.10.4..



4. ‘The body may be killed but the other is not killed. Nor is the dream body lame if the body is lame. Nevertheless, in dreams it may seem as if people are killing him; it may seem as if people are chasing him; it may seem as if there is something unpleasant. He may even seem to be weeping. I see nothing good in this.’ Prajāpati said:- ‘Indra, it is so. I will explain the matter to you again. Stay here another thirty-two years.’ Indra lived another thirty-two years there. Then Prajāpati said to him—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Asya vadhena na hanyate, [the dream body] is not killed when [the body] is killed; na asya srāmyeṇa srāmaḥ, nor is it lame with [the body’s] lameness; tu, nevertheless; enam eva ghnanti, as if they are killing him; vicchādayanti iva, as if they are chasing him; apriyavettā iva bhavati, as if there is something unpleasant; api roditi iva, as if he is even weeping; āham ātra bhogyam na paśyāmi iti, I see nothing good in this; evam eva eṣaḥ, it is like that; maghavan, O Maghavan; iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said; etam tu eva bhūyaḥ anuvyākhyāsyāmi, I will explain it once again; te, to you; vasa, stay here; aparāṇi dvātriṃśatam, another thirty-two; varṣāṇi iti, years; saḥ, he [Indra]; ha aparāṇi dvātriṃśatam varṣāṇi, for another thirty-two years; uvāsa, lived there; tasrnai ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said to him. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section. Commentary:- Indra says to Prajāpati, ‘Sir, if your original statement is true that the Self is without any shortcomings and it never changes, then the dream self cannot be the real Self.’ Prajāpati’s first premise was that the Self was apahatapāpmā, without any limitations. Pāpa has a very comprehensive meaning. It is not just ‘sin.’ It may also mean weakness, shortcoming, or limitation. So in the light of this premise Indra has come back.

Translation By Max Müller

4. Nor struck when it (the body) is struck, nor lamed when it is lamed, yet it is as if they struck him (the self) in dreams, as if they chased him. He becomes even conscious, as it were, of pain, and sheds tears. Therefore I see no good in this.' 'So it is indeed, Maghavat,' replied Pragâpati; 'but I shall explain him (the true Self) further to you. Live with me another thirty-two years.' He lived with him another thirty-two years. Then Pragâpati said:-


Sloka : 8.11.1

॥ इति दशमः खण्डः ॥

तद्यत्रैतत्सुप्तः समस्तः सम्प्रसन्नः स्वप्नं न विजानात्येष

आत्मेति होवाचैतदमृतमभयमेतद्ब्रह्मेति स ह शान्तहृदयः

प्रवव्राज स हाप्राप्यैव देवानेतद्भयं ददर्श नाह

खल्वयमेवꣳ सम्प्रत्यात्मानं जानात्ययमहमस्मीति

नो एवेमानि भूतानि विनाशमेवापीतो भवति नाहमत्र

भोग्यं पश्यामीति ॥ ८.११.१॥

.. iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tadyatraitatsuptaḥ samastaḥ samprasannaḥ svapnaṃ na vijānātyeṣa

ātmeti hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti sa ha śāntahṛdayaḥ

pravavrāja sa hāprāpyaiva devānetadbhayaṃ dadarśa nāha

khalvayamevagͫ sampratyātmānaṃ jānātyayamahamasmīti

no evemāni bhūtāni vināśamevāpīto bhavati nāhamatra

bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti .. 8.11.1..



1. Prajāpati said:- ‘When the self is sleeping, with all its organs inactive, it is free from worry and has no dreams. This is what the Self is like [i.e., it is spotless]. It is immortal and fearless. It is Brahman.’ Indra left happy in mind. But even before he got back to the gods, he was troubled by a doubt:- ‘When the self is in deep sleep, it is not able to recognize itself as “I am so-and-so,” as it does when it is awake. Not only that, it does not even recognize beings around it. It is as if the self has been obliterated. I don’t see that anything good will come from this’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Yatra tat etat, when this [self]; suptaḥ, is sleeping; samastaḥ, all organs inactive; samprasannaḥ, free from worry; svapnam na vijānāti, does not have any dreams; eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self [free from sin]; iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said; etat amṛtam abhayam, it is immortal and fearless; etat brahma iti, it is Brahman; saḥ ha śāntahṛdayaḥ pravavrāja, he [Indra] left happy in mind; aprāpya eva devān, but even before getting back to the gods; saḥ etat bhayam dadarśa, he saw this fear [i.e., difficulty]; ayam, this [self]; nāha khalu samprati, does not while [in deep sleep]; evam, in this way [i.e., as when awake]; ātmānam jānāti, know itself; ayam aham asmi iti, I am so-and-so; na eva imāni bhūtāni, nor even all these beings; vināśam eva apītaḥ bhavati, as if he becomes obliterated; na aham atra bhogyam paśyāmi iti, I don’t see any good in this. Commentary:- Next, Prajāpati told Indra about deep sleep. Normally when we are awake, our sense organs are outgoing, as if they are constantly searching for something. Then when we are dreaming, our body is at rest but our mind is not at rest. But if we have sound, dreamless sleep, our body, our organs, and our mind are all resting. Prajāpati says:- ‘This is the Self [Ātman]. This is Brahman.’ According to Vedanta, Ātman and Brahman are one and the same. When we use the word Ātman, we are referring to the Self within us. The word Brahman, means ‘the biggest,’ The greatest,’ ‘the ultimate.’ There is nothing higher, nothing greater. Really speaking, we don’t know what the ultimate is like. But we use the word Brahman to convey the idea of its uniqueness, that it is superior to everything. What Prajāpati said seemed very convincing, and Indra left śāntahṛdaya—with his mind satisfied, with no more doubts. But as he was on his way back home, something began to trouble him. He thought:- ‘When I have dreamless sleep, why is it that I am not conscious of anything—even of myself? It’s as if I have been annihilated and everything around me has disappeared. Why should this be?’ When Sri Ramakrishna used to have samādhi, he had no external consciousness and there was almost no sign of life in his body, but his face was beaming with joy. What is the difference between samādhi and deep sleep? In samādhi you have Self-knowledge. You know your real Self. And when your consciousness of the external world returns you are liberated. You have no more attachments or hankering after worldly pleasures. You are in a state of supreme bliss. In suṣupti, deep sleep, all feelings, all experiences, all perceptions are temporarily wiped out. But when you wake up, you are the same person you were when you went to sleep. Your ignorance is still there, and there is no change in your outlook. You have the same attachments and fears, and you run after the same worldly pleasures that you did before you had deep sleep. Your bondage continues. That is the difference between the two.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'When a man being asleep, reposing, and at perfect rest [1], sees no dreams, that is the Self, this is the immortal, the fearless, this is Brahman.' Then Indra went away satisfied in his heart. But before he had returned to the Devas, he saw this difficulty. In truth he thus does not know himself (his self) that he is I, nor does he know anything that exists. He is gone to utter annihilation. I see no good in this.

Footnote:

1. See Kh. Up. VIII, 6, 3.


Sloka : 8.11.2

स समित्पाणिः पुनरेयाय तꣳ ह प्रजापतिरुवाच

मघवन्यच्छान्तहृदयः प्राव्राजीः किमिच्छन्पुनरागम इति

स होवाच नाह खल्वयं भगव एवꣳ सम्प्रत्यात्मानं

जानात्ययमहमस्मीति नो एवेमानि भूतानि

विनाशमेवापीतो भवति नाहमत्र भोग्यं पश्यामीति

॥ ८.११.२॥

sa samitpāṇiḥ punareyāya tagͫ ha prajāpatiruvāca

maghavanyacchāntahṛdayaḥ prāvrājīḥ kimicchanpunarāgama iti

sa hovāca nāha khalvayaṃ bhagava evagͫ sampratyātmānaṃ

jānātyayamahamasmīti no evemāni bhūtāni

vināśamevāpīto bhavati nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti

.. 8.11.2..



2. Indra returned with fuel in hand. Prajāpati asked:- ‘Indra, you left happy in mind. What has made you come back?’ Indra replied:- ‘Lord, when the self is in deep sleep, it is not able to recognize itself as “I am so-and-so,” as it does when it is awake. Not only that, it does not even recognize beings around it. It is as if the self has been obliterated. I don’t see anything good coming from this’.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Saḥ, he [Indra]; punaḥ eyāya, again went back; samitpāṇiḥ, with fuel in hand; tam, to him; prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca, Prajāpati said; maghavan, O Maghavan [Indra]; yat prāvrājīḥ, you left; śāntahṛdayaḥ, satisfied; kim icchan, what do you want; punaḥ āgamaḥ iti, that you have come back again; saḥ ha uvāca, he [Indra] said; bhagavaḥ, lord; ayam, this [self]; nāha khalu samprati, does not while [in deep sleep]; evam, in this way [i.e., as when awake]; ātmānam jānāti, know itself; ayam aham asmi iti, I am so-and-so; na eva imāni bhūtāni, nor even all these beings; vināśam eva apītaḥ bhavati, as if he becomes Commentary:- There is no commentary available for this verse.

Translation By Max Müller

2. Taking fuel in his hand he went again as a pupil to Pragâpati. Pragâpati said to him:- 'Maghavat, as you went away satisfied in your heart, for what purpose did you come back?' He said:- 'Sir, in that way he does not know himself (his self) that he is I, nor does he know anything that exists. He is gone to utter annihilation. I see no good in this!


Sloka : 8.11.3

एवमेवैष मघवन्निति होवाचैतं त्वेव ते

भूयोऽनुव्याख्यास्यामि नो एवान्यत्रैतस्माद्वसापराणि

पञ्च वर्षाणीति स हापराणि पञ्च वर्षाण्युवास

तान्येकशतꣳ सम्पेदुरेतत्तद्यदाहुरेकशतꣳ ह वै वर्षाणि

मघवान्प्रजापतौ ब्रह्मचर्यमुवास तस्मै होवाच ॥ ८.११.३॥

evamevaiṣa maghavanniti hovācaitaṃ tveva te

bhūyo'nuvyākhyāsyāmi no evānyatraitasmādvasāparāṇi

pañca varṣāṇīti sa hāparāṇi pañca varṣāṇyuvāsa

tānyekaśatagͫ sampeduretattadyadāhurekaśatagͫ ha vai varṣāṇi

maghavānprajāpatau brahmacaryamuvāsa tasmai hovāca .. 8.11.3..



3. Prajāpati said:- ‘Indra, it is so. I will explain the matter to you again. Stay here another five years.’ Indra lived there another five years. The total time Indra spent thus was one hundred and one years. This is what sages refer to when they say, ‘Indra lived with Prajāpati for one hundred and one years practising brahmacarya.’ Then Prajāpati said to him—





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Evam eva eṣaḥ, it is like that; maghavan, O Maghavan; iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said; etam tu eva bhūyaḥ anuvyākhyāsyāmi, I will explain it once again; te, to you; vasa, stay here; aparāṇi pañca, another five; varṣāṇi iti, years; saḥ, he [Indra]; ha aparāṇi pañca varṣāṇi, for another five years; uvāsa, lived there; tāni ekaśatam sampeduḥ, one hundred and one [years] were completed; etat tat yat āhaḥ, this is what it is when people say; maghavān prajāpatau brahmacaryam uvāsa, Indra lived with Prajāpati practising brahmacārya; ekaśatam ha vai varṣāṇi iti, one hundred and one years; tasmai ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said to him. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section. Commentary:- For the third time Indra returned. Prajāpati must have been very pleased with this. If the student comes back again and again with questions, then naturally the teacher is pleased. He thinks:- ‘I have a very clever student. He wants to know, and I am happy to be able to help him.’ This time he asked Indra to practise brahmacarya for just five years, as he could see Indra was almost ready. So Indra practised austerities for a total of a hundred and one years. Śaṅkara says that the reason this story has been introduced here is to show how important Self-knowledge is—that there is nothing higher and more desirable than Self-knowledge. The Indian scriptures are very clear:- If you are mainly interested in acquiring money they say:- ‘All right, have money. But remember, it will only give you happiness for a while. Very soon you will discover what a bondage it is.’ It is the same for other things—scholarship, political power, social standing, and so on. You may enjoy them if you want, but all the time you must know that they will not last long and they will not give you peace of mind. The scriptures say that it is only through Self-knowledge that you will get happiness which is eternal, which is always yours. This is why Self-knowledge is considered to be the highest goal of life.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'So it is indeed, Maghavat,' replied Pragâpati; 'but I shall explain him (the true Self) further to you, and nothing more than this [1]. Live here other five years.' He lived there other five years. This made in all one hundred and one years, and therefore it is said that Indra Maghavat lived one hundred and one years as a pupil with Pragâpati. Pragâpati said to him:-

Footnote:

1. Saṅkara explains this as meaning the real Self, not anything different from the Self.


Sloka : 8.12.1

॥ इति एकादशः खण्डः ॥

मघवन्मर्त्यं वा इदꣳ शरीरमात्तं मृत्युना

तदस्यामृतस्याशरीरस्यात्मनोऽधिष्ठानमात्तो वै

सशरीरः प्रियाप्रियाभ्यां न वै सशरीरस्य सतः

प्रियाप्रिययोरपहतिरस्त्यशरीरं वाव सन्तं न

प्रियाप्रिये स्पृशतः ॥ ८.१२.१॥

.. iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

maghavanmartyaṃ vā idagͫ śarīramāttaṃ mṛtyunā

tadasyāmṛtasyāśarīrasyātmano'dhiṣṭhānamātto vai

saśarīraḥ priyāpriyābhyāṃ na vai saśarīrasya sataḥ

priyāpriyayorapahatirastyaśarīraṃ vāva santaṃ na

priyāpriye spṛśataḥ .. 8.12.1..



1. Indra, this body is mortal. It has been captured by death. Yet it is the base of the Self, which is immortal and formless. One who has a body is subject to both happiness and unhappiness. In fact, there is no end to happiness and unhappiness so long as one has a body. But when a person is free from the body, nothing good or bad can touch him.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Maghavan, O Maghavan [Indra]; martyam vai idam śarīram, this body is mortal [subject to death]; āttam mṛtyunā, it has been captured by death; tat, that [body]; asya amṛtasya aśarīrasya ātmanaḥ adhiṣṭhānam, is the foundation of this immortal and formless Self; āttaḥ vai saśarīraḥ priya-apriyābhyām, one who has a body is subject to good and evil; saśarīrasya sataḥ, for one who has a body; priya-apriyayoḥ apahatiḥ na asti, there is no end to good and evil; aśarīram vāva santam, but one who is without a body; priya-apriye na spṛśataḥ, is not touched by good and evil. Commentary:- Prajāpati now starts teaching Indra about the nature of the Self. He says the Self has no body and no form, yet somehow or other the Self has identified itself with the body. Why? Because of ignorance. But if the Self is supposed to be pure consciousness, pure knowledge, where has this ignorance come from? Can light and darkness coexist? Similarly, can knowledge and ignorance coexist? No. There is, in fact, no ignorance at all in the Self. Yet, somehow or other, the formless Self identifies itself with the body and imagines that whatever happens to the body happens to it. It feels it is born when the body is born, and that it dies when the body dies. Vedānta says this ignorance is temporary and it can be removed. Vedānta calls this ignorance māyā. Māyā is often translated as ‘illusion,’ but this is not quite correct. Swami Vivekananda calls it ‘a statement of fact.’ You cannot say it does not exist, but again you cannot say exactly what it is. It is anirvacanīya, indescribable. Śaṅkara often uses the example of the rope and the snake to explain how māyā works. Suppose you are walking along a road on a dark night, and you suddenly see what you think is a snake lying across the road in front of you. You are frightened and you start yelling, ‘Snake! Snake!’ Then some people living nearby come running out of their homes with lights, and you discover it is not a snake after all. It is just a rope. Another example given is that of the mirage. Suppose you are walking in a desert and you are very thirsty. In the distance you see a lake and you start walking towards it. You go on and on, but you never reach the water. Finally you realize it is just a mirage. It is all due to the effect of the sunrays on the sand. Another example is that of thinking you see silver where there is just a piece of mother-of-pearl. When you see the mother-of-pearl, you are convinced that you are seeing silver. So māyā is an error with a semblance of truth. Yet, Vedānta says, the mother-of-pearl never becomes silver, nor does the rope ever become a snake or the sand become water. Māyā has two aspects—āvaraṇa and vikṣepa. Āvaraṇa means ‘covering.’ Māyā covers the rope and hides its real nature. Vikṣepa is the projecting power of māyā. It projects the appearance of a snake where there is just a rope. This is also called adhyāsa, superimposition. Vedānta says this ignorance is just temporary. As soon as light comes, we see the rope rather than the snake. Similarly, as soon as knowledge is awakened in us, our false identification with the body is gone and we realize our true nature. Prajāpati says to Indra, ‘This body has been captured by death.’ Here Śaṅkara asks:- ‘Why does Prajāpati say this? He says this so that we will try to get rid of our ignorance quickly.’ If we are merely told that we are mortal and that some day we will die, we may say:- ‘Well, I will not die soon. I still have many years at my disposal to live as I like. I will enjoy myself as long as possible.’ But if we are told that we are already in the grips of death, that death is already at our doorstep, that it has already conquered us, we will understand that there is no time to lose. We must attain Self-knowledge immediately. The Hindu idea is that anything that has a beginning also has an end. Anything that is born must some day die. This is something we don’t like to accept. When Yama asked King Yuddhiṣṭhira what the most amazing thing was, Yuddhiṣṭhira replied, ‘The most amazing thing is that people see others dying all around them, but somehow or other they believe they will never die.’ But the fact is, the moment we are born, the process of death begins. When we are born, death comes to us and says:- ‘Here I am. I am going to follow you like a shadow. Sooner or later you will be my victim, even if I have to wait a hundred years.’ Vedānta says, however, that the Self is never born and it never dies. It is immortal. Death is for the śārīra—that is, for one who feels he is a body. So also pleasure and pain. These changing conditions afflict only the person who identifies himself with the body. This empirical world is a world of sense experience, and it is always subject to change. One moment it is hot, the next moment it is cold. One moment there is pleasure, and the next there is pain. This is the way the world goes on, continuously. But if you can get rid of the delusion that you are an embodied being, then you are no longer swayed by the changing conditions of life. You are always the same, always calm. And there is no question of pleasure and pain for you. They cannot touch you. Even if the body is affected, you are not affected. Prajāpati says the body is the adhiṣṭhānam, the abode or resting place, of the Self. Foṛ the time being the Self chooses to live in this house. Though the Self is amṛtam, immortal, and aśarīram, without a body, it identifies itself with the body and thinks it is mortal. This fact of delusion has to be recognized. We cannot ignore it. But if delusion, or ignorance, were in the nature of the Self, how could we get How do we uncover that Knowledge? How do we remove our delusion and stop identifying ourself with the body? Śaṅkara says, first we must become free from desires. We identify ourself with the body because we have desires. For example, we want to eat something. How will we eat it if we do not have a body? For any sense desire we have, we must have a body to fulfil it. And as long as we have a body, we will sometimes have pleasure and sometimes have pain. We cannot always have pleasure. Along with pleasure comes pain. Then again, some of our desires will be fulfilled, but some of them will not. And if they are not fulfilled, we will be disappointed. Vedānta says, even the desire for liberation requires a body to fulfil it. But when we attain Self-knowledge we realize a state where there is no such change. We then know our true nature, our real Self, which is never touched by the changing conditions of the world. Then Śaṅkara says, if you want Self-knowledge you must go to a teacher. But not just any teacher. You must go to one who is himself free from desires—one who is a paramahaṃsa. The word paramahaṃsa literally means a swan. A swan is said to be able to separate milk from water. If there is milk mixed with water, it will drink only the milk and leave behind the water. So a teacher who is a paramahaṃsa has developed discrimination between the real and the unreal, the permanent and the impermanent. He rejects whatever is unreal, and accepts only that which is real and immortal. That is to say, he has no more desires for anything in this world. What does such a teacher do? He shows you your real nature. Sri Ramakrishna used to explain this with the story of the tiger and the goats. Once a pregnant tigress was running after a flock of goats when she fell down exhausted and died. But as she died, she gave birth to a baby tiger. The baby tiger was adopted by the goats, and in course of time he began to eat grass and bleat just like them. All the while he thought he was a goat. Even when he grew up he never realized he was a tiger. One day a big tiger came there and was about to spring on the flock when he noticed another tiger running away frightened and bleating like a goat. Disgusted, he ran and caught hold of the grass-eating tiger and said:- ‘What are you doing here with these goats? Shame on you! You are a tiger.’ But the grass-eating tiger started crying and said:- ‘No, no, I am a goat. Let me go.’ Then the big tiger dragged the other to a river and said:- ‘Look at your reflection in the water. You look just like me. You are not a goat. You are a tiger.’ He then forced a piece of meat into the grass-eating tiger’s mouth. Getting the taste of the meat, the grass-eating tiger started to roar. So this is what the guru does. He removes our ignorance and tells us who we really are—tat tvam asi, thou art that.

Translation By Max Müller

1. 'Maghavat, this body is mortal and always held by death. It is the abode of that Self which is immortal and without body [1]. When in the body (by thinking this body is I and I am this body) the Self is held by pleasure and pain. So long as he is in the body, he cannot get free from pleasure and pain. But when he is free of the body (when he knows himself different from the body), then neither pleasure nor pain touches him [2].

Footnote:

1. According to some, the body is the result of the Self, the elements of the body, fire, water, and earth springing from the Self, and the Self afterwards entering them. 2. Ordinary, worldly pleasure. Comm.


Sloka : 8.12.2

अशरीरो वायुरभ्रं विद्युत्स्तनयित्नुरशरीराण्येतानि

तद्यथैतान्यमुष्मादाकाशात्समुत्थाय परं ज्योतिरुपसम्पद्य

स्वेन रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यन्ते ॥ ८.१२.२॥।

aśarīro vāyurabhraṃ vidyutstanayitnuraśarīrāṇyetāni

tadyathaitānyamuṣmādākāśātsamutthāya paraṃ jyotirupasampadya

svena rūpeṇābhiniṣpadyante .. 8.12.2...



2. The air is formless. So also are clouds, lightning, and thunder. All these arise from the sky and assume their respective forms due to the heat of the sun.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Aśarīraḥ vāyuḥ, air is formless; abhram vidyut stanayitnuḥ, light clouds, lightning, and thunder; etāni, all these; aśarīrāṇi, are formless; tat yathā, just as; etāni, all these; amuṣmāt ākāśāt, from the sky; samutthāya, arise; param jyotiḥ upasampadya, attain the great light [i.e., are exposed to the heat of the sun in summer]; svena rūpeṇa abhiniṣpadyante, appear in their respective forms [in the rainy season]. Commentary:- Here the idea is that even though we don’t see the Self, it is always within us. The Upaniṣad compares it with air, clouds, lightning, and thunder. In winter the sky is clear. There are very few clouds, and there are no strong winds or storms. But then as summer begins the temperature starts rising, and slowly the clouds gather. Then come the storms with their high winds and lightning and thunder. Where were the clouds and lightning during winter? They were there, but they were not visible. We see them only when the conditions are right; otherwise they are in a latent form, one with the sky. They appear from the sky, and then they merge into the sun.

Translation By Max Müller

2. 'The wind is without body, the cloud, lightning, and thunder are without body (without hands, feet, &c.) Now as these, arising from this heavenly ether (space), appear in their own form, as soon as they have approached the highest light,


Sloka : 8.12.3

एवमेवैष सम्प्रसादोऽस्माच्छरीरात्समुत्थाय परं

ज्योतिरुपसम्पद्य स्वेन रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यते स उत्तमपुरुषः

स तत्र पर्येति जक्षत्क्रीडन्रममाणः स्त्रीभिर्वा यानैर्वा

ज्ञातिभिर्वा नोपजनꣳ स्मरन्निदꣳ शरीरꣳ स यथा

प्रयोग्य आचरणे युक्त एवमेवायमस्मिञ्छरीरे

प्राणो युक्तः ॥ ८.१२.३॥

evamevaiṣa samprasādo'smāccharīrātsamutthāya paraṃ

jyotirupasampadya svena rūpeṇābhiniṣpadyate sa uttamapuruṣaḥ

sa tatra paryeti jakṣatkrīḍanramamāṇaḥ strībhirvā yānairvā

jñātibhirvā nopajanagͫ smarannidagͫ śarīragͫ sa yathā

prayogya ācaraṇe yukta evamevāyamasmiñcharīre

prāṇo yuktaḥ .. 8.12.3..



3. In the same way, the joyful self arises from the body and, attaining the light of the Cosmic Self, appears in his own form. This is the Paramātman, the Cosmic Self. He then freely moves about eating, playing, or enjoying himself with women, carriages, or relatives, not remembering at all the body in which he was born. Just as horses or bullocks are harnessed to carriages, similarly prāṇa [life] remains harnessed to the body [due to karma].





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Evam eva, just like that; eṣaḥ samprasādaḥ, this serene one [i.e., the individual self, after attaining Self-knowledge]; asmāt śarīrāt, from this body; samutthāya, arising; param jyotiḥ, the radiance of the Cosmic Self; upasampadya, attains; svena rūpeṇa abhiniṣpadyate, appears in his own form; saḥ uttama puruṣaḥ, this is the Supreme Being; saḥ tatra paryeti, he goes about; jakṣat krīḍan ramamāṇaḥ, eating, playing, and enjoying himself; strībhiḥ vā, with women; yānaiḥ vā, or in carriages; jñātibhiḥ vā, or with relatives; na smaran, not remembering; upajānam idam śarīram, this body in which he was born; yathā, just as; saḥ prayogyaḥ, an animal [a horse or bullock]; ācaraṇe yuktaḥ, is harnessed to a carriage [or chariot]; evam eva, like that; ayam prāṇaḥ, this life; asmin śarīre yuktaḥ, is harnessed to the body. Commentary:- The question here is, who is the enjoyer? It is the self. This is something basic to Vedānta philosophy. The self is the master. The body is like a house, and the self is like the owner of the house. Just as the owner of a house can change his house at any time, so also, the self can change its body at any time. Here the relationship of the self with the body is clearly brought out. The self is immortal and aśarīra, without a body. But, like lightning or clouds, the self is sometimes manifest in a form. With ordinary people the distinction between the self and the body is not noticeable, but with an enlightened person the distinction is quite conspicuous. In all his manners and his way of speaking, you see that the enlightened person is using his body as his instrument. He is always conscious that he is the self. He may be eating or drinking or talking or moving about like anyone else, but still you see there is a difference. An ordinary person is not his own master. He is a slave to his body and mind. But a knower of the Self has conquered the body and the mind and can make them behave as he wants. He is merely the draṣṭā, the spectator. He sees the world going on with all its madness, and to him it is great fun, because he is totally unaffected and untouched. Vedānta keeps trying to convince us of the fact that happiness is not outside. It is not dependent on any objective circumstances. It is all within. If happiness were dependent on external conditions then why doesn’t the same thing give happiness to everyone? Some people are very happy if they get some sweets to eat. But there are other people who don’t care for sweets at all. If the sweets were the source of happiness they should make everyone happy, but they don’t. There are people who, in spite of seemingly unfavorable circumstances, are very happy. They know that they don’t have to seek for happiness outside. They find it within. But this is not to say a knower of the Self is cold and indifferent. Śaṅkara says, when you know your Self, when you know you are Brahman and that everything you see is nothing but Brahman, then you feel you are one with all. If others are happy, you are happy. If others are in pain, you are also in pain. Now we are separate from others because we think we are the body and we identify ourself with our body. Yet still we talk of love, compassion, of sharing the sorrows and sufferings of others. How can we share them? We can’t. We may have pity on someone, but often that pity is accompanied by a sense of superiority. By showing pity we are often merely showing our arrogance. This is why the Taittirīya Upaniṣad says that when you give someone something, give it with respect. You may give something to a beggar. He may be in rags. Never mind, he is God. You should feel grateful to him that he is accepting your offering. The Upaniṣad also says, if you cannot give with respect then it is better not to give at all. You will hurt the other person’s self-respect. So whatever you give, give with love and humility. When you give something, you are giving it to your own Self, because you are everywhere—in the small, in the big, in a human being, and in an insect.

Translation By Max Müller

3. 'Thus does that serene being, arising from this body, appear in its own form, as soon as it has approached the highest light (the knowledge of Self [1]) He (in that state) is the highest person (uttama pûrusha). He moves about there laughing (or eating), playing, and rejoicing (in his mind), be it with women, carriages, or relatives, never minding that body into which he was born [2]. 'Like as a horse attached to a cart, so is the spirit [3] (prâna, pragñâtman) attached to this body.

Footnote:

1. The simile is not so striking as most of those old similes are. The wind is compared with the Self, on account of its being for a time lost in the ether (space), as the Self is in the body, and then rising again out of the ether and assuming its own form as wind. The chief stress is laid on the highest light, which in the one case is the sun of summer, in the other the light of knowledge. 2. These are pleasures which seem hardly compatible with the state of perfect peace which the Self is supposed to have attained. The passage may be interpolated, or put in on purpose to show that the Self enjoys such pleasures as an inward spectator only, without identifying himself with either pleasure or pain. He sees them, as he says afterwards, with his divine eye. The Self perceives in all things his Self only, nothing else. In his commentary on the Taittîrya Upanishad ( ) Saṅkara refers this passage to Brahman as an effect, not to Brahman as a cause. 3. The spirit, the conscious self, is not identical with the body, but only joined to it, like a horse, or driving it, like a charioteer. In other passages the senses are the horses; buddhi, reason, the charioteer; manas, mind, the reins. The spirit is attached to the cart by the ketana; cf. Ânandagñânagiri.


Sloka : 8.12.4

अथ यत्रैतदाकाशमनुविषण्णं चक्षुः स चाक्षुषः

पुरुषो दर्शनाय चक्षुरथ यो वेदेदं जिघ्राणीति स आत्मा

गन्धाय घ्राणमथ यो वेदेदमभिव्याहराणीति स

आत्माभिव्याहाराय वागथ यो वेदेदꣳ श‍ृणवानीति

स आत्मा श्रवणाय श्रोत्रम् ॥ ८.१२.४॥

atha yatraitadākāśamanuviṣaṇṇaṃ cakṣuḥ sa cākṣuṣaḥ

puruṣo darśanāya cakṣuratha yo vededaṃ jighrāṇīti sa ātmā

gandhāya ghrāṇamatha yo vededamabhivyāharāṇīti sa

ātmābhivyāhārāya vāgatha yo vededagͫ śṛṇavānīti

sa ātmā śravaṇāya śrotram .. 8.12.4..



4. Next, this organ of vision lies inside the space in the eyes. That is where the deity presiding over the eyes [i.e., the Self] is. The eye is the instrument through which the Self sees. Next, the one who knows ‘I am smelling this’ is the Self. The organ of smell is the instrument through which the Self smells. Next, the one who knows ‘I am speaking this’ is the Self. The organ of speech is the instrument through which the Self speaks. Next, the one who knows ‘I hear this’ is the Self. The organ of hearing is the instrument through which the Self hears.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, then; yatra etat cakṣuḥ, where this organ of vision is; ākāśam anuviṣaṇṇam, lying inside the space [in the eye]; saḥ cākṣuṣaḥ puruṣaḥ, that is the deity presiding over the eye; darśanāya cakṣuḥ, the eye is the instrument of vision; atha, then; yaḥ veda, one who knows; idam jighrāṇi iti, I smell this; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; gandhāya ghrāṇam, the organ of smell is the instrument of smelling; atha, then; yaḥ veda, one who knows; idam abhivyāharāṇi iti, I speak this; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; abhivyāhārāya vāk, the organ of speech is the instrument of speaking; atha, then; yaḥ veda, one who knows; idam śṛṇavāni iti, I hear this; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; śravaṇāya śrotram, the ear is the instrument of hearing. Commentary:- The Upaniṣad is saying that the Self is within us, and that the Self makes use of the organs for its experience in this empirical world. ‘I see, I hear, I speak’—who is this ‘I’? When I say, ‘I see,’ do I mean the eyes are seeing something by their own power? No. The Self is behind the eyes, and the Self uses them for its own purpose. The eyes are not independent. When we die, all our organs may be intact, yet we won’t be able to see or hear anything. You may ask, ‘How do I know that the Self is working through the organs?’ Vedānta says, suppose you are absent-minded and are absorbed in thinking something. Someone may come and stand before you and say something, but you don’t see him at all. Now who is it that is absorbed? It is the Self. The Self has withdrawn itself from the sense organs, and because of this they are not able to operate in the way they normally do. Earlier Prajāpati had told Indra and Virocana that the person in the eyes is the Self. Indra took it to mean that his own reflection was the Self. But this is not what Prajāpati meant. He meant that there is a being within us who sees through the eyes and hears through the ears. He says that within the eye there is a space, and that is where the Self is. The Self is hiding there, as it were. Prajāpati uses the word puruṣa to refer to the Self. Here puruṣa does not mean ‘male,’ as it does in Bengali. The word puruṣa literally means pure śayate—that is, ‘one who is lying,’ or ‘hidden’ (śayate) ‘in a place’ (pure). Who does the organ of smelling work for? The Self. All our organs are servants of the Self. The person in the eye uses the eye to see and the organ of smelling to smell. When the Self, the puruṣa, wants to speak, it uses the organ of speaking. And when it wants to hear, it uses the organ of hearing.

Translation By Max Müller

4. 'Now where the sight has entered into the void (the open space, the black pupil of the eye), there is the person of the eye, the eye itself is the instrument of seeing. He who knows, let me smell this, he is the Self, the nose is the instrument of smelling. He who knows, let me say this, he is the Self, the tongue is the instrument of saying. He who knows, let me hear this, he is the Self, the ear is the instrument of hearing.


Sloka : 8.12.5

अथ यो वेदेदं मन्वानीति सात्मा मनोऽस्य दैवं चक्षुः

स वा एष एतेन दैवेन चक्षुषा मनसैतान्कामान्पश्यन्रमते

य एते ब्रह्मलोके ॥ ८.१२.५॥

atha yo vededaṃ manvānīti sātmā mano'sya daivaṃ cakṣuḥ

sa vā eṣa etena daivena cakṣuṣā manasaitānkāmānpaśyanramate

ya ete brahmaloke .. 8.12.5..



5. Then, it is the Self which knows ‘I am thinking this.’ The mind is its divine eye. The Self, now free, enjoys seeing everything it wants to see in Brahmaloka through its divine mental eye.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Atha, next; yaḥ veda, that which knows; idam manvāni iti, I am thinking this; saḥ ātmā, that is the Self; manaḥ asya daivam cakṣuḥ, the mind is its divine eye; saḥ vai eṣaḥ, that [Self]; etena daivena cakṣuṣā manasā, with the help of the divine mental eye; etān kāmān paśyan ramate, enjoys seeing the things it likes; yaḥ ete brahmaloke, those which are in Brahmaloka. Commentary:- Next comes the mind. The mind is the principal organ. The Self works through the mind, and by means of the mind it works through the eyes, ears, and other organs. You may remember the example given in the Kaṭha Upaniṣad:- The Self is the master of the chariot, the mind is the charioteer, and the organs are the horses. The mind is directly responsible for keeping the organs under control. The mind is called here the daivam cakṣuḥ, the divine eye, because the Self sees through the mind. The mind is extraordinary. One who is firmly established in Self-knowledge can enjoy whatever he wants mentally. And for such a person everything is Brahman and every place is Brahmaloka.

Translation By Max Müller

5. 'He who knows, let me think this, he is the Self, the mind is his divine eye [1]. He, the Self, seeing these pleasures (which to others are hidden like a buried treasure of gold) through his divine eye, i. e. the mind, rejoices.

Footnote:

1. Because it perceives not only what is present, but also what is past and future.


Sloka : 8.12.6

तं वा एतं देवा आत्मानमुपासते तस्मात्तेषाꣳ सर्वे च

लोका आत्ताः सर्वे च कामाः स सर्वाꣳश्च लोकानाप्नोति

सर्वाꣳश्च कामान्यस्तमात्मानमनुविद्य विजानातीति ह

प्र्जापतिरुवाच प्रजापतिरुवाच ॥ ८.१२.६॥

taṃ vā etaṃ devā ātmānamupāsate tasmātteṣāgͫ sarve ca

lokā āttāḥ sarve ca kāmāḥ sa sarvāgͫśca lokānāpnoti

sarvāgͫśca kāmānyastamātmānamanuvidya vijānātīti ha

prjāpatiruvāca prajāpatiruvāca .. 8.12.6..



6. This Self is worshipped by the gods. This is why all worlds and all desirable things are within their grasp. One who fully understands and realizes this Self [with the help of teachers and the scriptures] is able to attain whatever worlds and whatever desirable things he wants. This is what Prajāpati taught Indra.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tam vai etam devāḥ ātmānam upāsate, that is the Self which the gods worship; tasmāt, this is why; sarve ca lokāḥ, all the worlds; teṣām āttāḥ, are within the grasp of them [the gods]; sarve ca kāmāḥ, and all things they desire; sarvān ca lokān, all worlds; sarvān ca kāmān, and all things one desires; āpnoti, one attains; yaḥ tam ātmānam anuvidya, one who knows the Self; vijānāti iti, and has a direct, personal experience of it; prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca prajāpatiḥ uvāca, this is what Prajāpati taught. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section. Commentary:- Here the Upaniṣad is praising Self-knowledge in order to tempt us to attain it. Earlier the Upaniṣad said, ‘Na alpe sukḥam asti’—there is no happiness in the finite, in what is small or limited. Only in bhūmā, the infinite, is there happiness. Bhūmā is infinite in terms of both time and space. Whatever is limited by time and space cannot give us peace and happiness. Even the state of a god or goddess is a limitation, according to Hinduism. By virtue of the kind of life you have lived and the good things you have done, you may be elevated to the position of a god or goddess. But that position is only temporary. When your term expires, you are right back where you Śaṅkara says the Upaniṣad does not mean to say that this state can be attained only by gods and goddesses. It is for human beings also. In fact, it is our very birthright. The story of Indra and Virocana going to Prajāpati for Self-knowledge shows that we are all suffering from discontent. We are always seeking something, though we may not know exactly what it is. Even the gods and goddesses in heaven are not content. After many births they have attained the status of a god or goddess, and they seem to have everything they desire, yet still they are not satisfied. This is why Indra went to Prajāpati and spent a hundred and one years practising austerities to get the knowledge of the Self. The Upaniṣad says again and again that Self-knowledge is the highest. If you attain that you attain everything.  

Translation By Max Müller

6. 'The Devas who are in the world of Brahman meditate on that Self (as taught by Pragâpati to Indra, and by Indra to the Devas). Therefore all worlds belong to them, and all desires. He who knows that Self and understands it, obtains all worlds and all desires.' Thus said Pragâpati, yea, thus said Pragâpati.


Sloka : 8.13.1

॥ इति द्वादशः खण्डः ॥

श्यामाच्छबलं प्रपद्ये शबलाच्छ्यामं प्रपद्येऽश्व

इव रोमाणि विधूय पापं चन्द्र इव राहोर्मुखात्प्रमुच्य

धूत्वा शरीरमकृतं कृतात्मा

ब्रह्मलोकमभिसंभवामीत्यभिसंभवामीति ॥ ८.१३.१॥

.. iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

śyāmācchabalaṃ prapadye śabalācchyāmaṃ prapadye'śva

iva romāṇi vidhūya pāpaṃ candra iva rāhormukhātpramucya

dhūtvā śarīramakṛtaṃ kṛtātmā

brahmalokamabhisaṃbhavāmītyabhisaṃbhavāmīti .. 8.13.1..



1. From the dark may I attain the diverse. From the diverse may I attain the dark. Like a horse shaking its fur [to remove the dirt], I will shake off whatever spot I may have on my character. Like the moon freeing itself from the mouth of Rāhu [and regaining its brightness], I will, having accomplished everything, lay down this body and attain that eternal Brahmaloka.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Śyāmāt śabalam prapadye, from the dark may I attain the diverse; śabalāt śyāmam prapadye, from the diverse may I attain the dark; aśvaḥ romāṇi iva, as a horse [shakes] its fur; pāpam vidhūya, I will shake off any shortcomings [I have]; candra iva rāhoḥ mukhāt pramucya, as the moon gets free from the mouth of Rāhu; dhūtvā śarīram, laying down the body; kṛtātmā, having accomplished everything; akṛtam, eternal; brahmalokam, Brahmaloka; abhisambhavāmi iti abhisambhavāmi iti, I will attain, I will attain. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteeenth section. Commentary:- This is a meditation mantra. It contains the essence of all that has been said before in this Upaniṣad. There are two important words used here—śyāma and śabala. Śyāma means ‘dark,’ or ‘black.’ Śyāmā is the feminine form, and it is also a name of Mother Kālī. Śaṅkara says that śyāma is gambhīraḥ varṇaḥ, a deep colour—that is to say, it is not perceptible to our sense organs. When we say something is dark, it suggests that it is difficult to know. Mother Kālī is said to be dark because we really do not know what or who she is. Here the word śyāma refers to Brahman, because Brahman also is difficult to know. Where do we realize Brahman? Within us, within the heart. Śabala means many-coloured, or with many forms. It stands for Brahmaloka. It is the multiplicity outside. The idea is, what is inside is also outside. The One becomes the many. Suppose you enter a room where there are a hundred mirrors. What do you see? You see a hundred reflections of yourself. Or suppose the moon is shining above and there are many pots of water on the ground. In each pot there is a reflection of the moon, but there is in reality only one moon. How do we realize this—that the One becomes the many? Through cittaśuddhi, purification of the mind. Your mind is like a mirror. If the mirror is clean you have a very clear reflection of yourself. But if there is dust and dirt on the mirror you cannot see your reflection very well. The Upaniṣad has again and again been emphasizing this need for purification of the mind. It is not something that is attained all of a sudden. It does not happen by a fluke. It comes only after years of hard struggle and self-discipline. Two illustrations are given here in this verse. The first is about a horse. When a horse has dirt on his body, he wants to get rid of it. He does not like something unnatural sticking to his fur. What does he do? He shakes his body. So also, we have the dirt of ignorance, egotism, and other things clinging to our mind, but they are not part of our real nature and we must get rid of them. We must shake them off. How? Through discrimination:- ‘I am not this body, nor am I identified with anything the body is identified with, such as caste or country. These are all superimpositions. My real Self is always pure, without birth, without death.’ When you practise this kind of discrimination, slowly the conviction grows on you that you are not the body, that you are the Self, separate from the body. The second illustration is taken from the myth of the churning of the ocean. In ancient times the gods and the demons decided to churn the ocean to obtain the nectar of immortality so that they would never die. After much difficulty they managed to get the nectar, and then the gods tricked the demons and snatched it away so they could have it all for themselves. When the nectar was being distributed among the gods, the sun and the moon noticed that Rāhu, a demon, was hiding among them and they shouted a warning. But it was too late. Rāhu was able to get a taste of the nectar just before his head was cut off. Thus the rest of his body perished but his head became immortal, and that head is forever chasing his enemies, the sun and the moon. When there is an eclipse of the moon, it is said that Rāhu has swallowed the moon. But because Rāhu has no body, the moon soon comes out from the bottom of his head and we again see the shining form of the moon. The Upaniṣad says that it is as if we were all within the mouth of Rāhu. We have all been swallowed by ignorance, as it were. By nature we are the luminous Self, but the light of the Self has been covered by the darkness of ignorance. Somehow or other we have to free ourselves from the mouth of Rāhu and we will then regain our inherent splendour. Vedānta says, if you are Brahman you have always been Brahman. It is not that you are attaining something new. When you realize Brahman, you realize what you have always been. It is like a prince kidnapped by some beggars when he is just a baby. As he grows up among the beggars, he behaves just like them. He never realizes he is a prince. But one day some people discover him and take him to the palace and tell him he is the prince. He was always the prince, only he did not know it. There is a wonderful example told by Holy Mother. There was a large diamond lying on the ground near a bathing ghat. Everyone thought it was a piece of glass, and those who came to bathe there used to scrape the dirt off their feet by rubbing them on the diamond. One day a jeweller saw it and realized it was a diamond. Hadn’t it always been a diamond? Similarly, you have always been Brahman, only you did not know it. Vedānta says we have placed our own hands over our eyes and we are saying:- ‘Help! I can’t see anything. I am blind.’ We have always been telling ourselves that we are worthless and good for nothing. Now we must reverse our thinking. We must tell ourselves that we are pure, free, and divine. Vedānta does not claim it can perform any miracles. It does not have any strange, magical formulas. What Vedānta says is very simple and straightforward—Tat tvam asi, thou art that. Vedānta tries to awaken the power that is already lying dormant within us. And in how many different ways it tries. Śaṅkara says the scriptures are ādaravati, affectionate, like a mother. Perhaps you want to eat only sweets and nothing else, but the doctor has said you should not eat sweets. What does your mother do? She will go on coaxing you in different ways to eat what is good for you. Similarly, the Upaniṣad goes on coaxing us to attain Self-knowledge. The Upaniṣad is telling us we are now mesmerized into thinking we are good for nothing, a sinner, a slave. We have to get out of the grips of this delusion, like the moon gets out of the mouth of Rāhu. We have to shake off this delusion, like the horse shaking off the dirt on its fur. We then attain a state which is called akṛtam, uncreated. Whatever is created will be destroyed. If we build a house, then some day or other it will be destroyed. But that which is uncreated, which is not the effect of anything, is eternal. It will never come to an end. Self-knowledge is not something created in us. It is not a product. Nor is it the result of anything.

Translation By Max Müller

1. From the dark (the Brahman of the heart) I come to the nebulous (the world of Brahman), from the nebulous to the dark, shaking off all evil, as a horse shakes his hairs, and as the moon frees herself from the mouth of Râhu [1]. Having shaken off the body, I obtain, self made and satisfied, the uncreated world of Brahman, yea, I obtain it.

Footnote:

1. Râhu, in later times a monster, supposed to swallow the sun and moon at every solar or lunar eclipse. At first we only hear of the mouth or head of Râhu. In later times a body was assigned to him, but it had to be destroyed again by Vishnu, so that nothing remained of him but his head. Râhu seems derived from rah, to separate, to remove. From it raksh, to wish or strive to remove, to keep off, to protect, and in a different application rákshas, a tearing away, violence, rakshás, a robber, an evil spirit.


Sloka : 8.14.1

॥ इति त्रयोदशः खण्डः ॥

आकाशो वै नाम नामरूपयोर्निर्वहिता ते यदन्तरा

तद्ब्रह्म तदमृतꣳ स आत्मा प्रजापतेः सभां वेश्म प्रपद्ये

यशोऽहं भवामि ब्राह्मणानां यशो राज्ञां यशोविशां

यशोऽहमनुप्रापत्सि स हाहं यशसां यशः

श्येतमदत्कमदत्कꣳ श्येतं लिन्दु माभिगां लिन्दु

माभिगाम् ॥ ८.१४.१॥

.. iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

ākāśo vai nāma nāmarūpayornirvahitā te yadantarā

tadbrahma tadamṛtagͫ sa ātmā prajāpateḥ sabhāṃ veśma prapadye

yaśo'haṃ bhavāmi brāhmaṇānāṃ yaśo rājñāṃ yaśoviśāṃ

yaśo'hamanuprāpatsi sa hāhaṃ yaśasāṃ yaśaḥ

śyetamadatkamadatkagͫ śyetaṃ lindu mābhigāṃ lindu

mābhigām .. 8.14.1..



1. That which is described as space manifests names and forms. These names and forms are within Brahman. Brahman is immortal; it is the Self. May I attend the court of Prajāpati. May I attain the fame of a brāhmin, and also of a prince and a merchant. I wish to have real fame. I want to be famous among all famous people. May I not have to be born again and have a body covered with blood and dirt, which is toothless and at the same time always wanting to eat.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Ākāśaḥ vai nāma, that which is described as ‘space’; nāmarūpayoḥ nirvahitā, is manifest through names and forms; te, those [names and forms]; yat antarā, are within that; tat brahma, that is Brahman; tat amṛtam, that [Brahman] is immortal; saḥ ātmā, it is the Self [the inmost being in everyone]; prapadye, may I be able to enter; sabhām veśma, the court; prajāpateḥ, of Prajāpati; aham bhavāmi yaśaḥ brāhmaṇānām, may I attain the fame of a brāhmin; yāśaḥ rājñām, the fame of a prince; yaśaḥ viśam, the fame of a merchant; aham yaśaḥ anuprāpatsi, I wish to have real fame; saḥ ha aham yaśasām yaśaḥ, I want to be famous among all famous people; mā abhigām, may I not be born again; śyetam adatkam adatkam śyetam lindu, so that I may not have a body covered with blood and dirt, and which is toothless yet always wanting to eat. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section. Commentary:- How do we meditate on the infinite? One way is to think of ākāśa, space. Sri Ramakrishna used to advise this also. If we can think we are one with the infinite, then slowly the consciousness that we are the body, that we are limited and bound, will go. We must not make the mistake of thinking that Brahman and ākāśa are the same, however. They are by no means synonymous. Ākāśa is matter, and Brahman is not. Brahman is pure consciousness. But often we find that, just to give us some idea of what Brahman is like, ākāśa is used as an example. This is because we cannot see it or feel it, yet we know it is everywhere. How do we identify something or someone? Only by mentioning its name and form. If we take away the names and forms, there is just one vast Existence. I am Existence. You are Existence. Everything is Existence, Sat. And this Sat is one and undivided. But as soon as we give something a form and a name, it becomes individualized. Then one individual becomes separate from another. The Upaniṣad says, that in which all these names and forms exist, and which is unattached and unaffected by them, is Brahman.

Translation By Max Müller

1. He who is called ether [1] (âkâsa) is the revealer of all forms and names. That within which these forms and names are contained is the Brahman, the Immortal, the Self. I come to the hall of Pragâpati, to the house; I am the glorious among Brahmans, glorious among princes, glorious among men [2]. I obtained that glory, I am glorious among the glorious. May I never go to the white, toothless, yet devouring, white abode [3]; may I never go to it.

Footnote:

1. Âkâsa, ether or space, is a name of Brahman, because, like ether, Brahman has no body and is infinitely small. 2. Here the three classes, commonly called castes, are clearly marked by the names of brâhmana, râgan, and vis. 3. Yonisabditam pragananendriyam.


Sloka : 8.15.1

॥ इति चतुर्दशः खण्डः ॥

तधैतद्ब्रह्मा प्रजापतयै उवाच प्रजापतिर्मनवे मनुः

प्रजाभ्यः आचार्यकुलाद्वेदमधीत्य यथाविधानं गुरोः

कर्मातिशेषेणाभिसमावृत्य कुटुम्बे शुचौ देशे

स्वाध्यायमधीयानो धर्मिकान्विदधदात्मनि सर्वैन्द्रियाणि

सम्प्रतिष्ठाप्याहिꣳसन्सर्व भूतान्यन्यत्र तीर्थेभ्यः

स खल्वेवं वर्तयन्यावदायुषं ब्रह्मलोकमभिसम्पद्यते

न च पुनरावर्तते न च पुनरावर्तते ॥ ८.१५.१॥

.. iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ..

tadhaitadbrahmā prajāpatayai uvāca prajāpatirmanave manuḥ

prajābhyaḥ ācāryakulādvedamadhītya yathāvidhānaṃ guroḥ

karmātiśeṣeṇābhisamāvṛtya kuṭumbe śucau deśe

svādhyāyamadhīyāno dharmikānvidadhadātmani sarvaindriyāṇi

sampratiṣṭhāpyāhigͫsansarva bhūtānyanyatra tīrthebhyaḥ

sa khalvevaṃ vartayanyāvadāyuṣaṃ brahmalokamabhisampadyate

na ca punarāvartate na ca punarāvartate .. 8.15.1..



1. Brahmā taught this knowledge of the Self to Prajāpati, and Prajāpati taught it to Manu. Manu, in his turn, taught it to all human beings. A young man goes to live at his teacher’s house and serves him, and when he is free he studies the Vedas in the prescribed manner. After finishing all his studies, he goes back home and marries. But he continues to study the scriptures in a sacred place. He also teaches his children and disciples in such a way that they will be religious. He keeps all his senses under control and avoids violence unless he is at a holy place. This is how he lives his whole life. Then after death he goes to Brahmaloka, and he is not born again, he is not born again.





Commentary of Shankaracharya

Word-for-word explanation:- Tat ha etat, this [knowledge of the Self, which has so long been discussed]; brahmā prajāpataye uvāca, Brahmā taught Prajāpati [i.e., to Kaśyapa]; prajāpatiḥ manave, Prajāpati [taught] Manu; manuḥ prajābhyaḥ, Manu [taught] his own children [i.e., to all human beings]; yathā-vidhānam, strictly according to the prescribed rules; vedam adhītya, studying the Vedas; guroḥ karma atiśeṣena, in the time he is free after serving the teacher; abhisamāvṛtya ācāryakulāt, after returning home from the teacher’s house; kutumbe, he marries; śucau deṣe, in a holy place; svādhyāyam adhīyānaḥ, studying the scriptures regularly and as the occasion demands; dhārmikān vidadhāt, teaching his children and disciples to be truly religious; ātmani sarvendriyāṇi sampratiṣṭhāpya, withdrawing all organs into himself; ahiṃsan sarvabhūtāni, practising non-in-jury to all living beings; anyatra tīrthebhyaḥ, except at a holy place; saḥ khalu evam vartayan, he lives in this way; yāvat āyuṣam, to the end of his life; brahmalokam abhisampadyate, goes to Brahmaloka; na ca punaḥ āvartate na ca punaḥ āvartate, and he does not return, he does not return [to this world again]. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section. Iti chāndogya upaniṣadi aṣṭamaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the eighth chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad. Commentary:- The Chāndogya Upaniṣad has altogether eight chapters, the first five of them being devoted to karma (worship), and the last three being almost exclusively devoted to ātmā-jñāna (Self-knowledge). One may ask, ‘Why waste so much space on worship?’ The answer is that worship is necessary in order to attain citta-śuddhi (purification of the mind). A pure mind is like a clean mirror. If you stand before a clean mirror, you can see yourself clearly. Similarly, when your mind is purified, the Self reveals itself to you. You then know that your self is the Self of all and you are one with all. The Upaniṣad says here that as soon as you receive the sacred thread, you go and live with your teacher as a brahmacārin. You become part of his family. You serve him in various ways, and he teaches you all that you need to know. Though you must work hard serving the teacher and also studying the scriptures, in the long run you learn more from the way your teacher lives. He shows you what kind of person you have to be. If the teacher is satisfied with your progress, he permits you to go back home. This permission is called samāvartan—a convocation, in common parlance. You may or may not go back home. If you return home, you may marry and raise a family. The scriptures tell you what sort of life you have to live there. As a householder, you have many obligations to fulfil, and you fulfil them as best you can, following the scriptures. There are two kinds of brahmacārins:- The ṇaiṣṭhika brahmacārins never marry. They remain with the teacher and are life-long celibates. The upakurvāṇa brahmacārins live with the teacher for twelve years as celibates, and then they may return home and marry. But no matter whether you remain with the teacher or you return home and become a householder, you are required to continue studying the scriptures. And you must study them according to the rules laid down about place and time. This is called svadhyāya. Along with svadhyāya, you are also required to practise ahiṃsā, non-violence. The Upaniṣad says you must NOTE:- Missing pages!!!   ॐ आप्यायन्तु ममाङ्गानि वाक्प्राणश्च्क्षुः श्रोत्रमथो बलमिन्द्रियाणि च सर्वाणि । सर्वं ब्रह्मौपनिषदं माहं ब्रह्म निराकुर्यां मा मा ब्रह्म निराकरोदनिकारणमस्त्वनिकारणं मेऽस्तु । तदात्मनि निरते य उपनिषत्सु धर्मास्ते मयि सन्तु ते मयि सन्तु ॥ ॥ इति अष्टमोऽध्यायः ॥ ॥ ॐ शान्तिः शान्तिः शान्तिः ॥ ॥ इति छान्दोग्योऽपनिषद् ॥ ॐ āpyāyantu mamāṅgāni vākprāṇaśckṣuḥ śrotramatho balamindriyāṇi ca sarvāṇi | sarvaṃ brahmaupaniṣadaṃ māhaṃ brahma nirākuryāṃ mā mā brahma nirākarodanikāraṇamastvanikāraṇaṃ me'stu | tadātmani nirate ya upaniṣatsu dharmāste mayi santu te mayi santu || || iti aṣṭamo'dhyāyaḥ || || ॐ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ || || iti chāndogyo'paniṣad ||

Translation By Max Müller

1. Brahmâ (Hiranyagarbha or Paramesvara) told this to Pragâpati (Kasyapa), Pragâpati to Manu (his son), Manu to mankind. He who has learnt the Veda from a family of teachers, according to the sacred rule, in the leisure time left from the duties to be performed for the Guru, who, after receiving his discharge, has settled in his own house, keeping up the memory of what he has learnt by repeating it regularly in some sacred spot, who has begotten virtuous sons, and concentrated all his senses on the Self, never giving pain to any creature, except at the tîrthas [1] (sacrifices, &c.), he who behaves thus all his life, reaches the world of Brahman, and does not return, yea, he does not return.

Footnote:

1. The commentator says that even travelling about as a mendicant causes pain, but that a mendicant is allowed to importune people for alms at tîrthas, or sacred places. Others explain this differently.


Shanti Mantra (END)

ॐ आप्यायन्तु ममाङ्गानि वाक्प्राणश्च्क्षुः

श्रोत्रमथो बलमिन्द्रियाणि च सर्वाणि ।

सर्वं ब्रह्मौपनिषदं माहं ब्रह्म निराकुर्यां मा मा ब्रह्म

निराकरोदनिकारणमस्त्वनिकारणं मेऽस्तु ।

तदात्मनि निरते य उपनिषत्सु धर्मास्ते

मयि सन्तु ते मयि सन्तु ॥

॥ ॐ शान्तिः शान्तिः शान्तिः ॥

॥ इति छान्दोग्योऽपनिषद् ॥

oṃ āpyāyantu mamāṅgāni vākprāṇaśckṣuḥ

śrotramatho balamindriyāṇi ca sarvāṇi .

sarvaṃ brahmaupaniṣadaṃ māhaṃ brahma nirākuryāṃ mā mā brahma

nirākarodanikāraṇamastvanikāraṇaṃ me'stu .

tadātmani nirate ya upaniṣatsu dharmāste

mayi santu te mayi santu ..

.. oṃ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ ..

.. iti chāndogyo'paniṣad ..


Summary

The Chandogya Upanishad (Sanskrit: छान्दोग्योपनिषद्, IAST: Chāndogyopaniṣad) is a Sanskrit text embedded in the Chandogya Brahmana of the Sama Veda of Hinduism. It is one of the oldest Upanishads.

It is one of the most cited texts in later Bhasyas (reviews and commentaries) by scholars from the diverse schools of Hinduism. Adi Shankara, for example, cited Chandogya Upanishad 810 times in his Vedanta Sutra Bhasya, more than any other ancient text.

The chant of Om, the essence of all

The Chandogya Upanishad opens with the recommendation that “let a man meditate on Om”. It calls the syllable Om as udgitha (उद्गीथ, song, chant), and asserts that the significance of the syllable is thus: the essence of all beings is earth, the essence of earth is water, the essence of water are the plants, the essence of plants is man, the essence of man is speech, the essence of speech is the Rig Veda, the essence of the Rig Veda is the Sama Veda, and the essence of Sama Veda is udgitha.

Good and evil may be everywhere, yet life-principle is inherently good

The legend in section 1.2 of Chandogya Upanishad states that gods took the Udgitha (song of Om) unto themselves, thinking, “with this [song] we shall overcome the demons”. The gods revered the Udgitha as sense of smell, but the demons cursed it and ever since one smells both good-smelling and bad-smelling, because it is afflicted with good and evil. The deities thereafter revered the Udgitha as speech, but the demons afflicted it and ever since one speaks both truth and untruth, because speech has been struck with good and evil. The deities next revered the Udgitha as sense of sight (eye), but the demons struck it and ever since one sees both what is harmonious, sightly and what is chaotic, unsightly, because sight is afflicted with good and evil. The gods then revered the Udgitha as sense of hearing (ear), but the demons afflicted it and ever since one hears both what is worth hearing and what is not worth hearing, because hearing is afflicted with good and evil. The gods thereafter revered the Udgitha as Manas (mind), but the demons afflicted it and therefore one imagines both what is worth imagining and what is not worth imagining, because mind is afflicted with good and evil. Then the gods revered the Udgitha as Prāṇa (vital breath, breath in the mouth, life-principle), and the demons struck it but they fell into pieces. Life-principle is free from evil, it is inherently good. The deities inside man – the body organs and senses of man are great, but they all revere the life-principle because it is the essence and the lord of all of them. Om is the Udgitha, the symbol of life-principle in man.

Space: the origin and the end of everything

The Chandogya Upanishad, in eighth and ninth volumes of the first chapter describes the debate between three men proficient in Udgitha, about the origins and support of Udgitha and all of empirical existence. The debaters summarize the answer as Space. Max Muller notes that the term “space”, was later asserted in the Vedanta Sutra verse 1.1.22 to be a symbolism for the Vedic concept of Brahman.

A ridicule and satire on egotistic nature of priests

The tenth through twelfth volumes of the first Prapathaka of Chandogya Upanishad describe a legend about priests and it criticizes how they go about reciting verses and singing hymns without any idea what they mean or the divine principle they signify.

Structure of language and cosmic correspondences

The 13th volume of the first chapter lists mystical meanings in the structure and sounds of a chant. The text asserts that hāu, hāi, ī, atha, iha, ū, e, hiṅ among others correspond to empirical and divine world, such as moon, wind, sun, oneself, Agni, Prajapati, and so on. The thirteen syllables listed are Stobhaksharas, sounds used in musical recitation of hymns, chants and songs.

The significance of chant

The first volume of the second chapter states that the reverence for entire Sāman (साम्न, chant) is sādhu (साधु, good), for three reasons. These reasons invoke three different contextual meanings of Saman, namely abundance of goodness or valuable (सामन), friendliness or respect (सम्मान), property goods or wealth (सामन्, also समान). The Chandogya Upanishad states that the reverse is true too, that people call it a-sāman when there is deficiency or worthlessness (ethics), unkindness or disrespect (human relationships), and lack of wealth (means of life, prosperity).

Everything in universe chants

The Chandogya Upanishad describes natural phenomena such as a thunderstorm as a form of chant. Volumes 2 through 7 of the second Prapathaka present analogies between various elements of the universe and elements of a chant. The latter include Hinkāra (हिङ्कार, preliminary vocalizing), Prastāva (प्रस्ताव, propose, prelude, introduction), Udgītha (उद्गीत, sing, chant), Pratihāra (प्रतिहार, response, closing) and Nidhana (निधन, finale, conclusion). The sets of mapped analogies present interrelationships and include cosmic bodies, natural phenomena, hydrology, seasons, living creatures and human physiology.

The eighth volume of the second chapter expand the five-fold chant structure to seven-fold chant structure, wherein Ādi and Upadrava are the new elements of the chant.

The metaphorical theme in this volume of verses, states Paul Deussen, is that the universe is an embodiment of Brahman, that the “chant” (Saman) is interwoven into this entire universe and every phenomenon is a fractal manifestation of the ultimate reality.

The nature of Dharma and Ashramas (stages) theory

The Chandogya Upanishad in volume 23 of chapter 2 provides one of the earliest expositions on the broad, complex meaning of Vedic concept dharma. It includes as dharma – ethical duties such as charity to those in distress (Dāna, दान), personal duties such as education and self study (svādhyāya, स्वाध्याय, brahmacharya, ब्रह्मचर्य), social rituals such as yajna (यज्ञ).

Brahman is the sun of all existence, Madhu Vidya

The Chandogya Upanishad presents the Madhu Vidya (honey knowledge) in first eleven volumes of the third chapter. Sun is praised as source of all light and life, and stated as worthy of meditation in a symbolic representation of Sun as “honey” of all Vedas. The Brahman is stated in these volume of verses to be the sun of the universe, and the ‘natural sun’ is a phenomenal manifestation of the Brahman, states Paul Deussen.

Gayatri mantra: symbolism of all that is

Gayatri mantra is the symbol of the Brahman - the essence of everything, states volume 3.12 of the Chandogya Upanishad. Gayatri as speech sings to everything and protects them, asserts the text.

The Ultimate exists within oneself

The first six verses of the thirteenth volume of Chandogya’s third chapter state a theory of Svarga (heaven) as human body, whose doorkeepers are eyes, ears, speech organs, mind and breath. To reach Svarga, asserts the text, understand these doorkeepers. The Chandogya Upanishad then states that the ultimate heaven and highest world exists within oneself.

Individual soul and the infinite Brahman is same, one’s soul is God, Sandilya Vidya

The Upanishad presents the Śāṇḍilya doctrine in volume 14 of chapter 3. This, states Paul Deussen, is with Satapatha Brahmana 10.6.3, perhaps the oldest passage in which the basic premises of the Vedanta philosophy are fully expressed, namely – Atman (Soul, Self inside man) exists, the Brahman is identical with Atman, God is inside man. The Chandogya Upanishad makes a series of statements in section 3.14 that have been frequently cited by later schools of Hinduism and modern studies on Indian philosophies.

The universe is an imperishable treasure chest

The universe, states the Chandogya Upanishad in section 3.15, is a treasure-chest and the refuge for man. This chest is where all wealth and everything rests states verse 3.15.1, and it is imperishable states verse 3.15.3. The best refuge for man is this universe and the Vedas, assert verses 3.15.4 through 3.15.7.

Life is a festival, ethics is one’s donation to it

The section 3.17 of Chandogya Upanishad describes life as a celebration of a Soma-festival, whose dakshina (gifts, payment) is moral conduct and ethical precepts that includes non-violence, truthfulness, non-hypocrisy and charity unto others, as well as simple introspective life. This is one of the earliest statement of the Ahimsa principle as an ethical code of life, that later evolved to become the highest virtue in Hinduism.

Samvargavidya

The fourth chapter of the Chandogya Upanishad opens with the story of king Janasruti and “the man with the cart” named Raikva. The moral of the story is called, Samvarga (Sanskrit: संवर्ग, devouring, gathering, absorbing) Vidya, summarized in volume 4.3 of the text. Air, asserts the Upanishad, is the “devourer unto itself” of divinities because it absorbs fire, sun at sunset, moon when it sets, water when it dries up. In reference to man, Prana (vital breath, life-principle) is the “devourer unto itself” because when one sleeps, Prana absorbs all deities inside man such as eyes, ears and mind.

Satyakama’s education

The Upanishad presents another symbolic conversational story of Satyakama, the son of Jabala, in volumes 4.4 through 4.9. Satyakama’s mother reveals to the boy, in the passages of the Upanishad, that she went about in many places in her youth, and he is of uncertain parentage. The boy, eager for knowledge, goes to the sage Haridrumata Gautama, requesting the sage’s permission to live in his school for Brahmacharya. The teacher asks, “my dear child, what family do you come from?” Satyakama replies that he is of uncertain parentage because his mother does not know who the father is. The sage declares that the boy’s honesty is the mark of a “Brāhmaṇa, true seeker of the knowledge of the Brahman”. The sage accepts him as a student in his school.

The sage sends Satyakama to tend four hundred cows, and come back when they multiply into a thousand. The symbolic legend then presents conversation of Satyakama with a bull, a fire, a swan (Hamsa, हंस) and a diver bird (Madgu, मद्गु), which respectively are symbolism for Vayu, Agni, Āditya and Prāṇa. Satyakama then learns from these creatures that forms of Brahman is in all cardinal directions (north, south, east, west), world-bodies (earth, atmosphere, sky and ocean), sources of light (fire, sun, moon, lightning), and in man (breath, eye, ear and mind). Satyakama returns to his teacher with a thousand cows, and humbly learns the rest of the nature of Brahman.

Penance is unnecessary, Brahman as life bliss joy and love, the story of Upakosala

The volumes 4.10 through 4.15 of Chandogya Upanishad present the third conversational story through a student named Upakosala. The boy Satyakama Jabala described in volumes 4.4 through 4.9 of the text, is declared to be the grown up Guru (teacher) with whom Upakosala has been studying for twelve years in his Brahmacharya. Upakosala has a conversation with sacrificial fires, which inform him that Brahman is life, Brahman is joy and bliss, Brahman is infinity, and the means to Brahman is not through depressing, hard penance.

The Upanishad asserts in verses 4.15.2 and 4.15.3 that the Atman is the “stronghold of love”, the leader of love, and that it assembles and unites all that inspires love. Those who find and realize the Atman, find and realize the Brahman, states the text.

The noblest and the best

The fable, found in many other Principal Upanishads, describes a rivalry between eyes, ears, speech, mind. They all individually claim to be “most excellent, most stable, most successful, most homely”. They ask their father, Prajapati, as who is the noblest and best among them. Prajapati states, “he by whose departure, the body is worst off, is the one”. Each rivaling organ leaves for a year, and the body suffers but is not worse off. Then, Prana (breath, life-principle) prepares to leave, and all of them insist that he stay. Prana, they acknowledge, empowers them all.

The five fires and two paths theory

The volumes 5.3 through 5.10 of Chandogya Upanishad present the Pancagnividya, or the doctrine of “five fires and two paths in after-life”.

The two paths of after-life, states the text, are Devayana – the path of the Devas (gods), and Pitryana – the path of the fathers. The path of the fathers, in after-life, is for those who live a life of rituals, sacrifices, social service and charity – these enter heaven, but stay there in proportion to their merit in their just completed life, then they return to earth to be born as rice, herbs, trees, sesame, beans, animals or human beings depending on their conduct in past life. The path of the Devas, in after-life, is for those who live a life of knowledge or those who enter the forest life of Vanaprastha and pursue knowledge, faith and truthfulness – these do not return, and in their after-life join unto the Brahman.

Who is our Atman (soul, self), what is the Brahman

The Chandogya Upanishad opens volume 5.11 with five adults seeking knowledge. The adults are described as five great householders and great theologians who once came together and held a discussion as to what is our Self, and what is Brahman?

The five householders approach a sage named Uddalaka Aruni, who admits his knowledge is deficient, and suggests that they all go to king Asvapati Kaikeya, who knows about Atman Vaishvanara. When the knowledge seekers arrive, the king pays his due respect to them, gives them gifts, but the five ask him about Vaisvanara Self.

The answer that follows is referred to as the “doctrine of Atman Vaishvanara”, where Vaisvanara literally means “One in the Many”. The common essence of the theory, as found in various ancient Indian texts, is that “the inner fire, the soul, is universal and common in all men, whether they are friends or foe, good or bad”. The Chandogya narrative is notable for stating the idea of unity of the universe, of realization of this unity within man, and that there is unity and oneness in all beings. This idea of universal oneness of all souls, seeing others as oneself, seeing Brahman as Atman and Atman as Brahman, became a foundational premise for Vedanta theologians.

Atman exists, Svetaketu’s education on the key to all knowledge - Tat Tvam Asi

The sixth chapter of the Chandogya Upanishad contains the famous Tat Tvam Asi (“That Thou art”) precept, one regarded by scholars as the sum-total or as one of the most important of all Upanishadic teachings.

The Tat Tvam Asi precept emerges in a tutorial conversation between a father and son, Uddalaka Aruni and 24-year-old Śvetaketu Aruneya respectively, after the father sends his boy to school saying “go to school Śvetaketu, as no one in our family has ever gone to school”, and the son returns after completing 12 years of school studies. The father inquires if Śvetaketu had learnt at school that by which “we perceive what cannot be perceived, we know what cannot be known”? Śvetaketu admits he hasn’t, and asks what that is. His father, through 16 volumes of verses of Chandogya Upanishad, explains.

After setting this foundation of premises, Uddalaka states that heat, food, water, mind, breath and voice are not what defines or leads or is at the root (essence) of every living creature, rather it is the Sat inside. This Eternal Truth is the home, the core, the root of each living being. To say that there is no root, no core is incorrect, because “nothing is without a root cause”, assert verses 6.8.3 through 6.8.5 of the Upanishad. Sat (Existence, Being) is this root, it is the essence (atman), it is at the core of all living beings. It is True, it is Real, it is the Self (atman), and Thou Art That, Śvetaketu.

The “Tat Tvam Asi” phrase is called a Mahavakya.

Oneness in the world, the immanent reality and of Man

The Chandogya Upanishad in volume 6.9, states that all souls are interconnected and one. The inmost essence of all beings is same, the whole world is One Truth, One Reality, One Soul.

From knowledge of the outer world to the knowledge of the inner world

The seventh chapter of the Chandogya Upanishad opens as a conversation between Sanatkumara and Narada. The latter asks, “teach me, Sir, the knowledge of Soul, because I hear that anyone who knows the Soul, is beyond suffering and sorrow”.

In volumes 2 through 26 of the seventh chapter, the Upanishad presents, in the words of Sanatkumara, a hierarchy of progressive meditation, from outer worldly knowledge to inner worldly knowledge, from finite current knowledge to infinite Atman knowledge, as a step-wise journey to Self and infinite bliss.

Narada’s education on progressive meditation

The Chandogya Upanishad in 7th chapter discusses progressive meditation as a means to Self-knowledge. In its exposition of progressive meditation for Self-knowledge, the Chandogya Upanishad starts by referring to the outer worldly knowledges as name.

Deeper than this name, is speech asserts verse 7.2.1, because speech is what communicates all outer worldly knowledge as well as what is right and what is wrong, what is true and what is false, what is good and what is bad, what is pleasant and what is unpleasant.

More elevated than Speech, asserts section 7.3 of the Upanishad, is Manas (मनस्, mind) because Mind holds both Speech and Name (outer worldly knowledges).

Deeper than Mind, asserts section 7.4 of the Upanishad, is Sankalpa (सङ्कल्प, will, conviction) because when a man Wills he applies his Mind, when man applies his Mind he engages Speech and Name.

Higher than Will, states section 7.5 of the Upanishad, is Chitta (चित्त, thought, consciousness) because when a man Thinks he forms his Will.

Greater than Thought, asserts section 7.6 of the Upanishad, is Dhyanam (ध्यान, meditation, reflection) because when a man Meditates he Thinks.

Deeper than Meditation, states section 7.7 of the Upanishad, is Vijñana (विज्ञान, knowledge, understanding) because when a man Understands he continues Meditating.

The text states in section 7.8, that higher than Understanding is Bala (बल, strength, vigor) because a Strong man physically prevails over the men with Understanding.

Higher than Strength, states section 7.9 of the Upanishad, is Anna (अन्नं, food, nourishment) because with proper Food, man becomes Strong.

Greater than Food, states section 7.10 of the Upanishad, is Āpah (आप, water) because without Water one cannot grow Food, famines strike and living creatures perish.

Higher than Water, asserts section 7.11 of the Upanishad, is Tejas (तेजस्, heat, fire) because it is Heat combined with Wind and Atmosphere that bring Rain Water.

Higher than Heat, states section 7.12 of the Upanishad, is Ākāsa (आकाश, space, ether) because it is Space where the sun, moon, stars and Heat reside.

The Upanishad thereafter makes an abrupt transition back to inner world of man. The text states in section 7.13, that deeper than Space is Smara (स्मरो, memory) because without memory universe to man would be as if it didn’t exist.

Deeper than Memory is Asha (आशा, hope), states section 7.14 of the Upanishad, because kindled by Hope the Memory learns and man acts.

Still deeper than Hope is Prāna (प्राणो, vital breath, life-principle), because life-principle is the hub of all that defines a man, and not his body. That is why, asserts the text, people cremate a dead body and respect a living person with the same body.

The one who knows life-principle, states the Upanishad, becomes Ativadin (speaker with inner confidence, speaker of excellence).

From ativadin to self-knowledge

To one who sees, perceives and understands Self (Soul) as Truth, asserts the Upanishad in section 7.26, the life-principle springs from the Self, hope springs from the Self, memory springs from the Self, as does mind, thought, understanding, reflection, conviction, speech, and all outer worldly knowledges.

The nature of knowledge and Atman (soul)

The eight chapter of the Chandogya Upanishad opens by declaring the body one is born with as the “city of Brahman”, and in it is a palace that is special because the entire universe is contained within it. Whatever has been, whatever will be, whatever is, and whatever is not, is all inside that palace asserts the text, and the resident of the palace is the Brahman, as Atman – the Self, the Soul.

The means to knowledge and Atman

The Upanishad in section 8.5 and 8.6 states that the life of student (Brahmacharin, see Brahmacharya) guided by a teacher is the means to knowledge, and the process of meditation and search the means of realizing Atman.

The false and true Atman

The sections 8.7 through 8.12 of the Chandogya Upanishad return to the question, “what is true Self, and what is not”? The opening passage declares Self as the one that is eternally free of grief, suffering and death; it is happy, serene being that desires, feels and thinks what it ought to. Thereafter, the text structures its analysis of true and false Atman as four answers. The three Self, which are false Self, asserts the text are the material body, corporeal self in dreams, individual self in deep sleep, while the fourth is the true Self – the self in beyond deep sleep state that is one with others and the entire universe.

This theory is also known as the “four states of consciousness”, explained as the awake state, dream-filled sleep state, deep sleep state, and beyond deep sleep state.

A paean for the learning, a reverence for the Self

With the knowledge of the Brahman, asserts the text, one goes from darkness to perceiving a spectrum of colors and shakes off evil. This knowledge of Self is immortal, and the one who knows his own self joins the glory of the Brahman-knowers, the glory of Rajas (kings) and the glory of the people. The one who knows his soul, continues to study the Vedas and concentrates on his soul, who is harmless towards all living beings, who thus lives all his life, reaches the Brahma-world and does not return, states Chandogya Upanishad in its closing chapter.


Want to Know More?

If you have queries, please call us to know more.

Call Now


Contact Us

To know more about our services, please contact us.

Your message has been sent. Thank you!